GRT200 Manual 6F2S1924-G2A-0.26

6F2S1924 (Rev. 0.
26)
Instruction manual
Transformer Protection IED
GR200 series (GRT200)
GRT200---
S, G, and T positions
TOSHIBA ENERGY SYSTEMS & SOLUTIONS CORPORATION
Notice: GRT200 manual is issued for ‘03D’, ‘03E’,

and ‘03F’ software codes, which you can identify at
the ’S, G, and T positions’ on the nameplate.
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Safety Precautions
Before using this equipment, please read this chapter carefully.
This chapter describes the safety precautions recommended when using the GR
equipment. Before installing and using the equipment, this chapter must be thoroughly read
and understood.
Explanation of symbols used
Signal words such as DANGER, WARNING, and CAUTION, will be followed by
important safety information that must be carefully reviewed.
DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which will result in

death or serious injury if you do not follow the instructions.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which could result in
WARNING
death or serious injury if you do not follow the instructions.
CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided,
may result in minor injury or moderate injury or property damage.
DANGER
•Current transformer circuit
Never allow the current transformer (CT) secondary circuit connected to this equipment to
be opened while the primary system is live. Opening the CT circuit will produce a
dangerously high voltage.
WARNING
•Exposed terminals
Do not touch the terminals of this equipment while the power is on, as the high voltage
generated is dangerous.
•Residual voltage
Hazardous voltage can be present in the DC circuit just after switching off the DC power
supply. It takes approximately 30 seconds for the voltage to discharge.
•Fiber optic
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT.
ii
6F2S1924 (0.26)
CAUTION
•Earth
The earthing terminal of the equipment must be securely earthed.
CAUTION
•Operating environment
The equipment must only be used within the range of ambient temperature, humidity and
dust detailed in the specification and in an environment free of abnormal vibration.
•Ratings
Before applying AC voltage and current or the DC power supply to the equipment, check
that they conform to the equipment ratings.
•Printed circuit board
Do not attach and remove printed circuit boards when the DC power to the equipment is
on, as this may cause the equipment to malfunction.
•External circuit
When connecting the output contacts of the equipment to an external circuit, carefully
check the supply voltage used in order to prevent the connected circuit from overheating.
•Connection cable
Carefully handle the connection cable without applying excessive force.
•Modification
Do not modify this equipment, as this may cause the equipment to malfunction.
•Short-wire (Short-bar)
Do not remove the short-wire/short-bar(s) connected to the frame earth (FG) at the terminal
block on the rear of cases.
•Electric wire between #35 - #37 on the power-supply terminal block
Make sure the wire is connected.
(Exception: This wire needs to be detached for performing the dielectric voltage test.)
iii
6F2S1924 (0.26)
•Disposal
This equipment contains neither expendable supplies nor parts that can be recycled. When
disposing of this equipment, the customer must contact an operator responsible for
industrial waste disposal, and request that the operator dispose of this equipment in
accordance with the local waste disposal regulations; otherwise the person who disposes
of this equipment may be punished under local regulations. When disposing of this
equipment is practiced by the customer acting on their own behalf, it must be done so in a
safe manner according to local regulations. For further information in terms of the disposal,
the customer shall contact to a local dealer and sales staff at Toshiba Energy Systems &
Solutions Corporation (Toshiba ESS, Japan).
This equipment contains neither expendable supplies nor recyclables.
•Plastics material
This equipment contains the following plastics material.
- ABS, Polycarbonate, Acrylic resins, Nylon 66, and others.
Equipment installation and operation

•Equipment installation
Never remove cables at frame ground terminals (FGs) while the AC/DC power supplies.
•Equipment operation
The user shall have responsibilities to use and install the equipment where the
specifications are designated by the manufacture. Never operate the equipment on the
condition where the manufacture cannot intend. Otherwise, the safety function furnished
into the equipment may not be operated properly.
•Symbols
Symbol Description
Protective conductor terminal
Caution, risk of electric shock
iv
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Liability, copyright and others

•Disclaimer of liability
We have checked the description of this manual against the hardware and software
described, but we cannot guarantee that all deviations have been eliminated from the
description completely; hence, no liability can be accepted for any errors or omissions
contained in the information given. We review the information in this manual regularly
and there will be some corrections in subsequent editions. We reserve the right to make
technical improvements without notice.
•Copyright
© Toshiba Energy Systems & Solutions Corporation 2020.
All rights reserved.
•Registered Trademarks
Product/Equipment names (mentioned herein) may be trademarks of their respective
companies.
v
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Contents
1 Introduction ......................................................................................................................................... 1
Protection functions ...................................................................................................................... 3
Monitoring and metering functions ............................................................................................. 6
Hardware overview....................................................................................................................... 7
Symbols used in logical diagrams ................................................................................................ 8
Abbreviation................................................................................................................................ 12
Function Block (FB), Function ID, Signal number ................................................................... 13
2 Transformer replica functions ........................................................................................................... 15
Transformer replica function (REPLICA).................................................................................. 16
2.1.1 System configuration applicable ......................................................................................... 17
2.1.2 Protection of transformer classified in ‘Model1’ to ‘Model5’ .............................................. 18
2.1.3 CTs connection in three-phase ............................................................................................ 18
2.1.4 CT connection in natural..................................................................................................... 20
2.1.5 Setting VCT secondary rating............................................................................................. 21
2.1.6 VT connection ...................................................................................................................... 22
2.1.7 Setting .................................................................................................................................. 24
2.1.8 Signal (DataID) ................................................................................................................... 26
Front-end processing function (FEP/FEP_COMMON) ............................................................. 27
3 Relay application ............................................................................................................................... 30
Current differential protection (DIF) ........................................................................................ 31
3.1.1 Relay characteristics ........................................................................................................... 33
3.1.2 CT ratio compensation ........................................................................................................ 37
3.1.3 Compensation of CT secondary currents ............................................................................ 40
3.1.4 Enhanced CT saturation countermeasure function (CTS) ................................................ 44
3.1.5 Decision for fault phases ..................................................................................................... 46
3.1.6 Differential current monitoring function (DIF-SV) ........................................................... 47
3.1.7 Settings and setting guidance ............................................................................................. 48
3.1.8 DIF scheme logic.................................................................................................................. 58
3.1.9 Setting .................................................................................................................................. 61
3.1.10 Signal (Data ID) .................................................................................................................. 62
Restricted earth fault protection (REF) ..................................................................................... 64
3.2.1 Element characteristics....................................................................................................... 65
3.2.2 Setting means ...................................................................................................................... 70
3.2.3 Scheme logic ........................................................................................................................ 72
3.2.4 Setting .................................................................................................................................. 74
3.2.5 Signal (Data ID) .................................................................................................................. 76
Overcurrent protection (OC) ...................................................................................................... 78
3.3.1 Non-directional and directional OC .................................................................................... 79
vi
6F2S1924 (0.26)
3.3.2 Inverse definite mean time and definite time characteristic ............................................ 82
3.3.3 Threshold value for activation ............................................................................................ 88
3.3.4 Reset Ratio ........................................................................................................................... 88
3.3.5 Miscellaneous functions ...................................................................................................... 88
3.3.6 Scheme logic ........................................................................................................................ 90
3.3.7 Setting .................................................................................................................................. 91
3.3.8 Signal (Data ID) .................................................................................................................. 99
Earth fault protection (EF) ...................................................................................................... 104
3.4.1 Relay polarity .................................................................................................................... 105
3.4.2 Inverse time and definite time delay characteristic ........................................................ 107
3.4.3 Threshold level for operation .............................................................................................113
3.4.4 Reset Ratio ..........................................................................................................................113
3.4.5 Miscellaneous functions .....................................................................................................113
3.4.6 Scheme logic .......................................................................................................................114
3.4.7 Setting .................................................................................................................................116
3.4.8 Signal (Data ID) ................................................................................................................ 123
Earth fault protection with neutral current (EFIn) ................................................................ 127
3.5.2 Threshold level for operation ............................................................................................ 134
3.5.3 Reset Ratio ......................................................................................................................... 134
3.5.4 Miscellaneous functions .................................................................................................... 134
3.5.5 Scheme logic ...................................................................................................................... 136
3.5.6 Setting ................................................................................................................................ 137
3.5.7 Signal (Data ID) ................................................................................................................ 140
Negative sequence overcurrent protection (OCN)................................................................... 142
3.6.1 Non-directional and directional OCN ............................................................................... 143
3.6.3 Threshold value ................................................................................................................. 151
3.6.4 Reset Ratio ......................................................................................................................... 151
3.6.6 Scheme logic ...................................................................................................................... 152
3.6.7 Setting ................................................................................................................................ 154
3.6.8 Signal (Data ID) ................................................................................................................ 158
Broken conductor protection (BCD) ......................................................................................... 160
3.7.1 Equivalent circuit for a one-phase series fault ................................................................ 161
3.7.2 Characteristic and setting ................................................................................................. 162
3.7.4 Scheme logic ...................................................................................................................... 163
3.7.5 Setting ................................................................................................................................ 165
vii
6F2S1924 (0.26)
3.7.6 Signal (Data ID) ................................................................................................................ 166

Thermal overload protection (THM) ........................................................................................ 168
3.8.1 Characteristic .................................................................................................................... 169
3.8.3 Scheme logic ...................................................................................................................... 171
3.8.4 Setting ................................................................................................................................ 173
3.8.5 Signal (Data ID) ................................................................................................................ 174
Inrush current detection function (ICD).................................................................................. 175
3.9.1 Inrush current ................................................................................................................... 176
3.9.2 Characteristic .................................................................................................................... 176
3.9.3 Scheme logic ...................................................................................................................... 177
3.9.4 Setting ................................................................................................................................ 178
3.9.5 Signal (Data ID) ................................................................................................................ 179
Circuit breaker failure protection (CBF) ................................................................................. 180
3.10.1 CBF features ...................................................................................................................... 181
3.10.2 Re-trip command ............................................................................................................... 181
3.10.3 Backup-trip command ....................................................................................................... 181
3.10.4 Scheme logic ...................................................................................................................... 183
3.10.5 Combination of trip commands ......................................................................................... 184
3.10.6 Setting ................................................................................................................................ 185
3.10.7 Signal (Data ID) ................................................................................................................ 187
Undervoltage protection for phase-to-ground (UV)................................................................. 194
3.11.1 Drop-off and pick-up characteristic .................................................................................. 195
3.11.2 Time characteristic ............................................................................................................ 195
3.11.4 Scheme logic ...................................................................................................................... 199
3.11.5 Setting ................................................................................................................................ 201
3.11.6 Signal (Data ID) ................................................................................................................ 203
Undervoltage protection for phase-to-phase (UVS) ................................................................ 206
3.12.1 Drop-off and pick-up characteristic .................................................................................. 207
3.12.4 Scheme logic .......................................................................................................................211
3.12.5 Setting ................................................................................................................................ 213
3.12.6 Signal (Data ID) ................................................................................................................ 216
Overvoltage protection for phase-to-neutral (OV)................................................................... 219
3.13.1 Drop-off and pickup characteristic ................................................................................... 220
3.13.2 Delay for the operation of the OV element ....................................................................... 220
viii
6F2S1924 (0.26)

3.13.5 Scheme logic ...................................................................................................................... 224
3.13.6 Setting list ......................................................................................................................... 225
3.13.7 Signal (Data ID) ................................................................................................................ 227
Overvoltage protection for phase-to-phase (OVS) ................................................................... 230
3.14.2 Delay for the operation of the OVS element .................................................................... 231
3.14.5 Scheme logic ...................................................................................................................... 235
3.14.6 Setting ................................................................................................................................ 237
3.14.7 Signal (Data ID) ................................................................................................................ 239
Earth fault overvoltage protection (OVG) ............................................................................... 242
3.15.2 Delay for the operation of the OVG element .................................................................... 243
3.15.5 Scheme logic ...................................................................................................................... 247
3.15.6 Setting ................................................................................................................................ 248
3.15.7 Signal (Data ID) ................................................................................................................ 250
Frequency protection (FRQ/DFRQ) ......................................................................................... 252
3.16.1 FRQ features and characteristics ..................................................................................... 254
3.16.2 DFRQ features and characteristics .................................................................................. 255
3.16.3 Scheme logic ...................................................................................................................... 256
3.16.4 Setting ................................................................................................................................ 259
3.16.5 Signal (Data ID) ................................................................................................................ 262
Over-excitation protection (VPH)............................................................................................. 266
3.17.1 Characteristics................................................................................................................... 267
3.17.2 Scheme logic ...................................................................................................................... 268
3.17.3 Setting ................................................................................................................................ 271
3.17.4 Signal (Data ID) ................................................................................................................ 272
VT failure supervision (VTF) ................................................................................................... 273
3.18.1 Relay and decision ............................................................................................................. 274
3.18.2 Logic ................................................................................................................................... 274
3.18.3 Usage.................................................................................................................................. 275
3.18.4 Setting ................................................................................................................................ 277
3.18.5 Signal (Data ID) ................................................................................................................ 278
Trip circuit (TRC)...................................................................................................................... 280
3.19.1 Commands for tripping CBs ............................................................................................. 283
ix
6F2S1924 (0.26)
3.19.2 Recording identifiers ......................................................................................................... 284

3.19.3 Scheme logic ...................................................................................................................... 284
3.19.4 Setting ................................................................................................................................ 288
3.19.5 Signal (Data ID) ................................................................................................................ 289
Mechanical trip protection (MECH) ........................................................................................ 291
3.20.1 Scheme logic ...................................................................................................................... 292
3.20.2 Setting ................................................................................................................................ 294
3.20.3 Signal (Data ID) ................................................................................................................ 297
4 General control function .................................................................................................................. 303
Common controls (CMNCTRL) ................................................................................................ 304
4.1.1 Double command blocking (DCB) ..................................................................................... 305
4.1.2 PLC_BIT/UNIT/BOOL signal ........................................................................................... 307
4.1.3 Provision of selected status ............................................................................................... 307
4.1.4 Miscellaneous settings ...................................................................................................... 307
4.1.5 Setting ................................................................................................................................ 309
4.1.6 Signal (DataID) ................................................................................................................. 310
Control hierarchy...................................................................................................................... 313
4.2.1 Control level and control point ......................................................................................... 314
4.2.2 Selector switches and bay operations ............................................................................... 314
4.2.3 Programming of control-right distributions ..................................................................... 314
Local, remote and PLC control................................................................................................. 316
4.3.1 Local control....................................................................................................................... 317
4.3.2 Remote control ................................................................................................................... 317
4.3.3 Programmable logic control (PLC) .................................................................................... 317
4.3.4 Connection and mapping for local/remote control ........................................................... 317
4.3.5 Signal (DataID) ................................................................................................................. 319
LED reset function (LEDR) ...................................................................................................... 320
4.4.1 Select logic for resetting LEDs .......................................................................................... 321
4.4.2 Cancel logic in SBO mode ................................................................................................. 324
4.4.3 Operate logic for SBO/DIR mode ...................................................................................... 325
4.4.4 Settings in LED logics ....................................................................................................... 326
4.4.5 Mapping for IEC61850 communication ............................................................................ 328
4.4.6 Setting ................................................................................................................................ 332
4.4.7 Signal (DataID) ................................................................................................................. 333
Mode control function (MDCTRL) ........................................................................................... 334
4.5.1 Function ............................................................................................................................. 335
4.5.3 Setting ................................................................................................................................ 340
4.5.4 Signal (DataID) ................................................................................................................. 341
x
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Counter function for the general (GCNT)................................................................................ 343

4.6.1 Counter setting for a signal .............................................................................................. 344
4.6.2 Select logics for SBO/DIR modes ...................................................................................... 346
4.6.3 Cancel logic for SBO mode ................................................................................................ 351
4.6.4 Operate logic for SBO/DIR modes..................................................................................... 353
4.6.6 Setting ................................................................................................................................ 361
4.6.7 Signal (DataID) ................................................................................................................. 362
5 Technical Description ...................................................................................................................... 364
IED case and module slot ......................................................................................................... 367
5.1.1 Type using compression terminals ................................................................................... 368
5.1.2 Type using ring terminals ................................................................................................. 375
Transformer module for AC analog input (VCT) ..................................................................... 382
5.2.1 Single VCT in Model3 (VCT49B at VC1).......................................................................... 383
5.2.2 Single VCT in Model4 (VCT44B at VC1).......................................................................... 384
5.2.3 Double VCTs in Model5 (VCT44B &48B at VC1&VC2) .................................................. 385
5.2.4 Constitution of VCT........................................................................................................... 387
5.2.5 Setting VCT ratio .............................................................................................................. 389
5.2.6 Selection of rated current .................................................................................................. 391
Signal processing and communication module (CPU) ............................................................ 393
5.3.1 Signal processing ............................................................................................................... 393
5.3.2 Communication modules ................................................................................................... 394
5.3.3 Location of communication modules ................................................................................. 398
Binary IO module (BI, BO, and BIO) ...................................................................................... 400
5.4.1 Binary input feature.......................................................................................................... 401
5.4.2 Binary input circuit ........................................................................................................... 402
5.4.3 Binary output feature.........................................................................................................411
5.4.4 Binary output circuit ......................................................................................................... 413
5.4.5 Structure of binary IO Module.......................................................................................... 418
5.4.6 Settings of binary input circuits ....................................................................................... 424
5.4.7 Signals (Data ID) of binary input circuits ........................................................................ 426
5.4.8 Settings of binary output circuits ..................................................................................... 429
5.4.9 Signals (Data ID) of binary output circuits ...................................................................... 431
Power supply module (PWS) .................................................................................................... 433
Human Machine Interface (HMI) ............................................................................................ 436
5.6.1 Outlook ............................................................................................................................... 436
5.6.2 LED Indicators .................................................................................................................. 437
5.6.3 Function keys with LEDs .................................................................................................. 442
5.6.4 Monitoring jacks ................................................................................................................ 447
xi
6F2S1924 (0.26)
5.6.5 Operation keys ................................................................................................................... 449

Clock function ........................................................................................................................... 450
5.7.1 Clock setting ...................................................................................................................... 450
5.7.2 Selection of date and time formats ................................................................................... 450
5.7.3 Time Synchronization ....................................................................................................... 451
5.7.4 Setting time zone ............................................................................................................... 455
5.7.5 DST setting (Summer time setting).................................................................................. 456
5.7.6 Setting ................................................................................................................................ 458
Group setting for protection functions ..................................................................................... 459
6 Engineering tool ............................................................................................................................... 462
Overview of GR-TIEMS ............................................................................................................ 463
Connection ................................................................................................................................ 464
Common tools............................................................................................................................ 465
Monitoring tools ........................................................................................................................ 465
Record tools ............................................................................................................................... 466
Generic configuration tools ...................................................................................................... 466
IEC 61850 configuration tool ................................................................................................... 467
7 PLC function .................................................................................................................................... 468
Overview of PLC function ........................................................................................................ 469
PLC data error .......................................................................................................................... 469
PLC driver................................................................................................................................. 470
7.3.1 Monitoring point for PLC driver ....................................................................................... 470
Timer variable settings using PLC drivers ............................................................................. 474
8 Recording function ........................................................................................................................... 479
Fault recorder ........................................................................................................................... 480
8.1.1 Types of recording information ......................................................................................... 480
8.1.2 Screen information ............................................................................................................ 484
8.1.3 Setup for the fault recorder ............................................................................................... 485
8.1.4 Setting ................................................................................................................................ 490
8.1.5 Signal (Data ID) ................................................................................................................ 491
Event recorder .......................................................................................................................... 497
8.2.1 Trigger signals ................................................................................................................... 497
8.2.2 Trigger modes .................................................................................................................... 504
8.2.4 Setup for the event recorder ............................................................................................. 505
8.2.5 Setting ................................................................................................................................ 506
8.2.6 Signal (Data ID) ................................................................................................................ 506
Disturbance recorder ................................................................................................................ 507
8.3.1 Recording time and amount .............................................................................................. 507
xii
6F2S1924 (0.26)
8.3.2 Relays within disturbance recorder .................................................................................. 507

8.3.3 Maximum number for recording disturbance phenomena .............................................. 508
8.3.4 Number of analog quantities and logical signals for disturbance recorder .................... 509
8.3.5 Trigger settings for PLC programming ............................................................................ 514
8.3.7 Setting ................................................................................................................................ 516
8.3.8 Signal (Data ID) ................................................................................................................ 517
Transferred information during fault ...................................................................................... 518
8.4.1 Transferred metering values ............................................................................................. 518
8.4.2 Transferred information about tripped phase and mode ................................................. 521
8.4.3 Transferred state information........................................................................................... 521
8.4.4 Transferring record value and information ...................................................................... 522
9 Monitoring function ......................................................................................................................... 551
Outline ...................................................................................................................................... 552
Metering data (Metering group) .............................................................................................. 553
9.2.1 Metering information on the screen ................................................................................. 556
9.2.2 Setting for measurements ................................................................................................. 557
9.2.3 Diminishing a very small value to display zero ............................................................... 557
9.2.4 Flow settings for active/reactive/apparent powers........................................................... 558
9.2.5 Polarity setting for power factor values ........................................................................... 559
9.2.6 Setting for the report (Dead band feature) ....................................................................... 560
Statistics data (Power value group) ......................................................................................... 563
9.3.1 Power information on the screen ...................................................................................... 563
9.3.2 Setting for power values.................................................................................................... 563
9.3.3 Regulation of power values ............................................................................................... 563
Statistics data (Demand value group) ..................................................................................... 564
9.4.1 Demand information on the screen .................................................................................. 567
9.4.2 Max/Min/Averaged information about the demand feature ............................................ 567
9.4.3 Demand cycle ..................................................................................................................... 567
9.4.4 Resetting data in demand features................................................................................... 568
Statistics data (Peak-demand value group) ............................................................................ 569
9.5.1 Max/Min/Averaged information about the peak-demand feature ................................... 569
9.5.2 Resetting data of peak-demand features .......................................................................... 569
Statistics data (Counter group)................................................................................................ 570
9.6.1 Report setting for GCNT (Dead band feature) ................................................................. 570
Statistics data (Accumulated time).......................................................................................... 571
Monitoring for miscellaneous functions................................................................................... 572
Setting ....................................................................................................................................... 573
Signal (Data ID) ........................................................................................................................ 574
xiii
6F2S1924 (0.26)
10 Automatic supervision ................................................................................................................. 588

Outline of automatic supervision ............................................................................................. 589
Generic supervision tasks ........................................................................................................ 592
10.2.1 Mismatch between ROM and RAM data (ROM/RAM error) ........................................... 594
10.2.2 Supervision of check-sum error (SUM error) ................................................................... 595
10.2.3 Supervision of RAM (RAM error) ..................................................................................... 596
10.2.4 Supervision of ECC on memory (ECC error) .................................................................... 597
10.2.5 Supervision of MRAM (MRAM) ........................................................................................ 598
10.2.6 Supervision of FPGA (FPGA error) ................................................................................... 599
10.2.7 Supervision of program codes (CPU error) ....................................................................... 600
10.2.8 Supervision of task operation (RUN error) ...................................................................... 601
10.2.9 Detecting non-maskable interrupt (NMI error) ............................................................... 602
10.2.10 Supervision of sampling period (SMP error) ................................................................ 603
10.2.11 Supervision of setting data (Setting error) ................................................................... 604
10.2.12 Supervision of real-time clock (RTC error) ................................................................... 605
10.2.13 Supervision of analog input data on VCTs (AI ACC error) .......................................... 606
10.2.14 Abnormal currents flowing in CTs (CT error) .............................................................. 607
10.2.15 Supervision of voltage in negative-sequence (V2/V2-1/V2-2 error) ............................. 608
10.2.16 Supervision of voltages in zero-sequence (VZ, VZ-1, VZ-2 error) ................................ 609
10.2.17 Supervision of binary IO module#1 (BIO#1 error) ....................................................... 610
10.2.18 Supervision of binary IO module#2 (BIO#2 error) ........................................................611
10.2.25 Supervision of human machine interface (HMI error) ................................................. 618
10.2.26 Supervision of power supply module (Power error)...................................................... 619
10.2.27 Supervision of data in PLC function (PLC data error)................................................. 620
10.2.28 Voltage transformer failure (VT fail) ............................................................................ 622
10.2.29 Supervision of LAN status (LAN error) ........................................................................ 623
10.2.30 Supervision of response for pinging (Ping error) .......................................................... 624
10.2.31 Supervision of link redundant entity (LRE error) ........................................................ 625
10.2.32 Supervision of communication setting (Commslv error) .............................................. 626
10.2.33 Supervision of GOOSE publishing (LAN(GOOSE)error) ............................................. 628
10.2.34 Error detection of differential current in DIF (Id)........................................................ 629
10.2.35 Setting ............................................................................................................................ 630
10.2.36 Signal (Data ID) ............................................................................................................. 635
xiv
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Trip circuit supervision task .................................................................................................... 641

10.3.1 Detecting erroneous operation .......................................................................................... 642
10.3.2 Trip circuit error (TC error) .............................................................................................. 645
10.3.3 Setting ................................................................................................................................ 646
10.3.4 Signal (Data ID) ................................................................................................................ 647
11 Communication protocol .............................................................................................................. 649
Interface setting and protocol selection ................................................................................... 650
LAN operation .......................................................................................................................... 651
11.2.1 LAN address (IP address) ................................................................................................. 651
11.2.2 Redundant LAN (Hot-standby) ......................................................................................... 652
11.2.3 Redundant LAN (PRP/HSR operation) ............................................................................ 659
11.2.4 Redundant LAN (RSTP operation) ................................................................................... 663
11.2.5 Settings .............................................................................................................................. 665
11.2.6 Signals (DataID) ................................................................................................................ 667
IEC 61850 communication ....................................................................................................... 669
11.3.1 About protocol .................................................................................................................... 671
11.3.2 Communication service ..................................................................................................... 674
11.3.3 How to manage engineering work .................................................................................... 677
11.3.4 Settings for 61850 communications .................................................................................. 696
11.3.5 Selection of IEC61850 protocol among IED embedded protocols .................................... 698
11.3.6 How to supervise in 61850 communication ...................................................................... 698
11.3.7 Quality signal of IEC 61850 communication.................................................................... 699
11.3.8 Goose monitoring status in 61850 communication .......................................................... 701
11.3.9 Feature of IEC61850 Edition1 option ............................................................................... 702
11.3.10 Setting ............................................................................................................................ 703
11.3.11 Signal (Data ID) ............................................................................................................. 704
IEC 60870-5-103 communication ............................................................................................. 720
11.4.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 721
11.4.2 Requirements in the Master station ................................................................................. 723
11.4.3 Interoperability.................................................................................................................. 724
11.4.4 Communication interface in the IEC 60870-5-103 standard........................................... 725
11.4.5 Editing data of the configuration ...................................................................................... 726
11.4.6 Protocol selection ............................................................................................................... 745
11.4.7 Tips for settings ................................................................................................................. 746
11.4.8 Setting ................................................................................................................................ 747
11.4.9 Signal (Data ID) ................................................................................................................ 748
USB communication ................................................................................................................. 749
RS485 communication .............................................................................................................. 750
12 User interface ............................................................................................................................... 751
xv
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Outline ...................................................................................................................................... 752

HMI operation .......................................................................................................................... 755
Record sub-menu ...................................................................................................................... 758
Monitoring sub-menu ............................................................................................................... 765
Setting sub-menu...................................................................................................................... 773
I/O setting sub-menu ................................................................................................................ 786
Time sub-menu ......................................................................................................................... 793
Test sub-menu ........................................................................................................................... 801
Information sub-menu .............................................................................................................. 807
Security setting sub-menu .................................................................................................... 808
13 Installation and setting ............................................................................................................... 809
Caution for storage ................................................................................................................... 810
Handling precautions ............................................................................................................... 810
Unpack and inspection of hardware and software ...................................................................811
PWS alarm threshold setting ................................................................................................... 816
14 Commissioning and maintenance ............................................................................................... 817
Scope of required test ............................................................................................................... 818
Cautions .................................................................................................................................... 819
Preparations ............................................................................................................................. 819
Test operations .......................................................................................................................... 821
14.4.1 Test for communication ..................................................................................................... 821
14.4.2 Test for relay application................................................................................................... 822
14.4.3 Test for BI and BO circuits................................................................................................ 822
14.4.4 Test for mode change (MDCTRL) ..................................................................................... 822
14.4.5 Signal monitor ................................................................................................................... 823
14.4.6 LED light test .................................................................................................................... 823
Setting ....................................................................................................................................... 824
Signal ........................................................................................................................................ 825
Appendix 1 Signal list for common function ....................................................................................... 826
Appendix 2 Case outline ....................................................................................................................... 834
Appendix 3 Typical external connection .............................................................................................. 845
Appendix 4 IEC61850 MICS, PICS, PIXIT, and TICS ........................................................................ 854
Appendix 5 Ordering ............................................................................................................................. 910
Appendix 6 Technical data .................................................................................................................... 935
Appendix 7 CT requirement ................................................................................................................. 949
Appendix 8 Notes for the dielectric voltage test .................................................................................. 951
xvi
6F2S1924 (0.26)
1 Introduction
Contents Page
Abbreviation 12 Model numbers and Configuration 3
Function identifies and signals (FB) 13 Monitoring and Metering functions 6
Protection functions 3
Hardware overview 7
Symbols used in logical diagrams 8
GRT200 (Soft 03D, 03E, and 03F)
1
6F2S1924 (0.26)
The GRT200 (transformer protection relay) is based on the Toshiba GR-200 series IED
platform. It implements high-speed protection for both a transformer and a reactor, and has
high dependability and security for diverse faults such as single-phase faults, multi-phase
faults, overload and over-excitation. It is suitable to use as a main protection and backup
protection of the following transformers and reactors.
 Two-winding or three-winding power transformers
 Auto-transformers
 Generator-transformer unit
 Shunt reactor
Table 1.1-1 shows available models in the GRT200 series; the model is depends on the
transformer module for AC analog input (VCT) selected with Ordering codes.
Table 1.1-1 Modes and configuraions in GRT200 series relay
Model Ordering information VCT analog inputs Configuration
Note
numbers (Hardware selection) (Symbols in Table 1.1-1) (example)
Model 1 2×CTs in three-phase (2CT) The Model1 is

(N/A)
(N/A) 1×VT in single-phase (1×1VT) not available
3×CTs in three-phase (3CT)
Model 2 1×VT in single-phase(1×1VT) The Model2 is

(N/A)
(N/A) with not available.
3×CTs in zero-sequence-phase
GRT200-3X- 1×VT in three-phase (1×3VT)

Model 3
-XXX-XX-XX-XX-XXX with
2×CTs in zero-sequence-phase
I1 I3
GRT200-4X- 4×CTs in three-phase (4CT) V
Model 4
-XXX-XX-XX-XX-XXX 1×VT in single-phase (1×1VT) I2 I4
2×VTs in three-phase
GRT200-5X-
Model 5 (2×3VT)
-XXX-XX-XX-XX-XXX
with
3×CTs in zero-sequence phase
- 2 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
The GRT200 relay can have mix of different current rating CTs, 1A/5A using appropriate
settings; it works even under the magnetizing inrush and over excitation current condition.
The following additional functions are provided with relay applications.
 Monitoring function
 Recording function
 Automatic supervision
Protection functions
The GRT200 provides the following protection relay functions listed in the tables below.
†Note:Both of ‘Model1’ and ‘Model2’ IEDs are not available (N/A) in the GRT200 series.
Terms ‘‘presents that functions are applicable, whereas term ‘–‘presents that a
function is not applicable.
Table 1.1-1 Relay Functions in GRT200 series

GRT200 series IED
Model1† Model2† Model3 Model4 Model5

Relay element Function name
2CT/ 3CT/ 3CT/ 4CT/ 5CT/
1x 1VT 1x 1VT 1x 3VT 1x 1VT 2x 3VT
Current differential protection

DIF-S1
DIF-S1: Protection for all
internal transformer faults
DIF-S2
DIF-S2: Protection for all
internal transformer faults, in
DIF N/A N/A √ √ √
particular heavy internal faults
DIF-2f requiring high-speed
operations
DIF-2f/5f: Harmonic frequency

DIF-5f protection elements for second
(2F) and fifth (5F)
REF-1 Restricted earth fault

REF REF-2 N/A N/A √ – √ protection; Protection for an
REF-3 earth fault at star-winding side
OC1
OC2
OC3
OC4
OC N/A N/A √ √ √ Overcurrent protection
OC5
OC6
OC7
OC8
EF1
EF2
EF3
EF4
EF N/A N/A √ √ √ Earth fault protection
EF5
EF6
EF7
EF8
- 3 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
GRT200 series IED

EFIn1
EFIn2 Earth fault protection with
EFIn N/A N/A √ – √
EFIn3 neutral current
EFIn4
OCN1
OCN2
Negative sequence
OCN OCN3 N/A N/A √ √ √
overcurrent protection
OCN4
THM-T
BCD-P
BCD BCD-S N/A N/A √ √ √ Broken conductor protection
BCD-T
THM-T
THM N/A N/A √ √ √ Thermal overload protection
THM-A
OCCBF1 √ √ √
OCCBF2 √ √ √
Circuit breaker failure
CBF OCCBF3 N/A N/A √ √ √
protection
OCCBF4 – √ √
OCCBF5 – – √
OV1
OV2 Overvoltage protection for
OV N/A N/A √ – √
OV3 phase-to-neutral
OV4
OVG1
OVG2 Earth fault overvoltage
OVG N/A N/A √ √ √
OVG3 protection
OVG4
OVS1-AB/BC/CA
OVS2-AB/BC/CA Overvoltage protection for
OVS N/A N/A √ – √
OVS3-AB/BC/CA phase-to-phase
OVS4-AB/BC/CA
UV1
UV2 Undervoltage protection for
UV N/A N/A √ – √
UV3 phase-to-phase
UV4
UVS1-AB/BC/CA
UVS2-AB/BC/CA Undervoltage protection for
UVS N/A N/A √ – √
UVS3-AB/BC/CA phase-earth
UVS4-AB/BC/CA
FRQ1, DFRQ1
FRQ2, DFRQ2
FRQ FRQ3, DFRQ3
N/A N/A √ √ √ Frequency protection
DFRQ FRQ4, DFRQ4
FRQ5, DFRQ5
FRQ6, DFRQ6
VPH-T
VPH VPH-H N/A N/A √ √ √ Over-excitation protection
VPH-A
ICD-P-A/B/C/OR
Inrush current detection
ICD ICD-S-A/B/C/OR N/A N/A √ √ √
function
ICD-T-A/B/C/OR
UVVTF-P-A/B/C
OVGVTF-P √ √
VTF N/A N/A – VT failure detection
EFVTF-P
- 4 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
GRT200 series IED

UVVTF-S-A/B/C
OVGVTF-S N/A N/A √ – √
EFVTF-S
UVVTF-T-A/B/C
OVGVTF-T N/A N/A √ – √
EFVTF-T
The DIF and the REF are the main protection functions of transformer. The DIF function
operates with DIF-S1 element, 2F and 5F elements, and DIF-S2(HOC) element. Figure 1.1-1
shows their operation characteristics.
Operate time (t)
REF (Ie)
DIF-S1 with 2f-block
DIF-S2
0 Differential current (Id)

Large
Figure 1.1-1 Time characteristics in DIF-S1, S2, and REF elements

1Note: The DIF-S1 is blocked with the 2F or 5F elements.
2Note: The DIF-S2 is not blocked with the 2F or 5F elements.
- 5 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Monitoring and metering functions

Using the HMI, the monitoring and metering functions can display status, settings, data and
others. The user can also see information using “GR-series Toshiba IED Engineering and
Monitoring Software (GR-TIEMS)” both at local and remote end.
Monitoring function:
This function supervises status of protection functions, and displays power system quantities.
It also shows failure information in the CT and VT.
Fault record function:

Such function records the state of a fault when the trip command is issued. It also memorizes
the fault data. The user can see, with the IED screen, these data with additional information:
date & time, fault phase, tripping phase, tripping mode, fault location, operating mode and
power system quantities.
Event record function:

The function provides recording feature that memorizes any event occurred in the IED.
Disturbance record function:

Disturbance record is triggered by fault detection. The user can see the waveform recorded by
this function using GR-TIEMS.
- 6 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Hardware overview
The IED has human machine interface (HMI), which is made of LCD screen, indication lights,
operation and function keys, monitoring jacks, and a USB connector. Voltage, current input
terminals, and binary input and output circuits are provided on the rear..
HMI features:
- Menu-driven human interfaces for setting or viewing of stored data.
- LCD screen (7×21 characters), LED display, 7 function keys and operation keys
Communication features:
- USB for GR-TIEMS
Module circuits and others:

- Binary input circuits and binary output circuits with configurable features
- AC inputs
- Programmable logic for I/O configuration, alarms, indications, recording and others
- Automatic supervision
- 7 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Symbols used in logical diagrams

Symbols used in the scheme logic and their meanings are as follows:
(i) Relay element, signal-monitoring point, PLC connection point, and

Mapping point
1. Marked with : Relay elements
2. Marked with : Signal-monitoring point designated by Element ID number
Note that the symbol can be connected with what follows:

A binary output (BO) circuit
A LED circuit
Like in the BO and LED circuits, it can also be connected or mapped to what follows:
A PLC connection point
The IEC 61850 logical node (LN) to send a signal for the SAS
An alternative point (discussed in Chapter PLC function) is provided in place of the

signal-monitoring point for starting the user-programmed logic.
3. Marked with : PLC connection points designated by Element ID and its name
Element ID (or Signal No.) Signal name corresponding to Element or Signal No.(Data ID)
Note that the symbol can be used for the reception point coming from the output of PLC
logics.
4. Marked with : Mapping points designated by Signal No. (Data ID) and its name
Signal number (Data ID) Signal name corresponding to Signal No. (Data ID)
1Note that the symbol can be used as a signal reception-point coming from the SAS. The
reception point is mapped to the LN of the IEC61850.
- 8 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(ii) Timer symbol

 Delay timer
Delayed pick-up timer
t 0 Fixed timer (XXX: Set time)
XXX
t 0
Variable timer (XXX ─ YYY: Setting range)
XXX ─ YYY
Delayed drop-off timer
0 t Fixed timer (XXX: Set time)
XXX
0 t
Variable timer (XXX ─ YYY: Setting range)
XXX ─YYY
 One-shot timer
A Output A
XXX - YYY Output

XXX - YYY: Setting range
- 9 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(iii) Logic symbol

 AND gate
A B Output
A
1 1 1
& Output
B 1 0 0
0 1 0
0 0 0
 OR gate
A B Output
A
1 1 1
≥1 Output
B 1 0 1
0 1 1
0 0 0
 XOR gate
A B Output
A
1 1 0
=1 Output
B 1 0 1
0 1 1
0 0 0
 Signal inversion
A Output
0 1
A 1 Output
1 0
- 10 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(iv) Flip-flop symbol

A B Output
A S 0 0 No change
Output 1 0 1
B R 0 1 0
1 1 0
(v) Scheme switch

A Switch Output
1 On 1
A Output
On 1 Off 0
Switch Output
+ Output
On On 1
Off 0
- 11 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Abbreviation
Abbreviation Description
ADC Analog to digital converter
BCU Bay Control Unit
BCPU Bay Control and Protection Unit
BI Binary Input module or circuit
BO Binary Output module or circuit
BIO Binary Input and Output module or circuit
CB Circuit Breaker
CPU Signal processing and communication module
CT Current Transformer
DS Disconnecting Switch
EF Earth Fault
ES Earthing Switch
EWS Engineering Workstation in the substation
GPS Global Positioning System
GR-TIEMS GR-series Toshiba IED Engineering and Monitoring Software
GUI Graphical User Interface
HMI Human Machine Interface
IED Intelligent Electronic Device
IDMT Inverse Definite Minimum Time
LCD Liquid Crystal Display for IED screen (standard LCD screen)
LCP Local Panel for Controlling
LED Light Emitting Diode
MIMIC Touchscreen operation configured by user’s program to operate control application
NA Not Applicable
NGR Neutral Grounding Resistance
N/C Normally Closed
N/O Normally Open
OWS Operator Workstation in the substation
PC Personal Computer for maintenance
PCB Printed circuit board
PLC Programmable Logic Controller
RCC Remote Control Centre
SAS Substation Automation System
SC Station Computer
SCMS Substation Control and Monitoring System
TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/ Internet Protocol
- 12 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Abbreviation Description
UTC Coordinated Universal Time
SyncSrc Synchronization Source
VT Voltage Transformer
VCT Transformer module including VTs and CTs
43 Selector device or selector switch
Function Block (FB), Function ID, Signal number

(i) Signal symbols
Function Block (FB) is the software module and GR-series IED implements FBs for protections,
controls and communications. The function ID is unique ID described by six digits in
hexadecimal; each function ID represents each FB. Signal number (or Data ID) is the logical
address of the input and output data of the FB. The signal number (Data ID) consists of a
function ID and an element ID. The function ID is common within the FB; accordingly the
element ID will be shown to make description simple. The element ID is 10 hexadecimal and
it has the element ID name for easy to read. Figure 1.6-1 exemplifies the symbols, the function
ID, and the element ID. The table below shows the structure of the signal.
Function ID Element ID Note
Format (Hex) FFFFFF XXXXXXXXXX Content

Signal example 45A001 8000101B65 OC1 relay operated.
Element ID
FB (Function ID=45A001)
8000101B62 8000101B65
A & ≥1 OC1_OPT
8100101B63
OC1 B &
8200101B64
C
&
Element ID Signal name
&
8800010EBB0 OC1_BLOCK 1
3. PLC connection point† 1. Relay element 2. Signal monitoring point

Figure 1.6-1 Example of symbols and others
†Note that a PLC connection point can be shown with the function ID (45A001) plus
element ID (8800010EBB0) expressed in 16 delights in hexadecimal, in some
scheme logics. The ‘PLC connection point’ could be found to search the letter ‘E’ of
element ID (i.e., ‘8800010EBB0’).
- 13 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(ii) Data length (bit length of Data ID)

The user can read data length of a Data ID by seeing the seventh and eighth number of the
Data ID. Table 1.6-1 shows examples of 1~32-bits data.
Table 1.6-1 How to identify a Data length by seeing Element ID
Data Example Example
Identifier texts Note
length Function ID Element ID
1-bit 400001 8000001B6F 8 (the beginning # of Element ID)
8-bits 400001 2000001B6F 20 (First and second # of Element ID)
32-bits 400001 4200001B6F 42 (First and second # of Element ID) Float 32
64-bits 400001 4300001B6F 43 (First and second # of Element ID) Float 64
- 14 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
2 Transformer replica functions

Contents Pages Pages
Replica function 16
Front-end processing 27
- 15 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Transformer replica function (REPLICA)

The replica function has parameters to adapt a transformer for the operation in various types
of power system configuration. It has settings for connections between a target transformer
and CTs/VTs on the VCT. Transformer capacity, winding configuration, and types of analog
input are also set in the common settings of the replica function. The replica function operates
to distribute the electrical data, which are commonly required in relay, recording, monitoring,
and supervision applications.
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Note: The implementation of particular features is dependent upon the selection of
hardware and the configuration of functions. Several IED models do not support certain
features. To determine whether a particular feature has been implemented within an IED,
identify the IED ordering number; check the order number for the “7” and “G&T” positions
whilst referring to the comparison table below. For more information, see Appendix: Ordering.
Table 2.1-1 Comparative table in respective ordering numbers
Ordering No. at “7(hardware)” and “G&T(software)”
Application features 1 (Model1) 2 (Model2) 3 (Model3) 4 (Model4) 5 (Model5)
3D – – 3E – – 3F – –
– Main features  – –  – –  – –
: Applicable NA: Not applicable –: Not available TBD: To be determined
- 16 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
2.1.1 System configuration applicable

The below figures show examples of applicable system configurations connected with the two,
three, four, and five terminals in the transformer.
(A) P S (F) S
(D)
P
T
T
P S
(B) T
(G)
P S (E)
S
P S P
S
(C)
P
Two terminals Three terminals
Figure 2.1-1 Examples of system configurations with two and three terminals
(H) (J) (L)

S P S S
P P
(K)
(M)
(I) T S T
P
P S P S
Figure 2.1-2 Examples of system configurations with four and five windings
(i) Transformer rated capacity

The maximum three phase rated capacity [Tr-Capacity] should be selected form the rated
capacities of each transformer Primary/Secondary/Tertiary winding side.
Note: The compensation coefficients about CT ratio are calculated using the settings of
the DIF function (see Chapter Relay application: Current differential protection).
- 17 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(ii) Transformer rated voltage

The rated phase-to-phase voltage of the transformer Primary/Secondary/Tertiary winding [Tr-
Vn_P], [Tr-Vn_S] and [Tr-Vn_T] should be selected respectively.
Note: The compensation coefficients about CT ratio are calculated using with the
settings of the DIF function.
2.1.2 Protection of transformer classified in ‘Model1’ to ‘Model5’

The IEC60076-1(Power transformers-Part: General) standardizes the classifications by the use
of terms ‘Model1’ to ‘Model5’1:
Model1 (for two winding transformer),
[VecGroupP-W] = Y or D
[VecGroupS-W] = Non or y or d
[VecGroupS-C] = either 0 to 11
Model22, Model3, Model4 and Model5 (For three winding transformer)

[VecGroupP-W] = Y or D: Primary winding vector group, default Y
[VecGroupS-W] = Non or y or d：Secondary winding vector group, default y
[VecGroupS-C] = either 0 to 11: Phase angle difference (clock position3) between the
Primary - Secondary winding, default 0
[VecGroupT-W] = Non or y or d：Tertiary winding vector group, default y
[VecGroupT-C] = either 0 to 11 : Phase angle difference (clock position3) between the
Primary – Tertiary windings, default 0
1Note: The ‘Model1’ to ‘Model5’ depends on the choice of VCTs, which are categorized by
the ordering code at position ‘7’, which is illustrated in Appendix: Ordering.
2Note: ‘Model1’ & ‘Model2’ are not available in GRT200 series.
3Note: To specify phase angle difference (clock position), see Chapter Relay application:
Current differential protection (DIF): Setting phase matching. Use the settings
[VecGroupP/S/T-C].
2.1.3 CTs connection in three-phase

(i) Connections with target windings via VCT
Figure 2.1-3 illustrates the examples of CT connections with the target winding. The VCT
terminals named ‘1CT’ to ‘5CT’ should be connected using settings [Conn-1CT] and others; the
names are defined in as follows:
 1CT: First CTs in three-phase on the VCT
 2CT: Second CTs in three-phase on the VCT
 3CT: Third CTs in three-phase on the VCT
 4CT: Forth CTs in three-phase on the VCT
- 18 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
 5CT: Fifth CTs in three-phase on the VCT

VCT
1CT
T 2CT [Conn-1CT] = Primary

[Conn-2CT] = Secondary
3CT [Conn-3CT] = Secondary
P S [Conn-5CT] = No Use
4CT
5CT
VCT
1CT
P S 2CT [Conn-1CT] = Primary

[Conn-3CT] = Tertiary
3CT
[Conn-4CT] = Primary
T [Conn-5CT] = Secondary
4CT
5CT
Figure 2.1-3 Setting example for CT connection in three-phase
‘Zero ampere control’ feature is provided for the settings [Conn-1CT] to [Conn-5CT]; in
the following example, the VCT currents inputs on the 5CT are set zero (0) unconditionally so
as they are not used in the relay calculation.
VCT
1CT

4CT
5CT
Figure 2.1-4 Example of ‘Zero ampere control’ being applied at 5CT

Note: For more information about the VCT, see Chapter Technical description:
Transformer module for AC analog input.
- 19 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(ii) Types of current input

The user can select the type for entering currents into the VCT using setting [InType-CT];
either three-phase currents (3P) or two-phase currents (2P) can be chosen. Note that the
currents in phase-A and phase-C are allowed to connect with the VCT when 2P is selected; the
current in phase-B is not permitted for the connection. Additionally, when 2P is set, the vector
group for the winding transformer are only possible in Yy0, Dd0, Yy6, Dd6 in terms of phase
angle compensation.
(iii) CT polarity inversion

The inversion function of CT polarity is provided in 1CT and others using settings [Pol-1CT]
to [Pol-5CT]; therefore, the user need not change the wiring connected with the windings
physically. Positive should be set for the [Pol-1CT] when the currents are taken at 1CT in
positive direction. On the other hand, Negative should be set when the currents are taken in
negative direction.
VCT
1CT
I1 I4
[Pol-1CT] = Positive
2CT
P
3CT [Pol-3CT] = Negative
I3
[Pol-4CT] = Negative
S T 4CT
5CT
I2 I5
Figure 2.1-5 Example for setting CT polarity
2.1.4 CT connection in natural

(i) Connection with Target system
For the connection with neutral CTs, either Use or No use should be set for the [Conn-1NCT]
to [Conn-3NCT].
VCT
S
[Conn-1NCT] = Use
P T [Conn-2NCT] = Use
1NCT [Conn-3NCT] = Use
2NCT
3NCT
Figure 2.1-6 Example for setting neutral CT connections
- 20 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Figure 2.1-6 illustrates that ‘1NCT’ to ‘3NCT’ are named for the definition:
 1NCT: Neutral CT at the primary side
 2NCT: Neutral CT at the secondary side
 3NCT: Neutral CT at the tertiary side
As for the operation using settings [Conn-1NCT] to [Conn-3NCT], ‘Zero ampere control’
feature is performed. For example in Figure 2.1-8, the VCT measures entering currents at
1NCT and 3NCT are set ‘zero(0)’ so that the measured values are removed in the relay
protection.
VCT
P S [Conn-1NCT] = No Use
[Conn-2NCT] = Use
1NCT [Conn-3NCT] = No Use
2NCT
3NCT
Figure 2.1-7 Example of zero ampere control being applied at 2NCT
(ii) CT polarity inverting

CT polarity in each neutral CT can be inverted using using settings [Pol-1NCT] to [Pol-3NCT].
Positive should be set when a neutral current enters to VCT in positive direction. Negative
should be set when the neutral current enters in negative direction.
VCT
P
[Pol-1NCT] = Positive
[Pol-2NCT] = Negative
S T
[Pol-3NCT] = Positive
1NCT
2NCT
3NCT
Figure 2.1-8 Example for setting neutral CT polarity
2.1.5 Setting VCT secondary rating

The VCT can have the combination between 1A and 5A ratings; the one can change the rating
combination in the procedures described in Chapter Technical description: Transformer
module for AC analog input.
- 21 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
2.1.6 VT connection
(i) Connections with target transformer via VCT
The settings [Conn-1VT] and others are provided for the connection of VT(s) on the target
transformer.
VCT VCT
S
P VT VT VT
1VT
VT
P S
2VT
Model 5 (two sets of three-phase voltage)

Model 1† (one set of representative voltage) [Conn-1VT] = Primary
[Conn-VT] = Secondary [Conn-2VT] = Secondary
Figure 2.1-9 Example for setting VT connections

†Note: Model 1 is not available in GRT200 series.
(ii) Types of applying voltage

Applying voltages are classified as follows:
 Representative voltage model
[InType-VT]=
1PN: Single phase-to-earth voltage
1PP: Single phase-to-phase voltage
1N: Residual voltage
VCT
VT
P S Model 1†/2/4
[InType-VT] = 1PP
1 Ø VT
Figure 2.1-10 Setting example for representative voltage

†Note: Model 1 is not available in GRT200 series.
- 22 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
 Single three-phase voltage model

[InType-1VT]=
3PN: Three phase-to-earth voltage
3PP: Three phase-to-phase voltage
AB C
P S
VCT
Model 3
[InType-1VT] = 1N
1VT
Figure 2.1-11 Setting example for single three-phase voltage
 Double three-phase voltage model

[InType-1VT] and [InType-2VT]=
3PN: Three phase-to-earth voltage
3PP: Three phase-to-phase voltage
AB C VCT
Model 5 (two sets of three-phase voltage)

1VT
AB C [InType-1VT] = 3PN
S P [InType-2VT] = 1PN
3 Ø VT
2VT
1 Ø VT
Figure 2.1-12 Setting example for double three-phase voltage

Note: In three-phase voltage models, in case of 1PN/1PP/1N connection, it is necessary to
connect at phase-A VT, as shown in Figure 2.1-11 and Figure 2.1-12.
- 23 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
2.1.7 Setting
Setting of TP_REPLICA (Function ID: 4F1001)
Default Model
Units
Setting item Range Contents setting
1 2 3 4 5
value
VecGroupP-W Y/D - Transformer vector group (Primary) Y – – X X X
VecGroupS-W Non / y / d - Transformer vector group (Secondary) y – – X X X
Vec
VecGroupS-C 0 - 11 - Transformer vector group (Secondary) 0 – – X X X
VecGroupT-W Non / y / d - Transformer vector group (Tertiary) y – – X X X
VecGroupT-C 0 - 11 - Transformer vector group (Tertiary) 0 – – X X X
MV Largest 3-phase transformer capacity within
Tr-Capacity 0.10 - 5000.00 1732.05 – – X X X
A the rated capacity
Transformer rated phase-to-phase voltage
Tr-Vn-P 0.1 - 1000.0 kV 500.0 – – X X X
Tr- (Primary)
Tr-Vn-S 0.1 - 1000.0 kV 500.0 – – X X X
(Secondary)
Tr-Vn-T 0.1 - 1000.0 kV 500.0 – – X X X
(Tertiary)
Selection of a transformer winding
No use / Primary /
Conn-1CT - connected with the first CTs (1CT) of the Primary – – X X X
Secondary / Tertiary
VCT
No use / Primary /
Conn-2CT - connected with the second CTs (2CT) of the Secondary – – X X X
VCT
No use / Primary /
Conn-3CT - connected with the third CTs (3CT) of the Tertiary – – X X X
VCT
No use / Primary /
Conn-4CT - connected with the forth CTs (4CT) of the No use – – – X X
VCT
No use / Primary /
Conn-5CT - connected with the fifth CTs (5CT) of the No use – – – – X
Con Secondary / Tertiary
VCT
Protection of the neutral point connected
Conn-1NCT No use / Use - Use – – X – X
with the first neutral CT of the VCT
Conn-2NCT No use / Use - Use – – X – X
with the second neutral CT of the VCT
Conn-3NCT No use / Use - Use – – – – X
with the third neutral CT of the VCT
No use / Primary /
Conn-1VT - connected with the first VT (1VT) of the No use – – – – X
VCT
No use / Primary /
Conn-2VT - connected with the first VT (2VT) of the No use – – – – X
VCT
No use / Primary / Selection of a transformer winding
Conn-VT - Primary – – X X
Secondary / Tertiary connected with the VT (VT) of the VCT
InType-CT 2P / 3P - Currents entering to the CTs on VCT 3P – – X X X
InT InType-1VT 1PN / 1PP / 1N / 3PN / 3PP - Applied voltages on the 1st VTs of VCT 3PN – – – – X
InType-2VT 1PN / 1PP / 1N / 3PN / 3PP - Applied voltages on the 2nd VTs of VCT 3PN – – – – X
InType-VT 1PN / 1PP / 1N - Applied voltages on the VT of VCT 1PP – – X X
Pol-1CT Negative / Positive - Polarity selection at 1CT Positive – – X X X
Pol-2CT Negative / Positive - Polarity selection at 2CT Positive – – X X X
Pol Pol-3CT Negative / Positive - Polarity selection at 3CT Positive – – X X X
Pol-4CT Negative / Positive - Polarity selection at 4CT Positive – – – X X
Pol-5CT Negative / Positive - Polarity selection at 5CT Positive – – – – X
Pol-1NCT Negative / Positive - Polarity selection of the neutral at 1CT Positive – – X – X
- 24 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Setting of TP_REPLICA (Function ID: 4F1001)

Default Model
Units
1 2 3 4 5
value
Pol-2NCT Negative / Positive - Polarity selection of the neutral at 2CT Positive – – X – X
Pol-3NCT Negative / Positive - Polarity selection of the neutral at 3CT Positive – – – – X
X: Applicable setting –: Not applicable setting
- 25 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
2.1.8 Signal (DataID)

 Signal monitoring point
TP_REPLICA (Function ID: 4F1001)
Element ID Name Description
8000101B60 CONN_1CT_NU Transformer winding connected to Relay 1CT no use
8100101B61 CONN_1CT_P Transformer primary winding connected to Relay 1CT
8200101B62 CONN_1CT_S Transformer secondary winding connected to Relay 1CT
8300101B63 CONN_1CT_T Transformer tertiary winding connected to Relay 1CT
8200101B6A CONN_3CT_S Transformer secondary winding connected to Relay 3CT
8300101B6B CONN_3CT_T Transformer tertiary winding connected to Relay 3CT
8000101B6C CONN_4CT_NU Transformer winding connected to Relay 4CT no use
8100101B6D CONN_4CT_P Transformer primary winding connected to Relay 4CT
8200101B6E CONN_4CT_S Transformer secondary winding connected to Relay 4CT
8300101B6F CONN_4CT_T Transformer tertiary winding connected to Relay 4CT
8100001B61 VEC_GROUP_P_D Transformer vector group is D (primary)
8000001B60 VEC_GROUP_P_Y Transformer vector group is Y (primary)
8200001B64 VEC_GROUP_S_D Transformer vector group is D (secondary)
8000001B62 VEC_GROUP_S_N Transformer vector group no use (secondary)
8100001B63 VEC_GROUP_S_Y Transformer vector group is Y (secondary)
8200001B67 VEC_GROUP_T_D Transformer vector group is D (tertiary)
8000001B65 VEC_GROUP_T_N Transformer vector group no use (tertiary)
8100001B66 VEC_GROUP_T_Y Transformer vector group is Y (tertiary)
- 26 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Front-end processing function (FEP/FEP_COMMON)

The front end processing (FEP) function collects electrical quantities data measured on the
VCT. After the data collection in FEP function, the FEP_COMMON function generates
electrical quantity data in accordance with the instruction of the replica function; the data are
distributed for respective applications such as protection, monitoring, recording and
supervision application. Figure 2.2-1 shows the mutual operations between the FEP and
FEP_COMMON functions.
FEP operation (FEP1) for the TP_FEP_COMMON
VCT located at VC1 slot. Calculation of Sum CT, CT Polarity，Delta,
P/N/Z Phase Currnt for EA.CT and V/I of EA.
Tr winding
Setting Output Setting Output

EA. AI_ch; EA. AI_ch; 1W-IY_1,2,3
･CT Ratio Electrical data 1W-IΔ_1,2,3,

1W-I1
･ CT secondary -for Input
1W-I2
rating measurement VCT#1_CH3 …ia1
1W-I0
-for Protect VCT#1_CH4 …ib1
1W-VY_1,2,3
VCT#1_CH5 …ic1
-for log 1W-VΔ_1,2,3
VCT#1_CH6 …ia2
-Full scale 1W-V1
VCT#1_CH7 …ib2
Input 1W-V2
-CT secondary VCT#1_CH8 …ic2
VCT#1_CH9 …ia3 1W-V0
rating
VCT#1_CH10 …ib3 2W-IY_1,2,3
VCT#1_CH11 …ic3 2W-IΔ_1,2,3

VCT#2_CH9 …ia4 2W-I1
VCT#2_CH10 …ib4 2W-I2
VCT#2_CH11 …ic4 2W-I0
VCT#2_CH12 …ia5 2W-VY_1,2,3
VCT#2_CH13 …ib5 2W-VΔ_1,2,3
VCT#2_CH14 …ic5
2W-V1
VCT#1_CH12 …in1
2W-V2
VCT#1_CH13 …in2
FEP operation (FEP2) for the 2W-V0
VCT#1_CH14 …in3
VCT located at VC2 slot. 3W-IY_1,2,3
VCT#1_CH1 …v
3W-IΔ_1,2,3
VCT#2_CH1 …va1
3W-I1
VCT#2_CH2 …vb1
VCT#2_CH3 …vc1 3W-I2
VCT#2_CH5 …va2 3W-I0

Setting Output VCT#2_CH6 …vb2 3W-VY_1,2,3
EA. AI_ch; EA. AI_ch; VCT#2_CH7 …vc2 3W-VΔ_1,2,3
(VCT#1;Type44, 3W-V1
･CT Ratio Electrical data
VCT#2; Type47 or 48)
3W-V2
･ CT secondary -for
Below case; re-connect by 3W-V0
rating measurement
config file Type-VT_P，S，T
-for Protect -Model 4 (4CT+rep.V)
(3PN/3PP/1PN/1PP/1N)
VCT#1_CH12 …ia4
-for log 1CT-IY_1,2,3
VCT#1_CH13 …ib4
-Full scale 1CT-IΔ_1,2,3,
VCT#1_CH14 …ic4
Input 1CT-I1
-CT secondary -Model 1 (2CT+rep.V)
VCT#1;Type46 1CT-I2
rating
VCT#1_CH1 …v 1CT-I0
VCT#1_CH4 …ia1 2CT-IY_1,2,3
VCT#1_CH5 …ib1 2CT-IΔ_1,2,3,
VCT#1_CH6 …ic1 2CT-I1
VCT#1_CH7 …ia2 2CT-I2
VCT#1_CH8 …ib2
2CT-I0
VCT#1_CH9 …ic2
3CT-IY_1,2,3
Conn-1CT (Non/Primary/ 3CT-IΔ_1,2,3,

Secondary / Tertiary) 3CT-I1
Conn-2CT (N/P/S/T) 3CT-I2
Conn-3CT (N/P/S/T)
3CT-I0
Conn-4CT (N/P/S/T)
Conn-5CT (N/P/S/T) 4CT-IY_1,2,3
Pol-1CT(Negative/Positive) 4CT-IΔ_1,2,3,
Pol-2CT(Negative/Positive) 4CT-I1
Pol-5CT(Negative/Positive) 5CT-IY_1,2,3
Conn-0VT (Non/Primary/
5CT-IΔ_1,2,3,
Secondary / Tertiary)
5CT-I1
Conn-1VT (N/P/S/T)
5CT-I2
Conn-2VT (N/P/S/T)
5CT-I0
InType-0VT
(1PN/1PP/1N) 1CTn
InType-1VT 2CTn
(3PN/3PP/1PN/1PP/1N) 3CTn
InType-2VT
(3PN/3PP/1PN/1PP/1N)
Figure 2.2-1 Example function configuration
- 27 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(i) Inputs to the replica function

 Analog inputs measured using each relay VT/CT
 CT ratios for each CT/VT
 Relay CT ratings (1A or 5A) for each CT/VT
 Replica settings
(ii) Outputs from the replica function

 Data of each transformer winding (after vector summation at
Primary/Secondary/Tertiary side and CT polarity compensation)
Primary (similar outputs for Secondary and Tertiary)
o Analog inputs (Ia-P, Ib-P, Ic-P, Iab-P, Ibc-P, Ica-P, I1-P, I2-P, I0-P, Va-P, Vb-P, Vc-
P, V2-P, V0-P)
 Data of each CT (after CT polarity compensation)
1CT (similar outputs for 2CT, 3CT, 4CT, 5CT, 1NCT, 2NCT and 3NCT)
o Analog inputs (Ia-1CT, Ib-1CT, Ic-1CT, Iab-1CT, Ibc-1CT, Ica-1CT, I1-1CT, I2-
1CT, I0-1CT)
 CT ratios
 Relay CT ratings (1A or 5A)
- 28 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
VCT
1CT

4CT
5CT
VCT
1CT
P S 2CT [Conn-1CT] = Primary

[Conn-3CT] = Tertiary
3CT
[Conn-4CT] = Primary
T [Conn-5CT] = Secondary
4CT
5CT
𝑰𝒂 − 𝑷 = 𝑰𝒂 − 𝟏𝑪𝑻 + 𝑰𝒂 − 𝟒𝑪𝑻
𝑰𝒃 − 𝑷 = 𝑰𝒃 − 𝟏𝑪𝑻 + 𝑰𝒃 − 𝟒𝑪𝑻
1CT
𝑰𝒄 − 𝑷 = 𝑰𝒄 − 𝟏𝑪𝑻 + 𝑰𝒄 − 𝟒𝑪𝑻
P S
2CT 𝑰𝒂 − 𝑺 = 𝑰𝒂 − 𝟐𝑪𝑻
4CT T
𝑰𝒃 − 𝑺 = 𝑰𝒃 − 𝟐𝑪𝑻
3CT 𝑰𝒄 − 𝑺 = 𝑰𝒄 − 𝟐𝑪𝑻
𝑰𝒂 − 𝑻 = 𝑰𝒂 − 𝟑𝑪𝑻
𝑰𝒃 − 𝑻 = 𝑰𝒃 − 𝟑𝑪𝑻
𝑰𝒄 − 𝑻 = 𝑰𝒄 − 𝟑𝑪𝑻
Figure 2.2-2 Example for relationship between data of each transformer winding and each CT
- 29 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
3 Relay application
Broken conductor protection (BCD) 160 Overvoltage protection (OV) 219
Current differential protection (DIF) 31 Overvoltage protection for phases (OVS) 230
Circuit breaker failure protection (CBF) 180 Overvoltage protection for earth (OVG) 242
Earth fault protection (EF) 104 Overcurrent protection (OC) 78
Earth fault protection with neutral (EFIn) 127 Over-excitation protection (VPH) 266
Frequency protection (FRQ) 252 Restricted earth fault protection (REF) 64
Inrush current detection (ICD) 175 Thermal overload protection (THM) 168
Mechanical trip (MECH) 291 Trip circuit (TRC) 280
Negative sequence OC protection (OCN) 142 Undervoltage protection (UV) 194
Undervoltage protection for phases (UVS) 206
VT failure supervision (VTF) 273
- 30 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Current differential protection (DIF)

Current differential protection (DIF) provides fast and selective main protection for two-
winding and three-winding power transformers, auto-transformers and generator-transformer
units. This protection requires no interposing CTs and provides stability against magnetizing
inrush, overexcitation and CT saturation. Up to five phase current inputs whose ratings are a
combination of 1A / 5A can also be connected. The DIF calculates differential currents per
phase and has the capability to detect internal phase-to-phase faults, phase-to-earth faults
and turn-to-turn faults occurring in a power transformer. The entering quantities and the
protection schemes for the DIF function are defended obtained in the FEP_COMMON function
(see Chapter Transformer replica functions: FEP_COMMON function). The operation is
enabled using scheme switch [DIF-EN].
TP_REPLICA TP_DIF TP_TRC

DIF-S1, DIF-S2
FEP_COMMON DIF
DIF relay DIF logic Trip signal (TRIP CIRCUIT)
CT polarity
element sequence
compensated
[VecGroupP-*]
[VecGroupS-*]
[VecGroupT-*]
[Tr-Capacity]
[Tr-Vn-P], [Tr-Vn-S], [Tr-Vn-T] [DIF-EN](On/Off)
[Conn-*CT] [DIF-S1-EN](On/Off)
[Conn-*NCT] [DIF-S2-EN](On/Off)
[InType-CT]
IY, IΔ, I0, In, CT ratio
Figure 3.1-1 DIF block diagram

Note: FEP_COMMON calculates vector sum CT, CT polarity, Delta, phase/neutral/zero
phase current at each CT and V/I at each transformer winding.
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
3D – – 3E – – 3F – –
Protecting 2 windings  – –  – –  – –
Protecting 3 windings  – –  – –  – –
Protecting 4 windings NA – –  – –  – –
Protecting 5 windings NA – – NA – –  – –
- 31 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
The DIF calculation is based on Kirchhoff ’s law, that is, the vector summation of all
currents flowing into a protected zone must be zero. Figure 3.1-2 illustrates the DIF protection
principle. Differential current (id) is the vector summation of all currents measured at the
relevant CTs. Since current values at the transformer primary side (i1) equal current values
at the transformer secondary side (−i2) under normal or external fault conditions, the
differential currents (id=i1+i2) are zero. On the other hand, in the event of the occurrence of
an internal fault, the differential currents (id) are not zero since current values at the
transformer primary side (i1) are not equal to current values at the transformer secondary side
(−i2), and DIF will operate accordingly.
Primary Secondary
I1 I2
Transformer
i1 i2
id=i1+i2
Differential
current detection DIF
Figure 3.1-2 DIF protection principle
The DIF comprises protection relay elements that operate for differential currents per
phase such as a segregated-phase-current differential relay element (S1), a second-harmonic
detection element (2F), a fifth-harmonic detection element (5F), an enhanced CT saturation
countermeasure element (CTS) and a high-set overcurrent differential relay element (S2).
Consequently, the DIF can initiate a trip signal based upon the operation decision of these
elements.
- 32 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
3.1.1 Relay characteristics

This section describes the characteristics for S1, 2F, 5F and S2 respectively. The settings for
these relay elements are described in detail later. (See 3.1.7)
(i) S1 characteristic
The S1 is used to detect all internal faults within a protection zone for a transformer. As
illustrated in Figure 3.1-3, S1 is a percentage-restraining element and it has dual slope
characteristics: the first slope is a weak restraint characteristic (DIF-S1-I1) in small
percentage-of-error current region, the second one is a strong restraint characteristic (DIF-S1-
I2) in large percentage-of-error current region.
Figure 3.1-3 illustrates the DIF_S1-I1 and the DIF-S1-I2 together with a differential
current (Id) and a restraining current (Ir): The Id is a vector summation of all of the phase
currents measured at the relevant CTs; the Ir is the scalar summation of all of the phase
currents.
Id = Ir (one-end infeed)
Id
[DIF-S1-I1]
[DIF-S1-I1] [DIF-S1-I2] Ir
Figure 3.1-3 DIF characteristic
Assuming that an external fault occurs outside the DIF protection zone, high through-
fault currents might cause incorrect operation of the S1 due to CT tolerance. Hence, the DIF-
S1-I2 provides the margin to potential incorrect operations in the large current region and the
S1 has the stability against external faults generating a high-through fault current. Although
high fault currents flow in the event of the occurrence of an internal fault, the highset element
(S2) can clear the fault promptly. Incidentally, CT saturation might occur in the event of the
occurrence of a heavy external fault. In addition to DIF-S1-I2, the DIF also provides CTS as
the countermeasure. (See 3.1.4)
- 33 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
As illustrated in the Figure 3.1-3, the DIF-S1-I1 has a weak restraint characteristic and
hence ensures sensitivity to low-current level faults; the DIF-S1-I1 is expressed using the
following equation:
Id >[DIF-S1-Slope1]∙Ir +(1-[DIF-S1-Slope1])×[DIF-S1-I1 ] (3.1-1)
where,
[DIF-S1-Slope1]: Setting of small current slope
[DIF-S1-I1]: Setting of minimum operating current
The Id and Ir are expressed using the following equations:

Id =|kct1∙I1 +kct2∙I2 +kct3∙I3 +kct4∙I4 +kct5∙I5 | (3.1-2)
Ir =kct1∙|I1 |+kct2∙|I2 |+kct3∙|I3 |+kct4∙|I4 |+kct5∙|𝐼5 | (3.1-3)
where,
kct1: Coefficient1 for CT ratio compensation on Group 1 phase current inputs;
I1: Phase compensated current2 derived from CT for Group 1;
I5: Phase compensated current2 derived from CT for Group 5.
1Note: The details with regard to CT ratio compensation are described in 3.1.2
and 3.1.2(ii).
2Note: The details with regard to vector group compensation are described in
3.1.2 and 3.1.2(ii).
Furthermore, the phase compensated currents (I1, I2, I3, I4 and I5) can be set to zero
ampere with the generations at the following PLC connection points ‘DIF-I* SetToZero’. As in
stub protection case, they are effective to exclude specific terminal currents from the
calculations in DIF relay characteristic.
DIF-I1 SetToZero: Phase compensated current (I1) will be set to zero ampere;
- 34 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
The DIF-S1-I2 characteristic has a strong restraint characteristic and hence, has less
probability for a possible incorrect operation in the DIF when high fault currents saturate
relevant CTs during an external fault. The DIF-S1-I2 characteristic is expressed using the
following equation:
Id >[DIF-S1-Slope2]×Ir +([DIF-S1-Slope1]-[DIF-S1-Slope2])×[DIF-S1-I2 ]+(1-[DIF-S1-Slope1])×[DIF-S1-I1 ] (3.1-4)
where,
[DIF-S1-Slope2]: Setting of large current slope
[DIF-S1-I2]: Setting of Knee point located between the area ‘Slope1’ and the area
‘Slope2’
(ii) 2F and 5F characteristic

Inrush currents include several harmonic components and appear in the events like, (1)
energizing the transformer after a previous period of de-energization, (2) the voltage returns
to normal after a fault clearance and (3) a nearby transformer is energized. Although the
inrush currents might cause the incorrect operation in the S1, this can be prevented with the
detection of the harmonic components included in inrush currents. The 2F capable of
determining the occurrence of the second-harmonic component in accordance with the
sensitivity setting is used to detect inrush currents.
Magnetizing currents appear in the event when a power transformer is overexcited and
which might cause the incorrect operation of S1. The 5F capable of determining the occurrence
of the fifth-harmonic component in accordance with the sensitivity setting is used to detect
overexcitation. The fifth-harmonic component can be used for the detection rather than third-
harmonic component because a power transformer with delta-windings eliminates the third
harmonic component.
- 35 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(iii) High-set characteristic (S2)

The S2 is a high-set overcurrent differential relay element, which has the capability to protect
a transformer against the damage, possibly caused by a heavy internal fault. It provides high-
speed protection in the event of the occurrence of a heavy internal fault. The S2 is expressed
using the following equation:
Id >[DIF-S2-I] (3.1-5)
where,
[DIF-S2-I]: Setting of Sensitivity for S2.
The S2 element is unrestrained and is not affected by 2F and 5F harmonic block.

Id = Ir (one-end infeed)
Id
[DIF-S2-I]
[DIF-S1-I1]
Figure 3.1-4 Highset characteristic
- 36 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
3.1.2 CT ratio compensation

(i) Equations and settings
Differential current Id is determined using Equation (3.1-2) and Id becomes zero in theory
except in the event of the occurrence of an internal fault. In order to achieve it, all the phase
compensated currents must be compensated with CT ratio, taking into account rated secondary
currents and secondary base currents for Group 1 to 5. The coefficients for CT ratio
compensation are automatically calculated using the following equations:
𝐼𝑛1
kct1 = ⁄𝐼 (3.1-6)
𝑏𝑎𝑠𝑒1
𝐼𝑛2
kct2 = ⁄𝐼 (3.1-7)
𝑏𝑎𝑠𝑒2
𝐼𝑛3
kct3 = ⁄𝐼 (3.1-8)
𝑏𝑎𝑠𝑒3
𝐼𝑛4
kct4 = ⁄𝐼 (3.1-9)
𝑏𝑎𝑠𝑒4
𝐼𝑛5
kct5 = ⁄𝐼 (3.1-10)
𝑏𝑎𝑠𝑒5
where,
In1 to In5: Rated secondary current settings for Group 1 to 5 (1A or 5A);
Ibase1 to Ibase5: Secondary base currents for Group 1 to 5.
Ibase1 to Ibase5 are determined using the following equations with the settings for the
transformer capacity, the rated voltage and phase-CT ratios i.e. [1CT Ratio] to [5CT Ratio]1:
T𝑟𝑎𝑛𝑠𝑓𝑜𝑟𝑚𝑒𝑟 𝑐𝑎𝑝𝑎𝑐𝑖𝑡𝑦 (𝑀𝑉𝐴)
𝐼𝑏𝑎𝑠𝑒1 =
√3 × R𝑎𝑡𝑒𝑑 𝑡𝑟𝑎𝑛𝑠𝑓𝑜𝑟𝑚𝑒𝑟 𝑣𝑜𝑙𝑡𝑎𝑔𝑒 (𝑘𝑉) × [1CT Ratio]
1Note: The user can set the [1CT Ratio] to [5CT Ratio] using settings [AI*_Ch*_Ratio].
- 37 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
For more information for the settings VCT ratio using the [ AI*_Ch*_Ratio], see
Chapter Technical description: Transformer module: Setting VCT ratio
(ii) CT ratio compensation example

When taking the transformer shown in Figure 3.1-5, as an example, the CT ratio compensation
settings, kct1, kct2, and kct3 can be calculated as follows. For transformer capacity, take the
maximum one from the rated capacity of the three windings.
Primary Secondary
1CT 40MVA 40MVA 2CT
300/5 154kV 66kV 600/5
A B
3CT
1200/5
Tertiary
12MVA
11kV
kct1 kct3 kct2

IED
Figure 3.1-5 Example of CT ratio compensation
Calculation steps, for example, are discussed in Table 3.1-2, but the calculation is made
automatically in the DIF. Thus, the setting values at step 1, 2, 3, and 6 in Table 3.1-2 are
required in the CT ratio compensation.
- 38 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Table 3.1-2 Setting terms and points for CT ratio compensation

Primary / 1CT Secondary / 2CT Tertiary / 3CT
Step Calculation steps Unit Equation
[Setting point] [Setting point] [Setting point]
Transformer 40.00
1 MVA —
capacity (a) [Tr-Capacity]
154.0 66.0 11.0
2 Voltage (b) kV —
[Tr-Vn-P] [Tr-Vn-S] [Tr-Vn-T]
Rated line current
3 A a ∕ (b×√3) 150 350 2100
(c)
60.000 120.000 240.000
4 CT ratio (d) — —
Settings [AI*_Ch*_Ratio]1
Secondary rated
5 A c∕d 2.50 2.92 8.75
line current (e)
CT secondary 5 5 5
6 A —
rating (f) Settings [AI*_Ch*_Rating]2
7 kct3 — f∕e kct1=2.00 kct2=1.71 kct3=0.57
1Note: Settings [AI*_Ch*_Ratio] regarding the 1CT/2CT/3CT are discussed in Chapter
Technical description: Transformer module: Setting VCT ratio.
2Note: Settings [AI*_Ch*_Rating] regarding the 1CT/2CT/3CTare discussed in Chapter
Technical description: Transformer module: Selection of rated current.
3Note: The user should ensure that the difference between CT rating and the nominal
current rating of the protected windings is not large (kct should be <8).
- 39 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
3.1.3 Compensation of CT secondary currents

A built-in function on compensation of CT secondary currents is provided in the function
provides so that DIF can be calculated correctly. The compensation of CT secondary currents
consists of CT polarity compensation, phase compensation / zero-sequence current elimination
and CT ratio compensation per current input group as illustrated in Figure 3.1-6.
I1 I4
CT ratio: N1 CT ratio: N4
(*1) (*4)
(*3)
CT ratio: N3
(*2) (*5)
I3
CT ratio: N2 CT ratio: N5
I2 I5
(*1) (*2) (*3) (*4) (*5)

I1/N1 I2/N2 I3/N3 I4/N4 I5/N5
=i1 =i2 =i3 =i4 =i5
IED
CT polarity compensation … CT polarity compensation
Phase compensation /
Zero-sequence current … Phase compensation /
Zero-sequence current
elimination elimination
…
…
CT ratio compensation CT ratio compensation
kct1i1 kct5i5
DIF calculation
Figure 3.1-6 Compensation of CT secondary currents
(i) CT polarity compensation

CT polarity compensation is done in the FEP-common function block (For details, Refer FEP-
common function block in Replica setting).
(ii) Phase compensation

A phase compensation function for all groups of phase currents is provided in accordance with
a target transformer configuration. Phase currents, fed from corresponding CTs connected to
a star-winding side and a delta-winding side, are compensated respectively as follows:
-Star-winding side: each compensated current is calculated by means of taking away the
zero-sequence current from each phase current. This means that phase angle compensation is
not performed at the star-winding side.
- 40 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
-Delta-winding side: each phase-to-phase current is calculated using two phase currents
respectively. Phase angle compensation is performed on the delta winding side.
An example of vector diagram for phase compensation in a Yd11 transformer is

illustrated in Figure 3.1-7. The phase compensation formulas for both star-winding side and
delta-winding side are shown in (3.1-11) to (3.1-13). The description on the transformer
configuration settings is explained in 3.1.7(vi).
IYa Ia
IY1 I1 Ib
IYc IYb Ic
Figure 3.1-7 Example of vector diagram for phase compensation in Yd11
̇ − 𝐼𝑌𝑏
2𝐼𝑌𝑎 ̇ − 𝐼𝑌𝑐
̇ ̇ − 𝐼∆𝑐
𝐼∆𝑎 ̇
̇ =
𝐼𝑌1 , ̇ =
𝐼Δ1 (3.1-11)
3 √3
̇ − 𝐼Y𝑐
2𝐼Y𝑏 ̇ − 𝐼Y𝑎
̇ ̇ − 𝐼∆𝑎
𝐼∆𝑏 ̇
̇ =
𝐼𝑌2 , ̇ =
𝐼Δ2 (3.1-12)
3 √3
̇ − 𝐼Y𝑎
2𝐼Y𝑐 ̇ − 𝐼Y𝑏
̇ ̇ − 𝐼∆𝑏
𝐼∆𝑐 ̇
̇ =
𝐼Y3 , ̇ =
𝐼Δ3 (3.1-13)
3 √3
where,
IY1, IY2, IY3: Phase compensated currents at star-winding side
IYa, IYb, IYc: Phase currents connected to star-winding side
IΔ1, IΔ2, IΔ3: Phase compensated currents at delta-winding side
IΔa, IΔb, IΔc: Phase currents connected to delta-winding side
Further, for the calculation of the differential current, zero-sequence current is

eliminated from the input current (IY) using equations (3.1-14) to (3.1-16):
̇ − 𝐼𝑌𝑏
2𝐼𝑌𝑎 ̇ − 𝐼𝑌𝑐
̇ ̇ − (𝐼𝑌𝑏
3𝐼𝑌𝑎 ̇ + 𝐼𝑌𝑐
̇ + 𝐼𝑌𝑎
̇ )
̇ =
𝐼𝑌1 = ̇ − 𝐼𝑌0
= 𝐼𝑌𝑎 ̇ (3.1-14)
3 3
̇ − 𝐼Y𝑐
2𝐼Y𝑏 ̇ − 𝐼Y𝑎
̇ ̇ − (𝐼Y𝑐
3𝐼Y𝑏 ̇ + 𝐼Y𝑎
̇ +𝐼Y𝑏
̇ )
̇ =
𝐼𝑌2 = ̇ − 𝐼𝑌0
= 𝐼𝑌𝑏 ̇ (3.1-15)
3 3
- 41 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
̇ − 𝐼Y𝑎
2𝐼Y𝑐 ̇ − 𝐼Y𝑏
̇ ̇ − (𝐼Y𝑎
3𝐼Y𝑐 ̇ + 𝐼Y𝑏
̇ + 𝐼Y𝑐
̇ )
̇ =
𝐼Y3 = ̇ − 𝐼Y0
= 𝐼Y𝑐 ̇ (3.1-16)
3 3
(iii) Zero-sequence current elimination

In order to prevent incorrect operations of DIF against an external earth fault, zero-sequence
current at star-winding side of a transformer needs to be eliminated in the process of the
compensation of CT secondary currents as described in the following Case 1.
Case 1: Zero-sequence current flows at the star-winding side of a transformer in the event
that an external fault occurs at the start-winding side as illustrated in Figure 3.1-8.
On the other hand, zero-sequence current circulates within the delta-winding and is
not measured at the delta-winding side CTs. As a result, the zero-sequence current at
star-winding side appears as a differential current.
I0 Transformer Ia
I0
I0
I0 Ib
II0
I0
Ic
3I
0
DIF
Figure 3.1-8 External earth fault at start-winding side
Zero-sequence current also needs to be eliminated at delta-winding side assuming the

following Case 2.
Case 2: Figure 3.1-9 illustrates that the delta-winding side of a transformer is earthed with
an in-zone earthing transformer. In the event that an external earth fault occurs at
the delta-winding side, the zero-sequence current is only measured at the delta-
winding side CTs, and it appears as a differential current.
- 42 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Ia
I0
Ib
I0
Ic
I0
Earthing
Transformer
3I 0
DIF
Figure 3.1-9 External earth fault at delta-winding side with in-zone earthing transformer
Zero-sequence currents at both star-winding and delta-winding of a target transformer

is eliminated in the process of the aforementioned phase compensation shown in the preceding
equations (3.1-14) and (3.1-16). Thus, we have risk of DIF incorrect operations for both cases.
- 43 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
3.1.4 Enhanced CT saturation countermeasure function (CTS)

As described earlier, S1 has the strong restraint characteristic DIF-S1-I2 which has stability
against CT tolerance. Furthermore, the S1 also provides another enhanced CT saturation
countermeasure element (CTS). The CTS can operate securely for a high through-fault current
during a heavy external fault and has the capability to detect CT saturation.
A CT saturated current waveform has two distinguishable periods within a cycle: a non-
saturated period and a saturated period. The CTS uses these periods to detect CT saturation
correctly.
DIF Logic
Differential operation
&
Starting
Element (SE) 0 t
&
& & 1
Waveform Discriminating
Element (WDE)
[DIF-CTSat] On
＋
Trigger activated
Evolving fault detection

0 t 1
element (EVD)
Off-delayTimer：
1 cycle CT Saturation detection function (CTS)
Figure 3.1-10 CTS block diagram
Figure 3.1-10 shows the CTS block diagram consisting of a waveform discriminating
element (WDE), a starting element (SE) and the evolving fault detection element (EVD).
The WDE operates if instantaneous differential current changes to less than a specified
percentage of instantaneous restraining current; the WDE operates during the CT being in
non-saturation. The differential current is zero theoretically during the non-saturation period
within a heavy through-fault current waveform.
The SE discriminates between healthy conditions and unhealthy conditions in a power

system; the SE blocks the WDE output when the power system is under healthy conditions.
The CTS algorithm is given using the following equations:

ΔId < 0.15 × (ΔIp + ΔIn) (3.1-6)
ΔId = |𝐼𝑑(𝑚) − 𝐼𝑑(𝑚−1) | + |𝐼𝑑(𝑚−1) − 𝐼𝑑(𝑚−2) | (3.1-7)
ΔIp + ΔIn = |𝐼𝑝(𝑚) − 𝐼𝑝(𝑚−1) | + |𝐼𝑝(𝑚−1) − 𝐼𝑝(𝑚−2) |
(3.1-8)
+ |𝐼𝑛(𝑚) − 𝐼𝑛(𝑚−1) | + |𝐼𝑛(𝑚−1) − 𝐼𝑛(𝑚−2) |
where,
ΔId: Change in the differential current Id
- 44 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
ΔIp + ΔIn: Change in the restraining current in positive and negative cycles
Id: Differential current
Ip: Sum of positive input currents
In: Sum of negative input currents
m, m-1, m-2: Sampling timing.
Figure 3.1-11 shows CT-secondary-current waveforms with the CT saturation in the

event of the occurrence of a heavy external fault: (a) current measured at the incoming
terminal, (b) current measured at the outgoing terminal and (c) differential current (Id)
subtracted (b) from (a).
a. Incoming current
b. Outgoing current
c. Differential current
No change period
Figure 3.1-11 CT Secondary Current Waveforms and Differential Current for a heavy external
Fault with CT Saturation
As long as the CT keeps unsaturation, both Id and ΔId are zero. However, when the
change determined by the Equation (3.1-8) becomes a large positive value sufficiently, the
Equation (3.1-6) holds and the WDE operates accordingly. The SE operates instantly in the
event that the SE detects the Id. As a result, the SE and the WDE make an AND output.
In contrast, in the event of the occurrence of a heavy internal fault, CT saturation makes
the ΔId small. WDE does not operate, because the change in restraining current is also small
during this period. As a result, the DIF operation is correctly unblocked during a heavy
internal fault.
The EVD operates when an external fault progresses into an internal fault. The EVD
unblocks the blocking by WDE and SE elements, thus ensuring correct operation for external
faults progressing into internal fault.
The CTS includes a scheme switch [DIF-CTSat] to enable or disable the CTS.
- 45 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
3.1.5 Decision for fault phases

Decision for fault phases function is a useful feature, which provides information for testing.
The feature helps the operator in assessing the severity of the fault and the associated phase.
The decision for faulted phase is based on the threshold settings for the maximum differential
current (Id) and maximum winding currents (Ip, Is, It).
The fault phase function is enabled with scheme switch [Phase Mode] to ‘Fault phases’.
Figure 3.1-12 shows the scheme logic of fault phase function.
8C00001B7C
DIF-OPT-1 ≥1 DIF-OPT-A
&
8D00001B7D
DIF-OPT-2 & ≥1 DIF-OPT-B
8E 00001B7E
DIF-OPT-3 & t DIF-OPT-C
≥1
& Decision for
& fault phases
Phase Mode
Operating phases & t
Fault phases
8000801C23
1
Max. Id 8100801C27
2
phases 8200801C2B
3 C
Y
8000901C23 VecGroupP-W
D
A
Max. Ip 8100901C27
B
phases 8200901C2B Y
C VecGroupS-W
D
8000A01C23
A
Max. Is 8100A01C27 Y
B VecGroupT-W
phases 8200A01C2B D
C C
8000B01C23
A
Max. It 8100B01C27
B
phases 8200B01C2B
C
Figure 3.1-12 Decision for fault phases
- 46 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
3.1.6 Differential current monitoring function (DIF-SV)

(i) Equation and setting
The differential current monitoring function (DIF-SV) is provided to supervise the health of
the CT circuit. The DIF-SV detects the erroneous differential current that appears in the case
of a CT circuit failure. The DIF-SV is expressed using the following equation;
𝐼𝑑 > 𝑠𝑒𝑡𝑡𝑖𝑛𝑔 [DIF-Slope1] ∙ 𝐼𝑟 + (1 − 𝑠𝑒𝑡𝑡𝑖𝑛𝑔 [DIF-Slope1]) ∙ 𝑠𝑒𝑡𝑡𝑖𝑛𝑔 [DIF-IDSV]) (3.1-9)
The DIF-SV has a non-restraint current characteristic as shown below.

Id Id = Ir (one-end infeed)
IDSV operate
[DIF-S1-I1]
[DIF-IDSV]
Figure 3.1-13 DIF-SV characteristic
(ii) DIF-SV scheme logic

If the DIF-SV detects an erroneous differential current, the output signal DIF-IDSV can be
connected to DIF_TP_BLOCK (Refer Figure 3.1-16using PLC logic based on the application
requirement. The differential current monitoring function is operated when On is set for the
scheme switch [DIF-IDSV-EN].
8000501C23 TDIF-IDSV
8000501B60
1 & DIF-IDSV-1
8100501C27 8100501B61
DIF-SV 2 & DIF-IDSV-2
8200501C2B 8200501B62
3 C & t DIF-IDSV-3
0-300s
820000EBB1 DIF-SV_BLOCK 1 & 8300501B63

≥1
DIF-IDSV
AMF-ON
DIF-IDSV-E N On
Figure 3.1-14 DIF-SV scheme logic

Note: The signal “DIF-IDSV” is used for the supervision. For more information, see
Chapter Automatic supervision: Generic supervision tasks. Settings [CHK_ID:LVl]
and [CHK_ID:Sw] are provided to monitoring the DIF function.
- 47 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
3.1.7 Settings and setting guidance

(i) DIF-S1-I1 setting
The minimum operation sensitivity of the DIF is subject to the setting [DIF-S1-I1], which
regulates the maximum erroneous differential current under normal condition. The setting
[DIF-S1-I1], thus, is placed as a ratio of the CT secondary rated current.
(ii) DIF-S1-Slope1, DIF-S1-Slope2 and DIF-S1-I2 settings

DIF-S1-Slope1: As for the small current area in the DIF, the DIF-S1-Slope1 is a restraining
coefficient that determines the S1 restraining characteristic and is reflected in percentage. The
value is summed by the following four error values:
1. CT accuracy error (considered as 5%, generally)
2. Tap error: the tap error proves the latitude of a power-transformer-tap value and
the power-transformer-tap includes maximum tap value and minimum tap
value. The value of the tap error is taken at middle position of the tap changer,
as a reference.
3. Matching error: the setting can neglect this error value because CT mismatch
may be small, as a rule. CT mismatch is taken care by the ratio compensation
kct1-kct5. (Refer 3.1.2). The user must ensure that the difference between CT
rating and the nominal current rating of the protected windings is not large (kct
should be <8).
4. Relay calculation error, and others (5%)
The value recommended for the DIF-S1-Slope1 setting is 1.5 times the sum of the four
error values. (The “1.5” reflects a margin.)
DIF-S1-Slope2: The DIF-S1-Slope2 is a restraining coefficient for the large current area
in the DIF; its setting is determined from a maximum erroneous differential current, that
appears when a through-fault current flows largely.
DIF-S1-I2: The DIF has dual slope characteristics and hence the break point is placed
with the DIF-S1-I2. The DIF-S1-I2 is set as the multiplier of rated current of CT secondary; it
includes CT ratio correction. The setting value of the DIF-S1-I2 to be greater than the
maximum operating current level, that is reflected as a ratio to the CT secondary rated current;
the DIF-S1-I2 to be between the maximum forced-cooled rated current and the maximum
emergency overload current.
While on the subject, percentage-restraining coefficient is reflected in % slope and its

equation is described as follow:
- 48 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Persentage restraining factor (% slope)

𝐷𝑖𝑓𝑓𝑒𝑟𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑖𝑎𝑙 𝑐𝑢𝑟𝑟𝑒𝑛𝑡
=
𝑇ℎ𝑟𝑜𝑢𝑔ℎ 𝑐𝑢𝑟𝑟𝑒𝑛𝑡
(3.1-17)
𝐷𝑖𝑓𝑓𝑒𝑟𝑒𝑛𝑡𝑖𝑎𝑙 𝑐𝑢𝑟𝑟𝑒𝑛𝑡
=
(𝐼𝑛𝑐𝑜𝑚𝑚𝑖𝑛𝑔 𝑐𝑢𝑟𝑟𝑒𝑛𝑡 + 𝑂𝑢𝑡𝑔𝑜𝑖𝑛𝑔 𝑐𝑢𝑟𝑟𝑒𝑛𝑡)
(iii) 2f setting
The inrush current includes a second harmonic content (2nd harmonic) on energizing a
transformer. For the detection of the 2nd harmonic, the DIF provides a setting and the setting
value is placed for setting [DIF-2f]. (A setting of 15% is suggested if there is no minimum data
on the 2nd harmonic.)
(iv) 5f setting
When a transformer is in over-excitation condition, a fifth harmonic content (5th harmonic) is
appeared. The 5th harmonic affects protection operations in the IED and hence it is required
to detect the 5th harmonic. Thus, the DIF provides a setting and the setting value is placed for
setting [DIF-5f]. (A setting of 30% is suggested if there is no minimum data on the 5th
harmonic.)
(v) S2 setting
As cited in section 3.1.3(i), the DIF includes the high-set and the setting is determined with
setting [DIF-S2-I]. The setting value should be greater than a maximum inrush current
estimated. Hence, a recommended setting value is greater than the maximum inrush current
multiplied by the kct. (Greater than, “Maximum peak value of Inrush current” ×kct.)
Incidentally, setting [DIF-S2-I] is prescribed with Per-unit (pu). The DIF-S2-I is set as the
multiplier of rated current of secondary CT; it includes CT ratio correction.
(vi) Setting phase matching

The phase angle difference between line currents on either side of the power transformer are
corrected by setting according to the hands of a clock and the transformer connections
described in IEC60076-1.
Determination of setting
As for transformer windings, there are winding settings and the primary winding setting is
determined with scheme switches [VecGroupP-W]. Likewise, the secondary and the tertiary
windings are determined with scheme switch [VecGroupS-W], and [VecGroupT-W]. When a
transformer unit is Star-winding, a set of 1 is placed for the scheme switch; whereas a set of 2
is placed when another transformer unit is delta-winding.
- 49 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
On the other hand, for phase angle difference, settings are determined with scheme
switches [VecGroupS-C] and [VecGroupT-C]; the scheme switch [VecGroupS-C] is used to set
the phase angle difference between primary and secondary; the scheme switch [VecGroupT-C]
is used to set the phase angle difference between primary and tertiary. The difference is
determined by a lagging angle from the primary winding, and is expressed with a number that
is reflected with 0–11 in time unit. The number corresponds to a lagging degree: e.g., an hour
o’clock corresponds to lagging 30°.
The phase angle matching, that is setting for transformer connection and being complied
with IEC60076-1 is summarized in Table 3.1-5 and Table 3.1-6.
As for a three-winding Star-Star-Delta transformer, e.g., settings are determined with

scheme switches [VecGroupP-W], [VecGroupS-W], [VecGroupT-W], [VecGroupS-C], and
[VecGroupT-C] in accordance with Table 3.1-6. Table 3.1-3 shows “Yy0d11” transformer
connection, for example.
Table 3.1-3 Scheme switch for Star-Star-Delta transformer (an example from Table 3.1-6)
Transformer
Connection settings
(IEC60076-1) VecGroupP- VecGroupS- VecGroupS- VecGroupT- VecGroupT-
W W C W C
Y y 0 d 11 Y y 0 d 11
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
a: A set of Y is placed because the primary winding is Star.

b: A set of y is placed because the secondary winding is Star.
c: A set of 0 is placed because the secondary winding is in phase with the primary.
d: A set of d is placed because the tertiary winding is Delta.
e: A set of 11 is placed because the tertiary vector lags the primary winding by 11 hours
o’clock (330°).
Primary Secondary Tertiary

transformer (P) Transformer (S) Transformer (T)
Figure 3.1-15 Yy0d11 vectors in three-winding (See Table 3.1-6)
- 50 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Table 3.1-4 Phase angle matching calculation1

Clock Calculation Remarks
position
0 Ia’ = (2Ia  Ib  Ic)/ 3 Ib’ = (2Ib  Ic  Ia)/ 3 Ic’ = (2Ic  Ia  Ib)/ 3 Setting value
0
1 Ia’ = (Ia – Ib)/ 3 Ib’ = (Ib  Ic)/ 3 Ic’ = (Ic – Ia)/ 3 11 1
2 Ia’ = (Ia  2Ib  Ic)/ 3 Ib’ = (Ib  2Ic  Ia)/ 3 Ic’ = (Ic 2Ia  Ib)/ 3 10 2
3 Ia’ = ( Ib  Ic)/ 3 Ib’ = (– Ic  Ia)/ 3 Ic’ = ( Ia  Ib)/ 3 9 3
4 Ia’ = ( Ia  Ib  2Ic)/ 3 Ib’ = ( Ib  Ic  2Ia)/ 3 Ic’ = ( Ic  Ia  2Ib)/ 3
8 4
5 Ia’ = (– Ia  Ic)/ 3 Ib’ = (– Ib  Ia)/ 3 Ic’ = (– Ic  Ib)/ 3
7 5
6 6
Ia’ = (2Ia  Ib  Ic)/ 3 Ib’ = ( 2Ib  Ic  Ia)/ 3 Ic’ = ( 2Ic  Ia  Ib)/ 3
7 Ia’ = ( Ia  Ib)/ 3 Ib’ = ( Ib  Ic)/ 3 Ic’ = (– Ic  Ia)/ 3
8 Ia’ = ( Ia  2Ib  Ic)/ 3 Ib’ = ( Ib  2Ic  Ia)/ 3 Ic’ = ( Ic  2Ia  Ib)/ 3
9 Ia’ = (Ib – Ic)/ 3 Ib’ = (Ic – Ia)/ 3 Ic’ = (Ia – Ib)/ 3
10 Ia’ = (Ia  Ib  2Ic)/ 3 Ib’ = (Ib  Ic 2Ia)/ 3 Ic’ = (Ic  Ia  2Ib)/ 3
11 Ia’ = (Ia – Ic)/ 3 Ib’ = (Ib  Ia)/ 3 Ic’ = (Ic  Ib)/ 3
1Note: For phase angle correction, the DIF determines its calculation formula with clock
position.
- 51 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Table 3.1-5 Setting for phase angle matching of α-method in 2 windings transformers
Transformer connection*1 Settings for phase angle correction Remark
Primary, Secondary Primary Secondary Phase angle diff. Phase angle
(P) (S) [VecGroupP-W] [VecGroupS-W] [VecGroupS-C] matching calc. 2
P: 0 O’clock
Yy0 Y y 0
S: 0 O’clock
P: 1 O’clock
Dd0 D d 0
S: 1 O’clock
P: 0 O’clock
Yd1 Y d 1
S: 1 O’clock
P: 11 O’clock
Dy1 D y 1
S: 0 O’clock
P: 1 O’clock
Dd2 D d 2
S: 3 O’clock
P: 1 O’clock
Dd4 D d 4
S: 5 O’clock
P: 0 O’clock
Yd5 Y d 5
S: 5 O’clock
P: 7 O’clock
Dy5 D y 5
S: 0 O’clock
P: 0 O’clock
Yy6 Y y 6
S: 6 O’clock
P: 1 O’clock
Dd6 D d 6
S: 7 O’clock
P: 0 O’clock
Yd7 Y d 7
S: 7 O’clock
- 52 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

Primary, Secondary Primary Secondary Phase angle diff. Phase angle
(P) (S) [VecGroupP-W] [VecGroupS-W] [VecGroupS-C] matching calc. 2
P: 5 O’clock
Dy7 D y 7
S: 0 O’clock
P: 1 O’clock
Dd8 D d 8
S: 9 O’clock
P: 1 O’clock
Dd10 D d 10
S: 11 O’clock
P: 0 O’clock
Yd11 Y d 11
S: 11 O’clock
P: 1 O’clock
Dy11 D y 11
S: 0 O’clock
P: 1 O’clock
Dz10 D d 10
S: 11 O’clock
*1Note: Reference phase is drawn in a dash line and complied with IEC60076-1.
*2Note: Phase angle calculation is discussed in Table 3.1-4.
Transformer connection is complied with IEC60076-1; Table 3.1-6 shows that the DIF,
which protects a two-winding transformer, can cover a three-winding transformer with a
stabilizing-winding circuit.
- 53 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Table 3.1-6 Setting for phase angle matching of α-method in 3 windings transformers
Phase angle diff.
Phase angle diff.

[VecGroupS-C]
[VecGroupT-C]
Primary, Secondary, Tertiary Phase angle
[VecGroup
[VecGroup
[VecGroup
Secondary
Primary
Tertiary
P-W]
S-W]
T-W]
(P) (S) (T) matching calc.*2
P: 0 O’clock
Yy0d1 Y y 0 d 1 S: 0 O’clock
T: 1 O’clock
P: 0 O’clock
Yy0d11 Y y 0 d 11 S: 0 O’clock
T: 11 O’clock
P: 0 O’clock
Yd1d1 Y d 1 d 1 S: 1 O’clock
T: 1 O’clock
P: 0 O’clock
Yd11d11 Y d 11 d 11 S: 11 O’clock
T: 11 O’clock
P: 1 O’clock
Dy11d0 D y 11 d 0 S: 0 O’clock
T: 1 O’clock
P: 11 O’clock
Dy1d0 D y 1 d 0 S: 0 O’clock
T: 11 O’clock
P: 1 O’clock
Dd0d0 D d 0 d 0 S: 1 O’clock
T: 1 O’clock
P: 0 O’clock
Yy0y0 Y y 0 y 0 S: 0 O’clock
T: 0 O’clock
*1Note: Reference phase is drawn in a dash line and complied with IEC60076-1.
*2Note: Phase angle calculation is discussed in Table 3.1-4.
- 54 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Practical setting and a point to note

1. Reference phase for phase angle matching
A reference phase be selected from the phase of a Star-connected side and hence the phase
of primary winding is applied for the reference phase in the case of a Star-delta
transformer. The followings shows tips for each transformer connection:
 Star-delta transformer (Yd): the reference phase is chosen from primary winding
phase.
 Delta-Star transformer (Dy): the reference phase is chosen from secondary
winding phase.
 Star-Star transformer (Yy): the reference phase is chosen from primary winding
phase.
 Delta-delta transformer (Dd): the reference phase leads the A-phase of primary
winding by 30°.
2. Phase rotation
The phase relationship between each terminal current, which depends on the transformer
connection and the connection between the transformer and the power system, must be
checked. The phase displacement of a delta-connected side may not be determined only by
the transformer connection described in Table 3.1-5 and Table 3.1-6. Table 3.1-7 shows an
example illustrating the connection between a transformer and power system. The Table
3.1-7 also shows their current vectors when an Yd1 transformer is connected to the power
system with both clockwise and anticlockwise phase rotation. Care should be taken that
the setting for phase angle correction is not corresponding to Table 3.1-6.
- 55 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Table 3.1-7 Transformer connection and current vector

Delta-side connected with 30° lagging Delta-side connected with 30°
leading
Connection between Transformer Transformer

Primary Yd1 Secondary Primary Yd1 Secondary
Yd1 Transformer and a U u a a U u a
b V v b b V v b
Power system
c W w c c W w c
Transformer u Transformer u
Each winding a U a a U a
I1a I2a I2a’=I2aI2c I1a I1c I2c I2a’=I2aI2b
connection and b V v b b V v b
I1b I2b I2b’=I2bI2a I1b I1b I2b I2b’=I2bI2c
Incoming/Outgoing c W w c c W w c
I1c I2c I2c’=I2cI2b I1c I1a I2a I2c’=I2cI2a
current
I1a I2b’=I2bI2a I1a I2c’=I2cI2a
Incoming current I2c I2b
I2b I2c
vector and Outgoing I2b’=I2bI2c
30 I2c’=I2cI2b 30
I1c I1b I1c I1b
current vector I2a’=I2aI2c
I2a I2aI2a’=I2aI2b
Incoming Outgoing Incoming Outgoing
Current Current Current Current
Setting VecGroupP-W =Y, VecGroupP-W =Y,
VecGroupS-W =d, VecGroupS-W =d,
VecGroupS-C =1 (Same as Yd1) VecGroupS-C =11 (Same as Yd11)
3. Auto-transformer (with internal delta-winding)

For setting as the auto-transformer, see “Yy0” in Table 3.1-5.
4. Zigzag connected transformer

Place a set of D,d for the scheme switches [VecGroupP-W], [VecGroupS-W] and
[VecGroupS-C] for zigzag connected side. Zero-sequence current is canceled.
5. When three-winding applied to a two-winding transformer

Keep the scheme switches [VecGroupT-W] and [VecGroupT-C] to the default setting
values.
6. One and a half breaker system

Table 3.1-8 shows settings when one-and-a-half breaker system (1.5CB) is applied. The
settings are required for the DIF.
- 56 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Table 3.1-8 Example of DIF setting

Type Settings
Yd11
P S
[VecGroupP-W]=Y
1CT 2CT [VecGroupS-W]=d
1NCT
[VecGroupS-C]=11
[Conn-1CT]= Primary
[Conn-2CT]= Secondary
[Conn-3CT]= No use
[Conn-1NCT]= Use
[Conn-2NCT]= No use
1.5CB system [VecGroupP-W]=Y
1CT Yy0d11 [VecGroupS-W]=d

P S 2CT [VecGroupS-C]=0
3CT
[VecGroupT-W]= Non
1NCT
[Conn-1CT]= Primary
[Conn-3CT]= Primary
[Conn-1NCT]= Use
[Conn-2NCT]= No use
Yy0d11
1CT
3CT [VecGroupP-W]=Y
P
T [VecGroupS-W]=y
1NCT
2CT
[VecGroupS-C]=0
S
2NCT
[VecGroupT-W]=d
[VecGroupT-C]=11
[Conn-1CT]= Primary
[Conn-3CT]= Tertiary
[Conn-1NCT]= Use
[Conn-2NCT]= Use
- 57 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
3.1.8 DIF scheme logic

Figure 3.1-16 and Figure 3.1-17 show the scheme logic of DIF function.
(i) Blocking DIF operation by 2F, 5F, and CTS
DIF output signals can be blocked when 2F, or 5F or CTS operates. The 2F and 5F elements
become active when On is set for the scheme switches [DIF-2F-EN] and [DIF-5F-EN]. The CTS
element becomes active when ‘Block is set for the scheme switch [DIF-CTSat]. The following
two operation modes can be selected using the scheme switch [DIF-BlockMode]:
Block-PerP: In case of a fault except for three-phase fault, an element in any phase of
2F 5F operates, then a DIF signal, which is connected to the element
operated is blocked.
Block-3P: When any phase operates, all the three-phase DIF signals are blocked. The
setting Block-3P is recommended for a large-size transformer because the
second harmonic component of the transformer may be low.
(ii) Signal for TRC function

The DIF element is able to generate a trip signal; the trip circuit function (TRC) can issue a
trip command by the reception of the trip signal. For example, when the user set On for scheme
switch [DIF1-TP1], ‘DIF-TRIP1’ signal is transferred for the TRC function if the DIF element
operates. In accordance with the trip signal received in the TRC function, it drives the binary
output circuit (BO), which can energize the trip coil to open the circuit breaker. The DIF-S1
and DIF-S2 elements can produce six trip signals so that other scheme switches [DIF-TP2] to
[DIF-TP6] are provided.
Note: The TRC function is discussed separately. See Chapter Relay application: Trip
circuit.
- 58 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
8000101C23
1 & & S2-1-OP
8100101C27
S2 2 & & S2-2-OP
8200101C2B
3 C & & S2-3-OP
DIF 8000201C23 t t
1 & & S1-1-OP
8100201C27 &
S1 2
8200201C2B
& & & S1-2-OP
3 C
& t
& & S1-3-OP
DIF-S2-E N On
DIF-S1-E N On
8100001BB0 1
810000EBB0 DIF-TP_BLOCK ≥1
8F00001BB2
8F0000EBB2 DIF_BLOCK 8000001B60
8000301C23 ≥1 1
1 & &
8100301C27
2f 2 &
8200301C2B & 8100001B61
DIF
3 C
& ≥1 1
8000401C23 t &
1
8100401C27 & &
5f 2
& 8200001B62
3 8200401C2B
C & 1
& ≥1
t &
DIF-2f-E N On
DIF-5f-E N On 8F00301B60
≥1
&
Block-Per 8F00401B60
DIF-BlockMod-2f Block-3P
P
≥1
Block-Per &
DIF-BlockMod-5f Block-3P
P
8000001BB4
800000EBB4 DIF-1_BLOCK
8100001BB5
8200001BB6
Figure 3.1-16 DIF scheme logic (1)
- 59 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
8000001B64
≥1 DIF-OPT-1
8100001B65
8000001BB3 ≥1 DIF-OPT-2
800000EBB3 DIF_INST_OP 8200001B66
≥1 DIF-OPT-3
TDIF-S2 8000101B60
S2-OPT-1 8200101B63 8000001B63
S2-1-OP ≥1 ≥1 S2-OPT ≥1 DIF-OPT
8100101B61
S2-2-OP S2-OPT-2
≥1
8200101B62
S2-3-OP S2-OPT-3
≥1
0-100s
&
&
& t
TDIF-S1 8000201B60
S1-OPT-1 8100201B63
S1-1-OP ≥1 ≥1 S1-OPT
8100201B61
S1-2-OP ≥1 S1-OPT-2
8200201B62
S1-3-OP S1-OPT-3
≥1
0-100s
&
&
To TRC
& t
DIF-TP1 8000001B70
On & DIF-TRIP1
DIF-TP2 On 8100001B71
& DIF-TRIP2
DIF-TP3 8200001B72
On & DIF-TRIP3
DIF-TP4 On 8300001B73
& DIF-TRIP4
DIF-TP5 8400001B74
On & DIF-TRIP5
DIF-TP6 On 8500001B75
& DIF-TRIP6
Figure 3.1-17 DIF scheme logic (2)
- 60 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
3.1.9 Setting
Setting of TP_DIF (Function ID: 413001)
Default Model
Units
1 2 3 4 5
value
DIF-EN Off / On - DIF protection enable On – – X X X
DIF-S1-EN Off / On - DIF S1 protection enable On – – X X X
DIF-S2-EN Off / On - DIF S2 protection enable On – – X X X
DIF-2f-EN Off / On - 2f component detection enable On – – X X X
DIF-5f-EN Off / On - 5f component detection enable Off – – X X X
DIF-IdSV-EN Off / On - Id supervision enable Off – – X X X
DIF-CTSat Non / Block - DIF block triggered by CT saturation detection Non – – X X X
DIF-S1-I1 0.10 - 1.00 pu Minimum operating value 0.30 – – X X X
Knee point between small and large current
DIF-S1-I2 1.00 - 40.00 pu 2.00 – – X X X
regions
Small current region percentage slope of Id-Ir
DIF-S1-Slope1 10 - 50 % 50 – – X X X
characteristic
Large current region percentage slope of Id-Ir
DIF-S1-Slope2 10 - 100 % 100 – – X X X
characteristic
TDIF-S1 0.00 - 100.00 s DIF-S1 timer 0.00 – – X X X
DIF-S2-I 2.00 - 20.00 pu DIF S2 operating value 2.00 – – X X X
TDIF-S2 0.00 - 100.00 s DIF-S2 timer 0.00 – – X X X
DIF-2f 10 - 50 % 2f component sensitivity 15 – – X X X
DIF-BlockMode-2f Non / Block-3P / Block-PerP - DIF block mode using 2f components Block-3P – – X X X
DIF-5f 10 - 100 % 5f component sensitivity 30 – – X X X
DIF-BlockMode-5f Non / Block-3P / Block-PerP - DIF block mode using 5f components Block-3P – – X X X
DIF-IdSV 0.05 - 1.00 pu Id supervision sensitivity 0.24 – – X X X
TDIF-IdSV 0 - 300 s Id supervision timer 10 – – X X X
DIF-TP1 Off / On - DIF trip signal1 for TRC driving BO circuit On – – X X X
X: Applicable setting, , –: Not applicable setting
- 61 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
3.1.10 Signal (Data ID)

TP_DIF (Function ID: 413001)
8000001B60 DIF-1_BLK DIF-1 block signal
8000001BB4 DIF-1_BLOCK DIF-1 block signal
8000301C23 DIF-2F-1 DIF-2f relay element operated (phase-1)
8200301C2B DIF-2F-3 DIF-2f relay element operated (phase-3)
8F00301B60 DIF-2F-OR DIF-2f protection operated
8200401C2B DIF-5F-3 DIF-5f relay element operated (phase-3)
8F00401B60 DIF-5F-OR DIF-5f protection operated
8300501B63 DIF-IDSV DIF-IDSV protection operated
8000501B60 DIF-IDSV-1 DIF-IDSV protection operated (phase-1)
8000001B63 DIF-OPT DIF protection operated
8000001B64 DIF-OPT-1 DIF operation phase or fault phase (phase-1)
8C00001B7C DIF-OPT-A DIF operating phase or fault phase (phase-A)
8D00001B7D DIF-OPT-B DIF operating phase or fault phase (phase-B)
8E00001B7E DIF-OPT-C DIF operating phase or fault phase (phase-C)
8000201C23 DIF-S1-1 DIF-S1 relay element operated (phase-1)
8200201C2B DIF-S1-3 DIF-S1 relay element operated (phase-3)
8F00701B60 DIF-S1-OR DIF-S1 protection operated
8200101C2B DIF-S2-3 DIF-S2 relay element operated (phase-3)
8F00601B60 DIF-S2-OR DIF-S2 protection operated
8000001B70 DIF-TRIP1 DIF trip signal for trip command1 B0
8F00001BB2 DIF_BLOCK DIF block signal
8000001BB3 DIF_INST_OP DIF instant operation command
8200001BB1 DIF_SV_BLOCK DIF-SV block signal
8100001BB0 DIF_TP_BLOCK DIF-TP block signal
- 62 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

8100201B63 S1-OPT DIF-S1 protection operated
8000201B60 S1-OPT-1 DIF-S1 protection operated (phase-1)
8200101B63 S2-OPT DIF-S2 protection operated
8000001BB7 DIF-I1 SetToZero Phase compensated current I1 is set to zero ampere
8000001BBA DIF-I4 SetToZero Phase compensated current I4 is set to zero ampere
8000001BBB DIF-I5 SetToZero Phase compensated current I5 is set to zero ampere
 Connection point in PLC logic

800000EBB4 DIF-1_BLOCK DIF-1 block signal
8F0000EBB2 DIF_BLOCK DIF block signal
800000EBB3 DIF_INST_OP DIF instant operation command
820000EBB1 DIF_SV_BLOCK DIF SV block signal
810000EBB0 DIF_TP_BLOCK DIF TP block signal
800000EBB7 DIF-I1 SetToZero Phase compensated current I1 is set to zero ampere
800000EBBA DIF-I4 SetToZero Phase compensated current I4 is set to zero ampere
800000EBBB DIF-I5 SetToZero Phase compensated current I5 is set to zero ampere
- 63 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Restricted earth fault protection (REF)

Restricted earth fault protection (REF) is applied to a star-connected transformer with a
neutral point, which is earthed directly or is earthed through a low impedance resistor. The
REF includes a differential scheme for a zero phase sequence current and hence can provide
highly sensitive protection for an internal earth fault. The zero-sequence current (3I0) is
derived from measured phase currents (Ia, Ib, and Ic). The neutral conductor feeds neutral
current (In). The REF can detect the differential current in case of internal earth fault.
VCT
P S
1CT REF1
2CT
3CT REF2
T
4CT
Ia+Ib+Ic
5CT
REF
1NCT REF3
In 2NCT
3NCT
Figure 3.2-1 REF protection principle and application example
TP_REPLICA TP_REF TP_TRC

REF-1, 2, 3
REF-P, S, T trip
REF relay REF logic signal (TRIP CIRCUIT)
FEP_COMMON
element sequence
CT polarity
compensated
[REF1-EN](On/Off)
[REF2-EN](On/Off)
[REF3-EN](On/Off)
I0, In, CT ratio
Figure 3.2-2 REF block diagram
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
– 3D – – 3E – – 3F – –
– 2 stages protection  – – NA – –  – –
– 3 stages protection NA – – NA – –  – –
- 64 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
3.2.1 Element characteristics

The IED has three elements namely REF1, REF2 and REF3. The REF characteristic and
settings are identical for all the three elements.
Figure 3.2-3 shows the REF block diagram that consists of REF-DIF and REF-DEF
elements. REF-DIF is a biased differential current element, whereas REF-DEF is a directional
earth fault element. The REF-DEF element complements the REF-DIF element operation in
the small differential current region, thereby providing security against mal operation
especially when the REF-DIF element has a very high sensitivity (low pick up) setting. For
through fault high current, when phase CTs saturate the operation of REF is blocked by REF-
DEF element. This is achieved due to the maximum limit of the directional characteristics.
REF-□
REF-DIF-□ &
REF-DEF-□
& ≧1
On
REF-□-DEF-EN Off
○
+
Figure 3.2-3 REF block diagram

Note: Term ‘’ represents the winding position of transformer: for example, ‘1’
represents ‘Primary winding’ , ‘2’ represents ‘Secondary winding’, and ‘3’
represents ‘Tertiary winding’.
The operation of the REF protection is described below:

(1) Scheme switch [REF-□-DEF-EN] is On
Figure 3.2-4 shows the REF protection with [REF- □ -DEF-EN]=On. The REF
protection operates in the small current region only. For large differential current due
to internal earth fault, the DIF (three-phase differential current) protection will
operate. However, the zero sequence currents are eliminated in the DIF scheme. The
DIF will operate for large earth fault current due to the presence of positive and
negative sequence currents.
DIF
S1 S2
REF
Earth fault only
Level of differential current
2.0 x Max_KCT_REF Threshold: Maximum value of the

in-rush current
Figure 3.2-4 REF protection with [REF-□-DEF-EN]=On
- 65 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(2) Scheme switch [REF--DEF-EN] is Off

Figure 3.2-5 shows the operation of REF protection with [REF-□-DEF-EN]=Off. The
REF protection operates for small and large differential currents. The DIF protection
will also operate in the large differential current region.
DIF
S1 S2
REF
Earth fault only
Level of differential current
Threshold: Maximum value of the

in-rush current
Figure 3.2-5 REF protection with [REF-□-DEF-EN]=Off
(i) REF-DIF characteristic

As shown in the Figure 3.2-6, the REF-DIF element has a dual slope characteristic: the first
slope is a weak restraint characteristic (S1) in the small current region, the second slope is a
strong restraint characteristic (S2) in the large current region.
In Figure 3.2-6, a differential current (Id0) and restraining current (Ir0) determines the
dual slope characteristic. The Id0 is a vector summation of phase current of all windings; the
Ir0 is the larger of the residual current or the neutral current.
3I0
IN
Id0 = Ir0 (One-end infeed) Operating zone

Id0
S2 REF--SLOPE2
50-100%
S1
[REF--I1]×Max_KCT_REF REF--SLOPE1=10%
Ir0
[REF--I2]×Max_KCT_REF
[REF--I1]×Max_KCT_REF
Iod : Residual differential current (|3I0 + IN|)

Ires : Restraining current (Max(|IA|, |IB|, |IC|, |IN|))
REF--I1: Minimum operating value in pu
REF--I2: Knee point (: P, S, T)
Figure 3.2-6 REF-DIF characteristic
The weaker restraint of the S1 ensures sensitivity to low-level faults; the S1

characteristic is expressed using the following equation:
Id0 −  > 0.1 × Ir0 −  + (1 − 0.1) × Max_KCT_REF −  × [REF--I1] (3.2-1)
where,
Max_KCT_REF-: Selection of the largest value among KCT1_REF-, KCT2_REF-,
- 66 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
KCT3_REF-, KCT4_REF-, and KCT5_REF-

: 1 or 2 or 3
Zero phase differential current Id0- is expressed using the following equation:
Id0 -=|KCT1_REF-∙I01 +KCT2_REF-∙I02 +KCT3_REF-∙I03 +KCT4_REF-∙I04 +KCT5_REF-.I05 +IN |

(3.2-2)
where,
KCT1_REF-  to KCT5_REF- : CT ratio matching coefficient of 1CT - 5CT
The KCT is calculated automatically as Phase CT ratio / Neutral CT ratio. The neutral CT rating is used
as the base value.
The restraint current is expressed using the following equation:
Ir0- ＝Max (KCT1_REF-･|Ia1|, KCT1_REF-･|Ib1|, KCT1_REF-･|Ic1|,

KCT2_REF-･|Ia2|, KCT2_REF-･|Ib2|, KCT2_REF-･|Ic2|, (3.2-3
KCT3_REF-･|Ia3|, KCT3_REF-･|Ib3|, KCT3_REF-･|Ic3|,
KCT4_REF-･|Ia4|, KCT4_REF-･|Ib4|, KCT4_REF-･|Ic4|, )
KCT5_REF-･|Ia5|, KCT5_REF-･|Ib5|, KCT5_REF-□･|Ic5|, |IN|)
I01, I02, I03, I04, I05: Residual current of 1CT to 5CT

I*a, I*b, I*c: phase current of 1CT to 5CT
IN: Neutral current
Note that all currents are CT secondary currents.
The strong restraint characteristic of the S2 lies on the large current region for a high-
through fault; it is expressed using the following equation:
Ido −  > [REF −  − slope2] × Ir0 −  + (0.1 − [REF −  − Slope2]) × [REF −  − I2 ] × Max −
(3.2-4)
KCT_REF −  + ((1 − 0.1) × [REF −  − I1 ] × Max − KCT_REF − )
where,
Max_KCT_REF-: Max (KCT1_REF-, KCT2_REF-, KCT3_REF-, KCT4_REF-,
KCT5_REF-)
: 1 or 2 or 3
Zero ampere control

In the following example, the 4CT and 5CT current is forced to zero as it is not used.
- 67 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
VCT
I01 x KCT1_REF-1 I0d operation

1CT I02 x KCT2_REF-1
I03 x KCT3_REF-1
I04 x KCT4_REF-1(＝0)
P 2CT I05 x KCT5_REF-1(＝0)
Operation
3CT TP_REPLIC REF1

A
TP_REF
S 4CT
5CT
In
1NCT
2NCT
3NCT
Figure 3.2-7 Example of Zero ampere control
(ii) REF-DEF characteristic

The REF-DEF logic is as shown below.
REF-DEF-□
Directional element &
(a) ≥1
Non-directional 1
element (b)
Figure 3.2-8 REF-DEF logic
The REF-DEF characteristic consists of a directional characteristic and a non-directional

characteristic, as shown in Figure 3.2-9.
Figure 3.2-9 REF-DEF characteristic
- 68 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(iii) Example of KCT calculation and relationship to REF-DEF operation
Primary Secondary
CT ratio: 2400/1 CT ratio: 3600/1
KCT1_REF_P=2 KCT2_REF_P=3
I01 I01
CT ratio:
1200/1
REF
IN
Figure 3.2-10 KCT*_REF_□ calculation
Figure 3.2-10 shows an example of KCT*_REF_ calculation done automatically in the

function. The KCT2_REF_P is larger than KCT1_REF_P; hence, the Max_KCT_REF takes the
value three (KCT2_REF_P=3). With reference to Figure 3.2-9 , 2.0 × Max_KCT_REF = 2.0 x 3
= 6 A. In Figure 3.2-10, the rated current of neutral CT is 1200A. The REF_DEF is blocked
when the maximum phase current exceeds 2×Max_KCT_REF×(rated current of neutral CT).
In other words, if a phase current on the primary side or on the secondary side exceeds 7200A,
the REF is blocked.
- 69 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
3.2.2 Setting means

(i) Setting tips for REF1 to REF-3
Table 3.2-2 shows the examples of REF setting.
Table 3.2-2 Setting examples of REF element
System configuration Setting example
REF1-EN = On REF2-EN = On REF3-EN = On
VCT
P S REF1-1CT = Use REF2-1CT = No use REF3-1CT = No use
1CT REF1 REF1-2CT = No use REF2-2CT = Use REF3-2CT = No use
REF1-3CT = No use REF2-3CT = No use REF3-3CT = Use
2CT
REF1-4CT = No use REF2-4CT = No use REF3-4CT = No use
3CT REF1-5CT = No use REF2-5CT = No use REF3-5CT = No use
T REF2
4CT
5CT
1NCT REF3
2NCT
3NCT
REF1-EN = On REF2-EN = On REF3-EN = Off
VCT
REF1-1CT = Use REF2-1CT = No use
1CT REF1 REF1-2CT = No use REF2-2CT = Use
S P REF1-3CT = No use REF2-3CT = Use
2CT REF1-4CT = No use REF2-4CT = No use
REF1-5CT = No use REF2-5CT = No use
3CT REF2
T
4CT
5CT
1NCT REF3
2NCT
3NCT
REF1-EN = On REF2-EN = Off REF3-EN = Off
VCT REF1-1CT = Use

REF1-2CT = Use
1CT REF1
REF1-3CT = Use
P REF1-4CT = No use
2CT
REF1-5CT = No use
3CT REF2
S 4CT
5CT
1NCT REF3
2NCT
3NCT
- 70 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
System configuration Setting example

REF1-EN = On REF2-EN = Off REF3-EN = Off
VCT REF1-1CT = Use

REF1-2CT = Use
1CT REF1 REF1-3CT = Use
REF1-4CT = Use
P 2CT REF1-5CT = No use
3CT REF2
S 4CT
5CT
1NCT REF3
2NCT
3NCT
- 71 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
3.2.3 Scheme logic

Figure 3.2-11 to Figure 3.2-13 show the REF1, REF2, and REF3 scheme logics.
(i) REF operation switches
Every REF can signal an instantaneous trip or a time-delayed trip; every REF element can
generate trip signals simultaneously by setting On for scheme switches [REF1-EN], [REF2-EN],
[REF3-EN] and others.

The REF elements are able to generate a trip signal; the trip circuit function (TRC) can issue
a trip command by the reception of the trip signal. For example, when the user set On for
scheme switch [REF1-TP1], ‘REF1-TRIP1’ signal is transferred for the TRC function if the REF
element operates. In accordance with the trip signal received in the TRC function, it drives the
binary output circuit (BO), which can energize the trip coil to open the circuit breaker. The
REF2 and REF3 elements can produce six trip signals so that other scheme switches [REF2-
TP*] and [REF3-TP*] are provided.
circuit.
No Use
REF1-1CT
Use REF1
No Use
REF1-2CT
Use
No Use
REF1-3CT
Use 8000101C23 TREF1
No Use & t 0
REF1-4CT 8000101B60
Use &
≥1 REF1-OPT
No Use 0.00-100.00s
REF1-5CT
Use
REF1-EN
&
On
REF1-BLOCK On
1
REF1-INST_OP On
To TRC
REF1-TP1 8000101B61
On
& REF1-TRIP1
REF1-TP2 On 8100101B62
& REF1-TRIP2
REF1-TP3 8200101B63
On
& REF1-TRIP3
REF1-TP4 8300101B64
On
& REF1-TRIP4
REF1-TP5 8400101B65
On
& REF1-TRIP5
REF1-TP6 On 8500101B66
REF1-TRIP6
&
REF1-ALM On 8B00101B6
& C
REF1-ALARM
Figure 3.2-11 REF1 scheme logic
- 72 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
No Use
REF2-1CT
Use REF2
No Use
REF2-2CT
Use
No Use
REF2-3CT
No Use & t 0
REF2-4CT 8000201B60
Use &
≥1 REF2-OPT
No Use 0.00-100.00s
REF2-5CT
Use
REF2-EN
&
On
REF2-BLOCK On
1
REF2-INST_OP On
To TRC
REF2-TP1 8000201B61
On
& REF2-TRIP1
REF2-TP2 On 8100201B62
& REF2-TRIP2
REF2-TP3 8200201B63
On
& REF2-TRIP3
REF2-TP4 8300201B64
On
& REF2-TRIP4
REF2-TP5 8400201B65
On
& REF2-TRIP5
REF2-TP6 On 8500201B66
REF2-TRIP6
&
& C
REF2-ALARM

No Use
REF3-1CT
Use REF3
No Use
REF3-2CT
Use
No Use
REF3-3CT
No Use & t 0
REF3-4CT 8000301B60
Use &
≥1 REF3-OPT
No Use 0.00-100.00s
REF33-5CT
Use
REF3-EN
&
On
REF3-BLOCK On
1
REF3-INST_OP On
To TRC
REF3-TP1 8000301B61
On
& REF3-TRIP1
REF3-TP2 On 8100301B62
& REF3-TRIP2
REF3-TP3 8200301B63
On
& REF3-TRIP3
REF3-TP4 8300301B64
On
& REF3-TRIP4
REF3-TP5 8400301B65
On
& REF3-TRIP5
REF3-TP6 On 8500301B66
REF3-TRIP6
&
& C
REF3-ALARM
- 73 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
3.2.4 Setting
Setting of TP_REF (Function ID: 414001)
Default Model
Units
1 2 3 4 5
value
REF1-EN Off / On - REF1 protection enable Off – – X – X
REF REF2-EN Off / On - REF2 protection enable Off – – X – X
REF3-EN Off / On - REF3 protection enable Off – – – – X
REF1-I1 0.05 - 0.50 pu Minimum operating value 0.50 – – X – X
REF1-I2 0.50 - 4.00 pu Knee point between small and large current regions 1.00 – – X – X
REF1-Slope1 10 (fixed) % Small current region percentage slope of Id0-Ir characteristic 10 – – X – X
REF1-Slope2 50 - 100 % Large current region percentage slope of Id0-Ir characteristic 100 – – X – X
REF1-DEF-EN Off / On - CT saturation countermeasure enable Off – – X – X
TREF1 0.00 - 100.00 s REF1 Timer 0.00 – – X – X
REF1-1CT No use / Use - 1CT's residual current used for REF1 calculation Use – – X – X
REF1-2CT No use / Use - 2CT's residual current used for REF1 calculation No use – – X – X
REF1
REF1-4CT No use / Use - 4CT's residual current used for REF1 calculation No use – – – – X
REF1-TP1 Off / On - REF1 trip signal1 for TRC driving BO circuit On – – X – X
REF1-ALM Off / On - REF1 alarm enable Off – – X – X
REF2-I1 0.05 - 0.50 pu Minimum operating value 0.50 – – X – X
REF2-I2 0.50 - 4.00 pu Knee point between small and large current regions 1.00 – – X – X
REF2-Slope1 10 (fixed) % Small current region percentage slope of Id0-Ir characteristic 10 – – X – X
REF2-Slope2 50 - 100 % Large current region percentage slope of Id0-Ir characteristic 100 – – X – X
REF2-DEF-EN Off / On - CT saturation countermeasure enable Off – – X – X
TREF2 0.00 - 100.00 s REF2 Timer 0.00 – – X – X
REF2-2CT No use / Use - 2CT's residual current used for REF2 calculation Use – – X – X
REF2
REF2-ALM Off / On - REF2 alarm enable Off – – X – X
REF3-I1 0.05 - 0.50 pu Minimum operating value 0.50 – – – – X
REF3-I2 0.50 - 4.00 pu Knee point between small and large current regions 1.00 – – – – X
REF3-Slope1 10 (fixed) % Small current region percent slope of Id0-Ir characteristic 10 – – – – X
REF3-Slope2 50 - 100 % Large current region percent slope of Id0-Ir characteristic 100 – – – – X
REF3-DEF-EN Off / On - CT saturation countermeasure enable Off – – – – X
REF3 TREF3 0.00 - 100.00 s REF3 Timer 0.00 – – – – X
REF3-3CT No use / Use - 3CT's residual current used for REF3 calculation Use – – – – X
REF3-TP1 Off / On - REF3 trip signal1 for TRC driving BO circuit On – – – – X
- 74 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Setting of TP_REF (Function ID: 414001)

Default Model
Units
1 2 3 4 5
value
REF3-ALM Off / On - REF3 alarm enable Off – – – – X
X: Applicable setting, X1: Setting depending on other functions, –: Not applicable setting
- 75 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

TP_REF(Function ID: 414001)
8B00001B6C REF-ALARM REF alarm enable
8000001B61 REF-TRIP1 REF trip signal for trip command1
8000101C23 REF1 REF1 relay element operated
8B00101B6C REF1-ALARM REF1 alarm enable
8000101B60 REF1-OPT REF1 operated
8000101B61 REF1-TRIP1 REF1 trip signal for trip command1
8000101BB0 REF1_BLOCK REF1 block command
8000101BB1 REF1_INST_OP REF1 instant operation command
8100201B60 REF2-OPT REF2 operated
8200301B60 REF3-OPT REF3 operated2

- 76 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
 Connection point on PLC logic

TP_REF (Function ID: 414001)
800010EBB0 REF1_BLOCK REF1 block command
800010EBB1 REF1_INST_OP REF1 instant operation command
- 77 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Overcurrent protection (OC)

The overcurrent protection function (OC) detects overcurrent conditions and operates
accordingly. The OC function has both directional elements and time characteristic; it has eight
operation stages (OC1 to OC8) independently, which can be selected using scheme switches.
The OC1 stage is only discussed for simplicity, but the OC2 to OC8 stages are applicable. The
OC1 stage is enabled using scheme switch [OC1-EN]; the transformer winding to be protected
is selected using scheme switch [OC1-TarWind].
TP_REPLICA TP_OC TP_TRC

OC1 to OC8
OC
OC relay OC logic Trip signal (TRIP CIRCUIT)
FEP_COMMON
element sequence
CT polarity
compensated
[OC*-EN](ON/OFF )
[OC*-TarWind](P/S/T)
IY, IΔ, I1, I2, I0, In, CT ratio, VY, VΔ, V1, V2, V0, Type-VT (3PN/3PP/1PN/1N)
Figure 3.3-1 OC block diagram
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
3D – – 3E – – 3F – –
3.3.1 Non-directional DT/IDMT  – –  – –  – –
3.3.2 Directional DT/IDMT  – – NA – –  – –
3.3.5(ii) Operation blocked by VTF NA – – NA – – NA – –
- 78 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
3.3.1 Non-directional and directional OC

The user can set the OC1 as either a non-directional OC or a directional OC. Furthermore, the
user can also set a directional OC1 as either forward type OC1 or reverse type OC1.
(i) Characteristic of non-directional OC

The characteristic of the non-directional type OC is a circle that has a center at the origin. A
setting and a scheme switch is used to configure each non-directional OC element; i.e., the user
can set the threshold value of the non-directional OC element for stage 1 using setting [OC1],
provided time characteristic is required for define time delay (DT) described in section 3.3.2(i).
Nondir is set for the scheme switch [OC1-Dir].
(ii) Characteristic of directional-OC element in the forward direction

As shown in Figure 3.3-2, the characteristic of the directional-OC elements in the forward
direction is a semi-circle based upon the border-line; the hatched area shows the operating
region of a directional-OC element.
Non-operation (No trip) zone
Reference voltage or
θ1 Polarizing voltage (Vpol2)
Operation (Trip) zone
Figure 3.3-2 Characteristic of the directional-OC element in the forward direction

1Note: Directional characteristic angle (θ) forms the angle between the reference
quantity and the directional characteristic angle line. The half plane represents
the zone of operation bordered on one side by the border line and extending in the
direction that contains both the reference (polarizing) and operating quantities.
2Note: For the polarizing voltage (Vpol), greater than 1.0 voltage should be applied for
sensing.
A reference signal, that is, a polarization signal is required by the directional OC element,
the reference signal is derived from a phase-to-phase voltage: for example, the directional OC
element for phase-A (OC-A) uses the phase-B-to-phase-C voltage rotated by 90° (VBC90°) in
- 79 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
the leading direction, this reference signal is illustrated in Figure 3.3-3. The direction of the
current in the protected circuit, in this case the phase-A current (IA), is determined from the
angle measured for IA against VBC90°. The purpose of using VBC in the 90° leading position
is so that the reference voltage (VBC90°) takes the same direction as the phase-A voltage (VA)
because the directional-sensing element requires a reference quantity that is reasonably
constant against which the current in the protected circuit can be compared. As a result, when
a fault occurs, the fault current IA will lag VBC90°. Similarly, for the phase-B directional OC
element (OC-B) where the object current is (IB) the reference voltage (VCA90°) is adopted. The
phase-C directional element (OC-C) uses the same approach as the OC-A and OC-B elements.
Table 3.3-2 shows the relationship between each current and its respective reference voltage.
VBC90°
Leading 90°
VA
VBC
VBC
Figure 3.3-3 Object current (IA) and reference voltage (VBC90°)
Table 3.3-2 Directional polarizing signal

Directional element Object current Reference voltage
OC-A IA VBC90
OC-B IB VCA90
OC-C IC VAB90
For a close-in three-phase fault, the three reference voltages VBC90°, VCA90° and
VAB90° may fall below the minimum threshold voltage for the directional OC element. In
order to cover this case, a voltage memory function is used to provide a polarizing signal. The
polarizing signals are provided during three-phase faults so that the OC element is able to
determine the direction of the fault. In addition, the directional element function determines
its output based on the loss of voltage memory and is effective while the fault current flows in
accordance with Figure 3.3-4.
- 80 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Phase difference calculation

|V||I|cos() 0 &
1 Output of
directional element
Amplitude calculation F/F &
1 1
|l| OC pickup current
Amplitude calculation
|Vpol| Set voltage (OV-Vpol)
Figure 3.3-4 Direction determination after loss of voltage memory
If a single phase is connected to a heavy load, and the other phases are not connected to
heavy loads, the user can program separately the directional OC element such that OC will
send a trip signal only when the fault current detected is in the same direction among two
phases or more of the three-phases.
A setting and a scheme switch, as well as the non-directional OC element, provide the
settings for the directional OC element: for example, the user can set the threshold value of
the OC at stage 1 with the setting [OC1] and Forward can be set for the scheme switch [OC1-
Dir]. Setting of the sensing angle (θ) is configured by the setting [OC1-Angle] with the value of
θ set in the range of 0–180°. Figure 3.3-5 shows an example of an angle and a characteristic
set with θ.
Reverse
Vpol Vpol Vpol
θ=30°
θ=90°
Max. torque
Forward
Reverse Forward Reverse Forward
θ=0° θ=30° θ=90°
Forward Reverse
Reverse
Vpol Vpol
Forward
θ=170°
θ=100°
θ=100° θ=170°
Figure 3.3-5 Examples of directional characteristic angle (θ)
- 81 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(iii) Characteristic of directional OC in the reverse direction

The reverse characteristic is a mirror image of the forward characteristic. The setting and the
scheme switch, as well as the setting of the directional OC element in the forward direction,
provides the setting of the directional OC element in the reverse direction: for example,
Reverse is set for the scheme switch [OC1-Dir] when the direction of the OC on stage 1 is
considered.
3.3.2 Inverse definite mean time and definite time characteristic

The OC element monitors the currents; when one of the currents is beyond the threshold of
operation, the OC element will operate within a period that is defined by the time
characteristic feature. The user can choose the OC operate time delay characteristics, either
dependent (inverse) time characteristic delay (i.e., IDMT) or independent (definite) time
characteristic delay (i.e., DT). The operate time of the IDMT depends upon the level of the
energizing current, and the operate time in the DT is a constant.
For the reset-time-delay in the IDMT, either inverse (dependent)-time-reset or definite

(independent)-time-reset is characterized by setting..
The user can select which characteristic will be applied to each stage of the OC element
by setting a scheme switch. We shall see the scheme switch later.
(i) DT characteristic
The operate time in the DT characteristic will be a constant time and is not affected by the
level of current. The reset time is set to zero so that resetting is performed immediately. The
user can set the operate time using a setting; it is discussed in in sections (v) and (vi).
(ii) IDMT characteristic

The operate time in the IDMT characteristic is inversely proportional to the level of the fault
current. The user can determine the operate time from a preset curve. Ten characteristic curves
are available; i.e. nine pre-installed curves covering IEC, IEEE, US and UK standard
characteristic curves and one original (user programmable) characteristic curve for which the
user can set the equation parameters. The IDMT curve equation and parameters will be
explained in section (iii).
The reset time in the IDMT is user-selectable; either inverse-time-reset or definite-time-

reset is selected. For the inverse-time-reset, the user can choose the reset time for the preset
characteristic from six characteristic curves; i.e. IEEE and US standard five pre-installed
characteristic curves and one user original characteristic curve where the user can set the
- 82 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
equation parameters. The inverse-time-reset curve equation and parameters will be discussed
in section (v).
(iii) Operate time of IDMT

The operate time in the IDMT is defined by Equation (3.3-1). (ref. IEC 60255-151):
k
t(I) = TMS × {[ α ] + 𝑐} (3.3-1)
(𝐼⁄𝐼 ) − 1
𝑠
where:
t = operate time with constant current I (seconds),
I = operate (energizing) current (amperes),
Is = overcurrent setting (amperes),
TMS = time multiplier setting number,
k, α, c = constants defining curve.
The nine pre-programmed standard characteristic curves are defined in Table 3.3-3. In
addition, one original (user-programmable) curve can be applied. One curve can be chosen for
each OC stage. Figure 3.3-6 illustrates these characteristic curves. For example, the user
should set one for the scheme switch [OC1-Timer]. (“IEC-NI" is for IEC Normal Inverse
characteristic; “IEC-VI” for IEC Very inverse; “IEC-EI” for IEC Extremely Inverse; “UK-LTI” for
UK Long Time Inverse; “IEEE-MI” for IEEE Moderately Inverse; “IEEE-VI” for IEEE Very
Inverse; “IEEE-EI” for IEEE Extremely Inverse; “US-CO8” for US CO8 Inverse; “US-CO2” for
US CO2 Short Time Inverse, and “Original” for user-programmable characteristic.)
In the IDMT, the user can also program the characteristic using time-multiplier-setting
(TMS) for the required operate time. For example, when the IEC characteristic is selected, the
user can set the TMS value using the setting [OC1-TMS-IEC] (incidentally, the default value
for the TMS is 1.00). The other TMSs are also available by the [OC1-TMS-UK], [OC1-TMS-
IEEE], [OC1-TMS-US] and [OC1-TMS-ORG].
Table 3.3-3 Constants for IDMT
Curve type k c
Curve Description α
(IEC 60255-151) sec sec
A IEC Normal Inverse (IEC-NI) 0.14 0.02 0
B IEC Very Inverse (IEC-VI) 13.5 1 0
C IEC Extremely Inverse (IEC-EI) 80 2 0
- UK Long Time Inverse (UK-LTI) 120 1 0
D IEEE Moderately Inverse (IEEE-MI) 0.0515 0.02 0.114
E IEEE Very Inverse (IEEE-VI) 19.61 2 0.491
F IEEE Extremely Inverse (IEEE-EI) 28.2 2 0.1217
- US CO8 inverse (US-CO8) 5.95 2 0.18
- US CO2 short time inverse (US-CO2) 0.02394 0.02 0.01694
- 83 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Figure 3.3-6 IDMT characteristic curves
(iv) Operate time of DT

The operate time in the DT is a constant.
Time characteristic
The user should set DT for the scheme switches [OC1-Timer]. The value of the required operate
time is set for the setting [TOC1] in the range 0.00–300.00s.
Instantaneous activation
The operate time of the instantaneous characteristic is achieved by setting zero for the [TOC1],
but the instantaneous one can also obtained when the logic signal ‘1(High)’ is programmed to
be injected at PLC connection point “OC1_INST_OP”.
(v) Reset time of IDMT

Programming the reset time characteristic is available for the IEEE standard, US standard
and original (user-programmable) inverse-time-reset characteristic†. In the IEEE standard,
for example, the user can set DEP for setting [OC1-Rtimer]. The following equation defines the
- 84 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
reset time for the inverse-time-reset characteristic. (ref. IEC 60255-151):
kr
t(I) = RTMS × [ β
] (3.3-2)
1 − (𝐼⁄𝐼 )
𝑠
where,
t = time required for the element to reset fully after complete operation (seconds),
I = energizing current (amperes),
Is = threshold setting (amperes),
RTMS = time multiplier setting for resetting,
kr = time required to reset fully after complete operation when the energizing current is
zero (seconds),
β = constants defining curve.
For setting RTMS in the IEEE standard, the user can use the setting [OC1-RTMS-IEEE]
(incidentally, the default value is 1.000). Similarly, setting [OC1-RTMS-US] and setting [OC1-
RTMS-ORG] are provided for the US standard and the original, respectively (For more
information w.r.t the value for kr and β, see Table 3.3-4; Figure 3.3-7 shows the characteristic
curves).
Table 3.3-4 Constants for inverse-time-reset characteristics

Curve Type kr
Curve Description β
IEC 60255-151 sec
A IEC Normal Inverse (IEC-NI‡) N/A N/A
B IEC Very Inverse (IEC-VI‡) N/A N/A
C IEC Extremely Inverse (IEC-EI‡) N/A N/A
- UK Long Time Inverse (UK-LTI‡) N/A N/A
D IEEE Moderately Inverse (IEEE-MI) 4.85 2
E IEEE Very Inverse (IEEE-VI) 21.6 2
F IEEE Extremely Inverse (IEEE-EI) 29.1 2
- US CO8 inverse (US-CO8) 5.95 2
- US CO2 short time inverse (US-CO2) 2.261 2
†Note: To select the inverse-time-reset characteristic, set [OC1-Rtimer]=DEP.
Conversely set [OC1-Rtimer]=DEF to select definite-time-reset characteristic,.
Note: For the setting [OC1-Rtimer]=DEP (inverse-time-reset), the integrated value will
be reduced in accordance to the magnitude of an energized current, when the
energized current is smaller than the setting [OC1]. The reducing degree will be
determined with the reset curve characteristics defined in the standards.
Note: For the setting [OC1-Rtimer]=DEF (definite-time-reset), the integrated value shall
be zero when an energized current is smaller than the setting [OC1], when the
small energized current is continued for timer setting [TOC1R]. The integrated
value will not be zero when the energized current does not flow small for the
- 85 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
setting [TOC1R]. DEF is allowed to set in the IEEE, US, and ORG. DEF is set
unconditionally in the IEC and UK (see Table 3.3-5).
Figure 3.3-7 Inverse-time-reset characteristics curves
Figure 3.3-8 illustrates that an integrating value will be influenced dependent on the
DEP or DEF setting. An energized quantity (I), where I is greater than a threshold setting
[OC1], will make an integrating value, which can determine how the element operates. If the
energized quantity (I) falls below the threshold setting [OC1], the element operation will
return to its reset stage after the time t(I) calculated in Equation (3.3-2).
- 86 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Time 
Energizing current
Energizing current
cleared by tripping
Pickup threshold in relay [OC1] threshold
Measuring quantity 0A
Inverse-time-reset characteristic
Stage to element
return
Setting
[*-Rtimer]=DEP
Integrator
Trip signal
The integration will be deceased depending on the

[OC1-RTMS-*] reset characteristics.
Definite-time-reset characteristic
Stage to element
return
Setting
[*-Rtimer]=DEF
Integrator
Trip signal
Reset time
Integration will be kept in timer [TOC1R].
The integration will start again when the energizing current The integration will be reset when the energizing current
becomes larger than [OC1] within [TOC1R]. does not become larger than [OC1] in [TOC1R].
Figure 3.3-8 Inverse-time-reset characteristics
(vi) Reset time of DT

In the DT characteristic, the reset time is designed to be instant. Thus, the user has no points
for the settings [OC1-Rtimer] and [TOC1R].
Instantaneous reset operation

The reset time for instantaneous reset is a case of no intentional delay on reset within the
definite-time-reset. The user should set 0.00 for the setting [TOC1R].
(vii) Summary of OC operation

Table 3.3-5 shows the summary of OC operation. Note that DEF will be set unconditionally in
IEC-NI, VI, EI and UK-LTI characteristics (†).
- 87 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Table 3.3-5 Type and standard board in the OC1 (A tick shows a selectable function)
IDMT
Characteristics DT
IEC-NI IEC-VI IEC-EI UK-LTI IEEE-MI IEEE-VI IEEE-EI US-CO2 US-CO8 Original
DT 
✓
Scheme switch [OC1-Timer]
IEC-NI
IEC-VI ✓
IEC-EI ✓
UK LTI ✓
IEEE-MI ✓
IEEE-VI ✓
IEEE-EI ✓
US-CO2 ✓
US-CO8 ✓
Original ✓
DEF N.A ✓† ✓† ✓† ✓† ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
✓
Scheme switch
N.A
[OC1-Rtimer]
N.A ✓
N.A ✓
DEP
N.A ✓
N.A ✓
N.A ✓
3.3.3 Threshold value for activation

The threshold current for the activation of OC is configured by settings; for example, setting
[OC1] is provided for the OC on stage 1. Note that the thresholds have distinct values among
respective stages; the user should consider an input rating selected either 1A or 5A. The input
rating is discussed separately (See Chapter Transformer replica function).
3.3.4 Reset Ratio

The ratio of the threshold current for activation to reset is set by a setting; for example, the
ratio of the OC1 is set for the setting [OC1-DPR].
3.3.5 Miscellaneous functions

(i) Harmonic detection
Harmonic current detection (2nd harmonic) is provided by the Inrush current detection (ICD)
function. Each OC can negate the operation of the OC by using a scheme switch, as a relay
detects a harmonic, which is caused by a magnetizing inrush current phenomenon as the
transformer is energized. For example, for OC1, the scheme switch [OC1-2fBlk] is provided,
and Block-3P is set when the nullification of the OC1 in the three-phase is required when
harmonic occurs. On the other hand, Block-PerP is set as the negation at single phase is
required. Non is set for the scheme switch [OC1-2fBlk] as a default.
- 88 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(ii) Blocking OC operation by VTF

The operation of the OC can be blocked by the function of VT failure supervision (VTF) with a
scheme switch. For example, Block is set for the scheme switch [OC1-VTFBlk] as the operation
of the OC1 is blocked during the VTF. Non is set for the scheme switch [OC1-VTFBlk] as a
default.
Note: The VTF function is discussed separately. See Chapter Relay application: VT
failure supervision.
(iii) Signal for TRC function

The OC1 element is able to generate a trip signal; the trip circuit function (TRC) can issue a
switch [OC1-TP1], ‘OC1-TRIP1’ signal is transferred for the TRC function if the OC1 element
output circuit (BO), which can energize the trip coil to open the circuit breaker. The OC1
element can produce six trip signals so that other scheme switches [OC1-TP2] to [OC1-TP6]
are provided. Except for the trip signals, an alarm signal can be also generated when On is set
for scheme switch [OC1-ALM].
circuit.
- 89 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
3.3.6 Scheme logic

The scheme logic of both the non-directional and the directional OC1 illustrates in Figure 3.3-9.
Each element of the OC1 provides the result of judgment whether a pickup current exceeds a
setting, and then trip signals are fed into the TRC function
8000101B60
≥1 OC1-OR
8000101B61
≥1 OC1PU-OR
OC1-EN On
8000101C20
TOC1
& & t 0 8000101B62
OC1 A 8100101C21 ≥1 OC1-OPT-A
B 8200101C22 & 8100101B63
& t 0
C ≥1 OC1-OPT-B
& & t 0 8200101B64
≥1 OC1-OPT-C
0.00–300s
8000101C24
≥1 &
8000101B65
A & &
OC1 8100101C25 ≥1
B
PU 8200101C26 & ≥1 &
&
C
Block-PerP
& ≥1 & &
OC1-2fBlk Block-3P
From ICD OC1_Timer

DT
IEC-NI
ICD-P-A ≥1 & ≥1
&
ICD-P-B IEC-VI OC1-TRIP
&
ICD-P-C ≥1 & ≥1
& IEC-EI
ICD-S-A ≥1 & ≥1
& UK-LTI
ICD-S-B
&
ICD-S-C & IEEE-MI
&
ICD-T-A & ≥1 IEEE-VI
ICD-T-B
& IEEE-EI
ICD-T-C
&
US-C02
From VTF US-C08
ORIGINAL
VTF-P_DETECT &
VTF-S_DETECT OC1-VTF_DETECT
& ≥1
VTF-T_DETECT
&
Primary
Target
Secondary OC1-TARWIND
winding
OC1-TarWind Tertiary
selected &
OC1-VTFBlk Block
≥1
800010EBB0 OC1_BLOCK
800010EBB1 OC1_INST_OP
To TRC
OC1-TP1 On 8000101B66
&
OC1-TRIP1
OC1-TP2 On
& 8000101B67
OC1-TRIP2
OC1-TP3 8000101B68
On &
OC1-TRIP3
OC1-TP4 On
& 8000101B69
OC1-TRIP4
OC1-TP5 On
& 8000101B6A
OC1-TRIP5
OC1-TP6 On
& 8000101B6B
OC1-TRIP6
OC1-ALM On
8000101B6C
& OC1-ALARM
Figure 3.3-9 Scheme logic for the OC1
- 90 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
3.3.7 Setting
Setting of TP_OC (Function ID: 45A001)
Default Model
Units
1 2 3 4 5
value
OC1-EN Off / On - OC1 protection enable Off – – X X X
OC OC4-EN Off / On - OC4 protection enable Off – – X X X
Primary / Secondary / Target transformer winding for OC1
OC1-TarWind - Primary – – X X X
Tertiary protection
NonDir / Forward /
OC1-Dir - OC1 directional characteristic NonDir – – X – X
Reverse
DT / IEC-NI / IEC-VI /
IEC-EI / UK-LTI / IEEE-
OC1-Timer MI / IEEE-VI / IEEE-EI / - OC1 delay type DT – – X X X
US-CO2 / US-CO8 /
Original
OC1-Angle 0 - 180 deg OC1 directional characteristic angle 45 – – X – X
OC1 0.02 - 250.00 A OC1 threshold (in DT mode) 5.00 – – X X X
OC1 0.02 - 25.00 A OC1 threshold (in IDMT mode) 5.00 – – X X X
OC1-DPR 10 - 100 % OC1 drop-out/pick-up ratio 100 – – X X X
TOC1 0.00 - 300.00 s OC1 operating delay time (in DT mode) 1.00 – – X X X
OC1-TMS-IEC 0.010 - 50.000 - OC1 time multiplier of IEC inverse curve 1.000 – – X X X
OC1-TMS-UK 0.010 - 50.000 - OC1 time multiplier of UK inverse curve 1.000 – – X X X
OC1-TMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - OC1 time multiplier of IEEE inverse curve 1.000 – – X X X
OC1-TMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - OC1 time multiplier of US inverse curve 1.000 – – X X X
OC1 time multiplier of Original inverse
OC1-TMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 – – X X X
curve
OC1-Rtimer DEF / DEP - OC1 reset delay type of IEEE DEF – – X X X
OC1 TOC1R 0.00 - 300.00 s OC1 definite time reset delay 0.00 – – X X X
OC1-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - OC1 user original curve coefficient 0.00000 – – X X X
OC1-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - OC1 user original curve coefficient 0.00000 – – X X X
OC1-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - OC1 user original curve coefficient 0.00000 – – X X X
OC1-kr 0.00000 - 500.00000 - OC1 user original curve coefficient 0.00000 – – X X X
OC1-b 0.00000 - 10.00000 - OC1 user original curve coefficient 0.00000 – – X X X
OC1-Rtimer DEF / DEP - OC1 reset delay type of US DEF – – X X X
OC1-Rtimer DEF / DEP - OC1 reset delay type of ORG DEF – – X X X
OC1 dependent reset time multiplier of
OC1-RTMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 – – X X X
IEEE inverse curve
OC1 dependent reset time multiplier of US
OC1-RTMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 – – X X X
inverse curve
OC1-RTMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 – – X X X
Original inverse curve
Non / Block-3P / Block-
OC1-2fBlk - OC1 operation block by 2f-detection Non – – X X X
PerP
OC1-VTFBlk Non / Block - OC1 pickup blocked the VTF Non – – X1 X1 X1
OC1-TP1 Off / On - OC1 trip signal1 for TRC driving BO circuit On – – X X X
- 91 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

Default Model
Units
1 2 3 4 5
value
OC1-ALM Off / On - OC1 alarm enable Off – – X X X
Tertiary protection
NonDir / Forward /
Reverse
US-CO2 / US-CO8 /
Original
OC2-TMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 – – X X X
curve
TOC2R 0.00 - 300.00 s OC2 definite time reset delay 0.00 – – X X X
OC2
OC2-RTMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 – – X X X
IEEE inverse curve
OC2-RTMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 – – X X X
inverse curve
OC2-RTMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 – – X X X
PerP
OC3 Tertiary protection
NonDir / Forward /
Reverse
- 92 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

Default Model
Units
1 2 3 4 5
value
US-CO2 / US-CO8 /
Original
OC3-TMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 – – X X X
curve
OC3-RTMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 – – X X X
IEEE inverse curve
OC3-RTMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 – – X X X
inverse curve
OC3-RTMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 – – X X X
PerP
Tertiary protection
NonDir / Forward /
OC4-Dir - OC4 directional characteristic NonDir – – X X X
Reverse
OC4 IEC-EI / UK-LTI / IEEE-
OC4-Timer MI / IEEE-VI / IEEE-EI / - OC4 reset delay type DT – – X X X
US-CO2 / US-CO8 /
Original
- 93 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

Default Model
Units
1 2 3 4 5
value
OC4-TMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 – – X X X
curve
OC4-RTMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 – – X X X
IEEE inverse curve
OC4-RTMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 – – X X X
inverse curve
OC4-RTMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 – – X X X
PerP
Tertiary protection
NonDir / Forward /
Reverse
US-CO2 / US-CO8 /
Original
OC5 OC5-Angle 0 - 180 deg OC5 directional characteristic angle 45 – – X – X
OC5-TMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 – – X X X
curve
- 94 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

Default Model
Units
1 2 3 4 5
value
OC5-RTMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 – – X X X
IEEE inverse curve
OC5-RTMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 – – X X X
inverse curve
OC5-RTMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 – – X X X
PerP
Tertiary protection
NonDir / Forward /
Reverse
US-CO2 / US-CO8 /
Original
OC6 TOC6 0.00 - 300.00 s OC6 operating delay time (in DT mode) 1.00 – – X X X
OC6-TMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 – – X X X
curve
- 95 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

Default Model
Units
1 2 3 4 5
value
OC6-RTMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 – – X X X
IEEE inverse curve
OC6-RTMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 – – X X X
inverse curve
OC6-RTMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 – – X X X
PerP
Tertiary protection
NonDir / Forward /
Reverse
US-CO2 / US-CO8 /
Original
OC7
OC7-TMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 – – X X X
curve
OC7-RTMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 – – X X X
IEEE inverse curve
OC7-RTMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 – – X X X
inverse curve
OC7-RTMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 – – X X X
- 96 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

Default Model
Units
1 2 3 4 5
value
PerP
Tertiary protection
NonDir / Forward /
Reverse
US-CO2 / US-CO8 /
Original
OC8-TMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 – – X X X
curve
OC8
OC8-RTMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 – – X X X
IEEE inverse curve
OC8-RTMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 – – X X X
inverse curve
OC8-RTMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 – – X X X
PerP
- 97 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

Default Model
Units
1 2 3 4 5
value
- 98 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

TP_OC (Function ID : 45A001)
8B00001B6B OC-ALARM Alarm signal by OC protection operation
8C00001B6C OC-OPT-A OC protection operated (phase-A)
8D00001B6D OC-OPT-B OC protection operated (phase-B)
8E00001B6E OC-OPT-C OC protection operated (phase-C)
8000001B60 OC-TRIP1 Trip1 signal by OC protection operation
8000101C20 OC1-A OC1 relay element operated (phase-A)
8B00101B6C OC1-ALARM Alarm signal by OC1 protection operation
8100101C21 OC1-B OC1 relay element operated (phase-B)
8200101C22 OC1-C OC1 relay element operated (phase-C)
8000101B65 OC1-OPT OC1 protection operated
8000101B62 OC1-OPT-A OC1 protection operated (phase-A)
8100101B63 OC1-OPT-B OC1 protection operated (phase-B)
8200101B64 OC1-OPT-C OC1 protection operated (phase-C)
8000101B60 OC1-OR OC1 relay element operated (3-phases OR)
8000101B66 OC1-TRIP1 Trip1 signal by OC1 protection operation
8400101B6A OC1-TRIP5 Trip5 signal by OC1 protection operation
8500101B6B OC1-TRIP6 Trip6 signal by OC1 protection operation
8000101C24 OC1PU-A OC1 relay operation level pick up (phase-A)
8100101C25 OC1PU-B OC1 relay operation level pick up (phase-B)
8200101C26 OC1PU-C OC1 relay operation level pick up (phase-C)
8000101B61 OC1PU-OR OC1 relay operation level pick up (3-phases OR)
8000101BB0 OC1_BLOCK OC1 protection block command
8000101BB1 OC1_INST_OP OC1 protection instant operation command
800010100D OC1_SECONDARY_RATING OC1 secondary rating
- 99 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

8A00301C22 OC3-C OC3 relay element operated (phase-C)
8A00301B64 OC3-OPT-C OC3 protection operated (phase-C)
8A00301C26 OC3PU-C OC3 relay operation level pick up (phase-C)
8C00401C20 OC4-A OC4 relay element operated (phase-A)
8D00401C21 OC4-B OC4 relay element operated (phase-B)
8E00401C22 OC4-C OC4 relay element operated (phase-C)
8C00401B62 OC4-OPT-A OC4 protection operated (phase-A)
8D00401B63 OC4-OPT-B OC4 protection operated (phase-B)
8E00401B64 OC4-OPT-C OC4 protection operated (phase-C)
- 100 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

8C00401C24 OC4PU-A OC4 relay operation level pick up (phase-A)
8D00401C25 OC4PU-B OC4 relay operation level pick up (phase-B)
8E00401C26 OC4PU-C OC4 relay operation level pick up (phase-C)
- 101 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

8A00701C22 OC7-C OC7 relay element operated (phase-C)
8A00701B64 OC7-OPT-C OC7 protection operated (phase-C)
8A00701C26 OC7PU-C OC7 relay operation level pick up (phase-C)
8C00801C20 OC8-A OC8 relay element operated (phase-A)
8D00801C21 OC8-B OC8 relay element operated (phase-B)
8E00801C22 OC8-C OC8 relay element operated (phase-C)
8C00801B62 OC8-OPT-A OC8 protection operated (phase-A)
8D00801B63 OC8-OPT-B OC8 protection operated (phase-B)
- 102 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

8E00801B64 OC8-OPT-C OC8 protection operated (phase-C)
8C00801C24 OC8PU-A OC8 relay operation level pick up (phase-A)
8D00801C25 OC8PU-B OC8 relay operation level pick up (phase-B)
8E00801C26 OC8PU-C OC8 relay operation level pick up (phase-C)

800010EBB0 OC1_BLOCK OC1 protection block command
800010EBB1 OC1_INST_OP OC1 protection instant operation command
- 103 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Earth fault protection (EF)

The earth fault function (EF) detects earth fault conditions and operates accordingly. The EF
function has both directional and non-directional elements. The EF function has eight stages
(EF1 to EF8), which operate independently, can be selected using scheme switches. To simplify,
the EF1 function is discussed but the description is applicable to all other stages (EF2 to EF8).
The EF1 is enabled using the scheme switch [EF1-EN]; the transformer winding to be protected
is set using the scheme switch [EF1-TarWind]. The input currents and voltages for the EF
function are obtained with the FEP_COMMON function (refer Chapter Transformer replica
function: FEP_COMMON function).
TP_REPLICA TP_EF TP_TRC
EF1 to EF8
EF
EF relay EF logic trip signal
(TRIP CIRCUIT)
FEP_COMMON
element sequence
CT polarity
compensated
Dir, Type,
TarWind-P/S/T
Va, Vb, Vc, I0,Type-VT (3PN/3PP/1PN/1PP/1N), CT secondary rating, Full scale, ICD Output
Figure 3.4-1 EF block diagram
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
3D – – 3E – – 3F – –
3.4.1 Non-directional DT/IDMT  – –  – –  – –
3.4.2 Directional DT/IDMT  – – NA – –  – –
3.4.5(ii) Operation blocked by VTF NA – – NA – – NA – –
- 104 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
3.4.1 Relay polarity

The user can choose either non-directional EF or directional EF for each EF stage. In addition,
the user can further select either the forward or the direction for each of the directional EF
elements selected.
(i) Characteristic of non-directional EF

The characteristic of the non-directional type EF function is a circle at the origin. A setting and
a scheme switch is used to configure each non-directional EF element; i.e., the user can set the
threshold value of the non-directional EF element for stage1 using setting [EF1], provided time
characteristic is required for define time delay (DT) described in section 3.4.2(i). The user
should set NonDir for the scheme switch [EF1-Dir].
(ii) Characteristic of directional-EF in the forward direction

As shown in Figure 3.4-2, the characteristic of the directional-EF elements in the forward
region of the directional-EF element.
θ Polarizing voltage (−3Vo)
φ
Figure 3.4-2 Characteristic of the directional-EF element in the forward direction

Note: Directional characteristic angle (θ) forms the angle between the reference quantity
and the directional characteristic angle line. The half plane represents the zone of
operation bordered on one side by the border line and extending in the direction
that contains both the reference (polarizing) and operating quantities.
A setting and a scheme switch, as well as the non-directional EF element, provide the
settings for the directional EF element. For example, the user can set the threshold value (IEF)
for stage 1 with the setting [EF1]; Forward can be set for the scheme switch [EF1-Dir]. Setting
- 105 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
of the sensing angle (θ) is configured by the setting [EF1-Angle] with the value of θ set in the
range of 0–180°. Figure 3.4-3 shows an example of an angle and a characteristic using the θ.
The operation of the EF element is based upon the following equation.

3𝐼0 ≥ 𝐼𝐸𝐹 (3.4-1)
3𝐼0 × cos(φ − θ) ≥ 0 (3.4-2)
3𝑉0 ≥ 𝐸𝐹_𝑉𝑝𝑜𝑙 (3.4-3)
where
3Io = residual current
3Vo = residual voltage
−3Vo = reference voltage (or polarizing voltage)
φ= lagging angle
θ = EF setting angle
IEF = Setting value of the EF element ([EF1] and the others)
EF_Vpol = Setting value of the polarizing voltage ([EF-Vpol])
Note: In the case of an internal fault, the phase angle is equal to the angle of the zero-
sequence impedance of the system, in a directly-earthed system this value is in
the range of approximately 50° to 90°. The sensing angle θ of the EF element can
be set between 0° to 180°. The minimum voltage necessary to maintain
directionality can be set from 0.5 to 100.0 V.
Reverse
−3Vo −3Vo −3Vo
θ=30°
θ=90°
Angle line
Forward
θ=0° θ=30° θ=90°
Forward Reverse
Reverse
−3Vo −3Vo
Forward
θ=170°
θ=100°
θ=100° θ=170°
Figure 3.4-3 Examples of directional characteristic angle (θ)
- 106 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(iii) Characteristic of directional EF in the reverse direction

The reverse characteristic is a mirror image of the forward characteristic. The setting and the
scheme switch, in addition to providing the setting of the directional EF element in the forward
direction, provides the setting of the directional EF element in the reverse direction: for
example, Reverse is set for the scheme switch [EF1-Dir] when the direction of the EF element
for stage 1 is considered.
3.4.2 Inverse time and definite time delay characteristic

The EF element monitors the earth-fault currents; when one of the currents is beyond the
threshold for the operation, the EF element will operate within a period that is defined by the
time characteristic feature. The user can choose the EF operate time delay characteristics,
either dependent (inverse) time characteristic delay (i.e., IDMT) or independent (definite) time
characteristic delay (i.e., DT). The operate time of the IDMT depends upon the level of the
energizing current, and the operate time in the DT is a constant.
For the reset time delay in the IDMT, either inverse(dependent)-time-reset or

definite(independent)-time-reset is characterized by the setting.
The user can select which characteristic will be applied to each stage of the EF
element by setting a scheme switch. We shall see the scheme switches later.
user can set the operate time using a setting; it is discussed in section (iv).

current. The user can choose the operate time from a preset curve. Ten characteristic curves
The reset time of the IDMT is user selectable; either inverse-time-reset or definite-time-
reset is selected. For the inverse-time-rest, the user can choose the reset time for the preset
characteristic curves and one user original characteristic carver where the user can set the
- 107 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
in section (v).

The dependent time in the IDMT is defined by Equation (3.4-4). (ref IEC 60255-151):
k
𝑡(𝐼) = 𝑇𝑀𝑆 × {[ α ] + c} (3.4-4)
(I⁄I ) − 1
s
where:
t = operating time for constant current I (seconds),
Is = earth fault current setting (amperes),
TMS = time multiplier setting,
The nine pre-programmed standard characteristic curve are defined in Table 3.4-2. In
each EF stage. Figure 3.4-4 illustrates these characteristic curves. For example, the user
should set one for the scheme switches [EF1-Timer]. (That is, “IEC-NI” is for IEC Normal
Inverse, “IEC-VI” for IEC Very Inverse, “IEC-EI” for IEC Extremely Inverse, “UK-LTI” for UK
Long Time Inverse, “IEEE-MI “ for IEEE Moderately Inverse, “IEEE-VI” for IEEE Very Inverse,
“IEEE-EI” for IEEE Extremely Inverse, “US-CO2” for US CO2 short time inverse, “US-CO8” for
US CO8 inverse, and “Original” for user-programmable characteristic.)
In the IDMT operation, the user can also program the characteristic using time-
multiplier-setting (TMS) for the required operate time. For example, the IEC characteristic is
selected, the user can set the TMS value using the setting [EF1-TMS-IEC] (incidentally, the
default value of the TMS is 1.00). The other TMSs are also available by the [EF1-TMS-UK],
[EF1-TMS-IEEE], [EF1-TMS-US] and [EF1-TMS-ORG].
Curve type
Curve Description k α c
(IEC 60255-151)
- 108 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Figure 3.4-4 IDMT Characteristics curves

Time characteristic
The user should set DT for the scheme switch [EF1-Timer]. The value of the required operate
time is set for the setting [TEF1] in the range 0.00–300.00s.
The instantaneous operation characteristic is achieved by setting zero for the [TEF1], but the
instantaneous one can be also obtained when the logic signal ‘1(High)” is programmed to be
injected at the PLC connection point “EF1_INST_OP”.
(v) Reset time for IDMT

and original (user-programmable) dependent time characteristic†. In the IEEE standard, for
- 109 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
example, the user can set DEP for setting [EF1-Rtimer]. The following equation defines the
reset time for the inverse-time-reset characteristic (ref. IEC 60255-151):
kr
𝑡(I) = 𝑅𝑇𝑀𝑆 × [ β
] (3.4-2)
1 − (I⁄I )
s
where:
zero
RTMS = time multiplier setting for resetting.
For setting RTMS in the IEEE standard, the user can use setting [EF1-RTMS-IEEE]
(incidentally, the default value is 1.000). Similarly, settings [EF1-RTMS-US] and [EF1-RTMS-
ORG] are provided for the US standard and the original, respectively (For more information
w.r.t the values for the kr and β, see Table 3.4-3; Figure 3.4-5 shows the characteristic curves).

Curve Type kr
IEC 60255-151 sec
†Note: To select the inverse-time-reset characteristic, set [EF1-Rtimer]=DEP. Conversely
set [EF1-Rtimer]=DEF to select definite-time-reset characteristic,.
Note: For the setting [EF1-Rtimer]=DEP (inverse-time-reset), the integrated value will
energized current is smaller than the setting [EF1]. The reducing degree will be
Note: For the setting [EF1-Rtimer]=DEF (definite-time-reset), the integrated value shall
be zero when an energized current is smaller than the setting [EF1], when the
small energized current is continued for timer setting [TEF1R]. The integrated
value will not be zero when the energized current does not flow small for the
setting [TEF1R]. DEF is allowed to set in the IEEE, US, and ORG. DEF is set
- 110 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
unconditionally in the IEC and UK (See Table 3.4-4).
- 111 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
[EF1], will make an integrating value, which can determine how the element operates. If the
energized quantity (I) falls below the threshold setting [EF1], the element operation will return
to its reset stage after the time t(I) calculated in Equation (3.4-2).
Time 
Energizing current
Energizing current
cleared by tripping
Pickup threshold in relay [EF1] threshold
Measured quantity 0A
Stage to element
operation
Setting Reset
[*-Rtimer]=DEF time
Integrator
Trip signal
The integration can be kept for
timer [TEF1R].
The integration will be reset when the
timer [TEF1R] is expired.
Stage to element
operation
Setting
[*-Rtimer]=DEP
Integrator
Trip signal
The integration will be deceased in accordance

with rest [EF1-RTMS-*] characteristics.

for settings [EF1-Rtimer] and [TEF1R].
(vii) Summary of EF operation

Table 3.4-4 shows a summary for EF operation. Note that DEF will be set unconditionally in
- 112 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Table 3.4-4 Type and standard board in the EF1 (A tick represents a selectable function)
IDMT
Characteristics DT
DT 
IEC-NI ✓
Scheme switch [EF1-Timer]
IEC-VI ✓
IEC-EI ✓
UK LTI ✓
IEEE-MI ✓
IEEE-VI ✓
IEEE-EI ✓
US-CO2 ✓
US-CO8 ✓
Original ✓
DEF N.A ✓† ✓† ✓† ✓† ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
✓
Scheme switch
N.A
[EF1-Rtimer]
N.A ✓
N.A ✓
DEP
N.A ✓
N.A ✓
N.A ✓
3.4.3 Threshold level for operation

The value of threshold current at which the EF (IEF) element will pick-up is configured by
settings; the setting [EF1] is provided for both the IDMT and the DT characteristic.
Note that the thresholds have distinct values among respective stages; the user should
consider an input rating selected either 1A or 5A. The input rating is discussed separately (See
Chapter Transformer replica function).
3.4.4 Reset Ratio

The ratio of the threshold current for pick-up to reset is applied using a setting; for example,
the ratio for the EF1 element is set using the setting [EF1-DPR]. The reset ratios for the other
EF elements are also provided.

(i) Blocking EF by ICD
The operation of each EF element can be blocked if the ICD function detects a second harmonic
current caused by the magnetizing inrush current phenomenon when a transformer is
energized. For example, for the EF1 element, the scheme switch [EF1-2fBlk] is provided, and
Block should be set when the user wishes to block the EF1 element when the second harmonic
associated with magnetizing inrush is present. Non is set for the scheme switch [EF1-2fBlk] as
the default setting. For more information about the ICD function, see Chapter Relay
application: Inrush current detection function.
- 113 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(ii) Blocking EF by VTF

The operation of the EF element can be blocked by the voltage transformer failure (VTF)
function via a scheme switch. For example, Block is set for the scheme switch [EF1-VTFBlk] to
block the operation of the EF1 element during a VTF condition. Non is set for the scheme
switch [EF1-VTFBlk] as a default.
(iii) Signal of EF trip

The EF1 element is able to generate a trip signal; the trip circuit function (TRC) can issue a
switch [EF1-TP1], ‘EF1-TRIP1’ signal is transferred for the TRC function if the EF1 element
output circuit (BO), which can energize the trip coil to open the circuit breaker. The EF1
element can produce six trip signals so that other scheme switches [EF1-TP2] to [EF1-TP6] are
provided. Except for the trip signals, an alarm signal can be also generated when On is set for
scheme switch [EF1-ALM].
circuit.
3.4.6 Scheme logic

The scheme logic of both the non-directional and the directional EF1 illustrates in Figure 3.4-7
and Figure 3.4-8. Each element of the EF1 provides the result of decision whether a pickup
current exceeds a setting, and then trip signals are fed into the trip circuit, which is discussed
separately. (See Chapter Relay application: Trip circuit)
- 114 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
8000101C23
EF1 TEF1
& t
& 0 8000101B60
≥1 EF1-OPT
0.00–300s
8000101C27
EF1 PU ≥1
& &
&
EF1-ICD-OR
EF1-TARWIND
EF1-EN On
EF1-VTF_DETECT & ≥1
EF1-VTFBlk Block
800010EBB0 EF1_BLOCK
800010EBB1 EF1_INST_OP
DT DT IDMT
IEC-NI
≥1
IEC-VI
IEC-EI
UK-LTI
IEEE-MI
IEEE-VI
IEEE-EI
US-C02
US-C08
EF1_TYPE ORIGINAL
Figure 3.4-7 Scheme logic for EF1 (1)

Note: EF1 PU is EF1 operation on pick up.
8000101B61
To TRC
EF1-OPT
& & EF1-TRIP1
EF1-TP1 On 8100101B62
& & EF1-TRIP2

EF1-TP2 8200101B63
On
& & EF1-TRIP3

EF1-TP3
On 8300101B64
& & EF1-TRIP4

EF1-TP4 8400101B65
On
& & EF1-TRIP5
EF1-TP5 8500101B66
On
& & EF1-TRIP6
EF1-TP6 8B00101B6C
On
& & EF1-ALARM
EF1-ALM
On
Figure 3.4-8 Scheme logic for EF1 (2)
- 115 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
3.4.7 Setting
Setting of TP_EF (Function ID: 45A401)
Default Model
Units
1 2 3 4 5
value
EF1-EN Off / On - EF1 protection enable Off – – X X X
EF EF4-EN Off / On - EF4 protection enable Off – – X X X
Primary / Secondary /
EF1-TarWind - Target transformer winding for EF1 protection Primary – – X X X
Tertiary
NonDir / Forward /
EF1-Dir - EF1 directional characteristic NonDir – – X – X
Reverse
EF1-Timer MI / IEEE-VI / IEEE-EI / - EF1 delay type DT – – X X X
US-CO2 / US-CO8 /
Original
EF1-Angle 0 - 180 deg EF1 directional characteristic angle 45 – – X – X
EF1-Vpol 0.5 - 100.0 V EF1 polarizing voltage level 3.0 – – X X X
EF1 0.02 - 250.00 A EF1 threshold (in DT mode) 1.50 – – X X X
EF1 0.02 - 25.00 A EF1 threshold (in IDMT mode) 1.50 – – X X X
EF1-DPR 10 - 100 % EF1 drop-out/pick-up ratio 100 – – X X X
TEF1 0.00 - 300.00 s EF1 operating delay time (in DT mode) 1.00 – – X X X
EF1-TMS-IEC 0.010 - 50.000 - EF1 time multiplier of IEC inverse curve 1.000 – – X X X
EF1-TMS-UK 0.010 - 50.000 - EF1 time multiplier of UK inverse curve 1.000 – – X X X
EF1-TMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - EF1 time multiplier of IEEE inverse curve 1.000 – – X X X
EF1-TMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - EF1 time multiplier of US inverse curve 1.000 – – X X X
EF1-TMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - EF1 time multiplier of Original inverse curve 1.000 – – X X X
EF1-Rtimer DEF / DEP - EF1 reset delay type of IEEE DEF – – X X X
EF1 TEF1R 0.00 - 300.00 s EF1 definite time reset delay 0.00 – – X X X
EF1-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - EF1 user original curve coefficient 0.00000 – – X X X
EF1-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - EF1 user original curve coefficient 0.00000 – – X X X
EF1-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - EF1 user original curve coefficient 0.00000 – – X X X
EF1-kr 0.00000 - 500.00000 - EF1 user original curve coefficient 0.00000 – – X X X
EF1-b 0.00000 - 10.00000 - EF1 user original curve coefficient 0.00000 – – X X X
EF1-Rtimer DEF / DEP - EF1 reset delay type of US DEF – – X X X
EF1-Rtimer DEF / DEP - EF1 reset delay type of ORG DEF – – X X X
EF1 dependent reset time multiplier of IEEE
EF1-RTMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 – – X X X
inverse curve
EF1 dependent reset time multiplier of US inverse
EF1-RTMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 – – X X X
curve
EF1 dependent reset time multiplier of Original
EF1-RTMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 – – X X X
inverse curve
EF1-2fBlk Non / Block - EF1 operation block by 2f-detection Non – – X X X
EF1-VTFblk Non / Block - EF1 pickup blocked by VTF operation Non – – – X1 –
EF1-TP1 Off / On - EF1 trip signal1 for TRC driving BO circuit On – – X X X
EF1-ALM Off / On - EF1 alarm enable Off – – X X X
- 116 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

Default Model
Units
1 2 3 4 5
value
Tertiary
NonDir / Forward /
Reverse
US-CO2 / US-CO8 /
Original
EF2-RTMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 – – X X X
inverse curve
EF2-RTMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 – – X X X
curve
EF2-RTMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 – – X X X
inverse curve
Tertiary
NonDir / Forward /
Reverse
EF3
US-CO2 / US-CO8 /
Original
- 117 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

Default Model
Units
1 2 3 4 5
value
EF3-Angle 0 - 180 deg EF3 directional characteristic angle 45 – – X X
TEF3R 0.00 - 300.00 s EF3 definite time reset delay 0.00 – – X X X
EF3-RTMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 – – X X X
inverse curve
EF3-RTMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 – – X X X
curve
EF3-RTMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 – – X X X
inverse curve
Tertiary
NonDir / Forward /
Reverse
US-CO2 / US-CO8 /
EF4 Original
- 118 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

Default Model
Units
1 2 3 4 5
value
EF4-RTMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 – – X X X
inverse curve
EF4-RTMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 – – X X X
curve
EF4-RTMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 – – X X X
inverse curve
Tertiary
NonDir / Forward /
Reverse
US-CO2 / US-CO8 /
Original
EF5
- 119 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

Default Model
Units
1 2 3 4 5
value
EF5-RTMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 – – X X X
inverse curve
EF5-RTMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 – – X X X
curve
EF5-RTMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 – – X X X
inverse curve
Tertiary
NonDir / Forward /
Reverse
US-CO2 / US-CO8 /
Original
EF6 EF6-TMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - EF6 time multiplier of IEEE inverse curve 1.000 – – X X X
EF6-RTMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 – – X X X
inverse curve
EF6-RTMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 – – X X X
curve
EF6-RTMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 – – X X X
inverse curve
- 120 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

Default Model
Units
1 2 3 4 5
value
Tertiary
NonDir / Forward /
Reverse
US-CO2 / US-CO8 /
Original
EF7-RTMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 – – X X X
inverse curve
EF7-RTMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 – – X X X
curve
EF7-RTMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 – – X X X
inverse curve
- 121 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

Default Model
Units
1 2 3 4 5
value
Tertiary
NonDir / Forward /
Reverse
US-CO2 / US-CO8 /
Original
EF8-RTMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 – – X X X
inverse curve
EF8-RTMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 – – X X X
curve
EF8-RTMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 – – X X X
inverse curve
- 122 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

TP_EF (Function ID : 45A401)
8B00001B6B EF-ALARM Alarm signal by EF protection operation
8000001B60 EF-TRIP1 Trip1 signal by EF protection operation
8000101C23 EF1 EF1 relay element operated
8B00101B6C EF1-ALARM Alarm signal by EF1 protection
8000101B60 EF1-OPT EF1 protection operated
8000101B61 EF1-TRIP1 Trip1 signal by EF1 protection
8000101C27 EF1PU EF1 relay operation level pick up
8000101BB0 EF1_BLOCK EF1 protection block command
8000101BB1 EF1_INST_OP EF1 protection instant operation command
800010100D EF1_SECONDARY_RATING EF1 secondary rating
- 123 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

- 124 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)


TP_EF (Function ID: 45A401)
800010EBB0 EF1_BLOCK EF1 protection block command
800010EBB1 EF1_INST_OP EF1 protection instant operation command
- 125 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

TP_EF (Function ID: 45A401)
- 126 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Earth fault protection with neutral current (EFIn)

The earth fault protection using neutral current (EFIn) is able to detect earth fault conditions
and issue a trip command accordingly. The EFIn function has four non-directional stages
(EFIn1 to EFIn4) operating independently; the operation can be switched using scheme
switches. The EFIn1 stage is discussed for simplify, but the other stages (EFIn2 to EFIn4) are
also applicable. The EFIn1 stage is enabled using scheme switch [EFIn1-EN]; the transformer
winding to be protected is selected using scheme switch [EFIn1-TarWind]. The entering neutral
currents for the EFIn function are obtained in the FEP_COMMON function Chapter
Transformer replica functions: FEP_COMMON function).
TP_REPLICA TP_EFIn TP_TRC
EFIn1 to EFIn4
EFIn
EFIn relay EFIn logic trip signal
FEP_COMMON
element sequence (TRIP CIRCUIT)
CT polarity
compensated
[EFIn*-Type] (Off / On)

[EFIn*-TarWind] (P/S/T)
In (1CTn, 2CTn, 3CTn), CT secondary rating, Full scale
Figure 3.5-1 EFIn block diagram
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
3D – – 3E – – 3F – –
– Main features  – – NA – –  – –
- 127 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

The EFIn element monitors a couple of neutral currents, and when one of the neutral currents
reaches the threshold set setting, the EFIn element will operate after the operation time delay
defined by the time characteristic feature. The user can choose the EFIn operate time delay
characteristics, either dependent (inverse) time characteristic delay (i.e., IDMT) or
independent (definite) time characteristic delay (i.e., DT). The operate time of the IDMT
depends upon the level of the energizing current, and the operate time in the DT is a constant.
For the reset time delay in the IDMT, either inverse(dependent)-time-reset or

The user can select which characteristic will be applied to each stage of the EFIn
element by setting a scheme switch. We shall see the scheme switches later.
user can set the operate time using a setting; it is discussed in section (iv).

The reset time of the IDMT is user selectable; either inverse-time-reset or definite-time-
reset is selected. For the inverse-time-rest, the user can choose the reset time for the preset
characteristic curves and one user original characteristic carver where the user can set the
in section (v).

k
𝑡(𝐼) = 𝑇𝑀𝑆 × {[ α ] + c} (3.5-1)
(I⁄I ) − 1
s
- 128 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
where:
The nine pre-programmed standard characteristic curve are defined in Table 3.4-2. In
each EFIn stage. Figure 3.4-4 illustrates these characteristic curves. For example, the user
should set one for the scheme switches [EFIn1-Timer]. (That is, “IEC-NI” is for IEC Normal
Inverse, “IEC-VI” for IEC Very Inverse, “IEC-EI” for IEC Extremely Inverse, “UK-LTI” for UK
Long Time Inverse, “IEEE-MI “ for IEEE Moderately Inverse, “IEEE-VI” for IEEE Very Inverse,
“IEEE-EI” for IEEE Extremely Inverse, “US-CO2” for US CO2 short time inverse, “US-CO8” for
US CO8 inverse, and “Original” for user-programmable characteristic.)
multiplier-setting (TMS) for the required operate time. For example, the IEC characteristic is
selected, the user can set the TMS value using the setting [EFIn1-TMS-IEC] (incidentally, the
default value of the TMS is 1.00). The other TMSs are also available by the [EFIn1-TMS-UK],
[EFIn1-TMS-IEEE], [EFIn1-TMS-US] and [EFIn1-TMS-ORG].
Curve type
(IEC 60255-151)
- 129 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

Time characteristic
The user should set DT for the scheme switch [EFIn1-Timer]. The value of the required operate
time is set for the setting [TEFIn1] in the range 0.00–300.00s.
The instantaneous operation characteristic is achieved by setting zero for the [TEFIn1], but the
instantaneous one can be also obtained when the logic signal ‘1(High)” is programmed to be
injected at the PLC connection point “EFIN1_INST_OP”.
(v) Reset time for IDMT

- 130 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
example, the user can set DEP for the setting [EFIn1-Rtimer]. The following equation defines
the reset time for the inverse-time-reset characteristic (ref. IEC 60255-151):
kr
] (3.5-2)
1 − (I⁄I )
s
where:
zero
For setting RTMS in the IEEE standard, the user can use setting [EFIn1-RTMS-IEEE]
(incidentally, the default value is 1.000). Similarly, settings [EFIn1-RTMS-US] and [EFIn1-
information w.r.t the values for the kr and β, see Table 3.4-3; Figure 3.4-5 shows the
characteristic curves).

Curve Type kr
IEC 60255-151 sec
†Note: To select the inverse-time-reset characteristic, set [EFIn1-Rtimer]=DEP.
Conversely set [EFIn1-Rtimer]=DEF to select definite-time-reset characteristic,.
Note: For the setting [EFIn1-Rtimer]=DEP (inverse-time-reset), the integrated value will
energized current is smaller than the setting [EFIn1]. The reducing degree will be
Note: For the setting [EFIn1-Rtimer]=DEF (definite-time-reset), the integrated value
shall be zero when an energized current is smaller than the setting [EFIn1], when
the small energized current is continued for timer setting [TEFIn1R]. The
integrated value will not be zero when the energized current does not flow small
- 131 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
for the setting [TEFIn1R]. DEF is allowed to set in the IEEE, US, and ORG. DEF is
set unconditionally in the IEC and UK (See Table 3.4-4).
[EFIn1], will make an integrating value, which can determine how the element operates. If the
energized quantity (I) falls below the threshold setting [EFIn1], the element operation will
- 132 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Time 
Energizing current
Energizing current
cleared by tripping
Pickup threshold in relay [EFIn1] threshold
Measured quantity 0A
Stage to element
operation
Setting Reset
[*-Rtimer]=DEF time
Integrator
Trip signal
The integration can be kept for
timer [TEFIn1R].
The integration will be reset when the
timer [TEFIn1R] is expired.
Stage to element
operation
Setting
[*-Rtimer]=DEP
Integrator
Trip signal
The integration will be deceased in accordance

with rest [EFIn1-RTMS-*] characteristics.

for settings [EFIn1-Rtimer] and [TEFIn1R].
(vii) Summary of EFIn operation

Table 3.4-4 shows a summary for EFIn operation. Note that DEF will be set unconditionally in
- 133 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Table 3.5-4 Type and standard board in the EFIn1 (A tick represents a selectable function)
IDMT
Characteristics DT
DT 
✓
Scheme switch [EFIn1-Timer]
IEC-NI
IEC-VI ✓
IEC-EI ✓
UK LTI ✓
IEEE-MI ✓
IEEE-VI ✓
IEEE-EI ✓
US-CO2 ✓
US-CO8 ✓
Original ✓
DEF N.A ✓† ✓† ✓† ✓† ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
✓
Scheme switch
[EFIn1-Rtimer]
N.A
N.A ✓
N.A ✓
DEP
N.A ✓
N.A ✓
N.A ✓
3.5.2 Threshold level for operation

The value of threshold current at which the EFIn element will pick-up is configured by
settings; the setting [EFIn1] is provided for both the IDMT and the DT characteristic.
Note that the thresholds have distinct values among respective stages; the user should
consider an input rating selected either 1A or 5A. The input rating is discussed separately (See
Chapter Transformer replica function).
3.5.3 Reset Ratio

The ratio of the threshold current for pick-up to reset is applied using a setting; for example,
the ratio for the EFIn1 element is set using the setting [EFIn1-DPR]. The reset ratios for the
other EFIn elements are also provided.

The EFIn1 element is able to generate a trip signal; the trip circuit function (TRC) can issue a
switch [EFIn1-TP1], ‘EFIn1-TRIP1’ signal is transferred for the TRC function if the EFIn1
EFIn1 element can produce six trip signals so that other scheme switches [EFIn1-TP2] to
[EFIn1-TP6] are provided. Except for the trip signals, an alarm signal can be also generated
when On is set for scheme switch [EFIn1-ALM].
- 134 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
circuit.
- 135 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
3.5.5 Scheme logic

The scheme logic of EFIn1 is illustrated in Figure 3.5-5. Each stage of the EFIn provides the
result of judgment whether a pickup current exceeds a setting, and then trip signals are fed
into the trip circuit, which is discussed separately. (See Chapter Relay application: Trip circuit
function)
8000101C23
EFIn1 TEFIN1
& t 0 8000101B60
&
≥1 EFIn1-OPT
0.00–300s
8000101C27
EFIn1 PU ≥1
& & &
1NCT
EFIn1-TARWIND 2NCT
3NCT
EFIn1-EN On
800010EBB0 EFIn1_BLOCK 1
800010EBB1 EFIn1_INST_OP
DT
DT
IEC-NI
≥1
IEC-VI IDMT
IEC-EI
UK-LTI
IEEE-MI
IEEE-VI
IEEE-EI
US-C02
EFIn1_TYPE US-C08
ORIGINAL
EFIn1-TP1 8000101B61 To TRC

On
& EFIn1-TRIP1
EFIn1-TP2 On 8100101B62
& EFIn1-TRIP2
EFIn1-TP3
On 8200101B63
& EFIn1-TRIP3
EFIn1-TP4 On 8300101B64
&
EFIn1-TRIP4
EFIn1-TP5 On 8400101B65
& EFIn1-TRIP5
EFIn1-TP6 On 8500101B66
&
EFIn1-TRIP6
EFIn1-ALM
On 8B00101B67
& EFIn1-ALARM
Figure 3.5-5 Scheme logic for EFIn1

Note: EFIn1 PU is EFIn1 operation on pick up.
- 136 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
3.5.6 Setting
Setting of TP_EFIN (Function ID: 45A801)
Default Model
Units
1 2 3 4 5
value
EFIn1-EN Off / On - EFIn1 protection enable Off – – X – X
EFI EFIn2-EN Off / On - EFIn2 protection enable Off – – X – X
EFIn1-TarWind 1NCT / 2NCT / 3NCT - Target transformer winding for EFIn1 protection 1NCT – – X – X
DT / IEC-NI / IEC-VI
/ IEC-EI / UK-LTI /
EFIn1-Timer IEEE-MI / IEEE-VI / - EFIn1 delay type DT – – X – X
IEEE-EI / US-CO2 /
US-CO8 / Original
EFIn1 0.02 - 250.00 A EFIn1 threshold (in DT mode) 1.50 – – X – X
EFIn1 0.02 - 25.00 A EFIn1 threshold (in IDMT mode) 1.50 – – X – X
EFIn1-DPR 10 - 100 % EFIn1 drop-out/pick-up ratio 100 – – X – X
TEFIn1 0.00 - 300.00 s EFIn1 operating delay time (in DT mode) 1.00 – – X – X
EFIn1-TMS-IEC 0.010 - 50.000 - EFIn1 time multiplier of IEC inverse curve 1.000 – – X – X
EFIn1-TMS-UK 0.010 - 50.000 - EFIn1 time multiplier of UK inverse curve 1.000 – – X – X
EFIn1-TMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - EFIn1 time multiplier of IEEE inverse curve 1.000 – – X – X
EFIn1-TMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - EFIn1 time multiplier of US inverse curve 1.000 – – X – X
EFIn1-TMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - EFIn1 time multiplier of Original inverse curve 1.000 – – X – X
EFIn1-Rtimer DEF / DEP - EFIn1 reset delay type of IEEE DEF – – X – X
TEFIn1R 0.00 - 300.00 s EFIn1 definite time reset delay 0.00 – – X – X
EFIn1-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - EFIn1 user original curve coefficient 0.00000 – – X – X
EFI1
EFIn1-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - EFIn1 user original curve coefficient 0.00000 – – X – X
EFIn1-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - EFIn1 user original curve coefficient 0.00000 – – X – X
EFIn1-kr 0.00000 - 500.00000 - EFIn1 user original curve coefficient 0.00000 – – X – X
EFIn1-b 0.00000 - 10.00000 - EFIn1 user original curve coefficient 0.00000 – – X – X
EFIn1-Rtimer DEF / DEP - EFIn1 reset delay type of US DEF – – X – X
EFIn1-Rtimer DEF / DEP - EFIn1 reset delay type of ORG DEF – – X – X
EFIn1-RTMS- EFIn1 dependent reset time multiplier of IEEE inverse
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 – – X – X
IEEE curve
EFIn1 dependent reset time multiplier of US inverse
EFIn1-RTMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 – – X – X
curve
EFIn1 dependent reset time multiplier of Original
EFIn1-RTMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 – – X – X
inverse curve
EFIn1-TP1 Off / On - EFIn1 trip signal1 for TRC driving BO circuit On – – X – X
EFIn1-ALM Off / On - EFIn1 alarm enable Off – – X – X
/ IEC-EI / UK-LTI /
IEEE-EI / US-CO2 /
EFI2
US-CO8 / Original
- 137 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

Default Model
Units
1 2 3 4 5
value
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 – – X – X
IEEE curve
EFIn2-RTMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 – – X – X
curve
EFIn2-RTMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 – – X – X
inverse curve
/ IEC-EI / UK-LTI /
IEEE-EI / US-CO2 /
US-CO8 / Original
EFI3
0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 – – X – X
IEEE curve
EFIn3-RTMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 – – X – X
curve
- 138 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

Default Model
Units
1 2 3 4 5
value
EFIn3-RTMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 – – X – X
inverse curve
/ IEC-EI / UK-LTI /
IEEE-EI / US-CO2 /
US-CO8 / Original
EFI4 EFIn4-Rtimer DEF / DEP - EFIn4 reset delay type of IEEE DEF – – X – X
- 139 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

TP_EFIN (Function ID : 45A801)
8B00001B7B EFIN-ALARM Alarm signal by EFIn protection
8000001B70 EFIN-TRIP1 Trip1 signal by EFIn protection
8000101C23 EFIN1 EFIn1 relay element operated
8B00101B67 EFIN1-ALARM Alarm signal by EFIn1 protection
8000101B60 EFIN1-OPT EFIn1 protection operated
8000101B61 EFIN1-TRIP1 Trip1 signal by EFIn1 protection
8000101C27 EFIN1PU EFIn1 PU relay operation level pick up
8000101BB0 EFIN1_BLOCK EFIn1 protection block command
8000101BB1 EFIN1_INST_OP EFIn1 protection instant operation command
800010100D EFIN1_SCNDRY_RATING EFIn1 secondary rating
- 140 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

TP_EFIN (Function ID : 45A801)

TP_EFIN (Function ID: 45A801)
800010EBB0 EFIN1_BLOCK EFIn1 protection block command
800010EBB1 EFIN1_INST_OP EFIn1 protection instant operation command
- 141 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Negative sequence overcurrent protection (OCN)

The overcurrent function in negative-sequence (OCN) detects overcurrent in negative-
sequence. The OCN can have both directional and non-directional elements; it has four stages
(OCN1 to OCN4), which operate independently. To simplify, only the OCN1 element is
discussed but the others are also applicable.
TP_REPLICA TP_OCN TP_TRC

OCN1 to OCN4 OCN trip
signal
OCN relay OCN logic (TRIP CIRCUIT)
FEP_COMMON
element sequence
CT polarity
compensated
[OCN*-TarWind](P/S/T)
IY, IΔ, I1, I2, I0, In, CT secondary rating, Full scale, ICD output
Figure 3.6-1 OCN block diagram
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
3D – – 3E – – 3F – –
Non-directional DT/IDMT  – –  – –  – –
3.6.1
Directional DT/IDMT  – – NA – –  – –
– Operation blocked by VTF NA – – NA – – NA – –
- 142 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
3.6.1 Non-directional and directional OCN

The user can set the OCN as either a non-directional OCN or a directional OCN for each stage
(OCN1 to OCN4). Furthermore, the user can also set a directional OCN as either forward type
OCN or reverse type OCN.
(i) Characteristic of non-directional OCN

The characteristic of the non-directional type OCN is a circle that has a center at the origin. A
setting and a scheme switch is used to configure each non-directional OCN element; i.e., the
user can set the threshold value of the non-directional OCN element for stage 1 using setting
[OCN1], provided time characteristic is required for define time delay (DT) described in section
3.6.2(i). Nondir is set for the scheme switch [OCN1-Dir].
(ii) Characteristic of the directional OCN in the forward direction

As shown in Figure 3.6-2, the characteristic of the directional-OCN elements in the forward
region of a directional-OCN element.
Φ θ Polarizing voltage (-V2)
I2
Figure 3.6-2 Characteristic of the directional OCN in the forward direction

Note: A sensing angle (θ) forms an angle of the directional OCN. The half plane
represents an operation zone that borders one side of the zero torque line.
A setting, a scheme switch, and the non-directional OCN, provide the settings for the
directional OCN: for example, the threshold value (IOCN) at stage 1 is set using the setting
[OCN1] and Forward is set for the scheme switch [OCN1-Dir]. The sensing angle (θ) is set using

- 143 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
the setting [OCN1-Angle], and the θ is set in the range 0–180°. A reference signal (or polarizing
signal –V2) that is derived internally is shown in Figure 3.6-3. Figure 3.6-4 shows an example
of an angle and a characteristic set by the θ.
The operation of the OCN is based on the following equations:
𝐼2 ≥ 𝐼𝑂𝐶𝑁 (3.6-1)
𝐼2 × cos(φ − θ) ≥ 0 (3.6-2)
𝑉2 ≥ 𝑂𝐶𝑁_𝑉𝑝𝑜𝑙 (3.6-3)
where,
I2 = Negative phase sequence current
V2 = Negative phase sequence voltage
−V2 = reference voltage (or polarizing voltage)
Φ = lagging angle
θ = OCN setting angle
IOCN = Setting value of OCN ([OCN1])
OCN_Vpol = Setting value of the polarizing voltage ([OCN-Vpol])
Note: The phase angle in the event of an internal fault is equal to the angle of the zero-
sequence impedance of the system; this value ranges approximately from 50° to
90°. θ of OCN can be set from 0° to 180°. The minimum voltage necessary to
maintain directionality can be set from 0.5 to 25 V.
−V2
VA
V2
Figure 3.6-3 Relationship between negative sequence current and reference voltage

- 144 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Reverse
Vpol Vpol Vpol
θ=30°
θ=90°
Max. torque
Forward
θ=0° θ=30° θ=90°
Forward Reverse
Reverse
Vpol Vpol
Forward
θ=170°
θ=100°
θ=100° θ=170°
Figure 3.6-4 Examples of sensing angle (θ)
(iii) Characteristic of the directional OCN in the reverse direction

The reverse characteristic is a mirror image of the forward characteristic. Reverse is set for
the scheme switch [OCN1-Dir] to set the directional OCN in the reverse direction.

The OCN element monitors the negative-sequence current; when the negative-sequence
current is beyond the threshold for the operation, the OCN element will operate within a period
that is defined by the time characteristic feature. The user can choose the one of the operate
time delay characteristics: (i) dependent (inverse) time characteristic delay (i.e., IDMT) or (ii)
independent (definite) time characteristic delay (i.e., DT). The operate time of the IDMT
depends upon the level of the negative-sequence current, whereas the operate time in the DT
is a constant.
For the reset time delay in the IDMT, either inverse (dependent)-time-reset or
The user can select which characteristic will be applied to each stage of the OCN
element using scheme switches. We shall see the scheme switches later.

- 145 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
The operate time in the DT characteristic will be a constant time; it is not affected by the level
of the negative-sequence current. The reset time is set to zero so that resetting is performed
immediately. The user can set the operate time using a setting; it is discussed in sections (iv).

The reset time of the IDMT is also user-selectable; either inverse-time-reset or definite-
time-reset is selected. For the inverse-time-rest, the user can choose the reset time for the
preset characteristic from six characteristic curves; i.e. IEEE and US standard five pre-
installed characteristic curves and one user-original characteristic carver where the user can
set the equation parameters. The inverse-time-reset curve equation and parameters will be
discussed in section (v).

k
𝑡(𝐼) = 𝑇𝑀𝑆 × {[ α ] + c} (3.6-4)
(I⁄I ) − 1
s
where:
The nine pre-programmed standard characteristic curve are tabulated in Table 3.6-2;
additionally, one original (user-programmable) curve can be applied. One curve can be chosen
for each OCN stage by setting. Figure 3.6-5 illustrates these characteristic curves. For example,
the user should set one for the scheme switch [OCN1-Timer]: “IEC-NI” for IEC Normal Inverse,
“IEC-VI” for IEC Very Inverse, “IEC-EI” for IEC Extremely Inverse, “UK-LTI” for UK Long Time
Inverse, “IEEE-MI “ for IEEE Moderately Inverse, “IEEE-VI” for IEEE Very Inverse, “IEEE-EI”
for IEEE Extremely Inverse, “US-CO2” for US CO2 short time inverse, “US-CO8” for US CO8

- 146 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
inverse, and “Original” for user-programmable characteristic.
multiplier-setting (TMS) for the required operate time. For example, when the IEC
characteristic is selected, the user can set the TMS value using the setting [OCN1-TMS-IEC]
(incidentally, the default value of the TMS is 1.00). The other TMSs are also available by the
[OCN1-TMS-UK], [OCN1-TMS-IEEE], [OCN1-TMS-US] and [OCN1-TMS-ORG].
Curve type
(IEC 60255-151)

- 147 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

Time characteristic
The user should set DT for the scheme switch [OCN1-Timer]. The value of the required operate
time is set for the setting [TOCN1] in the range 0.00–300.00s.
The instantaneous operation characteristic is achieved by setting zero for the [TOCN1], but the
instantaneous one can be also obtained when the logic signal “1 (High)” is programmed to be
injected at PLC connection point “OCN1_INST_OP”.
(v) Reset time of IDMT

example, the user can set DEP for the setting [OCN1-Rtimer]. The following equation defines
the reset time for the inverse-time-reset characteristic (ref. IEC 60255-151):
kr
] (3.6-5)
1 − (I⁄I )
s
where:
zero
For setting RTMS in the IEEE standard, the user can use setting [OCN1-RTMS-IEEE]
(incidentally, the default value is 1.000). Similarly, settings [OCN1-RTMS-US] and [OCN1-
information w.r.t the values for kr and β, see Table 3.6-3; Figure 3.6-6 shows the characteristic
curves).

- 148 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

Curve Type kr β
Curve Description
IEC 60255-151 (sec)
†Note: To select the inverse-time-reset characteristic, set [OCN1-Rtimer]=DEP.
Conversely set [OCN1-Rtimer]=DEF to select definite-time-reset characteristic,.
Note: For the setting [OCN1-Rtimer]=DEP (inverse-time-reset), the integrated value will
energized current is smaller than the setting [OCN1]. The reducing degree will be
Note: For the setting [OCN1-Rtimer]=DEF (definite-time-reset), the integrated value
shall be zero when an energized current is smaller than the setting [OCN1], when
the small energized current is continued for timer setting [TOCN1R]. The
integrated value will not be zero when the energized current does not flow small
for the setting [TOCN1R]. DEF is allowed to set in the IEEE, US, and ORG. DEF is
set unconditionally in the IEC and UK (see Table 3.6-4).

- 149 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
[OCN1], will make an integrating value, which can determine how the element operates. If the
energized quantity (I) falls below the threshold setting [OCN1], the element operation will
Time 
Energizing current
Energizing current
cleared by tripping
Pickup threshold in relay [OCN1] threshold
Measuring quantity 0A
Stage to element
return
Setting
[*-Rtimer]=DEP
Integrator
Trip signal
The integration will be deceased depending on the

[OCN1-RTMS-*] reset characteristics.
Stage to element
return
Setting
[*-Rtimer]=DEF
Integrator
Trip signal
Reset time
Integration will be kept in timer [TOCN1R].
The integration will start again when the energizing current The integration will be reset when the energizing current
becomes larger than [OCN1] within [TOCN1R]. does not become larger than [OCN1] in [TOCN1R].

for the settings [OCN1-Rtimer] and [TOCN1R].
(vii) Summary of OCN operation

Table 3.6-4 shows a summary for OCN operation. Note that DEF will be set unconditionally in

- 150 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Table 3.6-4 Type and standard board in the OCN1 (A tick represents a selectable function)
IDMT
Characteristics DT
DT 
✓
Scheme switch [OCN1-Timer]
IEC-NI
IEC-VI ✓
IEC-EI ✓
UK LTI ✓
IEEE-MI ✓
IEEE-VI ✓
IEEE-EI ✓
US-CO2 ✓
US-CO8 ✓
Original ✓
DEF N.A ✓† ✓† ✓† ✓† ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
✓
Scheme switch
[OCN1-Rtimer]
N.A
N.A ✓
N.A ✓
DEP
N.A ✓
N.A ✓
N.A ✓
3.6.3 Threshold value

The threshold current for the activation of OCN is configured using settings. The setting
[OCN1] is provided for stage 1 of the function. Note that the thresholds have distinct values
among respective stages; the user should consider an input rating selected either 1A or 5A.
The input rating is discussed separately (See Chapter Transformer replica function).
3.6.4 Reset Ratio

The reset ratio of the threshold current for activation is set using a setting; for example, the
ratio of OCN1 is set using the setting [OCN1-DPR].

(i) Harmonic detection function
Harmonic current detection (2nd harmonic) is provided by the Inrush current detection (ICD)
function. Each OCN can block the operation of OCN by using a scheme switch, when the relay
detects a harmonic, which is caused by a magnetizing inrush current phenomenon when the
transformer is energized. For OCN1, scheme switch [OCN1-2fBlk] is provided; Non is set for
the scheme switch [OCN1-2fBlk] as a default.
(ii) Blocking OCN operation by VTF

The operation of OCN can be blocked by the voltage transformer failure supervision (VTF)
using a scheme switch. Block is set for scheme the switch [OCN1-VTFBlk] to block the OCN1

- 151 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
operation during VTF. Non is set for the scheme switch [OCN1-VTFBlk] as a default.
(iii) Signal of OCN trip

The OCN1 element is able to generate a trip signal; the trip circuit function (TRC) can issue a
switch [OCN1-TP1], ‘OCN1-TRIP1’ signal is transferred for the TRC function if the OCN1
OCN1 element can produce six trip signals so that other scheme switches [OCN1-TP2] to
[OCN1-TP6] are provided. Except for the trip signals, an alarm signal can be also generated
when On is set for scheme switch [OCN1-ALM].
circuit.
3.6.6 Scheme logic

The scheme logic of both the non-directional and the directional OCN1 is shown in Figure 3.6-8.
According to Figure 3.6-8, OCN1 provides the result of decision whether a current of negative
sequence exceeds a setting, and then operation signals are issued to trip circuits, which are
discussed separately. (See chapter Relay application: Trip circuit)

- 152 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
8000101C23 TOCN1
OCN1 t 0 8000101B60
& &
≥1 OCN1-OPT
0.00-300.00s
8000101C27
OCN1 PU
&
≥1
&
OCN1-ICD-OR OCN1_Timer IDMT

DT
IEC-NI
IEC-VI
OCN1-EN ON
IEC-EI
UK-LTI
OCN1-VTF_DETECT IEEE-MI
&
OCN1-VTFBLK IEEE-VI
BLOCK
IEEE-EI
≥1
US-C02
800010EBBO OCN1_BLOCK
US-C08
ORIGINAL
800010EBB1 OCN1_INST_OP
To TRC
OCN1-TP1 8000101B61
On & OCN1-TRIP1
OCN1-TP2 8100101B62
On & OCN1-TRIP2
OCN1-TP3 8200101B63
On & OCN1-TRIP3
OCN1-TP4 8300101B64
On
& OCN1-TRIP4
OCN1-TP5 8400101B65
On & OCN1-TRIP5
OCN1-TP6 8500101B66
On
& OCN1-TRIP6
OCN1-ALM 8B00101B67
On
& OCN1-ALARM
Figure 3.6-8 Scheme logic for OCN1

- 153 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
3.6.7 Setting
Setting of TP_OCN (Function ID: 45AC01)
Default Model
Units
1 2 3 4 5
value
OCN1-EN Off / On - OCN1 protection enable Off – – X X X
OCN OCN2-EN Off / On - OCN2 protection enable Off – – X X X
OCN1-TarWind - Target transformer winding for OCN1 protection Primary – – X X X
Tertiary
NonDir / Forward /
OCN1-Dir - OCN1 directional characteristic NonDir – – X – X
Reverse
OCN1-Timer MI / IEEE-VI / IEEE-EI / - OCN1 delay type DT – – X X X
US-CO2 / US-CO8 /
Original
OCN1-Angle 0 - 180 deg OCN1 directional characteristic angle 45 – – X – X
OCN1-Vpol 0.5 - 25.0 V OCN1 polarizing voltage level 3.0 – – X X X
OCN1 0.02 - 250.00 A OCN1 threshold (in DT mode) 2.00 – – X X X
OCN1 0.02 - 25.00 A OCN1 threshold (in IDMT mode) 2.00 – – X X X
OCN1-DPR 10 - 100 % OCN1 drop-out/pick-up ratio 100 – – X X X
TOCN1 0.00 - 300.00 s OCN1 operating delay time 1.00 – – X X X
OCN1-TMS-IEC 0.010 - 50.000 - OCN1 time multiplier of IEC inverse curve 1.000 – – X X X
OCN1-TMS-UK 0.010 - 50.000 - OCN1 time multiplier of UK inverse curve 1.000 – – X X X
OCN1-TMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - OCN1 time multiplier of IEEE inverse curve 1.000 – – X X X
OCN1-TMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - OCN1 time multiplier of US inverse curve 1.000 – – X X X
OCN1-TMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - OCN1 time multiplier of Original inverse curve 1.000 – – X X X
OCN1-Rtimer DEF / DEP - OCN1 reset delay type of IEEE DEF – – X X X
OCN
TOCN1R 0.00 - 300.00 s OCN1 definite time reset delay 0.00 – – X X X
1
OCN1-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - OCN1 user original curve coefficient 0.00000 – – X X X
OCN1-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - OCN1 user original curve coefficient 0.00000 – – X X X
OCN1-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - OCN1 user original curve coefficient 0.00000 – – X X X
OCN1-kr 0.00000 - 500.00000 - OCN1 user original curve coefficient 0.00000 – – X X X
OCN1-b 0.00000 - 10.00000 - OCN1 user original curve coefficient 0.00000 – – X X X
OCN1-Rtimer DEF / DEP - OCN1 reset delay type of US DEF – – X X X
OCN1-Rtimer DEF / DEP - OCN1 reset delay type of ORG DEF – – X X X
OCN1 dependent reset time multiplier of IEEE
OCN1-RTMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 – – X X X
inverse curve
OCN1 dependent reset time multiplier of US
OCN1-RTMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 – – X X X
inverse curve
OCN1 dependent reset time multiplier of Original
OCN1-RTMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 – – X X X
inverse curve
OCN1-2fBlk Non / Block - OCN1 operation block by 2f-detection Non – – X X X
OCN1-VTFBlk Non / Block - OCN1 operation blocked by VTF Non – – – – –
OCN1-TP1 Off / On - OCN1 trip signal1 for TRC driving BO circuit On – – X X X
OCN1-ALM Off / On - OCN1 alarm enable Off – – X X X
OCN OCN2-TarWind - Target transformer winding for OCN2 protection Primary – – X X X
Tertiary
2
NonDir / Forward /
Reverse
- 154 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

Default Model
Units
1 2 3 4 5
value
US-CO2 / US-CO8 /
Original
OCN2-RTMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 – – X X X
inverse curve
OCN2-RTMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 – – X X X
inverse curve
OCN2-RTMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 – – X X X
inverse curve
Tertiary
NonDir / Forward /
Reverse
OCN IEC-EI / UK-LTI / IEEE-
3 OCN3-Timer MI / IEEE-VI / IEEE-EI / - OCN3 delay type DT – – X X X
US-CO2 / US-CO8 /
Original
- 155 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

Default Model
Units
1 2 3 4 5
value
OCN3-RTMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 – – X X X
inverse curve
OCN3-RTMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 – – X X X
inverse curve
OCN3-RTMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 – – X X X
inverse curve
Tertiary
NonDir / Forward /
Reverse
US-CO2 / US-CO8 /
Original
OCN4-Angle 0 - 180 deg OCN4 directional characteristic angle 45 – – X X
OCN
4
- 156 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

Default Model
Units
1 2 3 4 5
value
OCN4-RTMS-IEEE 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 – – X X X
inverse curve
OCN4-RTMS-US 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 – – X X X
inverse curve
OCN4-RTMS-ORG 0.010 - 50.000 - 1.000 – – X X X
inverse curve
- 157 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

TP_OCN(Function ID: 45AC01)
8B00001B6B OCN-ALARM Alarm signal by OCN protection
8000001B60 OCN-TRIP1 Trip1 signal by OCN protection
8000101C23 OCN1 OCN1 relay element operated
8B00101B67 OCN1-ALARM Alarm signal by OCN1 protection
8000101B60 OCN1-OPT OCN1 protection operated
8000101B61 OCN1-TRIP1 Trip1 signal by OCN1 protection
8000101C27 OCN1PU OCN1 PU relay operation level pick up
8000101BB0 OCN1_BLOCK OCN1 protection block command
8000101BB1 OCN1_INST_OP OCN1 protection instant operation command
- 158 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)


800010EBB0 OCN1_BLOCK OCN1 protection block command
800010EBB1 OCN1_INST_OP OCN1 protection instant operation command
- 159 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Broken conductor protection (BCD)

A series fault or an open circuit fault that results in neither a phase-fault nor an earth-fault is
caused by breaker contact failure, blown fuses, and false operation of single-phase switchgear.
The IEC defines a series fault as a fault for which the impedances of each of the three-phases
are not equal that is caused by the interruption of one or two phases.
Three broken conductor protections (BCD-P, BCD-S, BCD-T) are designed to determine
unbalance conditions in each transformer winding caused by an open circuited conductor. For
simplicity, the BCD-P function is only discussed here, but the others are also applicable.
TP_REPLICA TP_BCD TP_TRC

BCD-P, BCD-S, BCD-T
BCD
BCD relay BCD logic trip signal (TRIP CIRCUIT)
FEP_COMMON
element sequence
CT polarity
compensated
IY, I∆, I1, I2 I0, In, CT secondary rating, Full scale, ICD Output
Figure 3.7-1 BCD block diagram
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
3D – – 3E – – 3F – –
– BDC-P,BCD-S,BCD-T  – –  – –  – –
- 160 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
3.7.1 Equivalent circuit for a one-phase series fault

Figure 3.7-2 shows the sequence diagram of the network connection when series fault occurs
in single-phase. Series fault comprises positive sequence, negative sequence and zero sequence
impedances, which are divided into left and right. The ratio of left to right is determined by
the fault location such as k1:1-k1, k2:1-k2, and k0:1-k0.
E1A Series or open circuit fault E1B
k1 1– k1
I1F I1F
k1Z1 (1-k1)Z1
E1A
E
Positive sequence 1
k2Z2 I2F I2F (1-k2)Z2
B
Negative sequence k0Z0 I0F I0F

(1-k0)Z0
Zero sequence
I1F
k1Z1 k2Z2 (1-k2)Z2 (1-k1)Z1
K0Z0 (1-k0)Z0
E1A E1B
I1F Z2
Z1
E1A Z0 E1B
Figure 3.7-2 Equivalent circuit for a single-phase fault
Series fault results in positive sequence current (I1F), negative sequence current (I2F) and
zero phase sequence current (I0F) in single-phase. These are defined by the following equations:
𝐼1𝐹 + 𝐼2𝐹 + 𝐼0𝐹 = 0 (3.7-1)
𝑍2𝐹 𝐼2𝐹 ∙ 𝑍0𝐹 𝐼0𝐹 = 0 (3.7-2)
𝐸1𝐴 ∙ 𝐸1𝐵 = 𝑍1𝐹 𝐼1𝐹 ∙ 𝑍2𝐹 𝐼2𝐹 (3.7-3)
Where,
E1A ,E1B: power source voltage
Z1: positive-sequence impedance
Z2: negative-sequence impedance
- 161 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Z0: zero-sequence impedance
From Equation (3.7-1), (3.7-2), and (3.7-3), the following equations are derived:
𝑍2 + 𝑍0
𝐼1𝐹 = (𝐸 − 𝐸1𝐵 ) (3.7-4)
𝑍1 𝑍2 + 𝑍1 𝑍0 + 𝑍2 𝑍0 1𝐴
−𝑍0
𝐼2𝐹 = (𝐸 − 𝐸1𝐵 ) (3.7-5)
𝑍1 𝑍2 + 𝑍1 𝑍0 + 𝑍2 𝑍0 1𝐴
−𝑍2
𝐼0𝐹 = (𝐸 − 𝐸1𝐵 ) (3.7-6)
𝑍1 𝑍2 + 𝑍1 𝑍0 + 𝑍2 𝑍0 1𝐴
The magnitude of the fault current depends on impedance across the system, difference
in phase angle, and magnitude between the power source voltages from both the ends.
As described earlier, BCD-P element detects the fault by measuring the ratio of negative-
sequence current to positive-sequence current (I2F/I1F). The ratio can also be defined with
negative-sequence impedance (Z2) and zero-sequence impedance (Z0); hence, the equation of
the ratio is expressed as follows:
𝐼2𝐹 |𝐼2𝐹 | 𝑍0
= = (3.7-7)
𝐼1𝐹 |𝐼1𝐹 | 𝑍2 + 𝑍0
The ratio value is 0.5 or higher when the zero-sequence impedance is larger than the
negative-sequence impedance. The ratio, thus, is close to 1.0 if the system is high-impedance
earthed or a one-end earthed system.
3.7.2 Characteristic and setting

Figure 3.7-3 shows that BCD-P characteristic (hatched region); BCD-P operates when positive
sequence current (I1) is larger than 0.04×In, negative sequence current (I2) is larger than 0.01×In,
and value |I2/I1| is higher than the settings [BCD-P].
I2
|𝐼2 |
൘|𝐼 | ≥ [BCD-P]-𝑠𝑒𝑡𝑡𝑖𝑛𝑔
1
|𝐼1 | ≥ 0.04 × 𝐼𝑛 & BCD-P trip

command
|𝐼2 | ≥ 0.01 × 𝐼𝑛
0.01×In
0 I1
0.04×In
- 162 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Figure 3.7-3 Characteristic of BCD-P

(i) Harmonic detection function
The operation of BCD-P is blocked when IED detects a harmonic, which is caused by a
magnetizing inrush current phenomenon when the transformer is energized. Block is set for
the scheme switches [BCD-P-2fBlk] to block the operation of BCD function during the
occurrence of the harmonic.
(ii) Signal of BCD trip

The BCD-P element is able to generate a trip signal; the trip circuit function (TRC) can issue
scheme switch [BCD-P-TP1], ‘BCD-P-TRIP1’ signal is transferred for the TRC function if the
BDC-P1 element operates. In accordance with the trip signal received in the TRC function, it
drives the binary output circuit (BO), which can energize the trip coil to open the circuit
breaker. The BCD-P element can produce six trip signals so that other scheme switches [BCD-
P-TP2] to [BCD-P-TP6] are provided. Except for the trip signals, an alarm signal can be also
generated when On is set for scheme switch [BCD-P-ALM].
circuit.
3.7.4 Scheme logic

Figure 3.7-4 shows the BCD-P scheme logic. It issues a trip command through a delayed pick-
up timer value, which is set using the setting [TBCD-P]. Off is set for the scheme switch [BCD-
P-EN] to disable the BCD-P operation.
- 163 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
8000101C23 8000101B60
BCD-P TBCD-P
& t 0
& BCD-P-OPT
0.00 to 300.00s
ICD-P-OR
On
BCD-P-EN
8000001BB0
800010EBB0 BCD-P-BLOCK 1
To TRC
On 8000101B61
BCD-P-TP1 &
≥1 8000001B61
BCD-TRIP1
On 8100101B62
BCD-P-TP2 &
8200101B63
BCD-P-TP3 On &
8300101B64 ≥1 8100001B62
On BCD-TRIP2
BCD-P-TP4 &
8400101B65
BCD-P-TP5 On &
8500101B66 ≥1 8200001B63
BCD-TRIP3
BCD-P-TP6 On
&
8B00101B6C ≥1 8300001B64
On BCD-TRIP4
BCD-P -ALM &
≥1 8400001B65
BCD-TRIP5
≥1 8500001B66
BCD-TRIP6
≥1 8B00001B6C
BCD-ALARM
BCD-S-TRIP1
BCD-S Function logics
BCD-S-TRIP6
BCD-S -ALARM
BCD-T-TRIP1
BCD-T Function logics
BCD-T-TRIP6
BCD-T-ALARM
Figure 3.7-4 Scheme logic for BCD-P
Negative-sequence currents in the system normally affect the setting values in the [BCD-
P]. The BCD-P function determines the ratio (I2F/I1F) continuously. The user can check the
present ratio along with the maximum value (I21 max), measured 15 minutes earlier. It is
recommended that the user should distinguish the present ratio against the value during
commissioning stage; the user should set a value for [BCD-P] from 130% to 150% of the ratio
that was checked.
Note: The ratio (I2F/ I1F) is displayed only when the current in positive-sequence (or load
current) on the secondary circuit is larger than 2% of the rated current on
secondary circuit.
- 164 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
3.7.5 Setting
Setting of TP_BCD (Function ID: 45B001)
Default Model
Units
1 2 3 4 5
value
BCD-P-EN Off / On - BCD-Primary protection enable Off – – X X X
BCD BCD-S-EN Off / On - BCD-Secondary protection enable Off – – X X X
BCD-T-EN Off / On - BCD-Tertiary protection enable Off – – X X X
BCD-P 0.10 - 1.00 - BCD-Primary relay operating value (I2/I1) 0.20 – – X X X
TBCD-P 0.00 - 300.00 s BCD-Primary operating delay time 1.00 – – X X X
BCD-P-2fBlk Non / Block - BCD-Primary operation block by ICD Non – – X X X
BCD-P-TP1 Off / On - BCD-P trip signal1 for TRC driving BO circuit On – – X X X
BCD-
P
BCD-P-ALM Off / On - BCD-Primary alarm enable Off – – X X X
BCD-S 0.10 - 1.00 - BCD-Secondary relay operating value (I2/I1) 0.20 – – X X X
TBCD-S 0.00 - 300.00 s BCD-Secondary operating delay time 1.00 – – X X X
BCD-S-2fBlk Non / Block - BCD-Secondary operation block by ICD Non – – X X X
BCD-S-TP1 Off / On - BCD-S trip signal1 for TRC driving BO circuit On – – X X X
BCD-S BCD-S-TP2 Off / On - BCD-S trip signal2 for TRC driving BO circuit On – – X X X
BCD-S-ALM Off / On - BCD-Secondary alarm enable Off – – X X X
BCD-T 0.10 - 1.00 - BCD-Tertiary relay operating value (I2/I1) 0.20 – – X X X
TBCD-T 0.00 - 300.00 s BCD-Tertiary operating delay time 1.00 – – X X X
BCD-T-2fBlk Non / Block - BCD-Tertiary operation block by ICD Non – – X X X
BCD-T-TP1 Off / On - BCD-T trip signal1 for TRC driving BO circuit On – – X X X
BCD-
T
BCD-T-ALM Off / On - BCD-Tertiary alarm enable Off – – X X X
- 165 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

TP_BCD(Function ID: 45B001)
8B00001B6C BCD-ALARM BCD alarm enable
8000101C23 BCD-P BCD-P relay element operated
8B00101B6C BCD-P-ALARM BCD-P alarm enable
8000101B60 BCD-P-OPT BCD-P operated
8000101B61 BCD-P-TRIP1 BCD-P trip command output from TP1 B0
8000101BB0 BCD-P_BLOCK BCD-P block command
8100201C23 BCD-S BCD-S relay element operated
8B00201B6C BCD-S-ALARM BCD-S alarm enable
8100201B60 BCD-S-OPT BCD-S operated
8000201B61 BCD-S-TRIP1 BCD-S trip command output from TP1 B0
8100201BB0 BCD-S_BLOCK BCD-S block command
8200301C23 BCD-T BCD-T relay element operated
8B00301B6C BCD-T-ALARM BCD-T alarm enable
8200301B60 BCD-T-OPT BCD-T operated
8000301B61 BCD-T-TRIP1 BCD-T trip command output from TP1 B0
8000001B61 BCD-TRIP1 BCD trip command output from TP1
8200301BB0 BCD-T_BLOCK BCD-T block command

800010EBB0 BCD-P_BLOCK BCD-P block command
810020EBB0 BCD-S_BLOCK BCD-S block command
- 166 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

820030EBB0 BCD-T_BLOCK BCD-T block command
- 167 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Thermal overload protection (THM)

Transformers can get overheated when overloaded beyond the design limits. The thermal
overload function (THM) determines temperature rise by monitoring the current and detects
the thermal overload of a device. The THM has exponential characteristics according to the
IEC 60255-149 standard. The THM function also determines pre-load condition and generates
a trip signal when an overload condition arises. The THM provides an alarm and a trip signal.
The alarm is set lower than 100% (trip value) so that a corrective action can be taken before
the trip occurs. The THM function is enabled using scheme switch [THMT-EN]; the transformer
winding to be protected is selected using scheme switch [THM-TarWind].
TP_REPLICA TP_THM TP_TRC

THM and THMA
THM
THM relay THM logic Tri signal (TRIP CIRCUIT)
FEP_COMMON
element sequence
CT polarity
compensated
[THMT-EN](ON/OFF )
[THM-TarWind](P/S/T)
1W-IY_1,2,3; 1W-I1; 1W-I2; 2W-IY_1,2,3; 2W-I1; 2W-I2; 3W-IY_1,2,3; 3W-I1; 3W-I2
Figure 3.8-1 THM Function block diagram
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
3D – – 3E – – 3F – –
– Main features  – –  – –  – –
- 168 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
3.8.1 Characteristic
(i) Thermal state determination
The THM function simulates the change of thermal state using an algorithm; THM can detect
an overload condition. Thermal state (θ) is determined using the following equation:
𝐼2 −𝑡⁄
θ= 2 (1 − 𝑒 τ) × 100 (%) (3.8-1)
𝐼𝐴𝑂𝐿
where I is the load current applied; IAOL is the allowable overload current;  is the thermal time
constant. The user should select the value of  in accordance with the heating and cooling
characteristics for the generator stator that is to be protected. Therefore, with regard to the
thermal time constant for heating, a value of  should be set using setting [TTHM]. Conversely,
with regard to cooling, set the value of  for setting [TTHM-rad].
Thermal state 0% is the cold state, whereas 100% reflects the thermal limit—which is
the point at which no further temperature rise can be tolerated safely and the system should
be disconnected. The thermal limit for any given system is subject to setting [THM], which
determines the value of overload current. The THM function signals a trip when the value of
θ is at 100%.
THM determines I using the positive-sequence current (I1) and negative-sequence

current (I2) using Equation (3.8-2); it operates in accordance with the characteristics defined
in IEC 60255-149† when the user sets scheme switch [THM-Itype] to Equivalent.
𝐼 = √𝐼12 + 𝑞 × 𝐼22 (3.8-2)
where,
q: Unbalance factor in the generator, setting [THM-q]; the unbalance factor is used
for motor/generator protection; the user can obtain the information with regard to
‘q’ from the motor/generator manufacturer.
†Note:If the user prefers to use the form for THM given in IEC 60255-8, set Max phase
for scheme switch [THM-Itype]. In this case, THM determines the largest of the
three individual phase currents.
The period of time for a trip to occur depends not only on the degree of overload, but also
on the degree of load current prior to reaching the overload state. The period of the trip, that
is, depends on whether the overload is applied from ‘cold’ or ‘hot’. THM has thresholds for
alarm and trip; hence, the two thresholds exist independently.
(ii) Thermal characteristic

The THM characteristics are determined by the following two equations. Equation (3.8-3) is
- 169 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
used to define the cold state. Equation (3.8-4) is used to define the hot state:
𝐼2
t = τ ∙ Ln [ 2 ] (3.8-3)
𝐼 2 − 𝐼𝐴𝑂𝐿
𝐼 2 − 𝐼𝑃2
t = τ ∙ Ln [ 2 ] (3.8-4)
𝐼 2 − 𝐼𝐴𝑂𝐿
where t is the time to trip in minutes for a constant overload current of I, I is the overload
current (largest phase current in amperes), IAOL is the permitted overload current (amperes),
Ip is the pre-load current (amperes), τ is the thermal time constant (minutes), and Ln is the
natural logarithm.
In Equation (3.8-3), cold curves are special versions of the hot curves where Ip is zero,
catering for the situation where a cold system is switched onto an immediate overload.
Figure 3.8-2(left) shows the cold state for the condition where an overload has been
switched onto a previously un-loaded system. Figure 3.8-2(right) shows the hot state for the
condition where an overload is switched onto a system that has previously been loaded to 90%
of its capacity. Both figures are in accordance with the IEC 60255-149 standard curves, and
are drawn for a range of settings for time constant ().
Thermal Curves Thermal Curves

(Cold Curve - no prior load) (Hot Curve - 90% prior load)
1000 1000
100
100
Operate Time (minutes)
Operate Time (minutes)
10
10
1

1 100 
50
0.1 100
20 50
10
20
0.1 10
5
0.01 5
2
2
1
1
0.01 0.001
1 10 1 10
Overload Current Overload Current
(Multiple of IAOL) (Multiple of IAOL)
Figure 3.8-2 Thermal curves (cold curve –no prior load)
- 170 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

The THM function is able to generate a trip signal; the trip circuit function (TRC) can issue a
switch [THM-TP1], ‘THM-TRIP1’ signal is transferred for the TRC function if the THM element
output circuit (BO), which can energize the trip coil to open the circuit breaker. The THM
element can produce six trip signals so that other scheme switches [THM-TP2] to [THM-TP6]
for scheme switch [THM-ALM].
circuit.
3.8.3 Scheme logic

Figure 3.8-3 shows the scheme logic for the THM. The THM has two thresholds; that is, “A”
threshold is used for alarming, whereas “T” threshold is used for tripping.
The threshold is set using the setting [THM-Alarm] as a percentage of the tripping
threshold. The alarm signal is not generated when Off is set for the scheme switch [THMA-EN].
The trip signal is not generated when Off is set for the scheme switch [THMT-EN]. PLC signals
THMA_BLOCK and THMT_BLOCK are used to block the operation of the THM.
- 171 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
8000101C23
8000101B60
& &
A
THM-OPT-ALARM
THM 8100201C23
T 8100201B60
& &
THM-OPT-TRIP
Primary
THM-TARWIN Secondary
D Tertiary
THM-ITYPE Max phase

Equivalent
THMA-EN
ON
THMT-EN
ON
1
800010EBB0 THMA_BLOCK
810020EBB0 THMT_BLOCK
1
8000001B60 To TRC
& & THM-TRIP1
THM-TP1 On
8100001B61
& & THM-TRIP2
THM-TP2 On
8200001B62
& & THM-TRIP3
THM-TP3 On
8300001B63
& & THM-TRIP4
THM-TP4 On 8400001B64
& & THM-TRIP5
THM-TP5 8500001B65
On
& & THM-TRIP6
THM-TP6
On &
8B00001B6B
≥1
& & THM-ALARM
THM-ALM On
Figure 3.8-3 Scheme logic for Thermal overload protection
- 172 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
3.8.4 Setting
Setting of TP_THM (Function ID: 451401)
Default Model
Units
1 2 3 4 5
value
Primary / Secondary / Target transformer winding for THM
THM-TarWind - Primary – – X X X
Tertiary protection
THM 0.40 - 2.00 A Thermal overload current at 1A rating 1.00 – – X X X
THM 2.00 - 10.00 A Thermal overload current at 5A rating 5.00 – – X X X
Comm TTHM 0.5 - 500.0 min Heating thermal time constant 10.0 – – X X X
on TTHM-rad 0.5 - 500.0 min Cooling thermal time constant 10.0 – – X X X
"Calculation using maximum phase current
THM-Itype Max phase / Equivalent - Equivalent – – X X X
or equivalent heating current"
Unbalance factor relating to the additional
THM-q 0 - 10 - 0 – – X X X
heat produced by I2
THMT-EN Off / On - Thermal protection enable Off – – X X X
THM-TP1 Off / On - THM trip signal1 for TRC driving BO circuit On – – X X X
THMT
THM-ALM Off / On - THM alarm enable Off – – X X X
THMA-EN Off / On - Thermal alarm enable Off – – X X X
THMA
THM-Alarm 50 - 100 % "Thermal alarm level multiplier 80 – – X X X
- 173 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

TP_THM(Function ID: 451401)
8000101C23 THM-A THM alarm relay element operated
8B00001B6B THM-ALARM THM alarm signal
8000101B60 THM-OPT-ALARM THM alarm instant operation command
8100201B60 THM-OPT-TRIP THM trip instant operation command
8100201C23 THM-T THM trip relay element operated
8000001B60 THM-TRIP1 THM trip command output from TP1 B0
8000101BB0 THMA_BLOCK THM alarm block command
8100201BB0 THMT_BLOCK THM trip block command

TP_THM(Function ID: 451401)
800010EBB0 THMA_BLOCK THM-A block command
810020EBB0 THMT_BLOCK THM-T block command
- 174 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Inrush current detection function (ICD)

The Inrush current detection function (ICD) is used to detect inrush current during
transformer energization; it stops incorrect operations in the overcurrent (OC), earth fault (EF),
negative phase sequence overcurrent (OCN) and broken conductor detection (BCD) functions.
TP_REPLICA TP_ICD TP_OC
ICD-P, ICD-S, ICD-T
ICD TP_EF
ICD relay ICD logic Trip signal TP_OCN
FEP_COMMON
element sequence TP_BCD
CT polarity
compensated
[ICD-2f](ON/OFF )
[ICD-TarWind](P/S/T)
Ia-1CT, Ib-1CT, Ic-1CT; Ia-2CT, Ib-2CT, Ic-2CT; Ia-3CT, Ib-3CT, Ic-3CT; Ia-4CT, Ib-4CT, Ic-4CT;
Ia-5CT, Ib-5CT, Ic-5CT; CT secondary rating, Full scale
Figure 3.9-1 ICD block diagram
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
3D – – 3E – – 3F – –
– Main features  – –  – –  – –
✓: Applicable NA: Not applicable TBD: To be determined
- 175 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
3.9.1 Inrush current

Energizing a transformer is characterised by an inrush current which is typically about 8 to
12 times the transformer winding rated current. The inrush current has a predominant second
harmonic, third harmonic, fifth harmonic content; it varies the degree of higher harmonics. As
the third harmonic is present during a fault condition and the fifth harmonic is present during
overexcitation of transformer, they are not reliable for the detection of the inrush current. The
second harmonic is present only during energizing transformer; hence the inrush current can
be detected surely.
3.9.2 Characteristic
The ICD function examines the ratio of second harmonic current (I2f) to the fundamental
current (I1f) for each phase. If the ratio|I2f |⁄|I1f | is larger than a setting value (ICD-2f), the
ICD function will identify the presence of inrush current. Figure 3.9-2 shows the characteristic
and the hatched area shows the operation region. In this figure, the threshold is represented
with setting [ICD-OC].
I2f
ICD-2f(%) = tanθ×100
|I2f|/|I1f|ICD-2f(%) ICD
&
|I1f|ICD–OC
0 I1f
ICD–OC
Figure 3.9-2 ICD element and characteristic
As shown in Figure 3.9-2, settings [ICD-2F] and [ICD-OC] should be used when the
detection of 2nd harmonic inrush current is required. The user should set On for the scheme
switch [ICD-EN] to enable the ICD function.
- 176 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
3.9.3 Scheme logic

Figure 3.9-3 shows the scheme logic for ICD function. When second harmonic inrush current
is detected, the ICD signals are sent to block other protection functional elements like OC, EF,
OCN and BCD.
To OC, EF, OCN, BCD
A 8000041C24 8000011C24
& ICD-P-A
ICD
B 8100041C25 8100011C25
& ICD-P-B
C 8200041C26 8200011C26
& ICD-P-C
8300041C23 8300011C23
≥ & ICD-P-OR
ICD-OR
8000021C24
& ICD-S-A
& 8100021C25
ICD-S-B
8200021C26
& ICD-S-C
8300021C23 ICD-A
& ICD-S-OR
ICD-B
8000031C24
& ICD-T-A ICD-C
8100031C25
& ICD-T-B
8200031C26
& ICD-T-C
8300031C23
& ICD-T-OR
Primary
Secondary
ICD-TarWind
Tertiary
Figure 3.9-3 Scheme logic for ICD
- 177 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
3.9.4 Setting
Setting of TP_ICD (Function ID: 480A01)
Default Model
Units
1 2 3 4 5
value
ICD-EN Off / On - ICD function enable Off – – X X X
Primary / Secondary / Target transformer winding for ICD
ICD-TarWind - Primary – – X X X
Tertiary calculation
ICD-2f 10 - 50 % Sensitivity for 2f component detection 15 – – X X X
ICD
Threshold of fundamental current at 1A
ICD-OC 0.10 - 5.00 A 0.50 – – X X X
rating
Threshold of fundamental current at 5A
ICD-OC 0.50 - 25.00 A 2.50 – – X X X
rating
- 178 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

TP_ICD (Function ID : 480A01)
8C00041C24 ICD-A ICD relay element operated(phase-A)
8D00041C25 ICD-B ICD relay element operated(phase-B)
8E00041C26 ICD-C ICD relay element operated(phase-C)
8F00041C23 ICD-OR ICD relay element operated(3-phases OR)
8000011C24 ICD-P-A ICD relay element operated(phase-A) Primary
8100011C25 ICD-P-B ICD relay element operated(phase-B) Primary
8200011C26 ICD-P-C ICD relay element operated(phase-C) Primary
8300011C23 ICD-P-OR ICD relay element operated(3-phases OR) Primary
8400021C24 ICD-S-A ICD relay element operated(phase-A) Secondary
8500021C25 ICD-S-B ICD relay element operated(phase-B) Secondary
8600021C26 ICD-S-C ICD relay element operated(phase-C) Secondary
8700021C23 ICD-S-OR ICD relay element operated(3-phases OR) Secondary
8800031C24 ICD-T-A ICD relay element operated(phase-A) Tertiary
8900031C25 ICD-T-B ICD relay element operated(phase-B) Tertiary
8A00031C26 ICD-T-C ICD relay element operated(phase-C) Tertiary
8B00031C23 ICD-T-OR ICD relay element operated(3-phases OR) Tertiary
- 179 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Circuit breaker failure protection (CBF)

When a circuit breaker (CB) fails to clear a fault due to CB failure, then the circuit breaker
failure protection (CBF) function clears the fault by sending a trip signal to another back-up
CB. For example, we can find the CBF operation during the following steps:
1st step when the transformer protection operates and issues a trip command to the
transformer CB;
2nd step if the transformer CB fails to open and clear the fault;
3rd step then the CBF protection detects the CB failure and issues a trip command to
the back-up CB, which may be at the remote end or could be at the incomer to
the sub-station.
The user can also program the CBF protection to try to trip the faulted CB again before the
CBF function starts to generate a trip signal to the back-up CB. The CBF function has a several
protection elements. For simplicity, the CBF1 function is only discussed, but the CBF2 to CBF5
functions are also applicable. The CBF1 function operates with the [CBF1-EN]=On.
TP_REPLICA TP_CBF TP_TRC

CBF1 to CBF5
CBF
CBF CBF logic Trip signals (TRIP CIRCUIT)
FEP_COMMON
element sequence
CT polarity
compensated
[CBF*-EN](ON/OFF )
[OCCBF*-EN](ON/OFF)
1CT-IY_1,2,3; 2CT-IY_1,2,3; 3CT-IY_1,2,3; 4CT-IY_1,2,3; 5CT-IY_1,2,3
Figure 3.10-1 CBF Function block diagram
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
3D – – 3E – – 3F – –
– Main features  – –  – –  – –
– Number of elements 3 – – 4 – – 5 – –
: Applicable NA: Not applicable –: Not available
- 180 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
3.10.1 CBF features

The CBF1 operation is initiated by the over current element (OCCBF1). The CBF1 operation
also can be triggered by other elements such as transformer differential protection (DIF),
overexcitation protection (VPH) etc., when the user programs other protection functions to
issue a trigger signals for the CBF1 function using the PLC connection points:
GEN.CBF1_START, EXT.CBF1_START_A, EXT.CBF1_START_B, EXT.CBF1_START_C AND
EXT.CBF1_START. The threshold for OCCBF1 element can be set using setting [OCCBF1];
the user can enabled or disabled the element using the scheme switch [OCCBF1-EN]. Note that
the CBF1 operation is based only on the operation of other protection functions, if the OCCBF1
element dose not operate.
3.10.2 Re-trip command

If a primary CB does not trip due to the failure, the CBF1 function should issue a back-up trip
to another CB near the primary CB or an adjacent CB located upstream. However, the CBF1
function can issue a trip command (‘re-trip’) again for the primary CB before the generation of
a back-up trip command. If the CB failure persists after the generation of the ‘re-trip’ command,
the back-up trip command is issued to the adjacent CB. The time diagram with regard to ‘re-
trip’ and ‘back-up trip’ are discussed later. (See Figure 3.10-2)
For issuing the ‘re-trip’ command, the user should set On for the scheme switch [CBF1-
Retrip]. Two operation modes are provided for the ‘re-trip’ command: (i) internal mode and (ii)
external mode. The user can choice a mode using scheme switch [CBF1-Retrip].
(i) Internal mode: If On is set for the scheme switch [CBF1-Retrip], the CBF1
function is ready for issuing a ‘re-trip’ command. In the CBF1 function, the OCCBF1
element generates a ‘re-trip’ signal when other protection functions operate.
(ii) External mode: When On-T is set for the scheme switch [CBF1-Retrip], the CBF1
function generates a ‘re-trip’ command based on the operation of other protection
functions. The external mode overrides the operation of OCCBF1 relay; this can be
used in case of transfer trip command coming from remote end CB protection.
The user should set On for the scheme switch [OCCBF1] for the re-trip command. When
a time delay is needed for ‘re-trip’ operation, set a delay time for the setting [TCBF1-RE]. The
user should coordinate the time delay with the CB response time. The coordination time is
described later (See Section 3.10.5(ii)). ‘Re-trip’ command has an advantage since it can avoid
unnecessary tripping of an adjacent CB or an upstream CB. This is particularly required
during maintenance and testing of the system.
3.10.3 Backup-trip command

As described above, another trip command can be issued by the ‘re-trip’ feature for the primary
- 181 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
CB so that CB is being tripped securely. If the ‘re-trip’ command cannot trip the primary CB
in technically sound, the CBF1 feature will issue a ‘back-up trip’ command. The back-up trip
is used as a last resort to clear the fault. For issuing the ‘back-up trip’ command, the user is
required to set On or ON-AftRe for the scheme switch [CBF1-Trip]:
 If On is set for the scheme switch [CBF1-Trip], then “back-up trip” is issued without
waiting for “re-trip”.
 If On-AftRe is set for the scheme switch [CBF1-Trip], then “back-up trip” is issued only
after “re-trip”.
Appearance of fault Start of CBF1 Back-trip for an adjacent CB
Adjacent CB Close
Open
On
Trip signal from other function
Off Trip of primary Trip of primary CB Off
CB (ordinary (Re-trip)
trip)
State of the primary CB Close
Tcb Tcb
Run
OCCBF1 stage Stop Toc Toc Stop
On
TCBF1-RE
Timer#1 (TCBF1-RE) Off Off
On
Operation of Re-trip Off Off
On
TCBF1-TP
Timer#2 (TCBF1-TP) Off Off
On
CBF1 trip signal Off Off
Tcb : primary CB operating time Toc : OCCBF1 reset time
Figure 3.10-2 Time chart of re-trip and backup trip during CBF1 operation
Figure 3.10-2 shows the sequence diagram of CBF1 operation; it shows that the primary
CB is unable to trip whereas the adjacent CB can be tripped. The CBF1 function operates by
the reception of signals from other protection functions.
Suppose that the fault is cleared if the primary CB is tripped normally. After that, the
OCCBF1 relay drops-off before Timer#1 (TCBF1-RE) times out. Accordingly, the CBF1
function will be stopped.
If the OCCBF1 function continues to operate after the CB being tripped with an normal
trip command and Timer #1 (TCBF1-RE) times out, the ‘re-trip’ command is required to trip
the primary CB. If the primary CB is tripped by the ‘re-trip’ command, the OCCBF1 relay will
drop off before Timer#2 (TCBF1-TP) times out; accordingly, the CBF1 function will stop.
- 182 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
If the primary CB fails to be tripped by the ‘re-trip’ command; if the OCCBF1 relay
continues to operate and Timer#2 (TCBF1-TP) times out, the CBF1 function shall issue a back-
up trip command for the adjacent CB to clear the fault, as a last resort.
3.10.4 Scheme logic

Figure 3.10-3 and Figure 3.10-4 show the CBF1 logic; trip commands are issued to the trip
circuit (TRC) function when each logic operates. The phase current is used as an input to the
OCCBF1. On should be set for the scheme switch [OCBF1-EN] to enable the OCBF1 trip
operation.
8000101C20
TCBF1-RE 8000101B60
A & & & t 0 CBF1-RETRIP-A
8100101C21 ≥1
≥1 ≥1 8100101B61
OCCBF1 B & & t 0
8200101C22 ≥1 & CBF1-RETRIP-B
≥1 ≥1
C 8200101B62
& ≥1 & & t 0 CBF1-RETRIP-C
≥1 ≥1
On
0.00 to 300.00s
OCCBF1-EN
800010EBB8 SUB.CBF1-A
≥1
810010EBB9 SUB.CBF1-B ≥1
820010EBBA SUB.CBF1-C ≥1
830010EBBB SUB.CBF1
800010EBB0 GEN.CBF1_START ≥1 & &
≥1 & &
≥1 & &
800010EBB1 EXT.CBF1_START-A
810010EBB2 EXT.CBF1_START-B CBF1-START-A
820010EBB3 EXT.CBF1_START-C CBF1-START-B

800010EBB4 EXT.CBF1_START CBF1-START-C
800010EBB6 CBFI-RE_INST
≥18000101B63 To TRC
& 8000101B64
800010EBB5 CBF1_BLOCK
OFF & CBF1-RETRIP1
8100101B65
ON & &
8200101B66
CBF1-RETRIP2
CBF1-Retrip ON-T
& &
8300101B67 CBF1 -RETRIP3
CBF1-EN ON
CBF1-EN=ON
& CBF1 -RETRIP4
On 8400101B68
CBF1-RETP1
On &
CBF1-RETP2 8500101B69 CBF1 -RETRIP5
On &
CBF1-RETP3 CBF1 -RETRIP6
On
CB1F-RETP4
On
CBF1-RETP5
On
CBF1-RETP6
Figure 3.10-3 re-trip logic in CBF1
When wishing to issue CBF trip commands without the operation of the OCCBF1 element, the
IED is able to issue them with external signals at PLC connection points ‘SUB.CBF1-*’. This
technique will be achieved when the user programs to inject a ‘CB close (closed) state signal’
at the ‘SUB.CBF1-*’ points. It is useful if the CBF function cannot determine the conditions of
breaker failures, when OCCBF1 element fails to detect small fault currents.
- 183 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
TCBF1-TP
CBF1-START-A & t 0 CBF1-TRIP-A
≥1 ≥1
CBF1-START-B & t 0 8000101B70
CBF1-TRIP-B
≥1 ≥1
CBF1-START-C & t 0 CBF1-TRIP-C 8100101B71
≥1 ≥1
0.00 to 300.00s 8200101B72
CBF1-RETRIP-A 8000101B73
& &
CBF1- RETRIP-B ≥1
& &
CBF1- RETRIP-C & &
CBF1-TRIP
OFF
ON &
CBF1-Trip ON-AftRe
&
CBF1-EN ON
800010EBB5 CBF1_BLOCK &
800010EBB7 CBF1-TP_INST
To TRC
8000101B74
CBF1-TP1 On & CBF1-TRIP1
8100101B75
CBF1-TP2 On & CBF1-TRIP2
8200101B76
CBF1-TP3 On & CBF1 -TRIP3
8300101B77
CB1F-TP4 On
& CBF1 -TRIP4
8400101B78
CBF1-TP5 On & CBF1 -TRIP5
8500101B79
CBF1-TP6 On CBF1 -TRIP6
&
Figure 3.10-4 back-up trip in CBF1
3.10.5 Combination of trip commands

(i) Direct of trip commands
The CBF function can generate six trip commands for the trip circuit (TRC‡) function. The
user can assign trip commands for the TRC function by setting On or Off for the scheme
switches [OCBF-TP1] and others.
‡Note: For more information see Relay application: Trip circuit function.
(ii) Operation timing

The time settings [TCBF1-RE] and [TCBF1-TP] are determined based on the opening time of
the primary CB and the reset time of OCCBF1 relay (see Tcb and Toc in Figure 3.10-2). The
following example shows the calculation for setting, when “re-trip” command is considered:
Setting [TCBF1-RE] =Breaker opening time + OCCBF1 reset time + Margin

=40ms + 10ms + 20ms
=70ms
Setting [TCBF1-TP] = Output relay operating time on Re-Trip + Breaker opening time +
OCCBF1 reset time + Margin
=10ms + 40ms + 10ms + 20ms
=80ms
If “re-trip” command is not used, the user should set the same value for the settings [TCBF1-
TP] and [TCBF1-RE].
- 184 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
3.10.6 Setting
Setting of TP_CBF (Function ID: 45B401)
Default Model
Units
1 2 3 4 5
value
CBF1-EN Off / On - CBF1 protection enable Off – – X X X
CBF
CBF4-EN Off / On - CBF4 protection enable Off – – – X X
CBF5-EN Off / On - CBF5 protection enable Off – – – – X
CBF1 current flow decision enable using OC relay
OCCBF1-EN Off / On - On – – X X X
element
CBF1-Retrip Off / On / On-T - CBF1 retrip operating mode On – – X X X
CBF1-Trip Off / On / On-AftRe - CBF1 trip operating mode On – – X X X
OCCBF1 0.02 - 25.00 A OCCBF1 relay operate level (Current flow detection) 5.00 – – X X X
TCBF1-RE 0.000 - 300.000 s CBF1 retrip timer 0.150 – – X X X
CBF1-RETP1 Off / On - CBF1 command output from TP1 B0 contact Off – – X X X
CBF1-RETP2 Off / On - CBF1 relay command output from TP2 B0 contact Off – – X X X
CBF1 CBF1-RETP4 Off / On - CBF1 relay command output from TP4 B0 contact Off – – X X X
TCBF1-TP 0.000 - 300.000 s CBF1 trip timer 0.200 – – X X X
CBF1-TP1 Off / On - CBF1 trip command output from TP1 B0 contact Off – – X X X
element
CBF2-Trip Off / On / On-AftRe - CBF2 trip operating mode On – – X X X
CBF2 CBF2-RETP4 Off / On - CBF2 relay command output from TP4 B0 contact Off – – X X X
element
CBF3 CBF3-Trip Off / On / On-AftRe - CBF3 trip operating mode On – – X X X
- 185 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Setting of TP_CBF (Function ID: 45B401)

Default Model
Units
1 2 3 4 5
value
OCCBF4-EN Off / On - On – – – X X
element
CBF4-Retrip Off / On / On-T - CBF4 retrip operating mode On – – – X X
CBF4-Trip Off / On / On-AftRe - CBF4 trip operating mode On – – – X X
OCCBF4 0.02 - 25.00 A OCCBF4 relay operate level (Current flow detection) 5.00 – – – X X
TCBF4-RE 0.000 - 300.000 s CBF4 retrip timer 0.150 – – – X X
CBF4-RETP1 Off / On - CBF4 relay command output from TP1 B0 contact Off – – – X X
CBF4 CBF4-RETP4 Off / On - CBF4 relay command output from TP4 B0 contact Off – – – X X
TCBF4-TP 0.000 - 300.000 s CBF4 trip timer 0.200 – – – X X
CBF4-TP1 Off / On - CBF4 trip command output from TP1 B0 contact Off – – – X X
OCCBF5-EN Off / On - On – – – – X
element
CBF5-Retrip Off / On / On-T - CBF5 retrip operating mode On – – – – X
CBF5-Trip Off / On / On-AftRe - CBF5 trip operating mode On – – – – X
OCCBF5 0.02 - 25.00 A OCCBF5 relay operate level (Current flow detection) 5.00 – – – – X
TCBF5-RE 0.000 - 300.000 s CBF5 retrip timer 0.150 – – – – X
CBF5-RETP1 Off / On - CBF5 relay command output from TP1 B0 contact Off – – – – X
CBF5 CBF5-RETP4 Off / On - CBF5 relay command output from TP4 B0 contact Off – – – – X
TCBF5-TP 0.000 - 300.000 s CBF5 trip timer 0.200 – – – – X
CBF5-TP1 Off / On - CBF5 trip command output from TP1 B0 contact Off – – – – X
- 186 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

CBF(Function ID: 45B401)
8000001B80 CBF-1 CBF1 operated
8C00001B86 CBF-OPT-A CBF operated (phase-A)
8D00001B87 CBF-OPT-B CBF operated (phase-B)
8E00001B88 CBF-OPT-C CBF operated (phase-C)
8000001B66 CBF-RETRIP-A CBF retrip operated (phase-A)
8100001B67 CBF-RETRIP-B CBF retrip operated (phase-B)
8200001B68 CBF-RETRIP-C CBF retrip operated (phase-C)
8000001B60 CBF-RETRIP1 CBF retrip output command output from TP1 B0
8000001B76 CBF-TRIP-A CBF trip operated (phase-A)
8100001B77 CBF-TRIP-B CBF trip operated (phase-B)
8200001B78 CBF-TRIP-C CBF trip operated (phase-C)
8000001B70 CBF-TRIP1 CBF trip output command output from TP1 B0
8000101B63 CBF1-RETRIP CBF1 retrip operated
8000101B60 CBF1-RETRIP-A CBF1 retrip operated (phase-A)
8100101B61 CBF1-RETRIP-B CBF1 retrip operated (phase-B)
8200101B62 CBF1-RETRIP-C CBF1 retrip operated (phase-C)
8000101B64 CBF1-RETRIP1 CBF1 retrip output command output from TP1 B0
8000101BB6 CBF1-RE_INST CBF1 retrip instant operation command output
8000101BB7 CBF1-TP_INST CBF1 trip instant operation command output
8000101B73 CBF1-TRIP CBF1 trip operated
8000101B70 CBF1-TRIP-A CBF1 trip operated (phase-A)
8100101B71 CBF1-TRIP-B CBF1 trip operated (phase-B)
8200101B72 CBF1-TRIP-C CBF1 trip operated (phase-C)
- 187 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

8000101B74 CBF1-TRIP1 CBF1 trip output command output from TP1 B0
8000101BB5 CBF1_BLOCK CBF1 block command output
800010100D CBF1_SCND_RATING CBF1 secondary rating
8A00301B62 CBF3-RETRIP-C CBF3 retrip operated (phase-C)
- 188 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

8A00301B72 CBF3-TRIP-C CBF3 trip operated (phase-C)
8C00401B60 CBF4-RETRIP-A CBF4 retrip operated (phase-A)
8D00401B61 CBF4-RETRIP-B CBF4 retrip operated (phase-B)
8E00401B62 CBF4-RETRIP-C CBF4 retrip operated (phase-C)
8C00401B70 CBF4-TRIP-A CBF4 trip operated (phase-A)
8D00401B71 CBF4-TRIP-B CBF4 trip operated (phase-B)
8E00401B72 CBF4-TRIP-C CBF4 trip operated (phase-C)
- 189 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

8000101BB4 EXT.CBF1_START EXT.CBF1 start command output
8000101BB1 EXT.CBF1_START-A EXT.CBF1 start command output (phase-A)
8100101BB2 EXT.CBF1_START-B EXT.CBF1 start command output (phase-B)
8200101BB3 EXT.CBF1_START-C EXT.CBF1 start command output (phase-C)
8A00301BB3 EXT.CBF3_START-C EXT.CBF3 start command output (phase-C)
8C00401BB1 EXT.CBF4_START-A EXT.CBF4 start command output (phase-A)
8D00401BB2 EXT.CBF4_START-B EXT.CBF4 start command output (phase-B)
8E00401BB3 EXT.CBF4_START-C EXT.CBF4 start command output (phase-C)
8000101BB0 GEN.CBF1_START GEN.CBF1 start command output
8000101C20 OCCBF1-A OCCBF1 relay element operated (phase-A)
8100101C21 OCCBF1-B OCCBF1 relay element operated (phase-B)
8200101C22 OCCBF1-C OCCBF1 relay element operated (phase-C)
- 190 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

8A00301C22 OCCBF3-C OCCBF3 relay element operated (phase-C)
8C00401C20 OCCBF4-A OCCBF4 relay element operated (phase-A)
8D00401C21 OCCBF4-B OCCBF4 relay element operated (phase-B)
8E00401C22 OCCBF4-C OCCBF4 relay element operated (phase-C)
8300011BBB SUB.CBF1 Substitution of CBF1 relay operation
8000011BB8 SUB.CBF1-A Substitution of CBF1 relay operation (phase-A)
8100011BB9 SUB.CBF1-B Substitution of CBF1 relay operation (phase-B)
8200011BBA SUB.CBF1-C Substitution of CBF1 relay operation (phase-C)
8B00031BBB SUB.CBF3 Substitution of CBF3 relay operation
8A00031BBA SUB.CBF3-C Substitution of CBF3 relay operation (phase-C)
8F00041BBB SUB.CBF4 Substitution of CBF4 relay operation
8C00041BB8 SUB.CBF4-A Substitution of CBF4 relay operation (phase-A)
8D00041BB9 SUB.CBF4-B Substitution of CBF4 relay operation (phase-B)
8E00041BBA SUB.CBF4-C Substitution of CBF4 relay operation (phase-C)

TP_CBF(Function ID: 45B401)
800010EBB6 CBF1-RE_INST CBF1 retrip instant operation command
800010EBB7 CBF1-TP_INST CBF1 trip instant operation command
800010EBB5 CBF1_BLOCK CBF1 block command
- 191 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

800010EBB4 EXT.CBF1_START EXT.CBF1 start command
800010EBB1 EXT.CBF1_START-A EXT.CBF1 start command (phase-A)
810010EBB2 EXT.CBF1_START-B EXT.CBF1 start command (phase-B)
820010EBB3 EXT.CBF1_START-C EXT.CBF1 start command (phase-C)
8A0030EBB3 EXT.CBF3_START-C EXT.CBF3 start command (phase-C)
8C0040EBB1 EXT.CBF4_START-A EXT.CBF4 start command (phase-A)
8D0040EBB2 EXT.CBF4_START-B EXT.CBF4 start command (phase-B)
8E0040EBB3 EXT.CBF4_START-C EXT.CBF4 start command (phase-C)
800010EBB0 GEN.CBF1_START GEN.CBF1 start command
830001EBBB SUB.CBF1 Substitution of CBF1 relay operation
800001EBB8 SUB.CBF1-A Substitution of CBF1 relay operation (phase-A)
810001EBB9 SUB.CBF1-B Substitution of CBF1 relay operation (phase-B)
820001EBBA SUB.CBF1-C Substitution of CBF1 relay operation (phase-C)
8B0003EBBB SUB.CBF3 Substitution of CBF3 relay operation
8A0003EBBA SUB.CBF3-C Substitution of CBF3 relay operation (phase-C)
- 192 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

8F0004EBBB SUB.CBF4 Substitution of CBF4 relay operation
8C0004EBB8 SUB.CBF4-A Substitution of CBF4 relay operation (phase-A)
8D0004EBB9 SUB.CBF4-B Substitution of CBF4 relay operation (phase-B)
8E0004EBBA SUB.CBF4-C Substitution of CBF4 relay operation (phase-C)
- 193 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Undervoltage protection for phase-to-ground (UV)

The under-voltage protection function for phase-to-ground (UV) is of four elements
independently: UV1, UV2, UV3 and UV4. The user can select a time characteristic among
definite time (DT), inverse definite minimum time (IDMT), and original time using UV
settings; the settings also enables or disenables the UV operation. The user can also set a
threshold and the ratio of drop-out voltage (DO) to pick-up voltage (PU). The UV function has
delay timers for issuing trip signals. The UV1 stage is only discussed for simplicity, but the
UV2 to UV4 stages are applicable. The UV1 stage is enabled using scheme switch [UV1-EN];
the transformer winding to be protected is selected using scheme switch [UV1-TarWind].
TP_REPLICA TP_UV TP_TRC
UV1 to UV4
UV
UV relay UV logic Trip signal (TRIP CIRCUIT)
FEP_COMMON
element sequence
[UV*-EN](ON/OFF )
[UV*-TarWind](P/S/T)
1W-VY_1,2,3; 2W-VY_1,2,3; 3W-VY_1,2,3; Type-VT_P,S,T(3PN/1PN)
Figure 3.11-1 UV block diagram
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
identify the IED ordering number; and check the order number for the “G&T position” whilst
referring to the comparison table below. For more information, see Appendix: Ordering.
3D – – 3E – – 3F – –
– Main features NA – – NA – – NA – –
– Number of stages (0) – – (0) – – (0) – –
- 194 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
3.11.1 Drop-off and pick-up characteristic

Figure 3.11-1 shows the UV1 characteristic as hatched area with concentric circles. The pick-
up threshold voltage (PU) is represented the outer circle; the drop-off voltage point (DO) is
represented the dotted circle. The PU voltage of the UV1 element is set using [UV1]. The DO
voltage of the UV1 element is set using [UV1-DPR].
The inner circle shows the area in which the UV1 function is blocked when the value of
the block voltage is set for [UVBLK]. Setting [TUVBLK] is also provided so that the user can
delay blocking the UV1 element using the setting.
Drop-off
Pickup
o V
UV block
Figure 3.11-2 UV1 element characteristic
3.11.2 Time characteristic

The UV1 element has the relationship between an input voltage and an operation time; the
relationship is divided into two time characteristics: (i) the definite time (DT) and (ii) the
inverse definite minimum time (IDMT).
(i) Definite time characteristic (DT)

Setting pick-up operation
The user is required to set DT for scheme switch [UV1-Timer] when the UV1 element should
operate in the DT characteristic. The UV1 element has a delay timer for the pick-up operation;
the user can set a delay time using setting [TUV1]. The user can find the delay timer in the
UV1 logic. (See section 3.11.4)
Setting drop-off operation

Resetting the UV1 element is performed instantly when a voltage exceeds over the drop-off
voltage.
(ii) Inverse definite minimum time (IDMT) characteristic

To operate the IDMT characteristic in the UV1 element, set scheme switch [UV1-Timer] IDMT.
- 195 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

The IDMT characteristic is applied when the operation of the UV1 element is required
inversely in accordance with the level of input voltage. The IDMT characteristic curve is
illustrated in Figure 3.11-3 using a value of time multiplier is set for [UV1-TMS]. It is followed
to Equation (3.11-1) in conformed in IEC 60255-127
𝑘
t(G) = TMS × {[ 𝑎 ] + 𝑐} (3.11-1)
1 − (𝑉⁄𝑉 )
𝑠
where,
t = operating time (seconds),
V = energizing voltage (voltage),
Vs = pickup voltage setting (voltage),
TMS = time multiplier setting.
Except for pre-programmed characteristics, the user can have a user-programmable

(original) characteristic curve. The user-programmable (original) curve is obtained when the
constants of k, a, c, as shown in Table 3.11-2, are set, and when Original is set for scheme
switch [UV1-Timer]. The constants are set with settings [UV1-k], [UV1-a], and [UV1-C].
Table 3.11-2 Values k, a, c for pre-programmable IDMT and user-programmable IDMT

Set item K a C
IDMT 1 1 0
User-programmable 0.00000 – 500.00000 0.00000 – 10.00000 0.00000 – 10.00000
(Original) by 0.00001 step by 0.0001 step by 0.00001 step
- 196 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Undervoltage Inverse Time Curves
1000.000
100.000
Operating Time (secs)
TMS=10
10.000
TMS=5
TMS=2
TMS=1
1.000
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1
Applied Voltage (x Vs)
Figure 3.11-3 IDMT characteristics curves depending on TMS

The user should set the time for resetting in the IDMT characteristic. Figure 3.11-4 shows
examples of the pick-up and the drop-off relevant to both the fault occurrences and the
operation time. The UV1 element has a time counter that increases in response to the fault
occurrence and duration. This figure also shows the increment degree of the time counter for
the fault occurrences.
As for an intermittent fault (the former in the figure), the time counter does not reach
the trip level. In the other word, the UV1 element will be paralyzed in the reset time [TUV1R].
If a series of fault occurs, the time counter increase corresponding to the duration of series
faults. When the time counter reaches the trip level, then the UV1 element issues a trip signal
after a certain delay. After issuing the trip signal, if a series of fault disappears completely, the
operation of the UV1 element is expired after the reset time [TUV1R].
- 197 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
When the user requires resetting the operation of the UV1 element immediately, setting
zero for the settings [TUV1R] is needed. Consequently, when a voltage is recovered over the
reset threshold (drop-off), the operation of the UV1 element is reset promptly.
Condition fault occurrence
Intermittent fault A series fault
T3
Fault observation by the relay
Issue of trip signal
Relay operation reset

Incrimination of time counter
corresponding to the fault
duration. Trip level
Tripping
T1 T1 T1 T1
T2 T2
Increment process in time Reset of time counter
T1: Resetting time set by the user counter
T2: Actual resetting time in the relay operation Value maintenance of time counter
T3: Time gap between fault occurrence and relay start time
Figure 3.11-4 Faults occurrences and reset operation when IDMT being applied

(i) Blocking UV operation by VTF
Blocking the UV function may be required when a failure in the voltage transformer occurs.
In this case, the user shall set Block for scheme switch [UV1-VTFBlk]. Non (as a default) is set
for scheme switch [UV1-VTFBlk] in order that the UV function is not blocked by the failure.
(ii) Operation of UV element

The user should set On for scheme switch [UV1-EN] for the operation of the UV1 element.
Otherwise, set Off for the scheme switch if the UV1 element is not required to operate.

The UV1 element is able to generate a trip signal; the trip circuit function (TRC) can issue a
switch [UV1-TP1], ‘UV-TRIP1’ signal is transferred for the TRC function if the UV1 element
output circuit (BO), which can energize the trip coil to open the circuit breaker. The UV1
- 198 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
element can produce six trip signals so that other scheme switches [UV1-TP2] to [UV1-TP6] are
provided. Except for the trip signals, an alarm signal can be also generated when On is set for
scheme switch [UV1-ALM].
circuit.
3.11.4 Scheme logic

Figure 3.11-5 shows the UV1 elements and logics in the UV function; trip signals and an alarm
are issued to trip circuit (TRC) function when each UV element is operated. On is set for the
scheme switch [UV1-EN] to enable the UV1 trip operation. Setting [TUV1] is provided to delay
the generation of trip signal.
- 199 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
UV1-EN
On
8000101C20 TUV1
8000101B62
A & & t 0 UV1-OPT-A
8100101C21 &
≥1 8100101B63
UV1 B t 0
8200101C22 & & & UV1-OPT-B
≥1
C 8200101B64
& & t 0 UV1-OPT-C
& ≥1
≥1 8000101B60
0.00 - 300.00s
UV1-OR
&
8000101C24 &
A 8000101B65
8100101C25 &
UV1 ≥1 UV1-OPT
B
PU 8200101C26
C
≥1 8000101B61
UV1PU-OR
UV1-TarWind
UV1-VTFBlk
On
UV1-TarWind 8000001C20
A &
8100001C21
UVBLK1 B TUVBLK1
8200001C22
t 0
C UVBLK1
0.00 - 300.00s
1 ≥1
NON UVBLK1
UV-Test
On
Primary Target
Secondary
UV1-TarWind winding
Tertiary
UVBLK
selected
From VTF
VTF-P_DETECT
&
&
VTF-S_DETECT UV1-VTF_DETECT
& ≥1
VTF-T_DETECT ≥1 1
&
On
UV1-VTFBlk
800010EBB0 UV1_BLOCK
DT
IDMT
UV1-Timer
Original ≥1
8000101B66 To TRC
UV1-TP1 On & 8000001B70
8100101B67 ≥1
On UV-TRIP1
UV1-TP2 &
8200101B68
UV1-TP3 On &
8300101B69 8100001B71
≥1
On UV-TRIP2
UV1-TP4 &
8400101B6A
UV1-TP5 On & 8500101B6B 8200001B72
≥1 UV-TRIP3
UV1-TP6 On
&
8B00101B6C ≥1 8300001B73
On UV-TRIP4
UV1-ALM &
8400001B74
≥1
UV-TRIP5
8500001B75
≥1
UV-TRIP6
8B00001B7B
≥1
UV-ALARM
UV4-TRIP1
UV4 function logics
UV4-TRIP6
UV4-ALARM
Figure 3.11-5 Scheme logic for UV function
- 200 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
3.11.5 Setting
Setting of TP_UV(Function ID: 473001)
Default Model
Units
1 2 3 4 5
value
UVBLK-EN Off / On - UV block function enable (Off) – – X1 – X1
UVBLK 5.0 - 20.0 V UV block threshold (10.0) – – X1 – X1
TUVBLK 0.00 - 300.00 s UV block delay time (10.00) – – X1 – X1
UV1-EN Off / On - UV1 protection enable (Off) – – X1 – X1
UV1-TarWind Primary / Secondary / Tertiary - Target transformer winding for UV1 protection (Primary) – – X1 – X1
UV1-Timer DT / IDMT / Original - UV1 delay type (DT) – – X1 – X1
UV1 5.0 - 130.0 V UV1 threshold (60.0) – – X1 – X1
UV1-DPR 100 - 120 % UV1 drop-out/pick-up ratio (100) – – X1 – X1
TUV1 0.00 - 300.00 s UV1 operating delay time (in DT mode) (1.00) – – X1 – X1
UV1-TMS 0.010 - 100.000 - UV1 time multiplier (in IDMT mode) (1.000) – – X1 – X1
TUV1R 0.0 - 300.0 s UV1 definite time reset delay (0.0) – – X1 – X1
UV1-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - UV1 user original curve coefficient (0.00000) – – X1 – X1
UV1 UV1-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - UV1 user original curve coefficient (0.00000) – – X1 – X1
UV1-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - UV1 user original curve coefficient (0.00000) – – X1 – X1
UV1-VTFBlk Non / Block - UV1 operation block by VTF (Non) – – X1 – X1
UV1-TP1 Off / On - UV1 trip signal1 for TRC driving BO circuit (On) – – X1 – X1
UV1-ALM Off / On - UV1 alarm enable (Off) – – X1 – X1
UV3
UV3-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - UV3 user original curve coefficient (0.00000) – – X1 – X1
- 201 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Setting of TP_UV(Function ID: 473001)

Default Model
Units
1 2 3 4 5
value
X: Applicable setting, X1: Applicable depending on the software “G&N”, –: Not applicable
setting
- 202 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

TP_UV(Function ID: 473001)
8000101C20 UV1-A UV1 relay element operated (phase-A)
8100101C21 UV1-B UV1 relay element operated (phase-B)
8200101C22 UV1-C UV1 relay element operated (phase-C)
8600201C22 UV2-C UV2 relay element operated (phase-C)
8A00301C22 UV3-C UV3 relay element operated (phase-C)
8C00401C20 UV4-A UV4 relay element operated (phase-A)
8D00401C21 UV4-B UV4 relay element operated (phase-B)
8E00401C22 UV4-C UV4 relay element operated (phase-C)
8000101C24 UV1PU-A UV1 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-A)
8100101C25 UV1PU-B UV1 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-B)
8200101C26 UV1PU-C UV1 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-C)
8600201C26 UV2PU-C UV2 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-C)
8A00301C26 UV3PU-C UV3 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-C)
8C00401C24 UV4PU-A UV4 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-A)
8D00401C25 UV4PU-B UV4 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-B)
8E00401C26 UV4PU-C UV4 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-C)
8000101B60 UV1-OR UV1 relay element operated (3-phases OR)
8000101B61 UV1PU-OR UV1 PU relay operation level pick up (3-phases OR)
8000101B62 UV1-OPT-A UV1 protection operated (phase-A)
8100101B63 UV1-OPT-B UV1 protection operated (phase-B)
8200101B64 UV1-OPT-C UV1 protection operated (phase-C)
8600201B64 UV2-OPT-C UV2 protection operated (phase-C)
8A00301B64 UV3-OPT-C UV3 protection operated (phase-C)
8C00401B62 UV4-OPT-A UV4 protection operated (phase-A)
8D00401B63 UV4-OPT-B UV4 protection operated (phase-B)
- 203 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

8E00401B64 UV4-OPT-C UV4 protection operated (phase-C)
8000101B65 UV1-OPT UV1 protection operated
8000101B66 UV1-TRIP1 Trip1 signal by UV1 protection
8400101B6A UV1-TRIP5 Trip5 signal by UV1 protection
8500101B6B UV1-TRIP6 Trip6 signal by UV1 protection
8B00101B6C UV1-ALARM Alarm signal by UV1 protection
8000111C20 UV1BLK-A UV1BLK relay operation level pick up (phase-A)
8100111C21 UV1BLK-B UV1BLK relay operation level pick up (phase-B)
8200111C22 UV1BLK-C UV1BLK relay operation level pick up (phase-C)
8600211C22 UV2BLK-C UV2BLK relay operation level pick up (phase-C)
8A00311C22 UV3BLK-C UV3BLK relay operation level pick up (phase-C)
8C00411C20 UV4BLK-A UV4BLK relay operation level pick up (phase-A)
8D00411C21 UV4BLK-B UV4BLK relay operation level pick up (phase-B)
- 204 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

8E00411C22 UV4BLK-C UV4BLK relay operation level pick up (phase-C)
8000111B60 UV1BLK UV1 protection block command by UVBLK
8000001B70 UV-TRIP1 Trip1 signal by UV protection
8B00001B7B UV-ALARM Alarm signal by UV protection
8C00001B7C UV-OPT-A UV protection operated (phase-A)
8D00001B7D UV-OPT-B UV protection operated (phase-B)
8E00001B7E UV-OPT-C UV protection operated (phase-C)
8000101BB0 UV1_BLOCK UV1 protection block command
3100001703 UV DataID for TP_UV Function(Output)
3100001707 UV DataID for UV Function(Setting)
3100001708 Common DataID for Setting hierarchy
3100101708 UV1-Output DataID for UV Function(Setting)

800010EBB0 UV1_BLOCK UV1 protection block command
- 205 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Undervoltage protection for phase-to-phase (UVS)

The under-voltage protection function for phase-to-phase (UVS) is of four elements
independently: UVS1, UVS2, UVS3 and UVS4. The user can select a time characteristic among
definite time (DT), inverse definite minimum time (IDMT), and original time using UV
settings; the settings also enables or disenables the UVS operation. The user can also set a
threshold and the ratio of drop-out voltage (DO) to pick-up voltage (PU). The UVS function has
delay timers for issuing trip signals. The UVS1 stage is only discussed for simplicity, but the
UVS2 to UVS4 stages are applicable. The UVS1 stage is enabled using scheme switch [UVS1-
EN]; the transformer winding to be protected is selected using scheme switch [UVS1-TarWind].
TP_REPLICA TP_UVS TP_TRC

UVS1 to UVS4
UVS
UVS relay UVS logic Trip signal (TRIP CIRCUIT)
FEP_COMMON
element sequence
[UVS*-EN](ON/OFF )
[UVS*-TarWind](P/S/T
)
1W-VΔ_1,2,3; 2W-VΔ_1,2,3; 3W-VΔ_1,2,3; Type-VT_P,S,T(3PN/3PP/1PP)
Figure 3.12-1 UVS block diagram
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
3D – – 3E – – 3F – –
– Number of stages (0) – – (0) – – (0) – –
- 206 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
3.12.1 Drop-off and pick-up characteristic

Figure 3.12-2 shows the UV1 characteristic as hatched area with concentric circles. The pick-
up threshold voltage (PU) is represented the outer circle; the drop-off voltage point (DO) is
represented the dotted circle. The PU voltage of the UVS1 element is set using [UVS1]. The
DO voltage of the UVS1 element is set using [UVS1-DPR].
The inner circle shows the area in which the UVS1 function is blocked when the value of
the block voltage is set for [UVSBLK]. Setting [TUVSBLK] is also provided so that the user can
delay blocking the UVS1 element using the setting.
Drop-off
Pickup
o V
UV block
Figure 3.12-2 UVS1 element characteristic

The UVS1 element has the relationship between an input voltage and an operation time; the
relationship is divided into two time characteristics: (i) the definite time (DT) and (ii) the
inverse definite minimum time (IDMT).

The user is required to set DT for scheme switch [UVS1-Timer] when the UVS1 element should
operate in the DT characteristic. The UVS1 element has a delay timer for the pick-up
operation; the user can set a delay time using setting [TUVS1]. The user can find the delay
timer in the UVS1 logic. (See section 3.12.4)

Resetting the UVS1 element is performed instantly when a voltage exceeds over the drop-off
voltage.
(ii) Inverse definite minimum time (IDMT) characteristic

To operate the IDMT characteristic in the UVS1 element, set scheme switch [UVS1-Timer]
IDMT.
- 207 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

The IDMT characteristic is applied when the operation of the UVS1 element is required
inversely in accordance with the level of input voltage. The IDMT characteristic curve is
illustrated in Figure 3.12-3 using a value of time multiplier is set for [UVS1-TMS]. It is followed
to Equation (3.12-1) in conformed in IEC 60255-127
𝑘
t(G) = TMS × {[ 𝑎] + 𝑐} (3.12-1)
1 − (𝑉⁄𝑉 )
𝑠
where,
Vs = pickup voltage setting (voltage),
TMS = time multiplier setting.
Except for pre-programmed characteristics, the user can have a user-programmable

(original) characteristic curve. The user-programmable (original) curve is obtained when the
constants of k, a, c, as shown in Table 3.12-2, are set, and when Original is set for scheme
switch [UVS1-Timer]. The constants are set with settings [UVS1-k], [UVS1-a], and [UVS1-C].
Table 3.12-2 Values k, a, c for pre-programmable IDMT and user-programmable IDMT

Set item K a C
IDMT 1 1 0
- 208 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Undervoltage Inverse Time Curves
1000.000
100.000
Operating Time (secs)
TMS=10
10.000
TMS=5
TMS=2
TMS=1
1.000
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1
Figure 3.12-3 IDMT characteristics curves depending on TMS

The user should set the time for resetting in the IDMT characteristic. Figure 3.12-4 shows
examples of the pick-up and the drop-off relevant to both the fault occurrences and the
operation time. The UVS1 element has a time counter that increases in response to the fault
occurrence and duration. This figure also shows the increment degree of the time counter for
the fault occurrences.
As for an intermittent fault (the former in the figure), the time counter does not reach
the trip level. In the other word, the UVS1 element will be paralyzed in the reset time
[TUVS1R].
If a series of fault occurs, the time counter increase corresponding to the duration of series
faults. When the time counter reaches the trip level, then the UVS1 element issues a trip
command after a certain delay. After issuing the trip signal, if a series of fault disappears
completely, the operation of the UVS1 element is expired after the reset time [TUVS1R].
- 209 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
When the user requires resetting the operation of the UVS1 element immediately, setting
zero for the settings [TUVS1R] is needed. Consequently, when a voltage is recovered over the
reset threshold (drop-off), the operation of the UVS1 element is reset promptly.
Intermittent fault A series fault
T3
Issue of trip command

Tripping
T1 T1 T1 T1
T2 T2

(i) Blocking UVS operation by VTF
Blocking the UVS function may be required when a failure in the voltage transformer occurs.
In this case, the user shall set Block for scheme switch [UVS1-VTFBlk]. Non (as a default) is
set for scheme switch [UVS1-VTFBlk] in order that the UVS function is not blocked by the
failure.
(ii) Operation of UVS element

The user should set On for scheme switch [UVS1-EN] for the operation of the UVS1 element.
Otherwise, set Off for the scheme switch if the UVS1 element is not required to operate.

The UVS1 element is able to generate a trip signal; the trip circuit function (TRC) can issue a
switch [UVS1-TP1], ‘UVS-TRIP1’ signal is transferred for the TRC function if the UVS1
- 210 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
UVS1 element can produce six trip signals so that other scheme switches [UVS1-TP2] to [UVS1-
TP6] are provided. Except for the trip signals, an alarm signal can be also generated when On
is set for scheme switch [UVS1-ALM].
circuit.
3.12.4 Scheme logic

Figure 3.12-5 shows the UVS1 elements and logics in the UVS function; trip signals and an
alarm are issued to trip circuit (TRC) function when each OV element is operated. On is set for
the scheme switch [UVS1-EN] to enable the OV1 trip operation. Setting [TUVS1] is provided to
delay the generation of trip signal.
- 211 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
UVS1-EN On
8000101C20 TUVS1
8000101B62
AB & & t 0 UVS1-OPT-AB
8100101C21 &
≥1 8100101B63
UVS1 BC t 0
8200101C22 & & & UVS1-OPT-BC
≥1
CA 8200101B64
& & & t 0 UVS1-OPT-CA
≥1
≥1 8000101B60
0.00 - 300.00s
UV1-OR
&
8000101C24 &
AB 8000101B65
8100101C25 &
UVS1 ≥1 UVS1-OPT
BC
PU 8200101C26
CA
≥1 8000101B61
UVS1PU-OR
UVS1-TarWind
UVS1-VTFBlk
On
8000001C20
AB &
8100001C21
UVSBLK BC TUVSBLK1
8200001C22
t 0
CA UVSBLK1
0.00 - 300.00s
1 ≥1
NON UVSBLK1
UVS-Test
On
Primary Target
Secondary
UVS1-TarWind winding
Tertiary
selected
From VTF
VTF-P_DETECT
&
&
VTF-S_DETECT UVS1-VTF_DETECT
& ≥1
VTF-T_DETECT ≥1 1
&
On
UVS1-VTFBlk
800010EBB0 UV1_BLOCK
DT
IDMT
UVS1-Timer
Original ≥1
8000101B66 To TRC
UVS1-TP1 On & 8000001B70
8100101B67 ≥1
On UVS-TRIP1
UVS1-TP2 &
8200101B68
UVS1-TP3 On &
8300101B69 8100001B71
≥1
UVS1-TP4 On UVS-TRIP2
&
8400101B6A
UVS1-TP5 On & 8500101B6B 8200001B72
≥1
UVS1-TP6 On UVS-TRIP3
&
8B00101B6C ≥1 8300001B73
UVS1-ALM On & UVS-TRIP4
8400001B74
≥1
UVS-TRIP5
8500001B75
≥1
UVS-TRIP6
8B00001B7B
≥1
UVS-ALARM
UVS4-TRIP1
UVS4 function logics
UVS4-TRIP6
UVS4-ALARM
Figure 3.12-5 Scheme logic for UVS function
- 212 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
3.12.5 Setting
Setting of TP_UVS (Function ID: 473401)
Default Model
Units
1 2 3 4 5
value
UVSBLK-EN Off / On － UVS block function enable (Off) – – X1 – X1
Comm
UVSBLK 5.0 - 20.0 V UVS block threshold (10.0) – – X1 – X1
on
TUVSBLK 0.00 - 300.00 s UVS block delay time (10.00) – – X1 – X1
UVS1-EN Off / On - UVS1 protection enable (Off) – – X1 – X1
Primary / Secondary / Target transformer winding for UVS1
UVS1-TarWInd - (Primary) – – X1 – X1
Tertiary protection
UVS1-Timer DT / IDMT / Original - UVS1 delay type (DT) – – X1 – X1
UVS1 5.0 - 130.0 V UVS1 threshold (60.0) – – X1 – X1
UVS1-DPR 100 - 120 % UVS1 drop-out/pick-up ratio (100) – – X1 – X1
TUVS1 0.00 - 300.00 s UVS1 operating delay time (in DT mode) (1.00) – – X1 – X1
UVS1-TMS 0.010 - 100.000 - UVS1 time multiplier (in IDMT mode) (1.000) – – X1 – X1
TUVS1R 0.0 - 300.0 s UVS1 definite time reset delay (0.0) – – X1 – X1
UVS1-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - UVS1 user original curve coefficient (0.00000) – – X1 – X1
UVS1-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - UVS1 user original curve coefficient (0.00000) – – X1 – X1
UVS1-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - UVS1 user original curve coefficient (0.00000) – – X1 – X1
UVS1-VTFBlk Non / Block - UVS1 operation block by VTF (Non) – – X1 – X1
UVS1
UVS1 trip signal1 for TRC driving BO
UVS1-TP1 Off / On - (On) – – X1 – X1
circuit
UVS1-TP2 Off / On - (On) – – X1 – X1
circuit
UVS1-TP3 Off / On - (On) – – X1 – X1
circuit
UVS1-TP4 Off / On - (On) – – X1 – X1
circuit
UVS1-TP5 Off / On - (On) – – X1 – X1
circuit
UVS1-TP6 Off / On - (On) – – X1 – X1
circuit
UVS1-ALM Off / On - UVS1 alarm enable (Off) – – X1 – X1
Tertiary protection
UVS2 UVS2-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - UVS2 user original curve coefficient (0.00000) – – X1 – X1
UVS2-TP1 Off / On - (On) – – X1 – X1
circuit
UVS2-TP2 Off / On - (On) – – X1 – X1
circuit
UVS2-TP3 Off / On - (On) – – X1 – X1
circuit
UVS2-TP4 Off / On - (On) – – X1 – X1
circuit
UVS2-TP5 Off / On - (On) – – X1 – X1
circuit
- 213 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

Default Model
Units
1 2 3 4 5
value
UVS2-TP6 Off / On - (On) – – X1 – X1
circuit
Tertiary protection
UVS3-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - UVS3 user original curve coefficient (0.00000) – – X1 – X1
UVS3
UVS3-TP1 Off / On - (On) – – X1 – X1
circuit
UVS3-TP2 Off / On - (On) – – X1 – X1
circuit
UVS3-TP3 Off / On - (On) – – X1 – X1
circuit
UVS3-TP4 Off / On - (On) – – X1 – X1
circuit
UVS3-TP5 Off / On - (On) – – X1 – X1
circuit
UVS3-TP6 Off / On - (On) – – X1 – X1
circuit
Tertiary protection
UVS4 UVS4-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - UVS4 user original curve coefficient (0.00000) – – X1 – X1
UVS4-TP1 Off / On - (On) – – X1 – X1
circuit
UVS4-TP2 Off / On - (On) – – X1 – X1
circuit
UVS4-TP3 Off / On - (On) – – X1 – X1
circuit
UVS4-TP4 Off / On - (On) – – X1 – X1
circuit
UVS4-TP5 Off / On - (On) – – X1 – X1
circuit
- 214 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

Default Model
Units
1 2 3 4 5
value
UVS4-TP6 Off / On - (On) – – X1 – X1
circuit
setting
- 215 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

TP_UVS(Function ID: 473401)
8000101C20 UVS1-AB UVS1 relay element operated (phase-AB)
8100101C21 UVS1-BC UVS1 relay element operated (phase-BC)
8200101C22 UVS1-CA UVS1 relay element operated (phase-CA)
8600201C22 UVS2-CA UVS2 relay element operated (phase-CA)
8A00301C22 UVS3-CA UVS3 relay element operated (phase-CA)
8C00401C20 UVS4-AB UVS4 relay element operated (phase-AB)
8D00401C21 UVS4-BC UVS4 relay element operated (phase-BC)
8E00401C22 UVS4-CA UVS4 relay element operated (phase-CA)
8000101C24 UVS1PU-AB UVS1 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-AB)
8100101C25 UVS1PU-BC UVS1 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-BC)
8200101C26 UVS1PU-CA UVS1 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-CA)
8600201C26 UVS2PU-CA UVS2 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-CA)
8A00301C26 UVS3PU-CA UVS3 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-CA)
8C00401C24 UVS4PU-AB UVS4 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-AB)
8D00401C25 UVS4PU-BC UVS4 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-BC)
8E00401C26 UVS4PU-CA UVS4 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-CA)
8000101B60 UVS1-OR UVS1 relay element operated (3-phases OR)
8000101B61 UVS1PU-OR UVS1 PU relay operation level pick up (3-phases OR)
8000101B62 UVS1-OPT-AB UVS1 protection operated (phase-AB)
8100101B63 UVS1-OPT-BC UVS1 protection operated (phase-BC)
8200101B64 UVS1-OPT-CA UVS1 protection operated (phase-CA)
8600201B64 UVS2-OPT-CA UVS2 protection operated (phase-CA)
8A00301B64 UVS3-OPT-CA UVS3 protection operated (phase-CA)
8C00401B62 UVS4-OPT-AB UVS4 protection operated (phase-AB)
8D00401B63 UVS4-OPT-BC UVS4 protection operated (phase-BC)
- 216 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

8E00401B64 UVS4-OPT-CA UVS4 protection operated (phase-CA)
8000101B65 UVS1-OPT UVS1 protection operated
8000101B66 UVS1-TRIP1 Trip1 signal by UVS1 protection
8400101B6A UVS1-TRIP5 Trip5 signal by UVS1 protection
8500101B6B UVS1-TRIP6 Trip6 signal by UVS1 protection
8B00101B6C UVS1-ALARM Alarm signal by UVS1 protection
8000111C20 UVS1BLK-AB UVS1BLK relay operation level pick up (phase-AB)
8100111C21 UVS1BLK-BC UVS1BLK relay operation level pick up (phase-BC)
8200111C22 UVS1BLK-CA UVS1BLK relay operation level pick up (phase-CA)
8600211C22 UVS2BLK-CA UVS2BLK relay operation level pick up (phase-CA)
8A00311C22 UVS3BLK-CA UVS3BLK relay operation level pick up (phase-CA)
8C00411C20 UVS4BLK-AB UVS4BLK relay operation level pick up (phase-AB)
8D00411C21 UVS4BLK-BC UVS4BLK relay operation level pick up (phase-BC)
- 217 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

8E00411C22 UVS4BLK-CA UVS4BLK relay operation level pick up (phase-CA)
8000111B60 UVS1BLK UVS1 protection block command by UVS1BLK
8000001B70 UVS-TRIP1 Trip1 signal by UVS protection
8B00001B7B UVS-ALARM Alarm signal by UVS protection
8C00001B7C UVS-OPT-A UVS protection operated (phase-AB)
8D00001B7D UVS-OPT-B UVS protection operated (phase-BC)
8E00001B7E UVS-OPT-C UVS protection operated (phase-CA)
8000101BB0 UVS1_BLOCK UVS1 protection block command
3100001703 UVS DataID for TP_UVS Function(Output)
3100001707 UVS DataID for UVS Function(Setting)
3100001708 Common DataID for Setting hierarchy
3100101708 UVS1-Output DataID for UVS Function(Setting)

800010EBB0 UVS1_BLOCK UVS1 protection block command
- 218 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Overvoltage protection for phase-to-neutral (OV)

The over voltage protection function for phase-to-neutral (OV) detects an over voltage condition
where phase-to-neutral voltage is larger than a setting. The OV function has four stages (OV1,
OV2, OV3 and OV4) that operate independently. The OV element has a time delay
characteristic and the user can select either (1) independent (definite) time characteristic delay
or (2) dependent (inverse) time characteristic delay. The OV1 stage is only discussed for
simplicity, but the OV2 to OV4 stages are applicable. The OV1 stage is enabled using scheme
switch [OV1-EN]; the transformer winding to be protected is selected using scheme switch
[OV1-TarWind].
TP_REPLICA TP_OV TP_TRC
OV1 to OV4
OV
OV relay OV logic Trip signal (TRIP CIRCUIT)
FEP_COMMON
element sequence
[OV*-EN](ON/OFF )
[OV*-TarWind](P/S/T)
1W-VY_1,2,3; 2W-VY_1,2,3; 3W-VY_1,2,3; Type-VT_P,ST (3PN/1PN)
Figure 3.13-1 OV block diagram
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
3D – – 3E – – 3F – –
- 219 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
3.13.1 Drop-off and pickup characteristic

Figure 3.13-2 shows the characteristic of the OV1 element. The outer circle shows the threshold
of pick-up threshold voltage (PU), whereas the inner dotted circle shows drop-off voltage point
(DO). The hatched area shows the operation area of the OV1.
Pickup
V
Dropoff
0 V
Figure 3.13-2 Characteristic of OV1 element
For example, with regard to the OV1 element, suppose the user sets a pick-up value in
P.U for setting [OV1]. Then the user should set a drop-off value using setting [OV1-DPR], which
configures the ratio of the PU to the DO.
3.13.2 Delay for the operation of the OV element

The OV element has a delay timer for the operation. For the OV1 element, the user can set a
delay time using setting [TOV1]. The user can find the delay timer in the OV1 logic. (See section
3.13.5)

The OV1 element has two characteristics between a voltage condition and an operation time;
hence, the user should select a mode either (i) definite (independent) time characteristic delay
or (ii) inverse (dependent) time characteristic delay. For the definite time characteristic delay,
the operation time is a constant. In the inverse time characteristic delay, the operation time
depends upon the level of the voltage condition.

To operate the definite (independent) time delay, set scheme switch [OV1-Timer] DT.
Resetting the OV element is performed when a voltage falls below the drop-off voltage.
(ii) Invers time characteristic (IDMT)

To operate the dependent (invers) time delay, set scheme switch [OV1-Timer] IDMT.
Pick-up characteristic
- 220 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
The operate time of the inverse (dependent) time characteristic is inversely proportional to the
level of the voltage condition. Figure 3.13-3 shows the invers time characteristic of the OV
element when a multiplier setting [OV1-TMS] is used. The OV element uses Equation (3.13-1)
to be in conformity to IEC 60255-127:
𝑘
t(G) = TMS × {[ 𝑎 ] + 𝑐} (3.13-1)
(𝑉⁄𝑉 ) − 1
𝑠
where,
Vs = pickup voltage setting (voltage), and
TMS = time multiplier setting to adjust a curve
If the user will require a user-programmable (original) curve in the inverse time
characteristic, it is provided when the constants of k, a, c are set, as shown in Table 3.13-2. For
example, the user-programmable (original) curve in the OV1 element will be acquired when
Original is set for the scheme switch [OV1-Timer], and when values of respective constants are
set for [OV1-k], [OV1-a], and [OV1-C].
Table 3.13-2 Constant value at each setting of IDMT curve

Set item K a C
IDMT 1 1 0
- 221 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Overvoltage Inverse Time Curves
1000.000
Operating Time (secs) 100.000
10.000
TMS = 10
TMS = 5
1.000
TMS = 2
TMS = 1
0.100
1 1.5 2 2.5 3
Figure 3.13-3 IDMT characteristic
Reset feature
The user should set the time for resetting. Figure 3.13-4 shows that examples of the pick-up
and the drop-off relevant to both the fault occurrences and the operation time. The value of the
time counter furnished in the OV1 element is incremented if faults occur.
As for an intermittent fault (the former in the figure), the time counter will not reach the
trip level. In the other words, the operation of the OV1 element is paralyzed in the reset time
set by [TOV1R].
If a series of fault occurs repeatedly (the latter in the figure), and if the value of the time
counter reaches at trip level, the OV1 element will issue a trip signal after a certain delay.
After issuing the trip signal, if a series of fault completely disappears after issuing the trip
signal, the value of the time counter will be expired after the reset time [TOV1R].
When the user requires resetting the operation of the OV1 element immediately, setting
zero for the settings [TOV1R] is needed. Consequently, when a voltage falls below the reset
- 222 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
threshold (drop-off), the operation of the OV1 element is reset promptly.

Intermittent fault Series faults
T3

Tripping
T1 T1 T1 T1
T2 T2

(i) Blocking OV operation by VTF
Blocking the OV function may be required when a failure in the voltage transformer occurs. In
this case, the user shall set Block for scheme switch [OV1-VTFBlk]. Non (as a default) is set
for scheme switch [OV1-VTFBlk] in order that the OV function is not blocked by the failure.
(ii) Execution of OV function

Set On for scheme switch [OV1-EN]. Otherwise, set Off for the scheme switch [OV1-EN] if the
OV1 element is not required to operate.

The OV1 element is able to generate a trip signal; the trip circuit function (TRC) can issue a
switch [OV1-TP1], ‘OV-TRIP1’ signal is transferred for the TRC function if the OV1 element
output circuit (BO), which can energize the trip coil to open the circuit breaker. The OV1
element can produce six trip signals so that other scheme switches [OV1-TP2] to [OV1-TP6]
- 223 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
for scheme switch [OV1-ALM].
circuit.
3.13.5 Scheme logic

Figure 3.13-5 shows the OV1 elements and logics in the OV function; trip signals and an alarm
are issued to trip circuit (TRC) function when each OV element is operated. Each phase of the
OV1 provides the result of decision whether a pickup voltage exceeds a setting, and then
operation signals are issued to the TRC circuits.
8000101C20 TOV1 8000101B62

A & & t 0 OV1-OPT
8100101C21 & 8000101B65
≥1 8100101B63
OV1 B t 0 ≥1
8200101C22 & & &
≥1 8200101B64
C
& & & t 0
≥1 OV1-OPT-A
≥1 8000101B60
0.00 - 300.00s
OV1-OPT-B
OV1-OR
OV1-OPT-C
&
8000101C24 &
OV1-OPT-A
A
8100101C25 &
OV1 OV1-OPT-B
B
PU 8200101C26
C OV1-OPT-C
≥1 8000101B61
OV1PU-OR
OV1-EN
On
OV1-TARWIND
OV1-VTF-DETECT
&
≥1 1
OV1-VTFBlk
On
800010EBB0 OV1_BLOCK
DT DT
IDMT IDMT
OV1-Timer ≥1
Original
To TRC
8000101B66
OV1-TP1 On & 8000001B70
8100101B67 ≥1
On OV-TRIP1
OV1-TP2 &
8200101B68
OV1-TP3 On &
8300101B69 8100001B71
≥1
OV1-TP4 On OV-TRIP2
&
8400101B6A
OV1-TP5 On & 8500101B6B 8200001B72
≥1
OV1-TP6 On OV-TRIP3
&
8B00101B6C ≥1 8300001B73
OV1-ALM On & OV-TRIP4
8400001B74
≥1
OV-TRIP5
8500001B75
≥1
OV-TRIP6
8B00001B7B
≥1
OV-ALARM
OV4-TRIP1
OV4 function logics
OV4-TRIP6
OV4-ALARM
Figure 3.13-5 Scheme logic for OV function
- 224 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
3.13.6 Setting list

Setting of TP_OV (Function ID: 465001)
Default Model
Units
1 2 3 4 5
value
OV1-EN Off / On - OV1 protection enable (Off) – – X1 – X1
Primary / Secondary / Target transformer winding for OV1
OV1-TarWind - (Primary) – – X1 – X1
Tertiary protection
OV1-Timer DT / IDMT / Original - OV1 delay type (DT) – – X1 – X1
OV1 1.0 - 220.0 V OV1 threshold (120.0) – – X1 – X1
OV1-DPR 10 - 100 % OV1 drop-out/pick-up ratio (100) – – X1 – X1
TOV1 0.00 - 300.00 s OV1 operating delay time (in DT mode) (1.00) – – X1 – X1
OV1-TMS 0.010 - 100.000 - OV1 time multiplier (in IDMT mode) (1.000) – – X1 – X1
TOV1R 0.0 - 300.0 s OV1 definite time reset delay (0.0) – – X1 – X1
OV1-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - OV1 user original curve coefficient (0.00000) – – X1 – X1
OV1
OV1-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - OV1 user original curve coefficient (0.00000) – – X1 – X1
OV1-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - OV1 user original curve coefficient (0.00000) – – X1 – X1
OV1-VTFBlk Non / Block - OV1 operation block by VTF (Non) – – X1 – X1
OV1-TP1 Off / On - OV1 trip signal1 for TRC driving BO circuit (Off) – – X1 – X1
OV1-ALM Off / On - OV1 alarm enable (Off) – – X1 – X1
Tertiary protection
OV2
Tertiary protection
OV3 OV3-DPR 10 - 100 % OV3 drop-out/pick-up ratio (100) – – X1 – X1
- 225 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Setting of TP_OV (Function ID: 465001)

Default Model
Units
1 2 3 4 5
value
Tertiary protection
OV4
setting
- 226 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

TP_OV(Function ID: 465001)
8000101C20 OV1-A OV1 relay element operated (phase-A)
8100101C21 OV1-B OV1 relay element operated (phase-B)
8200101C22 OV1-C OV1 relay element operated (phase-C)
8600201C22 OV2-C OV2 relay element operated (phase-C)
8A00301C22 OV3-C OV3 relay element operated (phase-C)
8C00401C20 OV4-A OV4 relay element operated (phase-A)
8D00401C21 OV4-B OV4 relay element operated (phase-B)
8E00401C22 OV4-C OV4 relay element operated (phase-C)
8000101C24 OV1PU-A OV1 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-A)
8100101C25 OV1PU-B OV1 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-B)
8200101C26 OV1PU-C OV1 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-C)
8600201C26 OV2PU-C OV2 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-C)
8A00301C26 OV3PU-C OV3 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-C)
8C00401C24 OV4PU-A OV4 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-A)
8D00401C25 OV4PU-B OV4 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-B)
8E00401C26 OV4PU-C OV4 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-C)
8000101B60 OV1-OR OV1 relay element operated (3-phases OR)
8000101B61 OV1PU-OR OV1 PU relay operation level pick up (3-phases OR)
8000101B62 OV1-OPT-A OV1 protection operated (phase-A)
8100101B63 OV1-OPT-B OV1 protection operated (phase-B)
8200101B64 OV1-OPT-C OV1 protection operated (phase-C)
8600201B64 OV2-OPT-C OV2 protection operated (phase-C)
8A00301B64 OV3-OPT-C OV3 protection operated (phase-C)
8C00401B62 OV4-OPT-A OV4 protection operated (phase-A)
8D00401B63 OV4-OPT-B OV4 protection operated (phase-B)
- 227 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

8E00401B64 OV4-OPT-C OV4 protection operated (phase-C)
8000101B65 OV1-OPT OV1 protection operated
8000101B66 OV1-TRIP1 Trip1 signal by OV1 protection
8400101B6A OV1-TRIP5 Trip5 signal by OV1 protection
8500101B6B OV1-TRIP6 Trip6 signal by OV1 protection
8B00101B6C OV1-ALARM Alarm signal by OV1 protection
8000001B70 OV-TRIP1 Trip1 signal by OV protection
8B00001B7B OV-ALARM Alarm signal by OV protection
8C00001B7C OV-OPT-A OV protection operated (phase-A)
8D00001B7D OV-OPT-B OV protection operated (phase-B)
8E00001B7E OV-OPT-C OV protection operated (phase-C)
8000101BB0 OV1_BLOCK OV1 protection block command
- 228 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

3100001703 OV DataID for TP_OV Function(Output)
3100001707 OV DataID for OV Function(Setting)
3100101708 OV1-Output DataID for OV Function(Setting)

800010EBB0 OV1_BLOCK OV1 protection block command
- 229 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Overvoltage protection for phase-to-phase (OVS)

The over voltage protection function for phase-to-phase (OVS) detects an over voltage condition
where phase-to-phase voltage is larger than a setting. The OVS function has four stages (OVS1,
OVS2, OVS3 and OV4S) that operate independently. The OVS element has a time delay
characteristic and the user can select either (1) independent (definite) time characteristic delay
or (2) dependent (inverse) time characteristic delay. The OVS1 stage is only discussed for
simplicity, but the OVS2 to OVS4 stages are applicable. The OVS1 stage is enabled using
scheme switch [OVS1-EN]; the transformer winding to be protected is selected using scheme
switch [OVS1-TarWind].
TP_REPLICA TP_OVS TP_TRC
OVS1 to OVS4
OVS
OVS relay OVS logic Trip signal (TRIP CIRCUIT)
FEP_COMMON
element sequence
[OVS*-EN](ON/OFF )
[OVS*-TarWind](P/S/T)
1W-VΔ_1,2,3; 2W-VΔ_1,2,3; 3W-VΔ_1,2,3; Type-VT_P,ST (3PN/3PP/1PP)
Figure 3.14-1 Function block diagram for OVS
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
3D 3E 3F
– Main features NA NA NA
- 230 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

Figure 3.14-2 shows the characteristic of the OVS1 element. The outer circle shows the
threshold of pick-up threshold voltage (PU), whereas the inner dotted circle shows drop-off
voltage point (DO). The hatched area shows the operation area of the OVS1.
Pickup
V
Dropoff
0 V
Figure 3.14-2 Characteristic of OVS1 element
For example, with regard to the OVS1 element, suppose the user sets a pick-up value in
P.U for setting [OVS1]. Then the user should set a drop-off value using setting [OVS1-DPR],
which configures the ratio of the PU to the DO.
3.14.2 Delay for the operation of the OVS element

The OVS element has a delay timer for the operation. For the OVS1 element, the user can set
a delay time using setting [TOVS1]. The user can find the delay timer in the OVS1 logic. (See
section 3.14.5)

The OVS1 element has two characteristics between a voltage condition and an operation time;

To operate the definite (independent) time delay, set scheme switch [OVS1-Timer] DT.
Resetting the OVS element is performed when a voltage falls below the drop-off voltage.

To operate the dependent (invers) time delay, set scheme switch [OVS1-Timer] IDMT.
- 231 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
level of the voltage condition. Figure 3.14-3 shows the invers time characteristic of the OVS
element when a multiplier setting [OVS1-TMS] is used. The OVS element uses Equation
(3.14-1) to be in conformity to IEC 60255-127:
𝑘
t(G) = TMS × {[ 𝑎 ] + 𝑐} (3.14-1)
(𝑉⁄𝑉 ) − 1
𝑠
where,
example, the user-programmable (original) curve in the OVS1 element will be acquired when
Original is set for the scheme switch [OVS1-Timer], and when values of respective constants
are set for [OVS1-k], [OVS1-a], and [OVS1-C].

Set item k a C
IDMT 1 1 0
- 232 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
1000.000
10.000
TMS = 10
TMS = 5
1.000
TMS = 2
TMS = 1
0.100
1 1.5 2 2.5 3
Reset feature
time counter furnished in the OVS1 element is incremented if faults occur.
trip level. In the other words, the operation of the OVS1 element is paralyzed in the reset time
set by [TOVS1R].
counter reaches at trip level, the OVS1 element will issue a trip signal after a certain delay.
signal, the value of the time counter will be expired after the reset time [TOVS1R].
When the user requires resetting the operation of the OVS1 element immediately, setting
zero for the settings [TOVS1R] is needed. Consequently, when a voltage falls below the reset
- 233 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
threshold (drop-off), the operation of the OVS1 element is reset promptly.

T3

Tripping
T1 T1 T1 T1
T2 T2

(i) Blocking OVS operation by VTF
Blocking the OVS function may be required when a failure in the voltage transformer occurs.
In this case, the user shall set Block for scheme switch [OVS1-VTFBlk]. Non (as a default) is
set for scheme switch [OVS1-VTFBlk] in order that the OVS function is not blocked by the
failure.
(ii) Execution of OVS function

Set On for scheme switch [OVS1-EN]. Otherwise, set Off for the scheme switch [OVS1-EN] if
the OVS1 element is not required to operate.

The OVS1 element is able to generate a trip signal; the trip circuit function (TRC) can issue a
switch [OVS1-TP1], ‘OVS-TRIP1’ signal is transferred for the TRC function if the OVS1
- 234 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
OVS1 element can produce six trip signals so that other scheme switches [OVS1-TP2] to
[OVS1-TP6] are provided. Except for the trip signals, an alarm signal can be also generated
when On is set for scheme switch [OVS1-ALM].
circuit.
3.14.5 Scheme logic

Figure 3.14-5 shows the OVS1 elements and logics in the OVS function; trip commands and
an alarm are issued to trip circuit (TRC) function when each OVS element is operated. Each
phase of the OVS1 provides the result of decision whether a pickup voltage exceeds a setting,
and then operation signals are issued to the TRC function.
- 235 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
8000101C20 TOVS1
8000101B62
AB & & t 0 OVS1-OPT-AB
8100101C21 &
≥1 8100101B63
OVS1 BC t 0
8200101C22 & & & OVS1-OPT-BC
≥1
CA 8200101B64
& & t 0 OVS1-OPT-CA
& ≥1
≥1 8000101B60
0.00 - 300.00s
OVS1-OR
&
8000101C24 &
AB
8100101C25 &
OVS1
BC
PU 8200101C26
CA
≥1 8000101B61
OVS1PU-OR
OVS1-EN
On
OVS1-TARWIND
OVS1-VTF-DETECT
&
≥1 1
OVS1-VTFBlk
On
800010EBB0 OVS1_BLOCK
DT DT
IDMT IDMT
OVS1-Timer ≥1
Original
OVS1-OPT-AB
8000101B65 OVS1-OPT
≥1
OVS1-OPT-BC
To TRC
OVS1-OPT-CA 8000101B66
OVS1-TP1 On & 8000001B60
8100101B67 ≥1
On OVS-TRIP1
OVS1-TP2 &
8200101B68
OVS1-TP3 On &
8300101B69 8100001B61
≥1
On OVS-TRIP2
OVS1-TP4 &
8400101B6A
OVS1-TP5 On & 8500101B6B 8200001B62
≥1 OVS-TRIP3
OVS1-TP6 On
&
8B00101B6C ≥1 8300001B63
On OVS-TRIP4
OVS1-ALM &
8400001B64
≥1
OVS-TRIP5
8500001B65
≥1
OVS-TRIP6
8B00001B6B
≥1
OVS-ALARM
OVS4-TRIP1
OVS4 function logics
OVS4-TRIP6
OVS4-ALARM
Figure 3.14-5 Scheme logic for OVS function
- 236 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
3.14.6 Setting
Setting of TP_OVS (Function ID: 465801)
Default Model
Units
1 2 3 4 5
value
OVS1 OVS1-EN Off / On - OVS1 protection enable (Off) – – X1 – X1
Primary / Secondary / - Target transformer winding for OVS1
OVS1-TarWind (Primary) – – X1 – X1
Tertiary protection
OVS1-Type DT / IDMT / Original - OVS1 delay type (DT) – – X1 – X1
OVS1 1.0 - 220.0 V OVS1 threshold (120.0) – – X1 – X1
OVS1-DPR 10 - 100 % OVS1 drop-out/pick-up ratio (100) – – X1 – X1
TOVS1 0.00 - 300.00 s OVS1 operating delay time (in DT mode) (1.00) – – X1 – X1
OVS1-TMS 0.010 - 100.000 - OVS1 time multiplier (in IDMT mode) (1.000) – – X1 – X1
TOVS1R 0.0 - 300.0 s OVS1 definite time reset delay (0.0) – – X1 – X1
OVS1-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - OVS1 user original curve coefficient (0.00000) – – X1 – X1
OVS1-a 0.00000 - 500.00000 - OVS1 user original curve coefficient (0.00000) – – X1 – X1
OVS1-c 0.00000 - 500.00000 - OVS1 user original curve coefficient (0.00000) – – X1 – X1
OVS1-VTFBlk Non / Block - OVS1 operation block by VTF (Non) – – X1 – X1
OVS1-TP1 Off / On - OVS1 trip signal1 for TRC driving BO circuit (Off) – – X1 – X1
OVS1-ALM Off / On - OVS1 alarm enable (Off) – – X1 – X1
Tertiary protection
Tertiary protection
- 237 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Setting of TP_OVS (Function ID: 465801)

Default Model
Units
1 2 3 4 5
value
Tertiary protection
X: Applicable setting, X1: Applicable depending on the software “G&N”, –: Not applicable setting
- 238 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

TP_OVS(Function ID: 465801)
8000101C20 OVS1-AB OVS1 relay element operated (phase-AB)
8100101C21 OVS1-BC OVS1 relay element operated (phase-BC)
8200101C22 OVS1-CA OVS1 relay element operated (phase-CA)
8600201C22 OVS2-CA OVS2 relay element operated (phase-CA)
8A00301C22 OVS3-CA OVS3 relay element operated (phase-CA)
8C00401C20 OVS4-AB OVS4 relay element operated (phase-AB)
8D00401C21 OVS4-BC OVS4 relay element operated (phase-BC)
8E00401C22 OVS4-CA OVS4 relay element operated (phase-CA)
8000101C24 OVS1PU-AB OVS1 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-AB)
8100101C25 OVS1PU-BC OVS1 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-BC)
8200101C26 OVS1PU-CA OVS1 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-CA)
8600201C26 OVS2PU-CA OVS2 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-CA)
8A00301C26 OVS3PU-CA OVS3 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-CA)
8C00401C24 OVS4PU-AB OVS4 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-AB)
8D00401C25 OVS4PU-BC OVS4 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-BC)
8E00401C26 OVS4PU-CA OVS4 PU relay operation level pick up (phase-CA)
8000101B60 OVS1-OR OVS1 relay element operated (3-phases OR)
8000101B61 OVS1PU-OR OVS1 PU relay operation level pick up (3-phases OR)
8000101B62 OVS1-OPT-AB OVS1 protection operated (phase-AB)
8100101B63 OVS1-OPT-BC OVS1 protection operated (phase-BC)
8200101B64 OVS1-OPT-CA OVS1 protection operated (phase-CA)
8600201B64 OVS2-OPT-CA OVS2 protection operated (phase-CA)
8A00301B64 OVS3-OPT-CA OVS3 protection operated (phase-CA)
8C00401B62 OVS4-OPT-AB OVS4 protection operated (phase-AB)
8D00401B63 OVS4-OPT-BC OVS4 protection operated (phase-BC)
- 239 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

8E00401B64 OVS4-OPT-CA OVS4 protection operated (phase-CA)
8000101B65 OVS1-OPT OVS1 protection operated
8000101B66 OVS1-TRIP1 Trip1 signal by OVS1 protection
8400101B6A OVS1-TRIP5 Trip5 signal by OVS1 protection
8500101B6B OVS1-TRIP6 Trip6 signal by OVS1 protection
8B00101B6C OVS1-ALARM Alarm signal by OVS1 protection
8000001B60 OVS-TRIP1 Trip1 signal by OVS protection
8B00001B6B OVS-ALARM Alarm signal by OVS protection
8C00001B6C OVS-OPT-A OVS protection operated (phase-AB)
8D00001B6D OVS-OPT-B OVS protection operated (phase-BC)
8E00001B6E OVS-OPT-C OVS protection operated (phase-CA)
8000101BB0 OVS1_BLOCK OVS1 protection block command
- 240 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

3100001703 OVS DataID for TP_OVS Function(Output)
3100001707 OVS DataID for OVS Function(Setting)
3100101708 OVS1-Output DataID for OVS Function(Setting)

800010EBB0 OVS1_BLOCK OVS1 protection block command
- 241 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Earth fault overvoltage protection (OVG)

The over voltage protection function for phase-to-ground (OVG) is to detect earth fault on
unearthed, resistance-earthed system or transformers. The OVG function has four stages
(OVG1, OVG2, OVG3 and OVG4) that operate independently. The OVG element has a time
delay characteristic and the user can select either (1) independent (definite) time characteristic
delay or (2) dependent (inverse) time characteristic delay. The OVG1 stage is only discussed
for simplicity, but the OVG2 to OVG4 stages are applicable. The OVG1 stage is enabled using
scheme switch [OVG1-EN]; the transformer winding to be protected is selected using scheme
switch [OVG1-TarWind]. When a low threshold vale is set for setting [OVG1], it is susceptible
to superimpose any third harmonic component on an entering signal. Therefore, the OVG
function incorporates the filter to suppress the third harmonic component.
TP_REPLICA TP_OVG TP_TRC
OVG1 to OVG4
OVG
OVG relay OVG logic Trip signal (TRIP CIRCUIT)
FEP_COMMON
element sequence
[OVG*-EN](ON/OFF )
[OVG*-TarWind](P/S/T)
1W-VY_1,2,3; 2W-VY_1,2,3; 3W-VY_1,2,3; Type-VT_P,ST (3PN/1PN)
Figure 3.15-1 OVG block diagram
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
3D 3E 3F
– Main features NA NA NA
- 242 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

Figure 3.13-2 shows the characteristic of the OVG1 element. The outer circle shows the
threshold of pick-up threshold voltage (PU), whereas the inner dotted circle shows drop-off
voltage point (DO). The hatched area shows the operation area of the OVG1.
Pickup
V
Dropoff
0 V
Figure 3.15-2 Characteristic of OVG1 element
For example, with regard to the OVG1 element, suppose the user sets a pick-up value in
P.U for setting [OVG1]. Then the user should set a drop-off value using setting [OVG1-DPR],
which configures the ratio of the PU to the DO.
3.15.2 Delay for the operation of the OVG element

The OVG element has a delay timer for the operation. For the OVG1 element, the user can set
a delay time using setting [TOVG1]. The user can find the delay timer in the OVG1 logic. (See
section 3.13.5)

The OVG1 element has two characteristics between a voltage condition and an operation time;

To operate the definite (independent) time delay, set scheme switch [OVG1-Timer] DT.
Resetting the OVG element is performed when a voltage falls below the drop-off voltage.

To operate the dependent (invers) time delay, set scheme switch [OVG1-Timer] IDMT.
- 243 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
level of the voltage condition. Figure 3.13-3 shows the invers time characteristic of the OVG
element when a multiplier setting [OVG1-TMS] is used. The OVG element uses Equation
(3.13-1) to be in conformity to IEC 60255-127:
𝑘
t(G) = TMS × {[ 𝑎 ] + 𝑐} (3.15-1)
(𝑉⁄𝑉 ) − 1
𝑠
where,
example, the user-programmable (original) curve in the OVG1 element will be acquired when
Original is set for the scheme switch [OVG1-Timer], and when values of respective constants
are set for [OVG1-k], [OVG1-a], and [OVG1-C].

Set item K a C
IDMT 1 1 0
- 244 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
1000.000
10.000
TMS = 10
TMS = 5
1.000
TMS = 2
TMS = 1
0.100
1 1.5 2 2.5 3
Reset feature
time counter furnished in the OVG1 element is incremented if faults occur.
trip level. In the other words, the operation of the OVG1 element is paralyzed in the reset time
set by [TOVG1R].
counter reaches at trip level, the OVG1 element will issue a trip signal after a certain delay.
signal, the value of the time counter will be expired after the reset time [TOVG1R].
When the user requires resetting the operation of the OVG1 element immediately, setting
zero for the settings [TOVG1R] is needed. Consequently, when a voltage falls below the reset
- 245 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
threshold (drop-off), the operation of the OVG1 element is reset promptly.

T3

Tripping
T1 T1 T1 T1
T2 T2

(i) Blocking OVG operation by VTF
Blocking the OVG function may be required when a failure in the voltage transformer occurs.
In this case, the user shall set Block for scheme switch [OVG1-VTFBlk]. Non (as a default) is
set for scheme switch [OVG1-VTFBlk] in order that the OVG function is not blocked by the
failure.
(ii) Execution of OVG function

Set On for scheme switch [OVG1-EN]. Otherwise, set Off for the scheme switch [OVG1-EN] if
the OVG1 element is not required to operate.

The OVG1 element is able to generate a trip signal; the trip circuit function (TRC) can issue a
switch [OVG1-TP1], ‘OVG-TRIP1’ signal is transferred for the TRC function if the OVG1
- 246 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
OVG1 element can produce six trip signals so that other scheme switches [OVG1-TP2] to
[OVG1-TP6] are provided. Except for the trip signals, an alarm signal can be also generated
when On is set for scheme switch [OVG1-ALM].
circuit.
3.15.5 Scheme logic

Figure 3.15-5 shows the OVG1 elements and logics in the OVG function; trip commands and
an alarm are issued to trip circuit (TRC) function when each OVG element is operated. Each
phase of the OVG1 provides the result of decision whether a pickup voltage exceeds a setting,
and then operation signals are issued to the TRC function.
8000101C23
TOVG1
8000101B60
t 0 OVG1-OPT
& & &
OVG1 ≥1
0.0 – 300.0s
8000101C27
&
OVG1 PU
OVG1-TARWIND
OVG1-EN
On
OVG1-VTF-DETECT &
≥1 1
OVG1-VTFBLK
On
800010EBB0 OVG1_BLOCK
DT
IDMT
OVG1-Timer ≥1
Original
8000101B61 To TRC
OVG1-TP1 On & 8000001B60
8100101B62 ≥1
OVG1-TP2 On & OVG-TRIP1
8200101B63
OVG1-TP3 On &
8300101B64 ≥1 8100001B61
OVG1-TP4 On OVG -TRIP2
&
8400101B65
OVG1-TP5 On & 8500101B66 8200001B62
≥1
OVG1-TP6 On OVG -TRIP3
&
8B00101B6B ≥1 8300001B63
OVG1-ALM On & OVG -TRIP4
8400001B64
≥1
OVG -TRIP5
8500001B65
≥1
OVG -TRIP6
8B00001B6B
≥1
OVG -ALARM
OVG4-TRIP1
OVG4 function logics
OVG4-TRIP6
OVG4-ALARM
Figure 3.15-5 Scheme logic for OVG function
- 247 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
3.15.6 Setting
Setting of TP_OVG (Function ID: 465401)
Default Model
Units
1 2 3 4 5
value
OVG1-EN Off / On - OVG1 protection enable Off – – X1 – X1
Primary / Secondary / Target transformer winding for OVG1
OVG1-TarWind - Primary – – X1 – X1
Tertiary protection
OVG1-Type DT / IDMT / Original - OVG1 delay type DT – – X1 – X1
OVG1 1.0 - 220.0 V OVG1 threshold 20.0 – – X1 – X1
OVG1-DPR 10 - 100 % OVG1 drop-out/pick-up ratio 100 – – X1 – X1
TOVG1 0.00 - 300.00 s OVG1 operating delay time (in DT mode) 1.00 – – X1 – X1
OVG1-TMS 0.010 - 100.000 - OVG1 time multiplier (in IDMT mode) 1.000 – – X1 – X1
TOVG1R 0.0 - 300.0 s OVG1 definite time reset delay 0.0 – – X1 – X1
OVG1-k 0.00000 - 500.00000 - OVG1 user original curve coefficient 0.00000 – – X1 – X1
OVG1-a 0.00000 - 10.00000 - OVG1 user original curve coefficient 0.00000 – – X1 – X1
OVG1-c 0.00000 - 10.00000 - OVG1 user original curve coefficient 0.00000 – – X1 – X1
OVG1-VTFBlk Non / Block - OVG1 operation block by VTF Non – – X1 – X1
OVG1
OVG1 trip signal1 for TRC driving BO
OVG1-TP1 Off / On - On – – X1 – X1
circuit
circuit
circuit
circuit
circuit
circuit
OVG1-ALM Off / On - OVG1 alarm enable Off – – X1 – X1
Tertiary protection
OVG2
circuit
circuit
circuit
circuit
circuit
circuit
- 248 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Setting of TP_OVG (Function ID: 465401)

Default Model
Units
1 2 3 4 5
value
Tertiary protection
OVG3
circuit
circuit
circuit
circuit
circuit
circuit
Tertiary protection
OVG4
circuit
circuit
circuit
circuit
circuit
circuit
X: Applicable setting, X1: Applicable depending on the software “G&N”, –: Not applicable setting
- 249 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

TP_OVG(Function ID: 465401)
8000101C23 OVG1 OVG1 relay element operated
8000101C27 OVG1PU OVG1 PU relay operation level pick up
8000101B60 OVG1-OPT OVG1 protection operated
8000101B61 OVG1-TRIP1 Trip1 signal by OVG1 protection
8B00101B6B OVG1-ALARM Alarm signal by OVG1 protection
8000001B60 OVG-TRIP1 Trip1 signal by OVG protection
- 250 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

8B00001B6B OVG-ALARM Alarm signal by OVG protection
8000101BB0 OVG1_BLOCK OVG1 protection block command
3100001703 OVG DataID for TP_OVG Function(Output)
3100001707 OVG DataID for OVG Function(Setting)
3100101708 OVG1-Output DataID for OVG Function(Setting)

800010EBB0 OVG1_BLOCK OVG1 protection block command
- 251 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Frequency protection (FRQ/DFRQ)

The frequency protection (FRQ and DFRQ) functions have six frequency stages to detect
frequency-deviations and rate of frequency-change (∆f/∆t) respectively. If the deviations or
changes occur, the function can issue a trip and alarm signals in response to the degree of the
frequency-deviation and the rate of frequency-change respectively.
Either an under-frequency stage (UF) or an over-frequency stage (OF) is used to monitor

the frequency-deviation. The UF stage is used to initiate load shedding to maintain load and
generation balance and retain power system stability. The user can set the degree of frequency
deviation for each stage. The OF stage is used to protect synchronous machines (connected
through Generator Transformer) from possible damage due to over-frequency conditions.
For monitoring the rate of frequency-change, either a frequency-rise monitoring (RISE)

or a frequency-down monitoring (DOWN) is used. The user should select either RISE or DOWN
setting to monitor the frequency-change.
The DFRQ is used to isolate two interconnected systems when the rate of frequency-
change is very rapid and to retain the power system stability.
- 252 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
To simplify, stage 1 is discussed only, but the other stages (stage 2 to stage 6) are
applicable. The FRQ/DFRQ1 stage is only discussed for simplicity, but the FRQ/DFRQ2 to
FRQ/DFRQ8 stages are applicable. The FRQ1/DFRQ1 stages operates using switch [FRQ1-
EN], [DFRQ1-EN]; the transformer winding to be protected is selected using [FRQ-TarWind].
TP_REPLICA TP_FRQ/TP_DFRQ TP_TRC

FRQ1 to FRQ6
FRQ
FRQ relay FRQ logic Trip signal (TRIP CIRCUIT)
element sequence
FEP_COMMON
CT polarity
[FRQ*-EN](ON/OFF)
compensated
DFRQ1 to DFRQ6
DFRQ
FRQ/DFRQ DFRQ logic Trip signal
relay sequence
element
[DFRQ*-EN](ON/OFF)
[FRQ-TarWind](P/S/T)
1W -VY_ 1, 1W -VΔ_ 1, 1W -V1, 2W -VY_ 1, 2W -VΔ_ 1, 2W -V1, 3W -VY_ 1, 3W -VΔ_ 1, 3W -V1, Type-VT_ P,S,T(3PN/3PP/1PN/1PP)
Figure 3.16-1 FRQ/DFRQ block diagram
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
3D – – 3E – – 3F – –
– Main features  – –  – –  – –
- 253 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
3.16.1 FRQ features and characteristics

(i) UF/OF characteristic
The UF and OF stages check the frequency every 5ms; they determine whether the frequency
is in under-frequency or over-frequency. Figure 3.16-2(a) shows the UF characteristic; Figure
3.16-2(b) shows the OF characteristic; hatched area shows the operation zone of the UF and
the OF stages.
The user can select stage 1 to detect either over-frequency state or under-frequency state
using the scheme switch [FRQ1-Chara]. For example, if UnderFrq is set for the scheme switch
[FRQ1-Chara], the stage 1 determines the under-frequency state when an under frequency is
observed (Figure 3.16-2(a)). The user can set the threshold value in [FRQ1]. Conversely, if
OverFrq is set for the scheme switch, the stage 1 determines the over-frequency state when an
over frequency is observed (Figure 3.16-2(b)).
The UF or OF element can output a trip signal; the output decisions of UF and OF
tripping are properly carried out in every interval. To delay the generation of trip signal, the
user can use a delay timer to postpone the generation using the setting [TFRQ1].
Hz Hz
OF stage 1
operation zone
frequency
Pickup
frequency
Pickup
UF stage 1
operation zone
o o
V V
Pickup voltage (FRQBLK) Pickup voltage (FRQBLK)
a. Under frequency element at Stage 1 b. Over frequency element at Stage 1
Figure 3.16-2 Characteristics of UF and OF elements (e.g. Stage 1 of FRQ)
(ii) Blocking FRQ operation for applying low voltage

For the operation of the UF and OF stages, the user should set the voltage level to cancel
frequency protection. When the measured voltage is under the threshold value, which is set
using the setting [FRQBLK], the protection is blocked. The under voltage block is necessary to
prevent unnecessary operation due to VT failure or to allow other feeder protection relays to
clear fault conditions.
(iii) Enabling FRQ function

The user should set On for the scheme switch [FRQ1-EN] to enable the FRQ1 function and
should set Off to disable the FRQ1 function.
- 254 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(iv) Signal for TRC function

The FRQ1 element is able to generate a trip signal; the trip circuit function (TRC) can issue a
switch [FRQ1-TP1], ‘FRQ1-TRIP1’ signal is transferred for the TRC function if the FRQ1
FRQ1 element can produce six trip signals so that other scheme switches [FRQ1-TP2] to
[FRQ1-TP6] are provided. Except for the trip signals, an alarm signal can be also generated
when On is set for scheme switch [FRQ1-ALM].
circuit.
3.16.2 DFRQ features and characteristics

(i) RISE/DOWN characteristic
The RISE or DOWN characteristics calculate the gradient of frequency-change (Δf/Δt) every
5ms. Figure 3.16-3 shows how to calculate the gradient using Δf and Δt: the change of
frequency (Δf) over a time interval (Δt =5ms). Six stages are provided for the DFRQ function;
each stage can operate independently. The DFRQ function issues a trip command if Δf
exceeds the set value for 50 consecutive times.
Hz
Δf
Δt
sec
Figure 3.16-3 Gradient of frequency rate-of-change
The user can set state 1 to detect whether a frequency is rising or descending using the
scheme switch [DFRQ1-Chara]. For example, when Rise is set for the scheme switch [DFRQ1-
Chara], the DFRQ examines the gradient of frequency-change (Δf/Δt) is up. Conversely, when
Down is set for the scheme switch, the DFRQ examines the gradient of frequency-change
(Δf/Δt) is down. Setting [DFRQ1] is used to configure an operation threshold; the operation
threshold is configured with Hertz per second.
The operation of the DFRQ stage is blocked when the FRQBLK operates. That is, if a
- 255 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
measured voltage is below the setting [FRQBLK], any operation of the DFRQ stage is blocked.
The FRQBLK element is discussed in section 3.16.1(ii).
(ii) Enabling DFRQ function

The user should set On for the scheme switch [DFRQ1-EN] to enable the DFRQ function and
should set Off to disable the DFRQ function.
(iii) DFRQ trip command

The DFRQ1 element is able to generate a trip signal; the trip circuit function (TRC) can issue
scheme switch [DFRQ1-TP1], ‘DFRQ1-TRIP1’ signal is transferred for the TRC function if the
DFRQ1 element operates. In accordance with the trip signal received in the TRC function, it
drives the binary output circuit (BO), which can energize the trip coil to open the circuit
breaker. The DFRQ1 element can produce six trip signals so that other scheme switches
[DFRQ1-TP2] to [DFRQ1-TP6] are provided. Except for the trip signals, an alarm signal can be
also generated when On is set for scheme switch [DFRQ1-ALM].
(iv) Generating alarm signals

On is set for the scheme switch [DFRQ1-ALM], to enable the alarm signal.
3.16.3 Scheme logic

(i) FRQ logics
Figure 3.16-4 shows the scheme logic for the UF and OF stages. Each stage operates
independently. PLC connection point “FRQ1-BLOCK” is provided to block the stage1 when
blocking is required using an external signal. The user can connect the PLC connection point
with an external signal using PLC function. (For more information of PLC function, see
Chapter PLC function)
The under-voltage block (FRQBLK) element is used to block the FRQ operation, as
described earlier (section 3.16.1(ii)).
- 256 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
8700001C23 To DFRQ
FRQBLK
(UVBLK) 1 NON FRQBLK
8000101BB1
8000101C23 TFRQ1 8000101B60
t 0
OF & & 800010EBB1 FRQ1-OPT
FRQ1 1 & ≥1 8000101B61
0.00 - 300.00s To TRC
On & 8000001B60
FRQ1 -TP1 8100101B62
UF ≥1 FRQ-TRIP1
& FRQ1 -TP2 On &
8200101B63
On 8100001B61
FRQ1 -TP3 &
Primary 8300101B64 FRQ-TRIP2
FRQ-TarWind On ≥1
Secondary FRQ1 -TP4 &
8400101B65
Tertiary On &
FRQ1-TarWind FRQ1 -TP5
8500101B66
OverFrq On
FRQ1 -TP6 &
UnderFrq
FRQ1-Chara
8100201C23 TFRQ2 8100201B60
8B00101B6C
t 0
OF & & On &
FRQ2 & ≥1 FRQ1 -ALM
1
0.00 - 300.00s
8100201BB1
UF 8500001B65
& 810020EBB1 FRQ2-OPT FRQ-TRIP6
≥1
8000201B61
FRQ-TarWind FRQ2 -TP1 On &

8100201B62
OverFrq On
FRQ2 -TP2 &
UnderFrq 8200201B63
FRQ2-Chara
FRQ2 -TP3 On &
8300201B64
FRQ2 -TP4 On &
8400201B65
FRQ2 -TP5 On &
8500201B66
8500601C23 TFRQ6 8500601B60 FRQ2 -TP6 On &
t 0
OF & &
FRQ6 1 & ≥1
0.00 - 300.00s 8B00201B6C
FRQ2 -ALM On &

UF
&
FRQ-TarWind
OverFrq
UnderFrq
FRQ6-Chara
On
FRQ1-EN
On 8500601BB1
FRQ2-EN
850060EBB1 FRQ6-OPT
8000601B61
FRQ6 -TP1 On &

On 8100601B62
FRQ6-EN
FRQ6 -TP2 On &
8200601B63
FRQ6 -TP3 On &
8300601B64
FRQ6-TP4 On &
8400601B65
FRQ6 -TP5 On &
800010EBB0 FRQ1-BLOCK 1
8500601B66
FRQ6 -TP6 On &
8B00001B66
≥1
8B00601B6C FRQ-ALARM
FRQ6 -ALM On &
Figure 3.16-4 Scheme logic for FRQ function
(ii) DFRQ logics

Figure 3.16-5 shows the scheme logic for the DFRQ function. Each stage operates
independently. PLC connection point “DFRQ1-BLOCK” is provided to block stage1; when
blocking is required using an external signal. The user can connect the PLC connection point
using an external signal using PLC function. The signal for the under-voltage block (FRQBLK)
element is provided from the FRQ logic.
- 257 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
From FRQ
NON FRQBLK
FRQ-TARWIND
8000111BB1
8000111C23 8000111B60
& ≥1 & &
OF 800011EBB1 DFRQ1-OPT TO TRC
DFRQ1 1 8000111B61
On & 8000001B68
DFRQ1 -TP1 8100111B62
UF ≥1 DFRQ-TRIP1
& DFRQ1 -TP2 On &
OverFrq 8200111B63
On 8100001B69
UnderFrq DFRQ1 -TP3 &
DFRQ1-Chara 8300111B64 DFRQ-TRIP2
On ≥1
FRQ-TARWIND DFRQ1 -TP4 &
8100211C23 8100211B60 8400111B65
On &
& ≥1 & &
DFRQ1 -TP5
OF 8500111B66
DFRQ2 1 On
DFRQ1 -TP6 &
UF
& 8B00111B6C
OverFrq On &
DFRQ1 -ALM
UnderFrq
DFRQ2-Chara
8100211BB1
8500001B6D
810021EBB1 DFRQ2-OPT DFRQ-TRIP6
≥1
8000211B61
DFRQ2 -TP1 On &

8100211B62
DFRQ2 -TP2 On &

8200211B63
DFRQ2 -TP3 On &
8300211B64
DFRQ2 -TP4 On &
8400211B65
FRQ-TARWIND DFRQ2 -TP5 On &
8500211B66
8500611C23 8500611B60 DFRQ2 -TP6 On &
OF & ≥1 & &
DFRQ6 1
8B00211B6C
UF DFRQ2 -ALM On &

&
OverFrq
UnderFrq
DFRQ6-Chara
On
DFRQ1-EN
On 8500611BB1
DFRQ2-EN
850061EBB1 DFRQ6-OPT
8000611B61
DFRQ6 -TP1 On &

On 8100611B62
DFRQ6-EN
DFRQ6 -TP2 On &
8200611B63
DFRQ6 -TP3 On &
8300611B64
DFRQ6-TP4 On &
8400611B65
DFRQ6 -TP5 On &
800011EBB0 DFRQ1-BLOCK 1
8500611B66
DFRQ6 -TP6 On &
810021EBB0 DFRQ2-BLOCK 1 8B00001B6E
≥1
8B00611B6C DFRQ-ALARM
DFRQ6 -ALM On &
850061EBB0 DFRQ6-BLOCK 1
Figure 3.16-5 Scheme logic for DFRQ function
- 258 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
3.16.4 Setting
Setting of TP_FRQ (Function ID: 475A01)
Default Model
Units
1 2 3 4 5
value
FRQ-EN Off / On - FRQ protection enable Off – – X X X
FRQ-TarWind - Target transformer winding for FRQ protection Primary – – X X X
Tertiary
FRQBLK 40.0 - 100.0 V Voltage level of FRQ protection blocking 40.0 – – X X X
FRQ FRQ1-EN Off / On - FRQ1 protection enable Off – – X X X
1-6 FRQ2-EN Off / On - FRQ2 protection enable Off – – X X X
FRQ3-EN Off / On - FRQ3 protection enable Off – – X X X
DFRQ1-EN Off / On - DFRQ1 protection enable Off – – X X X
DFRQ DFRQ3-EN Off / On - DFRQ3 protection enable Off – – X X X
1-6 DFRQ4-EN Off / On - DFRQ4 protection enable Off – – X X X
FRQ1-Chara OverFrq / UnderFrq - The selection of FRQ1 characteristic Frequency UnderFrq – – X X X
FRQ1 -10.00 - 10.00 Hz FRQ1 threshold -1.00 – – X X X
TFRQ1 0.00 - 300.00 s FRQ1 timer 1.00 – – X X X
FRQ1-TP1 Off / On - FRQ1 trip signal1 for TRC driving BO circuit On – – X X X
FRQ1 FRQ1-TP2 Off / On - FRQ1 trip signal2 for TRC driving BO circuit On – – X X X
FRQ1-ALM Off / On - FRQ1 alarm enable Off – – X X X
FRQ2
FRQ3
FRQ4 TFRQ4 0.00 - 300.00 s FRQ4 timer 1.00 – – X X X
- 259 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

Default Model
Units
1 2 3 4 5
value
FRQ5 FRQ5-TP2 Off / On - FRQ5 trip signal2 for TRC driving BO circuit On – – X X X
FRQ6
DFRQ1-
Rise / Down - The selection of DFRQ1 characteristic Rise or Down Down – – X X X
Chara
DFRQ1 0.1 - 15.0 Hz/s DFRQ1 threshold 0.5 – – X X X
DFRQ1-TP1 Off / On - DFRQ1 trip signal1 for TRC driving BO circuit On – – X X X
DFRQ DFRQ1-TP2 Off / On - DFRQ1 trip signal2 for TRC driving BO circuit On – – X X X
1 DFRQ1-TP3 Off / On - DFRQ1 trip signal3 for TRC driving BO circuit On – – X X X
DFRQ1-ALM Off / On - DFRQ1 alarm enable Off – – X X X
DFRQ2 -10.00 - 10.00 Hz FRQ2 threshold -1.00 – – X X X
DFRQ2-
Chara
DFRQ3-
Chara
- 260 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

Default Model
Units
1 2 3 4 5
value
DFRQ4-
Chara
DFRQ
4
DFRQ5-
Chara
DFRQ
5
DFRQ6-
Chara
DFRQ
6
- 261 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

TP_FRQ(Function ID: 475A01)
8B00001B6E DFRQ-ALARM DFRQ alarm enable
8000001B68 DFRQ-TRIP1 DFRQ trip command output from TP1
8100001B69 DFRQ-TRIP2 DFRQ trip command output from TP2
8200001B6A DFRQ-TRIP3 DFRQ trip command output from TP3
8300001B6B DFRQ-TRIP4 DFRQ trip command output from TP4
8400001B6C DFRQ-TRIP5 DFRQ trip command output from TP5
8500001B6D DFRQ-TRIP6 DFRQ trip command output from TP6
8000111C23 DFRQ1 DFRQ relay element operated(phase-1)
8B00111B6C DFRQ1-ALARM DFRQ alarm enable(phase-1)
8000111B60 DFRQ1-OPT DFRQ elements operated(phase-1)
8000111BB1 DFRQ1-OPT DFRQ elements operated(phase-1)
8000111B61 DFRQ1-TRIP1 DFRQ trip command output from TP1 B0(phase-1)
8000111BB0 DFRQ1_BLOCK DFRQ block command(phase-1)
- 262 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

8B00001B66 FRQ-ALARM FRQ alarm enable
8000001B60 FRQ-TRIP1 FRQ trip command output from TP1
8000101C23 FRQ1 FRQ relay element operated(phase-1)
8B00101B6C FRQ1-ALARM FRQ alarm enable(phase-1)
8000101BB1 FRQ1-OPT FRQ elements operated(phase-1)
8000101B60 FRQ1-OPT FRQ elements operated(phase-1)
8000101B61 FRQ1-TRIP1 FRQ trip command output from TP1 B0(phase-1)
- 263 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

8000101BB0 FRQ1_BLOCK FRQ block command(phase-1)
- 264 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

8700001C23 FRQBLK FRQ block element operated

800011EBB1 DFRQ1-OPT DFRQ elements operated(phase-1)
800011EBB0 DFRQ1_BLOCK DFRQ block command(phase-1)
800010EBB1 FRQ1-OPT FRQ elements operated(phase-1)
800010EBB0 FRQ1_BLOCK FRQ block command(phase-1)
- 265 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Over-excitation protection (VPH)

Over-excitation protection function (VPH) is used to detect over-excitation; the VPH protects
the transformer measuring the ratio of voltage to frequency (V/F ratio). The VPH function is
able to operate for a wide range of frequency, that is from 0.2×f0 to 1.2×f0 (f0 is rated frequency).
The VPH function comprises of a high setting (H) element, a minimum operating value (L)
element, an inverse time (T) element, and an alarm (A) element.
TP_REPLICA TP_VPH TP_TRC

VPH-T, VPH-A
VPH
VPH relay VPH logic Trip signal (TRIP CIRCUIT)
FEP_COMMON
element sequence
CT polarity
compensated
[VPHT-EN](ON/OFF)
[VPH*-TarWind](P/S/T)
1W-VY_1, 1W-VΔ_1, 1W-V1, 2W-VY_1, 2W-VΔ_1, 2W-V1, 3W-VY_1, 3W-VΔ_1, 3W-V1, Type-VT_P,S,T(3PN/3PP/1PN/1PP)
Figure 3.17-1 VPH block diagram
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
3D – – 3E – – 3F – –
– Main features  – –  – –  – –
- 266 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
3.17.1 Characteristics
As shown in Figure 3.17-2, the user can configure VPH feature using the H element, the L
element, the T element, and the A element.
V/F
HT
VPH-H T
A
LT
VPH-L
VPH-A
VPH-LT
VPH-HT
TVPH-A
TVPH-H
log t
Figure 3.17-2 Characteristic of VPH function configured by H, L, T and A elements
The VPH value expressed in pu is converted by the following Equation (3.17-2):
𝑰𝒏𝒑𝒖𝒕 𝒗𝒐𝒍𝒕𝒂𝒈𝒆 (𝑽)

|𝑽⁄𝑭| = (𝑷𝑼)
𝑰𝒏𝒑𝒖𝒕 𝒇𝒓𝒆𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒚 (𝑯𝒛) (3.17-1)
𝑹𝒂𝒕𝒆𝒅 𝒗𝒐𝒍𝒕𝒂𝒈𝒆 (𝑽) ×
𝑹𝒂𝒕𝒆𝒅 𝒇𝒓𝒆𝒒𝒖𝒆𝒏𝒄𝒚 (𝑯𝒛)
where, Rated voltage is the rated voltage of the transformer winding referred to the secondary
side of the VT.
(i) H element
The characteristic of the H element is represented by equation (3.17-2):
|𝑽⁄𝑭| ≥ 𝑯 (3.17-2)
where,
H: maximum operation value of the H element
The user can set the value of the maximum operation using the setting [VPH-H] in pu.
(ii) L element
The characteristic of the L element is represented by equation (3.17-3):
|𝑽⁄𝑭| ≥ 𝑳 (3.17-3)
where,
- 267 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
L: Minimum operating value in the L element
The user can set the value of the minimum operation using the setting [VPH-L] in pu.
(iii) T element
The characteristic of the T element is represented by equations (3.17-4) and (3.17-5):
∑(|𝑽⁄𝑭| − 𝒂) ≥ 𝒃 (3.17-4)
(𝑳𝑻 × 𝑳) − (𝑻𝑻 × 𝑯) 𝑳𝑻 × 𝑻𝑻 × (𝑯 − 𝑳)
𝒂= 𝒃= (3.17-5)
(𝑳𝑻 − 𝑻𝑻) (𝑳𝑻 − 𝑻𝑻)
where,
TT: A representative time required to determine the minimum operation time in
the T element
LT: Corresponded time to determine the maximum operation time in the T element
The user can set the values of TT and LT using the settings [VPH-HT] and [VPH-LT].
(iv) A element
The characteristic of the A element is represented by equation (3.17-6):
𝑽 ⁄𝑭 ≥ 𝑨 (3.17-6)
where,
A: threshold to signal the alarm
The user can set the A element using the setting [VPH-A] in percentage.
3.17.2 Scheme logic

(i) Relay operation switch
Figure 3.17-3 shows the elements and logics in the VPH function; trip signals and an alarm
are issued to trip circuit (TRC†) function when the element H or T is operated. On is set for
the scheme switch [VPHT-EN] to enable the VPH trip operation. The VPH element has timer
[TVPHH] for the H element and [TVPHA] for the A element.
- 268 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
8000201B60
8000201C23
VPH-T-OPT
T 8300201B62
& TVPHH
8100201C27 8100201B61 ≥1 VPH-OPT
t 0
VPH-H-OPT
VPH H &
8200101C23 0.00 to 1000.00s
TVPHA 8200101B60
A & VPH-A-OPT
t 0
0.00 to 1000.00s
VPH-Test On
Primary
Secondary
Tertiary
VPH-TarWind
On
VPHT-EN
&
1
810020EBB0 VPHT_BLOCK
On
VPHA-EN
&
820010EBB0 VPHA_BLOCK 1 To TRC
8000001B60
VPH-TP1 On & VPH-TRIP1

8100001B61

8200001B62

8300001B63
VPH-TP4 On VPH-TRIP4
& 8400001B64
8500001B65
VPH-TP6 On VPH-TRIP6
&
VPH-ALM On & 8B00001B6B

≥1 VPH-ALARM
Figure 3.17-3 Scheme logic for VPH function
(ii) Combination of trip commands

As shown in Figure 3.17-3, the VPH element is able to generate a trip signal; the trip circuit
function (TRC) can issue a trip command by the reception of the trip signal. For example, when
the user set On for scheme switch [VPH-TP1], ‘VPH-TRIP1’ signal is transferred for the TRC
function if the VPH element operates. In accordance with the trip signal received in the TRC
function, it drives the binary output circuit (BO), which can energize the trip coil to open the
circuit breaker. The VPH-T and VPH-H element can produce six trip signals so that other
scheme switches [VPH-TP2] to [VPH-TP6] are provided. Except for the trip signals, an alarm
signal can be also generated when On is set for scheme switch [VPH-ALM].
circuit.
(iii) Introduction of blocking VPH operation using PLC signal

When blocking of VPH operation is required, the user can block the VPH operation using the
external signal supplied via PLC connection points “VPHT_BLOCK” and “VPHA_BLOCK”.
The signal connections are made by PLC function, which is discussed separately. (See Chapter
PLC function)
(i) Over-excitation test (VPH-Test)

For the normal VPH operation, the VPH collect the time of over-excitation state and its state
- 269 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
will be integrated with inverse time characteristic. If the user wishes to have a VPH test from
an early stage, On should be set for the setting [VPH-Test] so that the integral state will be
initialized.
- 270 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
3.17.3 Setting
Setting of TP_VPH (Function ID: 476A01)
Default Model
Units
1 2 3 4 5
value
VPH-EN Off / On - VPH protection enable Off – – X X X
VPH-TarWind - Target transformer winding for V/f protection Primary – – X X X
Tertiary
VPHA-EN Off / On - VPH alarm enable Off – – X X X
VPH-V 100.0 - 120.0 V Rated secondary voltage 100.0 – – X X X
VPHT-EN Off / On - VPH protection enable Off – – X X X
VPH-L 1.05 - 1.30 pu Low level i.e. pick up level for V/f protection 1.05 – – X X X
VPH-H 1.10 - 1.40 pu High level (definite time level) for V/f protection 1.40 – – X X X
Operate time at low level of Inverse time curve for
VPH-LT 1.00 - 600.00 s 1.00 – – X X X
V/f protection
Operate time at high level of Inverse time curve
VPH-HT 1.00 - 600.00 s 600.00 – – X X X
for V/f protection
Reset time after removing overexcitation
VPH-RT 60.00 - 3600.00 s 250.00 – – X X X
condition
TVPHH 0.00 - 1000.00 s Definite time delay at high level setting 10.00 – – X X X
VPH-ALM Off / On - VPH alarm enable Off – – X X X
VPH-TP1 Off / On - VPH trip signal1 for TRC driving BO circuit On – – X X X
VPH-A 1.03 - 1.40 pu Alarm level for V/f protection 1.03 – – X X X
TVPHA 0.00 - 1000.00 s Definite time delay for Alarm 10.00 – – X X X
- 271 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

VPH(Function ID: 476A01)
8200101C23 VPH-A VPH-A relay element operated
8200101B60 VPH-A-OPT VPH-A instant operation command
8B00001B6B VPH-ALARM VPH alarm enable
8100201C27 VPH-H VPH-H relay element operated
8100201B61 VPH-H-OPT VPH-H instant operation command
8300201B62 VPH-OPT VPH instant operation command
8000201C23 VPH-T VPH-T relay element operated
8000201B60 VPH-T-OPT VPH-T instant operation command
8000001B60 VPH-TRIP1 VPH trip command output from TP1
8200101BB0 VPHA_BLOCK VPH-A block command
8100201BB0 VPHT_BLOCK VPH-T block command

VPH(Function ID: 476A01)
820010EBB0 VPHA_BLOCK VPHA block command
810020EBB0 VPHT_BLOCK VPHT block command
- 272 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
VT failure supervision (VTF)

If a failure occurs on the secondary circuit in the voltage transformer (VT), the relay elements
measuring voltages operates incorrectly. The VT failure supervision (VTF) is designed to cancel
the operation of the relay elements during the failure. If the VTF function detects the failure
of VT circuit, the VTF function generates an alarm for blocking their operations1.
Suppose the VTF function detects the failure in the VT circuit. If the failure is cleared,
the VTF function can see that the VT secondary circuit in three-phases are in healthy condition.
Accordingly, the VTF function can abandon to stop the operation of the relay elements. That
is, the relay elements that have been blocked will be allowed to operate again. This makes the
alarms screened are be reset automatically.
TP_REPLICA TP_VTF TP_OC

TP_EF
FEP_
1W-VY_1,2,3 VTF VTF logic TP_UV
VTF1_P,～ VTF-OPERATION TP_UVS
COMMON
relay sequence
2W-VY_1,2,3 TP_OV
VTF2_T
element TP_OVS
3W-VY_1,2,3 TP_OVG
CT polarity
Type-VT_P,ST TP_OCN
compensated
(3PN)
VTF1_EN(Off/On)
VTF2_EN(Off/On
Figure 3.18-1 VTF Function block diagram

1Note: Several protection functions are blocked by the VTF function. To know this
blocking, refer sections of the respective protection functions.
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
3D – – 3E – – 3F – –
- 273 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
3.18.1 Relay and decision

The VTF has three relay elements, one each for the primary, secondary and tertiary winding.
The VTF has two criterions (VTF1-P_DET_T and VTF2-P_DET_T) to detect the failure of the
VT.
The following description pertains to VTF detection for primary winding of transformer.
The VTF detection for secondary and tertiary winding is similar.
(i) Phase-to-earth under-voltage element (UVVTF)

The under-voltage element (UVVTF-P) provides the under voltage level for the VTF1 detection.
The UVVTF-P element is configured using the setting [UVVTF-P].
(ii) Residual phase overcurrent element (EFVTF)

The residual phase overcurrent element (EFVTF) provides the zero-sequence overcurrent level
for the VTF2 detection. The EFVTF element is configured using the setting [EFVTF2-P].
(iii) Residual overvoltage element (OVGVTF)

The residual overvoltage element (OVGVTF) provides the zero-sequence over voltage level for
the VTF2 detection. The OVGVTF element is configured using the setting [OVGVTF2-P].
(iv) Detection criterion 1 (VTF1-P_DET_T)

When the UVVTF1-P operates and the OCD-P* does not operate (i.e. there is no fault condition
and hence no over current), then the criterion (VTF1-P_DET_T) is used for the VTF detection.
(v) Detection criterion 2 (VTF2-P_DET_T)

When the EFVTF-P and the OCD-P* both does not operate and the OVGVTF-P operates, then
the criterion (VTF2-P_DET_T) is used for the VTF detection.
3.18.2 Logic
Figure 3.18-2 shows the logics of VTF. As described earlier, the failure of the VT is divided
into VTF1-P_DET_T and VTF2-P_DET_T.
Considering VTF1-P_DET_T is one of the detection criterions of the VT failure. Upper

logic of Figure 3.18-2 shows that the VTF1-P_DET_T signal is generated when the UVVTF-P
is active and the OCD1 is not active.
Similarly, considering VTF2-P_DET_T is another detection criterion of the VT failure.

Lower logic of Figure 3.18-2 shows that the VTF2-P_DET_T is generated when the OVGVTF-
P is active but the OCD and EFVTF-P is not active.
- 274 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
1Note: OCD element is common for both VTF1 detection and VTF2 detection. The OCD
output signal is generated based on OCD-AT, OCD-BT, and OCD-CT. For more
information, see Chapter Relay application: Protection common.
It is possible to select the VTF detection criterion using the scheme switch [VTF1-P-EN]
or [VTF2-P-EN].
3.18.3 Usage
Suppose On is set for both the scheme switches [VTF1-P-EN] and [VTF2-P-EN], if the VTF
detects the failure of the VT, then the VTF1-P_DET_T is not reset even if the blocking element
(OCD) operates subsequent to VTF detection. The VTF2-P_DET_T is also not reset even if the
blocking elements (OCD and EFVTF) operate subsequent to VTF detection. The VTF1-P_DET
_T and VTF2-P_DET_T are reset when the operation of the UVVTF-P and the OVGVTF-P are
reset.
When OPT-On is set for both the scheme switches [VTF1-P_EN] and [VTF2-P_EN], VTF
detection is reset when the blocking element becomes active subsequent to VTF detection.
If the VTF receives PLC signal (VTF-P_BLOCK), the operation of the VTF is blocked.
VTF-P_ALARM, VTF1-P_ALARM and VTF2-P_ALARM signals are issued if VTF1-

P_DET_T and VTF2-P_DET_T lasts for 10s.
- 275 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
8000101C20
A 8100101B61
8100101C21 ≥1
UVVTF-P B &
≥1 VTF1-P_DET
8200101C22
C 1 1 KC_VTTP_P1
t 0 S
OCD-P-A S VTF1-P_DET_T
& 0.015s
OCD-P-B
T ≥1 t 0 R
≥1 1 ≥1
OCD-P-C
T R
0.1s
T
VTF1-P_DET_T & 1
t 0
1 &
10s
On
VTF1-P-EN
≥1
OPT-On
8800101C27 8200101B62
OVGVTF-P &
≥1 VTF2-P_DET
1
8400101C23 1 KC_VTTP_P2
EFVTF-P
t 0 S
S ≥1 VTF2-P_DET_T
≥1 & 0.015s
t 0 R
1 ≥1
R
0.1s
VTF2-P_DET_T & 1
&
On
VTF2-P-EN
≥1
OPT-On
CB-P_CLOSE 1 1
0.2s
1
800010EBB0 VTF-P_BLOCK ≥1
AMF-OFF 8000101B63
≥1 VTF-P_ALARM
8100101B64
t 0
VTF1-P_DET_T VTF1-P_ALARM
10s
8200101B65
VTF2-P_DET_T t 0 VTF2-P_ALARM
10s 8000101B66
≥1 VTF-P_DETECT
EXTERNAL-P_VTF
Figure 3.18-2 Scheme logic for VTF function
- 276 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
3.18.4 Setting
Setting of TP_VTF (Function ID: 492001)
Default Model
Units
1 2 3 4 5
value
VTF1-P-EN Off / On / OPT-On - Primary winding VTF1 enable (Off) – – – – –
VTF1-P Under voltage level for primary winding
UVVTF1-P 1.0 - 220.0 V (20.0) – – – – –
VTF1
VTF2-P-EN Off / On / OPT-On - Primary winding VTF2 enable (Off) – – – – –
Zero sequence over voltage level for Primary
OVGVTF2-P 1.0 - 220.0 V (20.0) – – – – –
winding VTF2
VTF2-P Zero sequence over current level for Primary
EFVTF2-P 0.10 - 50.00 A (0.20) – – – – –
winding VTF2 blocking at 1A rating
Zero sequence over current level for Primary
EFVTF2-P 0.50 - 250.00 A (1.00) – – – – –
VTF1-S-EN Off / On / OPT-On - Secondary winding VTF1 enable (Off) – – – – –
VTF1-S Under voltage level for secondary winding
UVVTF1-S 1.0 - 220.0 V (20.0) – – – – –
VTF1
VTF2-S-EN Off / On / OPT-On - Secondary winding VTF2 enable (Off) – – – – –
Zero sequence over voltage level for
OVGVTF2-S 1.0 - 220.0 V (20.0) – – – – –
secondary winding VTF2
Zero sequence over current level for
VTF2-S EFVTF2-S 0.10 - 50.00 A secondary winding VTF2 blocking at 1A (0.20) – – – – –
rating
Zero sequence over current level for
EFVTF2-S 0.50 - 250.00 A secondary winding VTF2 blocking at 5A (1.00) – – – – –
rating
VTF1-T-EN Off / On / OPT-On - Tertiary winding VTF1 enable (Off) – – – – –
VTF1-T Under voltage level for tertiary winding
UVVTF1-T 1.0 - 220.0 V (20.0) – – – – –
VTF1
VTF2-T-EN Off / On / OPT-On - Tertiary winding VTF2 enable (Off) – – – – –
Zero sequence over voltage level for tertiary
OVGVTF2-T 1.0 - 220.0 V (20.0) – – – – –
winding VTF2
VTF2-T Zero sequence over current level for tertiary
EFVTF2-T 0.10 - 50.00 A (0.20) – – – – –
Zero sequence over current level for tertiary
EFVTF2-T 0.50 - 250.00 A (1.00) – – – – –
- 277 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

TP_VTF(Function ID: 492001)
8000101C20 UVVTF-P-A UVVTF-P relay element operated(Phase-A)
8100101C21 UVVTF-P-B UVVTF-P relay element operated(Phase-B)
8200101C22 UVVTF-P-C UVVTF-P relay element operated(Phase-C)
8400101C23 EFVTF-P EFVTF-P relay element operated
8800101C27 OVGVTF-P OVGVTF-P relay element operated
8000201C20 UVVTF-S-A UVVTF-S relay element operated(Phase-A)
8100201C21 UVVTF-S-B UVVTF-S relay element operated(Phase-B)
8200201C22 UVVTF-S-C UVVTF-S relay element operated(Phase-C)
8400201C23 EFVTF-S EFVTF-S relay element operated
8800201C27 OVGVTF-S OVGVTF-S relay element operated
8000301C20 UVVTF-T-A UVVTF-T relay element operated(Phase-A)
8100301C21 UVVTF-T-B UVVTF-T relay element operated(Phase-B)
8200301C22 UVVTF-T-C UVVTF-T relay element operated(Phase-C)
8400301C23 EFVTF-T EFVTF-T relay element operated
8800301C27 OVGVTF-T OVGVTF-T relay element operated
8100001B60 CB_ALLPH_OPEN CB all phase open
8100101B60 UVVTF-P-OR UVVTF-P relay element operated (3-phases OR)
8500201B60 UVVTF-S-OR UVVTF-S relay element operated (3-phases OR)
8900301B60 UVVTF-T-OR UVVTF-T relay element operated (3-phases OR)
8100101B61 VTF1-P_DET VTF1-P detected
8200101B62 VTF2-P_DET VTF2-P detected
8500201B61 VTF1-S_DET VTF1-S detected
8600201B62 VTF2-S_DET VTF2-S detected
8900301B61 VTF1-T_DET VTF1-T detected
8A00301B62 VTF2-T_DET VTF2-T detected
8000101B63 VTF-P_ALARM VTF-P alarm (VTF1-P ALARM/VTF2-P ALARM OR)
8100101B64 VTF1-P_ALARM VTF1-P alarm (10s timer)
8200101B65 VTF2-P_ALARM VTF2-P alarm (10s timer)
8400201B63 VTF-S_ALARM VTF-S alarm (VTF1-S ALARM/VTF2-S ALARM OR)
8500201B64 VTF1-S_ALARM VTF1-S alarm (10s timer)
8600201B65 VTF2-S_ALARM VTF2-S alarm (10s timer)
8800301B63 VTF-T_ALARM VTF-T alarm (VTF1-T ALARM/VTF2-T ALARM OR)
8900301B64 VTF1-T_ALARM VTF1-T alarm (10s timer)
8A00301B65 VTF2-T_ALARM VTF2-T alarm (10s timer)
8000101B66 VTF-P_DETECT VTF-P detected (VTF1-P DET/VTF2-P DET OR)
8100201B66 VTF-S_DETECT VTF-S detected (VTF1-S DET/VTF2-S DET OR)
8200301B66 VTF-T_DETECT VTF-T detected (VTF1-T DET/VTF2-T DET OR)
8000101BB0 VTF-P_BLOCK VTF-P block signal
8100201BB0 VTF-S_BLOCK VTF-S block signal
8200301BB0 VTF-T_BLOCK VTF-T block signal
8000101BB1 EXTERNAL-P_VTF External VTF-P receive
8100201BB1 EXTERNAL-S_VTF External VTF-S receive
8200301BB1 EXTERNAL-T_VTF External VTF-T receive
- 278 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

3100001703 VTF DataID for TP_VTF Function(Output)
3100001707 VTF DataID for VTF Function(Setting)
8000101A60 UVVTF-P-OUT UVVTF-P relay output
8000201A60 UVVTF-S-OUT UVVTF-S relay output
8000301A60 UVVTF-T-OUT UVVTF-T relay output
8000101A61 OVGVTF-P-OUT OVGVTF-P relay output
8000201A61 OVGVTF-S-OUT OVGVTF-S relay output
8000301A61 OVGVTF-T-OUT OVGVTF-T relay output
8000101A62 EFVTF-P-OUT EFVTF-P relay output
8000201A62 EFVTF-S-OUT EFVTF-S relay output
8000301A62 EFVTF-T-OUT EFVTF-T relay output
800001100D VTF_SECONDARY_RATING VTF secondary rating

800010EBB0 VTF-P_BLOCK VTF-P block signal
810020EBB0 VTF-S_BLOCK VTF-S block signal
820030EBB0 VTF-T_BLOCK VTF-T block signal
800010EBB1 EXTERNAL-P_VTF External VTF-P receive
810020EBB1 EXTERNAL-S_VTF External VTF-S receive
820030EBB1 EXTERNAL-T_VTF External VTF-T receive
- 279 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Trip circuit (TRC)

Trip circuit (TRC) scheme logic will issue trip commands for circuit breakers (CBs) when it
receives trip signals from each protection function. The user can configure the output of trip
commands using the PLC connection points in the TRC.
As shown in Figure 3.19-1, the TRC logic consists of two parts: (1) Trip-command collection,
(2) Alarm signal generation. The trip signals are transferred to Binary IO modules†. In
addition, the TRC logic generates trigger signals, which are used for the operation of the
recording function‡.
†Note:The driver of binary output (BO) circuit will generates a trip command for the CB.
Hence, the user should connect TRIP-COMMAND1–6 to the BO circuit. In Figure
3.19-1, the single-line diagram example shows BO1 assigned to the CB1 on the
primary winding using binary output BO1, whereas BO6 assigned to adjacent
CB6. CB2 to CB5 are assigned for the CBs on the secondary and tertiary
windings. Chapter Technical description: Binary IO module discusses how to use
the BO circuits. Chapter Relay application: Circuit breaker failure protection
discusses breaker failure philosophy with regard to the primary CB and the back-
up CB.
‡Note: See Chapter Recording function for more information.
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
3D – – 3E – – 3F – –
– Main features  – –  – –  – –
- 280 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
IED Protection functions TRC function

FC01-TRIP1
Binary IO
FC01-TRIP2 module #1
FC01-TRIP3 TRIP-COMMAND1 CB1
BO1
FC01-TRIP4 TRIP-COMMAND2
BO2 CB2
FC01-TRIP5
FC1 TRIP-COMMAND3
Trip-command BO3 CB3
FC01-TRIP6
collection TRIP-COMMAND4
FC01-ALARM BO4 CB4
FC01-OPT-AR TRIP-COMMAND5
BO5 CB5
FC01-OPT-BR TRIP-COMMAND6
FC01-OPT-CR BO6 CB6
FC02-TRIP1 BO7
FC02-TRIP2
BO8
FC02-TRIP3
FC02-TRIP4
FC02-TRIP5
FC2
BO n
FC02-TRIP6
FC02-ALARM
FC02-OPT-AR
FC02-OPT-BR GEN.TRIP
FC02-OPT-CR
GEN._ALARM Recording
function
Alarm signal
OPT.PHASE-A
generation
OPT.PHASE-B
OPT.PHASE-C
FC32-TRIP1 and others OPT.PHASE-N
FC32
Transformer
T
CB2
CB3
CB6 CB1
P S CB4
Gen
CB5
Connection example
Figure 3.19-1 TRC block diagram
- 281 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Figure 3.19-1 shows that the function consists of following logics:

Collection: The signals, received from the various protection functions (shown as
‘FC01’ and others; see Table 3.19-2 and Table 3.19-3), are gathered in the Trip-
command collection logic.
Generation: The operating signals at Phase-A, B, C of respective elements are
combined in the Alarm-signal generation logic.
Binary outputs (BO†) circuits must be selected in order to energize the trip coils of the CB1–
CB6. The user should connect the CB1–6 trip coils with the BOs. The BO drivers output ‘TRIP-
COMMAND1 etc.† Alarm-signal generation logic provides a trigger signal for the recording
function‡.
†Note:The internal connection between TRC and BIO should be achieved using BIO
settings or the PLC function. As the PLC monitoring points “TRIP-COMMAND1”–
“TRIP-COMMAND6” are designated using Element IDs ‘8000001B67’–
‘8500001B6C’.The user must program them for preferred BO circuits using the
settings [Input signal1] to [Input signal8] for respective BOs at binary IO module.
The externally wired connection between the BIO module and trip coil circuit is
made on the rear terminals. For more information with regard to the BO circuit
concerning the Element ID (Data ID), see Chapter Technical description: Binary
IO module.
‡Note: For information on recording, see Chapter Recording function.
- 282 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
3.19.1 Commands for tripping CBs

The TRC logic can issue six trip commands. For example, 1st to 6th trip signals (FC01_TRIP1,
FC01_TRIP2,…, FC01_TRIP6) comes from DIF function. As shown in Table 3.19-2, function
identification numbers (i.e., 01, 02, etc.) can present respective functions (i.e., DIF, REF, etc.).
Table 3.19-2 Trip signals in TRC function
Trip and ARC-block signals provided by the protection functions
Protection ID
FC* FC* FC* FC* FC* FC*
functions ‘*’
_TRIP1 _TRIP2 _TRIP3 _TRIP4 _TRIP5 _TRIP6
DIF 01 X X X X X X
REF 02 X X X X X X
OC 03 X X X X X X
EF 04 X X X X X X
EFIn 05 X X X X X X
OCN 06 X X X X X X
BCD 07 X X X X X X
THM 08 X X X X X X
CBF 09 X X X X X X
(N.A.) 10 – – – – – –
(N.A.) 11 – – – – – –
(N.A.) 12 – – – – – –
OV 13 X X X X X X
OVS 14 X X X X X X
OVG 15 X X X X X X
UV 16 X X X X X X
UVS 17 X X X X X X
FRQ 18 X X X X X X
DFRQ 19 X X X X X X
VPH 20 X X X X X X
MECH 21 X X X X X X
(N.A.) 22 – – – – – –
(N.A.) 23 – – – – – –
(N.A.) 24 – – – – – –
(N.A.) 25 – – – – – –
(N.A.) 26 – – – – – –
(N.A.) 27 – – – – – –
(N.A.) 28 – – – – – –
(N.A.) 29 – – – – – –
(N.A.) 30 – – – – – –
(N.A.) 31 – – – – – –
(N.A.) 32 – – – – – –
Note: ‘N.A.’ represents ‘Not available for the IED’, ‘X’ represents a ‘Valid signal received
from the protection function’, ‘–’ represents that no ‘valid signal’ received in the
TRC function.
- 283 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
3.19.2 Recording identifiers

Table 3.19-3 shows an identifier signal for the recording function generated when a fault is
detected by the protection functions. The identifier is generated in each protection function
(relay element) and will be transferred to the recording function.
Table 3.19-3 Recording identifier about operating relay elements for the fault
Protection ID Fault identifier for relay element operated
functions ‘*’ FC*_OPT-AR FC*_OPT_BR FC*_OPT_CR FC*_ALARM Note
DIF 01 X X X –
REF 02 – – – X
OC 03 X X X X
EF 04 – – – X
EFIn 05 – – – X
OCN 06 – – – X
BCD 07 – – – X
THM 08 – – – X
CBF 09 X X X –
(N.A.) 10 – – – –
(N.A.) 11 – – – –
(N.A.) 12 – – – –
OV 13 X X X X
OVS 14 X X X X
OVG 15 – – – X
UV 16 X X X X
UVS 17 X X X X
FRQ 18 – – – X
DFRQ 19 – – – X
VPH 20 – – – X
MECH 21 – – – X
(N.A.) 22 – – – –
(N.A.) 23 – – – –
(N.A.) 24 – – – –
(N.A.) 25 – – – –
(N.A.) 26 – – – –
(N.A.) 27 – – – –
(N.A.) 28 – – – –
(N.A.) 29 – – – –
(N.A.) 30 – – – –
(N.A.) 31 – – – –
(N.A.) 32 – – – –
Note: ‘X’ represents a ‘Valid signal’ for recording. ‘–’ is left blank.
3.19.3 Scheme logic

(i) Trip-command collection
Trip-commands, provided by each protection function, are grouped trip operation commands
“FC-TRIP1”, “FC-TRIP2”,…, “FC-TRIP6”, as shown in Figure 3.19-2.
The TRC logic has PLC connection points. For example, if the user wishes to trip the CB
using a signal generated by external relay, the signal should be inputted at the PLC connection
point: TRIP*_ADD.
- 284 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
DIF_TRIP1 8000001B60
FC01:DIF
FC02:REF DIF_TRIP2 ≥1 FC-TRIP1
FC03:OC
DIF_TRIP3
FC04:EF
FC05:EFIn DIF_TRIP4
DIF_TRIP5 800000EBB0 TRIP1_ADD
FC06:OCN
FC07:BCD DIF_TRIP6
FC08:THM
FC09:CBF
FC10:(N.A.)
FC11:(N.A.)
FC12:(N.A.)
FC13:OV
FC14:OVS
FC15:OVG
FC16:UV
FC17:UVS
FC18:FRQ
FC19:DFRQ 8500001B65
FC20:VPH
FC21:MECH ≥1 FC-TRIP6
FC22:(N.A.)
FC23:(N.A.)
FC24:(N.A.) 850000EBB5 TRIP6_ADD
MECH_TRIP1
FC25:(N.A.)
FC26:(N.A.) MECH_TRIP2
FC30:(N.A.)
FC32:(N.A.)
Figure 3.19-2 Scheme logic for Trip-command collection
(ii) Trip signal generation

As shown in Figure 3.9-3, “TRIP_COMMAND1” to “TRIP_COMMAND6” signals and general
signal (“GEN.TRIP”) will be issued to the CB when signals FC-TRIP1 to FC-TRIP6 are
generated.
- 285 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
8000001B67
FC-TRIP1
S
≥1 TRIP-COMMAND1
&
R
8100001B68
FC-TRIP2
S
≥1 TRIP-COMMAND2
&
R
8200001B69
FC-TRIP3
S
≥1 TRIP-COMMAND3
&
R
8300001B6A
FC-TRIP4
S ≥1 TRIP-COMMAND4
&
R
8400001B6B
FC-TRIP5
S
≥1 TRIP-COMMAND5
&
R
8500001B6C
FC-TRIP6
S
≥1 TRIP-COMMAND6
&
R
On 8000001B6D
Lockout Off
≥1 ≥1 GEN.TRIP
800000EBBB LOCKOUT_RESET
Figure 3.19-3 Scheme logic for Trip signal generation
The signals “TRIP_COMMAND1–6” are designated using Signals (DataIDs). Therefore,

the user can connect them to a particular BO circuit; the IED provides settings [Input signal1]
to [Input signal8] for each BO in each binary IO module. The Chapter Technical description:
Binary IO module describes how to connect a Signal(DataID) with the connection point.
(iii) Reset switch

As a rule, the trip command output from the TRC function will remain for the duration of the
trip signals provided by the protection functions outside the TRC logic. In other words, the
output signals “TRIP_COMMAND1–6” will only disappear when the protection functions stop
sending trip signals to the TRC logic. (This mode of operation is selected when Off (default) is
set for scheme switch [Lockout].)
If the user wishes to reset the output signals “TRIP_COMMAND1–6” using an external signal,
the output signals “TRIP_COMMAND1–6” can be reset using the PLC connection point
“LOCKOUT_RESET”. (This operation is selected when the user sets the scheme switch
[Lockout] On.)
- 286 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(iv) CB trip signal production

As illustrated in Table 3.19-4, ‘TRIP COMMMAND’ signals can be transferred to some CBs.
Table 3.19-4 Output signals for each CB
Output signals Usage of signals
TRIP-COMMMAND1 Tripping CB1 in Figure 3.19-1
(v) Alarm signal generation

Figure 3.19-4 shows the alarm-signal grouping scheme for the recording function. Signals
OPT.PHASE-A, OPT.PHASE-B, OPT.PHASE-C, and OPT.PHASE-N are generated. When an
additional relay is provided to show a ground fault, use PLC connection point ‘OPT.P-N_ADD’.
800000EBBA OPT.NR To Recording function
8000001B71
OPT.PHASE-A
Protection
functions FC*-OPT-AR
≥1
FC01
8C0000EBB7 OPT.P-A_ADD
FC02
8100001B72
OPT.PHASE-A 8000001B
FC*-OPT-BR
≥1 OPT-AR
8D0000EBB7 OPT.P-B_ADD
8200001B73
FC32 OPT.PHASE-A 8100001B
FC*-OPT-CR
≥1 OPT-BR
8E0000EBB9 OPT.P-C_ADD
8300001B74
& OPT.PHASE-N 8200001B
≥1
OPT-CR
FC*_ALARM 8B0001B66
≥1
GEN.ALARM
8B0000EBB5 ALARM_ADD
Figure 3.19-4 Scheme logic for Alarm-signal generation
- 287 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
3.19.4 Setting
Setting of TP_TRC (Function ID: 4A3001)
Default Model
Units
1 2 3 4 5
value
Lockout Off / On – Trip signal lockout enable Off – – X X X
- 288 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

TP_TRC (Function ID : 4A3001)
8B00001BB6 ALARM_ADD add alarm
8000001B60 FC-TRIP1 FC trip command output (phase-1)
8B00001B66 GEN.ALARM GEN alarm command output
8000001B6D GEN.TRIP GEN trip command output
8000001BBB LOCKOUT_RESET lockout reset
8000001B70 OPT-ABCR operated 3phase-OR
8C00001BB7 OPT.P-A_ADD add operated phase-A
8D00001BB8 OPT.P-B_ADD add operated phase-B
8E00001BB9 OPT.P-C_ADD add operated phase-C
8000001B71 OPT.PHASE-A operated phase-A
8100001B72 OPT.PHASE-B operated phase-B
8200001B73 OPT.PHASE-C operated phase-C
8300001B74 OPT.PHASE-N operated phase-N
8000001BBA OPT_NR NR operated
8000001B67 TRIP-COMMAND1 trip command output (phase-1)
8300001B6A TRIP-COMMAND4 trip command output (phase-4)
8400001B6B TRIP-COMMAND5 trip command output (phase-5)
8500001B6C TRIP-COMMAND6 trip command output (phase-6)
8000001BB0 TRIP1_ADD add trip (phase-1)

TP_TRC (Function ID: 4A3001)
8B0000EBB6 ALARM_ADD add alarm
800000EBBB LOCKOUT_RESET lockout reset
8C0000EBB7 OPT.P-A_ADD add operated phase-A
8D0000EBB8 OPT.P-B_ADD add operated phase-B
8E0000EBB9 OPT.P-C_ADD add operated phase-C
800000EBBA OPT_NR NR operated
800000EBB0 TRIP1_ADD add TRIP (phase-1)
- 289 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

TP_TRC (Function ID: 4A3001)
- 290 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Mechanical trip protection (MECH)

Mechanical trip function (MECH) is designed to interface with protection relays mounted
within the transformer . Table 3.20-1 exemplifies 16 external relays being interfaced with the
MECH function; the trip signals generated by the external relays are combined and
transferred for the TRC function so that circuit breakers are tripped to open.
Table 3.20-1 Example of MECH opeartion interfaced with 16 exteranl relays
Transformer Tap changer Auxiliary/earthing transformer
Buchholz Buchholz Buchholz
Oil temperature Oil temperature Oil temperature
Temperature in the primary winding Oil flow Winding temperature
Temperature in the secondary winding Pressure relief Pressure relief
Temperature in the tertiary winding Sudden pressure increase –

Pressure relief – –
Sudden pressure increase – –
We discussed an interface in the MECH1 function for simplicity, but the MECH2 to
MECH16 functions are applicable. The MECH1 operation is enabled using scheme switch
[MECH1-EN].
TP_MECH TP_TRC
MECH1 to MECH16
trip signals
Buchholz relay MECH logic (TRIP CIRCUIT)
Oil temperature relay sequence

Winding temperature relay
Pressure relief relay
Pressure increase relay
Oil flow relay, etc.
[METH*-EN](ON/OFF)
Figure 3.20-1 MECH block diagram
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
3D – – 3E – – 3F – –
– Main features  – –  – –  – –
- 291 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
3.20.1 Scheme logic

(i) Enabling operations
Figure 3.12-5 shows the MECH1 logic; trip signals and an alarm are issued to trip circuit (TRC)
function when an external relay issues a trip signal for the MECH1 function. The MECH1
function generates a trip signal for the TRC function when On is set for the scheme switch
[MECH1-EN]. A timer [TMECH1] is used for delaying to generate the signal. Note that
‘MECH1_TP’ is provided to get the signal of the external relay, the user should connect the
signal with the ‘MECH1_TP’ PLC connection point using the PLC function. ‘MECH1_INST_OP’
is provided when the MECH1 logic shall issue a trip signal instantly; the user should connect
the instant signal of the external relay with the ‘MECH1_INST_OP’ using the PLC function.
Similarly, ‘MECH1_BLOCK’ is provided for canceling to issuing a signal; the user should
connect a cancel signal with the ‘MECH1_BLOCK’.
MECH1 logic
800010EBB0 MECH1-TP &
& TMECH1
MECH1_EN
On t 0 ≥1
8000101B60
0.0 – 300.00s
MECH1-OPT
800010EBB1 MECH1-BLOCK &
&
800010EBB2 MECH1-INST-OP
8000101B66 To TRC
MECH1-TP1 On & 8000001B70
8100101B67 ≥1
On MECH-TRIP1
MECH1-TP2 &
8200101B68
MECH1-TP3 On &
8300101B69 8100001B71
≥1
MECH1-TP4 On MECH-TRIP2
&
8400101B6A
MECH1-TP5 On & 8500101B6B 8200001B72
≥1
MECH1-TP6 On MECH-TRIP3
&
8B00101B6C ≥1 8300001B73
On MECH-TRIP4
MECH1-ALM &
8400001B74
≥1 MECH-TRIP5
8500001B75
≥1
MECH-TRIP6
8B00001B7B
≥1
MECH-ALARM
MECH16 logic
MECH16-TRIP1
MECH16-TRIP6
Figure 3.20-2 Scheme logic for MECH function

The MECH1 logic is able to generate a trip signal; the trip circuit function (TRC) can issue a
- 292 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
switch [MECH1-TP1], ‘MECH1-TRIP1’ signal is transferred for the TRC function if the MECH1
function has an external trip signal. In accordance with the external trip signal received in the
TRC function, it drives the binary output circuit (BO), which can energize the trip coil to open
the circuit breaker. The MECH1 logic can produce six trip signals so that other scheme
switches [MECH1-TP2] to [MECH1-TP6] are provided. Except for the trip signals, an alarm
signal can be also generated when On is set for scheme switch [MECH1-ALM].
circuit.
- 293 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
3.20.2 Setting
Setting of TP_MECH (Function ID: 487001)
Default Model
Units
1 2 3 4 5
value
MECH1-EN Off / On - Mechanical trip1 enable Off – – X X X
MEC
H
TMECH1 0.00 - 300.00 s Mechanical trip1 timer 0.00 – – X X X
MECH1-TP1 Off / On - MECH1 Trip signal1 for TRC driving BO circuit On – – X X X
MEC MECH1-TP3 Off / On - MECH1 Trip signal3 for TRC driving BO circuit On – – X X X
H1 MECH1-TP4 Off / On - MECH1 Trip signal4 for TRC driving BO circuit On – – X X X
MECH1-ALM Off / On - MECH1 alarm enable Off – – X X X
MEC
H5
- 294 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

Default Model
Units
1 2 3 4 5
value
- 295 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

Default Model
Units
1 2 3 4 5
value
- 296 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

TP_MECH (Function ID : 487001)
8B00001B6C MECH-ALARM Mechanical trip alarm enable
8000001B61 MECH-TRIP1 Mechanical trip command output from TP1
8000101BB1 MECH1_BLOCK Mechanical trip1 block command
8900A01BB1 MECH10_BLOCK Mechanical trip10 block command
8A00B01BB1 MECH11_BLOCK Mechanical trip11 block command
8B00C01BB1 MECH12_BLOCK Mechanical trip12 block command
8C00D01BB1 MECH13_BLOCK Mechanical trip13 block command
8D00E01BB1 MECH14_BLOCK Mechanical trip14 block command
8E00F01BB1 MECH15_BLOCK Mechanical trip15 block command
8F01001BB1 MECH16_BLOCK Mechanical trip16 block command
8000101BB2 MECH1_INST_OP Mechanical trip1 instant operation command
8900A01BB2 MECH10_INST_OP Mechanical trip10 instant operation command
8A00B01BB2 MECH11_INST_OP Mechanical trip11 instant operation command
8B00C01BB2 MECH12_INST_OP Mechanical trip12 instant operation command
8C00D01BB2 MECH13_INST_OP Mechanical trip13 instant operation command
8D00E01BB2 MECH14_INST_OP Mechanical trip14 instant operation command
8E00F01BB2 MECH15_INST_OP Mechanical trip15 instant operation command
8F01001BB2 MECH16_INST_OP Mechanical trip16 instant operation command
8000101BB0 MECH1_TP Mechanical trip1 command
- 297 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

8900A01BB0 MECH10_TP Mechanical trip10 command
8A00B01BB0 MECH11_TP Mechanical trip11 command
8B00C01BB0 MECH12_TP Mechanical trip12 command
8C00D01BB0 MECH13_TP Mechanical trip13 command
8D00E01BB0 MECH14_TP Mechanical trip14 command
8E00F01BB0 MECH15_TP Mechanical trip15 command
8F01001BB0 MECH16_TP Mechanical trip16 command
8B00101B6C MECH1-ALARM Mechanical trip alarm enable(phase-1)
8B00A01B6C MECH10-ALARM Mechanical trip alarm enable(phase-10)
8B00B01B6C MECH11-ALARM Mechanical trip alarm enable(phase-11)
8B00C01B6C MECH12-ALARM Mechanical trip alarm enable(phase-12)
8B00D01B6C MECH13-ALARM Mechanical trip alarm enable(phase-13)
8B00E01B6C MECH14-ALARM Mechanical trip alarm enable(phase-14)
8B00F01B6C MECH15-ALARM Mechanical trip alarm enable(phase-15)
8000101B60 MECH1-OPT Mechanical trip1 elements operated
8900A01B60 MECH10-OPT Mechanical trip1 elements operated
8A00B01B60 MECH11-OPT Mechanical trip1 elements operated
8B00C01B60 MECH12-OPT Mechanical trip1 elements operated
8C00D01B60 MECH13-OPT Mechanical trip1 elements operated
8D00E01B60 MECH14-OPT Mechanical trip1 elements operated
- 298 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

8E00F01B60 MECH15-OPT Mechanical trip1 elements operated
8F01001B60 MECH16-OPT Mechanical trip1 elements operated
8000101B61 MECH1-TRIP1 Mechanical trip command output from TP1 B0(phase-1)
8000A01B61 MECH10-TRIP1 Mechanical trip command output from TP1 B0(phase-10)
8000B01B61 MECH11-TRIP1 Mechanical trip command output from TP1 B0(phase-11)
8000C01B61 MECH12-TRIP1 Mechanical trip command output from TP1 B0(phase-12)
8000D01B61 MECH13-TRIP1 Mechanical trip command output from TP1 B0(phase-13)
8000E01B61 MECH14-TRIP1 Mechanical trip command output from TP1 B0(phase-14)
8000F01B61 MECH15-TRIP1 Mechanical trip command output from TP1 B0(phase-15)
- 299 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

- 300 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)


TP_MECH (Function ID: 487001)
800010EBB1 MECH1_BLOCK Mechanical trip1 block command
8900A0EBB1 MECH10_BLOCK Mechanical trip10 block command
8A00B0EBB1 MECH11_BLOCK Mechanical trip11 block command
8B00C0EBB1 MECH12_BLOCK Mechanical trip12 block command
8C00D0EBB1 MECH13_BLOCK Mechanical trip13 block command
8D00E0EBB1 MECH14_BLOCK Mechanical trip14 block command
8E00F0EBB1 MECH15_BLOCK Mechanical trip15 block command
8F0100EBB1 MECH16_BLOCK Mechanical trip16 block command
800010EBB2 MECH1_INST_OP Mechanical trip1 instant operation command
8900A0EBB2 MECH10_INST_OP Mechanical trip10 instant operation command
8A00B0EBB2 MECH11_INST_OP Mechanical trip11 instant operation command
8B00C0EBB2 MECH12_INST_OP Mechanical trip12 instant operation command
- 301 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

TP_MECH (Function ID: 487001)
8C00D0EBB2 MECH13_INST_OP Mechanical trip13 instant operation command
8D00E0EBB2 MECH14_INST_OP Mechanical trip14 instant operation command
8E00F0EBB2 MECH15_INST_OP Mechanical trip15 instant operation command
8F0100EBB2 MECH16_INST_OP Mechanical trip16 instant operation command
800010EBB0 MECH1_TP Mechanical trip1 command
8900A0EBB0 MECH10_TP Mechanical trip10 command
8A00B0EBB0 MECH11_TP Mechanical trip11 command
8B00C0EBB0 MECH12_TP Mechanical trip12 command
8C00D0EBB0 MECH13_TP Mechanical trip13 command
8D00E0EBB0 MECH14_TP Mechanical trip14 command
8E00F0EBB0 MECH15_TP Mechanical trip15 command
8F0100EBB0 MECH16_TP Mechanical trip16 command
- 302 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
4 General control function

Control hierarchy 313 PLC_BIT 307
Control level 314 Remote control 317
Counter (GCNT) 343
Double command blocking (DCB) 305
Local control 317
LED reset (LEDR) 320
Mode control (MDCTRL) 334
- 303 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Common controls (CMNCTRL)

The CMNCTRL function consists of two parts. The former part (CMNCTRL1) is used to
prevent double-commands, which are forbidden, by the use of select-states for the respective
control functions. The latter part (CMNCTRL2) is served as a mediator to provide a bridge
between functions.
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
3D – – 3E – – 3F – –
– Main features  – –  – –  – –
- 304 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
4.1.1 Double command blocking (DCB)

For control functions, the operating principle is that priority is given to the first command
received and shall be executed first. In other words, successive commands received do not have
the right to run until the first command received has failed to complete its operation (that is,
the principle of double command blocking (DCB) is established). The principle is significant for
protection and control devices in the sub-station†. Figure 4.1-1 illustrates how each control
function generates a SLD_RPT signal; the aggregation of SLD_RPT signals is performed in the
CMNCTRL1 function. The resultant signal is output at PLC connection point “DCB SND OR”.
Command “P2-Control” from the rem
The resultant signal is returned to the respective control function as feedback.
“From 61850 CMNCTRL1 function
communication 510001 0001011001 DCB RCV OR
“stVal” message 2
SPOS function
SPOS01 function
To 61850
Reception of “DCB”
communication
Output of “StSeld” SPOS01_STD_RPT DCB SND OR “stVal” message 1
SPOS02 function SPOS02_STD_RPT To control functions

(510001 0008001F42) in its own
SPOS03 function SPOS03_STD_RPT
SPOS20 function
SPOS20_STD_RPT
DPOS function
≥1
Output of “StSeld” DPOS01_STD_RPT
DPOS01 function
DPOS72 function
DPOS72_STD_RPT
DPSY function
TPOS function
SOFTSW function
TMCHG function
Output of “StSeld” TMCHG_STD_RPT
TMCHG function
Figure 4.1-1 DCB operation in CMNCTRL1 function

†Note:Let us assume that the control function in IED-1 controls CB1, as shown in Figure
4.1-2. IEDs -2 to -10 are forbidden to operate their CBs throughout the period that
IED-1 is in operation. Control functions are also forbidden to operate CB1 when
the automatic sequence controlling function (ASEQ) is in operation. We discuss
the ASEQ function later. (See Chapter Control and monitoring application:
- 305 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Automatic sequence controlling function)
In Figure 4.1-1, the CMNCTRL1 function generates a message denoted with the number
1; Figure 4.1-2 exemplifies that the IED-1 generates the “stVal” message 1. In addition, IEDs-
2 to -10 are also required to receive message 1, this is denoted with the number 2. For
IEC61850 communication, the “stVal” messages 1 and 2 are carried by GOOSE publish and
GOOSE subscribe. Thus, for all IEDs (i.e., IED-1 to IED-10 of Figure 4.1-2), it is required to
set the GOOSE publish destination corresponding to the message.
Ring LAN network constructed for the SAS

stVal message
1 2 2 2
IED-1 IED-2 IED-3 IED-10
CB1 CB2 CB3 CB10
Figure 4.1-2 Sending and reception of stVal message
Figure 4.1-3 demonstrates how the GOOSE publish destination is set with regard to the
DCB message. The user is required to set the destination for each respective IED by selecting
the signal “DCB SND OR”, corresponding to the GOOSE publish, this must be performed at
the respective screens in GR-TIEMS†. That is, the user should select the “stVal” item for each
IED. After setting, the user should write the setting date for each respective IED.
○
1 Selected IED
○2 Required settings in
the respective IEDs.
Figure 4.1-3 Example of DCB setting for IED-1 using GR-TIEMS

†Note:For more operation information on GR-TIEMS, see Chapter Engineering tool.
- 306 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
4.1.2 PLC_BIT/UNIT/BOOL signal

The control and monitoring functions are mutually interconnected within the IED; hence,
cascading features are provided to transfer information between them so that the user does
not need to check the interconnections. Approximately 1500 signals are included to facilitate
the internal connection of the control and monitoring functions; their signals are distributed
into BIT, UNIT, BOOLEAN types, which are listed later. Figure 4.1-4 exemplifies the
“PLC_BIT_0201” signal, which may be used for recording events and other purposes.
CMNCTRL2
function
PLC_O_BIT_0201 For
・Event record function
5A0101 800200EF40 PLC_BIT_0201 (5A0101 8002001F40)
・Communication (required mapping)
Information ・LEDs
cascaded§ ・IED screen display
・Binary output module
etc…
Figure 4.1-4 Cascading information using signal “PLC_BIT_0201”
4.1.3 Provision of selected status

Let us assume that a select-command is sent for an IED to control a target-device by the
substation automation system (SAS†), but the target-device is not ready to be controlled. The
unready condition might be due to the target-device already being in operation (e.g., CB
tripping) or a failure of the device may have occurred; thus, the IED has to drop the select-
command. If this occurs, the IED is required to send a message stating the reason to the SAS†.
Table 4.1-2 lists the messages generated in the CMNCTRL1 function describing the failure.
Table 4.1-2 Reason messages due to the release of the select-command
Signal Number Signal Name Description
5A0001 3008001FB4 SCS_CTLNUM
5A0001 2008001008 SCS_ORCAT
5A0001 2208001001 SCS_ADDCAUSE Reason codes for the SAS†
5A0001 6A08001009 SCS_ORIDENT
5A0001 3008001FB4 SCS_CTLNUM
†Note:The user should recognize that the reason messages are only available for
operation with the GCS1000 control system manufactured by Toshiba.
4.1.4 Miscellaneous settings

The CMNCTRL1 function has the following five common settings:
1. Control direction: The [SDCEN] can configure the control directions of the SPOS,
DPOS and TPOS functions. If required these functions can be in the
same control direction, set On for the scheme switch [SDCEN].
2. Return value: When the number of the counter reaches its maximum value (in case
of the default setting, 999,999), it can return and begin
- 307 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
incrementing from either 0 or 1. The return number can be set with

[CNTRV].
3. Select-cancel timer: If the selection of a target device is made, but the control operation
of the selected device is not carried out in a predetermined time
limit, the selection is canceled. The time limit can be set using
[TSC]; the range is between 30 and 300sec. having a 1sec. step.
4. Time out: When the selection of the target device and its control execution is
made, the selection will be canceled automatically after the setting
time [EXEWAIT] if the control result is not received at the IED from
the target device. The setting time ranges from 30 to 300sec. in 1
sec. steps.
5. Counter limit: The maximum value of the counters can be set between 9 and
2,147,483,647 using [CNTVALMAX]. The default setting is 999,999.
6. Quality signal: If “q” or “Quality” information shall not be taken for controlling, set
On for setting [QBLK]. The QBLK clears the content of quality
information, so that control operation can be achieved with the
absence of quality information.
- 308 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
4.1.5 Setting
CMNCTRL setting list (FunctionID:5A0001)
Default
Units
Setting item Range Contents Notes
setting value
CMNCTRL SDCEN Off/On – Setting of control to the same direction Off
CNTRV 0-1 – Next value of the counter[CNTVALMAX] level 0
TSC 30-300 s Selection cancel time-out timer 30
EXEWAIT 30-300 s Waiting execute operation time-out timer 30
CNTVALMAX 9-2147483647 – Upper limit level of the counter 999999
QBLK Off / On – Setting “On” to neglect the value of quality signal Off
TRV-BLK Off / On – To block un-selectable behavior on TRAVELLING Off
- 309 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

 Connection points
CMNCTRL (Function ID: 5A0001)
800800EF40 PLC_I_001 PLC event information 1
………. ………. ………
800800EFA0 PLC_I_097 PLC event information 97
 PLC monitoring points

CMNCTRL (Function ID: 5A0001)
0008001F45 AUTO SEL LOCK OR SEL Lock OR for AUTOSEQ
0008001F43 CNT CTRL OR CNT CTRL OR for Event Message
0008001F41 DCB RCV OR DCB RCV OR for SEL Lock
0008001F42 DCB SND OR DCB SND OR for GOOSE
0008001F44 OPE_TIME RST OR Operation Time RST OR for Event Message
0008001F46 RELAYTRIP EXTENSION Relay Trip signal
0008001F40 TRAVELING OR Traveling OR for SEL Lock
0008001F50 PLC_O_001 PLC event output 1
………. ………. ………
0008001FB0 PLC_O_097 PLC event output 97
- 310 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
 Connection points
CMNCTRL2 (Function ID: 5A0101)
320000EF43 CHK_NMI_M Main CPU Monitoring Siganal1
320001EF43 CHK_ROMRAM_M Main CPU Monitoring Siganal2
320002EF43 CHK_SUM_M Main CPU Monitoring Siganal3
320003EF43 CHK_PROGRAM_M Main CPU Monitoring Siganal4
320004EF43 CHK_RAM_M Main CPU Monitoring Siganal5
320005EF43 CHK_ECC_M Main CPU Monitoring Siganal6
320006EF43 CHK_SAMPLING_M Main CPU Monitoring Siganal7
320007EF43 CHK_ACC1_M Main CPU Monitoring Siganal8
320010EF43 CHK_GOOSERCV_M Main CPU Monitoring Siganal11
320011EF43 CHK_PING1_M Main CPU Monitoring Siganal12
320012EF43 CHK_PING2_M Main CPU Monitoring Siganal13
320013EF43 CHK_CMLV_DAT_M Main CPU Monitoring Siganal14
800000EF40 PLC_BIT_0001 PLC event bit information 1
………. ………. ………
0000001F42 PLC_O_BOOL_1 PLC event bool output 1
………. ………. ………
310000EF41 PLC_UINT_1 PLC event unit information 1
………. ………. ………
310015EF41 PLC_UINT_16 PLC event uint32 information 16
………. ………. ………
320014EF43 PLC_UINT32_15 PLC event uint32 information 15
………. ………. ………
- 311 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
 PLC monitoring points

CMNCTRL2 (Function ID: 5A0101)
8000001F40 PLC_O_BIT_001 PLC event bit output 1
……………. …………. ……………
……………. …………. ……………
- 312 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Control hierarchy
It is important that the user understand the meaning of the terms ‘control-right’ and ‘control-
hierarchy’ in connection with the functioning of the control and monitoring applications in the
sub-station automation system (SAS) and the sub-station control and monitoring system
(SCMS). For instance, when we wish to operate a device (such as a piece of switchgear or
others), the system has the device forbidden to operate if the system is unable to give a ‘control-
right’ for the device using the ‘control-hierarchy’. Figure 4.2-1 depicts the control-hierarchy;
the control-hierarchy is made of three control-levels, two selector-switches, and three control-
points. Either control command of three control-points is permitted so that the other
commands will be forbidden in the system. On this account, no collision of control-points exists
within the system.
Control-point in RCC
Network level
Control-point in OWS/EWS
Communication
EWS OWS
Selector switch
(43R) RCC EWS/OWS
Station level
Control-point in LCP
ON/OFF operation on LCD(MIMIC)
Selector switch (43BCU‡ ) Remote (R) Local (L)

L Operation
R KEY
Bay level
Control-right
Switchgear and others
Control levels Selector switches Control points and positions of selector switches
Figure 4.2-1 Control hierarchy and selector switches

‡Note: The L|R key on the IED is used for the 43BCU switch. The L|R key
can be programmed during manufacture using the PLC function before shipment,
but it can also be programmed by the user.
§Note: The user can implement a hierarchy by programming the PLC. For more
details, see Chapter PLC function.
- 313 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
4.2.1 Control level and control point

As shown in Figure 4.2-1, the control hierarchy is distributed across three levels; the network
level having a remote-control center (RCC); the station level having operator and engineering
work stations (OWS/EWS); and the bay level† having an IED equipped with an LCD screen.
One of the three control-points (RCC, OWS/EWS, and LCD) is available to issue a control-
command.
†Note:We, hereafter, discuss only the operations at the bay level; that is, we focus only
on operations made from the bay level. The scope of this discussion does not
include operations from either the remote control center or the network levels.
4.2.2 Selector switches and bay operations

At the bay level, the 43BCU switch opens a path to permit the flow of the control-right.
(i) LCD operation

When the user sets the 43BCU switch to “Local (L)”, the issuing of a control-command from
the LCD is possible for the device.
(ii) RCC, EWS, or OWS operation

Alternatively, suppose that the position “Remote (R)” is selected at the 43BCU switch. In this
case, the issuing of the control-command from the LCD is not possible.
4.2.3 Programming of control-right distributions

Figure 4.2-2 illustrates that the PLC function provides the means to distribute the control-
right for the control functions.
The part ○
1 and ○
2 logics are programmed so that, the control-right signal can be
distributed to the respective control applications. With regard to the LEDR function, PLC
connection point “LEDR01_CTRL_RIGHT” has been programmed using DOUT_BOOL feature
(for example). Therefore, the control-right signal is transferred to the select and operate-
condition logic‡ when the user connects the control-hierarchy with the LEDR function using
“LEDR01_CTRL_RIGHT”.
‡Note:The select-condition and operate-condition logic are used to decide upon the
execution of a select command or an operate command in the LEDR function. For
more detail, see chapter Control and monitoring application: LEDR function:
Operate condition and Select condition. Other functions, such as SPOS, DPOS,
etc. have the same logic; the user is required to do the connection.
- 314 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
○
1 Checking the bay level ○
2 Distribution of the control-right
RemoteLocalKey_43BCU
From LOCMT
DIN_UNIT UNIT_TO_BOOL LEDR_CTRL_RIGHT
LRSW01_LR_ST FID DO
DTYPE ST DOUT_BOOL
(530001 3109001001) FID ST
DID
DTYPE
DID
DI
To LEDR
528001 820701ED50 LEDR01_CTRL_RIGHT Select
condition logic
GCNT00_CTRL_RIGHT
DOUT_BOOL
Operate
FID ST
condition logic
DTYPE
DID
DI
To GCNT01-32
540001 800E00ED5A GCNT00IN_TMP_51 Select
condition logic
Operate
condition logic
To other control functions
Figure 4.2-2 Programmed Control-right on the bay level
- 315 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Local, remote and PLC control

The user can select either local or remote control by pressing the L│R key on the front
panel of the IED. Selection is executed within the LOCRMT function. Control logic is provided
by default, but the user can customize each application using the PLC function and PLC
connection points. Generally, the LOCRMT function is applied within all IEDs. Figure 4.3-1
shows the LOCRMT logic. Note that the LOCRMT function changes for the remote control
unconditionally if the operation/function keys on the front panel are not touched within 35
minutes in the local control.
From KEYINPUT function
LOCRMT function (Function ID: 530001) LRSW01_LR_ST
L/R CHG (530001 3109001001)
Remote to local S
(240001 31000A1735)
LRSW01_CH_LR_LCD & 1≥
R
Local to remote
&
1≥
If the user does not touch the
operation/function keys on the front panel &
within 35 min. in the local control, the IED
will be changed for the remote control
unconditionally.
530001 800901EDE0 LRSW01_PLC_SGN01

Disable default logic
530001 800901EDE1 LRSW01_PLC_SGN02
Users can fully customize logic by PLC.
Figure 4.3-1 LOCRMT logic
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
3D – – 3E – – 3F – –
– Main features  – –  – –  – –
- 316 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
4.3.1 Local control

Local control refers to control operation from the front panel of the IED. Either the DIR or the
SBO modes are available depending on the configuration selected by the user.
4.3.2 Remote control

Remote control refers to control operation from a remote control center or the SAS server.
Either the DIR or the SBO modes are available depending on the configuration selected by the
user. Note that the parameters used in the control commands are defined in international
standards†. The parameter details are provided in the communication profiles. (See Chapter
Communication protocol and Appendices)
†Note:As a rule, the control commands have parameters. For example, the “Off to On”
and “On to Off” control directions that are used in commands are pre-configured
as parameters in the communication protocol. Note that the parameters vary
depending upon the respective protocol used, such as IEC61850, Modbus and
others. For IEC61850, Table 4.3-2 shows the parameters defined: the rule for
control direction can be found in “ctlVal”, the command publisher is recognized
using the parameter “origin”. For more information about the parameters, see
Appendix IEC61850 MICS and PICS.
Table 4.3-2 Defined command parameters in IEC61850-7-2

Parameter Types Descriptions
ctlVal Control direction (On or Off)
origin Indicates the command publisher
ctlNum Sequential Number
T Time that the command is sent
Test Test information (Test/On)
Check Interlock synchronizing
4.3.3 Programmable logic control (PLC)

The programmable logic control, (PLC) function can be used to provide user-preferred control
schemes. Several control functions have connection points to enable connections to be made to
the PLC function; they can be used to create user-preferred control schemes. It is necessary for
the user to program the PLC logic that will be used for the particular connection.
Note: The user-preferred control scheme implemented by users can only be operated in
the DIR mode.
4.3.4 Connection and mapping for local/remote control

Note: Rhe meaning of the following references used in the column “M/O” in Table 4.3-3
- 317 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
and Table 4.3-4:

“O” means the signal is optional.
“M” means the user should map/set/configure the signal; otherwise, the user
may experience an operational failure if the default settings are used.
“N/A” means that the user cannot change the state of the signal.
Table 4.3-3 PLC connection point (Input point for LOCRMT)

Signal Number Signal Name Description M/O
240001 31000A1735 L/R CHG [L/R] key “push” N/A

530001 800901EDE0 LRSW01_PLC_SGN01 Disable condition by PLC O
530001 800901EDE1 LRSW01_PLC_SGN02 User configurable condition by PLC O
Table 4.3-4 Mapping points for LOCRMT

530001 3009011008 LRSW01_LR_ORCAT Mapping data for “originator” in IEC61850 N/A

530001 6A09011009 LRSW01_LR_ORIDENT Mapping data for “originator” in IEC61850 N/A
Table 4.3-5 PLC monitoring point (LOCRMT)

530001 3109001001 LRSW01_LR_ST Local(T) / Remote(F) status (single bit expression)

530001 3009011001 LRSW01_LR_ST_RMT Local(0x40) / Remote(0x80) status (double bit expression)
- 318 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

 Signal monitoring points
LOCRMT_SW (Function ID: 530001)
3109001001 LRSW01_LR_ST S43BCU state
 Connection points in PLC logic

LOCRMT_SW (Function ID: 530001)
800901EDE0 LRSW01_PLC_SGN01 PLC signal 1(PLC use)
800901EDE1 LRSW01_PLC_SGN02 PLC signal 2(change mode LOCAL or REMOTE)
- 319 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
LED reset function (LEDR)

A number of LEDs are lined on the IED front panel. For example, “TRIP” LED is lit when a
tripping command is issued for the CB. “TRIP” LED is being illuminated until the user can
confirm the tripped CB; hence, the user can reliably determine that tripping CB has been
initiated by inspection. The following operations are possible to resetting the LED by the LED
reset (LEDR) function, which is furnished in the IED:
1 Pushing “CLEAR” key1
2 Operation by GR-TIEMS2
3 Operation by the SAS
1Note: For the operation, see Chapter User interface: Outline. Note that pressing the
“CLEAR” key causes the Reset of the LEDs.
2Note: For more information, see Chapter Engineering tool.
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
3D – – 3E – – 3F – –
– Main features  – –  – –  – –
- 320 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
4.4.1 Select logic for resetting LEDs

The user should set scheme switch [LEDDR1] to On prior to the LEDR operation. Figure 4.4-1
shows selection logic in the LEDR function.
Wait for a command
Wait for a next command

Select logic
Cancel logic
Resetting LED by remote-SAS Cancel command

Failed
Cancel logic
Signal reception Select
Selection logic Signal output
IEC61850 decision Success
Operate logic
Operate command
Operate logic
Figure 4.4-1 Outline of selection command for resetting LEDs
(i) Input signal required mapping

Figure 4.4-2 shows the select logic when a “Select command (reset)” signal is applied to the
LEDR function. The logic has an input-point “LEDR01_CONTROL_REQ” for the reception;
the input-point must be mapped for IEC61850 communication. The function will fail to operate
if mapping is not performed correctly. We will discuss how to map the input points for the
IEC61850 communication in section 4.4.5.
Input Selection logic in LEDR Output
LEDR function (Function ID: 528001)

LEDR01_FSE_RCV
Command “Reset”
For SBO operation (528001 8007011F42)
528001 7007016D08 LEDR01_CONTROL_REQ Selection
command & 1≥
&
For DIR operation
Operation
command &
LEDR01_NSD_CSF
To “Wait for a next command”
(528001 8307011F41)
0 t
528001 0007011001 LEDR01_STSELD
0.2s
0 t
Failed
0.3s
Either “SBO mode” or “DIR mode” In SBO operation

(e.g., “ctlmodel” in IEC61850*)
In DIR operate
Select condition‡
Logic '0' signal (Always Low (FALSE))
Figure 4.4-2 Selection logic for resetting LEDs

‡Note:A “select condition” signal is provided from the select condition scheme. For more
information, see Figure 4.4-8.
*Note:The LEDR function can run on either “the SBO mode” or “the DIR mode” using a
“ctlmodel” signal when the communication is carried out in the IEC61850; thus,
mapping is required for the IEC61850 communication.
- 321 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(ii) Output signal required mapping

The LEDR function can issue a “Select success” signal at the output point
“LEDR01_NSD_CSF”, when the LEDR function determines that the input signal “Select
command (reset)” is true. If the LEDR function determines that the “LEDR01_NSD_CSF” is
not true, the LEDR function returns to the “Wait for a next command” stage.
(iii) Select condition

Figure 4.4-3 shows the select condition logic in the LEDR function.
Logic '0' signal (Always Low (FALSE)) To selection logic

1≥ & Select condition
Double Command Blocking detected*1
DCB RCV OR
Other devices traveling detected*2

Traveling OR Unmatched condition detected *3
Users must setup this condition correctly

Control hierarchy (e.g. 43RL) (PLC connection point) *4
528001 820701ED50 LEDR01_CTRL_RIGHT
&
IED serious error detected
SERI_ERR
[LEDDR1_EN]
On
Figure 4.4-3 Select condition logic in LEDR

*1Note: “Double Command Blocking (DCB)” is an operation philosophy in the
common control function (CMNCTRL). It can be used to protect the substation.
The user can program it using GR-TIEMS. The DCB operating signal is denoted
as “DCB RCV_OR in Table 4.4-2. For more information, see Chapter General
control function: Common controls.
*2Note: If the event “device-travelling” is detected in the CMNCTRL function, it
indicates that another operator is changing the status of a device. Thus, the IED
should inhibit the operation of any device for the duration that the event is
detected. The detecting signal is denoted as “Traveling OR” in Table 4.4-2.
*3Note: Criteria “unmatched conditions” are decided when the “Test-bit status” in a
command is not identical to the “IED test status”.
*4Note: The user needs to program the PLC logic “Control hierarchy condition”. The
user is also required to connect the logic condition with the select condition logic
using the connection point “LEDR01_CTRL_RIGHT”. For more information, see
chapter General control function: Control hierarchy. “LEDR01_CTRL_RIGHT” is
provided in Table 4.4-3.
- 322 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Table 4.4-2 Input signals for condition logic

5A0001 0008001F41 DCB RCV OR Double Command Blocking(DCB) is in progress. N/A

5A0001 0008001F40 Traveling OR Travelling events are detected. N/A
5A0101 3100001F43 SERI_ERR Serious Error detected N/A
Table 4.4-3 PLC connection point (Input point on select condition logic)
528001 820701ED50 LEDR01_CTRL_RIGHT LED Reset control hierarchy M
Table 4.4-4 Setting of LEDR

Setting Name Description Default Setting item or value
LEDDR1_EN Activate LED reset control On Off / On
- 323 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
4.4.2 Cancel logic in SBO mode

In the SBO mode the reception of a cancel command is possible when the cancel conditions are
satisfied. Accordingly, the function can discard the select command; finally, the operation
returns to the initial stage (i.e., “Wait for a command”.)
(i) Receiving “Cancel” from the remote-end

Figure 4.4-4 depicts the cancel command procedure for a cancel command initiated from the
remote-end.
Wait for a command
Select logic Wait for a next command
Cancel by the remote-end

Success
Command Reset from the Signal reception in Cancel

Cancel logic Do nothing
remote-end IEC61850 decision Failed
Operate logic
Operate command
Operate logic
Figure 4.4-4 Outline of ‘cancel’ command from the remote-end
(ii) Input signal required mapping

Figure 4.4-6 depicts the cancel logic when a “Cancel command (Remote-Cancel)” signal is
applied to the LEDR function. The input-point “LEDR01_CONTROL_REQ” is the same the
same as that for the signal as shown in Figure 4.4-2.
510001 7001016D08
Input Cancel logic in LEDR Output

Command “Cancel”
Cancel command
528001 7007016D08 LEDR01_CONTROL_REQ
&
Unmatched condition To “Wait for a command”

detected† &
Successes to cancel
“Do nothing”
Operation Failed
Figure 4.4-5 ‘Cancel’ from the remote-end

†Note:The criteria “unmatched conditions” are determined when the “Test-bit status” in
a command is not identical to the “IED test status”.
- 324 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
4.4.3 Operate logic for SBO/DIR mode

Once the operation of the select logic is completed, the operate logic is applied to reset LEDs.
Resetting LEDs is executed when the operate conditions are satisfied.
Wait for a command
Select logic Wait for a next command
LED resetting by the remote-end

LED resetting from the Success
Operation
remote-end Signal reception in Operate logic Resetting LEDs
decision
IEC61850
Failed Do nothing
LED resetting by the local-end

Success
Operation
Pushing “CLEAR” key Operate logic Resetting LEDs
decision
Failed Do nothing
Cancel logic
Cancel command
Cancel logic
Figure 4.4-6 Outline of operation command for resetting LEDs

†Note: For more information, see Chapter User interface: Outline.
(i) Mapping required Input signal

Figure 4.4-7 illustrates the operate logic when an “Operation command (reset)” signal is
applied to the LEDR function. The input-point “LEDR_CONTROL_REQ” is used for the
reception of the “Operation command (reset)” signal. Pressing “CLEAR” key or the operation
on GR-TIEMS will reset LEDs.
Input Select logic in LEDR Output
LEDR function (Function ID: 528001) To LED3–LED26†

Command “Operating reset”
Operation
528001 7007016D08 LEDR01_CONTROL_REQ 528001 3107011EA1 LED_RST_CMD
command & ≥
Operate condition‡
From KEYINPUT
240001 31000E1730
LEDR_KEY_CLEAR
CLEAR
From TOOL_COM (GR-TIMES) 1≥

201501 3101001001
LEDR_TOOL_CLEAR
LED_RESET_TOOL
Figure 4.4-7 Operation logic for resetting LEDs
(ii) Output signal required mapping

The operation logic issues a “LED_RST_COM” signal to clear the LEDs†. The signal
“LED_RST_COM” is also transferred to the remote-end, when signal mapping is executed in
IEC61850 communication. (See section 4.4.5)
- 325 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
†Note:Although the “LED_RST_COM” signal is connected previously with several LEDs,

by the manufacturer, user can also connect the signal with the LEDs. See section
4.4.4 for how to connect.
(iii) Operate condition

Figure 4.4-8 shows the operate condition logic of the LEDR function, which is used to determine
a reset-condition for the operation.
Logic '0' signal (Always Low (FALSE)) To operate logic

1≥ & Operate condition
DCB RCV OR


Users must setup this condition correctly
Control hierarchy (e.g. 43RL) (PLC connection point) *4
528001 820701ED50 LEDR01_CTRL_RIGHT
&
IED serious error detected
SERI_ERR
[LEDDR1_EN]
On
Figure 4.4-8 Operate condition logic in LEDR

*1Note: “Double Command Blocking (DCB)” is an operation philosophy in the
common control function (CMNCTRL). It can be used to protect the substation.
The user can program it using GR-TIEMS. The DCB operating signal is denoted
as “DCB RCV_OR in Table 4.4-2. For more information, see Chapter General
control function: Common controls.
*2Note: If the event “device-travelling” is detected in the CMNCTRL function, it
indicates that another operator is changing the status of a device. Thus, the IED
should inhibit the operation of any device for the duration that the event is
detected. The detecting signal is denoted as “Traveling OR” in Table 4.4-2.
*3Note: Criteria “unmatched conditions” are decided when the “Test-bit status” in a
*4Note: The user must program the PLC logic for “Control hierarchy condition”. The
user must connect that to the select condition logic using the connection point
“LEDR01_CTRL_RIGHT”. For more information, see chapter General control
function: Control hierarchy. “LEDR01_CTRL_RIGHT” is provided in Table 4.4-3.
4.4.4 Settings in LED logics

The user can program the status and the signal of the LED, so that the LEDs are possible to
switch off upon occurrence of the reset. As shown in the logic relating to the LED†, each logic
has a timer and a setting; accordingly, setting Latch should be set for the operation of the
- 326 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
LEDR function. Additionally, the user should connect the signal LED_RST_CMD with the LED
logic.
†Note:For more information on LED logics, see Chapter Technical description: Human
machine interface: LED indicators.
(i) Settings using GR-TIEMS

Figure 4.4-9 shows how to connect the reset signal LED_RST_CMD for the LED-03 logic. The
user can assign a reset signal for the respective LED logics by the drag and drop operation.
The user should also select Latch for the behavior from the pull-down menu.
Set [Behavior] to Latch

Choose the signal
LED_RST_CMD for the
LED-03 logic
Figure 4.4-9 Settings for LED-03 circuit provided by “Setting I/O menu” of GR-TIEMS
(ii) Settings using IED screen

The operation from the IED screen can also be set. See Chapter User interface: I/O setting sub-
menu.
- 327 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
4.4.5 Mapping for IEC61850 communication

The user can operate the LEDR function over IEC 61850 communication following mapping
using GR-TIEMS. Note that the LEDR function is designed for “LEDRs” in the IEC 61850
standard for communication. The user should follow these steps, each of which is discussed
below:
Step1: Editing Logical Node
Step2: Mapping output data
Step3: Mapping input data
(i) Editing Logical Node

The user will need to create a logical node (LN) for the LEDR function. Figure 4.4-10
exemplifies the editing of a LN; the LN “logical node zero (LLN0)” is chosen for the LERD
function. Either the SBO mode or the DIR mode should be chosen in the editing for the LN.
SBO defined in LN
Figure 4.4-10 Defining “LEDRs” object in LLN0 logic node
Defining SBO mode

Figure 4.4-11 exemplifies the LEDR logic node saved as “LLN0”. In the SBO mode, the user
should select the following items in the “LLN0$LEDRs” using GR-TIEMS:
- 328 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
 SBOw
 Oper
 Cancel
 Origin
 stSeld
 sboClass† (choice ”operate-once”)
 ctlmodel (choice ”SBOes or SBOns”)
†”sboClass” can be found by scrolling down.
Figure 4.4-11 LN editing for SBO mode (for example)
Defining DIR mode

Figure 4.4-12 exemplifies the LEDR logic node saved as LLN0. In the DIR mode, the following
three items should be selected using GR-TIEMS:
 Oper
 origin
 ctlmodel (choice ”DOes or DOns” )
Figure 4.4-12 LN editing for DIR mode (for example)
(ii) Mapping output data

The user should group the LEDR signals with regard to GOOSE and Report; the user should
map them for IEC61850 communication using GR-TIEMS. Figure 4.4-13 illustrates how to
map a signal for IEC61850 communication; it indicates that the signals for the LEDR function
- 329 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
are required to be mapped for IEC 61850 communication

Table 4.4-5 Mapping signals for SPC object
Object_reference Attribute Type FC Signal Number Signal Name
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs$origin orCat orCategory ST 5280013107011008 LEDR01_ORCAT
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs$origin orIdent Octet64 ST 5280016A07011009 LEDR01_ORIDENT
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs stVal BOOLEAN ST 5280013107011EA1 LED_RST_CMD
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs q Quality ST 3010013110041005 Qual_Val
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs t Timestamp ST 2003019010001006 SYS_TIME
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs stSeld BOOLEAN ST 5280010007011001 LEDR01_STSELD
Note: “Status (ST)” is defined in the function constraint (FC) of the IEC 61850.
Figure 4.4-13 orCat attribute mapped for LEDRs object of LLN0
(iii) Mapping input data

The LEDR function can receive three commands “select, operate, and cancel”. Thus, the user
should map the input-point “LED01_CONTROL_REQ” to the IEC61850 communication. Table
4.4-6 shows the input-point “LED01_CONTROL_REQ” and the Object reference
“Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs”; the user should map the input-point to the Object references having
attributes CO and CF†. Figure 4.4-14 shows how to map a signal.
†Note: The attribute is defined in the IEC 61850; “CO” stands for “Control” and “CF”
stands for “Configuration” in the functional constraint (FC).
- 330 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Table 4.4-6 Mapping signals required for LEDRs object for LLN0
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs$Oper ctlVal BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs$Oper ctlNum INT8U CO
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs$Oper T Timestamp CO
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs$Oper Test BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs$Oper Check Check CO 5280017007016D08 LEDR01_CONTROL_REQ
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs$Oper$origin orCat orCategory CO
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs$Oper$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs ctlModel ctlModel CF
Ctrl/LLN0$LEDRs sboClass sboClass CF
Drag and drop
Figure 4.4-14 Input-point mapped for LLN0
- 331 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
4.4.6 Setting
TLEDRSTCTRL (Function ID: 528001)
Default setting
Setting item Range Units Contents Notes
value
LEDDR1-EN Off / On - LEDR01 Reset Control Enable Off
- 332 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

8007011D53 LEDR01_SC Select command
0007011001 LEDR01_STSELD The controllable data is in the status selected (StSeld)
3107011EA1 LED_RST_CMD LEDR reset command output
8007011D57 LEDR01_EC Execute command
8007011D55 LEDR01_EC_OWS Execute command by OWS(HMI)
8007011D56 LEDR01_EC_RCC Execute command by RCC
8007011D51 LEDR01_SC_OWS Select command by OWS(HMI)
8007011D52 LEDR01_SC_RCC Select command by RCC
8E07011F47 LEDR01_SLD_TM0 Signal after MCTLEDR_SC001
8607011F46 LEDR01_SLF_FCT_FLG1 Signal before MCTLEDR_SC001
8307011F41 LEDR01_NSD_CSF Signal after KC_LEDR_SA001
8607011F45 LEDR01_TMP3 Signal after KC_LEDR_SC001
8007011F42 LEDR01_FSE_RCV Signal before LC_LEDR_SA002
8B07011F44 LEDR01_CTR_SGU Signal before KC_LEDR_SC001
8207011F40 LEDR01_TMP1 Signal before KC_LEDR_SA001
8707011F48 LEDR01_SLF_FCT_FLG2 Signal before MCTLEDR_SC002
8F07011F49 LEDR01_EX_CMP_TM0 Signal after MCTLEDR_SC002
8607011F43 LEDR01_TMP2 Signal after KC_LEDR_SA002

820701ED50 LEDR01_CTRL_RIGHT LEDR01 control right from PLC
 Mapping point
7007016D08 LEDR01_CONTROL_REQ Dev01 control request
- 333 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Mode control function (MDCTRL)

For the user, mode control (MDCTRL) function can provide test function (TEST-FB) interface,
which is a command to change the mode in the function. MDCTRL function consists of two
parts: (1) On-mode or Test-mode sensing in IED and (2) interface between IED and SAS.
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
3D – – 3E – – 3F – –
– Main features  – –  – –  – –
- 334 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
4.5.1 Function
(i) Mode sensor
The MDCTRL function can monitor the state change (On to TEST / TEST to Off) in the IED.
To use this monitoring function, On should be set for the scheme switch [MDCTRL-EN] prior to
operation. During the operation, a select signal and an operate signal are provided for the
TEST-FB when the SAS provides a test command for the IED; hence, the MDCTRL function
comes with two time-out timers. Setting [MDCTRL-SELRST] provides a time-out timer for
canceling a select command; setting [MDCTRL-EXERST] provides a time-out timer for
canceling an operate command.
(ii) Interface for IEC61850

The MDCTRL function can fulfil the two operation modes (On and Test) specified in the IEC
61850 communication, as shown in Table 4.5-2; the MDCTRL function can carry a signal for
changing for the TEST-FB; the signal is generated in the select and control logics in the
MDCTRL function. The change signal is initiated by the mode change command that is
received at the communication interface. Note that control operations from a SAS is only taken
account.
Table 4.5-2 Values of mode and behavior in IEC 61850

Value Mode Definition in IEC 61850
The application represented by the LN works. All communication
1 On
services work and get updated values.
The application represented by the LN works. All communication
services work and get updated values. Data objects will be transmitted
with quality “test”. Control commands with quality test will be
3 Test
accepted only by LNs in “test” or “test-blocked” mode. “Processed as
valid” means that the application should react in the manner what is
foreseen for “test”.
(iii) Input signal from control hierarchy

Note PLC logic “Control hierarchy condition” is required to operate the MDCTRL function; the
user should notice that the connection with the Control hierarchy is made using the connection
point “MDCTRL01IN_TMP_28” (see Table 4.5-3). For more information, see chapter Control
and monitoring application: Control hierarchy.
Table 4.5-3 PLC connection point (Input signal for select condition logic)
550001 821301ED50 MDCTRL01IN_TMP_28 MDCTRL control hierarchy condition M
- 335 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

The user can operate the MDCTRL function over the IEC61850 communication after the
mapping using GR-TIEMS. The user should follow steps,

The user should make a logical node (LN) for the MDCTRL function. Figure 4.5-1exemplifies
LN editing; the LN “LLNO” is chosen for the MDCTRL01 for IEC61850 communication. After
the user defining an object “MOD”, the MDCTRL01 logical node can be saved with the name
“LLNO”. Make a definition of the object “MOD” in MDCTRL01 logical node. Either the SBO
mode or the DIR mode can be chosen in the LN editing.
Figure 4.5-1 Defining “MOD” object in LLNO logic node
Defining SBO mode

Figure 4.5-2 exemplifies the settings in LN “LLNO” when the SBO mode is required for the
MDCTRL01 function. In the SBO control, the user should select the following items for the
“LLNO$MOD” using the GR-TIEMS;
- 336 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
SBOw
Oper
Cancel
Origin
stSeld
sboClass† (choice ”operate-once”)
ctlmodel (choice ”SBOes or SBOns” )
Figure 4.5-2 LN editing screen for SBO mode (for example)

Defining DIR mode
Figure 4.5-3 exemplifies the settings in LN “LLNO” when the DIR mode is required for the
MDCTRL01 function. In the DIR mode, the following three items should be selected using the
GR-TIEMS:
Oper
origin
ctlmodel (choice ”DOes or DOns” )
Figure 4.5-3 LN editing screen for DIR mode (for example)

The user should group the MDCTRL01 signals with regard to GOOSE and REPORT; the user
should map them for the IEC 61850 communication using GR-TIEMS.
Table 4.5-4 shows the required mapping signals in MDCTRL01 function to the IEC 61850
communications. Figure below shows how to map a signal.
Note: “Status (ST)” is defined in the function constraint (FC) of the IEC 61850 standard.
- 337 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Table 4.5-4 Mapping signals for MOD object.

System/LLN0$Mod$origin orCat orCategory ST 5500013013011000 MDCTRL01_ORCAT
System/LLN0$Mod$origin orIdent Octet64 ST 5500016A13011009 MDCTRL01_ORIDENT
System/LLN0$Mod stSeld BOOLEAN ST 5500010013011D90 MDCTRL01_SLD_RPT
Drag and drop
Figure 4.5-4 orCat attribute mapped into MOD object of LLNO

The MDCTRL01 function can receive three commands “select, operate, and cancel. Thus, the
user should map the input-point “MDCTRL01_CONTROL_REQ”. Table 4.5-5 shows the input-
point “MDCTRL01_CONTROL_REQ” and the Object reference “System/LLN0$Mod$”; the user
should map the Object reference having attributes CO and CF in FC to the input-point. Note that
the user should map the input-point to all attributes having CO and CF. Figure below shows
how to map a signal.
- 338 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Table 4.5-5 Mapping signals required for LLNO object in MDCTRL01 function
System/LLN0$Mod$SBOw ctlVal Mod CO
System/LLN0$Mod$SBOw ctlNum INT8U CO
System/LLN0$Mod$SBOw T Timestamp CO
System/LLN0$Mod$SBOw Test BOOLEAN CO
System/LLN0$Mod$SBOw Check Check CO
System/LLN0$Mod$SBOw$origin orCat orCategory CO
System/LLN0$Mod$SBOw$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
System/LLN0$Mod$Oper ctlVal Mod CO
System/LLN0$Mod$Oper ctlNum INT8U CO
System/LLN0$Mod$Oper T Timestamp CO
System/LLN0$Mod$Oper Test BOOLEAN CO
System/LLN0$Mod$Oper Check Check CO 5500017013016D08 MDCTRL01_CONTROL_REQ
System/LLN0$Mod$Oper$origin orCat orCategory CO
System/LLN0$Mod$Oper$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
System/LLN0$Mod$Cancel ctlVal Mod CO
System/LLN0$Mod$Cancel ctlNum INT8U CO
System/LLN0$Mod$Cancel T Timestamp CO
System/LLN0$Mod$Cancel Test BOOLEAN CO
System/LLN0$Mod$Cancel$origin orCat orCategory CO
System/LLN0$Mod$Cancel$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
System/LLN0$Mod ctlModel ctlModel CF
System/LLN0$Mod sboTimeout INT32U CF
System/LLN0$Mod sboClass sboClass CF
†Note: The attribute is defined in the IEC 61850 standard; “CO” stands for “Control”
and “CF” stands for “Configuration” in the functional constraint (FC).
Check “Input”
Figure 4.5-5 Input-point mapped for LLNO
- 339 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
4.5.3 Setting
MDCTRL (Function ID: 550001)
Default setting
value
MDCTRL-EN Off/On Switch for operation Off

MDCTRL-SELRST 10-100 s Selection cancel time-out timer 30
MDCTRL-EXERST 10-100 s Waiting execute operation time-out timer 30
- 340 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

MDCTRL(Function ID: 550001)
8013011D55 MDCTRL01_EC_OWS MDCTRL01 execute command by OWS(HMI)
8013011D56 MDCTRL01_EC_RCC MDCTRL01 execute command by RCC
8013011D57 MDCTRL01_EC_RMT MDCTRL01 execute command by Remote
8013011D51 MDCTRL01_SC_OWS MDCTRL01 select command by OWS(HMI)
8013011D52 MDCTRL01_SC_RCC MDCTRL01 select command by RCC
8013011D53 MDCTRL01_SC_RMT MDCTRL01 select command by Remote
8313011E9C MODE01_CCF_FCT_CS MDCTRL01 cancel command fail factor condition signal
8713011E96 MODE01_CC_FS MDCTRL01 cancel command fail signal
8613011E95 MODE01_CC_SS MDCTRL01 cancel command success signal
8813011E9B MODE01_CC_ST_ERR MDCTRL01 cancel command mode err
8313011E9D MODE01_CTR_SGN MDCTRL01 control logic stage(unselected)
8B13011EA2 MODE01_CTR_SGU MDCTRL01 control logic stage(under selection)
8113011E9A MODE01_ECF_FCT_EIS MDCTRL01 execute command fail factor signal check
8013011F55 MODE01_EC_ST_ERR MDCTRL01 execute command mode err
8013011E93 MODE01_EX_CMP MDCTRL01 execute complete signal
8F13011F58 MODE01_EX_CMP_TMO MDCTRL01 timeout after execute completion
8913011F6C MODE01_EX_CS01 MDCTRL01 execute condition signal 01
8A13011F6D MODE01_EX_CS02 MDCTRL01 execute condition signal 02
8B13011F6E MODE01_EX_CS03 MDCTRL01 execute condition signal 03
8613011E91 MODE01_EX_FFL MDCTRL01 execute fail signal
8213011F44 MODE01_EX_OUT MDCTRL01 execute output signal
8513011E8F MODE01_EX_SFL MDCTRL01 execute success signal
8213011E88 MODE01_FEC_F_CS MDCTRL01 On direction execute command fail condition signal
8013011E81 MODE01_FEC_OK_CS MDCTRL01 On direction execute command OK condition signal
8D13011F42 MODE01_FSD_CSF MDCTRL01 On direction selected condition signal
8513011F60 MODE01_FSL_CS19 MDCTRL01 On direction select condition signal 19
8A13011F61 MODE01_FSL_CS20 MDCTRL01 On direction select condition signal 20
8113011F64 MODE01_FSL_CS21 MDCTRL01 On direction select condition signal 21
8313011F41 MODE01_NSD_CSF MDCTRL01 no direction selected condition signal
8013011F56 MODE01_NSL_CS06 MDCTRL01 no direction select condition signal 06
8613011F5E MODE01_NSL_CS07 MDCTRL01 no direction select condition signal 07
8213011F5F MODE01_NSL_CS10 MDCTRL01 no direction select condition signal 10
8313011E89 MODE01_OEC_F_CS MDCTRL01 Test direction execute command fail condition signal
8113011E82 MODE01_OEC_OK_CS MDCTRL01 Test direction execute command OK condition signal
8F13011F43 MODE01_OSD_CSF MDCTRL01 Test direction selected condition signal
8513011F65 MODE01_OSL_CS40 MDCTRL01 Test direction select condition signal 40
8813011F5D MODE01_OSL_CS41 MDCTRL01 Test direction select condition signal 41
8513011F5B MODE01_OSL_CS42 MDCTRL01 Test direction select condition signal 42
8013011F54 MODE01_SC_ST_ERR MDCTRL01 select command mode err
8013011E76 MODE01_SLD_CS MDCTRL01 selected condition signal
8013011F66 MODE01_SLD_CS04 MDCTRL01 selected condition signal 04
8E13011F57 MODE01_SLD_TMO MDCTRL01 time out after selected
8113011E7B MODE01_SLF_CS MDCTRL01 select fail condition signal
- 341 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

8713011E98 MODE01_SLF_FCT_EIS MDCTRL01 select fail factor signal
8613011F62 MODE01_SLF_FCT_FLG03 MDCTRL01 select fail factor signal by fixedlogic 03
8813011F6B MODE01_SLF_FCT_FLG07 MDCTRL01 select fail factor signal by fixedlogic 07
8013011E7D MODE01_SLR_CS MDCTRL01 select release condition signal
0013011F75 MDCTRL01_SE_RCV MDCTRL01 select or execute command received
0013011D90 MDCTRL01_SLD_RPT MDCTRL01 selected signal(stSeld) for SAS
0013011F52 MDCTRL01_TRA MDCTRL01 travelling info
0013011F53 MDCTRL01_TRA_CTR MDCTRL01 travelling info for control
2013011001 MDCTRL01_MODE MDCTRL01 mode
3113011D80 MDCTRL01_TMP_06 MDCTRL01 control event data (selected)
3113011D81 MDCTRL01_TMP_07 MDCTRL01 control event data (select fail)
3113011D82 MDCTRL01_TMP_08 MDCTRL01 control event data (select release)
3113011D83 MDCTRL01_TMP_09 MDCTRL01 control event data (execute output on)
3113011D84 MDCTRL01_TMP_10 MDCTRL01 control event data (execute command ng)
3113011D86 MDCTRL01_TMP_11 MDCTRL01 control event data (execute fail)

821301ED50 MDCTRL01IN_TMP_28 MDCTRL01IN_TMP_28
 Mapping point
7013016D08 MDCTRL01_CONTROL_REQ MDCTRL01 correction request from cmm
- 342 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Counter function for the general (GCNT)

When a signal is generated externally and the signal is received by generic counter function
(GCNT), the GCNT function can count their signal transitions. Figure 4.6-1 shows signals are
generated repeatedly. For example, if the number of generated signals should be reported, the
GCNT function counts the number of the signal transitions; the function can report them. A
binary input-circuit (BI) is used to receive the signal, when a device (external object) reports
its state.
Closed/Open signals
GCNT01_ CNT_ VAL
Inputs 320E 011D20
Changes in device status
(e.g., operations of 43S) BI 540001 800E 01E DE 0 GCNT01_ PLC_ SGNL GCNT01
Operations at the local or Control commands GCNT06_ CNT_ VAL

remote-end 320E 061D20
540001 800E 06E DE 0 GCNT06_ PLC_ SGNL GCNT06
(e.g., issuing commands)
Changes in a function Status signals GCNT32_ CNT_ VAL

status 320E 201D20
(e.g., function operations)
540001 800E 20E DE 0 GCNT32_ PLC_ SGNL
GCNT32
Count objects Signals generated GCNT functions
Figure 4.6-1 Reception of signals at GCNT functions
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
3D – – 3E – – 3F – –
– Main features  – –  – –  – –
– Number of counters 8 – – 8 – – 8 – –
- 343 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Signal acquisition timing must be adjusted in accordance with the application, in that the
acquisition should be regulated for the nature of the signal; hence, several settings are
provided in the GCNT functions. Thirty-two independent GCNT counters† are available. That
is, counters GCNT01 to GCNT32† can operate simultaneously. The values counted are stored
in the non-volatile memory so that they are not erased if the power supply to the IED is
interrupted.
For simplicity, only the GCNT01 function is discussed; the features in the remaining GCNT02–
GCNT32 functions are identical to the GCNT01 function.
4.6.1 Counter setting for a signal

(i) Setting for count timing
In the GCNT01 function count timing is grouped into three, as shown in Figure 4.6-2 (a, b, and
c). When the user wishes to count the On(Closed), set On for the scheme switch [GCNT01-
CNTS]; conversely, set Off for the scheme switch when the Off(Open) is to be counted.
Additionally, OnOff is provided for counting the number of pulses. If the GCNT01 function is
not required, set NA for the scheme switch.
a. On (Closed) signals
“On” is counted on the rising edge of the pulse
Counter 1 2 … n …
b. Off (Open) signals
“Off” is counted on the falling edge of the pulse
c. OnOff (Closed-Open) signals
“OnOff” is counted in response to pulses.
Figure 4.6-2 Count types
(ii) Setting the maximum value

The GCNT01 function is able to count to 2147483647 (=231−1). When the count-value reaches
the value “2147483647”, the count-value returns to an initial-value. If the user wishes to set a
different maximum number in place of “2147483647”, the user can use the setting [GCNT01-
- 344 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
CNTMAX] and set a user-preferred value. Note that the user can set the maximum number
from 9 to 2147483647.
(iii) Setting the initial-value

The counter returns to an initial-value when the counter reaches the maximum value;
generally, the initial-value is set to either zero or one (0 or 1); hence, the number is re-counted
from either “0 (or 1)” following the maximum value. If the user wishes to set an alternative
initial number, setting [GCNT01-CNTRV] can be used. Note that the user can select the initial-
value from zero (0) to 999999.
Counter
Max set by [GCNT01-CNTMAX]
Initial-value set by [GCNT01-CNTRV]

0
Time
Figure 4.6-3 Maximum-value and initial-value
(iv) Setting for the report (Dead band)

The counter-value can be reported to the remote-end; the user can set the report-timing using
the setting [GCNT01-SDB]. For example, if the counter-value is to be reported for every change,
the user should set 0 for the setting [GCNT01-SDB]. When five(5) is set for the [GCNT01-SDB],
reporting is performed when the counter has incremented by six(6) following the previously
reported counter-value.
Counter Counter Counter
10 10 10
5 5 5
0 Time 0 Time 0 Time
Reporting………………. Reporting Reporting………………. Reporting Reporting Reporting
a. 0 set for [GCNT01-SDB] b. 1 set for [GCNT01-SDB] c. 5 set for [GCNT01-SDB]
Figure 4.6-4 Counter value and report timing
- 345 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
4.6.2 Select logics for SBO/DIR modes

The user should set scheme switch [GCNT01-EN] to On prior to counting.
(i) Receiving “Select command Reset” from the remote-end

Figure 4.6-5 outlines the reception of the Select command ‘Reset’ from the remote-end.
Wait for a command
Select stage Wait for a next command
Select command Reset from the remote-end Cancel logic

Failed
Signal Cancel command

Select
reception Select logic Signal output
decision Success
IEC61850
Cancel logic
Operate logic
Operate command
Operate logic
Figure 4.6-5 Outline of Select command ‘Reset’
Input point required mapping

Figure 4.6-6 shows the select logic when a “Select command Reset (Remote-Reset-Control)”
signal is applied to the GCNT01 function. The logic has an input-point “GCNT01_CMM_REQ”
for the reception of the select command. That is, the input-point must be mapped for IEC61850
communication. The function will fail to operate if mapping is not performed correctly. We will
discuss how to map the input-points for IEC61850 communication in section 4.6.5.
Output signal to BO
The GCNT01 function can issue a “Complete” signal at the output point
“GCNT01_SLD_CSCN”, when the GCNT01 function determines that the input signal
“Remote-Reset-Control” is true. If the GCNT01 function determines that the “Remote-Reset-
Control” is not true, the GCNTS01 function returns to the “Wait for a command” stage.
- 346 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Input Select logic in GCNT01 Output
GCNT01 function (Function ID: 54001)

Command “Remote-Reset-Control”
For SBO operation
540001 700E016D09 GCNT01_CMM_REQ Select command
& 1≥ &
To “Wait for a next
For DIR operation command”
To BO connection
Operate command
& “GCNT01_SLD_CSCN”
(540001 8A0E011E76)
Either “SBO mode” or “DIR mode” 0 t

In SBO operate Complete
(e.g., “ctlmodel” in IEC61850*)
0.2s
In DIR operate
To “Wait for a command”
“GCNT01_SLF_CSCN”
Select condition‡ (540001 8B0E011E7B)
0 t
Select “Failed”
0.3s
Figure 4.6-6 Select ‘Reset’ in GCNT01††

‡Note:A “select condition” signal is provided from the select condition logic. For more
information, see Figure 4.6-7.
*Note:The GNCT01 function can run in either the “SBO mode” or the “DIR mode” using
a signal called “ctlmodel” when communication is implemented using IEC61850.
To use this signal, the user should map it for IEC61850 communication.
††Note: To identify the input and output points of the other GCNT02–GCNT32 logics, see
Table 4.6-2 for the inputs and Table 4.6-5 for the outputs.
- 347 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(ii) Select condition

Figure 4.6-8 shows the select condition logic in the GCNT01 function. The GCNT01 function
checks the condition for the select command using a couple of signals. When resetting the
counter is performed from the “Statics sub-menu” in the HMI operation†, the user should set
On for scheme switch [GCNT01-HMI].
†Note: The HMI operation is discussed in Chapter User interface: Monitoring sub-menu.
Logic '0' signal (Always Low (FALSE)) To select logic

≥1 & Select condition
DCB RCV OR


From Control hierarchy *4
540001 800E00ED5A GCNT00IN_TMP_51

&
From CMNCTRL
Serious error detection
SERI_ERR
[GCNT01-HMI]
On
[DPOS01-EN]
On
Figure 4.6-7 Select condition logic for Reset in GCNT01

1Note: “Double Command Blocking (DCB)” is an operation philosophy. It can be used to
protect the substation. The user can program it using GR-TIEMS. The DCB
operating signal is denoted as “DCB RCB OR” in Table 4.6-3.
2Note: If the event “device-travelling” is detected, it indicates that another operator is
changing the status of a device. Thus, the IED should inhibit the operation of any
device for the duration that the event is detected. The detected signal is denoted
as “Traveling OR” in Table 4.6-3.
3Note: Criteria “unmatched conditions” are decided when the “Test-bit status” in a
4Note: The user will need to program the PLC logic “Control hierarchy condition”. The
user is also required to connect the logic condition with the select condition logic
using the connection pint “GCNT00IN_TMP_51” (see Table 4.6-4). For more
information, see Chapter Control and monitoring application: Control hierarchy.
- 348 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(iii) Signal name and number

Note: The user should note the following descriptions shown in the column “M/O” for
each table:
“O” indicates that the signal is provided for optional use.
“M” indicates that the user should map/set/configure the signal; otherwise, the
user may experience an operational failure if the default settings are
used.
“N/A” indicates that the user cannot change the state of the signal.
Table 4.6-2 Mapping points for the reception of control command
540001 700E016D09 GCNT01_CMM_REQ GCNT01 control request(Mapping data) M

… … …
Table 4.6-3 Input signals to condition logic

5A0001 0008001F41 DCB RCV OR Double Command Blocking(DCB) is in progress. N/A

5A0001 0008001F40 Traveling OR Travelling events are detected. N/A
5A0101 3100001F43 SERI_ERR Serious Error detected N/A
Table 4.6-4 PLC Connection point (Input signals from the control hierarchy logic)
540001 800E00ED5A GCNT00IN_TMP_51 Control hierarchy for GCNT01–32 M
Table 4.6-5 PLC Monitoring points (Signal “select complete/ failed” for BIO)
540001 8A0E011E76 GCNT01_SLD_CSCN GCNT01 Selection completed (Mapping)

… … …
5400018B0E011E7B GCNT01_SLF_CSCN GCNT01 select failed
…. … …
Table 4.6-6 PLC Monitoring points (Signal “stSeld” for BIO)

540001 000E011D91 GCNT01_TMP_01 GCNT01 count change selected signal(stSeld) for SAS
… … …
- 349 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(iv) Setting names
Table 4.6-7 Settings of select logics for GCNT01 to GCNT32

Setting Name Description Default Setting item or value
GCNTxx-EN Activation of the GCNTxx function On Off / On

GCNTxx- Counter is used for the HMI operation in the GCNTxx function Off Off / On
HMI
- 350 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
4.6.3 Cancel logic for SBO mode

In the SBO control mode the reception of a cancel command is possible when the cancel
conditions are satisfied; accordingly, the function can discard the select command; finally, the
operation returns to the initial stage (i.e., “Wait for a command”.)
(i) Receiving “Cancel” from the remote-end

Figure 4.6-8 depicts the cancel command procedure for a cancel command initiated from the
remote-end.
Wait for a command
Select logics Wait for a next command
Cancel from the remote-end

Select command Success
Reset from the
Signal reception Cancel
remote-end Cancel logic Do nothing
in IEC61850 decision Failed
Operate logic
Operate command
Operate logic
Figure 4.6-8 Outline of ‘cancel’ command from the remote-end
Input point required mapping

Figure 4.6-9 depicts the cancel logic when a “Cancel command (Remote-Cancel)” signal is
applied to the GCNT01 function. The input-point “GCNT01_CMM_REQ” is the same as that
for the signal “Select command Reset (Remote-Reset-Control)”.
Output signal to BO
The GCNT01 function can issue a “Success to cancel” signal at the monitoring point
“GCNT01_CC_SSCN”, when the GCNT01 function has determined that the signal “Remote-
cancel” is true. Another signal “Operation failed” is issued if the function is able to determine
that the signal “Remote-cancel” is not true.
Input Cancel logic in GCNT01 Output
GCNT01 function (Function ID: 540001) To “Wait for a command”

Command “Remote-cancel”
“GCNT01_CC_SSCN”
Cancel command
540001 700E016D09 GCNT01_CMM_REQ (540001 840E011E95)
&
Successes to cancel
Unmatched condition detected *1 &
“Do nothing”
Operation Failed
Figure 4.6-9 ‘Cancel’ from the remote-end in GCNT01

1Note: The criteria “unmatched conditions” are determined when the “Test-bit status” in
- 351 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
a command is not identical to the “IED test status”.
(ii) Signal name and number

Table 4.6-8 PLC monitoring points (Output signal for ‘cancel’ logic)
540001 840E011E95 GCNT01_CC_SSCN GCNT01 cancel success signal

… … …
- 352 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
4.6.4 Operate logic for SBO/DIR modes

After the operation of the select logic, the operate logic starts to clear the counters.
(i) Receiving “Operate command Reset” from the remote-end

Figure 4.6-10 depicts the reception of the operate command ‘Reset’ from the remote-end.
Wait for a command
Select command Operate command Reset from the remote-end

Success
Reset from the Operation
Signal reception Operate logic Signal output
remote-end decision
in the IEC61850
Failed Do nothing
Operate command Reset from the local-end

Success
Operation
decision
from
the front panel
Failed Do nothing
Figure 4.6-10 Outline of Operate command ‘Reset’
Mapping required for Input point

Figure 4.6-11 illustrates the operation logic when an “Operate command Reset (Remote-Reset-
Control)” signal is applied to the GCNT01 function. The input-point “GCNT01_CMM_REQ” is
used for the reception of the “Operate command Reset (Remote-Reset-Control)”.
Output signal to BO
The GCNT01 function, in Figure 4.6-11, can provide a signal at the point “GCNT01_OK_CSC”,
when the GCNT01 function determines that the signal “Remote-Reset-Control” is true.
Input Operate logic in GCNT01 Output
GCNT01 function (Function ID: 540001) “GCNT01_EC_OK_CSC”

Command “Remote-Reset-Control” (540001 820E011E84)
Operate Cmd.
540001 700E016D09 GCNT01_CMM_REQ
& 1≥
Operate condition‡
Statics-counter
Figure 4.6-11 Operate ‘On’ from the remote-end ††

††Note: To identify the input and output signal-points of the GCNT02–32 logics, see Table
4.6-2 for the mapping points, Table 4.6-9 for the outputs.
(ii) Receiving “Operate command Reset” from the local-end

Figure 4.6-12 depicts the reception of the operate command ‘Reset’ from the local-end.
- 353 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Wait for a command
Select command Operate command Reset from the remote-end

Success
Reset from the Operation
remote-end decision
in the IEC61850
Failed Do nothing
Operate command Reset from the local-end

Success
Operation
decision
from
the front panel
Failed Do nothing
Figure 4.6-12 Outline of Operate command ‘Reset’
New counter value

Figure 4.6-13 shows that the user can set a new value for the counter using the statics sub-
menu†. The new value is applied into “Statics counter” point in Figure 4.6-11.
Counter
10:48 1/8
COUNT1 (No Assign) +
0
0
0
Figure 4.6-13 Counter menu in the statics sub-menu

†Note: For the operation, see Chapter User interface: Monitoring sub-menu.
Output signal to BO
The GCNT01 function can provide a signal at the point “GCNT01_OK_CSC”, when the new
value applied from the sub-menu is appropriate.
- 354 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(iii) Select condition

Similar to the select condition (see sec.4.6.2(ii)), the GCNT01 function has an operate-condition
logic. Figure 4.6-14 shows the operate-condition logic.
Logic '0' signal (Always Low (FALSE)) To operate logic

1≥ & Operate condition
DCB RCV OR


From Control hierarchy *4
540001 800E00ED5A GCNT00IN_TMP_51

&
From CMNCTRL
Serious error detection
SERI_ERR
[GCNT01-HMI]
On
[DPOS01-EN]
On
Figure 4.6-14 Operate condition logic for GCNT01

1–4Note: The signals and settings in Figure 4.6-14 are same as the signals shown in
Figure 4.6-7.
- 355 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(iv) Signal names and number

Table 4.6-9 PLC monitoring points (Output signal for BIO)
540001 820E011E84 GCNT01_EC_OK_CSCN GCNT01 execute command OK condition signal

…. …. ….
- 356 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

The user can operate the GCNT function over IEC 61850 communication following mapping
using GR-TIEMS. Note that the GCNT function is designed for the class of “Integer Status
Controller (ISC)” in the IEC 61850 standard for communication. The user should follow these
steps, each of which is discussed below:

The user will need to create a logical node (LN) for the GCNT01 function. Figure 4.6-15
exemplifies the editing of a LN; the LN “Integer Status controller (ISCSO)” is chosen for the
GCNT01 function. After the user has defined an object “ISCSO”, the GCNT01 logical node can
be saved with the name “GIGO” plus “LN Instance”. Create a definition of the object “ISCSO”
in the GGIO logical node. Either the SBO mode or the DIR mode can be chosen in the editing
for the LN.
SBO defined in LN
Figure 4.6-15 Defining “ISCSO” object in GIGO3302 logic node
- 357 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Defining SBO mode

Figure 4.6-16 exemplifies the GCNT01 logic node saved as “GIGO3302”; in the SBO mode, the
user should select the following items for the “GIGO3302$ISCSO” using GR-TIEMS:
 SBOw
 Oper
 Cancel
 Origin
 stSeld
 sboClass† (choice ”operate-once”)
 ctlmodel (choice ”SBOes or SBOns”)
Figure 4.6-16 LN editing screen for SBO mode (for example)
Defining DIR mode

Figure 4.6-17 exemplifies the GCNT01 logic node saved as save as “GIGO3302”; in the DIR
mode, the following three items should be selected using GR-TIEMS.
 Oper
 Origin
 ctlmodel (choice ”SBOes or SBOns” )
Figure 4.6-17 LN editing screen for DIR mode (for example)
- 358 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

The user should group the GCNT01 signals with regard to GOOSE and REPORT; the user
should map them for IEC61850 communication using GR-TIEMS (Figure 4.6-18 illustrates
how to map a signal); it indicates that the signals for the GCNT01 function are required to
map the IEC 61850 communications.
Table 4.6-10 Mapping signals required for GIGO3302 object in GCNT01 function
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO$origin orCat orCategory ST 540001300e011D23 GCNT01_CNT_ORCAT
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO$origin orIdent Octet64 ST 5400016A0e011FA7 GCNT01_CNT_ORIDENT
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO stVal INT32 ST 540001320e011D20 GCNT01_CNT_VAL
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO q Quality ST 3010013110041005 Qual_Val
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO t Timestamp ST 2003019010001006 SYS_TIME
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO stSeld BOOLEAN ST 540001000E011D91 GCNT01_TMP_01
Note: “Status (ST)” is defined in the function constraint (FC) of the IEC 61850.
Drag and drop
Figure 4.6-18 orCat attribute mapped into ISCSO object of GIGO3302

The GCNT01 function can receive three commands “select, operate, and cancel”. Thus, the user
should map the input-point “GCNT01_CMM_REQ”. Table 4.6-11 shows the input-point
“GCNT01_CMM_REQ” and the Object reference “Ctrl/GIGO3302$ISCSO1”; the user should map
the input-point to the Object reference having attributes CO and CF in FC†. Figure 4.6-19 shows
how to map a signal.
†Note: The attribute is defined in the IEC 61850; “CO” stands for “Control” in the
functional constraint (FC).
- 359 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Table 4.6-11 Mapping signals required for ISCSO object for GIGO3302
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO$Oper ctlVal INT32 CO
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO$Oper ctlNum INT8U CO
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO$Oper T Timestamp CO
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO$Oper Test BOOLEAN CO
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO$Oper Check Check CO 540001 700E016D09 GCNT01_CMM_REQ
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO$Oper$origin orCat orCategory CO
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO$Oper$origin orIdent Octet64 CO
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO ctlModel ctlModel CF
Ctrl/GGIO3302$ISCSO sboClass sboClass CF
Drag and drop
Check “Input”
Figure 4.6-19 Input-point mapped for GIGO3302
- 360 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
4.6.6 Setting
GCNT (Function ID: 540001)
Default setting
Setting device Range Units Contents Notes
value
G_CNT CNT1 GCNT01-EN Off / On Counter1 Enable Off
GCNT01-CNTS NA / On / Off / OnOff count status NA
Counter1 Sending Dead

GCNT01-SDB 0 to 999 none 0
Band
Return value at counter roll
GCNT01-CNTRV 0/1 0
up
GCNT01-CNTMAX 9 to 2147483647 none counter value maximum 999999
GCNT01-HMI Off/On Counter1 for HMI Off
CNT2 GCNT02-EN Off / On Counter2 Enable Off
GCNT02-CNTS NA / On / Off / OnOff count status NA
Counter2 Sending Dead

GCNT02-SDB 0 to 999 none 0
Band
GCNT02-CNTRV 0/1 0
up
GCNT02-CNTMAX 9 to 2147483647 none counter value maximum 999999
GCNT02-HMI Off/On Counter2 for HMI Off
…… ………………….. ………………….. ………………….. …………………..
CNTxx GCNTxx-EN Off / On Counter xx Enable Off
GCNTxx-CNTS NA / On / Off / OnOff count status NA
Counter xx Sending Dead

GCNTxx-SDB 0 to 999 none 0
Band
GCNTxx-CNTRV 0/1 0
up
GCNTxx-CNTMAX 9 to 2147483647 none counter value maximum 999999
GCNTxx-HMI Off/On Counter xx for HMI Off
Note: The number of counters in the GCNT depends on IED model. We omit the setting
tables of GCNT03 etc. because the setting items are the same except the device
number.
- 361 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

 Connection points in PLC logics in GCNT01
800E00ED5A GCNT00IN_TMP_51 GCNT00IN_TMP_51
800E01EDE0 GCNT01_PLC_SGNL GCNT01 plc signal
 Signal monitoring points in GCNT01

000E001F41 GCNT00_CCTRL_COUNTER GCNT00 cmnctrl counter correction summarize
800E001D58 GCNT00_CH_EC_LCD GCNT00 count change execute command by LCD
800E001D5E GCNT00_CH_EC_OWS GCNT00 count change execute command by OWS(HMI)
800E001D5F GCNT00_CH_EC_RCC GCNT00 count change execute command by RCC
800E001D60 GCNT00_CH_EC_RMT GCNT00 count change execute command by Remote
800E001D54 GCNT00_CH_SC_LCD GCNT00 count change select command by LCD
800E001D5B GCNT00_CH_SC_OWS GCNT00 count change select command by OWS(HMI)
800E001D5C GCNT00_CH_SC_RCC GCNT00 count change select command by RCC
800E001D5D GCNT00_CH_SC_RMT GCNT00 count change select command by Remote
840E011E95 GCNT01_CC_SSCN GCNT01 cancel success signal
310E011D21 GCNT01_CNT_QLT GCNT01 count quality
320E011D20 GCNT01_CNT_VAL GCNT01 count value
000E011F42 GCNT01_CORR_INS GCNT01 correction instruction
890E011EA2 GCNT01_CTR_SGUCN GCNT01 control logic stage(under selection)
830E011E8B GCNT01_EC_F_CSCN GCNT01 execute command fail condition signal
820E011E84 GCNT01_EC_OK_CSCN GCNT01 execute command OK condition signal
8A0E011E76 GCNT01_SLD_CSCN GCNT01 selected condition signal
8B0E011E7B GCNT01_SLF_CSCN GCNT01 select fail condition signal
000E011D91 GCNT01_TMP_01 GCNT01 count change selected signal(stSeld) for SAS
 Mapping point in GCNT01

700E016D09 GCNT01_CMM_REQ GCNT01 control request(Mapping data)
Note: In the table above, the user will only find Element IDs and their names for the 1st
device, but a 2nd and other devices are also provided in the GCNT function. We
have omitted the Element IDs and their names for the other devices to improve
readability. Use the rule described below when the user wishes to obtain the
Element IDs and their names for the other devices.
Rule: The same types of signal monitoring points are provided in every device;
hence, the user can find the same ones for all of the other devices. For
example, when the user wishes to find the “GCNT01_CTR_SGUCN” point
for the 2nd device, use the description of “GCNT02_CTR_SGUCN” in place
- 362 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
of “GCNT01_CTR_SGUCN”. The user can obtain the ID value of

“GCNT02_CTR_SGUCN” by using the following steps:
Step 1 Find the element ID for GCNT01_CTR_SGUCN (i.e.,
“890E011EA2”)
Step 2 Identify the number at the fifth digit from the ID. (i.e., “1”)
Step 3 Choose a new device number. (i.e., pick the number “2” for
the 2nd device)
Step 4 Replace the number that occurs at the fifth digit with the
new device number. (i.e., get new ID “890E021EA2” of
“GCNT02_CTR_SGUCN”) The ID is expressed in
hexadecimal notation. Thus, the user must change the
device number from decimal notation to hexadecimal
notation.
- 363 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
5 Technical Description
Case structure and slot layout 368 CPU 393
Type using compression terminals 368
-1/1 size case 368 Date and time 450
-1/2 size case 373 -Time synchronization 451
-3/4 size case 371 -DST(Summer time) 456
Type using ring terminals 375 -Time zone 455
-1/1 size case 375
-1/2 size case 380 Function keys with LEDs 437
-3/4 size case 378
Group setting for relays 459
Binary IO module (BI, BO, and BIO) 400
-Input circuits 402 LED indicators 437
-Input features 401
-Output circuits 413 Monitoring jacks 447
-Output features 411
-BI1A module 419 Operation keys 449
-BI2A module 419
-BI3A module 419 Power supply module (PWS) 433
-BO1A module 420
-BO2A module 420 Transformer module for AC (VCT) 382
-BIO1A module 421 -VCT49B terminals 383
-BIO2A module 421 -VCT44B terminals 384
-BIO3A module 422 -VCT44B and VCT48B terminals 385
-Ratio 389
Communication modules 394 -Rated current 391
-100Base-TX/1000Base-T 394
-100Base-FX 394
-1000Base-LX 394
-RS485 394
-Fiber optic 394
-IRIG-B000 394
- 364 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
The IED hardware consists of a case, modules, and a human machine interface (HMI). For
instance, Figure 5-1shows the structure of the GR-series IED which is mounted in 3/4×19” rack.
The user can find that the IED consists of a transformer module (VCT), a signal processing
and communication module (CPU), binary input and output modules (BI, BI, and BIO, and a
power supply module (PWS), which can be mounted in an order from left to right. The IED
case, which is designed for rack mount as shown in Figure 5-1, has two flanges attached on the
IED sides. Figure 5-2 shows hardware block diagram. The module structure depends on the
GR-series models, IED cases, and the customer specification. Therefore, the user should check
and confirm the actual modules with the ordering number in advance.
(The description of IED case helps to understand the IED structure and its functions.
Based on slot reference, terminal block, slot reference, GR-Series selects different cases. VCT,
CPU, BI, BO and BIO modules, PWS and HMI are described sequentially in this chapter. The
user is required to understand information provided in this chapter when wiring between the
IED and external devices and setting of the IED are performed. Hence, the user is required to
read this chapter thoroughly.)
BI, BO, and BIO

VCT CPU PWS
Figure 5-1 Modules in 3/4 19” rack’s chassis (Front view, removed the front panel)
- 365 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
VCT CPU
Filter CPM2 LAN I/F

A/D Tele-
I CT×n communication
LAN I/F system
V VT×m
BO
Auxiliary
relay Binary output
×18
HMI
BI
LCD/MIMIC
Photo coupler Binary input
×18
LEDs
Operation keys BIO

Auxiliary
relay Binary output
Monitoring jacks ×18
Function Key
Photo coupler Binary input

USB ×18
I/F
Local PC
Power PWS
Figure 5-2 Hardware Block Diagram (for example)
- 366 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
IED case and module slot

The IED case structure falls into two types: ‘Type using compression terminals’ and ‘Type using
ring terminals’. The former is designed with ‘Compression plug type terminal block’ used at
BIO and PWS modules. The latter is designed with ‘Ring type terminal block’. Figure 5.1-1
illustrates the difference of them.
PWS BIOs PWS BIOs

VCT VCT
Type using compression terminals Type using ring terminals
Compression plug type terminal Ring type terminal
Figure 5.1-1 Terminal type and case structure (1/2 size case, back view)
- 367 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
5.1.1 Type using compression terminals

(i) 1/1 size case
Figure 5.1-2 (for single VCT) and Figure 5.1-3 (for dual VCTs) show diagrams of the 1/1 size
case constructed with type using compression terminals: (a) IED internal structure seen from
the front, (b) Terminal block arrangement seen from the rear, and (c) schematic diagram.
Viewing from the front side (Figure 5.1-2 or Figure 5.1-3.a)

Slots are provided for mounting modules. A transformer module (VCT), a signal processing and
communication module (CPU), and a power supply module (PWS) are mounted at predefined
locations in the case. Binary IO modules (BI, BO, and BIO) are placed in slots (IO#1 to IO#8),
these slot locations are determined before factory shipment. For detailed information on slot
locations, module types and their connections for all IEDs, see external connection figures.
(See Appendix: Typical external connection).
Viewing from the rear side (Figure 5.1-2 or Figure 5.1-3.b)

The group of terminal blocks viewed from the rear is shown. With respect to BIs, BOs, and
BIOs, their terminal blocks are designed with upper terminal and lower one and they are
labeled with alpha-numeric reference “T1”, “T2” and so on. The upper and lower terminals are
provided in the form of one terminal block for respective BIs, BOs, or BIOs. Terminal screw
numbers for each terminal block relate to individual binary circuits. The user should check
respective configuration circuit (see section 5.4 or later). Each slot for the BIOs is identified
with its alpha-numeric reference (or slot reference) on an IED case. For example, the user can
identify that slot “IO#1” is linked with alpha-numeric reference “T1”.
PWS terminal block is placed on the far left side; hence, the user finds it with alpha-
numeric reference “T9”, and that is discussed later (see section 5.5).
Communication modules, which are placed between VCT and BIOs, are labeled with “C11”
to “C15”. Those are provided for LAN, IEC61850 communication, etc.
Schematic figure (Figure 5.1-2 or Figure 5.1-3.c)

A schematic figure illustrates the location of slots and terminals: VCT, BIOs, and PWS. It is
useful when the user need to set BIO modules using their setting tables (see section 5.4).
- 368 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
a. View from front side
T9 T8 T7 T6 T5 T4 T3 T2 T1 VC1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
C11
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 C12
11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11
12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13
14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14
15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15
16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16
17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17
18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18
19
20
19
20
19
20
19
20
19
20
19
20
19
20
19
20
19
20
C13
21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21
22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22
23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23
24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24
25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 C14
26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26
27 27 27 27 27 27 27 27 27
28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28
29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29
30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30
31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31
32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32
33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33
34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 C15 FG1
35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35
36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36
37 37 37 37 37 37 37 37 37
38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38
E
39 39 39 39 39 39 39 39 39
40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40
FG FGE FGD FGC FGB FGA
b. View from rear side
T9 T8 T7 T6 T5 T4 T3 T2 T1 VC1
C11
C12
C13
C14
C15
●FG ●FGE ●FGD ●FGC ●FGB ●FGA ●FG1 ●E
c. Schematic diagram
Figure 5.1-2 Type using compression terminals (1/1 size case)
- 369 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
T9 T8 T7 T6 T5 T4 T3 T2 T1 VC1 VC2
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
C11
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8
9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 C12
11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11
12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12
13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13 13
14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 14
15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15
16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16
17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17 17
18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18
19
20
19
20
19
20
19
20
19
20
19
20
19
20
19
20
19
20
C13
21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21
22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22 22
23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23
24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24
25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 C14
26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26
27 27 27 27 27 27 27 27 27
28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28 28
29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29 29
30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30
31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31
32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32
33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33
34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 34 C15 FG1 FG2
35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35
36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36
37 37 37 37 37 37 37 37 37
38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38 38
E
39 39 39 39 39 39 39 39 39
40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40
FG FGE FGD FGC FGB FGA
T9 T8 T7 T6 T5 T4 T3 T2 T1 VC1 VC2
C11
C12
C13
C14
C15
●FG ●FGE ●FGD ●FGC ●FGB ●FGA ●FG1 ●FG2 ●E
Figure 5.1-3 Type using compression terminals (1/1 size case, dual VCTs)
- 370 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(ii) 3/4 size case

Figure 5.1-4 shows diagrams of the 3/4 size case constructed with type using type using
compression terminals: (a) IED internal structure seen from the front, (b) Terminal block
arrangement seen from the rear, and (c) schematic diagram. PWS terminal blocks is placed at
the far left side, which is located at alpha-numeric reference “T7”.
- 371 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
T7 T6 T5 T4 T3 T2 T1 VC1
C11
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8 8 8 8
9 9 9 9 9 9 9
10 10 10 10 10 10 10
11 11 11 11 11 11 11 C12
12 12 12 12 12 12 12
13 13 13 13 13 13 13
14 14 14 14 14 14 14
15 15 15 15 15 15 15
16 16 16 16 16 16 16
17 17 17 17 17 17 17
18 18 18 18 18 18 18
19
20
19
20
19
20
19
20
19
20
19
20
19
20
C13
21 21 21 21 21 21 21
22 22 22 22 22 22 22
23 23 23 23 23 23 23
24 24 24 24 24 24 24
C14
25 25 25 25 25 25 25
26 26 26 26 26 26 26
27 27 27 27 27 27 27
28 28 28 28 28 28 28
29 29 29 29 29 29 29
30 30 30 30 30 30 30
31 31 31 31 31 31 31
32 32 32 32 32 32 32
33 33 33 33 33 33 33
FG1
C15
34 34 34 34 34 34 34
35 35 35 35 35 35 35
36 36 36 36 36 36 36
37 37 37 37 37 37 37
38 38 38 38 38 38 38
E
39 39 39 39 39 39 39
40 40 40 40 40 40 40
FG FGD FGC FGB FGA
T7 T6 T5 T4 T3 T2 T1 VC1
C11
C12
C13
C14
C15
c. Schematic figure
- 372 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(iii) 1/2 size case

Figure 5.1-5 shows diagrams of the 1/2 size case constructed with type using compression
terminals: (a) IED internal structure seen from the front, (b) Terminal block arrangement seen
from the rear, and (c) schematic diagram. PWS terminal blocks is placed at the far left side,
which is located at alpha-numeric reference “T4”.
- 373 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

T4 T3 T2 T1 VC1
1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2 C11
3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8
9 9 9 9
10 10 10 10
11 11 11 11 C12
12 12 12 12
13 13 13 13
14 14 14 14
15 15 15 15
16 16 16 16
17 17 17 17
18 18 18 18
C13
19 19 19 19
20 20 20 20
21 21 21 21
22 22 22 22
23 23 23 23
24 24 24 24
C14
25 25 25 25
26 26 26 26
27 27 27 27
28 28 28 28
29 29 29 29
30 30 30 30
31 31 31 31
32 32 32 32
33 33 33 33
FG1
C15
34 34 34 34
35 35 35 35
E
36 36 36 36
37 37 37 37
38 38 38 38
39 39 39 39
40 40 40 40
FG FGB FGA
T4 T3 T2 T1 VC1
C11
C12
C13
C14
C15
- 374 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
5.1.2 Type using ring terminals

(i) 1/1 size case
Figure 5.1-6(for single VCT) and Figure 5.1-7 (for dual VCTs) show diagrams of the 1/1 size
case constructed with type using ring terminals: (a) IED internal structure seen from the front,
(b) Terminal block arrangement seen from the rear, and (c) schematic diagram.
Viewing from the front side (Figure 5.1-6 and Figure 5.1-7.a)
Slots are provided for mounting modules. A transformer module (VCT), a signal processing and
communication module (CPU), and a power supply module (PWS) are mounted at predefined
locations in the case. Binary IO modules (BI, BO, and BIO) are placed in slots (IO#1, IO#2, …),
these slot locations are determined before factory shipment. For detailed information on slot
locations, module types and their connections for all IEDs, see external connection figures. (See
Appendix: Typical external connection).
Viewing from the rear side (Figure 5.1-6 and Figure 5.1-7.b)
The terminal blocks for the case viewed from the rear is shown. They are labeled with alpha-
numeric reference “T1”, “T2” and so on. Terminal screw numbers relate to circuits individually,
and the user has to check their circuits (see section 5.4 or later). A BIO module is identified by
its alpha-numeric reference (or slot reference) on the IED case. For example, the user can
identify that slot “IO#1” is linked with alpha-numeric reference “T1”.
PWS terminal block is placed on the far left side; hence, the user finds it with alpha-
numeric reference “T8” when the VCT is mounted in the case. That circuit is discussed later
(see section 5.5)
Communication modules, which are between VCT and BIOs, are labeled with “C11” to
“C15”. Those are used for LAN, IEC61850 communication, etc.
Schematic figure (Figure 5.1-6 and Figure 5.1-7.c)

A schematic figure illustrates the location of slots and terminals: VCT, BIOs, and PWS. The
figure is useful when the user need to set BIO modules using their setting tables (see section
5.4).
- 375 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
T8 T7 T6 T5 T4 T3 T2 T1 VC1
C11
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
1 2
3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4
3 4
5 6 5 6 5 6 5 6 5 6 5 6 5 6
C12
5 6
7 8 7 8 7 8 7 8 7 8 7 8 7 8
7 8
9 10 9 10 9 10 9 10 9 10 9 10 9 10
9 10
11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12 11 12
11 12
13 14 13 14 13 14 13 14 13 14 13 14 13 14
13 14
15 16 15 16 15 16 15 16 15 16 15 16 15 16
C13
15 16
17 18 17 18 17 18 17 18 17 18 17 18 17 18
17 18
21 22 21 22 21 22 21 22 21 22 21 22 21 22
21 22
23 24 23 24 23 24 23 24 23 24 23 24 23 24
23 24
25 25 25 25 25 25 25
C14
26 26 26 26 26 26 26
25 26
27 28 27 28 27 28 27 28 27 28 27 28 27 28
27 28
29 30 29 30 29 30 29 30 29 30 29 30 29 30
29 30
31 32 31 32 31 32 31 32 31 32 31 32 31 32
31 32
33 34 33 34 33 34 33 34 33 34 33 34 33 34
FG1
C15
33 34
35 36 35 36 35 36 35 36 35 36 35 36 35 36
E
35 36
37 38 37 38 37 38 37 38 37 38 37 38 37 38
38
FG
FG FGC FGB FGA
T8 T7 T6 T5 T4 T3 T2 T1 VC1
C11
C12
C13
C14
C15
●FG ●FGC ●FGB ●FGA ●FG1 ●E
Figure 5.1-6 Type using ring terminals (1/1 size case)
- 376 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
T6 T5 T4 T3 T2 T1 VC1 VC2
C11
1 2 1 2 1 1 2
1
3 4 3 4 3 3 4
3
5 6 5 6 5 5 6
5
7 8 7 8 7 7 8
C12
7
9 10 9 10 9 9 10
9
11 12 11 12 11 11 12
11
13 14 13 14 13 13 14
13
15 15 15 15
C13
16 16 16
15
17 18 17 18 17 17 18
17
21 22 21 22 21 21 22
21
23 24 23 24 23 23 24
23
25 26 25 26 25 25 26
25
27 28 27 28 27 27 28 C14
27
29 30 29 30 29 29 30
29
31 32 31 32 31 31 32
31
33 34 33 34 33 33 34
33
35 35 36 35 35
FG1 FG2
36 36
C15
E
35
37 38 37 38 37 37 38
FG
FG FGB FGA
C11
C12
C13
C14
C15
●FG ●FGB ●FGA ●FG1 ●FG2 ●E
Figure 5.1-7 Type using ring terminals (1/1 size case, dual VCTs)
- 377 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(ii) 3/4 size case

Figure 5.1-4 shows diagrams of the 3/4size case constructed with type using ring terminals: (a)
IED internal structure seen from the front, (b) Terminal block arrangement seen from the rear,
and (c) schematic diagram. PWS terminal block is placed on the far left side, which is located
at alpha-numeric reference “T5”.
- 378 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
T5 T4 T3 T2 T1 VC1
C11
1
2
3
4
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
5
2 6
1
3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4
7
4 8
C12
3
5 6 5 6 5 6 5 6
9
6 10
5
7 8 7 8 7 8 7 8
11
8 12
7
9 10 9 10 9 10 9 13 10
10 14
9
11 12 11 12 11 12 11 15 12
12 16
11
13 14 13 14 13 14 13 17 14
13
14
15 16 15 16 15 16 15
18
19 16 C13
16 20
15
17 18 17 18 17 18 17 18
18
17
21 22 21 22 21 22 21 22
22
21
23 24 23 24 23 24 23 24
24
23
25 26 25 26 25 26 25 26
26
C14
25
27 28 27 28 27 28 27 28
28
27
29 30 29 30 29 30 29 30
30
29
31 32 31 32 31 32 31 32
32
31
33 34 33 34 33 34 33 34
33
34
35 36 35 36 35 36 35 36 C15 FG1
36
35
37 38 37 38 37 38 37 38
E
38
FG
FG FGB FGA
T5 T4 T3 T2 T1 VC1
C11
C12
C13
C14
C15
c. Schematic figure
- 379 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(iii) 1/2 size case

Figure 5.1-5 shows diagrams of the 1/2 size case with type using ring terminals: (a) IED
internal structure seen from the front, (b) Terminal block arrangement seen from the rear, and
(c) schematic diagram. PWS terminal block is placed on the far left side, which is located at
alpha-numeric reference “T2”.
- 380 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
T3 T2 T1 VC1
C11
1 2 1 2
1
2
3 4 3 4
3
4
5 6 5 6
C12
5
6
7 8 7 8
7
8
9 10 9 10
9
10
11 12 11 12
11
12
13 14 13 14
13
14
15 16 15 16 C13
15
16
17 18 17 18
17
18
21 22 21 22
21
22
23 24 23 24
23
24
25 26 25 26
25
26 C14
27 28 27 28
27
28
29 30 29 30
29
30
31 32 31 32
31
32
33 34 33 34
33
34 FG1
C15
35 36 35 36
35
36
37 38 37 38
E
38
FG
FG FGB FGA
T3 T2 T1 VC1
C11
C12
C13
C14
C15
- 381 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Transformer module for AC analog input (VCT)

The transformer module (VCT) is used to acquire the power system quantities in the IED. A
safety feature is available such that all of the VCT current inputs are shorted when a VCT
module is removed from the IED case. Note also that all of the voltage inputs are disconnected.
However, the user should make short circuit all AC current inputs and disconnect all AC
voltage inputs.
Note: Respective input signals of the “AC analog input (VCT)” are signified as “Channel
numbers (Ch*)” when setting the ratio and others are carried out, as shown in the
figure below. For more information, see Section Setting VCT ratio. The term “AI#”
is identical to the slot location terms ‘VC1’ or ‘VC2’, which are discussed in the
preceding section.
AC Analog Input AI#1 AI#1
10:48 1/2 10:48 1/12 10:48 1/2
AI#1 > CH1 > AI1_Ch1_Ratio +
AI#2 > CH2 > 2000
CH3 > AI1_Ch1_Rating +
CH4 > DEP
CH5 >
CH6 >
Figure 5.2-1 Setting of AC analog input by operating IED screen
Figure 5.2-2 Setting sample of AC analog input (GR-TIEMS)
Note: The screens above are samples. For more information about the operaion on the
LCD screen, see chapter User interface..
- 382 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
5.2.1 Single VCT in Model3 (VCT49B at VC1)

VCT49B operates in the IED (Model3), which is designed to protect three-winding transformer
by monitoring single three-phase voltage and triple three-phase currents with two neutral
currents.
Voltages VCT49B
Va Va-VT
Jumper
Vb Vb-VT Terminal Input Type of AC analog
Screw position input
Vc Vc-VT Number signal(3) input
(4)
channel(5)
Currents from 1st winding
Ia 1 2 Voltage NA AI1_Ch1
Ia-1CT Va(1)
Ib
Ib-1CT
3 4 Vb(1) Voltage NA AI1_Ch2
Ic 5 6 Vc(1) Voltage NA AI1_Ch3

Ic-1CT
Residual current 7 8 Ia-1CT(2) Current W4 AI1_Ch4
Currents from 2nd winding
Ia
9 10 Ib-1CT(2) Current W5 AI1_Ch5
Ia-2CT
11 12 Ic-1CT(2) Current W6 AI1_Ch6
Ib
Ib-2CT
13 14 Ia-2CT(2) Current W7 AI1_Ch7
Ic
Ic-2CT 15 16 Ib-2CT(2) Current W8 AI1_Ch8
Residual current
Currents from 3rd CTs

Ia 19 20 Current W10 AI1_Ch10
Ia-3CT Ia-3CT(2)
Ib
Ib-3CT
Ic 23 24 Ic-3CT(2) Current W12 AI1_Ch12

Ic-3CT
Residual current 25 26 In-1NCT(3) Current W13 AI1_Ch13
Neutral currents from NCTs 27 28 In-2NCT(3) Current W14 AI1_Ch14
IN
In-1NCT
IN
In-2NCT
Figure 5.2-3 Transformer module at VC1 (VCT49B)

(1)Note: The location for voltages can be chosen using the setting described in
Chapter Transformer replica functions: VT connection.
(2)Note: The user can select the target winding for input signals, see Chapter
Transformer replica functions: CT connection in three-phase.
(3)Note: The user can select the target NCT for natural currents, see Chapter
Transformer replica functions: CT connection in neutral.
(4)Note: Inserting a jumper on the VCT is carried out to operate for 5A rated current.
We shall discuss the rated current in later section Selection of rated current.
(5)Note: The term ‘Channel number (Ch)’ is used for the identification and the
operation of the VCT when the user sets a VCT ratio. We shall discuss later
in section Setting VCT ratio.
- 383 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
5.2.2 Single VCT in Model4 (VCT44B at VC1)

VCT44B operates in the IED (Model4), which is designed to protect three-winding transformer
by monitoring single three-phase voltage and quadruplet three-phase currents.
The representative voltage in the VCT 44B
transformer
V V
Jumper
Terminal Input Type of AC analog
Currents from 1st CTs
Ia
Ia-1CT Number signal input channel(4)
(3)
Ib
Ib-1CT
1 2 V(1) Voltage NA AI1_Ch1
Ic
Ic-1CT 3 4
Residual current – – – –
Currents from 2nd CTs

Ia 7 8 W4 AI1_Ch4
Ia-2CT Ib-1CT(2) Current
Ib
Ib-2CT
Ic 11 12 Ia-2CT(2) Current W6 AI1_Ch6

Ic-2CT
Residual current 13 14 Ib-2CT(2) Current W7 AI1_Ch7
Currents from 3rd CTs 15 16 Ic-2CT(2) Current W8 AI1_Ch8
Ia
Ia-3CT 17 18 W9 AI1_Ch9
Ia-3CT(2) Current
Ib
Ib-3CT 19 20 Ib-3CT(2) Current W10 AI1_Ch10
Ic
Ic-3CT 21 22 Ic-3CT(2) Current W11 AI1_Ch11
Residual current
Currents from 4th CTs
Ia 25 26 Ib-4CT(2) Current W13 AI1_Ch13
Ia-4CT
Ib
Ib-4CT
Ic
Ic-4CT
Residual current

(1)Note: The representative voltage is chosen using the setting described in Chapter
Transformer replica functions: VT connection.
- 384 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
5.2.3 Double VCTs in Model5 (VCT44B &48B at VC1&VC2)

VCT44B and VCT48B are for the IED (Model5), which is designed to protect three-winding
transformer by monitoring quadruplet three-phases voltages and quadruplet three-phases
currents with three neutral currents. The figure blow illustrates the VCT44B mounted at the
VCT#1 slot references.
VCT44B
(Not used)
Jumper
Terminal Input Type of AC analog
Currents from 1st winding
Ia
Ia-1CT Number signal input channel(4)
(3)
Ib
Ib-1CT
1 2 NA NA NA NA
Ic
Ic-1CT 3 4
Residual current – – – –
Currents from 2nd winding

Ia 7 8 W4 AI1_Ch4
Ia-2CT Ib-1CT(1) Current
Ib
Ib-2CT
Ic 11 12 Ia-2CT(1) Current W6 AI1_Ch6

Ic-2CT
Residual current 13 14 Ib-2CT(1) Current W7 AI1_Ch7
Currents from 3rd winding 15 16 Ic-2CT(1) Current W8 AI1_Ch8
Ia
Ia-3CT 17 18 W9 AI1_Ch9
Ia-3CT(1) Current
Ib
Ib-3CT 19 20 Ib-3CT(1) Current W10 AI1_Ch10
Ic
Ic-3CT 21 22 Ic-3CT(1) Current W11 AI1_Ch11
Residual current
23 24 In-1NCT(2) Current W12 AI1_Ch12
Neutral currents from NCTs
IN 25 26 In-2NCT(2) Current W13 AI1_Ch13
In-1NCT
IN 27 28 In-3NCT(2) Current W14 AI1_Ch14

In-2NCT
IN
In-3NCT

(2)Note: The user can select the target NCT for natural currents, see Chapter
Transformer replica functions: CT connection in neutral.
- 385 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
We can find that the VCT48B mounted at another VCT#2 slot references
Voltages at 1st location VCT48B
Va Va-1VT
AC
Jumper
Vb Vb-1VT Terminal Input Type of analog
Vc-1VT
Vc
Number signal input channel
(3)
(4)
Voltages at 2nd location
Va Va-2VT 1 2 Va-1VT(1) Voltage NA AI2_Ch1
Vb Vb-2VT 3 4 Vb-1VT(1) Voltage NA AI2_Ch2
Vc-2VT
5 6 Vc-1VT(1) Voltage NA AI2_Ch3
Vc
7 8 – – – –
9 10 Va-2VT(1) Voltage NA AI2_Ch5
11 12 Vb-2VT(1) Voltage NA AI2_Ch6
Currents from 4th winding 13 14 Vc-2VT(1) Voltage NA AI2_Ch7
Ia
Ia-4CT
15 16 – – – –
Ib
Ib-4CT 17 18 Ia-4CT(2) Current W9 AI2_Ch9
Ic
Ic-4CT 19 20 Ib-4CT(2) Current W10 AI2_Ch10
Residual current
Currents from 5th winding

Ia
Ia-5CT 23 24 Ia-5CT(2) Current W12 AI2_Ch12
Ib
Ib-5CT
Ic
Ic-5CT
Residual current

(1)Note: The representative voltage is chosen using setting described in Chapter
Transformer replica functions: VT connection.
- 386 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
5.2.4 Constitution of VCT

Figure 5.2-7 shows a VCT terminal block together with its schematic diagram1; the same
terminal screw numbers are shown on both the left and the right figures. The user should note
that the last screw No2 and FG terminal are connected with a short-wire by default.
1Note: When the size of the IED case is 1/1, two alpha-numeric references (VC1 and VC2)
and two slot references (VCT#1 and VCT#2) are available.
2Note: For the standard VCT, the number of the last terminal screw is “No. 30”.
- 387 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
VC1
VC1
VCT Alpha-
numeric Module type
reference
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Short-bar1 18
19
20
21
22
FG1 23
24
Frame ground 25
terminal on the case
26
27
28
29
30
1
Short-bar
FG1
VC1 terminal Schematic diagram
Figure 5.2-7 VC1 terminals2 (Rear view)

1Note: Short-wire between screw 30 and FG is connected by the manufacturer.
2Note: The figure is just drawn for general instruction about VCT structure. VCT alpha-
numeric reference will depend on the ordering model.
3Note: “VC2” is available for the 1/1 case.
- 388 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
5.2.5 Setting VCT ratio

As input sources are transformed with various VTs and CTs in the power system, the user shall
set each VT or CT ratio at each VCT terminal.
(i) Setting a ratio for the VT

When the VT quantity applied at the VCT terminal, a ratio of the primary voltage to the
secondary voltage should be set. A voltage is applied at the first terminal (Ch1) at VC1 alpha-
numeric reference, the user should set the ratio for the setting [AI1_Ch1_Ratio]. For example,
the user is required to set a value ‘3636’ for the [AI1_Ch1_Ratio] when the primary is 400kV
and the secondary is 110V (i.e., 400kV/110V=3636). The channel position on the VCT is
discussed in the preceding section VCT.
(ii) Setting a ratio for the CT

When the CT quantity flows into the VCT terminal, a ratio of the primary current to the
secondary current should be set. For example, the user is required to set a value ‘4000’ for the
[AI1_Ch1_Ratio] when the primary is 4000A and the secondary is 1A (i.e., 4000/1=4000).
- 389 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(iii) Setting list

Setting of AC analog input(Function ID: 200201/200202)
Unit Default setting
s value
VC1 AI1_Ch1_Ratio 1.000 to 20,000.000 – For AC analog input ch#1 at VCT#1 1.000
alpha-numeric AI1_Ch2_Ratio 1.000 to 20,000.000 – For AC analog input ch#2 at VCT#1 1.000
reference AI1_Ch3_Ratio 1.000 to 20,000.000 – For AC analog input ch#3 at VCT#1 1.000
AI1_Ch4_Ratio 1.000 to 20,000.000 – For AC analog input ch#4 at VCT#1 1.000
VC2 AI2_Ch1_Ratio 1.000 to 20,000.000 – For AC analog input ch#1 at VCT#2 1.000
alpha-numeric AI2_Ch2_Ratio 1.000 to 20,000.000 – For AC analog input ch#2 at VCT#2 1.000
reference AI2_Ch3_Ratio 1.000 to 20,000.000 – For AC analog input ch#3 at VCT#2 1.000
†Note: For more information on the IED operation, see Chapter User interface: AC
analog input.
‡Note:The number of AC analog input channels depends on the configuration of the VCT
type and the VCT slot. Thereby, the user has to set the value of the VCT ratio
corresponding to a specific auxiliary VT/CT.
- 390 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
5.2.6 Selection of rated current

The rated current of the auxiliary CT in the VCT module is pre-configured when the IED is
shipped from the manufacturer; the value of the rated current is set uniquely either 1 ampere
or 5 ampere for all auxiliary CTs. However, the user can independently change the value of the
rated current from the pre-configured rated current. The sections that follow explain how the
value of rated current can be individually changed; it is important that the user shall carry out
and confirm that both jumper and screen operations have been made correctly.
(i) Jumper switching

Each of the auxiliary CTs has a Jumper, and the user can select between a rated current of 1
ampere (1A) and a rated current of 5 ampere (5A) using the Jumpers. The user can select the
rated current by following the steps below with reference to Figure 5.2-8:
Step1: Open the IED front panel.
Step2: Remove the receptacle from the header when the rating requirement is for 1A.
When a rating of 5A is required, insert the receptacle into the header.
The locations of the Jumpers are designated with the marks “W1” to “W14”, which are
printed on the circuit board of the VCT. These “W*” marks correspond to the AC analog input
channel numbers discussed previously.
Front Rear
Tr.1 Tr.2
W1
W2
W3 Tr.3 Tr.4
Location of Jumpers
W4
Connector
Jumpers
W5
Tr.5 Tr.6
W6
W7
W8
W9 Tr.7 Tr.8
W10
W11
W12 Tr.9
W13 Tr.10
W14
Tr.11
Tr.12 Tr.13 Tr.14
Layout of VCT components VCT Photograph
Setting for 5 A rating Setting for 1 A rating

receptacle
header header
Figure 5.2-8 Jumpers and their locations
- 391 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(ii) IED screen operation

The user should keep in mind that the rated current will be changed† following jumper
switching. The table below shows the setting items for each AC analog input channel. For
example, when the user wishes to change the rated current on AC analog input channel#3 at
VC1 slot, for example if the user wishes to change the rated current to 1 ampere from 5 ampere,
the user should apply the setting [AI1_Ch2_Rating] 1A. Term “DEP” in the table represents a
pre-configured rated current set by the manufacturer; the pre-configured rated current is
identical to the AC rating determined in accordance with the order from the customer. Thereby,
the user should be careful not to change other setting items, which the user does not wish to
alter from the original requirements specified in the customer order.
Setting of AC analog input(Function ID: 200201/200202)
U Default setting
Range
n value
Setting item i Contents Notes
1A 5A 1A 5A
t
rating rating rating rating
s
VC1 AI1_Ch1_Rating DEP / 1A / 5A – For AC analog input ch#1 at VCT#1 DEP
alpha-numeric AI1_Ch2_Rating DEP / 1A / 5A – For AC analog input ch#2 at VCT#1 DEP
references AI1_Ch3_Rating DEP / 1A / 5A – For AC analog input ch#3 at VCT#1 DEP
AI1_Ch4_Rating DEP / 1A / 5A – For AC analog input ch#4 at VCT#1 DEP
VC2 AI2_Ch1_Rating DEP / 1A / 5A – For AC analog input ch#1 at VCT#2 DEP
alpha-numeric AI2_Ch2_Rating DEP / 1A / 5A – For AC analog input ch#2 at VCT#2 DEP
references AI2_Ch3_Rating DEP / 1A / 5A – For AC analog input ch#3 at VCT#2 DEP
†Note: Number of auxiliary CTs depends on the configuration of the VCT type and the
VCT slot. Thereby, the user has to set the rating corresponding to a specific
auxiliary CT. For more information, see Chapter User interface: AC analog input.
- 392 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Signal processing and communication module (CPU)

A signal-processing and communication module (CPU) are made up of a main circuit board for
processing (CPM2) and ‘piggyback’ circuit boards for communication modules (COM#1 to
COM#5). These circuit boards are used for LAN, time synchronization and others. These circuit
boards are mounted on CPU using connectors on their printed circuit board (PCB). Figure 5.3-1
shows an example of full implementation of these PCBs.
CPU
CPM2
COM#1
CPU COM#2
COM#3
COM#4
COM#5
Figure 5.3-1 Communication modules (COM#1 to COM#5) on CPU

Note: The implementation of the above may vary according to circumstances..
5.3.1 Signal processing

The operation of relay and control applications are achieved with the CPU on the CPM2 board.
The CPU board has SDRAM, MRAM, and NOR-Flash; the NOR-Flash is used to store setting
data and recording data; the MRAM is used to store several counter values, etc. Both are of
non-volatile memory so that the stored data will be not be erased if the power is cut off.
IED
CPU COM#1 LAN network

BIO#1
CPM2
COM#2
VCT#1 VCT#2
BIO#2 COM#3
BIO#3
BIO#4
BIO#5
BIO#6 COM#4
BIO#7
BIO#8
COM#5 IRIG-B
Figure 5.3-2 Diagram of processing
393
6F2S1924 (0.26)
5.3.2 Communication modules

The tables below show piggyback-circuit-modules provided for the communication. They are
mounted on CPU module directly. The actual mountings depend on the user ordering; thus,
the user should locate the actual implementations by the ordering using Appendixes: Ordering
and Typical external connection.
Table 5.3-1 Communication modules for Network

Module 100Base-TX/1000Base-T 100Base-FX 1000Base-LX
Connector RJ45 type SC type LC type (Duplex)
Medium Shielded twist pair Fiber optic Fiber optic
Substation automation Substation automation Substation automation
Usage
system and others system and others system and others
100/1000 100BASE-ＦX 1000
BASE-T BASE-LX
Symbol
TX
RX
Table 5.3-2 Communication modules for Miscellaneous

Module RS485 Fiber optic interface IRIG-B
Connector PCB connector ST type PCB connector
Medium Shielded twist pair Fiber optic(GI) Shielded twist pair
Data transfer in Data transfer in Time

Usage
IEC103 IEC103 (2km class) synchronization
RS485 Remote IRIG-B000
A1 Comm. A1
B1 B1 SIG
COM-A
A2 A2(Disuse)
Symbol
RX
B2 B2(Disuse)
COM-B
A3 A3
B3 B3
COMM TX GND
1. 100Base-TX/1000Base-T module (RJ-45 plug)

A twisted-pair cable is required for the LAN connection. The module is used for the GR-TIEMS
operation or the LAN communication. Use a shielded twisted pair cable so that electric
magnetic compatibility is satisfied.
C11
C12
Figure 5.3-3 100Base-TX/1000Base-T module
- 394 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
2. 100Base-FX module (SC plug)

A fiber optic cable is required for the connection. 100Base-FX module is used for the LAN
communication. Dual slots space (i.e., labeled with “C11” and “C12”) is occupied when a single
(Port A) module is mounted (see Figure 5.3-4; i.e., space “C12” is not blank). Therefore, the
total number for communication ports needs to be cared.
C11 C11
C12 C12
Figure 5.3-4 100Base-FX module (left for single port; right for dual ports)
3. 1000Base-LX module (LC plug)

A pair of optic fiber cables is required. The 1000Base-LX module can be used for the GR-TIEMS
operation or the LAN communication. Use SM mode fiber when long distance is required.
C11
C12
Figure 5.3-5 1000Base-LX module
4. RS485 module
RS485 module has a PCB connector. The module should be connected with a shielded-twisted-
pair cable; it is used for communication in the IEC60870-5-103, Modbus, and DNP. The
terminal arrangement and references are shown below. The cable sheath should be connected
with the frame ground (FG) in the IED case. For the use of the a shielded-twisted-pair cable,
the user should note that the total length should be less than 1200 meter (0.75 miles); the
terminal resistor (150 ohms) should be connected when any connector is not connected. For
setting the parameters, see Chapter Communication protocol: RS485 communication.
- 395 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Sheath
Top
PCB connector A1 A cable for
A1 B1 B1 an IED
COM-A(+)
A2
A2 B2 Sheath
COM-B(−) B2
A cable for
A3 B3 A3
another
Bottom
COMM(GND) B3
IED
0V
a. View from connector edge b. Port circuit Frame ground (FG)
C11
C12
Figure 5.3-6 RS485 connection and module
5. Fiber optic module

Fiber optic module is used for the serial communication in the IEC 60870-5-103 standard.
Figure 5.3-7 Fiber optic module
6. IRIG-B000 module
IRIG-B000 module is used to receive the digital signal generated with an external clock; the
signal is in conformity to serial IRIG-B000 format. Note that the IRIG-B000 module is able to
receive digital signal (TTL) only (i.e., the reception of AM signal is not applicable). This module
is isolated using a photo coupler; the user should note A2 and B2 connectors are not used. The
peak value of IRIG-B000 signal should be greater than 3.5 volts; the IRIG-B000 module has
the input resistor (about 3k ohm). Thus, the terminal resistor can be required when the IRIG-
B000 signal is delivered for several devices; the value of the terminal resistor depends on the
- 396 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
number of deliveries and the performance of the external clocks. For setting of time
synchronization, see Chapter Technical Description: Clock function.
Top
PCB connector A1
A1 B1 B1 SIG
A2 (Disuse)
A2 B2
B2 (Disuse)
A3 B3 A3
Bottom B3 GND
a. View from connector edge b. Port circuit
C11
C12
Figure 5.3-8 IRIG-B000 module
- 397 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
5.3.3 Location of communication modules

As described earlier, the user should examine the type of communication module and the
location where the module is placed. Therefore, the user is required to understand the
reference, when the user examines the connection figures. (See Appendix: Typical external
connection)
Figure 5.3-9 exemplifies IED has a LAN module (1000BASE-FX) at C11. RS485 and IRIG-B
modules are located at C13 and C15.
Com. SLOT VCT SLOT

100BASE-FX
VC1
VC1
C11 VCT
100BASE
C11 Blank -FX
C12
RS485
C12 Blank
Blank C13
C13 •A1
485
•A2•
B1 COM-A
•B2
•A3• COM-B
•B3
• • COMM
C14
C14 Blank
IRIG-B000
FG1
E C15
C15
FGE
FG1
Practical communication modules Schematic diagram
Figure 5.3-9 Modules structure (’6C code’ at E&F pos.)

†Note:The modules and their locations are dependent on actual ordering codes. In the
above example, an IRIG-B is placed at C15, but the user can see differences if
another ordering code is given. To find actual locations, read a practical ordering
code in Appendix: Ordering (see page 910).
398
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Figure 5.3-10 illustrates a structure, which has 100BASE-FX, RS385, and IRIG-B000 modules.
Com. SLOT VCT SLOT

100BASE-FX
VC1
VC1
C11 VCT
100BASE
C11 -FX
100BASE-FX
C12
RS485
C12 100BASE
-FX
Blank C13
C13 •A1
485
•A2•
B1 COM-A
•B2
•A3• COM-B
•B3
• • COMM
C14
C14 Blank
IRIG-B000
FG1
E C15
C15
FGE
FG1
Practical communication modules Schematic diagram
Figure 5.3-10 Modules structure (’9D code’ at E&F pos.)
399
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Binary IO module (BI, BO, and BIO)

Binary IO modules are provided in the IED to signal a command for external devices. Binary
IO modules are also used to receive status information. Binary IO modules are connected to
external devices with signal wires using terminal blocks on the rear of the IED. There are
standard type and variable type in Binary IO modules as shown in Table 5.4-1.
Table 5.4-1 Number of input and output circuits1

Number of Number of output circuits2
Module Module
# input Fast Semi-fast Auxiliary
name3 Type4 Hybrid Form C
circuits operating operating (Normal)
1 BI1A Standard 18 0 0 0 0 0
2 BI2A Variable 12 0 0 0 0 0
3 BI3A Standard 32 0 0 0 0 0
4 BO1A Standard 0 0 6 0 12 0
5 BO2A Standard 0 0 0 16 0 0
6 BIO1A Standard 7 0 6 0 3 1
1Note: PWS module supplies a DC voltage for binary IO modules: 48Vdc or 220Vdc.
Hence, the BIOs output circuits operate with the supplied DC voltage. Dual
voltages output (i.e., 48Vdc and 220Vdc) is not possible in the binary IO
modules.
2Note: For the structure and the number of binary IO modules, see section 5.4.5.
3Note: For details of the output circuits, see Table 5.4-6.
4Note: For the binary input circuits in the standard type, the user can choice either
a high voltage or a low voltage with regard to the input threshold. For the
ones of the variable type, the user itself can set a threshold value with regard
to input voltage using settings.
- 400 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
5.4.1 Binary input feature

Binary input circuits have common programmable logic (CPL). Each circuit is independent,
but the circuits in the BI3A module are not independent, as shown in Table 5.4-2.
Table 5.4-2 Input circuits and features associated with binary IO module
Module Input features Example Symbols
type sign
1 BI1A - Isolated using photo
Polarity
coupler Terminal screw number
-Polarity dependent
1
(+)
-Independent circuit 2
BI1
(−)
2 BI2A -Isolated using photo Circuit
number
coupler
Screw on terminal block
-Polarity dependent
- Independent circuit
-Variable threshold
3 BI3A -Isolated using photo
Polarity
coupler Terminal screw
number
-Polarity dependent (+)
1
BI1 BI1
-Sharing common
Circuit number
connections (+)
2
BI2
Circuit
number
Terminal screw
number
34
(+)
BI32
35
(−) Photo coupler
36
(−)
37
(−)
38
(−)
4 BIO1A
5 BIO2A Same as BI1A Same as BI1A and BI2A
6 BIO3A
The user can find the connector of binary IO modules, the terminal number and
arrangement of the binary input circuits in section 5.4.5.
- 401 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
5.4.2 Binary input circuit

The binary input circuit has a threshold for the input voltage and the user can regulate the
threshold using scheme switches and settings. Additionally, the binary input circuit has a
function in response to chattering signals produced by bouncing contacts, a programmable logic
for retarding and inverting the signal, and the user can set the respective features with
settings. Table 5.4-3 shows the respective settings and ranges in the standard type. Table 5.4-4
shows the ones in the variable types.
Table 5.4-3 Setting items for binary input circuits in the standard type
Units
Setting item1 Range Contents Default
THRES_Lvl Low/High – Threshold level for input voltage Low

Common
CMP_NUM 4 to 9 – Number of times in the filter 4
BI1_CPL Off/On – Switch of programmable operation in BI1 Off
BI1 On Delay Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Value in the on-delay timer 0.000
Off Delay Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Value in the off-delay timer 0.000
INVERSE-SW Normal / Inverse – Inversion operation of BI1 signal Normal
….. ….. ….. ….. …..
BIn_CPL Off/On – Switch of programmable operation in BIn Off

BIn2 On Delay Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Value in the on-delay timer 0.000
INVERSE-SW Normal / Inverse – Inversion operation of BIn signal Normal
1Note: Setting items are provided in each slot; see Figure 5.4-4.
2Note: BIn_CPL and other settings are provided for all binary input circuits. For
example, the user can configure 18 CPLs in the BI1A module.
3Note: Each setting item above is required to set at every IO_slots.
- 402 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Table 5.4-4 Setting items for binary input circuits in the variable type (i.e., BI2A module)
Units
Setting devices Range Contents Default
BI1-3_PICKUP 18 to 222 V Guaranteed-minimum-pick-ups at BI1, BI2, and BI3 77

BI4-6_PICKUP 18 to 222 V Guaranteed-minimum-pick-ups at BI4, BI5, and BI6 77
Common BI7-9_PICKUP 18 to 222 V Guaranteed-minimum-pick-ups at BI7 to BI9 77
BI10-12_PICKUP 18 to 222 V Guaranteed-minimum-pick-ups at BI10 to BI12 77
CMP_NUM 4 to 9 – Number of times in the filter 4
BI1_CPL Off/On – Switch for programmable operation in BI1 Off
BI2_CPL Off/On – Switch for programmable operation in BI 2 Off
BI3_CPL Off/On – Switch for programmable operation in BI 3 Off
….. ….. ….. ….. …..
BIn_CPL Off/On – Switch for programmable operation in BI n Off

BIn4 On Delay Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Value in the on-delay timer 0.000
INVERSE-SW Normal / Inverse – Inversion operation of BIn signal Normal
4Note: BI1_CPL~BI12_CPL settings are provided for the BI2A module.
As an example, Figure 5.4-1 shows the binary input circuit of the BI1A in order to help
understand the settings. The BI1A consists of 18 binary input circuits and each circuit has
three settings:
Setting threshold level
Comparison feature for contact chatter
CPL switches (“Delayed pick-up and delayed drop-off signal” and “Logic level
inversion”), used as basis of input signal characteristics.
- 403 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
From 8001001111 8001001110

External devices For Relay & and
On Delay Timer Off Delay Timer 8001001172 control functions
BI1-NC Filter BI1
t 0 0 t & ≥1
BI1 BI1-CPL
0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s & ≥1
1
&
Normal On &
[INVERSE-SW]
Inverse [BI1-CPL] Off
8101011111 8101011110
On Delay Timer Off Delay Timer 8101011172
BI2-NC BI2
t 0 0 t & ≥1
BI2 BI2-CPL
0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s & ≥1
1
&
Normal On &
[INVERSE-SW]
8201021110 8201021110
On Delay Timer Off Delay Timer
BI3-NC BI3 8201021172
t 0 0 t & ≥1
BI3 BI3-CPL
0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s & ≥1
1
&
Normal On &
[INVERSE-SW]
8********** BIn
BIn-NC BIn
On Delay Timer Off Delay Timer 8**********
t 0 0 t & ≥1
BIn BIn-CPL
0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s & ≥1
1
&
Normal On &
[INVERSE-SW]
Inverse [BIn-CPL] Off
Low
[THRES_Lvl]
High
R1
R1
Figure 5.4-1 Common programmable logic for the BI1A module
Respective element IDs (i.e., 8001001172 and others) designate respective signal
monitoring points of the binary input circuits (i.e., BI1-CPL and others). Thus, the user can
handle the signals on the binary input circuit using element ID together with function ID.
When we assume that the BI1A module is at IO#1 slot in the IED case, and if the user wishes
to see the first circuit signal of this BI1A module, the user can identify its signal† using the
element ID (8001001172) and the function ID of IO#1 slot‡.
- 404 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
†Note:The user can see the signals of the binary input circuits on the IED screen.
Chapter User interface: Monitoring-sub menu discusses how to see the state of the
binary input circuits.
‡Note:Function IDs identify every IO slots. For example, IO#1 slot has been identified by
the function ID “200B001”. Therefore, when the user wishes to program the signal
“BI1-CPL” on the BI1A at IO#1, the user should designate its signal using the
function ID “200B001” and Element ID “8001001172”. On the other hand, when
the signal “BI2-CPL” on the BI1A at IO#2 is required to program, the user should
designate that signal using the function ID “200B002” and Element ID
“8001001172”. For more information with regard to the function ID and the Data
ID at IO#1, see sections 5.4.6(i), 5.4.7(i), and others.
- 405 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(i) Setting threshold level

For Standard type (the BI1A module and others)
The selection switch is used to adjust the threshold of an input signal; it is designated as
[THRES_Lvl]. If an external device signal is lower than DC 110V1, the user should set Low for
scheme switch [THRES_Lvl]. Conversely if an external device signal is higher than DC 220V1,
the user should set High for the scheme switch. Note that scheme switch [THRES_Lvl] is used
to control all binary input circuits. The user must ensure that the input voltage is higher than
DC 77V1 when the setting ‘Low’ is applied; the input voltage should be higher than DC 136V1
when the setting ‘High’ is applied.
For Variable type (exclusive for the BI2A)

The BI2A module has a unique feature as a substitute for setting (i)-1 in order that the user
can determine the guaranteed-minimum-pick-up voltages (thresholds) as required. This
unique feature is performed with settings [BI1-3_PICKUP], [BI4-6_PICKUP], [BI7-9_PICKUP],
and [BI10-12_PICKUP]; every setting is applied to a group of three binary input circuits.
Binary input circuits #1 to #3 follow the setting [BI1-3_PICKUP] and the user should set
the value between 18 to 222V DC2 for this setting. For the setting [BI4-6_PICKUP], the above
mentioned value holds true for #4 to #6 binary input circuits; similarly the setting [BI7-
9_PICKUP] is used for #7 to #9 binary input circuits; and finally the setting [BI10-12_PICKUP]
is used for #10 to #12 binary input circuits.
1Note: The threshold value is fixed for all types of BIO modules except the BI2A. The
user should notice that “binary IO module voltage type” influences these values
(see the 1st note in Table 5.4-1). These particular values are found when 220V dc
type is used.
2Note: In the variable type, the user can set the threshold arbitrarily between 18 to 222V
in DC, and can regulate its threshold voltage in a voltage step. Table 5.4-5 shows
the corresponding values with regard to guaranteed and typical thresholds in
response to the setting values. Note that the operation in the variable type is
segmented into ‘Operate’, ‘Intermediate’, ‘and ‘Non-operate’ areas, which are
decided by the guaranteed-pick-up, typical-pick-up, and guaranteed-drop-off
levels, as illustrated in Figure 5.4-2.
- 406 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Table 5.4-5 Guaranteed and typical thresholds in the variable type

Guaranteed levels Typical levels
Setting values [V]
Pick-up voltage [V] Drop-off voltage [V] Pick-up voltage [V]
18 17.9 10.5 14.2
19 18.5 11.1 14.8
20 19.9 12.3 16.1
21 20.5 12.9 16.7
22 to 29 21.8 14.0 17.9
30 29.3 20.8 25.0
31 to 32 30.8 22.2 26.5
33 32.5 23.7 28.1
34 to 35 34.0 25.0 29.5
36 to 37 36.0 26.8 31.4
38 to 39 37.5 28.3 32.9
40 39.2 29.8 34.5
41 to 49 40.8 31.2 36.0
50 to 52 49.8 39.4 44.6
53 to 56 53.0 42.2 47.6
57 to 59 56.3 45.3 50.8
60 to 61 59.5 48.1 53.8
62 to 63 61.8 50.2 56.0
64 to 65 63.6 51.8 57.7
66 65.9 53.9 59.9
67 to 70 66.7 54.7 60.7
71 70.1 57.7 63.9
71 to 73 70.3 57.9 64.1
74 73.2 60.6 66.9
75 to 79 74.4 61.6 68.0
80 to 83 79.7 66.4 73.0
84 to 88 83.7 70.1 76.9
89 to 92 88.2 74.0 81.1
93 to 99 92.3 77.8 85.0
100 to 106 99.4 84.2 91.8
107 to 111 106.4 90.6 98.5
112 to 113 111.4 95.0 103.2
114 to 119 114.0 97.4 105.7
120 119.3 102.3 110.8
121 to 127 121.0 103.8 112.4
128 to 130 128.0 110.1 119.0
131 130.1 112.0 121.0
132 to 135 131.9 113.7 122.8
136 to 137 135.9 117.3 126.6
138 to 141 137.1 118.3 127.7
142 to 143 141.5 122.3 131.9
144 143.9 124.5 134.2
145 to 146 144.6 125.2 134.9
147 to 151 146.1 126.5 136.3
152 to 154 151.8 131.6 141.7
155 to 161 154.4 134.0 144.2
162 161.3 140.3 150.8
163 to 165 162.6 141.4 152.0
166 to 170 165.8 144.3 155.0
171 to 173 170.6 148.6 159.6
174 to 176 173.6 151.4 162.5
177 to 183 176.3 153.8 165.0
184 to 189 183.3 160.1 171.7
190 to 193 189.7 165.9 177.8
194 to 200 193.6 169.4 181.5
201 to 203 200.3 175.5 187.9
204 to 211 203.1 178.1 190.6
212 to 221 211.5 185.7 198.6
222 222.0 195.2 208.6
- 407 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Input voltage
Operating area
Guaranteed pick up level

Intermediate area
Typical pick up level
Guaranteed drop off level
Non-operating area
Figure 5.4-2 Operating area in the variable type

Note: In practice, the pick-up voltages depend on respective binary circuits physically
This means the characteristics are not affected by the ambient conditions and the
applied voltages.
(ii) Comparison feature for contact chatter

The input circuit incorporates a comparison feature that protects against contact chatter and
this feature is configured using the setting [CMP_NUM]. Figure 5.4-3 illustrates this feature;
the comparison feature removes contact chatter. The period ‘t’ applied for the removal of contact
chatter can be configured by setting a value for [CMP_NUM]. The formula for the calculation
of ‘t’ is,
1
[CPM_NUM]×
System Frequency×12
The setting [CMP_NUM] is provided for all binary input circuits.
Actual input signal
Imported signal by
binary input circuit
t
Figure 5.4-3 Chattering countermeasure (e.g. [CMP_NUM] = 4)
- 408 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(iii) CPL switch

If the user needs to operate the CPL for binary input circuit #1, the user should set On for
scheme switch [BI1_CPL]. Conversely, the user should set Off for scheme switch [BI1_CPL] if
CPL is not required. Since the entire range of binary input circuits have CPLs, a setting of On
or Off is a pre-requisite for every binary input circuit. The number of CPL is equal to number
of binary input circuits: that is, if BI1A is selected, the number of CPLs is 18.
(iv) Delayed pick-up and delayed drop-off signal

Both an on-delay timer and an off-delay timer are provided in CPL; both are used to adjust the
timing for input signals, the user should set their respective time values for settings [On Delay
Timer] and [Off Delay Timer].
(v) Logic level inversion

The Logic inversion function can invert the input signal and is provided for each binary input
circuit; the user can invert an input signal by setting Inverse for scheme switch [INVERSE-
SW]. A setting of Normal is also provided when inversion is not required.
(vi) How to set the settings for binary input circuits

Figure 5.4-4 illustrates an example of the binary IO module arrangement for the binary input
circuit printed circuit boards (PCBs); it illustrates the setting targets are on a BI1A at IO#1
and a BIO1A at IO#3. The user should key the settings with regard to the BI1A and BIO1A
using the setting tables for IO_SLOT1 and IO_SLOT3. As the setting points are for the BI1A
and BIO1A at the IO#1 and IO#3, the user should take the setting table of the standard type
(in sec. 5.4.6).
- 409 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
IO#n
IO#4
IO#2
IO#3
IO#1
IO_SLOT1 IO_SLOT3
Setting table (input) Setting table (in & out)
Setting targets: BI1–BI18

and Common. Setting targets: BI1–BI7
and Common.
a. Setting targets for BI1A (IO#1) c. Setting targets for BIO1A (IO#3)
Figure 5.4-4 BO and BIO setting tables related to IO_slot1 and IO_slot3
The setting table of section 5.4.6 is available for all binary IO modules except for the BI2A
module; thus, the user should understand and select the setting points that are relevant to the
BI1A module. That is, for the BI1A, the user should choose the setting items of reference (i.e.,
binary input circuits #1 to #18) from IO_SLOT1 setting table. On the other hand, for the BIO1A
module, the user should choose the setting items of reference (i.e., binary input circuits #1 to
#7) from IO_SLOT3 setting table. The IO_SLOT3 setting table for the binary input circuits are
shown in sec. 5.4.6. The setting operation via the IED screen is discussed later. (See chapter
User interface: I/O setting sub-menu)
- 410 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
5.4.3 Binary output feature

A binary output circuit (BO) along with the CPL drives a single contact. There are five types
of BOs; different types of BOs are provided which are suitable for controlling the speed and
capacity of current in a variety of external devices, as listed below:
(1) Fast operating
(2) Semi-fast operating
(3) Hybrid
(4) Auxiliary
(5) BO with Form-C
The arrangement of the BO types is determined for every binary IO module, as shown in
Table 5.4-1 and Table 5.4-6. The difference in the types and number of BOs are also found in
section 5.4.5.
- 411 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Table 5.4-6 Output circuits and features associated with binary IO module
No Type Binary output feature Example Symbol Applied
sign module
1 Fast -Normally open (N/O) Terminal screw BIO3A
-Dry contact BO1(F) number
operating
-Closure is the fastest 1
(F) amongst all of the BO types. 2
Type
-Make & Carry: 5A cont.
BO number
-Break: 0.15A at 290Vdc
-OP Time: 3ms (typical) N/O contact
2 Semi-fast -Normally open (N/O) BO1A

-Dry contact BO1(SF)
operating BIO1A
-Closure is faster than
(SF) normal. BIO2A
Type
-Make and carry: 8A cont. BO number
-Break: 0.1A at 250Vdc
0.2A at 125Vdc
-OP Time: 6ms (typical)
3 Hybrid -Normally open (N/O) Terminal screw BO2A
-Polarity dependent BO1(H) number
(H) (+)
-Interruption capability for 1
(−)
high-current (up to 10A) 2
Type
-Consisting of an IGBT BO number
device and a contact
-Make and carry: 8A cont. N/O
-Break: 10A at 220/110Vdc
-OP Time: 1ms
4 Auxiliary -Normally open (N/O) Terminal screw BO1A
-Dry contact BO1 number
BIO1A
-Normal speed closure 1
-Make and carry: 8A cont. 2 BIO2A

-Break: 0.1A at 250Vdc BO number BIO3A
0.2A at 125Vdc
-OP Time: 8ms (typical) N/O contact
5 Form-C -Uses a N/C and a N/O Terminal screw number BIO2A

contact BO1
BIO3A
-Shares a common 35
connections 37
-Make and carry: 8A cont. BO number
36
-Break: 0.1A at 250Vdc N/O
0.2A at 125Vdc 38
-OP Time: 8ms (typical) N/C
Contact
- 412 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
5.4.4 Binary output circuit

Either a CPL logic or a PLC signal can drive a binary output circuit. Table 5.4-7 shows the
settings summary of CPL function.
Table 5.4-7 Setting items for binary output circuits
Setting-range or
Unit
Setting items Contents Default
Data_ID
BO1_CPL Off / On – Switch On for programmable operation Off
BO1 Input signal1 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the first input on BO1. Not assigned1
Input signal2 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the second input on BO1. Not assigned1
Input signal3 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the third input on BO1. Not assigned1
Input signal4 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the forth input on BO1. Not assigned1
Input signal5 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the fifth input on BO1. Not assigned1
Input signal6 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the sixth input on BO1. Not assigned1
Input signal7 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the seventh input on BO1. Not assigned1
Input signal8 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the eighth input on BO1. Not assigned1
LOGIC-SW AND/OR/XOR – Switch for logic-gate operation on BO1 AND
On Delay Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Set a value for an on-delay-timer on BO1 0.000
Off Delay Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Set a value for an off-delay-timer on BO1 0.000
INVERSE-SW Normal / Inverse s Inversion operation of BO1 signal Normal
TIMER-SW OFF/Delay/Dwell/Latch – Selection of a type in the delay timer on BO1 OFF
Logic Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Setting Off Delay Timer for Delay and Dwell 0.000
Reset signal (Preferred Data ID) – Setting Data ID for Latch Not assigned1
BO2_CPL Off / On – Switch On for programmable operation Off
BO2 Input signal1 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the first input on BO2. Not assigned1
….. ….. ….. …..
Input signal8 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the eighth input on BO2 Not assigned1
LOGIC-SW AND/OR/XOR – Switch for logic-gate operation on BO2 AND
On Delay Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Set a value for an on-delay-timer on BO2 0.000
Off Delay Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Set a value for an off-delay-timer on BO2 0.000
INVERSE-SW Normal / Inverse – Inversion operation of BO2 signal Normal
TIMER-SW OFF/Delay/Dwell/Latch – Selection of a type in the delay timer on BO2 OFF
…..
BOn_CPL Off / On – Switch On for programmable operation Off

BOn Input signal1 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the first input on BOn Not assigned1
….. ….. ….. …..
Input signal8 (Preferred Data ID) – Set a Data ID at the eighth input on BOn Not assigned1
LOGIC-SW AND/OR/XOR – Switch for logic-gate operation on BOn AND
On Delay Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Set a value for an on-delay-timer on BOn 0.000
Off Delay Timer 0.000 to 300.000 s Set a value for an off-delay-timer on BOn 0.000
INVERSE-SW Normal / Inverse – Inversion operation of BOn signal Normal
TIMER-SW OFF/Delay/Dwell/Latch – Selection of a type in the delay timer on BOn OFF
1Note: The user can set a reset signal and eight input signals with Data IDs. Data IDs
are listed as a signal monitoring point for each function. Setting items are
summarized in each slot. (See sections 5.4.8(i) and 5.4.8(ii))
- 413 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Figure 5.4-5 shows the binary output circuits on the BO1A module in order to help
understand the settings. The BO1A consists of 18 binary output circuits and every circuit has
timers and switches. The features of the CPLs are divided into the five components as listed
below:
CPL switch
Selection of input signals
Logic gate switch
Delayed pick-up/delayed drop-off
Logic level inversion
Logic timer switch
From relay
application and To external
control functions devices
8002001112 Contact
On Delay Timer Off Delay Timer
[LOGIC-SW] & ≥1
t 0 0 t BO1
Input signal 1 DRIVER BO1
&
AND
1 & Logic Timer ≥1 & ≥1
Input signal 2 0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s & 0 t
Input signal 3 OR & 8002001113
≥1 [INVERSE-SW]
Normal
Off
Inverse On &
XOR Delay &
0.000-300.000s [BO1_CPL] Off
≥1 Dwell
Input signal 8
[TIMER-SW] Latch &
F/F
Reset signal
310200E11D BO1-SOURCE
810201112 Contact
[LOGIC-SW] On Delay Timer Off Delay Timer
& ≥1 BO2
Input signal 1 t 0 0 t DRIVER BO2
&
AND
Input signal 2 0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s & 0 t
Input signal 3 OR &
810201113
≥1 [INVERSE-SW]
Normal
Off
Inverse On & BO2 RB
XOR Delay &
0.000-300.000s [BO2_CPL] Off
≥1 Dwell
Input signal 8
[TIMER-SW] Latch &
F/F
Reset signal
820202112 Contact
& ≥1 BO3
Input signal 1 t 0 0 t DRIVER BO3
&
AND
Input signal 2 0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s & 0 t
Input signal 3 OR & 8202021113
≥1 [INVERSE-SW]
Normal
Off
Inverse On & BO3 RB
XOR Delay &
0.000-300.000s [BO3_CPL] Off
≥1 Dwell
Input signal 8
[TIMER-SW] Latch &
F/F
Reset signal
8********* Contact
& ≥1 BOn
Input signal 1 t 0 0 t DRIVER BOn
&
AND
Input signal 2 0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s & 0 t
Input signal 3 OR &
8*********
≥1 [INVERSE-SW]
Normal
Off
Inverse On & BOn RB
XOR Delay &
0.000-300.000s [BOn_CPL] Off
≥1 Dwell
Input signal 8
[TIMER-SW] Latch &
F/F
Reset signal
3102E**11D BOn-SOURCE
Figure 5.4-5 Binary Output Circuit for the BO1A (#1 to #n=18)
In Figure 5.4-5 respective element IDs (i.e., 8002001112 and others) designate respective
- 414 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
signal monitoring points of the binary output circuits. The user can monitor the operations of
the binary output circuit using element ID together with function ID. When we assume that a
BO1A module is at IO#2 slot in the IED case, and if the user wishes to monitor the first-circuit
in the BO1A module, the user can see the operation using the element ID (8002001112) and
the function ID† of IO#2 slot.
†Note: A function ID identifies every IO slots. For example, with regard to the function
ID and the Data ID at IO#1 slot, see section 5.4.9(i). On the other hand, for IO#2
slot see section 5.4.9(ii).
(i) CPL switch

When the user needs to operate the CPL for binary output circuit #1, the user should set On
for the scheme switch [BO1_CPL]. Conversely, the user should set Off for the scheme switch
[BO1_CPL] if CPL is not required. Since all binary output circuits have CPLs setting between
On and Off is required for every binary output circuit. The number of CPL is equal to the
number of binary output circuits: that is, if the BO1A module is selected, the number of CPLs
is 18. Note that the subsequent PLC settings described later require that Off be set for the
scheme switch.
(ii) Selection of input signals

Since a binary input circuit is operated by commands introduced from other functions, eight
ports for input signals are provided, designated as input-signal1 to input-signal8. The user
must ensure that input-signal1 to input-signal8 are configured with eight DataIDs. That is,
the user can select input-signals that are available from other functions, these input-signals
are designated using DataIDs. The user can key the DataIDs into settings [Input signal1] to
[Input signal8]. The DataIDs are selected from the Signal monitoring point list, which is
provided for every function.
(iii) Logic gate switch

A binary input circuit has a logic scheme for the eight input signals, and can combine the eight
input signals as required using scheme switch [LOGIC-SW] for which the user should set either
AND, OR or XOR.
(iv) Delayed pick-up/delayed drop-off signal

An on-delay timer and an off-delay timer are provided in the CPL; both are used to adjust the
timing for binary output circuits, the user should set their respective time values for settings
[On Delay Timer] and [Off Delay Timer].
- 415 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(v) Logic level inversion

The logic inversion function can invert the input signal for each binary output circuit; the user
can invert an input output when the user sets Inverse for the scheme switch [INVERSE-SW].
Normal setting is also provided when logic inversion is not required for processing.
(vi) Logic timer switch

In order that the binary output circuit can have a programmable reset characteristic, a scheme
switch and a setting are provided. The programmable reset characteristic consists of four types
and the user can select the type required using a scheme switch: (1) dwell type, (2) delay type,
(3) latch type, and (4) instantaneous type:
Instant type
When the user uses a binary output signal without the following characteristics, the user
should set Off for the scheme switch [TIMER-SW].
Delay type
If the user requires a binary output signal with a delayed characteristic, the user should set
Delay for scheme switch [TIMER-SW] and set the value of the pulse width using setting [Logic
timer].
Dwell type
For instance, if the user requires a binary output signal as a one shot pulse, the user should
set Dwell for scheme switch [TIMER-SW] and set the value of the pulse width using setting
[Logic timer]. If the input signals received have a shorter duration than the set value in the
setting [Logic timer], the pulse width will be equal to the setting value. On the other hand, if
the duration of the input signals are longer than that of the set value, the pulse width will be
equal to the width of the input signals.
Latch type
If the user requires a binary output signal to be removed by a reset signal, the user should set
Latch for scheme switch [TIMER-SW] and key the Data ID of the reset signal for setting [Reset
signal]. Since the binary output signal is removed with the Data ID, the user should determine
the Data ID from other functions. The Data ID is designated by the signal monitoring point for
each function and the user should set the [Reset signal] setting.
Note: When Latch is set, the state of BO circuit will be sustained during power turn-
on/off.
- 416 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(vii) How to set the settings for binary output circuits
IO#n
IO#2
IO#4
IO#3
IO#1
BO1A BIO1A
IO_SLOT2 IO_SLOT3
Setting table (output) Setting table (in & out)
Setting targets: BO1–BO18 Setting targets: BO1–BO10

b. Setting targets for BO1A (IO#2) c. Setting targets for BIO1A (IO#3)
Figure 5.4-6 BO and BIO modules and setting tables related to IO_SLOT2 and IO_SLOT3
Figure 5.4-6 illustrates an example of a binary IO module arrangement and the binary
output circuit printed circuit boards (PCBs). If the user wishes to set the binary output circuits,
the setting targets are on BO1A and BIO1A at locations IO#2 and IO#3. The user should key
the CPL settings from the setting tables for the IO2_SLOT and IO3_SLOT.
The setting table is available for all binary IO modules; thus, the user should understand
and select setting points that are relevant to the BO1A and BIO1A. That is, for the BO1A the
user should choose the setting terms of reference (i.e., binary output circuits #1 to #18) from
- 417 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
IO_SLOT2. On the other hand, for the BIO1A, the setting terms of reference (i.e., binary output
circuits #1 to #10) are from IO_SLOT3. These setting tables are shown in section 5.4.8(ii).
(viii) PLC and the binary output circuits

The Programmable logic controller (PLC) is also available for the control of binary output
circuits as a substitute for the CPL, and is able to signal an output command directly. In the
case that the binary output circuit is controlled by the PLC, the user is required to connect the
PLC to the binary output circuit. In Figure 5.4-5, the PLC logic connection points are
designated with BO1-SOURCE, BO2-SOURCE, and others. (The PLC is discussed separately.
Note that Connection points on the PLC are shown with the DataIDs of BIO_SLOT. See section
5.4.9(i)-3 and 5.4.9(ii)-3. (For more information of PLC function, see Chapter PLC function)
5.4.5 Structure of binary IO Module

Binary IO modules consist of a number of module types, and their arrangements of respective
input-and-output circuits are particular to respective binary IO module types, as shown in
Figure 5.4-7–Figure 5.4-9.
Figure 5.4-10 shows a diagram of how an actual terminal block connects with circuits of the
module. The use can identify the correspondence using the left side block figure and the right
side schematic figure. If the user takes account of wiring works on the BI1A, their targets are
designated with terminal screw numbers (1 to 40) that are shown next to the terminal block.
Slot number labeled by alpha-numeric reference “T*” is used to identify the location of the slot,
and the asterisk(*) is substituted for any one of the slot numbers. For the actual
implementation of a binary IO module, the user should examine the arrangement of binary IO
modules from External connection figures, which are shown separately. (See Appendix: Typical
external connection)
Polarity is shown on some input-and-output circuits, hence, the user should check the polarity
sign (+) or (−), respectively.
- 418 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
BI1A BI2A BI3A

(+) 1 (+) 1 (+) 1
2 BI1 2 BI1 2 BI1
(−) (−) (+) BI2
(+) 3 (+) 3
4 BI2 4 BI3
(−) (+) BI4
(+) 5 (+) 5 (+) 5
6 BI3 6 BI2 6 BI5
(−) (−) (+) BI6
(+) 7 (+) 7 (+) 7
8 BI4 8 BI3 8 BI7
(−) (−) (+)
9 9 BI8
(+) (+) BI9
10 BI5 10
(−) (+) BI10
(+) 11 (+) 11 (+) 11
12 BI6 12 BI4 12 BI11
(−) (−) (+) BI12
(+) 13 (+) 13 (+) 13
14 BI7 14 BI5 14 BI13
(−) (−) (+)
15 15 BI14
(+) (+) BI15
16 BI8 16
(−) (+)
17 17 17 BI16
(+) (+) (+)
18 BI9 18 BI6 18 BI17
(−) (−) (+) BI18
(+) 21 (+) 21 (+) 21

22 BI10 BI7 BI19
(−) (−) 22 (+) 22
BI20
(+) 23 (+) 23
24 BI11 24 BI21
(−) (+) BI22
(+) 25 (+) 25 (+) 25
26 BI12 26 BI8 26 BI23
(−) (−) (+) BI24
(+) 27 (+) 27 (+) 27
28 BI13 28 BI9 28 BI25
(−) (−) (+) BI26
(+) 29 (+) 29
30 BI14 30 BI27
(−) (+) BI28
(+) 31 (+) 31 (+) 31
32 BI15 32 BI10 32 BI29
(−) (−) (+) BI30
(+) 33 (+) 33 (+) 33
34 BI16 34 BI11 34 BI31
(−) (−) (+) BI32
(+) 35 (−) 35
(−) 36 BI17 36
(−)
(+) 37 (+) 37 (−) 37
38 BI18 BI12
(−) (−) 38 (−) 38
FG
Figure 5.4-7 Input arrangements for BI1A, BI2A and BI3A

Note: For more detailed circuit information, refer to Table 5.4-2 or Table 5.4-6. The BI2A
should be earthed to the FG of the case. See Figure 5.4-11.
- 419 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
BO1A BO2A
1 1
(+)
BO1(SF) 2 BO1(H) 2
(−)
3 3
(+)
BO2(SF) 4 BO2(H) 4
(−)
5 5
(+)
BO3(SF) 6 BO3(H) 6
(−)
7 7
(+)
BO4(SF) 8 BO4(H) 8
(−)
9 9
(+)
BO5(SF) 10 BO5(H) 10
(−)
11 11
(+)
BO6(SF) 12 BO6(H) 12
(−)
13 13
(+)
BO7 14 BO7(H) 14
(−)
15 15
(+)
BO8 16 BO8(H) 16
(−)
17 17
(+)
BO9 18 BO9(H) 18
(−)
21 21 (+)
BO10 22 BO10(H) 22 (−)
23 23 (+)
BO11 24 BO11(H) 24 (−)
25 25 (+)
BO12 26 BO12(H) 26 (−)
27 27 (+)
BO13 28 BO13(H) 28 (−)
29 29 (+)
BO14 30 BO14(H) 30 (−)
31 31 (+)
BO15 32 BO15(H) 32 (−)
33 33 (+)
BO16 34 BO16(H) 34 (−)
35
BO17 36
37
BO18 38
Schematic figures
Figure 5.4-8 Output arrangements in BO1A and BO2A

Note: For more detailed circuit information, refer to Table 5.4-2 or Table 5.4-6.
- 420 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
BIO1A BIO2A BIO3A
(+) 1 1 (+) 1
BI1 (+) BI1 BI1
(−) 2 2 (−) 2
(−)
(+) 3 3 (+) 3
BI2 (+) BI2 BI2
(−) 4 4 (−) 4
(−)
(+) 5 5 (+) 5
BI3 (+) BI3 BI3
(−) 6 6 (−) 6
(−)
(+) 7 7 (+) 7
BI4 (+) BI4 BI4
(−) 8 8 (−) 8
(−)
(+) 9 9 (+) 9
BI5 (+) BI5 BI5
(−) 10 10 (−) 10
(−)
(+) 11 11 (+) 11
BI6 (+) BI6 BI6
(−) 12 12 (−) 12
(−)
(+) 13 13 (+) 13
BI7 (+) BI7 BI7
(−) 14 14 (−) 14
(−)
15 15 15
BO1(SF) (+) (+)
16 16 BI8 16 BI8
(−) (−)
17 17
BO2(SF) (+) BI9
18 18
(−)
21 21 21
BO3(SF) 22 (+) 22 BI10 BO1(F) 22
23 (−) 23 23
BO4(SF) 24 (+) 24 BI11 BO2(F) 24
25 (−) 25 25
BO5(SF) 26 (+) 26 BI12 BO3(F) 26
27 (−) 27 27
BO6(SF) 28 BO1(SF) 28 BO4(F) 28
29 29 29
BO7 30 BO2(SF) 30 BO5(F) 30
31 31 31
BO8 32 BO3(SF) 32 BO6(F) 32
33 33 33
BO9 34 BO4 34 BO7 34
35 35 35
37 37 37
BO10 36 BO5 36 BO8 36
38 38 38
Schematic figures
Figure 5.4-9 Input and output arrangements in BIO1A, BIO2A and BIO3A
Note: For more detailed circuit information, refer to Table 5.4-2 or Table 5.4-6.
- 421 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Alpha-numeric of BIO. Sign “*”

is substituted T*
for the actual slot location number.
BIO3A
T* T*
(+) 1
1 2 BI1
2 (−)
(+) 3
3 1 2 BI2
(−) 4
4
3 4 (+) 5
5 BI3
(−) 6
6
5 6 (+) 7
7 BI4
(−) 8
8 7 8
(+) 9
9 BI5
(−) 10
10 9 10
(+) 11
11 BI6
12 11 12 (−) 12
13 (+) 13
13 14 14 BI7
14 (−)
15 (+) 15
15 16 16 BI8
16 (−)
17 17 18
18
19 21 22
20
23 24
25 26
21 21
27 28 BO1(F)
22 22
23 29 30 23
BO2(F) 24
24
25 31 32 25
BO3(F) 26
26 33 34
27 27
BO4(F) 28
28 35 36
29 29
30 37 38 BO5(F) 30
31 31
32 BO6(F) 32
33 Ring type terminal 33
34 BO7 34
35
36 35
37 Terminal screw numbers 37
38 are denoted with the BO8 36
39 same one.
40 38
Compression plug type

terminal
Terminal blocks Schematic figure
Figure 5.4-10 IO module corresponded with ring or compression terminal
Note: Terminal block–for Type using compression terminals– is manufactured by

PHOENIX CONTACT®; its model is described in “FRONT-MSTB 2.5/20-STF
5.08”. The user can fit a cable in the compression terminal without a cable ferrule,
when a cable thickness is AWG14 and its stripping length is 10mm. When the
cable requires a ferrule, use a ferrule made by PHOENIX CONTACT ®.
- 422 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Compression plug type terminal Ring type terminal
BI2A BI2A BI2A

T* (+) 1 (+) 1
1 2 BI1 2 BI1
(−) (−)
2
3
4 (+) 5 (+) 5
5 (−) 6 BI2 BI2A (−) 6 BI2
6 (+) 7 T* (+) 7
7 8 BI3 8 BI3
(−) (−)
8
9
10 (+) 11 1 2
(+) 11
11 12 BI4 12 BI4
(−) 3 4 (−)
12 (+) 13 (+) 13
13 14 BI5 5 6 14 BI5
(−) (−)
14
15 7 8
16 (+) 17 (+) 17
17 18 BI6 9 10 18 BI6
(−) (−)
18
11 12
19
20 13 14
15 16
(+) 21
(+) 21 BI7 17 18 (−) 22
BI7
(−) 22
21
22
21 22
23
(+) 25
24
(+) 25 23 24 26 BI8
25 26 BI8 (−)
26 (−) 25 26 (+) 27
(+) 27 28 BI9
27 28 BI9 (−)
28 (−) 27 28
Short wire 30
29
29 30 FG
30 31
31 (+)
32 BI10 31 32 (+) 31 BI10
32 (−)
33 (−) 32
33 (+)
34 BI11 33 34 (+) 33
BI11
34 (−) (−) 34
35 35 36
36
(+) 37 37 38
(+) 37
37 BI12
38 (−) 38 (−) 38
BI12
39 40
40 FG Ring type terminal
Short wire
FG FG
Figure 5.4-11 The BI2A module and its frame ground screw
Note: The BI2A is earthed to the frame’s ground screw (FG) using a short wire.
- 423 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
5.4.6 Settings of binary input circuits

(i) Setting table (IO_SLOT1) at IO#1 (Function ID: 200B01)
For the standard type being furnished
s value
Common THRES_Lvl Low / High - Determination of input threshold Low

CMP_NUM 4-9 - Number of times filtered 4
BI1 BI1_CPL Off / On - Programmable binary input enable Off
On Delay Timer 0.000 - 300.000 s On delay timer value 0.000
Off Delay Timer 0.000 - 300.000 s Off delay timer value 0.000
INVERSE-SW Normal / Inverse - Binary signal inversion Normal
…… …… …… …… ……

For the variable type being furnished

s value
Common THRES_Lvl Low / High - Determination of input threshold Low

Threshold through BI1 to BI3
THRES_Grp1 10 - 220 V Applicable only in BI-2 module and 75
BIO-4 module
BIO-4 module
BIO-4 module
BIO-4 module
CMP_NUM 4-9 - Number of times filtered 4
…… …… …… …… ……

- 424 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(ii) Setting tables (IO_SLOT2 to SLOTn) at IO#2 to IO#n (Function ID:

200B02 to 200B0n)
For the standard type being furnished
Setting table is the same as the table for the IO#1 (in previous section (i)-1)
For the variable type being furnished

Setting table is the same as the table for the IO#2 (in previous section (i)-2)
- 425 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
5.4.7 Signals (Data ID) of binary input circuits

(i) Table (IO_SLOT1) at IO#1 (Function ID: 200B01)
Before the filer
 Signal monitoring points (before the filter)
8001001111 BI1-NC BI1 signal without filter
8A010A1111 BI11-NC BI5 signal without filter
8B010B1111 BI12-NC BI7 signal without filter
8C010C1111 BI13-NC BI9 signal without filter
8D010D1111 BI14-NC BI11 signal without filter
8E010E1111 BI15-NC BI13 signal without filter
8F010F1111 BI16-NC BI15 signal without filter
8A011A1111 BI27-NC BI27 signal without filter
8B011B1111 BI28-NC BI28 signal without filter
8C011C1111 BI29-NC BI29 signal without filter
8D011D1111 BI30-NC BI30 signal without filter
8F011F1111 BI32-NC BI31 signal without filter
8E011E1111 BI31-NC BI32 signal without filter
After the filter

 Signal monitoring points (after the filer)
8001001110 BI1 BI1 signal with filter
- 426 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
 Signal monitoring points (after the filer)

8A010A1110 BI11 BI11 signal with filter
8B010B1110 BI12 BI12 signal with filter
8C010C1110 BI13 BI13 signal with filter
8D010D1110 BI14 BI14 signal with filter
8E010E1110 BI15 BI15 signal with filter
8F010F1110 BI16 BI16 signal with filter
8A011A1110 BI27 BI27 signal with filter
8B011B1110 BI28 BI28 signal with filter
8C011C1110 BI29 BI29 signal with filter
8D011D1110 BI30 BI30 signal with filter
8E011E1110 BI31 BI31 signal with filter
8F011F1110 BI32 BI32 signal with filter
The ends of binary input circuits

 Signal monitoring points (at the end of binary input circuit)
8001001172 BI1-CPL BI1 signal with filter and programmable logic
8A010A1172 BI11-CPL BI11 signal with filter and programmable logic
8B010B1172 BI12-CPL BI12 signal with filter and programmable logic
8C010C1172 BI13-CPL BI13 signal with filter and programmable logic
8D010D1172 BI14-CPL BI14 signal with filter and programmable logic
- 427 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
 Signal monitoring points (at the end of binary input circuit)

8E010E1172 BI15-CPL BI15 signal with filter and programmable logic
8F010F1172 BI16-CPL BI16 signal with filter and programmable logic
8201121172 BI19-CPL BI19signal with filter and programmable logic
8301131172 BI20-CPL BI20ignal with filter and programmable logic
8A011A1172 BI27-CPL BI27 signal with filter and programmable logic
8B011B1172 BI28-CPL BI28 signal with filter and programmable logic
8C011C1172 BI29-CPL BI29 signal with filter and programmable logic
8D011D1172 BI30-CPL BI30 signal with filter and programmable logic
8E011E1172 BI31-CPL BI31 signal with filter and programmable logic
8F011F1172 BI32-CPL BI32 signal with filter and programmable logic
(ii) Tables (IO_SLOT2 to SLOTn) at IO#2 to IO#n

(Function ID: 200B02 to 200B0n)
Before the filter
Table is the same as the table in previous section (i)-1.
After the filter

The ends of binary input circuits

- 428 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
5.4.8 Settings of binary output circuits

(i) Setting table (IO_SLOT1) at IO#1 (Function ID 200B01)
Default setting
Units
value
BO1 BO1_CPL Off / On - Programmable binary output enable Off

Input signal1 (Data-ID from other FBs) - First Data ID as input signal #1 for Logic gate Not assigned
Input signal2 ditto - Second Data ID as input signal #2 for Logic gate Not assigned
Input signal3 ditto - Third Data ID as input signal #3 for Logic gate Not assigned
Input signal4 ditto - Forth Data ID as input signal #4 for Logic gate Not assigned
Input signal5 ditto - Fifth Data ID as input signal #5 for Logic gate Not assigned
Input signal6 ditto - Sixth Data ID as input signal #6 for Logic gate Not assigned
Input signal7 ditto - Seventh Data ID as input signal #7 for Logic gate Not assigned
Input signal8 ditto - Eighth Data ID as input signal #8 for Logic gate Not assigned
LOGIC-SW AND / OR / XOR - Operation selection in Logic gate AND
TIMER-SW Off / Delay / Dwell / Latch - Selection of Logic circuit Off
Off delay timer value for "Delay" and "Dwell"
Logic Timer 0.000 - 300.000 s 0.000
circuit
Reset signal (Data-ID from other FBs) - Reset signal selection for "Latch" circuit Not assigned
Input signal1 (Data-ID from other FBs) - Keying Data ID#1 as input signal for Logic gate Not assigned
Input signal2 ditto - Keying Data ID#2 as input signal for Logic gate Not assigned
Logic Timer 0.000 - 300.000 s 0.000
circuit
….. …… ……. ……. ……..

Input signal1 (Data-ID from other FBs) - Keying Data ID#1 as input signal for Logic gate Not assigned
……. ……. ……. …….
Logic Timer 0.000 - 300.000 s 0.000
circuit
- 429 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(ii) Setting tables (IO_SLOT2 to SLOTn) at IO#2 to IO#n (Function ID

200B02 to 200B0n)
Setting table is the same as the table for the IO#1 (in section (i))
- 430 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
5.4.9 Signals (Data ID) of binary output circuits

(i) Table (IO_SLOT1) at IO#1 (Function ID: 200B01)
Before the contact-driver
 Signal monitoring points (before the contact-driver)
8002001112 BO1 BO1 signal
8902091112 BO10 BO10 signal
8A020A1112 BO11 BO11 signal
8B020B1112 BO12 BO12 signal
8C020C1112 BO13 BO13 signal
8D020D1112 BO14 BO14 signal
8E020E1112 BO15 BO15 signal
8F020F1112 BO16 BO16 signal
8002101112 BO17 BO17 signal
8102111112 BO18 BO18 signal
After the contact-driver

 Signal monitoring points (after the contact-driver)
8002001113 BO1 RB BO1 driver read signal
8A020A1113 BO11 RB BO11 driver read signal
8B020B1113 BO12 RB BO12 driver read signal
8C020C1113 BO13 RB BO13 driver read signal
8D020D1113 BO14 RB BO14 driver read signal
8E020E1113 BO15 RB BO15 driver read signal
8F020F1113 BO16 RB BO16 driver read signal
- 431 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Connection points for the PLC

310200E11D BO1-SOURCE BO1 output command by PLC-logic
31020AE11D BO11-SOURCE BO11 output command by PLC-logic
31020BE11D BO12-SOURCE BO12 output command by PLC-logic
31020CE11D BO13-SOURCE BO13 output command by PLC-logic
31020DE11D BO14-SOURCE BO14 output command by PLC-logic
31020EE11D BO15-SOURCE BO15 output command by PLC-logic
31020FE11D BO16-SOURCE BO16 output command by PLC-logic
(ii) Tables (IO_SLOT2 to SLOTn) at IO#2 to IO#n (Function ID: 200B02 to

200B0n)
Before the contact-driver
After the contact-driver

Connection points for the PLC

- 432 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Power supply module (PWS)

The power supply module (PWS) consists of a DC/DC converter and line noise filters. The input
range rating of the PWS is 110V to 250V DC.
Alpha-numeric reference of PWS. Sign “*” is
Alpha-numeric reference of PWS. Sign “*” is
substituted for actual slot location number.4
substituted for actual slot location number.4
T* T*
PWS PWS
T
1* Ring plug type
2
3 terminal block
4
5 T*
6 2
2
7
8 1 2 4
4
9
10 FAIL15 3 4
FAIL15
3 3
11
12 5 6 1
13 1
14 7 8
15 9 10
16
17 8 11 12 8
18 10
19 10 13 14
20 FAIL25
FAIL25 9 15 16 9
17 18
7 7
21 22
21
22 23 24
23
24 25 26
25 29 29
26 Positive(+) DC 27 28 Positive(+) DC
30
27
30
/ 29 30 /
28
31 DC 31 DC
29 Negative(−) 31 32 Negative(−)
30 32 32
33 34
31
35 Short-wire1 35
32
33 35 36
36 36
34 Short-wire1 37 38
35 37 37
FG
36
37 Short-bar2(B) 38
38
38 Short-wire2(A)
39
40
E E
FG FG
FG
E3 E3
Frame earth Screw Frame earth Screw

Schematic diagram Schematic diagram

Figure 5.5-1 Schematic diagram and relationship of PWS terminal block
Figure 5.5-1 shows the difference between ‘Compression plug type terminal’ and ‘Ring type
terminal’. Alpha-numeric reference “T*” identifies slot locations, and an asterisk “*” shows its
slot number. An external connection figure illustrates the PSW location (see Appendix: Typical
External connection).
- 433 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Table 5.5-1 PWS terminal screws and signal names

Terminal Signal
Purposes
screw No. names
1 4 Fail1
Outputs of the automatic supervision function5
7 10 Fail2
29 31
Power IN Power inlet
(+) (−)
Power inlet (spare). It can be used when bus power distribution
30 32
Power IN is required in PSW. If PSW cables are thin, use these (No.30&32)
(+) (−)
together with those (No.29&31).
Type using compression terminals:
35 37 No.35 and No.37 are linked with a short wire. No.38 and FG link
with a frame grounding wire.
FG
Type using ring terminals:
38, FG No.35, 37 and FG are linked with a short wire and a short bar.
E Earth The IED must be connected to the earth with E terminal.
Table 5.5-2 PWS specifications

Input voltage Voltage fluctuation
Description
rating6 permissible
Input voltage (110/125Vdc, 220/250Vdc) is
DC: 110 to
DC: 88 to 300V available where the voltage varies in ±20% of the
250V
rated voltage (110V× 80% to 250V×120%).
CAUTION
1Note: The connection (triplet lines) between terminal screw No. 35 and terminal screw
No. 37 is made with a short-wire, which is installed by the manufacturer. Read
Appendix: Notes for the dielectric voltage test carefully and follow the instructions
during testing.
2ANote: The connection–for Type using compression terminals–between terminal screw
38 and screw labeled “FG” is made with a short-wire by the manufacturer.
2BNote: The connection–for Type using ring terminals–between terminal screw 37 and
screw labeled “FG” is made with a short-bar by the manufacturer.
3Note: For installation, the user should connect the case earth screw labeled “E” to the
protective earth of the panel or others using earthing wire, such that its cross-
section is AWG9 or larger.
- 434 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
4ANote:The user–for Type using compression terminals–can connect a cable to this

terminal directly without a cable ferrule; hence, the recommended cables are
AWG14 and their stripping lengths are 10mm. Use “AI 2.5 -10 BU” ferrule for
AWG14 when the user wishes to use a cable ferrule made by PHOENIX
CONTACT®.
5Note: The PWS module monitors DC voltages. The supervision function can issue a power
failure when the DC voltage is less than 85V (default threshold; for more
information about the failure, see Chapter Automatic supervision function). The
user can change the 85V threshold to 170V by inserting a shunt connecter (1-2) at
JP4 on the PWS module (see Figure 5.5-2).
6Note: IED (PWS module) can run on AC power supply (100–220Vac), but the operation is
not guaranteed. Power failure (error) is issued when the supervision function is not
disabled, if the IED runs on AC power supply for testing etc.
JP4 JP4
3 3
2 2
1 1
Setting to 170V (typical) Setting to 85V (typical)

(Position ‘1-2’) (Default position ‘2-3’)
Figure 5.5-2 Alarm threshold for DC voltage dropping on PWS module
- 435 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Human Machine Interface (HMI)

5.6.1 Outlook
Figure 5.6-1 shows the outlook of human machine interface module (HMI) on the front panel.
The HMI has a screen (standard LCD or large LCD ‘MIMIC’), LED indicators (#1– #26),
operation keys, function keys (F1–F7), monitoring jacks (Term A/B/C) and a USB receptacle.
The LCD can display information; e.g. IED operation menu, status, setting data, monitoring,
fault records and others. We shall see the menus on the display in Chapter User interface later.
A USB receptacle in B-type is provided for the connection to the PC. Thus, the user can connect
the engineering tools (GR-TIEMS®) or the PLC editor (MULTIPLOG®) with the IED using the
USB receptacle.
LED indicators
(#1–#26) Screen
Indicator label
Operation keys
Function keys
(F1–F7)
Monitoring jacks
(Term A/B/C) USB port
Figure 5.6-1 HMI on front panel
- 436 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
5.6.2 LED Indicators

The LED indicators #1 and #2 are used to indicate the IED statuses. The others (#3 to #26) are
provided to indicate statuses, which the user wishes to check; the settings or by the PLC
function can control to indicate the statuses. The user can make a new indicator label using
the label maker of the GR-TIEMS®. (See Chapter Engineering tool)
The LED indicators‡ (#3 to #26) are also provided as user-programmable indicators.
Figure 5.6-2 shows the schematic diagrams. Each LED indicator can be lit and controlled using
a logic-gate-switch setting and others. For simplicity, we discuss setting the LED indicator #3
only, but the user can take account that setting the other LED indicators (#4 to #26) is the
same as the #3. Table 5.6-1 shows the LED indicator settings; Table 5.6-2 shows the signal
monitoring points on all LED indicator logics.
‡Note:Setting menus of the LED indicator are also discussed in Chapter User interface:
I/O setting sub-menu.
(i) Selection of input signals

The LED indicator (#3) is lit by entering signals from other functions; eight ports are provided
for the entering signals, designated as input-signal1 to input-signal8. The user should ensure
one or more DataIDs are set for the input-signal1 to input-signal8. Entering signals are
designated using DataIDs, respectively; the user should set respective DataIDs for the settings
[Input signal1] to [Input signal8].
(ii) Logic gate switch

In the LED indicator logic #3 a logic scheme is provide for the eight entering signals; the
entering signals are grouped by the selection using scheme switch [LOGIC-SW] for which the
user should set either AND, OR or XOR.
- 437 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
LED-03
3100031001
[On Delay Timer] [Off Delay Timer] LED indicator #3
& ≥1
[Input signal 1] t 0 0 t DRIVER
& AND & [Logic Timer] ≥1
[Input signal 2] 0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s
1
& 0 t
[Input signal 3]
&
≥1 OR [INVERSE-SW] Normal 0.000-300.000s
Inverse
Off &
=1 XOR
Delay
[Input signal 8]
[LOGIC-SW] Dwell & Blink
Blink
[TIMER-SW]
Latch &
F/F
[Reset signal]
LED-04
3100041001 LED indicator #4
[On Delay Timer] [Off Delay Timer]
& ≥1
[Input signal 2]
0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s
1
[Input signal 3]
& 0 t
&
≥1 OR 0.000-300.000s
[INVERSE-SW] Normal
Inverse
Off &
=1 XOR
Delay
[Input signal 8]
Dwell &
[LOGIC-SW] Blink
Blink
[TIMER-SW]
Latch &
F/F
[Reset signal]
LED-26
31001A100
[On Delay Timer] [Off Delay Timer] LED indicator #26
& ≥1
[Input signal 2] 0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s
1
& 0 t
[Input signal 3]
&
Inverse
Off &
=1 XOR
Delay
[Input signal 8]
Dwell &
[LOGIC-SW] Blink
Blink
[TIMER-SW]
Latch &
F/F
[Reset signal]
Figure 5.6-2 LED indicator logics (#3 to #26)
(iii) Delayed pick-up/delayed drop-off signal

For the LED indicator logic #3 the user can use an on-delay timer and an off-delay timer; both
are used to adjust the timing for lighting the LED indicator #3. The user should set their
respective time values for settings [On Delay Timer] and [Off Delay Timer].
(iv) Logic level inversion

On the LED indicator logic #3 the entering signal is inverted by the logic inversion function;
inverting an entering signal is carried out when the user sets Inverse for the scheme switch
[INVERSE-SW]. Set Normal for the scheme switch when logic inversion is not required.
- 438 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(v) Logic timer switch

The LED indicator #3 can have programmable reset characteristics using scheme switch
[TIMER-SW]. Four types are available: (1) dwell type, (2) delay type, (3) latch type, and (4)
instantaneous type:
Instant type
When required not to have the below characteristics (v)-2, (v)-3, and (v)-4, the user should set
Off for the scheme switch [TIMER-SW].
Delay type
If the user requires lighting the LED indicator with a delayed characteristic, the user should
set Delay for scheme switch [TIMER-SW] and set the value of the pulse width using setting
[Logic timer].
Dwell type
For instance, if the user requires lighting the LED indicator as a one shot pulse, the user
should set Dwell for scheme switch [TIMER-SW] and set the value of the pulse width using
setting [Logic timer]. If the input signals received have a shorter duration than the set value
in the setting [Logic timer], the pulse width will be equal to the setting value. On the other
hand, if the duration of the input signals are longer than that of the set value, the pulse width
will be equal to the width of the input signals.
Latch type
If the user requires lighting the LED indicator to be removed by a reset signal, the user should
set Latch for scheme switch [TIMER-SW]; the user should set the Data ID of the reset signal
for setting [Reset signal]. Since lighting the LED indicator is cleared with the Data ID, the
user should determine the Data ID from other functions. The Data ID is designated by the
signal monitoring point for each function and the user should set the [Reset signal] setting.
(vi) Selection of the LED color

For the LED indicator #3, color selection of either RED/GREEN/YELLOW is possible using the
setting [Color].
- 439 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Table 5.6-1 Settings of LED indictors #3 to #26 (Function ID: 201B01))
Default setting
Setting items Range Units Contents
value
LED#3 Color RED / GREEN / YELLOW - LED#3 color selection RED

Input signal1 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the first input on LED3 (No Assigned)
Input signal2 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the second input on LED#3. (No Assigned)
Input signal3 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the third input on LED#3. (No Assigned)
Input signal4 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the forth input on LED#3. (No Assigned)
Input signal5 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the fifth input on LED#3. (No Assigned)
Input signal6 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the sixth input on LED#3. (No Assigned)
Input signal7 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the seventh input on LED#3. (No Assigned)
Input signal8 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the eighth input on LED#3. (No Assigned)
LOGIC-SW AND / OR / XOR - Switch for logic-gate operation on LED#3 AND
On Delay Timer 0.00 – 300.00 s Set a value for an on-delay-timer on LED#3 0.00
Off Delay Timer 0.00 – 300.00 s Set a value for an off-delay-timer on LED#3 0.00
INVERSE-SW Normal / Inverse - Inversion operation of LED#3 signal Normal
TIMER-SW Off/Delay/Dwell/Latch/Blink - Selection of a type in the delay timer on LED#3 Off
Logic Timer 0.00 – 300.00 s Off delay timer value for "Delay" and "Dwell" circuit 0.00
Reset signal (Preferred Data ID) - Setting Data ID for "Latch" circuit (No Assigned)
Input signal1 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the first input on LED#4 (No Assigned)
……….
Input signal1 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the first input on LED#26 (No Assigned)
- 440 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Table 5.6-2 Signal monitoring points on all LED indicator (Function ID: 201B01)
3100021001 ERROR Error LED
3100011001 IN SERV In service LED
3100031001 LED-03 Output signal of the LED indicator #3
31000A1001 LED-10 Output signal of the LED indicator #10
31000B1001 LED-11 Output signal of the LED indicator #11
31000C1001 LED-12 Output signal of the LED indicator #12
31000D1001 LED-13 Output signal of the LED indicator #13
31000E1001 LED-14 Output signal of the LED indicator #14
31000F1001 LED-15 Output signal of the LED indicator #15
31001A1001 LED-26 Output signal of the LED indicator #26
- 441 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
5.6.3 Function keys with LEDs

The function keys (F1 to F7) are provided to jump to other menus during the LCD operation;
the jump destinations are already set as factory default (see Table 5.6-3). However, the user
can program the F1 to F7 keys to jump to user-preferred menus using settings. Incidentally,
the user can program the function key so that a binary signal is generated when the user
presses the function key.
Table 5.6-3 Function keys and jump destinations (default)
Function LED lit when
Jump destination as default
Key# pressing
F1 Metering menu Yellow

F2 Fault Record menu Yellow
F3 Event Record1 menu Yellow
F6 Diagnostics menu Yellow
F7 (Not defined) Yellow
For testing, the user can also program to generate binary signals when the user presses
the F1 to F7 keys. The F1 to F7 circuits have LEDs; accordingly, the user can also program to
light the LEDs using the settings.
(i) Screen jump pressing the function key

The user can program the F1 to F7 keys as the user-preferred jump keys. For example, when
the user wishes to use the F1 key to jump to another screen, set Screen jump for scheme switch
[Function] in the F1 key (see Table 5.6-6). We shall see the setting in Chapter User interface:
Setting sub-menu: Configuration of Function keys.
(ii) Binary signal generated pressing the function key

When the user wishes to generate a binary signal upon occurrence of pressing the F1 key, set
Assign Signal for scheme switch [Function] in the F1 key. For instance, if the user wishes to
send a signal generated pressing F1 to the binary output circuit (BO1‡) at the IO#1 slot, set
the Data ID of “FUNC-KEY1(240001 310001730)” for the setting [Input signal 1] of the BO1‡
circuit. Note that the user should set On for the scheme switch [BO1_CPL] when the connection
is done using the setting [Input signal 1]. Figure 5.6-3 shows that a generate signal is outputted
at the FUNC-KEY1 SIGNAL. Table 5.6-7 shows the other FUNC-KEY2 to 7 points. We shall
see the setting procedure in Chapter User interface: Setting sub-menu: Signal control function.
- 442 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Function key logic for F1 Terminal and

(Function ID: 240001) BO1 circuit at IO_SLOT1 (Function ID: 200B01) wire
“BO1”
Setting Data ID “F1 Signal designated by
setting [Input signal 1] ≥1 (200B01_8002001112)
SIGNAL” for the Signal to the
device
“FUNC-KEY1” [Input signal 1] [Input signal 2] DRIVER BO1
& ≥1
Pressing the F1 key (240001_ 3100001730)
[Input signal 3]
& “BO1-RB”
F1 [Input signal 4] [BO1_CPL] On
Off
&
(200B01_8002001113)
[Input signal 5]
To contact health
[Input signal 6]
check
[Input signal 7]
[Input signal 8]
“F1 SIGNAL”
Setting Data ID (240001_ 3100001737) PLC connection point in BO1
“BO1_SOURCE”
&
for the [Signal]† 200B01 310200E11D BO1_SOURCE
[Logic] Instant
Toggle
Figure 5.6-3 F1 key connected with the BO1‡

‡Note:The BO1 circuit is used just for an explanation; it is discussed in Chapter
Technical description: Binary IO module.
†Note:When the user wishes to inject the signal at the PLC connection point of the “BO1-
SOURCE (200B01 31200E11D at the IO#1 slot)”, the user should set the BO1-
SOURCE (200B01 31200E11D) for the setting [Signal] of the F1 key. Then, set Off
for the scheme switch [BO1_CPL]
The user can select either Toggle or Instant modes for the signal generation using scheme
switch [LOGIC], as shown in Table 5.6-4. Thus, the user can substitute “F1-SIGNAL (240001
310001737)” for the “FUNC-KEY1 SIGNAL (240001 310001730)”, provided the Toggle mode
is preferred. In the Table 5.6-7 the other FUNC-KEY2 to FUNC-KEY7 are shown.
Table 5.6-4 Signal mode selection using setting [LOGIC]
Setting Generated signal corresponding to pressing the function key
Pressing Key
Toggle
Binary signal
Pressing Key
Instant
Binary signal
(iii) Lighting LEDs on F1 to F7

Figure 5.6-4 shows the F1 to F7 LED logics. Programing to light the LEDs (F1 to F7) is the
same as the programing of the LED indicators (#3 to #26) (for the programming, see section
5.6.2). As a default, e.g., the “FUNC-KEY1 (240001 310001730)” is set for the setting [Input
signal 1] of the F1 LED logic. The LED-F2 to F7 points are listed in Table 5.6-8.
- 443 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
31001B1001
[On Delay Timer] [Off Delay Timer] F1 LED logic
& ≥1
t 0 0 t LED-F1
[Input signal 1] DRIVER
[Input signal 2] 0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s
1
& 0 t
[Input signal 3]
&
Inverse
Off &
=1 XOR
Delay
[Input signal 8]
Dwell &
[LOGIC-SW] Blink
Blink
[TIMER-SW]
Latch &
F/F
[Reset signal]
[On Delay Timer] [Off Delay Timer] 31001C1001 F2 LED logic
& ≥1
[Input signal 1] t 0 0 t LED-F2
DRIVER
& AND 0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s 1 & [Logic Timer] ≥1
[Input signal 2] & 0 t
[Input signal 3]
[INVERSE-SW]
&
≥1 OR Normal 0.000-300.000s
Inverse
Off &
=1 XOR
Delay
[Input signal 8]
Dwell &
[LOGIC-SW] Blink
Blink
[TIMER-SW]
Latch &
F/F
[Reset signal]
[On Delay Timer] [Off Delay Timer] 3100211001 F7 LED logic

& ≥1
[Input signal 1] t 0 0 t LED-F7
DRIVER
& AND 0.000-300.000s 0.000-300.000s 1 & [Logic Timer] ≥1
[Input signal 2] & 0 t
[Input signal 3]
&
Inverse
Off &
=1 XOR
Delay
[Input signal 8]
Dwell &
[LOGIC-SW] Blink
Blink
[TIMER-SW]
Latch &
F/F
[Reset signal]
Figure 5.6-4 LED logics on the function keys F1 to F7
Table 5.6-5 Settings of Function keys (Function ID: 240001)

Default setting
value
Screen Jump / Assign Signal /
Function - Operation mode for the F1 key Screen Jump
No Assign
F1
Signal (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the input on F1 key (No Assigned)
Logic Instant / Toggle - Switch for logic-gate operation on F1 Instant
No Assign
F2
……….
No Assign
F7
- 444 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Table 5.6-6 Settings of LEDs on the Function keys (Function ID: 240001)
Default setting
value
Input signal1 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the first input on F1 (No Assigned)
Input signal2 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the second input on F1. (No Assigned)
Input signal3 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the third input on F1. (No Assigned)
Input signal4 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the forth input on F1. (No Assigned)
Input signal5 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the fifth input on F1. (No Assigned)
Input signal6 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the sixth input on F1. (No Assigned)
Input signal7 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the seventh input on F1. (No Assigned)
F1 Input signal8 (Preferred Data ID) - Set a Data ID at the eighth input on F1. (No Assigned)
LOGIC-SW AND / OR / XOR - Switch for logic-gate operation on F1 AND
INVERSE-SW Normal / Inverse - Inversion operation of F1 signal Normal
TIMER-SW Off/Delay/Dwell/Latch/Blink - Selection of a type in the delay timer on F1 Off
On Delay Timer 0.00 – 300.00 s Set a value for an on-delay-timer on F1 0.00
Off Delay Timer 0.00 – 300.00 s Set a value for an off-delay-timer on F1 0.00
……….
- 445 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Table 5.6-7 Signal monitoring points for KEYINPUT (Function ID: 240001)
3100001737 F1 SIGNAL Signal generated when pressing F1 referring the setting [LOGIC]
3100001730 FUNC-KEY1 Signal generated directly when pressing F1
Table 5.6-8 Signal monitoring points for function LEDs (Function ID: 201B01)
31001B1001 LED-F1 Signal generated during pressing the F1 key
31001C1001 LED-F2 Signal generated during pressing the F2 key
31001D1001 LED-F3 Signal generated during pressing the F3 key
31001E1001 LED-F4 Signal generated during pressing the F4 key
31001F1001 LED-F5 Signal generated during pressing the F5 key
3100201001 LED-F6 Signal generated during pressing the F6 key
3100211001 LED-F7 Signal generated during pressing the F7 key
- 446 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
5.6.4 Monitoring jacks

A monitoring jack including a LED is provided so that the user can monitor a binary signal on
the logic straightforwardly. For example, when the user wishes to monitor the operating state
of a relay function, set the signal number (Data ID) that the user wishes to monitor; then the
user can see lighting the LED when the relay is operated. Using with an oscilloscope, the user
can also observe the binary signal that comes from the monitoring jack; three monitoring jacks
(Term A, B, and C) are available on the front panel.
Table 5.6-9 Output terminals for signal monitoring (No default setting)
Jack Jack name LED Color Remarks
A Term A Yellow Set user’s preferred signal number

B Term B Yellow Set user’s preferred signal number
C Term C Yellow Set user’s preferred signal number
When the user wishes to test the phase-A element the OC1 relay using an oscilloscope,
for example, set the phase-A monitoring point (44001 8000011C20†) for the setting [Term A],
as shown in Figure 5.6-5. Consequently, the OC1 operating signal is outputted to the jack at
the Term A. The LED at the Term A is also lit in step with the output signal. The user can use
to monitor the phase-B and phase-C signals using by settings respective Data IDs for the [Term
B] and [Term C]. We shall see the menus for the Term A to Term C in Chapter User interface:
Test sub-menu: Signal monitoring screen.
OC function
(Function ID: 440001) Monitoring jack (Function ID: 201301) Jacks and LEDs
Signal designated by
setting [Term A] DRIVER Term Signal to the
440001 8000011C20
A oscilloscope
A
OC1 440001 8100011C21
B “TEST-A”
440001 8200011C22 (201B01_3100221001)
C
Term A LED
setting [Term B] DRIVER Term Signal to the
B oscilloscope
“TEST-B”
(201B01_3100231001)
Term B LED
setting [Term C] DRIVER Term Signal to the
C oscilloscope
“TEST-C”
(201B01_3100241001)
Term C LED
Figure 5.6-5 Monitoring logics A, B and C

†Note:The monitoring point is just selected for the explanation; the user can select a
monitoring point from the relay applications and the control and monitoring
applications. The monitoring points is listed as PLC monitoring points in each
function.
- 447 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Table 5.6-10 Settings of Monitoring jacks (Function ID: 201301)

Setting items Range Contents
s value
Term A (Preferred Data ID) - Select a signal for Term A (No Assigned)
Term B (Preferred Data ID) - Select a signal for Term B (No Assigned)
Term C (Preferred Data ID) - Select a signal for Term C (No Assigned)
Table 5.6-11 Signal monitoring points for monitoring jack LEDs (Function ID: 201B01)
3100221001 TEST-A TEST-A
3100231001 TEST-B TEST-B
3100241001 TEST-C TEST-C
- 448 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
5.6.5 Operation keys

(i) L/R key
The IED has two LEDs on the L/R key; either LEDs is lit in response to a local mode or a
remote mode. Lighting the LED is instructed by the LOCRMT function. Table 5.6-12 shows
the signal monitoring points on the L/R LEDs.
Table 5.6-12 Signal monitoring points for L/R LEDs (Function ID: 201B01)
3100251001 LOC LED Local
3100261001 REM LED Remote
(ii) Operation keys except L/R key

Like in the function keys (F1 to F7), the operation keys can provide signals when pressing the
keys; the user can monitor the signals at the signal monitoring points in Table 5.6-13.
Table 5.6-13 Signal monitoring points for KEYINPUT (Function ID: 240001)
3100081730 CANCEL Key situation of CANCEL
31000E1730 CLEAR Key situation of CLEAR
31000D1730 CLOSE Key situation of CLOSE
31000F1730 DOWN Key situation of DOWN
3100071730 ENTER Key situation of ENTER
3100091730 HELP Key situation of HELP
3100111730 LEFT Key situation of LEFT
31000A1730 LOC/REM Key situation of LOC/REM
31000C1730 OPEN Key situation of OPEN
3100121730 RIGHT Key situation of RIGHT
3100101730 UP Key situation of UP
- 449 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Clock function
Clock function (or time function) provides the time information for recording upon occurrence
of the fault; it includes a synchronization function when the reference clock is available out of
the IED. The clock is operated referring the Coordinated Universal Time (UTC‡) when the
UTC is selected; the clock can run in accordance with the user’s time zone and summer
time(DST)† by referring the UTC when the time zone and the DST are set. The explanation is
also found in Chapter User interface: Time sub-menu.
†Note:In other words, it is called “daylight saving time (DST)”. For setting, see section
5.7.5.
‡Note:For example, the Internet and World Wide Web standards run in the UTC. For
more information, see section 5.7.4.
5.7.1 Clock setting

The user can set the time using the time sub-menu as shown in Figure 5.7-1. The user also can
set the time using the GR-TIEMS†.
Clock
10:00 1/2
[Time] +
2012-11-21 10:00:05
[Format]
YYYY-MM-DD HH:mm:ss
[ActiveSyncSrc] >
SNTP
Figure 5.7-1 Time sub-menu in Clock menu

†Note:Make the calibration the when the clock is set using the GR-TIMES. This is
because the transmission time is required from the PC to the IED.
5.7.2 Selection of date and time formats

The user can select user-preferred date/time format; setting [Data_fmt] is provided for the
selection of the format. For example, ‘March 24th 2014 10:48’ can be displayed when the format
“DDMMYYYY” is selected.
 “2014-03-24 10:48” is displayed upon the selection of “YYYYMMDD”.
 “03-24-2014 10:48” is displayed upon the selection of “MMDDYYYY”.
 “24-03-2014 10:48” is displayed upon the selection of “DDMMYYYY”.
Display Format
10:48 1/4
Date_fmt +
YYYYMMDD
Date_delimiter +
-
Time_delimiter +
:
Figure 5.7-2 Setting screen of Display format
- 450 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
5.7.3 Time Synchronization

The synchronization function can run when a synchronized signal is provided for respective
IEDs; the user should select one of the following synchronization methods using the setting
[Time_Sync_Src]:
 SNTP method
 IRIG-B method
 Binary Input (BI) method
(i) Synchronization using SNTP

Example of SNTP synchronization
The SNTP method is possible when IEDs connect with time-servers. Figure 5.7-3 exemplifies
two servers are connected with the IEDs using the LAN.
Time server1 Time server2
LAN
………….
IED_1 IED_2 IED_n
Figure 5.7-3 Two time servers connected on the LAN
Setting procedure
The user should make the following steps in respective IEDs.
1) Set SNTP for the setting [Time Sync Src]; then set On for the setting [SNTP].
2) Set the address of a time server using settings [Server1]. The settings [Server2],
[Server3], and [Server4] are provided for other time-servers.
3) Check that the SNTP is shown under the ActivSyncSrc, as shown in Figure 5.7-4.
4) Check to see that the time zone and the DST are set correctly (see 5.7.4 and 5.7.5).
Clock
10:00 1/2
[Time] +
2012-11-21 10:00:05
[Format]
YYYY-MM-DD HH:mm:ss
[ActiveSyncSrc] > Check “SNTP” being shown under ActiveSyncSrc.
SNTP
Figure 5.7-4 Time setting for SNTP

Table 5.7-1 Settings for the SNTP synchronization
Setting item Range Contents Setting example Notes
TimeSyncSrc SNTP / BI / IRIG-B Selection of sync method SNTP
SNTP Off /On Operation of SNTP ()On
Server1 000.000.000.000–255.255.255.255 Setting for Time server 1 197.1.23.11
- 451 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(ii) Synchronization using IRIG-B

Example of IRIG-B synchronization
The IRIG-B method is possible when a synchronization signal in the IRIG-B format is provided.
The synchronization signal is transferred using the IRIG-B000 module†.
IED
IRIG-B000†
Clock
10:00 1/2
Signal [Time] +
A1 2012-11-21 10:00:05
IRIG-B signal
[Format]
generator Unit GND
A3 YYYY-MM-DD HH:mm:ss
[ActiveSyncSrc]
IRIG-B
Figure 5.7-5 IED connected with the signal generator unit using IRIG-B000 module
†Note:See Chapter Technical description: Signal processing and communication module.
Setting procedure
1) Set IRIG-B for the setting [Time Sync Src]; then set On for the setting [IRIG-SYNC].
2) Check that the IRIG-B is shown under the ActivSyncSrc, as shown in Figure 5.7-6.
Clock
10:00 1/2
[Time] +
2012-11-21 10:00:05
[Format]
YYYY-MM-DD HH:mm:ss
[ActiveSyncSrc]
Check “IRIG-B” being shown under ActiveSyncSrc.
IRIG-B
Figure 5.7-6 Time setting for IRIG-B
Setting year in IRIG-B

When the IRIG-B data is generated in the IEEE C37.118 / IRIG-B000 format, the user should
set On for setting [USE_BCDYEAR]. Conversely, when the IRIG-B data with absence the
C37.118† is generated, Off should be set for the setting [USE_BCDYEAR].
†Note: “Year” is informed from the IED clock itself when the C37.118 is absent.
Setting UTC/local time

When the IRIG-B data is generated in the UTC†, set Off for the setting [USE_LOCALTIME].
Conversely, when the IRIG-B data is generated in the local time‡, set On for setting
[USE_LOCALTIME]; set Off for the setting [IS_UTC_base].
†Note:We shall see the settings of the UTS in section 5.7.4.
‡Note:In the IRIG-B signal generator unit, the DST settings should be corresponded to
the DST settings of the IED. We shall see the DST settings in section 5.7.5.
- 452 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Table 5.7-2 Settings for the IRIG-B Time synchronization

Setting
example
TimeSyncSrc SNTP / BI / IRIG-B Selection of sync method IRIG-B
IRIG-SYNC Off /On Operation of IRIG-B On
USE_BCDYEAR Off / On Selection of IEEE C37.118/IRIG-B000 Off
USE_LOCALTIME Off / On Operation in the local time Off
(iii) Synchronization using BI signal

When accurate1Hz square-wave can be supplied as a reference clock, the clock function can
make the time synchronization. The 1Hz square-wave is transferred using a binary input
circuit (BI).
Example of time synchronization via BI circuit

Figure 5.7-7 exemplifies that the 1Hz square-wave is provided via the BI1 circuit†.
IED
BI1
BI1A (200B01 8001001111)
1
2 BI1
3
4 BI2
5
6 BI3
7
8 BI4
9
10 BI5 Setting [BI_ID]
11
12 BI6
13
14 BI7
15
16 BI8
17
18 BI9 Clock
21
22 BI10
23
24 BI11
25
26 BI12
27
Signal generator 28 BI13
29
30 BI14
31
32 BI15
1Hz squire wave 33
34 BI16
35
36 BI17
37
38 BI18
IO#1
Figure 5.7-7 IED connected with the signal generator via BI module
†Note:The BI1 circuit is just used for the explanation; hence, an actual BI circuit should
be selected in accordance with wiring cables. For more information of the BI
circuit, see Chapter Technical description: Binary IO module.
- 453 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Setting procedure
1) Set BI for the setting [Time Sync Src]; then set On for the setting [BI-SYNC].
2) Check BI is shown under the ActivSyncSrc, as shown in Figure 5.7-8.
3) Set a Data_ID for setting [BI_ID]. For example, as shown in the Figure 5.7-7, when
the user wishes to inject the signal at the BI1 on the IO#1 slot, the user should set
BI1(200B01 8001001111) for the setting [BI_ID].
4) Set a time adjuster for the setting [SYNC ADJ]. For example, set a value (e.g., −0.050s)
for setting [SYNC ADJ]. The setting is used when the clock function should be
synchronized before reaching the 1Hz square-wave due to the propagation or the
operating time on the BI circuit.
Clock
10:00 1/2
[Time] +
2012-11-21 10:00:05
[Format]
YYYY-MM-DD HH:mm:ss
[ActiveSyncSrc]
BI
Check “BI ” being shown under ActiveSyncSrc.
Figure 5.7-8 Time setting for BI
Table 5.7-3 Setting items for the BI Time synchronization

Setting item Range Contents Setting example Notes
TimeSyncSrc SNTP / BI / IRIG-B Selection of sync method BI
BI-SYNC Off /On Operation of BI On
BI_ID [Preferred ID] Signal monitoring point 200B01 8001001111
Time adjust factor (in −：Leading the clock
SYNC ADJ −0.050 to +0.050 0.000
sec.) +：Delaying the clock
- 454 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
5.7.4 Setting time zone

When the clock should run in the UTC, the user should set On for the setting [IS_UTC_base].
Additionally, the user should set the time zone† when the time should be displayed in the Local
standard time. The time zone is divided in every 15 minutes; the user can set it using 0.25
units (i.e., 15 min = 0.25 unit). For example, if the IED is used in Venezuela (UTC-04:30), the
user should set “−4.50” for the setting, as shown Figure 5.7-9.
Time Zone
10:48 1/1
Time zone +
-4.50hour
Figure 5.7-9 Setting screen of Time zone

Table 5.7-4 Example time offsets and locations
Time offset† Example locations
UTC−10:00 United States (Hawaii)
UTC−09:00 United States (Anchorage)
UTC−08:00 United States (PST)
UTC−06:00 Canada , Costa Rica, El Salvador, Ecuador, Mexico, United States (CST)
UTC−05:00 Brazil (Acre), Colombia, Cuba, Jamaica, Panama, Peru, United States (EST)
UTC−04:30 Venezuela
UTC−04:00 Bolivia, Brazil, Dominican Republic, Puerto Rico, Barbados
UTC−03:00 Argentina, Brazil (Bahia, Pernambuco), Chile
UTC−02:00 Brazil (Fernando de Noronha)
UTC±00:00 United kingdom, Iceland, Ireland, Senegal, Saint Helena, Mali
UTC+01:00 Germany, Hungary, Italy, France, Montenegro
UTC+02:00 Egypt, Estonia, Finland, Slovenia, Greece
UTC+03:00 Ethiopia, Iraq, Kenya, Madagascar, Russia, Saudi Arabia, Turkey
UTC+04:00 Armenia, Azerbaijan, Oman, Seychelles, United Arab Emirates
UTC+05:00 Pakistan
UTC+05:30 India, Sri Lanka
UTC+06:00 Bangladesh, Bhutan, Kazakhstan
UTC+06:30 Myanmar
UTC+07:00 Western Indonesia, Thailand, Vietnam, Cambodia, Laos
UTC+08:00 China, Malaysia, Philippines, Australia (Western Australia), Mongolia
UTC+09:00 Japan, South Korea
UTC+10:00 Australia (Queensland)
UTC+12:00 New Zealand
†Note:Time zone is expressed in the difference between UTC and the local standard time
(wintertime).
Table 5.7-5 Setting time zone

Setting
example
IS_UTC_base On / Off Selection of either the UTC or the local time On
- 455 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
5.7.5 DST setting (Summer time setting)

When the summer time (DST) is applied, the user should set the beginning and the ending
dates of the DST in the clock function. The user should set On for the setting [Summer time]
for DST.
Note: The clock function is not designed for particular DSTs such as they are depending
on the religious events and the astronomy.
(i) DST set by the day (Mon to Sun) of week

For example, when the DST starts at 01:00 a.m. on Sunday of the fifth week in March and it
ends at 2:00 a.m. on Sunday of the fourth week in October, the user has the following settings.
Note that transposing the calendar is required, as shown in Figure 5.7-10; accordingly the first
of the month is located at the first row and the first column of the transposed calendar.
Beginning of the DST at 01:00 a.m. in Mar. 29 E nding of the DST at 02:00 a.m. in Oct. 25
March October
Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun
1 1 2 3 4
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 26 27 28 29 30
30 31
Transposed Transposed
March October
Week Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Week Thu Fri Sat Sun Mon Tue Wed
1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
2 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 2 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
3 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 3 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
4 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 4 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
5 29 30 31 5 29 30
Setting 3 for the [Start_Month] Setting 10 for the [End_Month]

Setting 5 for the [Start_Week] Setting 4 for the [End_Week]
Setting Sun for the [Start_Wday] Setting Sun for the [End_Wday]
Setting 1 for the [Start_Hour] Setting 2 for the [End_Hour]
Figure 5.7-10 DST setting examples by the day of week
(ii) DST set by the day (1st or 15th) of month

For example, when the DST starts at 01:00 p.m. on the first day in March and it ends at 3:00
p.m. on the middle day in October; the user has the following settings.
- 456 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
March October
Week Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Week Thu Fri Sat Sun Mon Tue Wed
1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
2 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 2 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
3 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 3 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
4 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 4 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
5 29 30 31 5 29 30
Beginning of the DST E nding of the DST

at 01:00 p.m. in Mar. 1 at 03:00 p.m. in Oct. 15
Setting 3 for the [Start_Month] Setting 10 for the [End_Month]

Setting 1 for the [Start_Week] Setting 3 for the [End_Week]
Setting – for the [Start_Wday] Setting – for the [End_Wday]
Setting 13 for the [Start_Hour] Setting 15 for the [End_Hour]
Figure 5.7-11 DST setting examples by the day (1st or 15th) of month
(iii) Time shift

After setting the DST, the clock is forwarded by 1 hour at the DST start; the clock is backed by
1 hour at the DST end.
Table 5.7-6 DST settings
Setting
example
Summer time On / Off Enabling DST operation On
Start_Month 1 to 12 Set the beginning of DST in the month 3
Start_Week 1 to 5 Set the beginning of DST in the week 5

–, Sun, Mon,
Start_Wday Tue, Wed, Thu, Set the beginning of DST in the day Sun
Fri, Sat
Start_Hour 0 to 23 Set the beginning of DST in 24 hour-clock 1
End_Month 1 to 12 Set the end of DST in the month 10
End_Week 1 to 5 Set the end of DST in the week 5

–, Sun, Mon,
End_Wday Tue, Wed, Thu, Set the end of DST in the day Sun
Fri, Sat
End_Hour 0 to 23 Set the beginning of DST in 24 hour-clock 2
- 457 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
5.7.6 Setting
Setting of CLOCK (Function ID: 200301)
s value
Timezone -14.00 - 14.00 hour Time zone 0.00
--- / SNTP / BI /
TimeSyncSrc - Time sync source SNTP
MODBUS / IRIG-B
YYYYMMDD /
Date_fmt MMDDYYYY / - YMD/MDY/DMY YYYYMMDD
DDMMYYYY
Date_delimiter -///. - - or / or . -
Time_delimiter :/. - : or period :
Sec_delimiter ./, - . or , .
SummerTime Off / On - Summer time enable Off
IS_UTC_base Off / On - Is setting value base on UTC? On
Start_Month 1 - 12 - Start month 3
Start_Week 1-5 - Start week 5
--- / Sun. / Mon. / Tue.
Start_Wday / Wed. / Thr. / Fri. / - Start day of week Sun.
Sat.
Start_Hour 0 - 23 - Start hour 1
End_Month 1 - 12 - End month 10
End_Week 1-5 - End week 5
--- / Sun. / Mon. / Tue.
End_Wday / Wed. / Thr. / Fri. / - End day of week Sun.
Sat.
End_Hour 0 - 23 - End hour 1
Setting of SNTP_SYNC (Function ID: 200A01)

s value
SNTP Off / On - Enabling SNTP synchronization On
Server1 0 - 255 - IP address#1 0. 0. 0. 0
Setting of BI_SYNC (Function ID: 202001)

s value
BI SYNC Off / On - BI sync switch Off
BI_ID [Preferred ID] - Source BI Data ID
SYNC ADJ -0.050 to 0.050 s Time adjust factor 0.000
Setting of IRIG_SYNC (Function ID: 202101)

s value
IRIG SYNC Off / On - IRIGB sync switch Off
USE_BCDYEAR Off / On - Use BCD year code Off
USE_LOCALTIME Off / On - Use local time Off
- 458 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Group setting for protection functions

With regard to protection functions (i.e., OC, EF, and others), eight groups are available for
settings, as shown in Figure 5.8-1; different values for the relays can be set as per
circumstances such as operation conditions and others. Note that changing the group cannot
be not carried out instantly.
Settings
Protection (Relay)
Group1 setting
OC
EF
OV
UV
THM
TRC
Group2 setting
OC
EF
OV
UV
THM
TRC
Group8 setting
OC
EF
OV
UV
THM
TRC
Figure 5.8-1 Eight groups for protection settings
(i) Changing group number by menu operation

The user can change the group number using the menu† on the IED screen. See the Chapter
User interface: Setting sub-menu.
(ii) Changing group number by user-programming

Another changing method is provided by programing PLC logics (For more information about
PLC programing, see the Chapter PLC function.) Figure 5.8-2 exemplifies a PLC logic:
changing group2 from group1 is performed while BI1 circuit is energized. The group setting
function “Setting (Function ID 201400)” has a signal reception point ‘PLC_Group_ENUM’ in
UNIT type; thus changing the group is performed when either numbers (1 to 8) enters at the
signal reception point. The example logic, designed for changing to group2 from group1,
- 459 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
consists of a binary input circuit (BI1), a number generation function (‘Binary selection’
provided in basic functions of the PLC editor), and the signal reception point. That is, when
the B1 switch is closed, a signal enters the BI1 circuit and is carried to the Binary selection;
accordingly the Binary selection, which is programmed to generate a group number ‘2’ in UNIT
when signal ‘1’ is injected in BOOL(BIT), can generates and inject the group number ‘2’ at the
‘PLC_Group_ENUM’. Consequently, the Setting function (201400) starts change the group
from number ‘1’ to ‘2’. Note that changing is only performed during the BI1 is closed in the
example logic; hence, the setting number goes back to ‘1’ when the BI1 is open.
GR200 IED
Binary selection
(+) (–)
IO_SLOT1 (200B01)
BI1 8001001110 Entering → Leaving 201400 314000E1A0 PLC_Group_ENUM Operation of
BI1 changing
‘1’ in BOOL ‘2’ in UNIT
‘0’ in BOOL ‘1’ in UNIT
BI2 8101011110
BI2
PLC basic-function PLC basic-function A group number enters

Binary input circuits BI1 and BI2
(Flip-Flop) (SEL) to “Setting function (FunctionID: 201400)”
at IO#1 (IO_SLOT1)
2 3
2
SEL DOUT_UNIT
1
DIN_BOOL RS
Unit#16#201400 FID ST
DO Q1 G
FID SET Unit#16#31 DTYPE
RESET1 Unit#16#1 IN0 Unit#16#4000E1A0 DID
DTYPE ST
IN1 DI
DID Unit#16#2
1
DIN_BOOL
FID DO
DTYPE ST
DID
Figure 5.8-2 Example for changing a group setting4

1Note: Function block for the binary input circuit (Binary input FB) is provided in User
library of PLC editor. See the Chapter PLC editing in Basic manual
“Programmable Logic Controller and PLC editor” attached the PLC software.
2Note: The SEL and RS functions are the basic functions. In the logic, when signal ‘1’
enters the SEL function, value ‘2’ is generated. For more information, see the help
menu on the PLC editor.
3Note: For your reference, changing to group3 is performed when value ‘3’ enters. In
other words, values ‘1’ to ‘8’ correspond to ‘group1’ to ‘group8’, respectively.
4Note: This example is designed to change ‘group1’ to ‘group2’ or ‘group2’ to ‘group1’.
Figure 5.8-3 exemplifies that selecting a group among eight groups is required by the
usage of three BI circuits (i.e., Group 1→Group2, Group3,… Group8).
- 460 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Binary input circuits BI1 to BI3 A group number enters

at IO#3 (IO_SLOT1) PLC basic-function PLC basic-function
to “Setting function
(Ondelay) (SEL)
(Function ID: 201400)”
BI3_1
DIN_BOOL TON
UDINT#16#200B03 FID DO IN Q BOOL_TO_UNIT
UDINT#16#80 DTYPE ST
UDINT#16#01001111 Delay time# PT ET
DID ADD
XX ms
BI3_2
DIN_BOOL TON DOUT_UNIT_1
UDINT#16#200B03 FID DO IN Q BOOL_TO_UNIT MUL
DOUT_UNIT
UDINT#16#80 DTYPE ST Unit#16#201400 FID ST
Delay time# PT ET
UDINT#16#01011111 DID UDINT#16#2 Unit#16#31 DTYPE
XX ms
Unit#16#4000E1A0 DID
DI
BI3_3
DIN_BOOL TON
UDINT#16#200B03 ADD ADD
FID DO IN Q BOOL_TO_UNIT
MUL
UDINT#16#80 DTYPE ST
UDINT#16#01021111 DID Delay time# PT ET
XX ms UDINT#16#4
UDINT#16#1
Figure 5.8-3 Logic for changing a group setting
(iii) Setting
Setting_PF (Function ID: 201400)
Default setting
value
Active Group 1 to 8 – Selection of a setting group number 1
(iv) Signal (Data ID)

314000E1A0 PLC_Group_ENUM Reception for setting group number

3200001001 ACT_GRP
3010011001 COM_CHG
3010031001 CTRL_CHG
3010021001 PRO_CHG
3010001001 SYS_CHG
- 461 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
6 Engineering tool
Common tools 465 Tool for Fault recorder 466
Configuration tools 466 Tool for Disturbance recorder 466
Comparison of settings 465 Tool for Event recorder 466
Configuration in IEC 61850 467 Label creator 465
Connection with PC 464 Logging management 465
Double command blocking (DCB) 465 Project management 465
Settings for Relay and control functions 466
Settings for Input and output signals 466
Settings for Event recorder 467
Setting of Interlock (ILK) 467
Signal monitor 465
Status monitor 465
- 462 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Overview of GR-TIEMS
When engineering, monitoring, record viewing, and test support functions are required in the
IED, the user can handle these advanced and integrated functions using GR-Series Toshiba
IED Engineering and Monitoring Software (GR-TIEMS). The GR-TIEMS should be installed
into a PC prior to engineering. After that, the user can view the IED states (Table 6.1-1) on a
PC screen connected with the IED. The user can also program the IED using the GR-TIEMS.
Figure 6.1-1 GR-TIEMS® screen on PC
Table 6.1-1 Information on the GR-TIEMS

Information Displaying format
Display of voltage and current waveform Oscillograph, vector display
Symmetrical component analysis On arbitrary time span
Harmonic analysis On arbitrary time span
Frequency analysis On arbitrary time span
The GR-TIEMS is software to retrieve and analyze power system quantities, fault and
event records. The user can change the settings in the respective IEDs when the PC is
connected with the IED via a USB or a LAN. For more information in the GR-TIEMS
operations, see separate manual “Operation manual GR-TIEMS (6F2M1082)”.
- 463 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Connection
Figure 6.2-1 illustrates that the user can connect the local PC with the IED (type B receptacle)
using a USB cable. Alternatively, the user can connect the local PC with the IED by connecting
a RJ45 cable to the LAN port (if available in the IED). In Figure 6.2-2, when using the LAN
port, the user has to select the communications option, which can be found from the Main menu
in GR-TIEMS (go to “Tool” ->“Option…”; “Option” dialog will be displayed; change
communications option with the second tab – ‘Communication’).
Tip: See Chapter Communication protocol.
IED
LAN
USB Cable
Personal Computer
Figure 6.2-1 USB Communications
Figure 6.2-2 GR-TIEMS Communications Options
- 464 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Common tools
(i) Project management
Project files are required to engage sub-engineering tools. The user can manage to read/write
the project file of the IED using the project management function. The user can also see the
contents of the project files.
(ii) Comparison
When the user wishes to get the comparison between respective IEDs, using the compare
function the user can get the comparison data for Setting, Setting I/O, Setting Event List,
Disturbance record binary signal, PLC, and IEC61850.
(iii) Pocket label creator

The user can create the name label of LEDs and Function keys for the IED front panel using
a pocket label sheet, which is provided together with the IED. For more information with
regard the LEDs and Function keys, see Chapter Technical description: Human machine
interface.
(iv) Logging
The user can view the recorded data with regard to the logging date/time. As the user can also
find operation recorded when an operator/engineer logs into the IED, analyzing a problem is
possible when an error is detected during the IED operations.
(v) Double command block

For controlling, there is a principle that a first receiving-command shall be carried out
primarily. In other words, succeeding receiving-commands cannot have the right to run until
the first receiving-command is not completed to operate (that is, the principle of double
command blocking (DCB) is established). The principle is significant for the device protections;
hence, the user should DCB setting. For more information with regard to set the DCB, see
Chapter General control function: Common controls.
Monitoring tools
The user can monitor status and measurement value obtained in the IED using the monitoring
tools. All signals monitored are tabulated in the monitoring list dialog. When the user wishes
to monitor a signal, select a signal in the monitoring list dialog after the operation of the drag-
drop on the monitoring window. The monitoring tools can generate an exporting layout file in
the CSV; it also can obtain the layout file in the CSV.
- 465 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Record tools
(i) Fault record
Fault records are including measuring information before and after the occurrence of the faults.
Accordingly, the user can see information before the fault so that the user can analyze the fault
more precisely. The user can select a fault from the recorded lists; the user can save it into the
fault information file in the CSV. The user can also view the fault records when the exported
data file in the CSV are retrieved into the IED.
(ii) Disturbance record

Disturbance record is a kind of module information measured so that the user can see them in
several graphs: an oscilloscope chart, a harmonic graph, a 3D harmonic graph, a vector in relay
operation analysis (ROA) chart. The user can see disturbance records when the disturbance
records file in COMTRADE are provided. The user can also save disturbance records into the
COMTRADE file.
(iii) Event list

The event list is recorded events information in the IED. The user can generate events
information file in the CSV; the user can retrieve events data file into the IED to view when
the file is in the CSV.
Note: In the IED the date and time is clocked in the coordinated universal time (UTC)
when the clock is selected to operate in UTC. In the record tools within the PC the
date and time is treated in the UTC. Notice that the time in the UTC is converted
for the local time when the recording time is displayed on the PC. For the clock
operation if the user selects neither the UTC, the time zone or the daylight saving
time (the summer time), displaying incorrect time may result in between the IED
and the PC. For more information about the clock and time, see Chapter Technical
description: Clock function.
Generic configuration tools

(i) Setting (general setting for the relay and controlling functions)
The user can make the IED settings on the GR-TIEMS; the IED settings are transferred into
the IED by the connection between the IED and the GR-TIEMS.
(ii) Setting I/O

The user can see and make the setting with regard to binary input/output circuits (BIO), LEDs
using the setting I/O function. For more information about the BIO, and the LED, see chapter
Technical description.
- 466 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(iii) Setting event list

The user can set information with regard to the event of an IED using the event list function.
(iv) Interlock configurator

The user can program conditions for executing to control the primary equipment using the
interlock (ILK) configurator. For example, controlling a circuit breaker (open and closing) is
significant; note not induce mal-operations caused by improper conditions; otherwise a severe
fault/blackout results in. The ILK configurator can provide the user to program conditions
concerning the status of the power system. For more information of the ILK, see chapter
Control and monitoring application.
IEC 61850 configuration tool

The user can configure conversion data for the IEC61850 communication†, provided the IED
exchanges the data with the SAS. The user also configures a logical device, a logical node,
Goose publish information, and Goose subscribe information. For setting and configuration for
the IEC61850 communication see Chapter Communication protocol: IEC 61850
communication”.
†Note:The configuration is possible when the IED software has the IEC61850 protocol.
To confirmed the implementation of IEC61850 protocol, the user needs to check
the IED ordering code (for more information, see Appendix: Ordering).
- 467 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
7 PLC function
Contents Pages
About PLC function 469 PLC driver 470
BIT (Boolean) type 470
Error check 469 USINT (Unsigned short integer) type 472
IED screen information 469 UNIT (Unsigned integer) type 472
UDINT (Unsigned double integer) type 473
SINT (Short integer) type 473
INT (Integer) type 473
DINT (Double integer) type 473
Timer variable setting 474
Setting [UTM1] ~ [UTM24] 476
- 468 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Overview of PLC function

PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) software is used for configuring the Inputs/outputs
(I/Os), alarms, indications, recording and others. PLC logic consist of “timers”, “flip-flops”, and
logic gates “AND, OR, XOR, NOT”. The user can configure PLC-logic using the PLC editor
(MULTIPROG®), which should be installed in the user’s PC. Figure 7.1-1 shows the screen for
the PLC editor.
Figure 7.1-1 PC screen of MULTIPROG®

Note: To handle the PLC editor on the PC, the user shall purchase a software license
(EP-261; see Appendix: Ordering) from Toshiba sales representative. For more
information of PLC and MULTIPROG®, see separate manual Basic manual:
Programmable Logic Controller and PLC editor (6F2S1904)).
PLC data error

The Automatic supervision reports the error information when an error occurs in PLC logic.
The error information† is shown in the Monitoring sub-menu on the IED screen. See Chapter
Automatic supervision: Supervision tasks: Supervision of data in PLC function.
PLC data error 1/1
10:48
[Minor error]
[00000006] [00000000]
[00000000] [00000000]
[00000000] [00000000]
PLC error code†
Figure 7.2-1 Error code at 1st row and 1st column on Monitoring sub-menu
- 469 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
PLC driver
The PLC driver is provided for the user-programmed logic.
7.3.1 Monitoring point for PLC driver

The user can assign several values for the operation. Three-hundred-and-twenty PLC drivers
are grouped for 128 BITs, 32 USINTs, 32 UINTs, 32 UDINTs, 32 SINTs, 32 INTs, and 32 DINTs
in the function “PLC_DRV (Function ID: 230302)”.
(i) BIT type
 Monitoring point at PLC Driver
PLC_DRV in BIT type (Function ID: 230302)
8010101BB0 BIT_00_0 General PLC monitoring point for users
…….. ……….. ………
8A10101BBA BIT_01_2 General PLC monitoring point for users
…….. ……….. ………
8F10101BBF BIT_01_7 General PLC monitoring point for users
…….. ……….. ………
8B10111BBB BIT_03_3 General PLC monitoring point for users
…….. ……….. ………
…….. ……….. ………
…….. ……….. ………
- 470 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

…….. ……….. ………
…….. ……….. ………
…….. ……….. ………
…….. ……….. ………
…….. ……….. ………
…….. ……….. ………
…….. ……….. ………
- 471 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

…….. ……….. ………
…….. ……….. ………
…….. ……….. ………
(ii) USINT type

PLC_DRV in USINT type (Function ID: 230302)
3011001BB0 U08_00 General PLC monitoring point for users
…….. ……….. ………
(iii) UINT type

PLC_DRV in UINT type (Function ID: 230302)
3112001BB0 U16_00 Reserved: Monitoring point for quality of IEC61850
3112011BB0 U16_01 Reserved: Monitoring point for quality of IEC61850
…….. ……….. ………
- 472 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(iv) UDINT type

PLC_DRV in UDINT type (Function ID: 230302)
…….. ……….. ………
(v) SINT type

PLC_DRV in USINT type (Function ID: 230302)
2014001BB0 S08_00 General PLC monitoring point for users
…….. ……….. ………
(vi) INT type

PLC_DRV in UINT type (Function ID: 230302)
…….. ……….. ………
(vii) DINT type

PLC_DRV in DINT type (Function ID: 230302)
…….. ……….. ………
- 473 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Timer variable settings using PLC drivers

The user can set variable timers of user’s PLC logics using settings of PLC drivers (FB:
PLC_DRV 230302). The LCD screen menu provides settings [UTM1] ~ [UTM24], and the user
can set those timer values through the LCD screen.
Figure 7.4-1 shows that a delay timer “TON1” has been set 500ms in the PLC logic, but the
user can set new value using the setting [UTM1] (e.g., the user can change 500ms to 200ms on
the LCD). Since an internal IED memory is able to access the [UTM1], the IED can operate
with new value of the [UTM1] when new one is set.
IED memory PLC function
PLC editor
Timer FB
Constant value set
Fixed PLC = 500ms
Input Output
A timer value inputted

PLC driver FB ( 500 [ms] or 200 [ms] )
Function ID: 230302
Element ID: 3200013001
Variable value set

Setting [UTM1] = 200 ms
= 5000ms
User PLC logic
Figure 7.4-1 Time delay FB is adjusted by setting [UTM1] (example)
- 474 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Example of timer action1

Supposed that the timer was set the [UTM1]=30 and the TON1 timer counter has
started. When the counter counts 15 ms, and if the user sets 10 for the [UTM1],
the FB output is yielded instantly.
On
FB output Off
On
FB input Off
Run
Counter Stop
0 15 30 45 60
Timer counter
(millisecond)
[UTM1] = 30 ms [UTM1] = 10 ms
Figure 7.4-2 Input and output time chart on TON1 delay timer
Note: Entering new value for the setting [UTM1] does not make the timer counter reset,
if the timer counter is running.
Example of timer action2

Supposed that the timer was set the [UTM2]=30. Signal is inputted in the FB for
45 ms, so the timer counter is running at 45 ms. However, if the user changes the
setting [UTM2] to 60 at 45 ms, the FB output still remain (i.e., the counter is not
reset).
On
FB output Off
On
FB input Off
Run
Counter Stop Timer counter

(millisecond)
0 15 30 45 60
[UTM2] = 30 ms [UTM2] = 60 ms
Figure 7.4-3 Input and output time chart onTON2 delay timer
Note: If the FB output has be yielded already, when new value is set for the timer and
that new value is longer input signal duration, the timer counter is not reset.
- 475 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(i) Setting value

The [UTMxx] value is selected among 0 to 10,000,000 [ms] (see Table 7.4-1). Figure 7.4-4 and
Figure 7.4-5 illustrates how to see a value for the [UTMxx].
PLC timer settings: [UTM1]~ [UTM24]
Figure 7.4-4 [UTMxx] timer setting menu (GR-TIMES operation)
Setting Setting Common PLC Timer

10:48 1/8 10:48 1/3 10:48 1/3 10:48 1/24
Record > Common + CLP > UTM1 +
Metering > Active Group Fault Locator > 0 ms
Communication > Copy Group (A->B) + PLC Timer > UTM2 +
Protection > Group1 + 0 ms
Control > Group2 + UTM3 +
Statistic > Group3 + 0 ms
UTM24 +
0 ms
Figure 7.4-5 Timer setting menu (LCD operation)
- 476 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Table 7.4-1 UTM setting table

PLC timer (Function ID: 230302)
Setting items Range Unit Contents Default Note
UTM1 0 —10,000,000 ms Value setting for delay timer ##1 0

UTM2 0 —10,000,000 ms Value setting for delay timer #2 0
- 477 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Table 7.4-2 Inputs for driving the timers

PLC timer (Function ID: 230302)
Function ID + Element ID Setting name Description
230302 3200013001 UTM1 Input point for the delay timer(UTM1)
230302 32000A3001 UTM10 Input point for the delay timer(UTM10)
230302 32000B3001 UTM11 Input point for the delay timer(UTM11)
230302 32000C3001 UTM12 Input point for the delay timer(UTM12)
230302 32000D3001 UTM13 Input point for the delay timer(UTM13)
230302 32000E3001 UTM14 Input point for the delay timer(UTM14)
230302 32000F3001 UTM15 Input point for the delay timer(UTM15)
- 478 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
8 Recording function
Disturbance recorder 507 Event recorder 497
-Data in COMTRADE 514 -Setup 505
-Maximum number of recording 508 -Trigger signals 497
-Recording signals 509 -Trigger modes 504
-Recording time and capacities 507 Transferring recording information 518
-Relays within disturbance recorder 507
-Trigger settings for PLC 514
-Types of recording information 514
- 479 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
The recording function consists of three recording features: (1) Fault recorder, (2) Event
recorder, and (3) Disturbance recorder. The fault recorder collects the information about the
power system quantities when a fault occurs. The event recorder groups state information
when the changes are detected. The disturbance recorder is designed to memory the various
quantities—numerical analog data and logic data (binary data)—from the monitoring function
and the BIO modules; it is possible to analyze the disturbance using the engineering tool (GR-
TIMES), which can draw several chronological waves.
Fault recorder
During the fault, the fault recorder can memorize reasons by equipment failures/operation
states, system information etc. It commences by injecting a signal coming from the TRC alarm-
signal generation logic, but is also started by a trigger provided by PLC function. The fault
recorder captures the following items for each fault:
 Date and time at the fault
 Tripped phase information
 Operating mode information
 Fault and pre-fault quantities
8.1.1 Types of recording information

The fault recorder can cyclically memory past eight faults; the oldest memory will be erased
cyclically if another fault occurs. The memorized information has 1ms accuracy. If a fault
occurs, the fault recorder is directed to operate to memory operating modes etc. about the fault.
(i) Date and time at fault

The date and time at the fault is recorded. The date and time information is provided by the
clock function (see Chapter Technical description: Clock function).
(ii) Tripped phase information

Information about tripped phases (i.e., faulted phases) are recorded using the recording
identifiers (‘OPT-PHASE-A,B,C, and -N’ signals), which the TRC function provides.
(iii) Mode information

At the occurrence of a fault, the protection functions gives the fault recorder the reasons of
tripping; the reasons are brought using operation identifiers† and logical signals‡. The fault
recorder can have up to 192 of all identifiers and signals in the IED. The operation identifiers
are chosen using the settings [OP Mode ID1] to [OP Mode ID128]. The settings [OP Mode
ID201] to [OP Mode ID264] are used for general purposes to record the logical signals.
†Note:A number of the operation identifiers are provided by the protection functions. For
- 480 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
example, the ‘OC1-OPT-A’ operation identifier is used to identify the pickup in the
first element of the overcurrent function (OC1) in phase-A. See respective
protection functions in Chapter Relay application.
‡Note:64 logical signals are selectable for recording. For example in this purpose, the
user may choose an operation signal on the circuits of the BIO modules (BIOs).
(iv) Fault quantities and pre-fault-quantities

Several quantity items (amplitude and phase angle of current, etc.) are memorized in the fault
recorder, as shown in Table 8.1-1. Quantities just before the fault are also memorized. The pre-
fault quantities are captured 10 seconds before tripping, but it is possible to take back longer
using the setting [Pre-Fault time].
Table 8.1-1 Recording quantities at the fault of ‘3D’ software in Model3
Abbreviations Recording quantities
Ia-1CT, Ib-1CT, Ic-1CT Recording currents flowing in the CT set with the [Conn-1CT].
I1-1CT, I2-1CT, I0-1CT Recorded ones except symmetrical (Ia-1CT, Ib-1CT, Ic-1CT) for [Conn-1CT]= 2P
In-1NCT, In-2NCT Recorded neutral currents at 1CT, 2CT
V-P Recording quantities for the setting [Conn-VT]= Primary

Va-P, Vb-P, Vc-P [InType-VT]= 1PN / 1PP / 1N: Recorded a representative voltage only (V-P)
Vab-P, Vbc-P, Vca-P [InType-VT]= 3PN: Recorded ones expect for the representative voltage (V-P)
V1-P, V2-P, V0-P [InType-VT]= 3PP: Recorded exclusive voltages (Vab-P, Vbc-P, Vca-P, V1-P, V2-P, V0-P)
V-S Recording quantities for the setting [Conn-VT]= Secondary

Va-S, Vb-S, Vc-S [InType-VT]= 1PN / 1PP / 1N: Recorded a representative voltage only (V-S)
Vab-S, Vbc-S, Vca-S [InType-VT]= 3PN: Recorded ones expect for the representative voltage (V-S)
V1-S, V2-S, V0-S [InType-VT]= 3PP: Recorded exclusive voltages (Vab-S, Vbc-S, Vca-S, V1-S, V2-S, V0-S)
V-T Recording quantities for the setting [Conn-VT]= Tertiary

Va-T, Vb-T, Vc-T [InType-VT]= 1PN / 1PP / 1N: Recorded a representative voltage only (V-T)
Vab-T, Vbc-T, Vca-T [InType-VT]= 3PN: Recorded ones expect for the representative voltage (V-T)
V1-T, V2-T, V0-T [InType-VT]= 3PP: Recorded exclusive voltages (Vab-T, Vbc-T, Vca-T, V1-T, V2-T, V0-T)
Ia-P, Ib-P, Ic-P Recording currents flowing in Primary
I1-P, I2-P, I0-P Recorded ones except symmetrical (I1-P, I2-P, I0-P) for [InType-CT]= 2P
Ia-S, Ib-S, Ic-S Recording currents flowing in-Secondary
I1-S, I2-S, I0-S Recorded ones except symmetrical (I1-S, I2-S, I0-S) for [InType-CT]= 2P
Ia-T, Ib-T, Ic-T Recording currents flowing in-Tertiary
- 481 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
I1-T, I2-T, I0-T Recorded ones except symmetrical (I1-T, I2-T, I0-T) for [InType-CT]= 2P
Id-1, Id-2, Id-3 Differential currents (Id) at Group 1 to Group3
Ir-1, Ir-2, Ir-3 Restraint currents (Ir) at Group 1 to Group3
Id0-1, Id0-2 Differential currents (Id) at Group 1 and Group2
Ir0-1, Ir0-2 Differential currents (Ir) at Group 1 and Group2
THM-Capacity Thermal capacity in % obtained in the THM function
I2/I1-P Ratio of positive to negative sequences at Primary winding
I2/I1-S Ratio of positive to negative sequences at Secondary winding
I2/I1-T Ratio of positive to negative sequences at Tertiary winding
Table 8.1-2 Recording quantities at the fault of ‘3E’ software in Model4

V-P Recording quantities for the setting [Conn-VT]= Primary

Va-P, Vb-P, Vc-P [InType-VT]= 1PN / 1PP / 1N: Recorded a representative voltage only (V-P)
Vab-P, Vbc-P, Vca-P [InType-VT]= 3PN: Recorded ones expect for the representative voltage (V-P)
V1-P, V2-P, V0-P [InType-VT]= 3PP: Recorded exclusive voltages (Vab-P, Vbc-P, Vca-P, V1-P, V2-P, V0-P)
V-S Recording quantities for the setting [Conn-VT]= Secondary

Va-S, Vb-S, Vc-S [InType-VT]= 1PN / 1PP / 1N: Recorded a representative voltage only (V-S)
Vab-S, Vbc-S, Vca-S [InType-VT]= 3PN: Recorded ones expect for the representative voltage (V-S)
V1-S, V2-S, V0-S [InType-VT]= 3PP: Recorded exclusive voltages (Vab-S, Vbc-S, Vca-S, V1-S, V2-S, V0-S)

Va-T, Vb-T, Vc-T [InType-VT]= 1PN / 1PP / 1N: Recorded a representative voltage only (V-T)
Vab-T, Vbc-T, Vca-T [InType-VT]= 3PN: Recorded ones expect for the representative voltage (V-T)
V1-T, V2-T, V0-T [InType-VT]= 3PP: Recorded exclusive voltages (Vab-T, Vbc-T, Vca-T, V1-P, V2-T, V0-T)
- 482 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Table 8.1-3 Recording quantities at the fault of ‘3F’ software in Model5

In-1NCT, In-2NCT, In-3NCT Recorded neutral currents at 1CT, 2CT, 3CT
V-P Recording quantities for the settings [Conn-1VT]/ [Conn-2VT]= Primary

Va-P, Vb-P, Vc-P [InType-1VT/2VT]= 1PN / 1PP / 1N: Recorded a representative voltage only (V-P)
Vab-P, Vbc-P, Vca-P [InType-1VT/2VT]= 3PN: Recorded ones expect the representative voltage (V-P)
V1-P, V2-P, V0-P [InType-1VT/2VT]= 3PP:Recorded exclusive voltages(Vab-P,Vbc-P,Vca-P,V1-P,V2-P,V0-P)
V-S Recording quantities for the settings [Conn-1VT]/ [Conn-2VT]= Secondary

Va-S, Vb-S, Vc-S [InType-1VT/2VT]= 1PN / 1PP / 1N: Recorded a representative voltage only (V-S)
Vab-S, Vbc-S, Vca-S [InType-1VT/2VT]= 3PN: Recorded expect for the representative voltage (V-S)
V1-S, V2-S, V0-S [InType-1VT/2VT]=3PP:Recorded exclusive voltages(Vab-S,Vbc-S,Vca-S,V1-S,V2-S,V0-S)

Va-T, Vb-T, Vc-T [InType-1VT/2VT]= 1PN / 1PP / 1N: Recorded a representative voltage only (V-T)
Vab-T, Vbc-T, Vca-T [InType-1VT/2VT]= 3PN: Recorded expect for the representative voltage (V-T)
V1-T, V2-T, V0-T [InType-1VT/2VT]= 3PP:Recorded exclusive voltages(Vab-T,Vbc-T,Vca-T,V1-T,V2-T,V0-T)
Ia-P, Ib-P, Ic-P Recording currents flowing in Primary
I1-P, I2-P, I0-P Recorded ones except symmetrical (I1-P, I2-P, I0-P) for [InType-CT]= 2P
Ia-S, Ib-S, Ic-S Recording currents flowing in-Secondary
I1-S, I2-S, I0-S Recorded ones except symmetrical (I1-S, I2-S, I0-S) for [InType-CT]= 2P
Ia-T, Ib-T, Ic-T Recording currents flowing in-Tertiary
I1-T, I2-T, I0-T Recorded ones except symmetrical (I1-T, I2-T, I0-T) for [InType-CT]= 2P
- 483 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Id0-1, Id0-2, Id0-3 Differential currents (Id) at Group 1 to Group3
Ir0-1, Ir0-2, Id0-3 Differential currents (Ir) at Group 1 to Group3
8.1.2 Screen information

Figure 8.1-1 illustrates the information displayed on the IED screen†, which can display up to
eight fault records (#1 to #8). Figure 8.1-2 illustrates the structure of the first fault record#1.
The line○
c indicates the tripped phase. The lines○
d show how tripping occurred. The lines○
e
have the information about evolving faults, which is able to memory up to 32 developing faults.
Quantitates when the fault occurred are shown below messages○ g .
f ○
Fault Record Fault Record#1

10:48 1/6 10:48 1/123
#1 2012-07-25 > 2012-07-25
10:48:21.223 10:48:21.223
#2 2012-07-21 > Phase AB
01:15:55.018 Trip 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
#3 2012/07/21 > OC1
13:11:29.621 2012-07-25
List of fault records (#1 to #8) Details of #1 information
Figure 8.1-1 Information of the fault recorder displayed on the IED screen
†Note:For more screen information, see Chapter User interface: Record sub-menu.
- 484 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Fault Record#1 ○
a Record Num ber (#1)
11:12 1/222
2012-07-25 ○
b Date and Tim e at Fault (YYYY-MM-DD)
10:48:21.223
Phase AB ○
c Tripped phase inform ation
Trip 1, 2, 3,4, 5, 6
OC1 ○
d Mode inform ation
Screen scroll down 2012-07-25 ○
e Detail inform ation about evolving faults
10:48:22.421
OC1, OC2
2012-07-25 Deta
10:48:22.835
E volving fault#1
OC1, OC2, OC3
2012-07-25
10:48:23.649
OC1, OC2, OC3, OC4, EF1
Fault values ○
f Fault quantities ARC Sh
Ia-1CT
1234.56kA 123.4deg
Ib-1CT
1234.56kA 123.4deg
Ic-1CT
1234.56kA 123.4deg
PreFault values ○
g Pre-fault quantities
Ia-1CT ○
h Pre-fau
1234.56kA 123.4deg
Ib-1CT
1234.56kA 123.4deg
Ic-1CT
1234.56kA 123.4deg
Figure 8.1-2 Screen structure about the information #1.
8.1.3 Setup for the fault recorder

(i) Operation identifiers (ID1–ID128)
The user can select the operation identifies arbitrarily using the settings [OP Mode ID1] etc.
For example, when the operation result with regard to the overcurrent relay element (i.e., OC1
in phase-A) shall be recorded, choose the operated signal ‘OC1-OPT-A (45A001 8000101B62)”
and set it for the [OP Mode ID1]. Remember to program the displaying name about the OC1-
OPT-A using the setting [OP Mode Name1] (e.g., “OC1-A relay OP-ed”). Note that the length
of the displaying name should be less than 18 letters. The user should find blanks in the setting
list, because several IDs have been already set.
(ii) Logical signals (ID201–ID264)

Wishing to record a logical level ‘1 (TRUE)’ or ‘0 (FALSE)’ on the circuits, the user can pick the
logical signal using settings the [OP Mode ID265] etc. For example, the user wishes to record
the output level of the binary output circuit#1 (BO1) at the IO#1 slot, set its PLC monitoring
point ‘200B01 8002001112’ for the setting [OP Mode ID265]; set the displaying name using the
- 485 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
[OP Mode Name265].
(iii) Additional triggers for the recording

Wishing to start the fault recorder except for the trip instruction, the user can use the PLC
connection points ‘ADD_F.RECORD_TRIG1’ to ‘ADD_F.RECORD_TRIG4’, respectively.
(iv) Time setting for Pre-fault

The instant before the trip is programmable using the setting [Pre-Fault Time] among 10s, 50s,
100s, 200s, 300s.
(v) Unit setting for the quantities

To change the units of power quantities, go to the metering function discussed in Chapter
Metering function.
- 486 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Table 8.1-4 Default settings (ID1–ID128 and ID201–ID264) in ‘3D’ software in Model3
Settings in Fault recorder Actual PLC connection Settings in Fault recorder Actual PLC connection
Data IDs Screen names points Data IDs Screen names points
[OP Mode ID1] 413001 8100201B63 [OP Mode Name1] DIF-S1 S1-OPT [OP Mode ID97] Not assigned [OP Mode Name97] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID3] 414001 8000101B60 [OP Mode Name3] REF1 REF-P-OPT [OP Mode ID99] Not assigned [OP Mode Name99] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID4] 414001 8100201B60 [OP Mode Name4] REF2 REF-S-OPT [OP Mode ID100] Not assigned [OP Mode Name100] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID5] Not assigned [OP Mode Name5] - Not assigned [OP Mode ID101] Not assigned [OP Mode Name101] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID6] 45A001 8000101B65 [OP Mode Name6] OC1 OC1-OPT [OP Mode ID102] Not assigned [OP Mode Name102] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID14] 45A401 8000101B60 [OP Mode Name14] EF1 EF1-OPT [OP Mode ID110] Not assigned [OP Mode Name110] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID22] 45A801 8000101B60 [OP Mode Name22] EFIn1 EFIn1-OPT [OP Mode ID118] Not assigned [OP Mode Name118] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID26] 487001 8000101B60 [OP Mode Name26] MECH1 MECH1-OPT [OP Mode ID122] Not assigned [OP Mode Name122] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID35] 487001 8900A01B60 [OP Mode Name35] MECH10 MECH10-OPT [OP Mode ID203] Not assigned [OP Mode Name203] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID36] 487001 8A00B01B60 [OP Mode Name36] MECH11 MECH11-OPT [OP Mode ID204] Not assigned [OP Mode Name204] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID37] 487001 8B00C01B60 [OP Mode Name37] MECH12 MECH12-OPT [OP Mode ID205] Not assigned [OP Mode Name205] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID38] 487001 8C00D01B60 [OP Mode Name38] MECH13 MECH13-OPT [OP Mode ID206] Not assigned [OP Mode Name206] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID39] 487001 8D00E01B60 [OP Mode Name39] MECH14 MECH14-OPT [OP Mode ID207] Not assigned [OP Mode Name207] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID40] 487001 8E00F01B60 [OP Mode Name40] MECH15 MECH15-OPT [OP Mode ID208] Not assigned [OP Mode Name208] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID41] 487001 8F01001B60 [OP Mode Name41] MECH16 MECH16-OPT [OP Mode ID209] Not assigned [OP Mode Name209] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID42] 451401 8000101B60 [OP Mode Name42] THM-A THM-OPT-ALARM [OP Mode ID210] Not assigned [OP Mode Name210] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID43] 451401 8100201B60 [OP Mode Name43] THM-T THM-OPT-TRIP [OP Mode ID211] Not assigned [OP Mode Name211] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID44] 476A01 8200101B60 [OP Mode Name44] VPH-A VPH-A-OPT- [OP Mode ID212] Not assigned [OP Mode Name212] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID45] 476A01 8300201B62 [OP Mode Name45] VPH-T VPH-OPT [OP Mode ID213] Not assigned [OP Mode Name213] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID46] 45AC01 8000101B60 [OP Mode Name46] OCN1 OCN1-OPT [OP Mode ID214] Not assigned [OP Mode Name214] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID50] 45B001 8000101B60 [OP Mode Name50] BCD-P BCD-P-OPT [OP Mode ID218] Not assigned [OP Mode Name218] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID51] 45B001 8100201B60 [OP Mode Name51] BCD-S BCD-S-OPT [OP Mode ID219] Not assigned [OP Mode Name219] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID52] 45B001 8200301B60 [OP Mode Name52] BCD-T BCD-T-OPT [OP Mode ID220] Not assigned [OP Mode Name220] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID53] 45B401 8000101B63 [OP Mode Name53] CBF1-RE CBF1 retrip operated [OP Mode ID221] Not assigned [OP Mode Name221] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID54] 45B401 8000101B73 [OP Mode Name54] CBF1-TP CBF1-TRIP [OP Mode ID222] Not assigned [OP Mode Name222] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID63] 475A01 8000101B60 [OP Mode Name63] FRQ1 FRQ1-OPT [OP Mode ID231] Not assigned [OP Mode Name231] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID69] 475A01 8000111B60 [OP Mode Name69] DFRQ1 DFRQ1-OPT [OP Mode ID237] Not assigned [OP Mode Name237] - Not assigned
- 487 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Table 8.1-5 Default settings (ID1–ID128 and ID201–ID264) in ‘3E software in Model4
- 488 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Table 8.1-6 Default settings (ID1–ID128 and ID201–ID264) in ‘3F software in Model5
[OP Mode ID3] 414001 8000101B60 [OP Mode Name3] REF1 REF-P-OPT [OP Mode ID99] Not assigned [OP Mode Name99] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID4] 414001 8100201B60 [OP Mode Name4] REF2 REF-S-OPT [OP Mode ID100] Not assigned [OP Mode Name100] - Not assigned
[OP Mode ID5] 414001 8200301B60 [OP Mode Name5] REF3 REF-T-OPT [OP Mode ID101] Not assigned [OP Mode Name101] - Not assigned
- 489 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
8.1.4 Setting
FAULT_RECORD(Function ID: 200602)
Pre-Fault Time 10s/ 50 / 100 / 200 /

Sec. Recording time before the fault 10
300
Op Mode Name1 (Preferred name) – Name of the operation mode for ID1
Op Mode ID1 (Preferred DataID) – Signal of the operation identifier
Op Mode ID2 (Preferred DataID) – Signal of the operation identifier2
Op Mode ID3 (Preferred DataID) – Signal of the operation identifier3 See Default
…… …… – …… setting table
…… …… – ……
…… …… – ……
…… …… – ……
Op Mode ID264 (Preferred DataID) – Signal of the operation identifier264
- 490 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

FLT_REC_CU (Function ID: 204201)
Name Element ID Description
ADD_F.RECORD_TRIG1 8020001001 Receiving Trigger1
FAULT RECORD TRIG1 8000011001 TRIG1 signal generated
FAULT RECORD TRIG3 8200031001 TRIG3 signal generated
FLTRCDING 8020101001 Data writing in the fault recorder
FR_CLR 3000001001 Data erasing in the fault recorder

ADD_F.RECORD_TRIG1 802000E001 Input1 for the external trigger
 Obtained data in Monitoring function for FLT_REC_CU

TP_MES_MANAGEMENT (Function ID: 711006)
4351001076 Ia-1CT Ia-1CT measurement primary for fault record
4351001078 Ib-1CT Ib-1CT measurement primary for fault record
435100107A Ic-1CT Ic-1CT measurement primary for fault record
4351011076 I1-1CT I1-1CT measurement primary for fault record
435101107A I0-1CT I0-1CT measurement primary for fault record
- 491 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

43510A1076 In-1NCT In-1NCT measurement primary for fault record
43510A1078 In-2NCT In-2NCT measurement primary for fault record
43510A107A In-3NCT In-3NCT measurement primary for fault record
43520B107C V-P V-P measurement primary for fault record
43520C1076 Va-P Va-P measurement primary for fault record
43520C1078 Vb-P Vb-P measurement primary for fault record
43520C107A Vc-P Vc-P measurement primary for fault record
43520D1076 Vab-P Vab-P measurement primary for fault record
43520D1078 Vbc-P Vbc-P measurement primary for fault record
43520D107A Vca-P Vca-P measurement primary for fault record
43520E1076 V1-P V1-P measurement primary for fault record
43520E1078 V2-P V2-P measurement primary for fault record
43520E107A V0-P V0-P measurement primary for fault record
43520F107C V-S V-S measurement primary for fault record
4352101076 Va-S Va-S measurement primary for fault record
4352101078 Vb-S Vb-S measurement primary for fault record
435210107A Vc-S Vc-S measurement primary for fault record
4352111076 Vab-S Vab-S measurement primary for fault record
4352111078 Vbc-S Vbc-S measurement primary for fault record
435211107A Vca-S Vca-S measurement primary for fault record
4352121076 V1-S V1-S measurement primary for fault record
4352121078 V2-S V2-S measurement primary for fault record
435212107A V0-S V0-S measurement primary for fault record
435213107C V-T V-T measurement primary for fault record
4352141076 Va-T Va-T measurement primary for fault record
4352141078 Vb-T Vb-T measurement primary for fault record
435214107A Vc-T Vc-T measurement primary for fault record
4352151076 Vab-T Vab-T measurement primary for fault record
4352151078 Vbc-T Vbc-T measurement primary for fault record
435215107A Vca-T Vca-T measurement primary for fault record
4352161076 V1-T V1-T measurement primary for fault record
4352161078 V2-T V2-T measurement primary for fault record
435216107A V0-T V0-T measurement primary for fault record
4351171076 Ia-P Ia-P measurement primary for fault record
4351171078 Ib-P Ib-P measurement primary for fault record
435117107A Ic-P Ic-P measurement primary for fault record
4351181076 I1-P I1-P measurement primary for fault record
- 492 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

4351181078 I2-P I2-P measurement primary for fault record
435118107A I0-P I0-P measurement primary for fault record
4351191076 Ia-S Ia-S measurement primary for fault record
4351191078 Ib-S Ib-S measurement primary for fault record
435119107A Ic-S Ic-S measurement primary for fault record
43511A1076 I1-S I1-S measurement primary for fault record
43511A1078 I2-S I2-S measurement primary for fault record
43511A107A I0-S I0-S measurement primary for fault record
43511B1076 Ia-T Ia-T measurement primary for fault record
43511B1078 Ib-T Ib-T measurement primary for fault record
43511B107A Ic-T Ic-T measurement primary for fault record
43511C1076 I1-T I1-T measurement primary for fault record
43511C1078 I2-T I2-T measurement primary for fault record
43511C107A I0-T I0-T measurement primary for fault record
4351001050 Ia-1CT Ia-1CT measurement secondary for fault record
4351001052 Ib-1CT Ib-1CT measurement secondary for fault record
4351001054 Ic-1CT Ic-1CT measurement secondary for fault record
4351011050 I1-1CT I1-1CT measurement secondary for fault record
- 493 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

43510A1050 In-1NCT In-1NCT measurement secondary for fault record
43520B1056 V-P V-P measurement secondary for fault record
43520C1050 Va-P Va-P measurement secondary for fault record
43520C1052 Vb-P Vb-P measurement secondary for fault record
43520C1054 Vc-P Vc-P measurement secondary for fault record
43520D1050 Vab-P Vab-P measurement secondary for fault record
43520D1052 Vbc-P Vbc-P measurement secondary for fault record
43520D1054 Vca-P Vca-P measurement secondary for fault record
43520E1050 V1-P V1-P measurement secondary for fault record
43520F1056 V-S V-S measurement secondary for fault record
4352101050 Va-S Va-S measurement secondary for fault record
4352101052 Vb-S Vb-S measurement secondary for fault record
4352101054 Vc-S Vc-S measurement secondary for fault record
4352111050 Vab-S Vab-S measurement secondary for fault record
4352111052 Vbc-S Vbc-S measurement secondary for fault record
4352111054 Vca-S Vca-S measurement secondary for fault record
4352121050 V1-S V1-S measurement secondary for fault record
4352131056 V-T V-T measurement secondary for fault record
4352141050 Va-T Va-T measurement secondary for fault record
4352141052 Vb-T Vb-T measurement secondary for fault record
4352141054 Vc-T Vc-T measurement secondary for fault record
4352151050 Vab-T Vab-T measurement secondary for fault record
4352151052 Vbc-T Vbc-T measurement secondary for fault record
4352151054 Vca-T Vca-T measurement secondary for fault record
4352161050 V1-T V1-T measurement secondary for fault record
4351171050 Ia-P Ia-P measurement secondary for fault record
4351171052 Ib-P Ib-P measurement secondary for fault record
4351171054 Ic-P Ic-P measurement secondary for fault record
4351181050 I1-P I1-P measurement secondary for fault record
4351191050 Ia-S Ia-S measurement secondary for fault record
4351191052 Ib-S Ib-S measurement secondary for fault record
4351191054 Ic-S Ic-S measurement secondary for fault record
43511A1050 I1-S I1-S measurement secondary for fault record
- 494 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

43511B1050 Ia-T Ia-T measurement secondary for fault record
43511B1052 Ib-T Ib-T measurement secondary for fault record
43511B1054 Ic-T Ic-T measurement secondary for fault record
43511C1050 I1-T I1-T measurement secondary for fault record
4351001051 Ia-1CT Ia-1CT measurement angle for fault record
4351001053 Ib-1CT Ib-1CT measurement angle for fault record
4351001055 Ic-1CT Ic-1CT measurement angle for fault record
4351011051 I1-1CT I1-1CT measurement angle for fault record
43510A1051 In-1NCT In-1NCT measurement angle for fault record
43520B1057 V-P V-P measurement angle for fault record
43520C1051 Va-P Va-P measurement angle for fault record
43520C1053 Vb-P Vb-P measurement angle for fault record
43520C1055 Vc-P Vc-P measurement angle for fault record
- 495 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

43520D1051 Vab-P Vab-P measurement angle for fault record
43520D1053 Vbc-P Vbc-P measurement angle for fault record
43520D1055 Vca-P Vca-P measurement angle for fault record
43520E1051 V1-P V1-P measurement angle for fault record
43520F1057 V-S V-S measurement angle for fault record
4352101051 Va-S Va-S measurement angle for fault record
4352101053 Vb-S Vb-S measurement angle for fault record
4352101055 Vc-S Vc-S measurement angle for fault record
4352111051 Vab-S Vab-S measurement angle for fault record
4352111053 Vbc-S Vbc-S measurement angle for fault record
4352111055 Vca-S Vca-S measurement angle for fault record
4352121051 V1-S V1-S measurement angle for fault record
4352131057 V-T V-T measurement angle for fault record
4352141051 Va-T Va-T measurement angle for fault record
4352141053 Vb-T Vb-T measurement angle for fault record
4352141055 Vc-T Vc-T measurement angle for fault record
4352151051 Vab-T Vab-T measurement angle for fault record
4352151053 Vbc-T Vbc-T measurement angle for fault record
4352151055 Vca-T Vca-T measurement angle for fault record
4352161051 V1-T V1-T measurement angle for fault record
4351171051 Ia-P Ia-P measurement angle for fault record
4351171053 Ib-P Ib-P measurement angle for fault record
4351171055 Ic-P Ic-P measurement angle for fault record
4351181051 I1-P I1-P measurement angle for fault record
4351191051 Ia-S Ia-S measurement angle for fault record
4351191053 Ib-S Ib-S measurement angle for fault record
4351191055 Ic-S Ic-S measurement angle for fault record
43511A1051 I1-S I1-S measurement angle for fault record
43511B1051 Ia-T Ia-T measurement angle for fault record
43511B1053 Ib-T Ib-T measurement angle for fault record
43511B1055 Ic-T Ic-T measurement angle for fault record
43511C1051 I1-T I1-T measurement angle for fault record
- 496 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Event recorder
Signals are generated in the logics of BIO modules etc. in the IED. The event recorder can
memory the generated signals as events. To operate the event recorder, the user should pick a
preferred signal as a trigger of the event recorder; the event recorder can have 768 triggers,
some of which have been set as a default. The user can group the triggers into three categories;
consequently, it is possible that a number of the events are divided depending on the degree of
the errors, the meaning of the operations, and the signals of relay elements, etc. The user can
also program how an event is to be detected. An event is recorded with millisecond accuracy.
The information are memorized until the number of the events reaching 1024; the oldest event
will be deleted when a new event appears.
8.2.1 Trigger signals

The event is memorized when the event recorder detects changing the trigger signal that is
connected with the logic signal; they are defined using settings [Trigger ID1] to [Trigger ID768].
Settings [End of E.Record-1] and [End of E.Record-2] are provided for grouping†; the user can
adjust the size of the ‘Event Record1’ group using the [End of E.Record-1]. The next ‘Event
Record2’ group is set with the [End of E.Record-2]. The remains are set for the ‘Event Record3’
group. Remember that the [Trigger ID1] etc. are required to set together with the [Event
Name1] etc.; user’s preferred names should be less than 18 letters.
July 25, 2012 July 26, 2012
10:31:12 Deleting the fault record 12:34:51 Deleting the fault record
Setting [End of E.Record-1] = 256
Setting [End of E.Record-2] = 512 10:56:12 Changing system setting
Pulse train
3000001001
FR_CLR List of ‘Event record1’
FAULT RECORD (200602)
Event #3
On 2012-07-25 10:31:12
Event #3 F.Record clear ‘On’
Setting [Trigger ID14] = 200602 3000001001

Setting [Trigger Mode14] = On
Setting [Event Name14] = F.Record clear
Event #2
3010001001
Active group Active group
2012-07-25 10:56:12
SYS_CHG Set group change
‘3’ Changed to ‘4’
Setting_PF (201400)
Event #2
Setting [Trigger ID7] = 201400 3010001001 Event #1

Setting [Trigger Mode7] = Change On 2012-07-26 12:34:51
Setting [Event Name7] = Set group change
Event #1 F.Record clear ‘On’
Figure 8.2-1 Relation between function signals and triggers for Event record1
Figure 8.2-1 illustrates signals connected with triggers in the event recorder. For example,
‘SYS_CHG’ is connected with trigger#7 using the [Trigger ID7] and ‘FR_CLR’ is connected with
- 497 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
trigger#14 using the [Trigger ID14]. Note that the both triggers (#7 and #14) are smaller than
the setting [End of E.Record-1]=256; hence, the both are listed in the ‘Event recored1’ list.
Keep in mind that the event names are set by the [Event Name7] and [Event Name14]. All
ones are tabulated in Table 8.2-1 to Table 8.2-5.
†Note:The GR-TIEMS uses terms ‘Level1’, ‘Level2’, and ‘Level3’ to represent the ‘Event
Record1’, ‘Event Record2’, and ‘Event Record3’. The scope of each level is the same
as the scope of each group. The GR-TIEMS does not show unused triggers and
Trigger ID numbers automatically when the triggers are displayed on the screen.
- 498 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Table 8.2-1 Event1 group set with [End of E.Record-1]=256 in ‘3D’ software in Model3
Triggers Data IDs Modes Names Triggers Data IDs Modes Names Triggers Data IDs Modes Names
[Trigger ID1] 220001 3110201001 On-Off Serious error [Trigger ID91] 475A01 8100211B60 On-Off DFRQ2 [Trigger ID181] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID2] 220001 3110211001 On-Off ErrorLevel2 [Trigger ID92] 475A01 8200311B60 On-Off DFRQ3 [Trigger ID182] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID3] 220001 3110221001 On-Off Minor error [Trigger ID93] 475A01 8300411B60 On-Off DFRQ4 [Trigger ID183] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID6] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID96] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID186] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID7] 201400 3200001001 Change Set. group change [Trigger ID97] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID187] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID8] 201400 3010001001 On System set. change [Trigger ID98] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID188] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID9] 201400 3010011001 On Comm. set. change [Trigger ID99] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID189] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID10] 201400 3010021001 On Prot. set. change [Trigger ID100] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID190] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID11] 201400 3010031001 On Ctrl. set. change [Trigger ID101] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID191] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID14] 204201 3000001001 On F.Record clear [Trigger ID104] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID194] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID15] 200710 3001001001 On E.Record1 clear [Trigger ID105] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID195] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID18] 200401 30A0001001 On D.Record clear [Trigger ID108] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID198] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID20] 413001 8100201B63 On-Off DIF-S1 [Trigger ID110] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID200] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID22] 414001 8000101B60 On-Off REF1 [Trigger ID112] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID202] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID25] 45A001 8000101B65 On-Off OC1 [Trigger ID115] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID205] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID33] 45A401 8000101B60 On-Off EF1 [Trigger ID123] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID213] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID41] 45A801 8000101B60 On-Off EFIn1 [Trigger ID131] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID221] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID45] 487001 8000101B60 On-Off MECH1 [Trigger ID135] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID225] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID54] 487001 8900A01B60 On-Off MECH10 [Trigger ID144] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID234] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID55] 487001 8A00B01B60 On-Off MECH11 [Trigger ID145] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID235] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID56] 487001 8B00C01B60 On-Off MECH12 [Trigger ID146] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID236] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID57] 487001 8C00D01B60 On-Off MECH13 [Trigger ID147] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID237] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID58] 487001 8D00E01B60 On-Off MECH14 [Trigger ID148] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID238] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID59] 487001 8E00F01B60 On-Off MECH15 [Trigger ID149] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID239] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID60] 487001 8F01001B60 On-Off MECH16 [Trigger ID150] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID240] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID61] 451401 8000101B60 On-Off THM-A [Trigger ID151] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID241] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID62] 451401 8100201B60 On-Off THM-T [Trigger ID152] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID242] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID63] 476A01 8200101B60 On-Off VPH-A [Trigger ID153] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID243] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID64] 476A01 8300201B62 On-Off VPH-T [Trigger ID154] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID244] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID65] 45AC01 8000101B60 On-Off OCN1 [Trigger ID155] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID245] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID67] 45AC01 8200301B60 On-Off OCN3 [Trigger ID157] 4A3001 8000001B6D On-Off GEN.TRIP [Trigger ID247] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID68] 45AC01 8300401B60 On-Off OCN4 [Trigger ID158] 4A3001 8B00001B66 On-Off GEN.ALARM [Trigger ID248] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID69] 45B001 8000101B60 On-Off BCD-P [Trigger ID159] 4A3001 8000001B71 On-Off OPT.PHASE-A [Trigger ID249] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID70] 45B001 8100201B60 On-Off BCD-S [Trigger ID160] 4A3001 8100001B72 On-Off OPT.PHASE-B [Trigger ID250] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID71] 45B001 8200301B60 On-Off BCD-T [Trigger ID161] 4A3001 8200001B73 On-Off OPT.PHASE-C [Trigger ID254] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID72] 45B401 8000101B63 On-Off CBF1-RE [Trigger ID162] 4A3001 8300001B74 On-Off OPT.PHASE-N [Trigger ID252] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID73] 45B401 8000101B73 On-Off CBF1-TP [Trigger ID163] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID253] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID74] 45B401 8100201B63 On-Off CBF2-RE [Trigger ID164] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID254] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID77] 45B401 8200301B73 On-Off CBF3-TP [Trigger ID167] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID78] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID168] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID82] 475A01 8000101B60 On-Off FRQ1 [Trigger ID172] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID88] 475A01 8000111B60 On-Off DFRQ1 [Trigger ID178] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID89] 475A01 8100211B60 On-Off Serious error [Trigger ID179] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID90] 475A01 8200311B60 On-Off ErrorLevel2 [Trigger ID180] (Not Assigned) Off -
- 499 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Table 8.2-2 Event1 group set with [End of E.Record-1]=256 in ‘3E’ software in Model4
[Trigger ID78] 45B401 8300401B63 On-Off CBF4-RE [Trigger ID168] (Not Assigned) Off -
- 500 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Table 8.2-3 Event1 group set with [End of E.Record-1]=256 in ‘3F’ software in Model5
- 501 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Table 8.2-4 Event2 group set with [End of E.Record-1]=256 and [End of E.Record-2]=512
[Trigger ID266] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID356] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID446] 530001 3109001001 Change R/L Key
[Trigger ID283] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID373] 528001 3107011EA1 On LED RST [Trigger ID463] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID284] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID374] No Assign Off - [Trigger ID464] (Not Assigned) Off -
[Trigger ID287] (Not Assigned) Off - [Trigger ID377] 540001 000E001F41 On CNTVAL CTRL [Trigger ID467] (Not Assigned) Off -
- 502 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Table 8.2-5 Event3 group set with [End of E.Record-2]=512

- 503 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
8.2.2 Trigger modes

We can simplify the trigger signals into four: ‘On’, ‘Off ’, ‘On and Off ’, and ‘Change’ modes. Thus,
the user can should set a mode for respective triggers using [Trigger Mode1] and others.
(i) ‘On’ mode

In the ‘On’ mode, the event recorder can take an action when the trigger signal is switched to
‘On’, as shown in Figure 8.2-2. For the operation, set On for the [Trigger Mode*].
On
Pulse train
Off
Triggers generated Triggers generated Triggers generated
Figure 8.2-2 Trigger generated at ‘On’ mode
(ii) ‘Off’ mode

The ‘Off ’ mode is the other way of the ‘On’ mode; set Off for the operation.
On
Pulse train
Off
Figure 8.2-3 Trigger generated at ‘Off’ mode
(iii) ‘On-Off’ mode

In the ‘On-Off ’ mode, the trigger signal is generated when the pulse train is changed from ‘On
to Off ’ and ‘Off to On’ both, as shown in Figure 8.2-4. Set On-Off for the operation
On
Pulse train
Off
Figure 8.2-4 Trigger generated at ‘On-Off’ mode
(iv) ‘Change’ mode

The ‘Change mode’ is provided to detect the increment or the decrement of a number, when
new number is generated in the PLC logic. For example, this mode allows to detect the change
- 504 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
of group settings (e.g., the ‘SYS_CHG’ signal; which has been connected with the trigger#9
using the setting [Trigger ID9], as default; we have been discussed in Chapter Technical
description: Group setting for protection functions.)

Figure 8.2-5 illustrates the structure about the ‘Event Recored1’ group, which can be shown
the latest event#1 at the top structure (line ○
b ). The lines ○
c and ○
d describes how an event
occurred for the event#1. Preceding event#2, event#3, etc. are shown below the event#1.
Similarly, the information about the ‘Event Record2’ and ‘Event Record3’ groups are displayed
on the IED screen.
†Note:For more information about the screen operation, see Chapter User interface:
Record sub-menu.
Event Record1 ○
a Event record1 list
10:48 1/4
#1 2012-07-26 ○
b The latest event#1
12:34:51.223
F.Record clear ○
c Trigger inform ation
On ○
d Trigger m ode inform ation
#2 2012-07-25
Screen scroll down 10:56:12.021
○
e Event#2
Set group change

4
#3 2012-07-25 ○
f Event#3
10:31:12.159
F.Record clear
On
#4 2012-07-23 ○
g Event#4
23:56:12.159
Figure 8.2-5 Event information grouped in the Event record1
8.2.4 Setup for the event recorder

Consider that Trip command1, which is denoted with Data ID ‘4A3001 8000001B67’, should be
sorted into the ‘Event record1’ group. The settings [End of E.Record-1]=256 and [End of
E.Record-2]=512 have been made as default; hence, we may select it with the trigger#156 by
setting the [Trigger ID156]= ‘4A3001 8000001B67’. Set On-OFF for the [Trigger Mode156],
because the pulse-train of the trip command should be recorded along the pick-up and drop-off
times. Remember that the preferred name for the Trigger ID156 should be set using the [Event
Name156].
- 505 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
8.2.5 Setting
EVENTRECORD(Function ID: 200710)
End of E.Record-1 0 to 768 – The last position of the event group1 (Level1) 256
End of E.Record-2 0 to 768 – The last position of the event group2 (Level2) 512
Trigger ID1 (Preferred DataID) – Trigger signal1 for the operation
On / Off / On-Off /
Tigger Mode1 – Mode setting for the detection
Change
Event name1 (Preferred name) – Name of the trigger signal1
On / Off / On-Off /
Change
See tables in this
section
…… …… – ……
…… …… – ……
…… …… – ……
On / Off / On-Off /
Change

EVENTRECORD (Function ID: 200710)
ER1_CLR 3001001001 Clearing the data in Event group1
POWER ON 3100001001 Detection of switch On
- 506 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Disturbance recorder
A phenomenon of fault occurring will be recorded in the disturbance recorder and its
phenomenon is recorded within 1ms accuracy. The recorder starts when TRC trip command is
issued, but recording will also be started if a relay of the recorder detects an abnormal
phenomenon. The relays of the recorder are such as overcurrent, overvoltage, etc. The recorder,
additionally, will be instructed by PLC function, so an instruction is managed with a setting.
The amount of recording time and the sampling time are adjustable. Therefore, measured
values, such as current voltage and frequency, are recorded in accordance with the amount and
the sampling time. Logic signals are also recorded together with disturbance phenomena. The
recorder can hold up to 256 logic signals. The number of disturbance phenomena to be recorded
is limited by the amount of recording period and the sampling time.
8.3.1 Recording time and amount

(i) Time settings
Period of the recording is set using the [Record Time]. The disturbance recorder can operate
before the occurrence of the fault; the time before the fault occurrence can be set using the
[Pre-fault Time]. The user can choose a time among 0.1 sec. to 10.0 sec.
Setting [Record Time]
Setting [Pre-fault time]

Fault
Pre-fault information Succeeding formation
Start of recording Trip command issued End of recording
Figure 8.3-1 Period of recording time

(ii) Sampling rate setting
Sampling time is defined with setting [Sampling rate]; it can be selected either 7.5 electrical
degrees or 15 electrical degrees. For example, if the user set 7.5 for the [Sampling rate], the
disturbance recorder starts to collect the date in the sampling rate (2400Hz) in 50Hz system.
(iii) Trip command setting

As shown in Figure 8.3-1, the disturbance recorder starts when the trip command is issued,
provided On is set for the [Trip Trig.Sw]. The user has to set Off for the setting, if the
disturbance recorder shall not start with the trip command.
8.3.2 Relays within disturbance recorder

Eight relays are provided in the disturbance recorder exclusively: OC-P-DRT, OC-S-DRT, OC-
T –DRT, EF-P-DRT, EF-S-DRT, EF-T-DRT, 2f-DRT and 5f-DRT relays.
- 507 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(i) OC-P-DRT, OC-S-DRT, OC-T-DRT relays settings

Three overcurrent relays within the disturbance recorder (OC-P/S/T-DRT) are provided for the
primary, the secondary, and the tertiary windings. The user should set a pick-up value for the
relays to commence the disturbance recorder. That is, for the primary winding, use the setting
[OC-P-DRT]; then set On for the [OC-P-DRT-EN] if the primary relay operation is required to
commence the recording.
(ii) EF-P-DRT, EF-S-DRT, EF-T-DRT relays settings

Three earth fault relays (EF-P/S/T-DRT) are provided. For example, set the pick-up value for
the [EF-P-DRT]; then set On for the [EF-P-DRT-EN].
(iii) 2f relay setting

A second harmonic relay (2f-DRT) is provided. Set the value for the [2f-DRT]; then set On for
the [2f-DRT-EN].
(iv) 5f-DRT relay setting

A fifth harmonic relay (5f-DRT) is provided. Set the value for the [5f-DRT]; then set On for the
[5f-DRT-EN].
8.3.3 Maximum number for recording disturbance phenomena

Note that the maximum number for recording the disturbance phenomena depends on the
recording time and the sampling rate. Table 8.3-1 illustrates the maximum number. For
example, the 243 phenomena can be memorized in the disturbance recorder, when the [Record
Time] =1 and the [Sampling Rate] =7.5° elec., if the IED operates in 50Hz system. The user
can also check the maximum number on the IED screen (See Figure 8.3-2).
- 508 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Table 8.3-1 Max number depending on time settings

Max. recording number for Disturbance phenomena
Recording
Setting [Sampling Rate] in 50Hz sys. Setting [Sampling Rate] in 60Hz sys.
period set with
7.5º 15º 7.5º 15º
[Record Time]
(2400 samples a second) (1400 samples a second) (2880 samples a second) (1440 samples a second)
1 243, ○
○ 2 NA, 1 400, ○
○ 2 NA, 1 204, ○
○ 2 NA, 1 390, ○
○ 2 NA,
1 sec 3 195, ○
○ 4 201, 3 342, ○
○ 4 333, 3 164, ○
○ 4 169, 3 315, ○
○ 4 324,
5 152
○ 5 255
○ 5 128
○ 5 248
○
1 84, ○
○ 2 NA 1 142, ○
○ 2 NA, 1 70, ○
○ 2 NA, 1 138, ○
○ 2 NA,
3 sec 3 67, ○
○ 4 69, 3 114, ○
○ 4 117, 3 56, ○
○ 4 58, 3 111, ○
○ 4 114,
5 52
○ 5 88
○ 5 43
○ 5 86
○
1 51, ○
○ 2 NA, 1 86, ○
○ 2 NA, 1 42, ○
○ 2 NA, 1 84, ○
○ 2 NA,
5 sec 3 40, ○
○ 4 41, 3 69, ○
○ 4 71, 3 33, ○
○ 4 35, 3 67, ○
○ 4 69,
5 31
○ 5 53
○ 5 26
○ 5 52
○
Note: The maximum number depends on the VCT types, which are defined in respective
Model1(○
1 ), Model2(○
2 ), Model3(○
3 ), Model4(○
4 ), and Model5(○
5 ) of Table 8.3-2.
8.3.4 Number of analog quantities and logical signals for disturbance recorder
Ten analog quantities and 256 logical signals are record in a disturbance phenomenon.
(i) Number of analog quantities

For example, when the Model1 (VCT35B) is used in the IED, currents (Ia, Ib, Ic in 1CT and
2CT groups) and the voltage (V) are recorded. For more information about the VCT, see
Chapter Technical description: Transformer module for AC analog input.
- 509 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Table 8.3-2 Recording number of logic signals depending on time settings

Model1 Model2 Model3 Model4 Model5
Models
○1 ○2 ○3 ○4 ○5
VCT types 35B NA 49B 44B 44B&48B
Va Va-1VT
Vb Vb-1VT
Vc Vc-1VT
Voltages V NA V
– Va-2VT
– Vb-2VT
– Vc-2VT
Ia-1CT Ia-1CT Ia-1CT Ia-1CT
Ib-1CT Ib-1CT Ib-1CT Ib-1CT
Ic-1CT Ic-1CT Ic-1CT Ic-1CT
Ia-2CT Ia-2CT Ia-2CT Ia-2CT
Ib-2CT Ib-2CT Ib-2CT Ib-2CT
Ic-2CT Ic-2CT Ic-2CT Ic-2CT
– Ia-3CT Ia-3CT Ia-3CT
– Ib-3CT Ib-3CT Ib-3CT
– Ic-3CT Ic-3CT Ic-3CT
Currents NA
– – Ia-4CT Ia-4CT
– – Ib-4CT Ib-4CT
– – Ic-4CT Ic-4CT
– – – Ia-5CT
– – – Ib-5CT
– – – Ic-5CT
– In-1NCT – In-1NCT
– In-2NCT – In-2NCT
– – – In-3NCT
Number of recording 7 NA 14 13 24
(ii) Number of logical signals

As mentioned earlier, the disturbance recorder can hold the traces of logic signals during the
recording time. Using settings [Binary Signal*], the user can select 256 logic signal arbitrary.
The logic signals that the user has selected should be termed with user’s preferred names using
settings [Binary Sig.Name*]. Table 8.3-3 and Table 8.3-4 tabulate the settings. For example,
‘DS1-CLOSE’ signal of the PROTCOMM function may be chosen to record using the setting
[Binary Signal1]; we should term it ‘DS1_CLOSE’ using the [Binary Sig.Name1].
- 510 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Table 8.3-3 Setting list for logic signals of ‘3D’ software in Model5
[Binary Sig. [Binary Sig. [Binary Sig.
Settings Data IDs Origins Settings Data IDs Origins Settings Data IDs Origins
Name] Name] Name]
[Binary Signal1] 4A3001 8000001B67 TRIP-1 TRC [Binary Signal91] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal191] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal4] 4A3001 8300001B6A TRIP-4 TRC [Binary Signal94] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal194] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal5] 4A3001 8400001B6B TRIP-5 TRC [Binary Signal95] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal195] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal6] 4A3001 8500001B6C TRIP-6 TRC [Binary Signal96] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal196] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal7] 413001 8100201B63 DIF-S1 DIF [Binary Signal97] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal197] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal9] 413001 8F00301B60 DIF-2f DIF [Binary Signal99] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal199] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal11] 414001 8000101B60 REF1 REF [Binary Signal101] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal201] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal13] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal103] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal203] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal14] 45A001 8000101B65 OC1 OC [Binary Signal104] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal204] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal22] 45A401 8000101B60 EF1 EF [Binary Signal112] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal212] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal30] 45A801 8000101B60 EFIn1 EFIn [Binary Signal120] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal220] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal34] 480A01 8F00041C23 ICD ICD [Binary Signal124] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal224] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal35] 487001 8000101B60 MECH1 MECH [Binary Signal125] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal225] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal44] 487001 8900A01B60 MECH10 MECH [Binary Signal134] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal234] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal45] 487001 8A00B01B60 MECH11 MECH [Binary Signal135] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal235] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal46] 487001 8B00C01B60 MECH12 MECH [Binary Signal136] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal236] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal47] 487001 8C00D01B60 MECH13 MECH [Binary Signal137] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal237] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal48] 487001 8D00E01B60 MECH14 MECH [Binary Signal138] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal238] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal49] 487001 8E00F01B60 MECH15 MECH [Binary Signal139] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal239] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal50] 487001 8F01001B60 MECH16 MECH [Binary Signal150] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal250] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal51] 451401 8000101B60 THM-A THM [Binary Signal151] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal251] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal52] 451401 8100201B60 THM-T THM [Binary Signal152] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal252] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal53] 476A01 8200101B60 VPH-A VPH [Binary Signal153] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal253] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal54] 476A01 8300201B62 VPH-T VPU [Binary Signal154] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal254] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal55] 45AC01 8000101B60 OCN1 OCN [Binary Signal155] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal255] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal57] 45AC01 8200301B60 OCN3 OCN [Binary Signal157] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal59] 45B001 8000101B60 BCD-P-OPT BCD [Binary Signal159] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal60] 45B001 8100201B60 BCD-S-OPT BCD [Binary Signal160] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal61] 45B001 8200301B60 BCD-T-OPT BCD [Binary Signal161] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal62] 45B401 8000101B63 CBF1-RETRIP CBF [Binary Signal162] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal63] 45B401 8000101B73 CBF1-TRIP CBF [Binary Signal163] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal68] (Not Assigned) - …. [Binary Signal168] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal72] 475A01 8000101B60 FRQ1-OPT FRQ [Binary Signal172] (Not Assigned) - ….
[Binary Signal78] 475A01 8000111B60 DFRQ1-OPT FRQ [Binary Signal178] (Not Assigned) - ….
- 511 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Table 8.3-4 Setting list for logic signals of ‘3E’ software in Model5
Name] Name] Name]
- 512 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Table 8.3-5 Setting list for logic signals of ‘3F’ software in Model5
Name] Name] Name]
- 513 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
8.3.5 Trigger settings for PLC programming

If the PLC program instructs the operation of the disturbance recorder, the user should set the
[Trigger ID1] to [Trigger ID4]. That is, the program-output points should be set for the settings
[Trigger ID1] to [Trigger ID4]; then, set On for the [Trigger SW1] to [Trigger SW4], respectively.

Figure 8.3-2 indicates the maximum number of the recording operations as the number is
changed depending on the time settings, which are shown in Table 8.3-1. Figure 8.3-3 shows
the operation time and the date for the disturbance recorder and the figure illustrates five
disturbance phenomena have been memorized in the IED.
Disturbance Record
10:48 1/2
_Record List >
Number of items
5/77
Clear Records +
Max. recording number for Disturbance phenomena
Operating counter
Figure 8.3-2 Running counter and Max number in the disturbance recorder
Disturbance Record
10:48 1/5
#1 2012-07-25 ○
a Disturbance record#1
10:48:21.223
#2 2012-07-21 ○
b Disturbance record#2
01:15:55.018
#3 2012/07/21 ○
c Disturbance record#3
Screen scroll down 13:11:29.621
#4 2012-07-02 ○
d Disturbance record#4
23:32:09.015
#5 2012-06-20 ○
e Disturbance record#5
09:37:48.915
Figure 8.3-3 Detail information in the disturbance recorder
The information in the disturbance recorder is managed in the COMTRADE format,

hence, the user can transfer the disturbance recording file to the PC using the engineering tool
‘GR-TIEMS’. Figure 8.3-4 shows the example of the GR-TIMES screen. For more information,
see Chapter Engineering tool.
- 514 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Figure 8.3-4 Screen shot from GR-TIEMS
- 515 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
8.3.7 Setting
DRT_TP(Function ID: 4B2001)
Range Default
Setting items Unit Contents Note
1A rating 5A rating 1A 5A
OC-P-DRT-EN Off / On – Disturbance Record Trigger OC-P-DRT enable Off
0.10 - 0.50 -
OC-P-DRT A OC-P-DRT relay operating value 1.00 5.00
50.00 250.00
OC-S-DRT-EN Off / On – Disturbance Record Trigger OC-S-DRT enable Off
0.10 - 0.50 -
OC-S-DRT A OC-S-DRT relay operating value 1.00 5.00
50.00 250.00
OC-T-DRT-EN Off / On – Disturbance Record Trigger OC-T-DRT enable Off
0.10 - 0.50 -
OC-T-DRT A OC-T-DRT relay operating value 1.00 5.00
50.00 250.00
EF-P-DRT-EN Off / On – Disturbance Record Trigger EF-P-DRT enable Off
0.10 - 0.50 -
EF-P-DRT A EF-P-DRT relay operating value 1.00 5.00
50.00 250.00
EF-S-DRT-EN Off / On – Disturbance Record Trigger EF-S-DRT enable Off
0.10 - 0.50 -
EF-S-DRT A EF-S-DRT relay operating value 1.00 5.00
50.00 250.00
EF-T-DRT-EN Off / On – Disturbance Record Trigger EF-T-DRT enable Off
0.10 - 0.50 -
EF-T-DRT A EF-T-DRT relay operating value 1.00 5.00
50.00 250.00
2f-DRT-EN Off / On – Disturbance Record Trigger 2f-DRT enable Off
5f-DRT-EN Off / On – Disturbance Record Trigger 2f-DRT enable Off
DISTURB_REC(Function ID: 200401)

Range Default
Setting items Unit Contents Note
1A rating 5A rating 1A 5A
Record Time 0.1 - 10.0 s Time for disturbance recording 3.0
Sampling Rate 7.5 - 15.0 deg Sampling rate in electrical degree 7.5
Pre-fault Time 0.1 - 10.0 s Pre-fault time 0.3
Trigger ID1 (Preferred DataID) – Signal1 generated in User’s program No Assign
Trigger SW1 Off / On – Enabling the signal1 of user’s program Off
Trigger ID2 - – Signal2 generated in User’s program No Assign
Trip Trig.SW Off / On – Operation with the TRC trip command On
Binary Signal1 (Preferred DataID) – Logic signal1 for the operation
Binary Sig.Name1 (Preferred name) – Name of the logic signal1
See setting table
in the preceding
section
…… …… – ……
…… …… – ……
Binary Signal256 (Preferred DataID) – Mode setting for the detection
Binary Sig.Name256 (Preferred name) – Name of the trigger signal768
- 516 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

DRT_TP (Function ID: 4B2001)
8000001C20 DRT-TP DRT-TP protection operated
8400101C23 EF-P-DRT EF-P-DRT relay element operated
8400201C23 EF-S-DRT EF-S-DRT relay element operated
8400301C23 EF-T-DRT EF-T-DRT relay element operated
8000011C20 OC-P-DRT-A OC-P-DRT relay element operated (phase-A)
8100011C21 OC-P-DRT-B OC-P-DRT relay element operated (phase-B)
8200011C22 OC-P-DRT-C OC-P-DRT relay element operated (phase-C)
8000021C20 OC-S-DRT-A OC-S-DRT relay element operated (phase-A)
8100021C21 OC-S-DRT-B OC-S-DRT relay element operated (phase-B)
8200021C22 OC-S-DRT-C OC-S-DRT relay element operated (phase-C)
8000031C20 OC-T-DRT-A OC-T-DRT relay element operated (phase-A)
8100031C21 OC-T-DRT-B OC-T-DRT relay element operated (phase-B)
8200031C22 OC-T-DRT-C OC-T-DRT relay element operated (phase-C)

DISTURB_REC (Function ID: 200401)
80A0041001 DSTRING Writing the disturbance data
30A0001001 DSTR_CLR Data erased
80A0031001 DSTR_MADE Completion for writing the disturbance data
32A0011001 DSTR_MAX Maximum possible number of the operations
32A0021001 DSTR_NUM Operation counter
- 517 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Transferred information during fault

The IED can transfer the information during the fault in the IEC61850 communication†.
†Note:The transferring is only available in the IEC61850 Editon1 with option or

Editon2. For the information about the option, see Chapter Communication
protocol: IEC 61850 communication: About protocol, separately.
8.4.1 Transferred metering values

Table 8.4-1 shows transferring information during the fault†. When the IED is running on the
IEC61850 Edition1 option, these signals should be mapped for Private Object AnInDatUpd.
When the IED is running on the IEC61850 Editon2, they should be mapped for Normal Object
AnIn.
Table 8.4-1 Transferred values taken during the fault

Data transferred () at
Signals
Items Unit software model
names
3D 3E 3F
Ia-1CT (Primary) FLTMS0001 A   
Ib-1CT (Primary) FLTMS0004 A   
Ic-1CT (Primary) FLTMS0007 A   
I1-1CT (Primary) FLTMS0010 A   
Ia-4CT (Primary) FLTMS0055 A  
Ib-4CT (Primary) FLTMS0058 A  
Ic-4CT (Primary) FLTMS0061 A  
I1-4CT (Primary) FLTMS0064 A  
Ia-5CT (Primary) FLTMS0073 A 
Ib-5CT (Primary) FLTMS0076 A 
Ic-5CT (Primary) FLTMS0079 A 
I1-5CT (Primary) FLTMS0082 A 
- 518 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

Signals
names
3D 3E 3F
In-1NCT (Primary) FLTMS0091 A  
In-2NCT (Primary) FLTMS0094 A  
In-3NCT (Primary) FLTMS0097 A 
V-P (Primary) FLTMS0100 V   
Va-P (Primary) FLTMS0103 V  
Vb-P (Primary) FLTMS0106 V  
Vc-P (Primary) FLTMS0109 V  
Vab-P (Primary) FLTMS0112 V  
Vbc-P (Primary) FLTMS0115 V  
Vca-P (Primary) FLTMS0118 V  
V1-P (Primary) FLTMS0121 V  
V-S (Primary) FLTMS0130 V   
Va-S (Primary) FLTMS0133 V  
Vb-S (Primary) FLTMS0136 V  
Vc-S (Primary) FLTMS0139 V  
Vab-S (Primary) FLTMS0142 V  
Vbc-S (Primary) FLTMS0145 V  
Vca-S (Primary) FLTMS0148 V  
V1-S (Primary) FLTMS0151 V  
V-T (Primary) FLTMS0160 V   
Va-T (Primary) FLTMS0163 V  
Vb-T (Primary) FLTMS0166 V  
Vc-T (Primary) FLTMS0169 V  
Vab-T (Primary) FLTMS0172 V  
Vbc-T (Primary) FLTMS0175 V  
Vca-T (Primary) FLTMS0178 V  
V1-T (Primary) FLTMS0181 V  
Ia-P (Primary) FLTMS0190 A   
Ib-P (Primary) FLTMS0193 A   
Ic-P (Primary) FLTMS0196 A   
I1-P (Primary) FLTMS0199 A   
Ia-S (Primary) FLTMS0208 A   
Ib-S (Primary) FLTMS0211 A   
Ic-S (Primary) FLTMS0214 A   
I1-S (Primary) FLTMS0217 A   
Ia-T (Primary) FLTMS0226 A   
Ib-T (Primary) FLTMS0229 A   
Ic-T (Primary) FLTMS0232 A   
I1-T (Primary) FLTMS0235 A   
- 519 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

Signals
names
3D 3E 3F
Id1 FLTMS0244 pu   
Id2 FLTMS0245 pu   
Id3 FLTMS0246 pu   
Ir1 FLTMS0247 pu   
Ir2 FLTMS0248 pu   
Ir3 FLTMS0249 pu   
Id0-1 FLTMS0250 pu  
Id0-2 FLTMS0251 pu  
Id0-3 FLTMS0252 pu 
Ir0-1 FLTMS0253 pu  
Ir0-2 FLTMS0254 pu  
Ir0-3 FLTMS0255 pu 
THM-Capacity FLTMS0256 %   
I2/I1-P FLTMS0257   
I2/I1-S FLTMS0258   
I2/I1-T FLTMS0259   
Note: See section 8.1.1(iv) about the information about fault recording quantities. To
find Data ID, see section 8.4.4.
- 520 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
8.4.2 Transferred information about tripped phase and mode

Information about the tripped phases and mode can be transferred with the signals in Table
8.4-2. For more information about tripped phases and modes, see sections 8.1.1(ii) and (iii).
Table 8.4-2 Transferred information

Items Signal names
Number of faults recorded FLT_CNT
Time at the fault occurrence FLT_TM
Tripped at phase A FLT_PH_A
Tripped at phase B FLT_PH_B
Tripped at phase C FLT_PH_C
Tripped at phase N FLT_PH_N
Relay element operated at phase 1 FLT_OP_1
8.4.3 Transferred state information

Information collected by setting [OP Mode ID*] can transferred with the signals in Table 8.4-3.
For more information about the statuses, see sections 8.1.3(i) and (ii).
Table 8.4-3 Transferred information by OP mode settings

Items Signal names
State taken by setting [OP Mode ID1] FLTOPM001
…. ….
Logical state taken by setting [OP Mode ID201] FLTOPM201
…. ….
- 521 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
8.4.4 Transferring record value and information

 Signal generated for transferring
Element ID Signal name Description
3130001180 FLT_CNT Count of Fault Record
9030001006 FLT_TM Fault Time
8030001B60 FLT_PH_A Fault Phase A
8130001B61 FLT_PH_B Fault Phase B
8230001B62 FLT_PH_C Fault Phase C
8330001B63 FLT_PH_N Fault Phase N
8030001B20 FLT_OP_A Reserved
8130001B21 FLT_OP_B Reserved
8230001B22 FLT_OP_C Reserved
8430001B24 FLT_OP2_A Reserved
8530001B25 FLT_OP2_B Reserved
8630001B26 FLT_OP2_C Reserved
8830001B28 FLT_OP_1 Operating Phase 1
8930001B29 FLT_OP_2 Operating Phase 2
8A30001B2A FLT_OP_3 Operating Phase 3
8B30001B2B FLT_OP_4 Operating Phase 4
8C30001B2C FLT_OP_5 Operating Phase 5
8D30001B2D FLT_OP_6 Operating Phase 6
4330001001 FLTMS0001 Value taken during the fault (0001)
43300A1001 FLTMS0011 Value taken during the fault (0011)
43300B1001 FLTMS0012 Value taken during the fault (0012)
43300C1001 FLTMS0013 Value taken during the fault (0013)
43300D1001 FLTMS0014 Value taken during the fault (0014)
43300E1001 FLTMS0015 Value taken during the fault (0015)
43300F1001 FLTMS0016 Value taken during the fault (0016)
- 522 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

- 523 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

- 524 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

- 525 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

4330AA1001 FLTMS0171 Value taken during the fault (0171)
4330AB1001 FLTMS0172 Value taken during the fault (0172)
4330AC1001 FLTMS0173 Value taken during the fault (0173)
4330AD1001 FLTMS0174 Value taken during the fault (0174)
4330AE1001 FLTMS0175 Value taken during the fault (0175)
4330AF1001 FLTMS0176 Value taken during the fault (0176)
4330BA1001 FLTMS0187 Value taken during the fault (0187)
4330BB1001 FLTMS0188 Value taken during the fault (0188)
4330BC1001 FLTMS0189 Value taken during the fault (0189)
4330BD1001 FLTMS0190 Value taken during the fault (0190)
4330BE1001 FLTMS0191 Value taken during the fault (0191)
4330BF1001 FLTMS0192 Value taken during the fault (0192)
- 526 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

4330CA1001 FLTMS0203 Value taken during the fault (0203)
4330CB1001 FLTMS0204 Value taken during the fault (0204)
4330CC1001 FLTMS0205 Value taken during the fault (0205)
4330CD1001 FLTMS0206 Value taken during the fault (0206)
4330CE1001 FLTMS0207 Value taken during the fault (0207)
4330CF1001 FLTMS0208 Value taken during the fault (0208)
4330DA1001 FLTMS0219 Value taken during the fault (0219)
4330DB1001 FLTMS0220 Value taken during the fault (0220)
4330DC1001 FLTMS0221 Value taken during the fault (0221)
4330DD1001 FLTMS0222 Value taken during the fault (0222)
4330DE1001 FLTMS0223 Value taken during the fault (0223)
4330DF1001 FLTMS0224 Value taken during the fault (0224)
4330EA1001 FLTMS0235 Value taken during the fault (0235)
4330EB1001 FLTMS0236 Value taken during the fault (0236)
4330EC1001 FLTMS0237 Value taken during the fault (0237)
4330ED1001 FLTMS0238 Value taken during the fault (0238)
4330EE1001 FLTMS0239 Value taken during the fault (0239)
4330EF1001 FLTMS0240 Value taken during the fault (0240)
- 527 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

4330FA1001 FLTMS0251 Value taken during the fault (0251)
4330FB1001 FLTMS0252 Value taken during the fault (0252)
4330FC1001 FLTMS0253 Value taken during the fault (0253)
4330FD1001 FLTMS0254 Value taken during the fault (0254)
4330FE1001 FLTMS0255 Value taken during the fault (0255)
4330FF1001 FLTMS0256 Value taken during the fault (0256)
- 528 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

- 529 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

- 530 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

- 531 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

- 532 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

- 533 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

- 534 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

- 535 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

- 536 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

- 537 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

- 538 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

- 539 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

- 540 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

- 541 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

- 542 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

- 543 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

- 544 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

8050001135 FLTOPM001 Status at Operation identifier ID1
8A500A1135 FLTOPM011 Status at Operation identifier ID11
8B500B1135 FLTOPM012 Status at Operation identifier ID12
8C500C1135 FLTOPM013 Status at Operation identifier ID13
- 545 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

8D500D1135 FLTOPM014 Status at Operation identifier ID14
8E500E1135 FLTOPM015 Status at Operation identifier ID15
8F500F1135 FLTOPM016 Status at Operation identifier ID16
- 546 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

- 547 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

8050801135 FLTOPM201 Status at Logical operation identifier ID201
8A508A1135 FLTOPM211 Status at Logical operation identifier ID211
8B508B1135 FLTOPM212 Status at Logical operation identifier ID212
8C508C1135 FLTOPM213 Status at Logical operation identifier ID213
8D508D1135 FLTOPM214 Status at Logical operation identifier ID214
8E508E1135 FLTOPM215 Status at Logical operation identifier ID215
8F508F1135 FLTOPM216 Status at Logical operation identifier ID216
- 548 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

8A509A1135 FLTOPM227 Status at Logical operation identifier ID227
8B509B1135 FLTOPM228 Status at Logical operation identifier ID228
8C509C1135 FLTOPM229 Status at Logical operation identifier ID229
8D509D1135 FLTOPM230 Status at Logical operation identifier ID230
8E509E1135 FLTOPM231 Status at Logical operation identifier ID231
8F509F1135 FLTOPM232 Status at Logical operation identifier ID232
8050A01135 FLTOPM233 Status at Logical operation identifier ID233
8A50AA1135 FLTOPM243 Status at Logical operation identifier ID243
8B50AB1135 FLTOPM244 Status at Logical operation identifier ID244
8C50AC1135 FLTOPM245 Status at Logical operation identifier ID245
8D50AD1135 FLTOPM246 Status at Logical operation identifier ID246
8E50AE1135 FLTOPM247 Status at Logical operation identifier ID247
8F50AF1135 FLTOPM248 Status at Logical operation identifier ID248
8050B01135 FLTOPM249 Status at Logical operation identifier ID249
8A50BA1135 FLTOPM259 Status at Logical operation identifier ID259
8B50BB1135 FLTOPM260 Status at Logical operation identifier ID260
8C50BC1135 FLTOPM261 Status at Logical operation identifier ID261
- 549 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

8D50BD1135 FLTOPM262 Status at Logical operation identifier ID262
8E50BE1135 FLTOPM263 Status at Logical operation identifier ID263
8F50BF1135 FLTOPM264 Status at Logical operation identifier ID264
- 550 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
9 Monitoring function
Accumulated time 571 Metering features –
Counter features – -Information 556
-Information in GCNT 570 -Diminishing small value 557
Demand features – -Flow settings for P, Q, S 558
-Information 564 -Measurement settings 557
-Demand cycle 567 -Information on the screen 553
-Resetting data in demand features 568 -Polarity setting for PF 559
-Max/Min/Ave information 567 Peak Demand features –
Dead band features – -Max/Min/Ave. information 569
-V, I, P, Q, S, PF, Frequency. 560 -Reset of peak-demand data 569
-Wh, Varh, Phase, Voltage difference 560 Power settings –
-GCNT 570 -Information on the screen 563
-Regulating power values 563
-Power values settings 563
- 551 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Outline
The monitoring function is provided to measure the number of power quantities and statistics
data obtained within the VCT and BI circuits†. When the measuring instruments start
measures power quantities, mathematical means is applied to the data from the VCT so that
the data are shown accurately on the IED screen. The monitoring function has several screens
together
†Note:The VCT/BIO structures and their features are discussed in Chapter Technical
description.
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
identify the IED ordering number; check the order number for the “7” and “G&N” positions
Ordering No. at “7(hardware)” and “G&N(software)”
3D – – 3E – – 3F – –
9.1 Main features  – –  – –  – –
9.2.2(ii) Unit setting for P,Q,S  – – NA – –  – –
9.2.4 Flow sets for P,Q,S  – – NA – –  – –
9.2.5 Polarity setting for PF  – – NA – –  – –
Bands for P/Q/SSD,
9.2.6(ii)  – – NA – –  – –
PFSD, Wh/varhSD
- 552 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Metering data (Metering group)

When the VCT module operates, metering data are screened along with several abbreviations,
which represents their natures, as shown in the below Table.
Table 9.2-1 Metering data in ‘3D’ software in Model3

Abbreviations Metering quantities
Ia-1CT, Ib-1CT, Ic-1CT Metering currents flowing at the CTs set with the [Conn-1CT].
I1-1CT, I2-1CT, I0-1CT Metered ones except symmetrical (Ia-1CT, Ib-1CT, Ic-1CT) for [Conn-1CT]= 2P
In-1NCT, In-2NCT Metered neutral currents at 1CT, 2CT
V-P Metering quantities for the setting [Conn-VT]= Primary

Va-P, Vb-P, Vc-P [InType-VT]= 1PN / 1PP / 1N: Metered a representative voltage only (V-P)
Vab-P, Vbc-P, Vca-P [InType-VT]= 3PN: Metered ones expect for the representative voltage (V-P)
V1-P, V2-P, V0-P [InType-VT]= 3PP: Metered exclusive voltages (Vab-P, Vbc-P, Vca-P, V1-P, V2-P, V0-P)
V-S Metering quantities for the setting [Conn-VT]= Secondary

Va-S, Vb-S, Vc-S [InType-VT]= 1PN / 1PP / 1N: Metered a representative voltage only (V-S)
Vab-S, Vbc-S, Vca-S [InType-VT]= 3PN: Metered ones expect for the representative voltage (V-S)
V1-S, V2-S, V0-S [InType-VT]= 3PP: Metered exclusive voltages (Vab-S, Vbc-S, Vca-S, V1-S, V2-S, V0-S)
V-T Metering quantities for the setting [Conn-VT]= Tertiary

Va-T, Vb-T, Vc-T [InType-VT]= 1PN / 1PP / 1N: Metered a representative voltage only (V-T)
Vab-T, Vbc-T, Vca-T [InType-VT]= 3PN: Metered ones expect for the representative voltage (V-T)
V1-T, V2-T, V0-T [InType-VT]= 3PP: Metered exclusive voltages (Vab-T, Vbc-T, Vca-T, V1-T, V2-T, V0-T)
Ia-P, Ib-P, Ic-P Metering currents flowing in Primary
I1-P, I2-P, I0-P Metered ones except symmetrical (I1-P, I2-P, I0-P) for [InType-CT]= 2P
Ia-S, Ib-S, Ic-S Metering currents flowing in-Secondary
I1-S, I2-S, I0-S Metered ones except symmetrical (I1-S, I2-S, I0-S) for [InType-CT]= 2P
Ia-T, Ib-T, Ic-T Metering currents flowing in-Tertiary
I1-T, I2-T, I0-T Metered ones except symmetrical (I1-T, I2-T, I0-T) for [InType-CT]= 2P
Id0-1, Id0-2 Differential currents (Id) at Group 1 and Group2
Ir0-1, Ir0-2 Differential currents (Ir) at Group 1 and Group2
- 553 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Id1pu, Id2 pu , Id3pu Pick up differential currents (Id) at Group 1 to Group3
Id0pu-1, Id0pu-2 Pick up differential currents (Id0) at Group 1 and Group2
f Frequency
V/f Ratio of voltage to frequency
P-P, Q-P, S-P, PF-P Active (real), Reactive, Complex (apparent) powers, and power factor in the primary
P-S, Q-S, S-S, PF-S Active (real), Reactive, Complex (apparent) powers, and power factor in the secondary
P-T, Q-T, S-T, PF-T Active (real), Reactive, Complex (apparent) powers, and power factor in the tertiary
Table 9.2-2 Metering data in ‘3E’ software in Mode4

V-P Metering quantities for the setting [Conn-VT]= Primary

Va-P, Vb-P, Vc-P [InType-VT]= 1PN / 1PP / 1N: Metered a representative voltage only (V-P)
Vab-P, Vbc-P, Vca-P [InType-VT]= 3PN: Metered ones expect for the representative voltage (V-P)
V1-P, V2-P, V0-P [InType-VT]= 3PP: Metered exclusive voltages (Vab-P, Vbc-P, Vca-P, V1-P, V2-P, V0-P)
V-S Metering quantities for the setting [Conn-VT]= Secondary

Va-S, Vb-S, Vc-S [InType-VT]= 1PN / 1PP / 1N: Metered a representative voltage only (V-P)
Vab-S, Vbc-S, Vca-S [InType-VT]= 3PN: Metered ones expect for the representative voltage (V-P)
V1-S, V2-S, V0-S [InType-VT]= 3PP: Metered exclusive voltages (Vab-P, Vbc-P, Vca-P, V1-P, V2-P, V0-P)

Va-T, Vb-T, Vc-T [InType-VT]= 1PN / 1PP / 1N: Metered a representative voltage only (V-P)
Vab-T, Vbc-T, Vca-T [InType-VT]= 3PN: Metered ones expect for the representative voltage (V-P)
V1-T, V2-T, V0-T [InType-VT]= 3PP: Metered exclusive voltages (Vab-P, Vbc-P, Vca-P, V1-P, V2-P, V0-P)
- 554 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
f Frequency
Table 9.2-3 Metering data in ‘3F’ software in Mode5

In-1NCT, In-2NCT, In-

Metered neutral currents at 1CT, 2CT, 3CT
3NCT
V-P Metering quantities for the settings [Conn-1VT]/ [Conn-2VT]= Primary

Va-P, Vb-P, Vc-P [InType-1VT/2VT]= 1PN / 1PP / 1N: Metered a representative voltage only (V-P)
Vab-P, Vbc-P, Vca-P [InType-1VT/2VT]= 3PN: Metered ones expect the representative voltage (V-P)
V1-P, V2-P, V0-P [InType-1VT/2VT]= 3PP:Metered exclusive voltages(Vab-P,Vbc-P,Vca-P,V1-P, V2-P, V0-P)
V-S Metering quantities for the settings [Conn-1VT]/ [Conn-2VT]= Secondary

Va-S, Vb-S, Vc-S [InType-1VT/2VT]= 1PN / 1PP / 1N: Metered a representative voltage only (V-S)
Vab-S, Vbc-S, Vca-S [InType-1VT/2VT]= 3PN: Metered expect for the representative voltage (V-S)
V1-S, V2-S, V0-S [InType-1VT/2VT]=3PP:Metered exclusive voltage(Vab-S,Vbc-S,Vca-SP,V1-S,V2-S,V0-S)

Va-T, Vb-T, Vc-T [InType-1VT/2VT]= 1PN / 1PP / 1N: Metered a representative voltage only (V-T)
Vab-T, Vbc-T, Vca-T [InType-1VT/2VT]= 3PN: Metered expect for the representative voltage (V-T)
V1-T, V2-T, V0-T [InType-1VT/2VT]=3PP:Metered exclusive voltage (Vab-T,Vbc-T,Vca-T,V1-T,V2-PT,V0-T)
Ia-P, Ib-P, Ic-P Metering currents flowing in Primary
I1-P, I2-P, I0-P Metered ones except symmetrical (I1-P, I2-P, I0-P) for [InType-CT]= 2P
- 555 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Ia-S, Ib-S, Ic-S Metering currents flowing in-Secondary
I1-S, I2-S, I0-S Metered ones except symmetrical (I1-S, I2-S, I0-S) for [InType-CT]= 2P
Ia-T, Ib-T, Ic-T Metering currents flowing in-Tertiary
I1-T, I2-T, I0-T Metered ones except symmetrical (I1-T, I2-T, I0-T) for [InType-CT]= 2P
Id0-1, Id0-2, Id0-3 Differential currents (Id) at Group 1 to Group3
Ir0-1, Ir0-2, Id0-3 Differential currents (Ir) at Group 1 to Group3
Id0pu-1, Id0pu-2, Id0pu-3 Pick up differential currents (Id0) at Group 1 to Group3
f Frequency
P-P, Q-P, S-P, PF-P Active (real), Reactive, Complex (apparent) powers, and power factor in the primary
P-S, Q-S, S-S, PF-S Active (real), Reactive, Complex (apparent) powers, and power factor in the secondary
P-T, Q-T, S-T, PF-T Active (real), Reactive, Complex (apparent) powers, and power factor in the tertiary
9.2.1 Metering information on the screen

The user can examine the values provided by the metering function on the IED screen; thus,
zero (0) is screened if the applying data is lesser than the threshold. The user can also examine
the KCT parameters.
Metering KCT
10:48 1/59 10:48 1/12
Ia-1CT KCT1_DIF
12.345kA 123.45deg 123.456
Ib-1CT KCT2_DIF
123.456
12.345kA 123.45deg
KCT3_DIF
Ic-1CT
123.456
12.345kA 123.45deg
Figure 9.2-1 Current and KCT on the IED screen

Note: If any quantity does not enter to the VCT, the value on the screen is displayed
such as “***.**” and “–––––”.
- 556 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
9.2.2 Setting for measurements

(i) Selecting either primary/secondary values
In the metering function, the value of the primary side is displayed on the screen; when the
value is greater than 1000 volts, it will be displayed in KV unit. When the user prefers
displaying the value of the secondary side, the user should set Secondary for the setting
[Display_Value].Table 9.2-4 shows the effective digit when Secondary is set.
Metering
10:48 1/2
Display Value +
Primary
I-Display Unit +
kA
V-Display Unit +
kV
Figure 9.2-2 Metering setting in the setting screen

Note: For the operation of the menu, see Chapter User interface: Setting sub-menu.
Table 9.2-4 Significant digits for metering
Maximum number of significant
Metering screen Settings digits after decimal point
Current/Voltage Phase angle
Primary
Voltage 1
Secontray
1
Primary 2
Current
Secontray 3
(ii) Unit setting

The user can select to a metering unit for each metering value. For example, the current is
preferred to be displayed in kA unit, the user should set kA for the [I-Display Unit]. Table 9.2-5
shows the unit lists in the metering funciton.
Table 9.2-5 Selection of units to display
Metering items Settings Selection of a unit to display
Voltage (V) [V-Display Unit] Volt (V) or kilo-volt (kV)
Current (I) [I-Display Unit] Ampare (A) or kilo-ampare (kA)
Active power (P) [P-Display Unit] Kilo-watt (kW) or Mega-watt (MW)
Reactive power (Q) [Q-Display Unit] Kilo-var (kvar) or Mega-var (Mvar)
Apprent power (S) [S-Display Unit] Kilo-VA (kVA) or Mega-VA (MVA)
9.2.3 Diminishing a very small value to display zero

In the metering function, negligible metering values will be considered as zero. The user can
- 557 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
set the level to diminish in % using settings [I-Valid Level] and [V-Valid Level], at which values
‘4.00’ and ‘0.30’ are set, as default, respectively. Thus, zero (0) will be displayed when the
applied quantities at the VCT, which are lesser than the setting levels.
9.2.4 Flow settings for active/reactive/apparent powers

The user should set the rules for the metering P, Q, and S
(i) Metering in active power (P)
When the metering function measures the value for supplying power, the user should set Send
for the [Power]. Conversely, if the metering function should operate for absorbing power, set
Receive for the setting. Figure 9.2-3 illustrates the sign of the active power (P), which is
polarized with the voltage (V). In Figure 9.2-3.a exemplifies the metering function operating
for the supplying power so that the value P will have plus (+) sign (i.e., the I lags the V, which
shown in Quadrant IV). In Figure 9.2-3.b, the value P will have minus (–) sign when the I lags
the V, provided Receive is set for the setting.
Receiving Sending Receiving Sending
II
(P<0)
I
(P>0)
II
(P>0)
I
(P<0)
V V (+)
III I
IV
(P>0)
III
(P>0)
I
IV
(P<0) (P<0)
a. Metering (P) for supplying power b. Metering (P) for absorbing power
[Power]=Send [Power]=Receive
Figure 9.2-3 Sign of the active power (P) ruled by setting [Power]
(ii) Metering in reactive power (Q)

Similar to the active power (P), the user should set the metering sign for the reactive power
(Q). The Q value will have the minus sign (–) based on the P value, when Lag is set for setting
[Current] (Figure 9.2-4.a). On the other hand, the Q value will have the plus sign (+) based on
the P value, when Lead set for the setting (Figure 9.2-4.b).
II
(Q>0)
I
(Q>0)
II
(Q<0)
I
(Q<0)
V
V
III
(Q<0)
I
IV
(Q<0)
III I
IV
(Q>0)
(Q>0)
a. Q (shown in quadrant IV) has a minus sign b. Q (shown in quadrant IV) has a plus sign because
because the Q is supplied by the outside source. the Q is absorbed by the outside source. The
The decision is made with the P (shown in the decision is based on the P (shown in the
quadrant IV, defined with [Power]=Send) having quadrant I, defined with [Power]=Receive)
“a plus sign” when the current lags the voltage. having “a minus sign” when the current leads
the voltage.
[Current]=Lag [Current]=Lead
- 558 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Figure 9.2-4 Sign of the reactive power (Q) ruled by setting [Current]
9.2.5 Polarity setting for power factor values

The power factor (PF) value is shown by the rule to align the plus/minus sign (±) of the P value
(i.e., setting [PF_sign]=AP, default setting). However, the user can change the rule (i.e., setting
[PF_sign]=AP+RP); as a result, the PF value will have the plus sign (+), provided both the P
value and the Q value have the same plus (+) sign or minus (–) sign.
(i) AP setting
When the sign of the PF value is required to match with the sign of the P value, set AP for the
setting [PF_sign].
II I II I
(PF <0) (PF>0) (PF <0) (PF <0)
[Power]=
V [Current
III
(PF <0)
I
IV III I
IV
(PF >0)
(PF>0) (PF >0) a. Q has a minus sign be
the outside. The dec
[Power]=Send [Power]=Send sending P having “a
[Current]=Lag [Current]=Lead lags the voltage.
[Current]=Lag
II I II I
(PF >0) (PF<0) (PF >0) (PF <0)
V
V
III
(PF >0)
I
IV III I
IV
(PF<0) (PF >0) (PF <0)
[Power]= Receive [Power]=Receive

Figure 9.2-5 PF sign matched with the sign of the P value (i.e., [PF sign]=AP)
(ii) AP+PR setting

When the plus or minus sign of the PF value is required to be in conjunction with the states of
the leading current (i.e., supplying power) and the ragging current (i.e., absorbing power), the
user should set AP+RP for the set [PF_sign]. Note that the plus or minus signs of the P and Q
values cause the difference from the sign of the PF value; thus, the user should figure out the
correspondences between the settings [Power] and [Current] of Figure 9.2-6.
- 559 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
II I II I
(PF <0) (PF>0) (PF >0) (PF <0)
[Powe
V [Curr
III
(PF >0)
I
IV III I
IV
(PF >0)
(PF<0) (PF <0) a. Q has a minus sign
the outside. The d
[Power]=Send [Power]=Send sending P having
[Current]=Lag [Current]=Lead lags the voltage.
[Current]=Lag
II I II I
(PF >0) (PF<0) (PF <0) (PF >0)
V
V
III
(PF <0)
I
IV III I
IV
(PF>0) (PF >0) (PF <0)
[Power]= Receive [Power]=Receive

Figure 9.2-6 PF corresponding with P and Q (i.e., [PF sign]=AP+RP)
9.2.6 Setting for the report (Dead band feature)

The data collected in the metering function will be sent to the network upward, but the data
sent may give the network a heavy burden because the amount of the data sent could be larger.
Thus, the dead band (SD) feature is designed not to send unnecessary data will not be sent
(say, the dead band feature regulates not to send the same data repeatedly). In practice the
analog values in the metering are not always the same; hence, the regulation for not sending
is defined by the user can change it using a setting in each power quantity.
(i) Counting operation in SD feature

Figure 9.2-7 illustrates the operation for the SD feature about entering a current. At Time=0,
the current enters into the VCT and it is observed (Time=0). When the entering current is
being beyond the upper limit (Time=a), a repeated number is set for ‘1’. If the entering current
is out of the upper and lower limits (Time=b), the repeat number gets to have ‘2’. Note that the
repeated number is kept to have ‘2’ even if the entering current goes back within the upper
and lower limits (Time=c). The repeated number will be larger than the setting [Period SD]=3,
when the entering current is out of the upper and lower limits again (i.e., Time=d). Then, at
Time=e, the value of the entering current will be sent to the network, because the repeated
number is incremented. After that, the repeated number will be set zero (0); the new positon
for the SD feature is set (i.e., from Time=e).
- 560 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Entering current (I)
Following SD position with [ISD]

Upper limit
First SD position with [ISD] First SD standardization level
Lower limit
Repeat number
4
3
2
1
0 Time
a b c d e f g h i j k
Figure 9.2-7 Dead band operation with [PeriodSD]=3
(ii) Check cycle in SD feature

The check cycle is defined for 500 milliseconds in the SD feature. (i.e., interval ab in Figure
9.2-7 is equal to 500ms). If the entering current, in Figure 9.2-7, is required to send promptly
when the entering current is beyond the limits, set 0 for the setting [Period SD].
(iii) Setting bands for the operation

As illustrated in Figure 9.2-7, with regard to the entering current the user can define the upper
limit and lower limit using the setting [ISD] in %. The limit-size of the SD feature is calculated
based on the amount of the entering current. Table 9.2-6 shows respective settings for the
power quantities.
Table 9.2-6 SD settings for respective quantities
Units for
Quantities SD settings Setting ranges
settings
Voltage VSD % 0.00% to 50.00%
Current ISD % 0.00% to 50.00%
Active/Reactive/Apparent power P/Q/SSD – 0.00% to 50.00%
Power factor PFSD – 0.00 to 1.00
Frequencty FSD % 0.00% to 50.00%
Watt-hour/var-hour Wh/varhSD – 0.0 to 999.9
Phase PhaseSD Degree 0.0 deg. to 90 deg.
Difference of voltages† dVSD % 0.00% to 50.00%

†Note:The values are derived in the VCHK function. For more information, see Chapter
Relay application: Voltage check for autoreclose function.
- 561 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Metering
10:48 1/8
ISD +
5.00 %
VSD +
0.60 %
dVSD +
0.60 %
Figure 9.2-8 Metering setting in the setting screen

Note: For the operation of the menu, see Chapter User interface: Setting sub-menu.
- 562 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Statistics data (Power value group)

Table 9.3-1 illustrates the statistics information and its abbreviation in power value data.
Table 9.3-1 Power value data
Groups Displayed quantities Abbreviations
Power values Watt-hour (plus/minus), var-hour (plus/minus) Wh, varh
9.3.1 Power information on the screen

Figure 9.3-1 illustrates the information about the watt-hour and var-hour (Wh and varh). The
user can find the primary, secondary, and tertiary values, respectively.
Power Value
10:48 1/12
Wh+ -P +
0.0MWh
Wh- -P +
0.0MWh
varh+ -P +
0.0Mvarh
Figure 9.3-1 Example of Power Value screen
9.3.2 Setting for power values

The user can select the unit for each power value. For example, set the [Wh-Display Unit]=kWh,
when kWh is perferred to display.
Table 9.3-2 Selection of units for displaying
Statisics items Settings Selection of a unit fot the displaying
Watt-hour Wh-Display Unit Kilo-watt-hour (kWh) or Mega-watt-hour (MWh)
Var-hour Varh-Display Unit Kilo-var-hour (kvarh) or Mega-var-hour (Mvarh)
9.3.3 Regulation of power values

The number of digits for the power value can be reduced based on the units kWh, MWh and
kvarh+. For instance when the power is measured as "123,456kWh" then it is displayed as
"123MWh". If this value has to be changed then the user can key in a new compensated value.
For example, if "78MWh" should be displayed on the IED screen even though the measured
value is "123,456kWh" then the user can set the new value of "78MWh". Note that the
compensated value "78MWh" is "78,000kWh", and it is not "78,456kWh" or "123,456kWh"; the
compensated value will be affected when a change in the setting of VCT ratio. That is, the user
can set a value of "78MW" during the CT ratio of "2000:1", but the CT ratio would be changed
from "2000:1" to "4000:1"; hence, the value will be displayed as "156MW" on the IED screen
later. Therefore, when the CT ratio setting is required to be changed, remember to set the value
of "78MW" again to display the compensated value.
- 563 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Statistics data (Demand value group)

The user can keep track of the variable power quantities using the demand feature; the
statistical information (such as maximum load, minimum load, and averaged load) are
collected in every defined period.
Table 9.4-1 Demanding data in ‘3D’ software in Model3

Displayed quantities (Max., Min., and Ave. data) Abbreviations
Demand in phase-a flowing in 1CT set with [Conn-1CT] Ia-1CT Max, Ia-1CT Min, Ia-1CT Ave
Demand in phase-b flowing in 1CT set with [Conn-1CT] Ib-1CT Max, Ib-1CT Min, Ib-1CT Ave
Demand in phase-c flowing in 1CT set with [Conn-1CT] Ic-1CT Max, Ic-1CT Min, Ic-1CT Ave
Demand flowing in the first neutral CT(1NCT) In-1NCT Max,In-1NCT Min,In-1NCT Ave
Demand flowing in the second neutral CT(2NCT) In-2NCT Max,In-2NCT Min,In-2NCT Ave
Demand for primary in [InType-VT]= 1PN/1PP/1N with [Conn-VT]= Primary V-P Max, V-P Min, V-P Ave
Demand in phase-a for primary in setting [InType-VT]= 1PN/1PP/1N/3PN Va-P Max, Va-P Min, Va-P Ave
Demand in phase-b for primary in setting [InType-VT]= 1PN/1PP/1N/3PN Vb-P Max, Vb-P Min, Vb-P Ave
Demand in phase-c for primary in setting [InType-VT]= 1PN/1PP/1N/3PN Vc-P Max, Vc-P Min, Vc-P Ave
Demand in phase-ab for primary in setting [InType-VT]= 3PN / 3PP Vab-P Max, Vab-P Min, Vab-P Ave
Demand value
Demand in phase-bc for primary in setting [InType-VT]= 3PN / 3PP Vbc-P Max, Vbc-P Min, Vbc-P Ave
Demand in phase-ca for primary in setting [InType-VT]= 3PN / 3PP Vca-P Max, Vca-P Min, Vca-P Ave
Demand in zero-sequence in primary with [InType-VT]=1PN/1PP/1N/3PN/3PN/ 3PP V0-P Max, V0-P Min, V0-P Ave
Demand for secondary in [InType-VT]=1PN/1PP/1N with [Conn-VT]= Secondary V-S Max, V-S Min, V-S Ave
Demand in-phase-a for secondary in setting [InType-VT]= 1PN/1PP/1N/3PN Va-S Max, Va-S Min, Va-S Ave
Demand in phase-b for secondary in setting [InType-VT]= 1PN/1PP/1N/3PN Vb-S Max, Vb-S Min, Vb-S Ave
Demand in phase-c for secondary in setting [InType-VT]= 1PN/1PP/1N/3PN Vc-S Max, Vc-S Min, Vc-S Ave
Demand in phase-ab for secondary in setting [InType-VT]= 3PN / 3PP Vab-S Max, Vab-S Min, Vab-S Ave
Demand in phase-bc for secondary in setting [InType-VT]= 3PN / 3PP Vbc-S Max, Vbc-S Min, Vbc-S Ave
Demand in phase-ca for secondary in setting [InType-VT]= 3PN / 3PP Vca-S Max, Vca-S Min, Vca-S Ave
Demand in zero-sequence in secondary with [InType-VT]=1PN/1PP/1N/3PN/3PN/ 3PP V0-S Max, V0-S Min, V0-S Ave
Demand for tertiary in [InType-VT]=1PN/1PP/1N with [Conn-VT]= Tertiary V-T Max, V-T Min, V-T Ave
Demand in-phase-a for tertiary in setting [InType-VT]= 1PN/1PP/1N/3PN Va-T Max, Va-T Min, Va-T Ave
Demand in phase-b for tertiary in setting [InType-VT]= 1PN/1PP/1N/3PN Vb-T Max, Vb-T Min, Vb-T Ave
Demand in phase-c for tertiary in setting [InType-VT]= 1PN/1PP/1N/3PN Vc-T Max, Vc-T Min, Vc-T Ave
Demand in phase-ab for tertiary in setting [InType-VT]= 3PN / 3PP Vab-T Max, Vab-T Min, Vab-T Ave
Demand in phase-bc for tertiary in setting [InType-VT]= 3PN / 3PP Vbc-T Max, Vbc-T Min, Vbc-T Ave
Demand in phase-ca for tertiary in setting [InType-VT]= 3PN / 3PP Vca-T Max, Vca-T Min, Vca-T Ave
Demand in zero-sequence in tertiary with [InType-VT]=1PN/1PP/1N/3PN/3PN/ 3PP V0-T Max, V0-T Min, V0-T Ave
- 564 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Table 9.4-2 Demanding data in ‘3E’ software in Model4

Demand value
Demand for primary in [InType-VT]= 1PN/1PP/1N with [Conn-VT]= Primary V-P Max, V-P Min, V-P Ave
Demand for secondary in [InType-VT]=1PN/1PP/1N with [Conn-VT]= Secondary V-S Max, V-S Min, V-S Ave
Demand for tertiary in [InType-VT]=1PN/1PP/1N with [Conn-VT]= Tertiary V-T Max, V-T Min, V-T Ave
Table 9.4-3 Demanding data in ‘3F’ software in Model5

Demand value
Demand flowing in the first neutral CT(1NCT) In-1NCT Max,In-1NCT Min,In-1 NCT Ave
Demand flowing in the second neutral CT(2NCT) In-2NCT Max,In-2NCT Min,In-2 NCT Ave
Demand flowing in the third neutral CT(3NCT) In-3NCT Max,In-3NCT Min,In-3 NCT Ave
Demand in [InType-1VT/2VT]=1PN/1PP/1N with [Conn-1VT/2VT]= Primary V-P Max, V-P Min, V-P Ave
Demand in phase-a for primary in settings [InType-1VT/2VT]=1PN/1PP/1N/3PN Va-P Max, Va-P Min, Va-P Ave
Demand in phase-b for primary in settings [InType-1VT/2VT]=1PN/1PP/1N/3PN Vb-P Max, Vb-P Min, Vb-P Ave
- 565 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

Demand in phase-c for primary in settings [InType-1VT/2VT]= 1PN/1PP/1N/3PN Vc-P Max, Vc-P Min, Vc-P Ave
Demand in phase-ab for primary in settings [InType-1VT/2VT]=3PN / 3PP Vab-P Max, Vab-P Min, Vab-P Ave
Demand in phase-bc for primary in settings [InType-1VT/2VT]= 3PN / 3PP Vbc-P Max, Vbc-P Min, Vbc-P Ave
Demand in phase-ca for primary in settings [InType-1VT/2VT]= 3PN / 3PP Vca-P Max, Vca-P Min, Vca-P Ave
Demand in zero-sequence with [InType-1VT/2VT]=1PN/1PP/1N/3PN/3PN/ 3PP V0-P Max, V0-P Min, V0-P Ave
Demand in [InType-1VT/2VT]=1PN/1PP/1N with [Conn-1VT/2VT]= Secondary V-S Max, V-S Min, V-S Ave
Demand in phase-a for secondary in settings [InType-1VT/2VT]=1PN/1PP/1N/3PN Va-S Max, Va-S Min, Va-S Ave
Demand in phase-b for secondary in settings [InType-1VT/2VT]=1PN/1PP/1N/3PN Vb-S Max, Vb-S Min, Vb-S Ave
Demand in phase-c for secondary in settings [InType-1VT/2VT]= 1PN/1PP/1N/3PN Vc-S Max, Vc-S Min, Vc-S Ave
Demand in phase-ab for secondary in settings [InType-1VT/2VT]=3PN / 3PP Vab-S Max, Vab-S Min, Vab-S Ave
Demand in phase-bc for secondary in settings [InType-1VT/2VT]= 3PN / 3PP Vbc-S Max, Vbc-S Min, Vbc-S Ave
Demand in phase-ca for secondary in settings [InType-1VT/2VT]= 3PN / 3PP Vca-S Max, Vca-S Min, Vca-S Ave
Demand in zero-sequence with [InType-1VT/2VT]=1PN/1PP/1N/3PN/3PN/ 3PP V0-P Max, V0-P Min, V0-P Ave
Demand in [InType-1VT/2VT]=1PN/1PP/1N with [Conn-1VT/2VT]= Tertiariy V-T Max, V-T Min, V-T Ave
Demand in phase-a for tertiary in settings [InType-1VT/2VT]=1PN/1PP/1N/3PN Va-T Max, Va-T Min, Va-T Ave
Demand in phase-b for tertiary in settings [InType-1VT/2VT]=1PN/1PP/1N/3PN Vb-T Max, Vb-T Min, Vb-T Ave
Demand in phase-c for tertiary in settings [InType-1VT/2VT]= 1PN/1PP/1N/3PN Vc-T Max, Vc-T Min, Vc-T Ave
Demand in phase-ab for tertiary in settings [InType-1VT/2VT]=3PN / 3PP Vab-T Max, Vab-T Min, Vab-T Ave
Demand in phase-bc for tertiary in settings [InType-1VT/2VT]= 3PN / 3PP Vbc-T Max, Vbc-T Min, Vbc-T Ave
Demand in phase-ca for tertiary in settings [InType-1VT/2VT]= 3PN / 3PP Vca-T Max, Vca-T Min, Vca-T Ave
Demand in zero-sequence with [InType-1VT/2VT]=1PN/1PP/1N/3PN/3PN/ 3PP V0-T Max, V0-T Min, V0-T Ave
- 566 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
9.4.1 Demand information on the screen

The statistics feature can provides the information about maximum, minimum, and averaged
values. Figure 9.4-1 shows the example about the current information
Demand Value
10:48 1/42
Ia-1CT Max
0.00kA
Ia-1CT Min
0.00kA
Ia-1CT Ave
0.00kA
Figure 9.4-1 Example of Demand Value screen
9.4.2 Max/Min/Averaged information about the demand feature

The demand feature is used to calculate the active power (P), the reactive power (P), and the
complex power (S) that are weighted with the plus (+) or minus (–) sign; the calculation will be
made by the following rules:
(i) Maximum and minimum value
For example, the demand feature gets to have both a minus (e.g., –100 watt) and a plus (e.g.,
+50 watt) values, ‘–100 watt’ is taken to the minimum data and ‘+50 watt’ is taken to the
maximum data. Note that given values do not come out as absolute values.
(ii) Averaged value

If the demand feature gets a data (e.g. +100 watt) in the first period and the other data (that
is, –100 watt) in the later period, the data is taken into the absolute value calculation (that is,
|–100W|+|100W|=200W; 200W/2=100W).
9.4.3 Demand cycle

The data is taken into the memory every second; the demand feature will calculate the
Max/Min/Ave values by the function by collecting the latest data in the memory. When setting
15 minutes for the [Demand_period], for example, the calculation is done using the data during
the latest 15 minutes. The user can have the cycle of the demand feature be selected among
1min, 5min, 10min, 15min, 30min, and 60min.
Metering
10:48 21/23
PhaseSD +
0.50 deg
PeriodSD +
0
Demand_period +
10 min
- 567 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Figure 9.4-2 Demand cycle setting in the setting screen
9.4.4 Resetting data in demand features

The data will be cleared by the following cases:
(a) To energize the IED or to make the initialization about the IED functions
(b) To set a value for the setting [Demand_period]
(c) To operate “Reset All Values” on the IED menu
Demand Value
10:48 1/2
Demand Value >
Reset All Values +
Figure 9.4-3 Reset menu for Demand values
- 568 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Statistics data (Peak-demand value group)

Similar to the demand feature (Demand value group), the user can have another peak-demand
feature that provides the Max/Min/Ave data that can be obtained from the initialized time to
the current time; note these data have been calculated from the first energizing moment of the
IED. That is, the data of the peak-demand feature gets to have the latest values in every cycle;
the data will be replaced if the past data is not needed. The user can find that the nature of
the collected values in the peak-demand values being identical to the one of the Demand value
group.
9.5.1 Max/Min/Averaged information about the peak-demand feature

(i) Maximum value
The peak-demand feature starts to collect the data in every cycle after the IED energized; the
peak-demand feature will have the largest data. If the present data is larger than the past one
with the peak-demand feature will replace the past one for the present one. The maximum
value will be cleared when the data is reset.
(ii) Minimum value

Similarly, for the minimum value, the IED displays the smallest data after energizing; the data
will be replaced when the present data is smaller than the past one.
(iii) Averaged value

The averaged value is computed using the data in the IED memory, the data which was
collected after energizing. Collecting data stays on for a long time; hence, when the counter
with regard to the data collection gets to be 2,147,483,647(=0x7FFFFFFF; almost 68 years),
resetting data is performed.
9.5.2 Resetting data of peak-demand features

The data will be cleared by the following operations:
(a) To energize the IED or to make the initialization about the IED functions
(b) To operate “Reset All Values” on the IED menu
Peak Demand
10:48 1/2
Peak Demand Value >
Reset All Values +
Figure 9.5-1 Reset menu for Peak demand values
- 569 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Statistics data (Counter group)

The user can check on the counting numbers provided by the general counter function†. Table
9.6-1 shows the user to find the count numbers in the counter group.
Table 9.6-1 Counter data
Counter number Correspondences
Group Origin of info (default)
displayed to GCNTs†
COUNT1 (Not assigned) GCNT01

Counter
…. …. ….
†Note:See Chapter General control function: Counter function for the general (GCNT)..
9.6.1 Report setting for GCNT (Dead band feature)

The data collected with the GCNT functions will be sent to the network; thus, the user should
set a regulation value using the SD feature in the GCNT function. See section Setting for the
report (Dead band) in the GCNT function.
- 570 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Statistics data (Accumulated time)

Over all running time for which the IED has operated is provided in “Accumulated Time”. The
user can see the overall time on the Accumulated Time screen. The time will be cleared when
the IED is switched off.
Accumulated Time
10:48 1/1
ACT_TIME +
***d **h **m
Figure 9.7-1 Example of Accumulated Time screen

Note: The user can also clear the Accumulated time in the screen menu. For key
operation, see Chapter User interface: Monitoring sub-menu: Statistics sub-menu.
- 571 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Monitoring for miscellaneous functions

Operating status of relay elements, binary IO modules, communication modules, GOOSE, and
diagnostics are displayed in the monitoring function.
(i) Relay element

(For more information about the menu operation, see Chapter User interface: Monitoring sub-
menu: Relay Elements. The relay functions and their characteristics are discussed in Chapter
Relay application).
(ii) Communication
menu: Communication. The communication features about the LAN port is discussed in
Chapter Communication protocol: LAN communication. The hardware information is
discussed in Chapter Technical description: Signal processing and communication module).
(iii) Binary IO
menu: Binary I/O. The structure and its operation is discussed in Chapter Technical
description: Binary IO module).
(iv) Goose monitoring

menu: Goose monitoring. The information about the GOOSE is discussed in Chapter
Communication protocol: IEC 61850 communication).
(v) Diagnostics
menu: Diagnostics sub-menu. The information about the diagnostics is discussed in Chapter
Automatic supervision).
- 572 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Setting
Metering settings in TP_MES (Function ID: 711006)
Unit Default
s setting value
Display Value Primary / Secondary - Display selection of primary or secondary Primary
Power Send / Receive - Power setting for active power display Send
Current Lead / Lag - Current setting for reactive power display Lead
PF Sign AP / AP+RP - PF Sign AP+RP
I-Valid Level 0.10 - 5.00 % I Valid Level 4.00
V-Valid Level 0.10 - 5.00 % V Valid Level 0.30
I-Display Unit A / kA - Selection of display units kA
V-Display Unit V / kV - Selection of display units kV
P-Display Unit kW / MW - Selection of display units MW
Q-Display Unit kvar / Mvar - Selection of display units Mvar
S-Display Unit kVA / MVA - Selection of display units MVA
FSD 0.00 - 50.00 % F Sending Dead Band 0.50
Wh-Display Unit kWh / MWh - Selection of display units MWh
varh-Display Unit kvarh / Mvarh - Selection of display units Mvarh
ISD 0.00 - 50.00 % I Sending Dead Band 5.00
VSD 0.00 - 50.00 % V Sending Dead Band 0.60
P/Q/SSD 0.00 - 50.00 % P/Q/S Sending Dead Band 5.00
PhaseSD 0.0 - 90.0 deg Phase Sending Dead Band 0.5
PFSD 0.00 - 1.00 - PF Sending Dead Band 0.02
Wh/varhSD 0.0 - 999.9 - Wh/varh Sending Dead Band 1.0
PeriodSD 0-4 - Period of Sending Dead band 0
Note: The setting items above are just available in both the ‘3D’ software of Model3 and
the ‘3F’ software of Model5.
Metering settings in TP_MES (Function ID: 711006 in ‘3E:Model4’’)

Unit Default
s setting value
Display Value Primary / Secondary - Display selection of primary or secondary Primary
I-Valid Level 0.10 - 5.00 % I Valid Level 4.00
V-Valid Level 0.10 - 5.00 % V Valid Level 0.30
I-Display Unit A / kA - Selection of display units kA
V-Display Unit V / kV - Selection of display units kV
FSD 0.00 - 50.00 % F Sending Dead Band 0.50
ISD 0.00 - 50.00 % I Sending Dead Band 5.00
VSD 0.00 - 50.00 % V Sending Dead Band 0.60
PhaseSD 0.0 - 90.0 deg Phase Sending Dead Band 0.5
PeriodSD 0-4 - Period of Sending Dead band 0
Note: The setting items above are just available in the ‘3E’ software of Model4.
Demand settings in TP_DEMAND (Function ID: 712006)

Unit Default
s setting value
1min / 5min /
Demand_period 10min / 15min / – Period of demand calculation 10min
30min / 60min
- 573 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Signal (Data ID)

31A0001060 CT1-ERR CT1 Monitoring Result
31A0051060 V0-ERR 1VT V0 Monitoring Result
 Measuring point for Monitoring function

4301001076 Ia-1CT Ia-1CT measurement primary
4301001078 Ib-1CT Ib-1CT measurement primary
430100107A Ic-1CT Ic-1CT measurement primary
4301011076 I1-1CT I1-1CT measurement primary
430101107A I0-1CT I0-1CT measurement primary
- 574 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

43010a1076 In-1NCT In-1NCT measurement primary
43010a1078 In-2NCT In-2NCT measurement primary
43010a107A In-3NCT In-3NCT measurement primary
43020b107C V-P V-P measurement primary
43020c1076 Va-P Va-P measurement primary
43020c1078 Vb-P Vb-P measurement primary
43020c107A Vc-P Vc-P measurement primary
43020d1076 Vab-P Vab-P measurement primary
43020d1078 Vbc-P Vbc-P measurement primary
43020d107A Vca-P Vca-P measurement primary
43020e1076 V1-P V1-P measurement primary
43020e1078 V2-P V2-P measurement primary
43020e107A V0-P V0-P measurement primary
43020f107C V-S V-S measurement primary
4302101076 Va-S Va-S measurement primary
4302101078 Vb-S Vb-S measurement primary
430210107A Vc-S Vc-S measurement primary
4302111076 Vab-S Vab-S measurement primary
4302111078 Vbc-S Vbc-S measurement primary
430211107A Vca-S Vca-S measurement primary
4302121076 V1-S V1-S measurement primary
4302121078 V2-S V2-S measurement primary
430212107A V0-S V0-S measurement primary
430213107C V-T V-T measurement primary
4302141076 Va-T Va-T measurement primary
4302141078 Vb-T Vb-T measurement primary
430214107A Vc-T Vc-T measurement primary
4302151076 Vab-T Vab-T measurement primary
4302151078 Vbc-T Vbc-T measurement primary
430215107A Vca-T Vca-T measurement primary
4302161076 V1-T V1-T measurement primary
4302161078 V2-T V2-T measurement primary
430216107A V0-T V0-T measurement primary
4301171076 Ia-P Ia-P measurement primary
4301171078 Ib-P Ib-P measurement primary
430117107A Ic-P Ic-P measurement primary
4301181076 I1-P I1-P measurement primary
4301181078 I2-P I2-P measurement primary
430118107A I0-P I0-P measurement primary
4301191076 Ia-S Ia-S measurement primary
4301191078 Ib-S Ib-S measurement primary
430119107A Ic-S Ic-S measurement primary
43011a1076 I1-S I1-S measurement primary
43011a1078 I2-S I2-S measurement primary
- 575 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

43011a107A I0-S I0-S measurement primary
43011b1076 Ia-T Ia-T measurement primary
43011b1078 Ib-T Ib-T measurement primary
43011b107A Ic-T Ic-T measurement primary
43011c1076 I1-T I1-T measurement primary
43011c1078 I2-T I2-T measurement primary
43011c107A I0-T I0-T measurement primary
43031d1095 Pa-P Pa-P measurement primary
43031d1096 Pb-P Pb-P measurement primary
43031d1097 Pc-P Pc-P measurement primary
43031d1098 P-P P-P measurement primary
43041e1095 Qa-P Qa-P measurement primary
43041e1096 Qb-P Qb-P measurement primary
43041e1097 Qc-P Qc-P measurement primary
43041e1098 Q-P Q-P measurement primary
43051f1095 Sa-P Sa-P measurement primary
43051f1096 Sb-P Sb-P measurement primary
43051f1097 Sc-P Sc-P measurement primary
43051f1098 S-P S-P measurement primary
4300201095 PFa-P PFa-P measurement primary
4300201096 PFb-P PFb-P measurement primary
4300201097 PFc-P PFc-P measurement primary
4300201098 PF-P PF-P measurement primary
430720109E Wh+ -P Wh+ -P measurement primary
430721109E Wh- -P Wh- -P measurement primary
430820109E varh+ -P varh+ -P measurement primary
430821109E varh- -P varh- -P measurement primary
4303211095 Pa-S Pa-S measurement primary
4303211096 Pb-S Pb-S measurement primary
4303211097 Pc-S Pc-S measurement primary
4303211098 P-S P-S measurement primary
4304221095 Qa-S Qa-S measurement primary
4304221096 Qb-S Qb-S measurement primary
4304221097 Qc-S Qc-S measurement primary
4304221098 Q-S Q-S measurement primary
4305231095 Sa-S Sa-S measurement primary
4305231096 Sb-S Sb-S measurement primary
4305231097 Sc-S Sc-S measurement primary
4305231098 S-S S-S measurement primary
4300241095 PFa-S PFa-S measurement primary
4300241096 PFb-S PFb-S measurement primary
4300241097 PFc-S PFc-S measurement primary
4300241098 PF-S PF-S measurement primary
430722109E Wh+ -S Wh+ -S measurement primary
- 576 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

430723109E Wh- -S Wh- -S measurement primary
430822109E varh+ -S varh+ -S measurement primary
430823109E varh- -S varh- -S measurement primary
4303251095 Pa-T Pa-T measurement primary
4303251096 Pb-T Pb-T measurement primary
4303251097 Pc-T Pc-T measurement primary
4303251098 P-T P-T measurement primary
4304261095 Qa-T Qa-T measurement primary
4304261096 Qb-T Qb-T measurement primary
4304261097 Qc-T Qc-T measurement primary
4304261098 Q-T Q-T measurement primary
4305271095 Sa-T Sa-T measurement primary
4305271096 Sb-T Sb-T measurement primary
4305271097 Sc-T Sc-T measurement primary
4305271098 S-T S-T measurement primary
4300281095 PFa-T PFa-T measurement primary
4300281096 PFb-T PFb-T measurement primary
4300281097 PFc-T PFc-T measurement primary
4300281098 PF-T PF-T measurement primary
430724109E Wh+ -T Wh+ -T measurement primary
430725109E Wh- -T Wh- -T measurement primary
430824109E varh+ -T varh+ -T measurement primary
430825109E varh- -T varh- -T measurement primary
4301001050 Ia-1CT Ia-1CT measurement secondary
4301001052 Ib-1CT Ib-1CT measurement secondary
4301001054 Ic-1CT Ic-1CT measurement secondary
4301011050 I1-1CT I1-1CT measurement secondary
- 577 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

43010a1050 In-1NCT In-1NCT measurement secondary
43020b1056 V-P V-P measurement secondary
43020c1050 Va-P Va-P measurement secondary
43020c1052 Vb-P Vb-P measurement secondary
43020c1054 Vc-P Vc-P measurement secondary
43020d1050 Vab-P Vab-P measurement secondary
43020d1052 Vbc-P Vbc-P measurement secondary
43020d1054 Vca-P Vca-P measurement secondary
43020e1050 V1-P V1-P measurement secondary
43020f1056 V-S V-S measurement secondary
4302101050 Va-S Va-S measurement secondary
4302101052 Vb-S Vb-S measurement secondary
4302101054 Vc-S Vc-S measurement secondary
4302111050 Vab-S Vab-S measurement secondary
4302111052 Vbc-S Vbc-S measurement secondary
4302111054 Vca-S Vca-S measurement secondary
4302121050 V1-S V1-S measurement secondary
4302131056 V-T V-T measurement secondary
4302141050 Va-T Va-T measurement secondary
4302141052 Vb-T Vb-T measurement secondary
4302141054 Vc-T Vc-T measurement secondary
4302151050 Vab-T Vab-T measurement secondary
4302151052 Vbc-T Vbc-T measurement secondary
4302151054 Vca-T Vca-T measurement secondary
4302161050 V1-T V1-T measurement secondary
4301171050 Ia-P Ia-P measurement secondary
4301171052 Ib-P Ib-P measurement secondary
- 578 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

4301171054 Ic-P Ic-P measurement secondary
4301181050 I1-P I1-P measurement secondary
4301191050 Ia-S Ia-S measurement secondary
4301191052 Ib-S Ib-S measurement secondary
4301191054 Ic-S Ic-S measurement secondary
43011a1050 I1-S I1-S measurement secondary
43011b1050 Ia-T Ia-T measurement secondary
43011b1052 Ib-T Ib-T measurement secondary
43011b1054 Ic-T Ic-T measurement secondary
43011c1050 I1-T I1-T measurement secondary
4301001051 Ia-1CT Ia-1CT measurement angle
4301001053 Ib-1CT Ib-1CT measurement angle
4301001055 Ic-1CT Ic-1CT measurement angle
4301011051 I1-1CT I1-1CT measurement angle
- 579 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

43010a1051 In-1NCT In-1NCT measurement angle
43020b1057 V-P V-P measurement angle
43020c1051 Va-P Va-P measurement angle
43020c1053 Vb-P Vb-P measurement angle
43020c1055 Vc-P Vc-P measurement angle
43020d1051 Vab-P Vab-P measurement angle
43020d1053 Vbc-P Vbc-P measurement angle
43020d1055 Vca-P Vca-P measurement angle
43020e1051 V1-P V1-P measurement angle
43020f1057 V-S V-S measurement angle
4302101051 Va-S Va-S measurement angle
4302101053 Vb-S Vb-S measurement angle
4302101055 Vc-S Vc-S measurement angle
4302111051 Vab-S Vab-S measurement angle
4302111053 Vbc-S Vbc-S measurement angle
4302111055 Vca-S Vca-S measurement angle
4302121051 V1-S V1-S measurement angle
4302131057 V-T V-T measurement angle
4302141051 Va-T Va-T measurement angle
4302141053 Vb-T Vb-T measurement angle
4302141055 Vc-T Vc-T measurement angle
4302151051 Vab-T Vab-T measurement angle
4302151053 Vbc-T Vbc-T measurement angle
4302151055 Vca-T Vca-T measurement angle
4302161051 V1-T V1-T measurement angle
4301171051 Ia-P Ia-P measurement angle
4301171053 Ib-P Ib-P measurement angle
4301171055 Ic-P Ic-P measurement angle
4301181051 I1-P I1-P measurement angle
4301191051 Ia-S Ia-S measurement angle
4301191053 Ib-S Ib-S measurement angle
4301191055 Ic-S Ic-S measurement angle
- 580 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

43011a1051 I1-S I1-S measurement angle
43011b1051 Ia-T Ia-T measurement angle
43011b1053 Ib-T Ib-T measurement angle
43011b1055 Ic-T Ic-T measurement angle
43011c1051 I1-T I1-T measurement angle
430600105C f Frequency measurement
31a0001060 CT1-ERR CT1 Monitoring Result
31a0051060 V0-ERR 1VT V0 Monitoring Result
4379001095 Id1 DIF Id measurement (phase-1)
4379011095 Ir1 DIF Ir measurement (phase-1)
4379021095 Id1pu DIF Idpu measurement (phase-1)
4379031095 Id0-1 REF1 Id measurement
4379031096 Ir0-1 REF1 Ir measurement
4379031097 Id0pu-1 REF1 Ipu measurement
4379041097 Id0pu-2 REF2 Idpu measurement
4379051097 Id0pu-3 REF3 Idpu measurement
4379061090 THM-Capacity THM-Capacity measurement
4379071090 V/f V/f measurement
4379081090 I2/I1-P I2/I1-P current measurement
4379091090 I2/I1-S I2/I1-S current measurement
4379101090 I2/I1-T I2/I1-T current measurement
- 581 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
 Signals generated for the 61850 communication

4201601076 Ia-1CT Ia-1CT measurement primary(for 61850)
4201601078 Ib-1CT Ib-1CT measurement primary(for 61850)
420160107A Ic-1CT Ic-1CT measurement primary(for 61850)
4201611076 I1-1CT I1-1CT measurement primary(for 61850)
420161107A I0-1CT I0-1CT measurement primary(for 61850)
42016a1076 In-1NCT In-1NCT measurement primary(for 61850)
42016a1078 In-2NCT In-2NCT measurement primary(for 61850)
42016a107A In-3NCT In-3NCT measurement primary(for 61850)
42026b107C V-P V-P measurement primary(for 61850)
42026c1076 Va-P Va-P measurement primary(for 61850)
42026c1078 Vb-P Vb-P measurement primary(for 61850)
42026c107A Vc-P Vc-P measurement primary(for 61850)
42026d1076 Vab-P Vab-P measurement primary(for 61850)
42026d1078 Vbc-P Vbc-P measurement primary(for 61850)
42026d107A Vca-P Vca-P measurement primary(for 61850)
42026e1076 V1-P V1-P measurement primary(for 61850)
42026e1078 V2-P V2-P measurement primary(for 61850)
42026e107A V0-P V0-P measurement primary(for 61850)
42026f107C V-S V-S measurement primary(for 61850)
- 582 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

4202701076 Va-S Va-S measurement primary(for 61850)
4202701078 Vb-S Vb-S measurement primary(for 61850)
420270107A Vc-S Vc-S measurement primary(for 61850)
4202711076 Vab-S Vab-S measurement primary(for 61850)
4202711078 Vbc-S Vbc-S measurement primary(for 61850)
420271107A Vca-S Vca-S measurement primary(for 61850)
4202721076 V1-S V1-S measurement primary(for 61850)
4202721078 V2-S V2-S measurement primary(for 61850)
420272107A V0-S V0-S measurement primary(for 61850)
420273107C V-T V-T measurement primary(for 61850)
4202741076 Va-T Va-T measurement primary(for 61850)
4202741078 Vb-T Vb-T measurement primary(for 61850)
420274107A Vc-T Vc-T measurement primary(for 61850)
4202751076 Vab-T Vab-T measurement primary(for 61850)
4202751078 Vbc-T Vbc-T measurement primary(for 61850)
420275107A Vca-T Vca-T measurement primary(for 61850)
4202761076 V1-T V1-T measurement primary(for 61850)
4202761078 V2-T V2-T measurement primary(for 61850)
420276107A V0-T V0-T measurement primary(for 61850)
4201771076 Ia-P Ia-P measurement primary(for 61850)
4201771078 Ib-P Ib-P measurement primary(for 61850)
420177107A Ic-P Ic-P measurement primary(for 61850)
4201781076 I1-P I1-P measurement primary(for 61850)
4201781078 I2-P I2-P measurement primary(for 61850)
420178107A I0-P I0-P measurement primary(for 61850)
4201791076 Ia-S Ia-S measurement primary(for 61850)
4201791078 Ib-S Ib-S measurement primary(for 61850)
420179107A Ic-S Ic-S measurement primary(for 61850)
42017a1076 I1-S I1-S measurement primary(for 61850)
42017a1078 I2-S I2-S measurement primary(for 61850)
42017a107A I0-S I0-S measurement primary(for 61850)
42017b1076 Ia-T Ia-T measurement primary(for 61850)
42017b1078 Ib-T Ib-T measurement primary(for 61850)
42017b107A Ic-T Ic-T measurement primary(for 61850)
42017c1076 I1-T I1-T measurement primary(for 61850)
42017c1078 I2-T I2-T measurement primary(for 61850)
42017c107A I0-T I0-T measurement primary(for 61850)
42037d1095 Pa-P Pa-P measurement primary(for 61850)
42037d1096 Pb-P Pb-P measurement primary(for 61850)
42037d1097 Pc-P Pc-P measurement primary(for 61850)
42037d1098 P-P P-P measurement primary(for 61850)
42047e1095 Qa-P Qa-P measurement primary(for 61850)
42047e1096 Qb-P Qb-P measurement primary(for 61850)
42047e1097 Qc-P Qc-P measurement primary(for 61850)
- 583 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

42047e1098 Q-P Q-P measurement primary(for 61850)
42057f1095 Sa-P Sa-P measurement primary(for 61850)
42057f1096 Sb-P Sb-P measurement primary(for 61850)
42057f1097 Sc-P Sc-P measurement primary(for 61850)
42057f1098 S-P S-P measurement primary(for 61850)
4200801095 PFa-P PFa-P measurement primary(for 61850)
4200801096 PFb-P PFb-P measurement primary(for 61850)
4200801097 PFc-P PFc-P measurement primary(for 61850)
4200801098 PF-P PF-P measurement primary(for 61850)
420780109E Wh+ -P Wh+ -P measurement primary(for IEC61850)
420781109E Wh- -P Wh- -P measurement primary(for IEC61850)
420880109E varh+ -P varh+ -P measurement primary(for IEC61850)
420881109E varh- -P varh- -P measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4203811095 Pa-S Pa-S measurement primary(for 61850)
4203811096 Pb-S Pb-S measurement primary(for 61850)
4203811097 Pc-S Pc-S measurement primary(for 61850)
4203811098 P-S P-S measurement primary(for 61850)
4204821095 Qa-S Qa-S measurement primary(for 61850)
4204821096 Qb-S Qb-S measurement primary(for 61850)
4204821097 Qc-S Qc-S measurement primary(for 61850)
4204821098 Q-S Q-S measurement primary(for 61850)
4205831095 Sa-S Sa-S measurement primary(for 61850)
4205831096 Sb-S Sb-S measurement primary(for 61850)
4205831097 Sc-S Sc-S measurement primary(for 61850)
4205831098 S-S S-S measurement primary(for 61850)
4200841095 PFa-S PFa-S measurement primary(for 61850)
4200841096 PFb-S PFb-S measurement primary(for 61850)
4200841097 PFc-S PFc-S measurement primary(for 61850)
4200841098 PF-S PF-S measurement primary(for 61850)
420782109E Wh+ -S Wh+ -S measurement primary(for IEC61850)
420783109E Wh- -S Wh- -S measurement primary(for IEC61850)
420882109E varh+ -S varh+ -S measurement primary(for IEC61850)
420883109E varh- -S varh- -S measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4203851095 Pa-T Pa-T measurement primary(for 61850)
4203851096 Pb-T Pb-T measurement primary(for 61850)
4203851097 Pc-T Pc-T measurement primary(for 61850)
4203851098 P-T P-T measurement primary(for 61850)
4204861095 Qa-T Qa-T measurement primary(for 61850)
4204861096 Qb-T Qb-T measurement primary(for 61850)
4204861097 Qc-T Qc-T measurement primary(for 61850)
4204861098 Q-T Q-T measurement primary(for 61850)
4205871095 Sa-T Sa-T measurement primary(for 61850)
4205871096 Sb-T Sb-T measurement primary(for 61850)
4205871097 Sc-T Sc-T measurement primary(for 61850)
- 584 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

4205871098 S-T S-T measurement primary(for 61850)
4200881095 PFa-T PFa-T measurement primary(for 61850)
4200881096 PFb-T PFb-T measurement primary(for 61850)
4200881097 PFc-T PFc-T measurement primary(for 61850)
4200881098 PF-T PF-T measurement primary(for 61850)
420784109E Wh+ -T Wh+ -T measurement primary(for IEC61850)
420785109E Wh- -T Wh- -T measurement primary(for IEC61850)
420884109E varh+ -T varh+ -T measurement primary(for IEC61850)
420885109E varh- -T varh- -T measurement primary(for IEC61850)
4201601051 Ia-1CT Ia-1CT measurement angle(for 61850)
4201601053 Ib-1CT Ib-1CT measurement angle(for 61850)
4201601055 Ic-1CT Ic-1CT measurement angle(for 61850)
4201611051 I1-1CT I1-1CT measurement angle(for 61850)
42016a1051 In-1NCT In-1NCT measurement angle(for 61850)
42026b1057 V-P V-P measurement angle(for 61850)
42026c1051 Va-P Va-P measurement angle(for 61850)
- 585 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

42026c1053 Vb-P Vb-P measurement angle(for 61850)
42026c1055 Vc-P Vc-P measurement angle(for 61850)
42026d1051 Vab-P Vab-P measurement angle(for 61850)
42026d1053 Vbc-P Vbc-P measurement angle(for 61850)
42026d1055 Vca-P Vca-P measurement angle(for 61850)
42026e1051 V1-P V1-P measurement angle(for 61850)
42026f1057 V-S V-S measurement angle(for 61850)
4202701051 Va-S Va-S measurement angle(for 61850)
4202701053 Vb-S Vb-S measurement angle(for 61850)
4202701055 Vc-S Vc-S measurement angle(for 61850)
4202711051 Vab-S Vab-S measurement angle(for 61850)
4202711053 Vbc-S Vbc-S measurement angle(for 61850)
4202711055 Vca-S Vca-S measurement angle(for 61850)
4202721051 V1-S V1-S measurement angle(for 61850)
4202731057 V-T V-T measurement angle(for 61850)
4202741051 Va-T Va-T measurement angle(for 61850)
4202741053 Vb-T Vb-T measurement angle(for 61850)
4202741055 Vc-T Vc-T measurement angle(for 61850)
4202751051 Vab-T Vab-T measurement angle(for 61850)
4202751053 Vbc-T Vbc-T measurement angle(for 61850)
4202751055 Vca-T Vca-T measurement angle(for 61850)
4202761051 V1-T V1-T measurement angle(for 61850)
4201771051 Ia-P Ia-P measurement angle(for 61850)
4201771053 Ib-P Ib-P measurement angle(for 61850)
4201771055 Ic-P Ic-P measurement angle(for 61850)
4201781051 I1-P I1-P measurement angle(for 61850)
4201791051 Ia-S Ia-S measurement angle(for 61850)
4201791053 Ib-S Ib-S measurement angle(for 61850)
4201791055 Ic-S Ic-S measurement angle(for 61850)
42017a1051 I1-S I1-S measurement angle(for 61850)
42017b1051 Ia-T Ia-T measurement angle(for 61850)
42017b1053 Ib-T Ib-T measurement angle(for 61850)
42017b1055 Ic-T Ic-T measurement angle(for 61850)
42017c1051 I1-T I1-T measurement angle(for 61850)
- 586 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

- 587 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
10 Automatic supervision
61850 irregular data 626 Interruption 602
A/D accuracy error on VCT 606 LAN error 623
Abnormal currents flowing on CTs 607 LAN pinging error 624
BIO module#1 error 610 LRE error 625
BIO module#2 error 611 MRAM memory error 598
BIO module#3 error 612 PLC Data error 620
BIO module#4 error 613 Power supply failure 619
BIO module#5 error 614 Program code error 600
BIO module#6 error 615 RAM error 596
BIO module#7 error 616 ROM and RAM mismatch 594
BIO module#8 error 617 RUN error 601
Check-sum error 595 Sampling error 603
Clock error 605 Setting error 604
Current error in zero-sequence 607 Trip circuit error 645
ECC memory error 597 Trip circuit supervision task 641
FPGA problem 599 Voltage error in negative-sequence 608
GOOSE publishing error 628 Voltage error in zero-sequence 609
HMI malfunction 618 VT error 622
- 588 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Outline of automatic supervision

In power system, the protection function is not required to operate during normal conditions.
That is, the protection function should stay silent for the unfaulty conditions, but it has to start
respond immediately upon the occurrence of the fault. Therefore, as for the operation of the
protection system, the detection of an unhealthy condition, such as malfunction or errors in
the hardware or in the software, is requisite within the IED. The automatic supervision
function is designed to detect the unhealthy condition within the IED; the following concepts
are taken into account:
 The operating performance of the protection system should not be distorted.
 Supervision should be carried out by itself without any failure whenever
possible.
 The protection system should identify the fault instantly upon its occurrence.
Tips: The alarms can be blocked when Off is set for the switch [A.M.F]. The switch can
be used to remove alarms during testing. See Chapter User interface: Test sub-
menu for more information.
(i) Error levels

In the applications and the hardware, the number of items are supervised for detecting the
operation failure; hence, the results of the supervision functions are grouped and they are
classified into five error-levels to identify the error degree directly: warning (level 5=the minor
error) to the serious error (level 1=the critical error). Incidentally, zero (level 0) can be
identified as no error. Table 10.1-1 shows the errors grouped by the error degree. The grouping
is provided, for setting the degree of error, the user can select an user-defined degree for each
error occurs randomly. If a number of failures occur on several levels at same time, the
automatic supervision function selects the critical error among them to represent the error
inside the IED.
Table 10.1-1 Meanings and error degree in the supervision function
Levels Degree of error Example failures and errors
0 No error No error exists
1‡ Serious Fatal failures such as the memory errors within the IED
2†‡ Serious (Comm.) Failures on tele-communication
3†‡ Minor Failure on LAN (Ethernet) communication
4 Alarm Minor errors such as invalid errors by the user using settings
5 Warning Detection of warnings classified by the user using settings
†Note:Level 2 and level 3 are shown, but the difference between the level 2 and the level
3 not given; thus, we can take the both having the same degree.
‡Note: The IEC 61850quality value is also changed depending on the error level. For
more information, see Chapter Communication protocol: IEC 61850
communication: Quality signal.
- 589 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(ii) Error LED and LCD error message

The IED has LEDs and LCD screen† so that the automatic supervision function issues a result
for the LEDs and the LCD screen. When the IED is linked with the SAS, it is possible to
transfer the result for the LED and LCD screen using the communication system. Table 10.1-2
shows that which indicators are used for result generation in the function.
Table 10.1-2 Displays on LEDs, LCD, and SAS
Levels “In service” LED “Error” LED Error message on LCD
0: No error On Off (Not displayed)
1: Serious Off On Displayed
2: Serious (Comm.)‡ On On Displayed
3: Minor On (Off§) On Displayed
4: Alarm On Off Displayed
5: Warning On Off Displayed
†Note:For more information, see Chapter User interface: Outline and Diagnostics.
‡Note:It depends on the degree of the communication failure.
§Note:If the “In service” has to be turned off while a minor error (level:3) is occurring, set
On for the setting [ErrorLED_cond].
The user can see a current error information in Monitoring sub-menu† on the LCD screen†
(see Figure 10.1-1); Table 10.1-3 shows the six detail information, which the user can examine
carefully using the hexadecimal number. When two or more errors occur at the same time, an
error code is given by the summation of the error codes. That is, when X and Y errors (e.g., X-
error-code ‘00000002’ and Y-error-code ‘00000004’) occur, the sum value ‘00000006’ is screened.
CP1M(ROM/RAM) error 1/1 C u r r e n t e r r o r i n d i c a te d b y S u p e r v i s i o n
10:48 C u r r e n t l o c a l ti m e ( N o t E r r o r o c c u r r i n g ti m e )
[Serious error] E rro r d e g re e (le ve l) d is p la ye d
D e ta i l e d i n f o r m a ti o n i n H e x a d e c i m a l d u m p
[00000011] [01234567] 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
[01234567]
[01234567]
[01234567]
[00000000] [ “Top left” ][ “Top right” ]
[ “Middle left” ][ “Middle right” ]
[ “Bottom left” ][ “Bottom right” ]
Figure 10.1-1 Example error codes and detailed information on Diagnostics sub-menu
†Note:See Chapter User interface: Monitoring sub-menu: Diagnostics. It will not be
updated automatically. If new information is required, refresh LED screen again.
Table 10.1-3 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in the ROM and the RAM error (example)
Display Meaning of the detailed information
area Left column Right column
00000001: ROM read error
Top row ROM address
00000002: ROM RAM mismatch
Middle row RAM address ROM value
Bottom row RAM value (No information displayed)
- 590 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(iii) Error outputs with contacts and binary output circuits

Automatic supervision function drives a contact of the power supply module (PWS)† when an
error occurs without warning; additionally, binary output circuits (BOs‡) will be locked out to
drive when serious error (Level 1=Critical error) is detected.
Table 10.1-4 FAIL contact, BO, LED outputs depending on levels
PWS† contact outputs
Error FAIL1 terminal FAIL2 terminal Error
BO‡ locked out
Levels Screw No. 1 Screw No. 3 Screw No. 7 Screw No. 9 LED
(N/C) (N/O) (N/C) (N/O)
0: No error Open Closed Open Closed Not locked out Off
1:Serious Closed Open Closed Open Locked out On
2:Serious(Comm.) Open Closed Open Closed Not locked out On
3:Minor Open Closed Open Closed Not locked out On
4:Alarm Open Closed Open Closed Not locked out Off
5:Warning Open Closed Open Closed Not locked out Off
Error output by PWS contact†

If serious error (Level1) is detected by Automatic supervision function, normally-closed-contact
(N/C) on FAIL1 and FAIL2 terminals is closed. On the other hand, the N/O contact is open on
the serious error, as shown in Table 10.1-4.
Locking out of BO circuit operation‡

BO is locked out to operate, when serious error (Level1) occurs. Serious error stops trip signal
generations to the BO circuit. When serious error is removed, the operation will be recovered.
†Note:See Chapter Technical description: Power supply module. FAIL1 (FAIL2) contact
is in Form-C; terminal-screw No. 2 & 4 (8 &10) are provided with the common.
‡Note:BO is discussed in Chapter Technical description: Binary output circuit.
(iv) Affection of application operation by error levels

The error levels influence the operation of relay and control and monitoring application.
Table 10.1-5 Operation states in the IED applications affected by the error levels
Levels Relay applications Control and monitoring applications Notes
0: No error – –
1: Serious Stopped Stopped
2: Serious (Comm.) Not affected† Not affected
3: Minor Not affected Stopped
4: Alarm Not affected Not affected
5: Warning Not affected Not affected
†Note: Serious (Comm.) can be related to communication of tele-protection applications.
- 591 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Generic supervision tasks

Displaying errors regarding to common problems are summarized in Table 10.2-1; the error is
cleared when recovered
Table 10.2-1 Supervision items and error levels for generic

Detailed Error Sec.
Supervision items (Screen message) Info. Lvl. LED No.
Mismatch between ROM and RAM data (ROM/RAM error) Displayed 1 On 10.2.1
Supervision of check-sum error (SUM error) Displayed 1 On 10.2.2
Supervision of RAM (RAM error) Displayed 1 On 10.2.3
Supervision of ECC on memory (ECC error) Displayed 1 On 10.2.4
Supervision of MRAM (MRAM) Displayed 1 On 10.2.5
Supervision of FPGA (FPGA error) Displayed 1 On 10.2.6
Supervision of program codes (CPU error) Displayed 1 On 10.2.7
Supervision of task operation (RUN error) Displayed 1 On 10.2.8
Detecting non-maskable interrupt (NMI error) Displayed 1 On 10.2.9
Supervision of sampling period (SMP error) Displayed 1 On 10.2.10
Supervision of setting data (Setting error) Displayed 1 On 10.2.11
Supervision of real-time clock (RTC error) Displayed 3 On 10.2.12
Supervision of analog input data on VCTs (AI ACC error) Displayed 1 On 10.2.13
Abnormal currents flowing in CTs (CT error) N/A 3 On 10.2.14
Supervision of voltage in negative-sequence (V2/V2-1/V2-2 error) N/A 3 On 10.2.15
Supervision of voltages in zero-sequence (VZ, VZ-1, VZ-2 error) N/A 3 On 10.2.16
Supervision of binary IO module#1 (BIO#1 error) Displayed 1 On 10.2.17
Supervision of human machine interface (HMI error) Displayed 1 On 10.2.25
Supervision of power supply module (Power error) N/A 3 On 10.2.26
Supervision of data in PLC function (PLC data error) Displayed 3 On 10.2.27
Voltage transformer failure (VT fail) N/A 3 On 10.2.28
Supervision of LAN status (LAN error) N/A 3 On 10.2.29
Supervision of response for pinging (Ping error) Displayed 3 On 10.2.30
Supervision of link redundant entity (LRE error) Displayed 1 On 10.2.31
- 592 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Detailed Error Sec.

Supervision items (Screen message) Info. Lvl. LED No.
Supervision of communication setting (Commslv error) Displayed 3 On 10.2.32
Supervision of GOOSE publishing (LAN(GOOSE)error) Displayed 3 On 10.2.33
Error detection of differential current in DIF (Id) Displayed 3 On 10.2.34
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
3D – – 3E – – 3F – –
– Main features  – –  – –  – –
10.2.15 V2 error  – – NA – –  – –
10.2.16 VZ error  – – NA – –  – –
10.2.28 VT fail NA – – NA – – NA – –
- 593 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
10.2.1 Mismatch between ROM and RAM data (ROM/RAM error)

The ROM and RAM on the CPU module are verified every two minutes; when the error is
found, an error message is displayed by the supervision function.
(i) Error level

The error level has been set at level 1 (Serious error) for the supervision, checking error on
the RAM and the ROM is carried out periodically. If the error is detected, the IED restarts its
operation automatically. The supervision function runs on the CPU module1.
1Note: The CPU module is discussed in Chapter Technical description: Signal processing
and communication module: Processing module.
(ii) Error message

When detecting an error, an error message can be shown on the LCD screen and an LED is lit.
Table 10.2-3 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_ROMRAM

Message and level Meaning of the information
Mismatch between the RAM and ROM detected on the following
CP*_ (ROM/RAM) error module instructed with “CP*_” as follows:
CP1M: CPU module
Error level Serious error (Level 1)
Table 10.2-4 Detailed information in CHK_ROMRAM

Top 00000001: Read error in ROM
ROM address
row 00000002: Mismatch between ROM and RAM
Middle
RAM address ROM value
row
Bottom
RAM value (No information displayed)
row
- 594 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
10.2.2 Supervision of check-sum error (SUM error)

The check sum in the memory on the CPU module is verified every four minutes; when the
error is found the error message is displayed by the supervision function.
(i) Error level

The error level has been set at level 1 (Serious error) for the supervision, the check-sum error
on the memory is carried out periodically. If the error is detected, the IED restarts its operation
automatically. The supervision function runs on the CPU module1. Clearing the error message
is made promptly when the error is cleared.
(ii) Error message

Table 10.2-5 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_SUM

Sum error in the memory detected on the following module:
CP*_ (SUM) error
CP1M: CPU module
Table 10.2-6 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_SUM

Top 00000001: Read error in ROM
Sum value calculated
row 00000002: Sum incorrect in ROM RAM
Middle Address information that read error occurs

Sum value pre-programmed
row in the ROM
Bottom
(No information displayed) (No information displayed)
row
- 595 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
10.2.3 Supervision of RAM (RAM error)

The read-write operation on RAM circuit of the CPU module is verified at any time; when the
error is found an error message is displayed by the supervision function.
(i) Error level

The error level has been set at level 1 (Serious error1) for the supervision; checking errors on
the RAM is carried out at any time. If the error is detected, the IED restarts its operation
is made promptly when the error is cleared.
(ii) Error message

Table 10.2-7 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_RAM

Error detection in the RAM located on the following module
CP*_(RAM) error instructed with “CP*_” as follows:
CP1M: CPU module
Table 10.2-8 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_RAM

Top
Read value Write value
row
Middle
Error address (No information displayed)
row
Bottom
row
- 596 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
10.2.4 Supervision of ECC on memory (ECC error)

The error-correcting code memory (ECC memory), in the CPU module, is verified at any time.
(i) Error level

The error level has been set at level 1 (Serious error1) for the supervision; checking error on
the ECC is carried out at any time. If the error is detected, the IED restarts its operation
is made promptly when the error is solved.
(ii) Error message

Table 10.2-9 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_ECC

Error in the ECC is detected on the following module instructed
CP*_ (ECC) error with “CP*_” as follows:
CP1M: CPU module
Table 10.2-10 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_ECC

Top
err_cnt value Error address
row
Middle Address for rewriting failure occurred after
Number of detections of bit errors
row the correction of single bit error
ECC status
00000001: Completion of correction
Bottom Number of rewriting failure occurred 00000002: Failure of correction
row after the correction of single bit error 00000004: Detection of single error
00000008: Detection of several errors
00000010: Writing failure of data correction
- 597 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
10.2.5 Supervision of MRAM (MRAM)

The error detection on the Magnetoresistive Random Access Memory (MRAM memory) of the
CPU module is verified every 1 second; when the error is found, an error message is displayed
by the supervision function.
(i) Error level

The error level has been set at level 1 (Serious error1) for the supervision; checking errors on
the ECC is carried out at any time. If the error is detected, the IED restarts its operation
automatically. The function supervise for the MRAM on the CPU module1. Clearing the error
message is made in 1 second when the error is cleared.
(ii) Error message

Table 10.2-11 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_MRAM

Error detection in the MRAM located on the following module:
CP*_(MRAM) error
CP1M: CPU module
Table 10.2-12 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_MRAM

Top 00000001: Error detected with 0xaaaaaaaa
Address at error occurs
row 00000002: Error detected with 0x555555555
Middle
(No information is displayed) (No information is displayed)
row
Bottom
row
- 598 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
10.2.6 Supervision of FPGA (FPGA error)

Detecting the error in the FPGA is achieved when the CPU module detects fatal failures.
(i) Error level

The error level is set at level 1 (Serious error1) for the supervision; checking errors on the
FPGA is carried out at any time. If the error is detected, the IED begins to restart its operation
automatically. Clearing the error message is made promptly when the error is cleared.
(ii) Error message

Table 10.2-13 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_FPGA

Problem detected in the FPGA on the following module
CP*_ (FPAG) error instructed with “CP*_” as follows:
CP1M: CPU module
Table 10.2-14 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_FPGA

Top
00000004: FPGA mode 00000008: FPAG interruption process
row
Middle
row
Bottom
row
- 599 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
10.2.7 Supervision of program codes (CPU error)

The program code in the ROM and RAM on the CPU module is verified every time; when the
error is found an error message is displayed by the supervision function.
(i) Error level

The error level has been set at level 1 (Serious error) for the supervision, detecting Program
errors on the RAM and the ROM are carried out every second. If the error is detected, the IED
restarts its operation automatically. The supervision function runs on the CPU module1.
Clearing the error message is made promptly when the error is cleared.
(ii) Error message

Table 10.2-15 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_PROGRAM

Error detection in the RAM and ROM located on the following
CP*_(CPU) error module:
CP1M: CPU module
Table 10.2-16 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_PROGRAM

00000000: Add error
Top 00000002: Sub error
00000004: Mul error Task number causing overflow
row 00000008: Div error
00010000: Detection of overflow in Task stack
Middle
Head address of overflowing task (No information displayed)
row
Bottom
row
- 600 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
10.2.8 Supervision of task operation (RUN error)

Task operations in the IED are monitored every two minutes. Error messages can be screened
when the tasks stop. The tasks are supervised every 15 minutes if they are idling.
(i) Error level

The error level has been set at level 1 (Serious error) unconditionally.
(ii) Error message

When detecting an error, the error message can be shown on the LCD and the LED is lit.
Table 10.2-17 Error messages provided by the supervisor in MNT_LOGIC

CP1M(RUN) error Detection of the stopped task in the IED
Table 10.2-18 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in MNT_LOGIC

WW XX YY ZZ
Top 10000000: Supervision function itself
WW: FB index in SSP2(2)
20000000: Idle task (1)
row XX: FB index in SSP2(1)
40000000: Idle task (2)
YY: FB index in SSP1(2)
YY: FB index in SSP1(1)
WW XX YY ZZ WW XX YY ZZ
Middle WW: FB index in PCM(2) WW: FB index in 100MS(2)
row XX: FB index in PCM(1) XX: FB index in 100MS(1)
YY: FB index in SSP3(2) YY: FB index in 10MS
YY: FB index in SSP3(1) YY: FB index in 5MS
WW XX YY ZZ WW XX YY ZZ
Bottom WW: FB index in CONVSET WW: FB index in SUB4
row XX: FB index in NMT XX: FB index in SUB3
YY: FB index in 200MS(2) YY: FB index in SUB2
YY: FB index in 200MS(1) YY: FB index in SUB1
- 601 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
10.2.9 Detecting non-maskable interrupt (NMI error)

The occurrences of non-maskable-interruptions (NMIs) on the CPU module are examined
every time; when the interruption is triggered, an interruption message is detected and
displayed.
(i) Error level

The error level has been set at level 1 (Serious error) for the supervision; detecting the
interruption carried out at any time. If the interruption is detected, the IED restarts its
operation automatically. The supervision function runs on the CPU module1. Clearing the error
message is made promptly when the error is cleared.
(ii) Error message

Table 10.2-19 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_NMI

Interruptions occurs on the following module instructed with
CP*_(NMI) error “CP*_” as follows:
CP1M: CPU module
Table 10.2-20 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in NMI

Top
NMI code LR register
row
Middle
SRR0 register SPP1 register
row
Bottom
Stack pointer FRSCR register
row
- 602 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
10.2.10 Supervision of sampling period (SMP error)

The sampling error is verified at any time; when the error is found an error message is
displayed by the supervision function.
(i) Error level

The error level has been set at level 1 (Serious error1) for the supervision; sampling errors are
checked every seconds. If the error is detected, the IED restarts its operation automatically.
The supervision function runs on the CPU module1. Clearing the error message is made in a
second when the error is cleared.
(ii) Error message

Table 10.2-21 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_SAMPLING

Sampling error detected on the following module instructed with
CP*_ (SMP) error “CP*_” as follows:
CP1M: CPU module
Table 10.2-22 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_SAMPLING

Top
00000001: Occurrence of error Diff time
row
Middle
Current timing Pervious timing
row
Bottom
row
- 603 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
10.2.11 Supervision of setting data (Setting error)

The values of the Settings are checked every second; the error message is displayed when the
erroneous value is found.
(i) Error level

The error level has been set at level 1 (Serious error1) for the supervision; the detection is
carried out periodically. If the error is detected, the IED does not try to restart its operation
automatically. The function runs for the saved settings in the CPU module1. When the
erroneous setting is removed, the error messages will be cleared in a second.
(ii) Error message

Table 10.2-23 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_SETTING

Setting error detected on the following module instructed with
CP*_ (Setting) error “CP*_” as follows:
CP1M: CPU module
Table 10.2-24 Detailed information expressed in Hexadecimal in CHK_SETTING

Top 00000001: Failure exists in the common settings Offset address corresponding to
00000002: Failure exists in the group setting
row 00000004: Error data found in the setting table the failure in the common settings
Middle Offset address corresponding to the failure in Error information about the
row the group setting setting table
Bottom
row
- 604 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
10.2.12 Supervision of real-time clock (RTC error)

The state of the real time clock (RTC) is checked every five minutes; the error message is
displayed when the clock stops.
(i) Error level

Generally, the default error level has been set at level 3 (Minor error), but the user can program
the level using setting [CHK_RTC:LVl]; then, set On for the setting [CHK_RTC:Sw]. The
manufacturer sets five (5) minutes is set to detect the failure; it is reset within five minutes
when the clock starts to operate again.
(ii) Error message

Table 10.2-25 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_RTC

Error detection is performed on the RTC on the following
CP*_(RTC) error module:
CP1M: CPU module
Error level Minor error (Level 3)
Table 10.2-26 Detailed information expressed in Hexadecimal in CHK_RTC

Top 00000001: shows that the error exists in
Time in the second when the RTC stopped
row the RTC
Middle Time in the minute when the RTC

(No information displayed)
row stopped
Bottom
row
- 605 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
10.2.13 Supervision of analog input data on VCTs (AI ACC error)

It is possible to detect the failure of the analog to digital conversion in the VCT module†.
†Note:For more information about the VCT, see Chapter Technical description:
Transformer module for AC analog input. The function can operate for respective
VCTs.
(i) Error level

Generally, the default error level has been set at level 1 (Serious error1). For example, the user
can program the level using setting [CHK_ACC1:LVl] when the VCT module at the VCT#12
slot should be supervised. Set On for the settings [CHK_ACC1:Sw]. The manufacturer sets one
(1) second to detect the failure; it is reset within a second when the failure is cleared.
1Note: When the error is detected, the entire operation of the IED is stopped forcibly.
2Note: The location of the VCT is discussed in Alpha-numerical references. See chapter
Technical description: IED case and module slot.
(ii) Error message

Table 10.2-27 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_ACC

AI#x(ACC) error Detection of the conversion deterioration at VCx slot
Table 10.2-28 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_ACC

00000001: P error
00000002: N error
Top 00000004: Neg error
Plus value / Minus value
row 00000010: P(H) error
00000020: N(H) error
00000040: Neg(H) error
Middle
Plus rev value / (none) Plus value / Minus value
row
Bottom
Plus rev value (No message displayed)
row
- 606 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
10.2.14 Abnormal currents flowing in CTs (CT error)

The CT supervision is to examine whether the three-phase currents are balanced and the
current in zero-sequence is minimum. It secures the operation of the CT circuits†. By
monitoring the currents flowing in the AC analog input circuits, it is also applicable to detect
the failure in the CT circuit. The failure is determined as Equation (10.2-1) is satisfied.
1. Max(|Ia |, |Ib |, |Ic |) − 4 × Min(|Ia |, |Ib |, |Ic |) ≥ k 0 (10.2-1)
where,
Max (|Ia|, |Ib|, |Ic|): The largest amplitude among Ia, Ib, and Ic
Min (|Ia|, |Ib|, |Ic|): The smallest amplitude among Ia, Ib, and Ic
k0: 20% of the rated current†
†Note:When the VCT has two or more three-phase-CT circuits, the CT supervision may
be required to operate for respective CT circuits. The rated current above the
equation is defined with VCT setting. For more information regarding the VCT,
see Chapter Technical description: Transformer module for AC analog input.
Settings are required to respective groups of the three-phase currents.
(i) Error level

the level using settings [CHK_CT1:LVl] and the others; then, set On for the setting
[CHK_CT1:Sw] or whatever required. The time to detect can be programmed using
[CHK_CT1:Timer], etc., which can be set for 15 seconds as default. After the error is cleared,
resetting will be performed after the elapse of setting time.
(ii) Error message

Table 10.2-29 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_CT

CTx error the extraordinary current flowing located at CTx
Table 10.2-30 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_CT

Display area Meaning of the detailed information
N/A (No information is displayed)
- 607 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
10.2.15 Supervision of voltage in negative-sequence (V2/V2-1/V2-2 error)

The voltage in negative-sequence is calculated regularly using three-phase voltages within the
IED. If the equation below is satisfied over 10 seconds, the supervision function determines
that a failure occurs in the input circuit.
The voltage in negative sequence can be used to detect a failure within the voltage input
circuit in high sensitivity. It facilitates the detection of the incorrect phase sequence if cables
are irregularly.
|Va + 𝑎2 Vb + aVc |
1. ≥ 6.35 (V) (10.2-2)
3
where,
a = Phase shift operator of 120
(i) Error level

the level using settings [CHK_V2:LVl]/ [CHK_V2-1:LVl] for the first circuit and [CHK_V2-2:LVl]
for the second circuit; then, set On for the settings [CHK_V2:Sw] or whatever required. The
time to detect can be set using [CHK_V2:Timer], etc., which are set for 15 seconds as default.
After the error is cleared, resetting will be performed after the elapse of setting time.
(ii) Error message

When the function operates and detects error, an error message can be shown at the LED and
the LCD screen.
Table 10.2-31 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_V2
V2 error / V2-1 error Detection of the negative-sequence voltage at the first circuit
V2-2 error Detection of the negative-sequence voltage at the second
Table 10.2-32 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_V2

- 608 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
10.2.16 Supervision of voltages in zero-sequence (VZ, VZ-1, VZ-2 error)

Voltage in zero-phase sequence is automatically calculated using the three-phase voltages
within the relay. If Equation (10.2-3) is satisfied, the supervision function can determine that
a voltage in zero-sequence is being applied erroneously.
|Va + Vb + Vc |
1. ≥ 6.35 (V) (10.2-3)
3
(i) Error level

the level using settings [CHK_VZ:LVl] or [CHK_VZ-1:LVl] etc.; then, set On for the settings
[CHK_VZ-:Sw] or whatever required. The time to detect can be set using [CHK_VZ:Timer], etc.,
which are set for 15 seconds as default. If the error is cleared, it is reset in the time that is the
same as the setting time to the detection.
(ii) Error message

the LCD screen.
Table 10.2-33 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_VZ
VZ error / VZ1 error Detection of the zero-sequence voltage at the first circuit
VZ2 error Detection of the zero-sequence voltage at the second circuit
Table 10.2-34 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_VZ

- 609 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
10.2.17 Supervision of binary IO module#1 (BIO#1 error)

A supervision function is provided to detect the operation failure in the first binary IO modules
(BIO)†.
†Note:The function can operate for respective BIO modules mounted in the IED; the user
should have settings in them, which are located at the IO slot identified with the
number.
(i) Error level

can program the level using setting [CHK_BIO1:LVl] when the BIO module at the IO#12 slot
should be supervised; then, set On for the setting [CHK_BIO1:Sw]. The manufacturer sets one
(1) second to detect the failure; it is reset with in a second when the failure is cleared.
2Note: The location of the IO slot is discussed in Chapter Technical description: IED case
and module slot.
(ii) Error message

Table 10.2-35 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_BIO1

BIO#1 error Detection of the BIO failure at IO slot#1
Table 10.2-36 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_BIO1

Top 00000001: CRC error
00000002: Connection error Count number by the CRC error
row 00000004: Read back error
Middle
Count number by the connection error Count number by the read-back error
row
Bottom
(No message displayed) (No message displayed)
row
- 610 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

A supervision function is provided to detect the operation failure in the second binary IO
modules (BIO)†.
number.
(i) Error level

(1) second to detect the failure; it is reset within a second when the failure is cleared.
and module slot.
(ii) Error message



Middle
row
Bottom
row
- 611 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

A supervision function is provided to detect the operation failure in the third binary IO modules
(BIO)†.
number.
(i) Error level

1Note: when the error is detected the entire operation of the IED is stopped forcibly.
and module slot.
(ii) Error message



Middle
row
Bottom
row
- 612 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

A supervision function is provided to detect the operation failure in the forth binary IO modules
(BIO)†.
number.
(i) Error level

Generally, the error level has been set at level 1 (Serious error1), as default. For example, the
user can program the level using setting [CHK_BIO4:LVl] when the BIO module at the IO#42
slot should be supervised; then, set On for the setting [CHK_BIO4:Sw]. The manufacture sets
one (1) second to detect the failure; it is reset in a second when the failure is cleared.
1Note: The entire operation of the IED is stopped forcibly when the error is detected.
and module slot.
(ii) Error message



Middle
row
Bottom
row
- 613 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

A supervision function is provided to detect the operation failure in the fifth binary IO modules
(BIO)†.
number.
(i) Error level

and module slot.
(ii) Error message



Middle
row
Bottom
row
- 614 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

A supervision function is provided to detect the operation failure in the sixth binary IO modules
(BIO)†.
number.
(i) Error level

1Note: when the error is detected the entire operation of the IED is stopped forcibly.
and module slot.
(ii) Error message



Middle
row
Bottom
row
- 615 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

A supervision function is provided to detect the operation failure in the seventh binary IO
modules (BIO)†.
number.
(i) Error level

and module slot.
(ii) Error message



Middle
row
Bottom
row
- 616 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

A supervision function is provided, to detect the operation failure in the eighth binary IO
modules (BIO)†.
number.
(i) Error level

and module slot.
(ii) Error message



Middle
row
Bottom
row
- 617 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
10.2.25 Supervision of human machine interface (HMI error)

Supervising the failure in the human machine interface (HMI) is provided.
(i) Error level

Generally, the default error level has been set at level 3 (Minor error1). However, the user can
program the level using setting [CHK_HMI:LVl]; then, set On for the setting [CHK_HMI:Sw].
The manufacturer sets ten (10) seconds to detect the failure; it is reset within 10 seconds when
the failure is cleared.
2Note: The functions of the HMI is discussed in Chapter Technical description: Human
machine interface.
(ii) Error message

Table 10.2-51 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_HMI
HMI error Detection of the HMI failure
Table 10.2-52 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_HMI

Top 00000001: Timeout of LCD communication Culminated value for the
00000002: Format error in LCD communication
row 00000004: Communication error in MIMIC LCD timeout
Middle Counter of the MIMIC
Counted value for the format error
row communication
Bottom (No information is
(No information is displayed)
row displayed)
- 618 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
10.2.26 Supervision of power supply module (Power error)

A power error is issued when the DC voltage generated in the power supply module (PWS†) is
less than a threshold. The user can select either 85V or 170V thresholds for issuing the power
error; it is determined by inserting a shut connector (JP4) on the PWS.
†Note:For more information about the PWS, see Chapter Technical description, Power
supply module. When the AC supply—however, the manufacture does not
guarantee the operation in the AC power—is connected with the PWS module, the
user shall set Off for the setting [CHK_POWER:Sw] (that is, the supervision
function concerning to the PWS module are stopped). Remember that the state of
the binary input circuit (BI) will be latched when the Power error occurs anytime.
(i) Error level

Generally, the default error level has been set at level 3 (Minor error), as default, but the user
can program the level using setting [CHK_POWER:LVl]; then, set On for the setting
[CHK_POWER:Sw]. The manufacturer sets one (1) second to detect the failure; it is reset with
in a second when the failure is cleared.
(ii) Error message

Table 10.2-53 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_POWER
Power error Detection of the failure in the PWS
Table 10.2-54 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_POWER

Top
00000001: PWS failure (No information displayed)
row
Middle
row
Bottom
row
- 619 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
10.2.27 Supervision of data in PLC function (PLC data error)

Error in the PLC function is detected because the data coded by PLC editor1 has an error.
(i) Error level

the level using setting [CHK_PLC_DAT:LVl]; then, set On for the setting [CHK_PLC_DAT:Sw].
The manufacturer sets one-hundred-twenty (120) second to detect the failure; it is reset within
60 seconds when the failure is cleared.
(ii) Error message

When detecting an error, an error message will be shown on the LCD screen and an LED is lit.
Table 10.2-55 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_PLC_DAT

PLC data error Detection of the failure in the PLC function
1For more information about the task and its kind, see Chapter PLC editing in PLC editor
(6F2S1904) separately.
- 620 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Table 10.2-56 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_ PLC_DAT

00000001 No PLC data exists in the 00000001 Watch dog error
IED. 00000002 CPU load exceeded
00000002 Error in input Data2 00000003 File error
00000004 Error in output Data3 00000004 Test info string error
00000008 Time over in computation4 00000010 PLC stopped
00000010 PLC stopped by the editor5 00000011 No PLC stop Identifier
00010000 Watch dog error 00000012 Output string is too short
00020000 CPU load exceeded 00000013 Input string is too short
00040000 File error 00000014 Invalid input parameter
Top 00080000 Divided by zero 00000015 2nd is of the output string
00100000 Array index out of range 00000016 Invalid string comparison
row 00200000 Stack over flow 00000017 Unsupported type in conversion
00400000 System error 00000018 Error in the format string
00800000 Working memory over flow 00000019 Invalid input for format string
01000000 Internal error 0000001A Error during string conversion
0000001B Mismatch in Flash memory
000003E8 Division by zero
000003E9 Array index out of range
000003EA Stack over flow
000003EB System error
000003EC Working memory over flow
Middle
(No information) (No information)
row
Bottom
(No information) (No information)
row
2It can be displayed when Data IDs are selected erroneously in DIN function.
3It can be displayed when Data IDs are selected erroneously in DOUT function.
4The kind of tasks (Main_1, Main_2, or Main_3) may be too large.
5The PLC stops manually by the PLC editor.
- 621 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
10.2.28 Voltage transformer failure (VT fail)

Detecting the failure in the VT is achieved by the operation of the VT failure detection function
(VTF†). Thus, the failure signal in the VTF is transferred to the automatic supervision function
and it is grouped into the error level together with other error signals.
†Note:For more information about the VTF function, see Chapter Relay application: VT
failure detection.
(i) Error level

the level using setting [CHK_VTF:LVl]; then, set On for the setting [CHK_VTF:Sw]. The
manufacturer sets ten (10) seconds to detect the failure; it is reset instantly when the failure
is cleared.
(ii) Error message

the LCD screen.
Table 10.2-57 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_VTF
VT fail Detection of the failure in the VT
Table 10.2-58 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_VTF

- 622 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
10.2.29 Supervision of LAN status (LAN error)

Network communication module is monitored every 60 seconds; the error message is screened
if the one does not operate correctly.
†Note:For more information about the modules with regard to the LAN network, see
Chapter Communication Protocol: LAN communication or Chapter Technical
description: Signal processing and communication module.
(i) Error level

the level using settings [CHK_LAN*:LVl]; then, set On for the settings [CHK_LAN*:Sw].
(ii) Error message

Table 10.2-59 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_LAN
Detection of the failure on the module instructed with
“LAN*” as follows:
LAN* error
LAN1: Communication module (COM#1 at C11)
LAN2: Communication module (COM#2 at C12)
Table 10.2-60 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_LAN

00000001: LAN does not exist
00000010: MAC address error
Top 00000100: Connection failure in 10Mbps
00001000: Double IP addresses First MAC address in four Octets
row 00010000: Internal error occurs
00100000: LAN driver error
01000000: Descriptor error
XXXX YYYY
Middle Number of responses from double IP
row addresses YYYY: Counter of full receptions
XXXX: No. of write-error in reception
When description error occurs:
00000001: Sending error
00000008: Tx error at the head address
XXXX YYYY
Bottom 00000010: Reception error
00000020: Rx error of size definition
row YYYY: Counter for reception halted
00000040: Rx error at the head address
XXXX: Counter for sending halted
When driver error occurs:
State of interruption.
- 623 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
10.2.30 Supervision of response for pinging (Ping error)

Communication error on the LAN† is detected by pinging for the addresses instructed.
†Note:For more information about the LAN, see Chapter Communication Protocol: LAN
communication. For the information about the LAN hardware, see Chapter
Technical description: Signal processing and communication module. When two
network modules operates, the message is provided for the both.
(i) Error level

the level using settings [CHK_PING*:LVl]; then, set On for the settings [CHK_PING*:Sw]. The
manufacturer sets one-hundred (100) second to detect the failure; it is reset in 20 seconds when
the failure is cleared.
(ii) Error message

When detecting errors, an error message can be shown on the LCD screen and an LED is lit.
Table 10.2-61 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_PING

Detection of the pinging failure instructed with “LAN*” as
follows:
LAN* (ping) error
LAN1 (ping): Communication module (COM#1 at C11)
LAN2 (ping): Communication module (COM#2 at C12)
Table 10.2-62 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_PING

Top
Destination address for pinging (No information is displayed)
row
Middle
row
Bottom
row
- 624 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
10.2.31 Supervision of link redundant entity (LRE error)

Operation of the LRE is checked and the error message is screened when the LRE does not
operate correctly or wrong data is written in the FPGA.
†Note:For more information about the LRE, see Chapter Communication Protocol: LAN
operation.
(i) Error level

Generally, the default error level has been set at level 1 (Serious error), but the user can
program the level using settings [CHK_LRE:LVl]; then, set On for the settings [CHK_LRE:Sw].
(ii) Error message

Table 10.2-63 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_LRE

Detection of the failure in the LRE instructed with “CP*_” as
CP*_(LRE) error follows:
CP1M: CPU module
Table 10.2-64 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_LRE

Top 00000001: Type error in FPGA
00000002: Port state error in redundant module FPGA type number in CPM2
row 00000004: Mode error in redundant module
Middle
row
Bottom
row
- 625 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
10.2.32 Supervision of communication setting (Commslv error)

A setting error can be detected if contradictory data has been set in the memory. Error
messages are shown depending on a kind of the communication protocols.
(i) Error level

The default error level has set at level 3 (Minor error), but the user can change it using setting
[CHK_CMLV:LVl]; and then, set On for the setting [CHK_CMLV:Sw]. Errors can be detected in
two minutes after the IED switches on.
(ii) Error message

When detecting errors, an error message can be shown on the LCD screen and an LED turns
on.
Table 10.2-65 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_CMLV
Data(cmmslv) error Detection of the failure in the settings
(iii) Setting error information

If a signal mapping has not been performed correctly, error messages be shown in Hexadecimal
codes.
Table 10.2-66 61850 setting error information in CHK_CMLV
0001xxxx: IEC61850 error Number (high-order) of Data ID
Top row
0010xxxx: IEC60870-5-103 error mistakenly be mapped in the IED
Number (low-order) of Data ID
Middle row Internal information
mistakenly be mapped in the IED
Bottom
Internal information Internal information
row
Data(cmmslv) error
10:48 1/1
[Minor error]
[00010004] [51200131]
[03011001] [4747494F]
[32245354] [7456616C]
Figure 10.2-1 Sample error message

Note: Figure 10.2-1 is an example of 61850 error; and the content of that can be
different depends on degree errors; hence, this is just an example:
 The first of the top left part (i.e., “0001”) is showing the error belongs to
- 626 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
the IEC61850 protocol.

 The second of that (i.e., “0004”) is a reason (see Table 10.2-67), and it turns
out the 61850 initialization.
 The top right and the middle left parts are the Data ID of the reason (i.e.,
“51200131” and “03011001”; the user can combine them into “512001
3103011001”).
 The others are used to show the name of the 61850 logical data. Figure
10.2-1 has “4747494F, 32245354, 7456616C” codes, so the user can convert
the codes to the “GGIO2$STtVal” message using Hexadecimal to ASCII
conversion method.
Table 10.2-67 Detailed error information of 61850error

Reasons of errors
Error# messages Error# Messages
Erroneous index being used in the data
0002 Function error found 000D
for the protocol stack designated
Failure occurred on going through the
0003 000E Time out
selection process with regard to the protocol
Failure occurred during initialization of
0004 000F Going through the process
protocol process
0005 Failure for opening file 0010 Found invalid arguments
0006 Failure of access 0011 Found the data type not being supported
Failure of the acquisition of the authority
0007 No buffer space 0012
right
No space left in the buffer provided for the
0008 0013 Failure occurred on the setting process
SSP mapping
Failure of memory allocation in the memory
0009 0014 Failure of the event registration
dynamically
000A Check sum errors 0015 No event occurred
000B Failure of object search 0016 Restarting
000C Failure of the defining of data type 0017 Communication error
- 627 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
10.2.33 Supervision of GOOSE publishing (LAN(GOOSE)error)

Publishing error in the IEC 61850 communication† is detected when a GOOSE message is not
received.
†Note:For more information about GOOSE, see Chapter Communication protocol: IEC
61850 communication.
(i) Error level

the level using setting [CHK_GOOSERCV:LVl]; then, set On for the setting
[CHK_GOOSERCV:Sw]. Detecting the error is expressed in five-minutes when the IED detects
no reception of the GOOSE. When the GOOSE is started to receive, it is reset in one-minute.
(ii) Error message

When detecting errors, an error message can be shown on the LCD screen and an LED is lit.
Table 10.2-68 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_GOOSERCV

LAN(GOOSE) error Detection of the failure in GOOSE
Table 10.2-69 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_GOOSERCV

Top Receipt state regarding to the GOOSE Receipt state regarding to the GOOSE
row subscribe information#1† subscribe information#2†
Middle Receipt state regarding to the GOOSE Receipt state regarding to the GOOSE
Bottom Receipt state regarding to the GOOSE Receipt state regarding to the GOOSE
†Note:“c000” is shown when no reception.
- 628 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
10.2.34 Error detection of differential current in DIF (Id)

Operations are monitored by the operation of DIF-SV element† in the current differential
function (DIF); the automatic supervision function can alarm its erroneous operation by the
notification from the DIF function.
†Note:The DIF function has a supervision feature; and, the user can set it using settings
[DIF-IdSV] and [TDIF-IdSV]; then set On for the scheme switch [DIF-IdSV-EN]. For
more information about the DIF supervision, see Chapter Relay application:
Current differential protection: Differential current monitoring function.
(i) Error level

The default error level is set at 3 (Minor error), but the user can set it using setting
[CHK_ID:LVl]; then, set On for the setting [CHK_ID:Sw]. The manufacture sets 10 seconds for
the detection using the [TDIF-IdSV]. It is reset instantly when the error is cleared.
(ii) Error message

the LCD screen.
Table 10.2-70 Error messages provided by the supervisor in CHK_ID
Id error Detection of the erroneous differential current
Table 10.2-71 Detailed information in Hexadecimal in CHK_ID

- 629 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
10.2.35 Setting
Setting of CHK_SAMPLING (Function ID: 220701)
Setting item Range Contents Default setting value Notes
CHK_SPSYNC1:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

--- / Serious error / Serious error(Comm) /
CHK_ SPSYNC1:Lvl Error level Serious error(Comm)
Minor error / Alarm/ Warning
CHK_SPSYNC2:Sw Off / On Enable switch On
CHK_ SPSYNC2:Lvl Error level Serious error(Comm)
Setting of CHK_ACC (Function ID: 220E01 and 220E02)

CHK_ACC1:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_ ACC1:Lvl Error level Serious error
CHK_ACC2:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_ ACC2:Lvl Error level Serious error
Setting of CHK_BIO (Function ID: 221101 to 221108)

CHK_BIO1:Sw Off / On Enable switch for BIO#1 On

CHK_ BIO 1:Lvl Error level at BIO#1 Serious error
… … … …
CHK_ BIO8:Sw Off / On Enable switch for BIO#8 On

CHK_ BIO8:Lvl Error level at BIO#1 Serious error
Setting of CHK_HMI (Function ID: 221301)

CHK_HMI:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_ HMI:Lvl Error level Minor error
Setting of CHK_RTC (Function ID: 221701)

CHK_RTC:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_RTC:Lvl Error level Minor error
Minor error / Alarm / Warning
- 630 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Setting of CHK_CT (Function ID: 221801 to 221805)

Note
Setting item Range Contents Default setting value
s
CHK_CT1:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_CT1:Lvl Error level Serious error
CHK_CT1:Timer 10 – 60 seconds Checking timer 15 seconds
…. …. …. ….
CHK_CT5:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_CT5:Lvl Error level Serious error
CHK_CT5:Timer 10 – 60 seconds Checking timer 15 seconds
Setting of CHK_V2 (Function ID: 221A01)

Note
s
CHK_V2-1:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_V2-1:Lvl Error level Minor error
CHK_V2-1:Timer 10s – 60s Checking timer 15s

Note
s


Note
s

Setting of CHK_VZ (Function ID: 221B01)

Note
s
CHK_VZ:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_VZ:Lvl Error level Minor error
CHK_VZ:Timer 10s – 60s Checking timer 15s
- 631 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Setting of CHK_VZ-1 (Function ID: 221B01)

Note
s
CHK_VZ-1:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_VZ-1:Lvl Error level Minor error
CHK_VZ-1:Timer 10s – 60s Checking timer 15s
Setting of CHK_VZ-2 (Function ID: 221B02)

Note
s
CHK_VZ-2:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_VZ-2:Lvl Error level Minor error
CHK_VZ-2:Timer 10s – 60s Checking timer 15s
Setting of CHK_VTF (Function ID: 221C01)

Note
s
CHK_VTF:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_ VTF:Lvl Error level Minor error
Setting of CHK_POWER (Function ID: 222D01)

CHK_POWER:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_POWER:Lvl Error level Minor error
Setting of CHK_PLC_DAT (Function PLC_DAT: 223202)

CHK_PLC_DAT:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_PLC_DAT:Lvl Error level Minor error
Setting of CHK_PING (Function ID: 223601 and 223602)

CHK_PING1:Sw Off / On Enable switch Off

CHK_PING1:Lvl Error level Minor error
- 632 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Setting of CHK_PING (Function ID: 223601 and 223602)

PING_IP_ADRS 0 - 255 192
PING_IP_ADRS2 0 - 255 168

Ping target IP address
CHK_PING2:Sw Off / On Enable switch Off

CHK_PING2:Lvl Error level Minor error
PING_IP_ADRS 0 - 255 192

Ping target IP address
Setting of CHK_CMLV (Function ID: 224001)

CHK_CMLV_DAT:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_CMLV_DAT:Lvl Error level Minor error
Setting of CHK_GOOSERCV (Function ID: 223501)

CHK_GOOSERCV:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_GOOSERCV:Lvl Error level Minor error
Setting of CHK_ID (Function ID: 221401)

Note
s
CHK_ID:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_ID:Lvl Error level Minor error
Setting of PRP_LRE (Function ID: 224101)

CHK_LRE:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_LRE:Lvl Error level Serious error (Comm)
- 633 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Setting of CHK_LAN1 and CHK_LAN2 (Function ID: 220D01 and 220D02)

CHK_LAN1:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_ LAN1:Lvl Error level Minor error
CHK_LAN2:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

CHK_ LAN2:Lvl Error level Minor error
- 634 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

MNT_LOGIC (Function ID: 220001)
3211001001 ACT_TIME System active time in minutes
3110101001 ALLALRM All alarm
3110131001 ALRM_CND Alarm condition
3110021001 BO_LCK BO lock
3110031001 COM_LCK Tele-protection lock
3010011001 ERROR_LED Error led
3110201001 ERR_LV1 Error level1
3010001001 INSRV_LED In service led
3110501001 LCK_STA Supervisor locked
3110121001 MINR_ERR Minor error
3110111001 SERI_ERR Serious error

CHK_ROMRAM (Function ID: 220101)
32FFFF1001 EXEC_CNT Executing counter
3210001001 RESULT Check result
3210011001 RES_INST Check result (instant)

CHK_SUM (Function ID: 220201)
3210101001 CHECKSUM
3210111001 CHECKSUMC
32E0001001 CHK_POINT
3210201001 LOADERSUM
3210121001 PROG_SIZE

CHK_PROGRAM (Function ID: 220301)
30E0001001 CHKPOINT test point1
30E0011001 CHKPOINT2 test point2
- 635 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

CHK_PROGRAM (Function ID: 220301)
32FFFF1001 EXEC_CNT executing counter
3210001001 RESULT check result
3210011001 RES_INST check result(instant)

CHK_NMI (Function ID: 220401)

CHK_RAM (Function ID: 220601)
32E0001001 CHKPOINT test point
3210021001 ECC_SECNT ECC single error cnt

CHK_ECC (Function ID: 220602)

CHK_ SAMPLING (Function ID: 220701)

CHK_ ACC (Function ID: 220E01 and 220E2)
- 636 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

CHK_ ACC (Function ID: 220E01 and 220E2)
3210021001 RES_FAST check result(fast)

CHK_MRAM (Function ID: 220F01)
32E0001001 CHKPOINT test point

CHK_ BIO (Function ID: 221101 to 221108)

CHK_ HMI (Function ID: 2201301)

CHK_SETTING (Function ID: 221501)

CHK_DPRAM and CHK_EXDPRAM (Function ID: 221601 and 221602)
- 637 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

CHK_RTC (Function ID: 221701)
32E0001001 CHKPOINT Test point

CHK_CT (Function ID: 221801 to 221805)

CHK_V2 (Function ID: 221A01 and 221A02)

CHK_VZ (Function ID: 221B01 and 221B02)

CHK_ VTF (Function ID: 221C01)

CHK_POWER (Function ID: 222D01)
- 638 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

CHK_POWER (Function ID: 222D01)

CHK_PLC_DAT (Function ID: 223202)

CHK_PING (Function ID: 223601 and 223602)
EXEC_CNT 32FFFF1001 execute counter
RESULT 3210001001 check result
RES_INST 3210011001 check result(instant)

CHK_ CMLV (Function ID: 224001)

CHK_DCAIO (Function ID: 222E01 and 222E08)
311000131F ACC_ERR Executing counter
311000111A CONN_ERR
3110001215 CORDATERR
32FFFF1001 EXEC_CNT

CHK_FPGA (Function ID: 220B01)
- 639 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

CHK_FPGA (Function ID: 220B01)

CHK_ID (Function ID: 221401)

PRP_LER (Function ID: 224101)

CHK_LAN1/2 (Function ID: 220D01, 220D02)
- 640 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Trip circuit supervision task

The TCS function provides an alarm when it detects a failure in the circuit breaker tripping
control circuit. The failure could be caused by loss of power supply in the trip circuit or an open
circuit in the control circuit connection.
Displaying error message founded by the TCS function is shown in Table 10.3-1; the error
is cleared when recovered
Table 10.3-1 Supervision items and error levels for Trip supervision
Detailed Error
Sec.No. Supervision items(Screen message) Info. Lvl LED
10.3.1 Trip circuit error (TC error) N/A 3 On
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
3D – – 3E – – 3F – –
– Main features  – –  – – TBD – –
- 641 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
10.3.1 Detecting erroneous operation

(i) Operation logics
The TCS has six sets of monitoring logic (TCS1 to TCS6), as shown in Figure 10.3-1. For
example, the TCS1 logic issues a signal “TC1_Fail” when the following conditions are
determined in the TCS1 logic:
 Both signals at PLC connection points “TC1_FAIL_SIGNAL1” and “TC1_FAIL_SIGNAL2”
being absent for more than 0.4 sec.
 Either On or OPT-On† being set for scheme switch [TCS1-EN].
8000011BB0
800001EBB0 TC1_FAIL_SIGNAL1 1 &

8000011B60
8000011BB1 t 0 0 t TC1_FAIL
800001EBB1 TC1_FAIL_SIGNAL2 1 0.4s 0.4s
8000011BB2
800001EBB2 TC1_FAIL_COND
OPT-On &
≥1
TCS1-EN On
8100021B60
TCS2 scheme logic (same as TCS1 scheme logic) TC2_FAIL
8200031B60
8300041B60
8400051B60
8500061B60
≥1
8F00001B60
TC_FAIL
Figure 10.3-1 Six sets of TCS scheme logic

†Note:If the user wishes to add a user-programmed condition for the TCS1 decision, set
OPT-On and connect the user-programmed signal at PLC connection point
“TC1_FAIL_COND”. The TCS1 monitor will then only be available when a user-
programmed signal is present at PLC connection point “TC1_FAIL_COND”.
(ii) Applications
Example1
Figure 10.3-2 provides an application example of the TCS function. Two binary-input signals
are assigned to PLC connection points “TC1_FAIL_SIGNAL1” and “TC1_FAIL_SIGNAL2”.
When the trip circuit is healthy, a small current will flow in the BI circuits, the CB auxiliary
contacts, and the trip coil. This small current can be observed to flow in both the CB-open
condition and the CB-closed condition. If the small current supplied to the trip circuit is lost,
- 642 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
or if the connections between the trip circuit and the BI circuits become open circuit, a signal
"TC1_FAIL" is generated; then, the TCS1 logic will issue a Trip Circuit Fail alarm.
Note: A threshold setting voltage is required for the BI circuits. The user should set the
threshold to one-half of the value of the trip supply voltage. This is because in this
scheme there are two BI circuits connected in series. The supply voltage across the
BI circuit will be divided by two when the 52 contact is closed and the 52b contact
is open. Thus, the BI circuit may fail to operate if the BI sensitivity is only set in
response to the supply voltage. For example, the BI threshold voltage should be
set below 55V when a trip supply voltage of 110V is applied. For the TCS function,
the user should select two BI circuits from the BI2A module, because the BI
circuits of both of these modules can have lower threshold voltages than the BI
circuits that are available in other modules.
Trip circuit
()
Protection
8000011BB0
relay R
BI1 Binary input 800001EBB0 TC1_FAIL_SIGNAL1 1
circuit &
8000011B60
R 8000011BB1 t 0 0 t TC1_FAIL
BI2 Binary input 800001EBB1 TC1_FAIL_SIGNAL2 1 0.4s 0.4s

circuit
8000011BB2
52a 52b 800001EBB2 TC1_FAIL_COND
OPT-On &
≥1
TCS1-EN On
Trip coil
()
LCP & GIS
Figure 10.3-2 Connection Example1 for TCS1 logic
Example2
In Example2 a binary input signal is assigned to PLC connection point “TC1_FAIL_SIGNAL1”.
With this arrangement if the CB is open, the small monitoring current will not be able to flow
in the BI circuit. Therefore, it is recommended that setting OPT-On is selected for the scheme
switch [TCS1-EN] and that a CB-closed-status signal is applied to PLC connection point
“TC1_FAIL_COND”. Monitoring is only enabled while the CB is in the closed position when
using this setting. This setting avoids unnecessary monitoring when the circuit breaker is open
when using this scheme.
- 643 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Trip circuit
()
Protection
8000011BB0
relay R
BI1 Binary input 800001EBB0 TC1_FAIL_SIGNAL1 1

circuit &
8000011B60
8000011BB1 t 0 0 t TC1_FAIL
800001EBB1 TC1_FAIL_SIGNAL2 1 0.4s 0.4s
52a
8000011BB2
800001EBB2 TC1_FAIL_COND
OPT-On &
≥1
CB closed TCS1-EN On
status signal
Trip coil
()
LCP & GIS
Figure 10.3-3 Connection Example2 for TCS1 logic
- 644 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
10.3.2 Trip circuit error (TC error)

(i) Error level
For the operation, the user can set the error level when the function detects the error
concerning the operation. Generally, the default error level is set at level 3 (Minor error), but
the user can program the level for the TCS1—6 using settings [CHK_TCS1:LVL] to
[CHK_TCS6:LVL]; then, set On for the setting [CHK_TCS1:Sw] to [CHK_TCS6:Sw].
(ii) Error message

the LCD screen.
Table 10.3-3 Error messages provided by the supervisor in TCS
Item Meaning of the information
TCx error Detection of an error located at x
Table 10.3-4 Detailed information in TCS

N/A (No message is displayed)
- 645 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
10.3.3 Setting
Setting of TCS(Function ID: 482001)
Note
Setting item Range Units Contents Default setting value
s
TCS1(Trip Circuit Supervision 1)
TCS1-EN Off / On / OPT-On — Off
enable
enable
enable
enable
enable
enable
Setting of CHK_TCS (Function ID: 223B01 to 223B06)

Default setting
value
CHK_TCS1:Sw Off / On Enable switch On
--- / Serious error / Serious
CHK_ TCS1:Lvl error(Comm) / Minor error / Alarm/ Error level Minor error
Warning
…. …. …. ….
CHK_TCS6:Sw Off / On Enable switch On

--- / Serious error / Serious
CHK_ TCS6:Lvl error(Comm) / Minor error / Alarm/ Error level Minor error
Warning
- 646 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

TCS(Function ID: 482001)
8000011B60 TC1_FAIL Trip circuit1 fail
8000011BB0 TC1_FAIL_SIGNAL1 Trip circuit1 fail signal1
8000011BB2 TC1_FAIL_COND TC1 fail condition
8F00001B60 TC_FAIL Trip circuit fail
 Signal Connection point

800001EBB2 TC1_FAIL_COND TC1 fail condition
800001EBB0 TC1_FAIL_SIGNAL1 Trip circuit1 fail signal1
- 647 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
 Signal Connection point


CHK_TCS (Function ID: 223B01 to 223B06)
- 648 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
11 Communication protocol
IEC 60870-5-103 operation – LAN operation –
-Interface 721 -IP address 651
-Interoperability 724 -Hot standby operation 652
-Operation 745 -PRP/HSR operation 659
IEC 61850 operation 671 -RSTP operation 663
-About protocol 671 -Monitoring (Hot standby) 654
-Communication service 674 -Monitoring (PRP/HSR) 661
-Engineering work 677 Protocol selection 650
-Goose monitoring status 701 RS485operation 750
-Protocol selection 698 USB operation 749
-Quality signal 699
-Setting 696
-Supervise 698
-61850 Editon1 option 673
-61850 Editon2 673
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
Note: The implementation of such protocols depends on the selection of protocols. Several
IED models do not have the protocols. To determine whether the protocols are implemented in
the IED, locate the IED ordering number; and check the order number at the “U position”
referring to the comparison table below. For more information, see Appendix: Ordering.
Ordering No. at “U”
Sec. Feature
1 2
11.2.1 TCP/IP ✓ ✓
11.2.2 Hot-standby ✓ ✓
11.2.3 PRP/HSR NA ✓1
11.2.4 RSTP NA ✓1
11.3 IEC 61850 ✓2 ✓
11.4 IEC 60870-5-103 ✓2 NA
✓: Applicable NA: Not applicable
1 LAN modules, designed for PRP/HSR/RSTP marked with “L or N” code at position “E”, shall
be mounted in IED, if network operation in PRP/HSR/RSTP is required.
2 Either 61850 or 103 shall be selected during the operation.
- 649 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Interface setting and protocol selection

Ethernet and Serial ports can be provided in the IED for the communication. The protocol is
selectable† using settings§. The IEC 61850 standard is conventional choice for the substation
communication. Additionally, the IEC 60870-5-103 legacy† can be provided in IEDs if those
IED has to communicate with legacy apparatuses. Several communication modules, such as
LAN, USB, or RS485 interfaces‡, are provided in IEDs, hence, the user has to specify the
transmission specifications (i.e., speed and error check parity).
Figure 11.1-1 illustrates the LAN and USBCOM sub-menus are provided for the
connection to the LAN, whereas the SLAVE PROTOCOL sub-menu is for the selection of either
the IEC61850 or the IEC103 protocols. The IEC61850 sub-menu has its own settings, so does
the IEC103 menu. The RS485 sub-menu is screened when the IED has the one used for the
IEC103 in the serial communication.
Communication
10:48 1/6
LAN >
USBCOM >
RS485 >
SLAVE PROTOCOL >
IEC61850 >
IEC103 SLV >
Figure 11.1-1 Example of Setting menu ‘IEC61850, IEC103, RS485 and USB’
†Note:Selection and operation is dependent on the IED configurations, which the
customer has determined with the ordering code. Accordingly, the selection and
operation can be unavailable if the protocol is not provided in the IED. To examine
the IED configuration, check your ordering code referring Appendix: Ordering.
‡Note:We have discussed the specifications regarding the communication interface. See
Technical description: Signal processing and communication module.
§Note:The setting function is provided with the function ‘CNN_SLAVE’. The setting list
and Signal monitoring point (in Data ID) are shown below:
CNN_SLAVE (Function ID: 300001)
Slave Protocol IEC61850 / IEC103 Protocol selection IEC61850
S-TestFlagCancel Off / On Canceling Test-flag in the slave communication Off

3100013406 ProcType Selected a type in the protocol
- 650 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
LAN operation
11.2.1 LAN address (IP address)
The IED can have the communication with “Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
(TCP/IP)”. The user can set IP addresses and other TCP/IP information. Table 11.2-1 shows
the setting items provided for the LAN†.
Table 11.2-1 TCP/IP settings at LAN modules

Ports Setting items Range Setting meaning Default value
IPADDRESS1 0.0.0.0–255.255.255.255 First IP address 192.l68.1.11
Port A
SUBNETMASK1 0.0.0.0–255.255.255.255 Subnet mask 255.255.255.0
at C11
GATEWAY1 0.0.0.0–255.255.255.255 Default gateway 192.168.1.1
IPADDRESS2‡ 0.0.0.0–255.255.255.255 Second IP address 192.l68.1.12
Port B
SUBNETMASK2‡ 0.0.0.0–255.255.255.255 Subnet mask 255.255.255.0
at C12
GATEWAY2‡ 0.0.0.0–255.255.255.255 Default gateway 192.168.1.1
When wishing to change addresses, enter the new address at LAN setting sub-menu.
Figure 11.2-1 shows the setting menu provided to change the addresses‡.
LAN
10:48 1/6
IPADDRESS1 +
192.168.1.11
SUBNETMASK1 +
255.255.255.1
GATEWAY1 +
192.168.1.1
Figure 11.2-1 Local LAN setting menu (on IED screen)
†Note:For the location of the LAN communication modules, see Chapter Technical
description: Signal processing and communication module.
‡Note:IP address setting is dependent on the selection of the communication protocols.
For setting [RedundantMode]=Hot-standby, an IP address should be assigned for
the both A and B pots (i.e., a single one is set for the both; see Table 11.2-4).
Similarly, for [RedundantMode]=PRP/HSR/RSTP, an IP address will be assigned
for the both (see Table 11.2-5).
When setting [RedundantMode]=Fixed, two IP addresses can be assigned for the
respective ports, provided two ports are sited (see Table 11.2-5).
‡Note:Chapter User interface: Setting sub-menu describes how to set the address on the
IED screen.
- 651 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
11.2.2 Redundant LAN (Hot-standby)

Hot-standby is designed to change to another LAN path if an error occurs on the LAN
communication; accordingly, the LAN communication can have more security (i.e. “Redundant
communication”). The “Hot-standby (HOTST)” operation is possible when the IED has dual
communication modules for the LAN network. The Hot-standby runs when the user sets
Hot_Standby for scheme switch [RedundantMode]†.
†Note: When the user wishes not to operate Hot-standby, or the network is not ready for
the redundant, set Fixed for the [RedundantMode]. Port B (located at C12 if
provided) can only operate for the connection with the engineering tool (GR-
TIEMS®) or the PLC editor (MULTIPLOG®).
‡Note: See Chapter Technical description: Signal processing and communication
module.
(i) Overview
For the Hot-standby communication, the first communication module for Network is used as
the primary port, (i.e. Port A at C11) while a second communication module for Network, (i.e.
Port B at C12) is used as the secondary port; the IED will communicate using Port A for normal
operation. If a communications failure occurs at Port A, the IED can automatically switch
communication from Port A to Port B.
When the IED detects the occurrence of a communications failure, for which the LAN
module is unable to respond to the IED (i.e. a communications link is down), the IED starts a
timer. When the timer exceeds a setting [DownTime], the IED will switch ports. Thus, Port B
is then used for communications. (Note that Port A can be determined to be the secondary port
on the occurrence of the failure. If Port B is unable to continue to operate, then Port A will be
re-switched to run after a predetermined setting [UpTime]. Then, Port B will be discriminated
as the secondary port.)
(ii) Primary port selection

The user can select any one of the ports to be the primary port although the Port A is normally
used as the primary port. For example, provided that both Port A and Port B are physically
connected to the LAN, when the user wishes to use Port B as the primary port, the user should
set Port2(i.e., Port B) for the [PrimaryPort]. If the user wishes not to select the primary port,
set None for the [PrimaryPort].
(iii) Llink-down timer

As mentioned earlier, the occurrence of a communication failure is determined when the timer
exceeds the setting [DownTime]. Thus, the user should set a time setting for this decision.
- 652 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(iv) Link-up timer

Another timer is provided in the Hot-standby function. Let us assume that the communication
on Port A is changed to Port B. If the failure of Port A is removed after changing to Port B, the
IED will try to re-start using Port A as the primary port. In this case, the user can define a
time to revert to the original port and re-start communication on the original port by applying
a re-start time for setting [UpTime].
Table 11.2-2 Summary of Hot-standby communication setting

Setting Items Range Meaning Default
Fixed / Fixed: Hot-standby is not activated..

RedundantMode Fixed
Hot_Standby Hot_Standby: Hot-standby activated.
A timer starts upon the occurrence of the communication
DownTime 0–10000ms failure (link down). The standby port commences 5ms
communication in the DownTime.
Selection of priority port
None / Port1 / None: No selection for the priority port.
PrimaryPort None
Port2 Port1: Port A selected as the priority port.
Port2: Port B selected as the priority port.
A timer starts when the primary port is ready to commence
UpTime 0–10000ms 5ms
communication after switching port.
The user should be aware of the following three facts prior to the Hot-standby operation:
1 The IED uses the IP/MAC address of Port A for the Hot-standby operation. The
IP/MAC address of Port B is not used even if communication is carried out on Port
B.
2 The user should ensure that an optical fiber is correctly connected when a 100Base-
FX module is used, otherwise a repeat communication failure (link-down) will be
experienced continuously. If the period for which the link-down is shorter than the
setting [DownTime], another port cannot be switched as the primary port. Thus,
the user should determine the setting value to be applied for [DownTime] on the
basis of the system requirement. It is allowable for the user to apply a setting of
zero for [DownTime] so that the switching of the ports will be performed
immediately; conversely, the user can set any value less than 3000ms in order that
the system need not experience chattering failures if the optical fiber were not
connected securely. Switching between the primary and the secondary ports is not
carried out during a value is setting for the [DownTime]. The user should consider
the setting approach for [UpTime] in the same manner as when setting [DownTime].
3 The auto-negotiation function is executed when the 100Base-TX modules establish
communication over the communications network. The auto-negotiation function
selects a mode for communication; the auto-negotiation function adjusts the
communication speed. In the case of a link-down condition, the auto-negotiation
- 653 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
function will run again immediately. The link-down condition continues until auto-
negotiation has been completed (it may continue for 1 or 2 seconds). The user can
apply a setting for [DownTime] for any value of time less than that required by the
auto-negotiation function in response to the system requirement (i.e. the user can
set [DownTime] to be zero milliseconds). In this case, switching between the
primary and secondary ports is performed immediately i.e. prior to the auto-
negotiation function running. If switching between ports is not required before the
completion of the auto-negotiation function, the user can set the setting
[DownTime] longer than the time required by the auto-negotiation function. The
user can consider the setting for [UpTime] in the same manner as when setting
[DownTime].
(v) PLC switching

Compulsory signals may be used to switch the ports. For example, if a compulsory signal is
issued via PLC connection point “CH1_CH_CHG”, communication is switched from Port A to
Port B. On the other hand, changing from Port B to Port A can be executed upon the reception
of a signal via PLC signal “CH2_CH_CHG”.
(vi) Monitor
LCD screen: The user can examine the statuses about the communion modules by
the monitoring function. Figure 11.2-2 shows the port status about the modules; terms
‘Up’ and ‘Down’ mean running and stopping, respectively. For menus operations, see
Chapter User interface: Monitoring sub-menu.
PortStatus PortStatus
10:48 1/2 10:48 1/2
*Port1_Link UP *Port1_Link UP
Port2_Link DOWN Port2_Link UP
Port 1 (i.e., Port A) is connected. Ports 1&2 (i.e., Port A&B) are connected.
Port 2 (i.e., Port B) is not connected.
Figure 11.2-2 Communication status
Status signals for Port A and Port B: The user can also examine the LAN status
using PLC signal monitoring points ‘Port1_Link (3100061001)’ and ‘Port2_Link
(3100061001)’ of the HOTST function. For example, when the user wishes to monitor
the status of the Prot1_Link, use the ‘Port1_Link’. Consequently, the user can get the
physical information about the Port A: the value ‘1’ is issued when the communication
- 654 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
is made (Linkup), whereas value ‘0’ is issued when the communication is not made
(Linkdown).
When Hot_Standby is set for the [RedundantMode], the user can find a running port
using the PLC signal monitoring point ‘Using_CH (3100081001)’ of the HOTST
function. Value ‘1’ is provided when the Port A is running, whereas value ‘2’ is
provided when the Port B is running.
Monitor setting: The Hot-standby (HOTST) function can send PING packets to
remote devices thus enabling the Hot-standby function to monitor the state of the
network. The Hot-standby function checks for a response signal from the remote
device. If the Hot-standby function does not receive a response signal, the Hot-
standby function will switch to the other port. The operation is performed when
the user sets the [RedundantMode]= Hot_Standby and [NetMonitor_EN] = On.
Settings [Ping_IP1] to [Ping_IP12] are provided in the Hot-standby function for the
monitoring of remote devices on the network. When the user sets plural remote IP
addresses for the settings [Ping_IP*], and if the Hot-standby function does not receive
a response from any one of these remote devices, the Hot-standby function determines
that a communication failure has occurred. Table 11.2-3 shows the network
monitoring settings for Hot-standby operation.
Table 11.2-3 Settings network monitoring on Hot-standby

Setting items Range Meaning Default
NetMonitor_EN Off/On Enabling switch for monitoring Off
The user can set twelve IP addresses at 12 remote
Ping_IP1 0.0.0.0
terminals.
to to 0.0.0.0
Value “0.0.0.0”should be set respectively when
Ping_IP12 255.255.255.255
the remote IP addresses are not provided.
Waiting time to PING response; if any one of the
responses is not received, after the setting time
Ping_Wait 1–10 (sec) 1
has elapsed, the function will determine that there
has been no-response.
Interval of PING send; a PING packet is sent
Ping_Interval 1–120 (sec) 5
sequentially in accordance with this setting.
Number of PING packets for checking; the “no-
response “condition is determined when the IED is
unable to obtain a number of responses from the
Chk_Count 1–10 3
same IP address. The user can set the number of
responses required to determine the “no-response”
condition using the setting [Chk_Count].
The user should note that the use of network monitoring could increase the burden
on the network. This is because a number of PING packets are repeatedly transmitted
over the network. Thus, the user should choose the setting values carefully in
- 655 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
accordance with the network capacity, the burden, and the required time. Examples
1 and 2 below show the respective results using the network monitoring function with
for different settings.
Example1: There is a remote device on the network with the address Ping_IP1.
The Hot-standby function sends ping packets to the remote device every five
seconds; then the Hot-standby function waits for one second until the Hot-
standby function receives a response signal from the remote device. The Hot-
standby function will determine that a communication failure has occurred if two
sequential response signals are not received from the remote device. Subsequently,
the Hot-Standby function will switch from one port to the other port (See Figure
11.2-3). The following settings are required in this example 1:
・ The IP address of the remote device1 is set for setting [Ping_IP1]. (the setting of
IP addresses in the other remote devices is not required.)
・ One second is set for setting [Ping_Wait].
・ Number “5” is set for [Ping_Interval].
・ Number “2” is set for [Check_Count].
Local IED Remote device with
Ping_IP1 address
Ping_Interval Ping_Wait
: 5sec : 1sec Sending Ping Packet for Ping_IP1.
OK: Response received
Sending Ping Packet for Ping_IP1.

1sec
5sec NG: due to delayed response

1sec
5sec
NG: due to no response
Switching LAN ports is
performed if a response signal is
not received for setting
[Chk_Count]. 1sec
5sec
Figure 11.2-3 Time chart for Example 1
Example2: It is assumed that there are three remote devices on the network:
- 656 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Ping_IP1, Ping_IP2, and Ping_IP3. The Hot-standby function sends a Ping packet to
every remote device every 10 second (i.e., the IED sends a ping packet to a remote
device every 30 second). Suppose that “1” is set for [Check_Count]. The Hot-standby
function can determine a communication failure after 30 seconds if one of the remote
devices is unable to send a response. Figure 11.2-4 shows the operation. Switching is
not executed, because the IED cannot confirm all no-responses from the remote
addresses in the milled of the figure. Switching is performed after no-response is
confirmed from all remote devices.
・ The IP addresses of the remote devices are set for [Ping_IP1] to [Ping_IP3].
(Setting IP addresses for other remote devices is not required.)
・ 10seconds is set for [Ping_Wait].
・ Number “5” is set for [Ping_Interval].
・ Number “1” is set for [Check_Count].
Device with Ping_IP3

IED
Ping_Interval Ping_Wait
: 5sec : 10sec
OK: Response received
5sec
10sec OK: Response received
5sec
10sec
LAN switching is not performed because the IED has not confirmed a response from the IP3.
5sec NG: due to no response

10sec

5sec
10sec NG: due to no response

5sec
10sec
LAN switching is performed because the IED has not confirmed all response.
Figure 11.2-4 Time chart for Example 2
- 657 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(vii) IP setting example [RedundantMode]=Hot_standby

When Hot_standby is set for the setting [RedundantMode], the user can apply single IP
address in the IED. The table below shows that both Port A and B have the same IP address.
Table 11.2-4 Default IP address for Hot standby operation
GR-TIEMS® /
Protocol IEC61850(GOOSE) SNTP
MULTIPLOG®
IP address at
Port A†
192.168.1.11 192.168.1.11 192.168.1.11
IP address at
Port B†
†Note:Address ‘192.168.1.11’ is set as default. Setting [IPADDRESS2] will be neglected.
(viii) IP setting example [RedundantMode]=Fixed

If Fixed is set for the setting [RedundantMode], the user can apply IP addresses in the IED.
The table below shows that both Port A and B can have different IP addresses.
Table 11.2-5 Default IP address for Fix operation
GR-TIEMS® /
MULTIPLOG®
IP address at
192.168.1.11 192.168.1.11 192.168.1.11
Port A†
IP address at
Not applicable 192.168.1.12‡ 192.168.1.12§
Port B
†Note:Port A ‘192.168.1.11 (default)’ is ready for IEC61850 (GOOSE), but Port B is not
ready for IEC61850.
‡Note: Single IP address is generally set in SNTP. The user is not recommended to have
Time synchronization using different IP addresses with ‘Port A’ and ‘Port B’.
§Note: For the local PC engineering, the use of Port B (192.168.1.12, default) is
recommended, but the user can also use Port A (192.168.1.11, default) for that.
- 658 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
11.2.3 Redundant LAN (PRP/HSR operation)

The user can allow the IED operate in the redundant LAN communication (IEC 62439-3). To
operate, the user should set either PRP or HSR for scheme switch [RedundantMode].
(i) Overview
‘Parallel redundancy protocol (PRP)’ is designed for double LAN networks in order to construct
high availability automation networks. Figure 11.2-5 shows an IED (i.e., Source, IED1 with
Port A and Port B†) and a server (i.e., Destination, Substation computer with Port A and Port
B). They are connected through LAN_A and LAN_B. For duplicating data, the IED have Link
redundancy entity (LRE) so that the IED can transfer data with A-Frame packet and B-Frame
packet at the same time. At the destination, either frames being arrived later is removed.
Substation computer
CPU
Operator
workstation
Data
Port A Port B
Rx Tx Rx Tx
Destination RedBox‡
A-Frame
LAN_A
B-Frame
LAN_B
TOSHIBA
IN SER VICE
ER R OR
Tx Rx Tx Rx
RedBox‡
Port A Port B TOSHIBA

IN SER VICE
LAN module LAN module Rx Rx

ER R OR
(C11) (C12) Tx Tx
Port A Port B
TOSHIBA
LAN module LAN module IN SER VICE
Data (C11) (C12) Rx
ER R OR
Tx
I Port A
R Data LAN module
L (C11)
CPU I
O Help Cancel ENTER
R
IED1 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 L Data
CPU
Source O Help Cancel ENTER
I
IED2 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7
R
L
CPU
O Help Cancel ENTER
F3
IED3 F1 F2 F4 F5 F6 F7
Figure 11.2-5 PRP example for redundant LAN_A and LAN_B with DANP
†Note:For the locations about the LAN module, see Chapter Technical description:
Signal processing and communication modules.
‡Note: IED3 and Operator workstation (connected with singly attached node) can join
the network with Redundancy boxes (RedBox).
‘High-availability Seamless redundancy (HSR)’, for the ring topology, is designed to achieve
high reliability communication. Figure 11.2-6 illustrates IEDs connected over the ring LAN.
As doubly ports (Port A and Port B) are embedded in an IED, the IED can transfer the data
packet (A-Frame and B-Frame) for the destination over the ring LAN.
- 659 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Source Destination
TOSHIBA
IED1 IN SE R VICE
E R R OR Substation Computer Operator Workstation
CPU CPU
CPU
Data Data
Data
I Port B Port A Port B Port A
R
L Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx
Port B Port A
O Help Cancel ENTER
Rx Tx Rx Tx
F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7
B-Frame B-Frame
A-Frame A-Frame A-Frame
Ring LAN1
A-Frame A-Frame
B-Frame B-Frame B-Frame
TOSHIBA TOSHIBA
IN SE R VICE
IN SE R VICE
E R R OR
E R R OR
Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx
Rx
Tx
Rx
Port A Port B QuadBox QuadBox Port A Port B
LAN module LAN module LAN module LAN module
(C11) (C12) (C11) (C12)
Data Data
I I
R R
L Ring LAN2 L
CPU CPU
O Help Cancel ENTER
O Help Cancel ENTER
IED2 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 IED4 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7
A-Frame
B-Frame
TOSHIBA
IN SE R VICE
E R R OR
Tx Rx Tx Rx
Port A Port B
LAN module LAN module
(C11) (C12)
Data
R
L
CPU
O Help Cancel ENTER
IED3 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7
Figure 11.2-6 HSR example for ring-LAN with DANH

Note: Prohibition symbol () shows the frame is removed by the next terminals.
(ii) LRE switches

The user should set On for both settings [LRE_PortA_EN] and [LRE_PortB_EN] so that the
LRE can duplicate the data for A-Frame and B-Frame.
(iii) Entry Forget Time

Packets are transferred in A-Frame and B-Frame over the LAN. The user should set the
[EntryForgetTime] to delete a duplicated frame listed in the duplicating table. The duplicated
frame will be erased when it stays longer than the setting time.
For Figure 11.2-5 example, the IED1 (Source) duplicates data by the LRE. The duplicated
data (in A and B-Frames) are transferred simultaneously over the LAN_A and LAN_B. In the
meantime, both frames cannot arrive at Substation computer (Destination). If the duplicated
frame is older than the setting [EntryForgetTime], the duplicated frame will be removed.
The [EntryForgetTime] has default 400ms setting, but the user can change it for an
appropriate value among 100 to 10,000ms. The setting value should be taken account of the
- 660 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
time after the entry removed from the duplicate table. The setting value also should be taken
account of the differences of the communication speeds between LANs.
(iv) Supervision
The communication supervisor function is available in PRP and HSR. The user can have
following settings:
Setting [LineCheckInterval]: is the setting of the interval time to send supervision frames
cyclically. The user is able to choice the time among 100ms to 100,000ms, but the
setting has default 2000ms values.
Setting [SV_Dst_MACAddr]: is for a reserved multicast address ’01-15-4E-00-01-xx’. By
default, ‘00’ is set for the ‘xx’. However, if conflict arises, the use can configure to
set any value between 0x00 and 0xFF for the ‘xx’.
Setting [SV_VLAN_EN]: can have On setting when the supervision frame is used in VLAN.
Additionally, the user can set identification specifying the VLAN to which the
supervision frame belongs and the priority of the supervision frame. Use the
settings [SV_VLAN_ID] and [SV_VLAN_Priority]. By default, Off is set for the
[SV_LAN_EN].
(v) Monitor
It is possible for the user to watch the communion statuses about Port A and Port B. Figure
11.2-7 shows the numbers of transferred packets via ports.
RedundantPacketNum
10:48 1/6
PortA_Send 12345
PortA_Recv 12345
PortA_ErrLANID 12345
PortB_Send 12345
PortB_Recv 12345
PortB_ErrLANID 12345
Figure 11.2-7 PRP/HSR status

Note: For the operations, see Chapter User interface: Monitoring sub-menu.
Note: PortA_ErrLANID and PortB_ErrLANID do not increase in HSR, because the both
can receive A-frame and B-frame.
PortA_Send: is the number of sending packets for ‘LAN_A’.
PortA_Recv: is the actual number of receiving packets from ‘LAN_A’.
PortA_ErrLANID: is the number of errors that receives packets coming from ‘LAN_B’
PortB_Send: is the number of sending packets for ‘LAN_B’.
PortB_Recv: is the actual number of receiving packets from ‘LAN_B’.
PortB_ErrLANID: is the number of errors that packets coming from ‘LAN_A’.
- 661 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(vi) IP setting example [RedundantMode]=PRP or HSR

When PRP or HSR is set for the setting [RedundantMode], the user can apply single IP address
in the IED. The table below shows that both Port A and B have the same IP address.
Table 11.2-6 Default IP address for PRP/HSR operation
GR-TIEMS® /
MULTIPLOG®
IP address at
Port A†
192.168.1.11 192.168.1.11 192.168.1.11
IP address at
Port B†
†Note:Address ‘192.168.1.11’ is set as default. Either port A or B is allowed to operate.
- 662 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
11.2.4 Redundant LAN (RSTP operation)

Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP), defined in the IEEE 802.1D, is ready to operate in the
IED, when the user set RSTP for scheme switch [RedundantMode].
(i) Overview
‘Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP)’ is designed to achieve LAN bridge connections in stable.
The RSTP choose one of bridges as the root and BPDU data (called ‘Bridge Protocol Data Unit)
is exchanged periodically over RPST network. Each bridge can listen and learn the BPDU data
so that all bridges in the network can find the shortest path for the root location (we call it
“Path-cost”). Consequently, the RTSP operation clear and recover the network failure if
occurred; no temporary loop will not occur in the network (that is, all terminals can have loop-
free LAN).
(ii) Parameters
When RSTP is set for the [RedundantMode], the user should enter several PSTP parameters
so that the IED is able to enjoy the Spanning Tree topology by the RSTP:
Setting [BridgeHelloTime]: is used to set a BPDU transferring cycle for other terminals
(i.e., BPDU sending interval; they are sent for IEDs, Network bridges, etc.)
Setting [BridgeMaxAge]: instructs the terminal (IED) to listen to a BPDU cyclically. When
a terminal (IED) cannot listen to BPDUs within the setting, the terminal (IED) starts the
computation to make new spanning tree.
Setting [BridgePrioriy]: is allowed for the user to make priority tables in the IEDs. When
a terminal has the smallest number, the terminal can become the root bridge with high
possibility Note that a number can be set in 4096 steps.
Setting [BridgeFedDelay]: is the time to wait for Listening and Learning.
Note: the user shall take the above settings based on the IEEE 802.1w equations below:
2× [BridgeFwdDelay] − 1.0𝑠𝑒𝑐. ≥ [BridgeMaxAge] (11.2-1)
[BridgeMaxAge] ≥ 2 × ([BridgeHellowTime] + 1.0𝑠𝑒𝑐. (11.2-2)
- 663 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Settings [PortA_AdminEdge] and [PortA_AutoEdge] †: are provided for a port, which is

able to operate as ‘Edge’. Edge will not be joined for the spanning tree computation, so
Edge port is able to have the communication immediately when the LAN connection is
started (link-up; Notice that the user has to know that no loop will occur in the network,
in advance). When On is set for the [PortA_AdminEdge], the Port A unconditionally
operates as Edge. PortA can detect Edge port itself, when On is set for the
[PortA_AutoEdge].
Setting [PortA_PathCost]: is used to set the distance for the root bridge (path cost), when
the port is used in the LAN network, actually. As a rule, the setting value depends on the
communication bandwidth.
Setting [PortA_Priority]: is set a priority value for the port. Similar to the setting
[BridgePrioriy], a port having the smallest number can have the highest priority. Note
that a number can be set in 16 steps
†Note: Port A (connection for LAN_A) is located at C11 of IED. The second Port B
(connection for Port B) is located at C12 and has similar settings. See Table 11.2-6
for the IP addresses examples. The user can find the contents about LAN
communication module in Chapter Technical description: Signal processing and
communication module.
- 664 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
11.2.5 Settings
Setting of TCPIP_DRV (Function ID: 230201)
Setting item Range Units Contents Default setting value Notes
IPADDRESS1 0 – 255 – First IP address in the local IED 192.168.1.11
Port A SUBNETMASK1 0 – 255 – Subnet mask 255.255.255.1
GATEWAY1 0 – 255 – Gateway 192.168.1.1
IPADDRESS1 0 – 255 – Second IP address in the local IED 192.168.1.11
Port B SUBNETMASK1 0 – 255 – Subnet mask 255.255.255.1
GATEWAY1 0 – 255 – Gateway 192.168.1.1
Setting of PRP_HSR(Function ID: 342001)

RedundantMode PRP/HSR/RSTP – Selection of either PRP/HSR/RSTP PRP
LRE_PortA_EN Off / On – Administrative action at PortA On
LRE_PortB_EN Off / On – Administrative action at PortB On
P LifeCheckInterval 100-100000 ms How often the node sends PRP_Supervision 2000ms
R 01-15-4E-00-01-00
P SV_Dst_MACAddr to – Destination Mac address of supervision frame 01-15-4E-00-01-00
& 01-15-4E-00-01-FF
H SV_VLAN_EN Off / On – Enable or Disable VLAN of supervision frame Off
S SV_VLAN_ID A 12-bit field specifying the VLAN to which the
0-4094 – 0
R frame belongs
SV_VLAN_Priority 0-7 – VLAN Priority of supervision frame 0
EntryForgetTime 100-10000 ms Entry is removed from the duplicate table 400
BridgeHelloTime 1 - 10 s Sending interval of BPUD from Root Bridge 2
BridgeMaxAge 6 - 40 s Receiving interval of BPUD 20
BridgeFwdDelay 4 - 30 S Waiting times for Listening and Learning 15
BridgePriority 0-61440 (4096steps) - Priority number in Bridge 32768
R PortA_AdminEdge Off / On - Operation of ‘Edge port’ at PortA Off
S PortA_AutoEdge Off / On - Auto detection for ‘Edge port’ at PortA On
T PortA_PathCost 1–200000000 - Root Path Cost at PortA 20000
P PortA_Priority 0 – 240 (16steps) - Priority number at PortA 128
PortB_AdminEdge Off / On - Operation of ‘Edge port’ at PortB Off
PortB_AutoEdge Off / On - Auto detection for ‘Edge port’ at PortB On
PortB_PathCost 1–200000000 - Root Path Cost at PortB 20000
PortB_Priority 0 – 240 (16steps) - Priority number at PortB 128
Setting of REDLAN(Function ID: 340001)

Fixed / Enabling Hot-standby operation
RedundantMode – Fixed
Hot_Standby
Setting of HOTST(Function ID: 341001)

None / Port1 (Port
PrimaryPort – Selection of the primary port None
A) / Port2 (Port B)
DownTime 0 – 10000 ms Determination time for link-down 5
UpTime 0 – 10000 ms Determination time for link-up 5
- 665 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Setting of Net_MONITOR (Function ID: 351001)

NetMonitor_EN Off / On – Enable switch for net monitoring Off

Ping_IP1 0 – 255 – Ping address of first target 0.0.0.0
Ping_IP2 0 – 255 – Ping address of second target 0.0.0.0
Ping_IP3 0 – 255 – Ping address of third target 0.0.0.0
Ping_IP4 0 – 255 – Ping address of forth target 0.0.0.0
Ping_IP5 0 – 255 – Ping address of fifth target 0.0.0.0
Net Ping_IP6 0 – 255 – Ping address of sixth target 0.0.0.0
Monitor Ping_IP7 0 – 255 – Ping address of seventh target 0.0.0.0
Ping_IP8 0 – 255 – Ping address of eighth target 0.0.0.0
Ping_IP9 0 – 255 – Ping address of ninth target 0.0.0.0
Ping_IP10 0 – 255 – Ping address of tenth target 0.0.0.0
Ping_IP11 0 – 255 – Ping address of eleventh target 0.0.0.0
Ping_IP12 0 – 255 – Ping address of twelfth target 0.0.0.0
Ping_Wait 1 – 10 sec Ping packet waiting time 1
Ping Ping_Interval 1 – 120 sec Ping packet interval time 5
Chk_Count 1 – 10 sec Number of ping check count 3
- 666 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
11.2.6 Signals (DataID)

TCPIP_DRV (Function ID: 230201)
3130001001 CH1_USING Port A is operating
3130011001 CH2_USING Port B is operating
3010001150 MAC1_OCT1 MAC1 address octet 1
3110101001 RX1_CNT receive packet counter
3110111001 RX1ER_CNT receive error counter
3111101001 RX2_CNT
3111111001 RX2ER_CNT
3110201001 TX1_CNT send packet counter
3110211001 TX1ER_CNT send error counter
3111201001 TX2_CNT
3111211001 TX2ER_CNT

PRP_HSR (Function ID: 342001)
3211011001 PortA_Send frames sent over A(only HSR tagged or with PRP RCT)
3211021001 PortB_Send frames sent over B(only HSR tagged or with PRP RCT)
3211041001 PortA_ErrLANID frames with wrong LAN id received on Port A
3211051001 PortB_ErrLANID frames with wrong LAN id received on Port B
- 667 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

PRP_HSR (Function ID: 342001)
3211061001 PortA_Recv frames received over Port A(only HSR tagged or with PRP RCT)
3211071001 PortB_Recv frames received over Port B(only HSR tagged or with PRP RCT)

HOTST (Function ID: 341001)
3100061001 Port1_Link LAN_A (Port A) Link Status
3100071001 Port2_Link LAN_B (Port B) Link Status
3100081001 Using_CH LAN (port) information in used

HOTST (Function ID: 341001)
310000E001 CH1_CH_CHG Change to LAN_A (Port A) from LAN_B (Port B)
310001E001 CH2_CH_CHG Change to LAN_B (Port B) from LAN_A (Port A)

NET_MONITOR (Function ID: 351001)
3121001001 NETMONITOR Change to Network monitoring function
3120001460 Ping_IP1 Decision output of PING1 response w.r.t IP1 address
31200A1460 Ping_IP11 Decision output of PING11 response w.r.t IP11 address
31200B1460 Ping_IP12 Decision output of PING12 response w.r.t IP12 address
- 668 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
IEC 61850 communication

Figure 11.3-1 shows a substation automation system (SAS) and a number of IEDs connected
via a Ring LAN (100BASE-FX). The IEDs can have communication with other devices using
the international standard protocol (IEC 61850 standard‡); additionally, the ring network
topology is used to achieve network redundancy in the system. The user should use the GR-
TIEMS to configure the protocol in the IEC 61850 standard. That is, the functions for the
protection, the measurement, monitoring at local and remote, controlling and logging the data
are required to program in the IEC 61850 standard.
Remote
Monitoring
GPS
Communication Substation
Operator Network
Workstation Computer
Engineering
Workstation Printer Router/
Modem
SNTP Ethernet LAN (TCP/IP)
Fiber Optic Ring: 100BASE-FX

CONTROL
MEASUREMENT
GBU GRT GRG GBU GRL GRB GBU GRG GRZ GBU GRT GRL
GOOSE
Figure 11.3-1 SAS network using IEC 61850 protocol
†Note:When applying IEC 61850 communications, the user should map application
signals with the required logical-nodes (LNs) within the IED. In this manual, we
show the application signals as Data IDs; hence, the user is able to connect the
Data IDs with the required LNs using the engineering tool (GR-TIEMS) provided
by Toshiba. For the GR-TIEMS, see Chapter Engineering tool.
‡Note:Before using the IEC 61850 communications feature provided within the IED, the
user should verify its IEC 61850 capability by reviewing both the protocol-
implementation-conformance-statement (PICS) and the model-implementation-
- 669 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
conformance-statement (MICS). The MICS provides the user with information for
the LNs provided within the IED; the PICS provides the user with information to
enable the IED to communicate with both SAS and other devices. See
Appendix:IEC61850 MICS, PICS, PIXIT and TICS. It explains how the user can
obtain this information.
When TCP/IP operates, the IEDs can communicate with SAS computer, operator
workstation (OWS), engineering workstation (EWS), remote monitoring system, SNTP server.
In the SAS, the communication is served with the method of data transfer:
 Report method of sending event messages like measurement, status, alarm and so on
 GOOSE (Generic Object Oriented Substation Event) method of communication
between IEDs like interlock
 Control method like controlling the circuit breaker (CB), the disconnector (DS), the
selector device (43), the transformer tap (TAP) and so on
- 670 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
11.3.1 About protocol

The IED dynamically generates Logical Nodes, Data sets and control blocks defined in CID file
upon boot-up. We shall discuss the configuration procedure to set the data in CID files later.
For the IEC 61850 communication, the IED consists of multiple logical devices and logical
nodes. The user should configure the 61850 Data Model to perform a required function for the
protection and control.
Modular approach achieves data transfer between devices in the IEC 61850 standard. All
function in the IEC 61850 network are grouped into smaller objects called Logical Nodes (LNs),
which contains process objects related data and attributes of a logical device protection and
control function. Logical Node Zero (LLN0) represents specific information of the logical device.
Logical Node Physical Device (LPHD) represents specific information of a physical device. A
generic device is called Physical device (PD). The LPHD contains the properties of the PD. A
specific function in the IED is represented as domain specific LN. The domain specific LN
contains the essential function for target devices in the IEC 61850 network.
LN data model defines the abstract syntax and semantics of the information exchanged
between PDs. The relation between data object classes, data types, data attributes and
abstract data objects are provided in the LN data model. The LN data model is mapped to
Manufacturing Message Specification (MMS) and Generic Object Oriented Substation Event
(GOOSE) functions. Table 11.3-1shows the description of LNs.
Table 11.3-1 LN descripion

Actual device
LN Description
corresponding to LN
Logical node zero represents logical device specific Operation state of BCU
LLNO
information State of 43 switch
Logical node physical device represents physical
LPHD BCU,BCPU
device specific information
Domain Domain specific LN represents protection relay
XCBR,CSWI
specific LN specific function
Generic input output logical node is used if essential Based on client
GGIO
signals are not defined in the extended logical nodes. requirements
All LN classes (LLN0 and domain specific LN) receive the mandatory data of the common LN
except LPHD. Table 11.3-2 exemplifies Function, Logical node and Communication service
used in the IEC 61850 communication.
- 671 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Table 11.3-2 Function groups in 61850

Examples of IED applications Logical
Functions grouped in to provide protection/control node Communication methods
61850 functions for the power defined in serviced in 61850
system 61850
Overvoltage relay (OV) PTOV Buffered Report
Overcurrent relay (OC) PTOC Buffered Report
Monitor
Trip circuit (TRC) XCBR GOOSE
Generic functions SIMG GOOSE
Control SPOS etc. CSWI Enhanced-security Control
Measurement MMXU Unbuffered Report
Measurement
Harmonics MHAI Unbuffered Report
Time Simple Network Time
NA SNTP
Synchronization Protocol
Figure 11.3-2 shows Physical Model, which is equivalent to the IEC 61850 Model. The Physical
Model illustrates that both the IED and its functions are communicating with the SAS using
the Ethernet. The equivalent IEC 61850 Model represents communication at LNs in both the
PD using different Communication services, which we shall discuss in section 11.3.2.
Monitoring
x Control
IED SAS
×
Over current Server / Work
CB Open/Close
relay station
CB Status
Measuring
Monitoring Under voltage

relay Ethernet
Substation
Harmonics
measurement
Measuring
Control / Monitoring Protection function
Physical Model
“Logical Node” “Communication Service”
IEC 61850 Model Physical Device
LN Physical Device
LN LPHD LN
GOOSE
CB XCBR CALH
LN Enhanced-security Control
LN
CSWI
IHMI
LN Buffered Report
LN
CT PTOC
LN IARC
GOOSE
PTRC
LN
Buffered Report
VT PTUV
LN Unbuffered Report
MHAI
LN GOOSE
Binary
SIMG
Input
Figure 11.3-2 Example of Physical model and its equivalent IEC 61850 model
- 672 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(i) Legacy IEC61850 (i.e., 61850 Editon1)

It is early edition for the IEC61850 standard. This edition is bundled in all 61850 software.
(ii) 61850 Edition1 with option

When the IED has the IEC61850 Edition1 with Option, the IED can have private object, which
can handle DataUpdate Trigger. For more information, see section 11.3.9.
(iii) 61850 Edition2

When the 61850 edition2 is available in the IED, the IED has LN LGOS, which shall be used
monitoring of GOOSE message. Note that there shall be one instance of LGOS per GOOSE
subscription for a given GOOSE source.
The user can handle LGOS with signals shown in Table 11.3-3. The signals are provided for
mapping in the 61850 Editon2. Figure 11.3-3 shows an example that they are mapped for the
LGOS.
Table 11.3-3 GOOSE message for the monitor or the diagnostic

Signals (Data ID) Signal names Descriptions
305101 7400006470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR #0 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
… … …
Figure 11.3-3 Example of Editon2 LGOS mapping
- 673 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
11.3.2 Communication service

All essential data transmission methods are summarized in Abstract communication service
interface (ACSI); the IED application from communication stack is separated by the ACSI. The
user can map an interface to a communication stack using Specific communication service
mapping (SCSM).
The LN contains data list with their attributes based on their functionality in SAS. A
data has a well-defined structure and information of SAS. The data and attributes of the LN
in a logical device are exchanged by the communication services according to IEC 61850
protocol. The communication services are implemented by SCSM using Ethernet TCP/IP
protocol.
(i) Report for SAS

In the IED, ‘report’ is a method of sending status data, alarm data, measurement data and so
on. Using server-client communication, ‘Report’ is a ‘data set’ transferred from the IED to the
SAS. The ‘reports’ generated by the predefined ‘triggers’ are issued regularly in interval; the
‘reports’ are also generated upon a change in the event. The ‘reports’ are grouped into two
types: (1) Buffered-report-control-block and (2) Unbuffered-report-control-block. Note that the
system achieved by the unbuffered-report-service cannot start an event recover function
during the communication failure.
(ii) GOOSE for peer-to-peer communication

‘Generic Object Oriented Substation Event (GOOSE) ’ is a faster method to transfer the data
in ‘Generic substation event (GSE)’ between IEDs. In all IEDs, multicast GOOSE message is
published from the ‘GOOSE_control_block (GCB)’. The GOOSE communication methods are
grouped into two: (1) GOOSE publish and (2) GOOSE subscribe.
The data structures of the GOOSE are illustrated in Table 11.3-4; they are grouped for
the system (say, SAS) and other logical devices (say, a relay); they are used in the applications
in the SAS and the IED.
- 674 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Table 11.3-4 Data structures in the GOOSE

Logical Device
Category “System” Other Logical device (e.g., “Relay”)
Data Model System Relay
DataSet “GOOSEDS” LLN0
GGIO1 Ind1..16 GoCB
LLN0 LPHD1
GoCB PTRC
The DataSet “GOOSEDS” is fixed ….
LPHD1
GGIO
Data set Fixed (Not configurable) Configurable
Performance GOOSE data sent communication time GOOSE data sent, communication
is < 3msec time is around 10msec
(iii) System
The data model in the LN named “System” is not allowed to modify (that is, a data model is
fixed; other LN data models are configurable to meet the system requirement). Mapping
signals to the GGIO1 is required when the GOOSE should send data faster.
(iv) Control mode using GOOSE

In the IED, signals generated on the binary output circuit (BO) can be controlled by the SAS,
if the user makes the link between a reviving control message and a control function block that
changes the state of the output element. Four control modes are provided:
DOes: Direct control with normal security (direct-operate)
SBOns: SBO control with normal security (operate-once or operate-many)
DOes: Direct control with enhanced security (direct-operate)
SBOes: SBO control with enhanced security (operate-once or operate-many)
(v) Time synchronization using IEC 61850 protocol / SNTP

SNTP (Simple network time protocol) is used to synchronize clocks of all IEDs in SAS. Time
synchronization is required to maintain common time across all IEDs in the network. This
makes it easier to analyze the Time stamped event data generated by the IEDs in chronological
order. In the system, IEDs are synchronized with the device having precision time source (for
example, GPS).
(vi) File transfer (COMTRADE)

To send data of the disturbance records, file transfer service is used, which is the operated in
COMTRADE format.
- 675 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(vii) Manufacturing Message Specification (MMS)

MMS is an application layer protocol that provides data transmission between IEDs, which
performs monitoring and controlling; it can provide reliability for the data transmission. The
MMS operates in the international standardized messaging system that are made of TCP/IP
and Ethernet.
(viii) Generic Substation Events (GSE)

GSE is a control model defined in the IEC 61850 standard; it provides a fast and reliable
method for transferring the event data over the SAS. The GSE provides facility to transfer the
same event message to multiple physical devices using multicast or broadcast service.
- 676 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
11.3.3 How to manage engineering work

An IED can have multiple logical devices, which represents protection and control functions.
Each logical device has Logical Nodes (LN), Datasets, Report Control Block (RCB), GOOSE
Control Block (GCB), GOOSE Publish and GOOSE Subscribe function. Figure 11.3-4
illustrates the data structure in the IED.
IED
*IEC 61850-7-4
Logical device1 CONTROL
Logical Node
*Set of LN variables REPORT

Logical Node (Event,
VCT Report Measurement)

DataSet
Voltage Control Block
Logical Node
Input / Output Signals
Current
Application
Data Logical device2
BIO ・・・ GOOSE GOOSE
DataSet
Binary
Control Block (outgoing)
Logical Node
Input
Binary
Input
2. Mapping 1. icd(cid)
data
GOOSE
GOOSE subscribe function
(incoming)
3. GOOSE subscribe
Figure 11.3-4 IED Data Structure

To configure an IED data structure, the user should edit the following items using GR-TIEMS.
Figure 11.3-5 shows the flow diagram for IEC 61850 configuration.
 Edit Signal mapping
 Edit Logical Node
 Edit DataSet
 Edit Report Control Block
 Edit GOOSE Control Block
 Edit GOOSE Publish
 Edit GOOSE Subscribe
 Edit Control function
- 677 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Connect PC to IED via LAN or USB
Start GR-TIEMS engineering tool
Add Substation, Voltage level, Bay and IED to the project tree
(→cf. sec. 11.3.3(i))
Select an IED to manage IEC61850 configuration file

(→cf. sec. 11.3.3(i))
Choose a required 61850 edition from the pull-down list

(→cf. sec. 11.3.3(ii))
Import ICD/CID file from the selected IED

(→cf. sec.11.3.3(iii))
Map the signals to Logical Nodes

(→cf. sec.11.3.3(iv))
Edit Data set, RCB and GCB

(→cf. sec. 11.3.3(iv))
Edit signals for GOOSE Publish and GOOSE Subscribe

(→cf. sec. 11.3.3(iv))
Write configured data to IED

(→cf. sec.11.3.3(v))
Figure 11.3-5 Flow diagram
- 678 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(i) Creating and opening project

Creation of project file
If the user has an existing project, it can be found in user’s project folder. If the
user does not have the project, create a new project. Figure 11.3-6 shows how to
open an existing project or create a new project.
Figure 11.3-6 File menu
Selection of IED
When user’s project has been created or is opened, the user can add new IEDs.
Figure 11.3-7 illustrates new IED has been added on the project tree.
Figure 11.3-7 Adding IED
- 679 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(ii) Choice of 61850 edition number

Select IEC 61850 tool from the menu of Configuration tool, as shown in Figure 11.3-8. When
the user can see the edition list†, select a required one from the list‡. Then, the user can see
the edition number at the header on IEC61850 tool screen, or the bottom of the GR-TIEMS
main screen.
Selection of IEC61850 tool
Edition list
Edition 1
Edition1 display
Edition 1-Opetion
Edition1_Option display
Edition 2
Edition2 display
Figure 11.3-8 Choice of IEC61850 edition number

†Note:When the user has purchased the products supporting for Editon1-Option or later
edition, the GR-TIEMS can display the Edition list menu, as shown in Figure
11.3-8; thus, the user should select one from the edition list. However, if neither is
supported in your products, then the menu is not displayed, and default Edition1
will be selected directly. The user can check it through the IED screen if the IED
has Edition1_Option or later edition. See sec 11.3.3(vi) for the confirmation.
Regarding ‘Edition1_Option’, see section 11.3.1(ii) and 11.3.9.
‡Note:Be aware that your edition selection cannot be undone. If you fail to select a
correct one, make the project again. You are not able to change the edition after
the choice.
- 680 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Check to see that four engineering screens are appeared:

 Logical Node Screen
 Signal List Screen
 GOOSE Publish Screen
 GOOSE Subscribe Screen
Figure 11.3-9 IEC 61850 screens
- 681 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(iii) IEC 61850 configuration files

Substation configuration language (SCL) files are generated by the configuration in the IEC
61850 protocol. The SCL files are used to exchange the configuration data in different
manufacture tools. Two types of files are used for exchanging data in Table 11.3-5.
Table 11.3-5 Types of SCL files

SCL file Description
.ICD This file describes the capabilities of an IED. It contains the
IED Capability Description communication data and function of LN in an IED.
.CID Every device configured for IEC 61850 in the GR-TIEMS tool
Configured IED Description generates a CID file. This file is then written to the IED. This
file contains configuration information of the IED to which it is
connected.
Exporting and Importing CID/ICD file

The user can export or / import a CID/ICD file as a CSV file. The user can edit
the exported CSV file using the MS-EXCEL®; the user can import the edited CSV
file back to the GR-TIEMS. Figure 11.3-10 shows the options available to
import/export CID/ICD file. The user can either click the icons on the menu bar
or select the required option form the File menu drop down list.
Import CID/ICD
Export CID
Export ICD
Figure 11.3-10 Export / Import of CID / ICD file
Manage third party CID file

The GR-TIEMS can have third party CID file. In the project tree of the GR-TIEMS,
the user can use the device information for creating a third Party IED. To
configure dataset, RCB, GCB, GOOSE publish and GOOSE subscribe settings
and so on, the data attributes are used after the creation of the data.
Mapping application data in IEC 61850

For any IED, the IEC61850 configuration* is available by default. The user
- 682 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
should check whether the required signals are mapped in the default
configuration.
*Note: There is no default configuration for GOOSE subscription. If GOOSE subscribe

function is required, then a new configuration has to be done.
To verify the signals configured for the IEC 61850 protocol, the user should check
the mapped data, Dataset or Report Control list. If they have existed, the signals
in the signal list should be matched with the attributes of LNs.
Figure 11.3-11 shows an example to check if the signals are mapped in default
configuration. For example, to check for mapping of the primary element signal
in earth fault protection (EF1), follow the steps below:
1. To check if the EF1 signal is already mapped in the LN, key ‘EF1’ under Signal
Name in the Signal List screen.
Mapped data
“EF1” in signal list
Figure 11.3-11 Signal mapping

As shown in the above figure, the “EF1” signal is already mapped to LN
attribute Prot/EF_PTOC1$Str1, general.
2. To check if “Prot/EF_PTOC1$Str1, general” is already added in Dataset. Right

click on “LLN0” and select Edit DataSet, then DataSet List screen appears as
shown in Figure 11.3-12.
- 683 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Figure 11.3-12 DataSet list
As shown in the above figure, “Prot/EF_PTOC1$Str1, general” is already

mapped in the Dataset “STAT1”.
3. To check, if the DataSet is already assigned to RCB, Right click on “LLN0” and
select Edit Report Control, then Report Control List screen appears as shown in
Figure 11.3-13.
Figure 11.3-13 Report Control List

As shown in the above figure, the DataSet “STAT1” is already assigned to
RCB “brcbST-A”.
- 684 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(iv) Mapping signals in signal list to Logical Nodes

The user can add or modify signal mapping to the LN variable. The following section describes
how to modify the mapped data if the user wants to add signals, which are sent using Report
or GOOSE.
Edit Mapping Data

1. Search the signal to be sent from the Signal List window as shown in Figure
11.3-14.
2. Drag and Drop the selected signal to the logical node variable.
Mapped data
Drop
Drag
Signals
Figure 11.3-14 Signal mapping

Note: To optimize the performance of the IED, “Period” should be 100 if the signal is not
required to be sent immediately.
“301001 3110041005 (Qual_Validity)” should be mapped to “q” with Period=100.
“200301 9010001006 (SYS_TIME)” should be mapped to “t”.
Export / Import Mapping Data

The user can export mapped data in the CSV file; the user can edit the exported
CSV file by the MS-Excel® and import back into the GR-TIEMS. Figure 11.3-15
shows the export / import options.
Export Mapping Data

Import Mapping Data
Figure 11.3-15 Export / Import mapping data
- 685 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Edit Logical Node

If the required LN or variable is not available in the IED, the user should follow the
steps below to add or modify the Logical Node:
1. To add new LN or to edit the variable of an existing LN, Right click Prot and
select Add Logical Node or select Edit Logical Node.
2. In the Edit Logical Node screen, select LN Class, Prefix and LN Instance and
check the required variable check boxes as shown in Figure 11.3-16 below.
To Add Logical Node
To add optional variable

To choose a proper Logical Node*
Figure 11.3-16 Add or Edit Logical Node
*Note: Refer to IEC 61850-7-4 to choose a proper Logical Node.
- 686 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Edit DataSet
Dataset can be edited or a new dataset can be added for the LNs as shown in
Figure 11.3-17. For editing the DataSet, follow the steps below:
1. Right click LLNO and select Edit DataSet, DataSet List window appears as
shown in Figure 11.3-17.
2. Choose the variables to be added to the DataSet and click OK.
Users can choose the existing

Dataset*, or enter a new
DataSet name.
Figure 11.3-17 Edit DataSet screen
*Note: 100 DataSets can be added in the DataSet List and each DataSet can have
maximum of 32 elements.
- 687 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Edit Report Control Block (RCB)

Report Control Block (RCB) is used to send report from IEDs to client. If the user
wishes to assign the DataSet to Report Control Block, follow the steps below:
1. Under the LN tree structure, select Prot, Right click LLN0 and select Edit
Report Control. Report Control List screen appears as shown in Figure 11.3-18.
2. Click Add or Edit to add a new dataset or to edit the existing dataset in the
Report Control List window as shown in Figure 11.3-18.
Figure 11.3-18 Edit Report Control screen
- 688 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Edit GOOSE Control Block

GOOSE control block is used to exchange information between IEDs. GOOSE
messages are used for interlock operation between IEDs in order to protect the
electrical system. GGIO1 is used for sending high-speed GOOSE messages. The
DataID assigned to GGIO1 is sent within 3ms.
If the user wishes to assign the DataID for GOOSE operation, follow the steps
below:
1. Click GGIO1 and select Ind1 as shown in Figure 11.3-19.
2. Drag and Drop the required signals to be sent by GOOSE.
Note: The user can assign any signal to GGIO1->Ind1~16 for high-speed GOOSE, as
required.
Drop
Drag
Figure 11.3-19 Signal mapping for high speed GOOSE
As shown in the above figure, signals are assigned to “System/GGIO1$Ind1”. The

user can assign signals to other GGIOs (for example, GGIO2, GGIO3 and so on)
which are not meant for high-speed GOOSE operation.
- 689 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Edit GOOSE Publish

The signals assigned to GGIO1 variables are published automatically by default.
The GGIO1 data set is fixed and is pre-configured in GOOSE Publish screen. If
the user assign signals to other GGIO variables (for example, GGIO2, GGIO3) for
GOOSE publish operation, then the user needs to add those variables in the
GOOSE Publish screen.
Figure 11.3-20 shows the GOOSE Publish screen, where “System” is fixed and is
not configurable for GGIO1, whereas “Ctrl” (Control) and “Prot” (Protection) are
configurable. The user can add new variables from the “Logical Node” screen to
the GOOSE Publish screen using drag & drop* method. Figure 11.3-20 shows an
example for GOOSE Publish, where “System/GGIO2$Ind1$stVal” is added to the
GOOSE Publish screen.
*Note: Only “stVal” and “q” variables can be added to GOOSE Publish screen.
Drag
Fixed
Drop
Figure 11.3-20 GOOSE Publish
- 690 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Edit GOOSE subscribe

GOOSE subscribe function is configured to receive GOOSE messages published
by other IEDs. Figure 11.3-21 exemplifies the GOOSE Subscribe screen; the user
can select the necessary signals to be added. For example, “Bay1 GBU200” is the
current IED; “Bay2 GRZ200” is the other IED. “List 1” is GOOSE publisher of
GRZ200; “List 2” is GOOSE subscriber for GBU200. The user can select the
GOOSE publisher from GRZ200 and add to the GOOSE subscriber of GBU200.
In the example shown below, select the required variable and click Add. Similarly,
the user can delete the variables.
When the user adds a signal to the GOOSE subscribe list from the other IED,
then the same signal is automatically added in the Signal List of the current
IED.
List 2
List 1 List 2
Figure 11.3-21 GOOSE Subscribe

Note: The user can monitor about the GOOSE message on the LCD screen. See sec.
11.3.8.
Edit Control function

The Data IDs (i.e., Signal Number) starting with “5” is used for control function
when the IED has the control function by default. The user should check whether
the required signals are mapped in the default configuration. The user can edit
and add the control signals to the LN as described in section 11.3.3(iv).
In an IED, usually an output Data ID of a protection function is assigned to LN

variable. However, for the control application, the IED is capable of receiving
command from the SAS server. To control a device (such as a circuit breaker), the
input point* (Data ID) in the control application should be configured to receive
commands from the SAS sever (that is, selecting, operating or cancel command).
- 691 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
For example, to let a device execute “Select”, “Operate” and “Cancel” commands
from the sever through “CSWI4” and transmit the information to an IED, the user
should map an input point (Data ID) to several variables of “CSWI4” (See Figure
11.3-22). Mapping period for Control shall be 100.
*Note: For more information of the input points, see chapter General control function or
Control and monitoring application, if available.
SBOW
Mapping Input DataID
Oper
DE V01_ CONTROL_ RE Q
Cancel
Figure 11.3-22 Control function mapping

To complete the setting for control function, after mapping data, the user needs
to set BI, BO† in the GR-TIEMS ->Setting.
†Note:For more information for the BI, BO, see Chapter Technical description: Binary IO
module.
- 692 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(v) Writing the configuration file to IED

When the user has completed editing the configuration files, the user can write the
IEC61850 configuration files, as shown in
Figure 11.3-23 Write to IED

Follow the below steps to write the file in the IED.
1. Save the current project in the PC.
2. Right click on the target IED and select “Write to IED”.
3. Click items to write: Signal list†, GOOSE Subscribe†, CID, and
Mapping Data.
4. Click Write to transfer the files to the IED.
Figure 11.3-24 Selection of CFD writing items

†Note:If GOOSE subscribe operation is required, the user shall select Signal List and
GOOSE Subscribe.
- 693 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
5. Set communication parameters, if needed.
Figure 11.3-25 Communication parameter settings
6. Confirm the edition number written in the IED.
Note: The user can check the edition number through on the LCD screen. Therefore, the
user should confirm the edition number written in the IED too. See sec. 11.3.3(vi)
to show the LCD screen.
- 694 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(vi) Confirmation of the edition number of IEC61850

Figure 11.3-26 shows how to confirm the edition number, if the IED is supporting several
editions of IEC61850. The user can also confirm the version, when the IED is running in
IEC61850 configuration file. For example, in accordance with on the below information of LCD
screen, the IED can handle three editions and the IED is running on the Edition2 (Ed2).
Main Menu Information

10:48 8/10 10:48 1/xx
Record [IED TYPE]
Monitoring G**
Setting -**-***-**-**-**-***
I/O setting -****-***-**
Control [Serial No.]
Time 1234567890
Test [Plant name]
0Information ABCD station
Security Setting [Description]
Login/Logout ABCDEFG
[CP1M Software]
ABCD***
[IEC61850 eng]
G2M8500**
[IEC61850 Support] Information about the IED is
Ed1/Ed1op/Ed2
[IEC61850 Data Model] supporting 61850 editions.
W2GR_200.***
[IEC61850 SCL Ver.] The IED is running based on the
Edition 2(2007B)
[IEC61850 Mapping] edition of 61850 SCL version.
X2GR_00****
[GOOSE Subscribe]
No data
Scroll downward
Figure 11.3-26 Display sample of 61850 edition information

Note: The edition information will be displayed when the IED has several edition
numbers. If the IED does not have Edition 2 or later, the above texts will not be
screened.
- 695 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
11.3.4 Settings for 61850 communications

(i) Setting time for re-sending GOOSE subscribe information
The user can configure the maximum duration time for the case when the IED fails to re-send
GOOSE subscribe information. Set the time in seconds using setting [GOINT].
(ii) Setting for 61850 authentication

When the IED is to be authenticated for starting the IEC 61850 communications, the user
should set scheme switch [850AUT] On.
(iii) Blocking 61850 communication

If the user does not want the IED to start the IEC 61850 communications, the user should set
scheme switch [850BLK] On.
(iv) Setting ‘keep-alive’ time for TCP

When applying IEC 61850 communications with TCP/IP, the user should set a time for the
‘keep-alive’ signal. The user should set the time in seconds using the setting [850KEEPALIVE].
(v) Setting ‘CommTerm’

If the user wishes to receive a ‘CommTerm’ signal carrying an actual operation time from a
device outside the IED, the user should set scheme switch [TCMD] On. Note that the
‘CommTerm’ signal† will not conform to the IEC 61850 standard when the user turns on this
function. That is, this function can be availed on the server communication provided by
TOSHIBA.
†Note:For example, Figure 11.3-27 shows the signal flow between a substation computer
(SC), an IED and a target device (e.g. CB). If the requirement is to close the CB on
request of the SC, the SC will send the operation command “Operate” to the IED;
the time information (T) is also sent along with the operation command. When
receiving the operation command and observing that the CB has closed, the IED
will send a response signal “CommTerm” to the SC along with the time
information. However, this time information is not the actual operation time of the
CB, but the same time information originally sent with the operation command.
The IEC 61850 standard defines this rule; hence, general operations in the IEC
61850 standard are subject to this rule. However, the server communication
provided by Toshiba is able to accept the actual operation time; hence, the setting
‘CommTerm’ is required in the Toshiba communication. The user should also note
that Off is set for the scheme switch [TCMD] as the default setting.
- 696 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Station computer (SC) IED Target device (e.g. CB)
Command “CB closed” Operate+(T)
Command Open
Response
Process Closed
CommTerm+(T) Response
Figure 11.3-27 Example of CB operation flow
(vi) Setting test mode

With regard to the reception test for GOOSE subscribe information, the user can simulate a
bad condition passively by using both GOSNDBLK and GOSUBBLK functions†.
GOOSE sending block (GOSNDBLK)

For the test using the GOOSE sending block function (GOSNDBLK), the user can disable the
IED so that it does not send the GOOSE message. The GOSNDBLK function is useful when
there is a conflict in the communication with another active IED on sending a GOOSE signal.
To block the sending of the GOOSE message, the user should set On for scheme switch
[GOSNDBLK].
GOOSE receive block (GOSUBBLK)

Suppose the user wishes to simulate a bad reception condition with regard to the GOOSE
signal, the user can apply a setting that will prevent an IED from receiving the GOOSE
message from another IED using this test. The user can perform this test using the test setting
On for scheme switch [GOSUBBLK]. Consequently, the IED rejects the GOOSE messages from
other IEDs. The GOOSE receive block function (GOSUBBLK) is also useful for the validation
of switchgear interlocking determination.
†Note:The user may wish to perform bad reception tests from a remote terminal using
the GOSNDBLK function. However, carrying out the GOSNDBLK function at a
remote terminal may influence the overall operation of other IEDs, because
communication packets will not be received from the remote terminal. In order to
avoid the influence, we recommend the user to test bad receptions for a particular
IED using the GOSUBBLK function. As a result, testing will only affect the
particular IED under test i.e. all other terminals will not be influenced by the
- 697 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
tests.
11.3.5 Selection of IEC61850 protocol among IED embedded protocols

Figure 11.3-28 shows the protocol selection menu. The user should set IEC61850 for the [Slave
Protocol] for the communication of the IEC61850 standard. Note that the user has to restart
the IED (i.e., the user has to turns it off, and on) if the user has switched to the IEC61850
protocol from the other†.
SLAVE PROTOCOL
10:48 1/1
Slave protocol +
IEC61850
Figure 11.3-28 Slave protection for the IEC61850 protocol (LCD setting menu)
†Note:The menu is just screened when the IED has IEC61850 and another (e.g.,
IEC60870-5-103). The above one will not be screened when the IED has only the
IEC61850.
11.3.6 How to supervise in 61850 communication

The IED can detect errors on the IEC 61850 communication. The feature is provided separately.
(See Chapter Automatic supervision: Supervision of setting data [Commslv error])
- 698 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
11.3.7 Quality signal of IEC 61850 communication

Quality information and its attributes are defined in the IEC 61850. Table 11.3-6 shows that
the relations between the definitions in the standard and signals prepared in the IED. The
quality attributes are influenced by the errors and alarms occurred in the IED, and the degree
of those errors are standardized by settings ‘Error level’ (see Chapter Automatic supervision).
The quality information is also affected by the test mode executed in the IED (see Chapter
Commissioning and maintenance).
Table 11.3-6 Quality signal defined in IEC 61850-7-3
IED signal3
Quality components definition in IEC 61850-7-3
Qual_Validity
M/ Default
Attribute Name Attribute value O/
C1 value
Validity good / invalid / reserved / questionable M Y

detailQual —
overflow2 Undecided N
outOfRange2 (shall be N
badReference determined N
Packed
oscillatory2 (packed value) M depending N

Failure on an error N
oldData2 condition) N
inconsistent2 N
Inaccurate N
source2 process / substituted M process N
Test True / False M False Y
operatorBlocked 2 True / False M False N
1Note: M/N/O means rules of attributions. If it is Mandatory (M), it shall be used in the
IED. Optionally (O), or conditional mandatory(C) are used depending on the
environment states.
2Note: The IEDs of GR200 series do not carry those attributes—overflow, out Of Range,
oscillatory, old Data, inconsistent, source, and operator Blocked.
3Note: Detail quality attributes (e.g., overflow, outOfRange, etc. marked with “N”) are not
included in the Qual_Validity.
- 699 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(i) Qual_validity
Qual_validity (61850: Signal No. 301001 3110041005) is a signal provided for a common quality
information. It can be useful if some ‘q’ attributes (it’s defined in Quality type) should belong
to a common quality. Both severe and non-severe errors are included; therefore, that signal
value will be changed whenever errors (including alarm and warning incidents) are detected.
In this quality signal, the Detail quality information—defined in the standard—is not set at
all.
Detail quality
Kinds of Value
operatorblocked
Validity
badReference
Good 00
outOfRange
inconsistent
Validity
inaccurate
Invalid 01
oscillatory
overflow
Kinds of
Questionable 11
oldData
source
failure
test
301001 3110041005
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Qual_Validity
220001 3110111001
SERI_ERR
≥1
220001 3110121001
MINR_ERR
201301 3100001190
Test Mode
Figure 11.3-29 Structure of Qual_validity signal

Note:
 If non-severe incidents—such as Minor, Alarm, or Warning error are detected in
the automatic supervisions, the IEC61850 interrupts the Qual_Validity as
‘questionable (i.e., the string of Qual_Validity is 1100000000000)’.
 If severe incidents—such as Serious or Serious (comm) error are detect, the
IEC61850 interrupts the Qual_Validity as ‘invalid (i.e., it is 0100000000000)’.
 If non-severe and sever incidents occur at the same time, the output of the
Qual_Validiy is ‘invalid (i.e., it is 0100000000000)’.
 The test mode will be expressed if the Qual_Validiy has a test-bit (that is,
‘0000000000010’).
 The outputs of MINR_ERR and SERI_ERR come from the MNT_LOGIC function
block (see Chapter Automatic supervision: Supervision of task operation).
 Test function block can output the Test Mode signal (see Chapter Commissioning
and maintenance: Test operations).
- 700 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
11.3.8 Goose monitoring status in 61850 communication

IEDs are able to monitor the communication using GOOSE packets, which other IEDs have
sent their information via the network. If the IED can receive the GOOSE packets, the IED
can display them on the information list. Figure 11.3-30 illustrates an example of the GOOSE
monitoring list; it shows all IEDs have reported good status (OK) message, except one IED.
GOOSE Monitoring
11:12 1/320 Signal nam es
GRZ200_Bay1 OK SUB_ QUAL#0
GRT200_Bay1 OK SUB_ QUAL#1
GRD200_Bay1 OK SUB_ QUAL#2
GRL200_Bay1 NG SUB_ QUAL#3
Screen scroll down GRT200_Bay2 OK SUB_ QUAL#5
GRL200_Bay2 OK SUB_ QUAL#7

Figure 11.3-30 Screen example of GOOSE Monitoring

Note: The IED shall be managed with own subscription information to receive the
GOOSE packets regarding the other IEDs. Thus, the user should edit the
subscription contents (see Figure 11.3-21). The LCD displays the statuses based
on that the user has edited the list of the subscription contents.
Note: Jump to Monitoring sub-menu (see Chapter User interface) to display the GOOSE
mentoring screen. The user can also find the GOOSE information on the test
screen on GR-TIEMS.
On the LCD screen, the user can find either OK or NG message regarding other IEDs. The
OK/NG message is generated with the information of the GOOSE packet received. Table 11.3-7
illustrates the messages displayed on LCD screen and GR-TIEMS screen.
- 701 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Table 11.3-7 GOOSE statutes and signal outputs

Signal values LCD screen messages GR-TIEMS screen messages
0x0000 OK GOOD
0xC000 NG QUESTIONABLE
0xC010 NG QUESTIONABLE | TEST
0xC040 NG QUESTIONABLE | INACCURATE
0xC080 NG QUESTIONABLE | INCONSISTENT
When the user wishes to see GOOSE outputs†, the user can see them by user’s PLC logic, but
the user should build its logic using the PLC function. Table 11.3-8 shows the GOOSE signals,
which the user can select. For example, in order to get the GRL200_Bay1_4 information, the
user should take the GOOSE content using SUB_QUAL#3 output.
Table 11.3-8 GOOSE output signals

Data ID Signal names Descriptions
301101 3100001001 SUB_QUAL#0 GOOSE subscription quality status
~~~ ~~~ ~~~
301101 31013E1001 SUB_QUAL#318 GOOSE subscription quality status
301101 31013F1001 SUB_QUAL#319 GOOSE subscription quality status
†Note: The user cannot view GOOSEs signal lists on the GR-TIMES engineering.
11.3.9 Feature of IEC61850 Edition1 option

The IED can have Private logical nodes, which are provided in Editon1_option, which are
designed in Toshiba private specification exclusively. The user can select and add the following
Data object:
Table 11.3-9 LD class in Editon1 option
LD Class DO Content
GGIO AnInDatUpd DataUpdate Trigger is provided for general Data
Object. The structure is the same as AnIn.
Note: The option1 is designed to transfer the metering values during the fault on the
IEC61850 Edition1.
- 702 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
11.3.10 Setting
Setting of 61850(Function ID: 301001)
s value
GOINT 1 to 120 sec. Maximum GOOSE resend interval 2

850BLK Off/On IEC 61850 enable/disable Off
850AUT Off/On Authentication of IEC 61850 association Off
850KEEPALIVE 1 to 120 sec. TCP ‘KeepAlive’ time for IEC 61850 20
TCMD Off/On Set ‘T’ in ‘CommTerm’ as actual Time Off
- 703 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

 Monitoring point (for Edition 1 and Edition 2)
61850 (Function ID: 301001)
0010001001 61850STAT Status of IEC 61850(T:Running, F:Stop)
3100001440 INCOMINGPKT#0 Incoming packet number from IEC 61850 client#0
3100001441 OUTGOINGPKT#0 Outgoing packet number to IEC 61850 client#0
3100001001 REMOTEPORTNUM#0 Port number of IEC 61850 client #0
3110041005 Qual_Validity IEC 61850 validity of quality
 Monitoring point (for Edition 1 and Editon2)

GOOSE (Function ID: 301101) Note: The GR-TIEMS cannot display SUB_QUAL# signals
3110001001 GOOSESUB_STATUS 0 if all GOOSE being subscribed are not subscribed.
3100001001 SUB_QUAL#0 GOOSE subscription quality status
31000A1001 SUB_QUAL#10 GOOSE subscription quality status
31000B1001 SUB_QUAL#11 GOOSE subscription quality status
31000C1001 SUB_QUAL#12 GOOSE subscription quality status
31000D1001 SUB_QUAL#13 GOOSE subscription quality status
31000E1001 SUB_QUAL#14 GOOSE subscription quality status
31000F1001 SUB_QUAL#15 GOOSE subscription quality status
- 704 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

- 705 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

- 706 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

- 707 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

3100AA1001 SUB_QUAL#170 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100AB1001 SUB_QUAL#171 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100AC1001 SUB_QUAL#172 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100AD1001 SUB_QUAL#173 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100AE1001 SUB_QUAL#174 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100AF1001 SUB_QUAL#175 GOOSE subscription quality status
- 708 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

3100BA1001 SUB_QUAL#186 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100BB1001 SUB_QUAL#187 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100BC1001 SUB_QUAL#188 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100BD1001 SUB_QUAL#189 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100BE1001 SUB_QUAL#190 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100BF1001 SUB_QUAL#191 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100CA1001 SUB_QUAL#202 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100CB1001 SUB_QUAL#203 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100CC1001 SUB_QUAL#204 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100CD1001 SUB_QUAL#205 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100CE1001 SUB_QUAL#206 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100CF1001 SUB_QUAL#207 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100DA1001 SUB_QUAL#218 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100DB1001 SUB_QUAL#219 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100DC1001 SUB_QUAL#220 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100DD1001 SUB_QUAL#221 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100DE1001 SUB_QUAL#222 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100DF1001 SUB_QUAL#223 GOOSE subscription quality status
- 709 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

3100EA1001 SUB_QUAL#234 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100EB1001 SUB_QUAL#235 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100EC1001 SUB_QUAL#236 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100ED1001 SUB_QUAL#237 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100EE1001 SUB_QUAL#238 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100EF1001 SUB_QUAL#239 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100FA1001 SUB_QUAL#250 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100FB1001 SUB_QUAL#251 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100FC1001 SUB_QUAL#252 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100FD1001 SUB_QUAL#253 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100FE1001 SUB_QUAL#254 GOOSE subscription quality status
3100FF1001 SUB_QUAL#255 GOOSE subscription quality status
- 710 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

- 711 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

 Monitoring point (for Edition 2)

GOOSEed2 (Function ID: 305101)
7400006470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#0 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
74000A6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#10 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
74000B6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#11 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
74000C6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#12 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
74000D6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#13 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
74000E6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#14 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
74000F6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#15 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
- 712 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

- 713 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

- 714 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

- 715 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

7400AA6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#170 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400AB6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#171 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400AC6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#172 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400AD6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#173 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400AE6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#174 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400AF6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#175 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400BA6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#186 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400BB6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#187 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400BC6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#188 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400BD6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#189 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400BE6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#190 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400BF6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#191 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
- 716 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

7400CA6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#202 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400CB6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#203 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400CC6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#204 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400CD6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#205 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400CE6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#206 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400CF6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#207 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400DA6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#218 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400DB6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#219 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400DC6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#220 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400DD6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#221 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400DE6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#222 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400DF6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#223 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400EA6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#234 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400EB6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#235 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400EC6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#236 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400ED6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#237 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
- 717 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

7400EE6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#238 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400EF6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#239 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400FA6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#250 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400FB6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#251 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400FC6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#252 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400FD6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#253 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400FE6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#254 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
7400FF6470 SUB_GOOSE_MONITOR#255 Monitor/Diagnose GOOSE Message
- 718 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

- 719 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
IEC 60870-5-103 communication

The IEC 60870-5-103 standard† is one of the communication protocols when measuring data
is required to communicate between the control system and the IED; the communication is
carried out with the RS485 or the Fiber optic interface‡. The following data are transferred by
the IEC 60870-5-103 communication; the user is required create the configuration using the
GR-TIEMS, as cited in the previous section:
• Measured data: current, voltage, active power, reactive power, frequency
• Status data: events, fault indications, etc.
†Note: The selection of the IEC 60870-5-103 communication is dependent on the

ordering code in the communication protocols. For the selection, see Appendix:
Ordering.
‡Note: The selection concerning to the communication module (interface) is
dependent on the ordering in the hardware selection. We shall see the description
with regard to the communication specification in Chapter Technical description:
Signal processing and communication module.
- 720 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
11.4.1 Overview
For the communication in the IEC 60870-5-103 standard, the user should create the data with
regard the protocol, which is grouped into a slave and a master. The user can edit the slave
Data or the master Data using the GR-TIEMS.
(i) Management
As cited earlier, the IEC 60870-5-103 standard is grouped into the slave and the master. In an
IED the user should select either the master mode or the slave mode; the user should edit
either the master data or the slave Data. The both modes can provide the same functions
equally. The GR-TIEMS can provide the user the management means for the following data.
Data management
Import data are provided in the CSV file. The data are categorized as “adding items”,
“editing items”, “deleting items”, and “arranging items”.
Process management
Creation of the new data
Registration, clear, and change name of a slave IED
Registration and clear of signals
Edition of the dialog prototype
External Interfaces
Logging and Access Security
Manage IEC 60870-5-103 display

Tree view style
List view style
(ii) Configuration†
Table 11.4-1 and Table 11.4-2 show that the items should be programmed using the GR-TIEMS.
We shall see how to set and edit data of the IEC 60870-5-103 configuration in section 11.4.5
†Note:Configuration for the master Data is not available in the GR200-serises.
- 721 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Table 11.4-1 Configuration items in IEC 60870-5-103

Items Contents
Type ID(1/2), INF, FUN,
Time-tagged message
Transmission condition(Data ID), COT
INF, FUN, Transmission condition(Data ID),
Time-tagged measurands
COT, Type of measurands quantities
General command INF, FUN, Control condition(Data ID)
Type ID(3/9), INF, FUN, Number of measurands,
Measurands
Type of measurands quantities
Table 11.4-2 Common settings in IEC 60870-5-103

Items Notice
Transmission cycle of
To perform to write the settings in the IED effectively, the
Measurands frame
user should turn off the DC supplying to the IED; then turn
FUN of System function
on the DC again.
Test mode
- 722 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
11.4.2 Requirements in the Master station

In the master station of the IEC 60870-5-103 standard, the following specifications should be
followed in the respective IEDs:
1) Polling cycle: 150ms or longer
2) Timeout time (time to re-sending the request frame to the IED): 100ms
IEC103 master IED
Data request
Polling cycle: Response frame

150ms or more
Data request
Response frame
Figure 11.4-1 Ping cycles between the master station and the IED
- 723 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
11.4.3 Interoperability
The IEC 60870-5-103 protocol provides a physical layer and an application layer for the
communication to secure the interoperability.
(i) Physical layer

Either an electrical or an optical interface† is defined in the IEC 60870-5-103 standard.
Electrical interface in the RS-485

A maximum number of 32 relays is possible in the IEC 60870-5-103 standard.
Optic interface
Several optic communication modules are available
†Note:Either interface is provided with a communication module in the IED; the

specification is discussed separately. See chapter Technical description: Signal
processing and communication module.
(ii) Application Layer

The following layers are provided on the application layer:
COMMON ADDRESS of ASDU
One COMMON ADDRESS OF ASDU (identical with station address)
- 724 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
11.4.4 Communication interface in the IEC 60870-5-103 standard

(i) Spontaneous events
When events are generated in the IED, they are transferred to the master station. The event
transferred is grouped into the Function-type (FUN) and the Information numbers (INF).
(ii) General interrogation1

“GI request” is used when it is required to read the IED status, the Function-types (FUNs),
and the Information numbers (INFs). The status and others are reported during the GI cycle.
(iii) Cyclic measurements

Measured values are cyclically generated using Type ID=3 or 9; they are read in the IED using
a Class 2 poll. The generating rate of new measured values is possible to program.
(iv) Commands2
The user can customize the supported commands. The IED can replay for unsupported
commands using the cause of transmission (COT) negative acknowledgement of a command.
(v) Test mode3

For the process in the control system, both spontaneous messages and polled measured values
are designated by the means in the ‘test mode’ of “CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION”. The means
denoted the ‘test mode’ of “CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION = 7” is normally used for the messages
transmitted with COT=1 (spontaneous) or COT=2 (cyclic).
(vi) Blocking of monitor direction4

If blocking the monitor direction is activated in the protection equipment, all indications and
measurands are never transmitted.
1Note: With regard to the GI list, see Appendix IEC 60870-5-103 interoperability. When
the user wishes to understand the details, refer to the section 7.4.3 of the IEC
60870-5-103 standard.
2Note: For details, refer to the section 7.4.4 of the IEC 60870-5-103 standard.
- 725 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
11.4.5 Editing data of the configuration

(i) Common setting
When the “Common setting” item is selected on the start screen of the IEC 60870-5-103
configuration, the “Common setting” setting screen is displayed. Settings common to each
frame can be performed in this screen.
Setting file remark

The remark of the setting file is used for managing the version of the configuration data file.
A comment with the maximum of 12 characters can be entered in the box. The comment can
be viewed on the IED screen.
Remote operation valid time

When “Time-tagged message” or “Time-tagged measured” occurs during the period from the
receiving any command (which is provided by “General command” setting) to the setting
time of “Remote Operation valid time”, its COT is set to COT=12 (Remote operation). This
setting for the event is enabled when the COT=12 and COT=1 or 11 are checked in “Time-
tagged message” or “Time-tagged measurand” setting. The setting range of “Remote
Operation valid time” is 0 to 60000ms. The default setting is 4000ms. In the following case,
the “Time-tagged measurand” with COT=12 occurs.
Remote operation valid time = TR[ms]
Command Time tagged measurand with

receive COT=11, 12 checked occurs.
Figure 11.4-2 Time setting for the remote operation
Local operation valid time

When “Time-tagged message” or “Time-tagged measurand” occurs during the period from
the start of local operation (described in 11.4.5(ii)-7) to the setting time of “Local Operation
valid time”, its COT is set to COT=11 (Local operation). This setting for the event is enabled
when the COT=11 and COT=1 or 12 are checked in “Time-tagged message” or “Time-tagged
measurand” setting. The setting range of “Remote Operation valid time” is 0 to 60000ms.
The default setting is 4000ms. In the following case, the “Time-tagged message” with
COT=11 occurs.
Local operation valid time = TL[ms]
(Off-delay time after finish of local operation)
Start of Finish of Time tagged measurand with

local operation local operation COT=1, 11, 12 checked occurs.
Figure 11.4-3 Time setting for the local operation
Measurand period
This setting is used to set the transmission cycle (s) of Measurand frame. The setting range
is 0 to 60s. If no Measurand frame is provided by measurand setting, this setting is disabled.

- 726 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Function type of system functions

This setting is used to set Function type (FUN) of System functions† (INF=0 to 5). The FUN
can be set individually per the frame provided. When clicking the “Change all FUNs”,
confirmation dialog box appears. When clicking “OK”, FUNs of all frames are changed to
these setting values.
†Note:We mean the following frames: end of general interrogation, time
synchronization, reset FCB, reset CU, start/restart, power on.
Signal No. of test mode

This setting is used to set a Data ID in the test mode. The relevant Data ID should be
selected from the signal list, which can be found in Chapters “Relay” or “Control and
monitoring” applications. Usually, the default setting is not changed.
The test mode in the IEC 60870-5-103 standard is enabled by the operation on the IED
screen or the GR-TIEMS. When the set signal changes “ON” and Time-tagged message or
Time-tagged measured of spontaneous cause (COT=1) or measurand frame or cyclic
transmission (Type ID=3 or 9) occurs, its COT shifts COT=7 (Test mode).
Signal No. for relative time and fault number

This setting is used to set the trigger signal which is attached the frame of Type ID=2 or 4.
The trigger signal is selected from the signal list. (This setting is not related to the frame of
Type ID=1.)
The time (ms), which is from the establishment of a set signal to the detection of a
status change, is added the set frame as RET value. FAN (Fault number), attached the
frame of Type ID=2 or 4, has the same number during the set signal ON. (Whenever the set
signal is ON, the FAN increases.) When setting to “0”, RET value is always “0” (RET=0).
The default setting is set to the OR signal of elements operation. When Type ID=2 frame is
provided with OC trip as send condition, for example, the time from OC element operation
to OC tripping is attached to the frame as RET. Though, the RET of GI frame is always “0”
in spite of this setting.
In the following case, T1[ms] is attached to i as RET, T2[ms] is attached to ii ,

and T3[ms] is attached to iii , as shown in Figure 11.4-4.
T1
T2
T3 t
Signal “ON” Type ID=2 Type ID=4 Signal “OFF” Type ID=2
i occurs ii occurs iii occurs
Figure 11.4-4 Occurrences after the signal “ON”

- 727 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(ii) Setting of time-tagged messages

In Time-tagged message frame in the IEC 60870-5-103 standard, event information and
status information are responded for Class 1 request from the upper system (station). The
GR-series relay can provide event information and status information by Time-tagged
message frame about the signal assigned to a Data ID of the signal list.
When the “Time-tagged message” tab is selected, the “Time-tagged message” setting
screen is displayed on the start screen.
Figure 11.4-5 Time-tagged message in the GR-TIEMS
Type ID=1 (Time-tagged message) or Type ID=2 (Time-tagged message with relative
time) can be set in this screen. In one frame of Time-tagged message, the Type ID, INF,
FUN, DPI and COT must be set and the maximum 256 frames of Time-tagged message can
be set. The information number of the frame is determined by the INF setting. The most
left item “No.” is only serial number and can be skipped.
Common address is linked with the address setting† in the IEC 60870-5-103 standard.
†Note:For more information, see Appendix: IEC 60870-5-103 interoperability.
In the transmission format of Type ID=1 (Time-tagged message) and Type ID=2 (Time-
tagged message with relative time), customized items are shown in Table 11.4-3 and Table
11.4-4.
Table 11.4-3 Time-tagged message (Type ID=1)
Oct. Item Value Remarks
1 Start 68H
2 Length 14
3 Length 14
4 Start 68H
5 Control field 08H+ACD+D
FC
6 Address 1-254 Setting from the relay
7 Type identification (Type ID) 1 Customized by GR-TIEMS
8 Variable structure qualifier 81H
9 Cause of transmission (COT) 1/9/11/12 Customized by GR-TIEMS

- 728 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

10 Common address of ASDU Linked with Address
1-254
setting
11 Function type (FUN) 0-255 Customized by GR-TIEMS
12 Information number (INF) 0-255 Customized by GR-TIEMS
13 Double point information (DPI) -/(0)/1/2/(3)/DP Customized by GR-TIEMS
14 Millisecond (low)
0-59999
15 Millisecond (high)
16 Minutes + Invalid flag (MSB) 0-59+80H
17 Hours + Summer time flag (MSB) 0-23+80H
18 Supplementary information (SIN) 0-255
19 Checksum
20 End 16H
Table 11.4-4 Time-tagged message with relative time (Type ID=2)

1 Start 68H
2 Length 18
3 Length 18
4 Start 68H
08H+ACD+D
5 Control field
FC
10 Common address of ASDU 1-254 Linked with Address setting
13 Double point information (DPI) -/(0)/1/2/(3)/DP Customized by GR-TIEMS
Trigger condition to
14 Relative time (RET) 0-65535 calculate RET is customized
by GR-TIEMS.
Trigger condition of FAN
16 Fault number (FAN) 0-65535 increment is customized by
GR-TIEMS.
18 Millisecond 0-59999
22 Supplementary information (SIN) 0-255
23 Checksum
24 End 16H
Description
Any comment with maximum 16 characters can be entered. This setting does not affect the
function of IEC 60870-5-103 communication.
Signal name / signal description

The Data ID† (Sig. No.) showing the status of the frame is set from the signal list of the

- 729 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
relay. If the setting value (signal No.) is “0”, all setting items related events are disable and
the frame is not provided.
†Note:A relevant Data ID is required to select; the description is obtained
automatically.
Type ID
Type ID=1 (Time-tagged message) or Type ID=2 (Time-tagged message with relative time)
is selected to set the frame type. It is recommended that the frame related to status is set
to Type ID=1 and the frame related to faults is set to Type ID=2. In Type ID=2, the trigger
signal for the relative time should be set. For the setting, see Section 11.4.5(i).
INF
Information number (INF) of the frame is set. The INF can be set to 0 to 255. When the
standard frame is provided, the INF according to the Appendix† is recommended. If the
frame out of standard is provided, the INF should be set referring Table 11.4-5 and the
Appendix†.
Table 11.4-5 INF category of Monitor direction
INF Category
0 to 15 system functions
16 to 31 Status
32 to 47 Supervision
48 to 63 earth fault
64 to 127 short circuit
128 to 143 auto-reclosure
144 to 159 Measurands
160 to 239 not used
240 to 255 generic functions
†Note:See Appendix: IEC 60870-5-103 interoperability: Semantics of Information
number.
FUN
Function type (FUN) is set referring to Table 11.4-6. The FUN can be set to 0 to 255. When
clicking the “Change all FUNs” on the Common setting screen, all FUNs are changed to the
setting values at Common setting.
Table 11.4-6 Semantics of Function type
0 - 127 private range
128 distance protection
129 not used
144 not used
145 not used
160 overcurrent protection
161 not used
176 transformer differential protection
177 not used
192 Line differential protection

- 730 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
193 not used

208 not used
209 not used
224 not used
225 not used
240 not used
241 not used
254 Generic function type
255 Global function type
DPI/Off, DPI/On
Double-point information (DPI) is set using the menu as follows:
DPI/Off: The frame is transmitted when the DPI/Sig.No. signal is OFF.
DPI/On: The frame is transmitted when the DPI/Sig.No. signal is ON.
Note: If selecting “-”(=don’t care), the frame is not transmitted even though the
DPI/Sig.No. signal set change to the set status. In general, the frames related
to tripping such as “Time-tagged message” and Time-tagged measurand”, etc.,
which are not an object of GI (General Interrogation), are not transmitted
when the DPI changes “On” to “Off”. In this case, set the “DPI/Off” to “-”(=don’t
care).
Note: When selecting “DP” for both “DPI/Off” and “DPI/On”, the DPI number is
transmitted as the number (=0/1/2/3) using the same information number
(INF). Regarding the frame related to a device control, the “undefined/failed”
status may be required in addition to the “close/open” status for the extension.
When selecting “DP”, “undefined(00)/close(01)/open(10)/failed(11)” status is
applied in the same information number (INF).
COT
Cause of Transmission (COT) of the frame is set. Not only one COT but also two or more
COT can be selected each No. (frame). COT setting pattern and COT supplemented the
frame are as follows:
(1) If two or all of COT=1, 11 and 12 are checked per No., each frame of the No. become
the following conditions.
Table 11.4-7 COT
COT Conditions
COT=12
TR[ms] after receiving any command of the IEC 60870-5-1031
(remote operation)
COT=11
TL[ms] after Key operation on the relay front panel1
(local operation)
COT=1 Conditions except above COT=11 and 12
(spontaneous) The relay is in test mode2, the COT=1(Spontaneous) is shifted to 7(Test mode)
1Note: TR and TL are set in Common setting.
2Note: Settings of the test mode is described later.
(2) If one of COT is specified per No., the frame is always supplemented with the

- 731 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
specified COT regardless of cause of transmission.

(3) If COT=9 is specified, the frame become the object of GI and is sent back when the
GI request frame is received. Time-tagged message is sent back in order of No.
instead of order of INF.
Table 11.4-8 shows the summary of (1), (2) and (3) above.
Table 11.4-8 COT setting pattern and COT supplemented frame
COT setting
pattern COT supplemented frame when status changes GI
1 9 11 12
 Always “1” No
 Events don’t occur. Yes
  Always “1” Yes
  “11” (cause at local) or “1” (other causes) No
  “12” (cause at remote) or “1” (other causes) No
“11” (cause at local) or “12” (cause at remote) or “1”
  (other causes) No
   “11” (cause at local) or “1” (other causes) Yes
   “12” (cause at remote) or “1” (other causes) Yes
   (other causes) No
   (other causes) Yes
    (other causes) Yes
Always “1” in spite of cause of event occurrence No
Note: When being in the test mode, the COT=1(Spontaneous) is shifted to 7(Test
mode)

- 732 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(iii) Setting for time-tagged measurands

For Time-tagged measurand frame in the IEC 60870-5-103 standard, event information
supplemented with numerical information are responded for Class 1 request from upper
system (station). The GR200-series relay can provide event information, which is converted
the numerical information in metering table according to user setting weight, by using
Time-tagged measurand frame about the signal assigned (i.e., the Data ID).
When the “Time-tagged measurand” item is selected on the GR-TIEMS, the setting
screen is displayed.
Figure 11.4-6 Time-tagged measurands
Type ID=4 (Time-tagged measurand with relative time) can be set in this screen. In
one frame of Time-tagged measurand, the INF, FUN, Sig No., Rev, COT and SCL must be
set and the maximum eight frames of Time-tagged measurand can be set. The information
number of the frame is determined by the INF setting. The most left item “No.” is only serial
number and can be skipped.
Common address is linked with the address setting† of the relay.

†For more information, see Appendix: IEC 60870-5-103 interoperability.
In the transmission format of Type ID=4 (Time-tagged measurand with relative time),
customized items are shown in Table 11.4-9.
Table 11.4-9 Time-tagged measurand with relative time (Type ID=4)

1 Start 68H
2 Length 20
3 Length 20
4 Start 68H
5 Control field 08H+ACD+DFC
7 Type identification (Type ID) 4

- 733 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

13 Short-circuit location (SCL) Customized by GR-TIEMS
Trigger condition to calculate RET is
17 Relative time (RET) 0-65535
customized by GR-TIEMS.
Trigger condition of FAN increment is
19 Fault number (FAN) 0-65535
customized by GR-TIEMS.
21 Millisecond 0-59999
25 Checksum
26 End 16H
Description
function in the IEC 60870-5-103 communication.
Signal name / signal description

The Data ID† (Sig. No.) showing the trigger of the frame is set from the signal list. If the
setting value (signal No.) is “0”, all setting items related the “Time-tagged measurand” are
disable and the frame is not provided.
The frame cannot be set to the object of GI and cannot be transmitted even though the
status of set signal changes from ON to OFF. If the metering values at the newest fault
record are transmitted as the status change frame, select the Data ID of “F.Record_DONE”
or “FAULT RECORD DONE” in the signal list of the relay.
†Note:A relevant Data ID is required to select in the signal list. The description of the
Data ID is obtained automatically on the setting.
Inverse
This setting is used to invert the logic of the signal assigned to the Data ID above. If the
frame is transmitted when the signal assigned to the Data ID is ON, leave the Inverse check
box blank. If the frame is transmitted when the signal is OFF, click the inverse check box
to be marked with “”.
Type ID
Type ID=4 (Time-tagged measurand with Relative time) is fixed. In Type ID=4, the trigger
signal for the relative time should be set. For the setting, see Section 11.4.5(i).
INF
standard frame is provided†, the INF according to the standard is recommended. If the fame
out of the standard is provided, the INF should be set referring Table 11.4-3 and the
Appendix†.

- 734 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
FUN
Function type (FUN) is set referring to the Table 11.4-4. The FUN can be set to 0 to 255.
When clicking the “Change all FUNs” on the Common setting screen, all FUNs are changed
to the setting values at Common setting.
COT
Cause of Transmission (COT) of the frame is set. Not only one COT but two or more COT
can be selected each No. (frame). COT setting pattern and COT supplemented the frame
are according to Table 11.4-6. Though, the COT=9 (General Interrogation) cannot be
selected.
SCL Measurement Name/Measurement Description

The Data ID corresponding to a measurand is required to select.
Coefficient
Set the conversion coefficient, multiplied the power system quantities by, using floating-
point number. The SCL is a value which the power system quantity specified as above is
multiplied by this setting value.

- 735 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(iv) Setting for General commands

Using General command frame in the IEC 60870-5-103 standard, relay applications can be
performed by the remote control. For the GR200-series relay, a Data ID in the signal list is
controlled when receiving general command frame.
When the “General command” item is selected on the GR-TIEMS, the setting screen
is displayed.
Figure 11.4-7 “General command” setting screen
The frame of Type ID=20 (General command) and Command ACK/NACK can be set
in this screen. In one command of General command, the INF, FUN and DCO must be set.
The Command ACK/NACK is for detail setting and must not be set usually. (If do not check
the Ext check box, the setting of Command ACK/NACK is disabled and the Command ACK
and Command NACK respond according to the default response.)
The maximum 32 frames of General command and Command ACK/NACK can be set.
The information number of the frame is determined by the INF setting. The most left item
“No.” is only serial number and can be skipped.

In this setting screen, if a Data ID except “0” is set to “Sig Off” and “Sig On”, the
command at INF setting value is provided and Command ACK or Command NACK is sent
back when receiving the command from upper station. If both “Sig Off” and “Sig On” have
“0”, the fixed length NACK is always sent back then and the command is not provided.
Though the command is provided, however, Command NACK is always sent back and
no control is performed in the following cases:
(1): When receiving any General command from the upper station before Command
ACK/NACK is sending back from the relay.
(2): Under Monitor direction block condition (“IECBLK” setting is “blocked”.) when
receiving General command.
(3): When receiving an incorrect value of DCO of General command, that is DCO is neither
“1” nor “2”.
General command receiving sequence is as follows:

- 736 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Primary Secondary
station station
General
Command
ACK
Class 1
Command
ACK/NACK
Figure 11.4-8 Command receiving sequence
In the transmission format of General command (Type ID=20), customized items are
shown in Table 11.4-10.
Table 11.4-10 General command (Type ID=20)

1 Start 68H
2 Length 10
3 Length 10
4 Start 68H
5 Control field 73H/53H
7 Type identification (Type ID) 20
9 Cause of transmission (COT) 20
11 Function type (FUN) 0-255
12 Information number (INF) 0-255 Customized by the GR-TIEMS
13 Double command (DCO) 1/2
14 Return Information identifier (RII) 0-65535
15 Checksum
16 End 16H
In the transmission format of Command ACK/NACK (Type ID=1), customized items

are shown in Table 11.4-11. The frame type of Command ACK/NACK is Time-tagged
message.
Table 11.4-11 Time-tagged message (Type ID=1)
1 Start 68H
2 Length 14
3 Length 14

- 737 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

4 Start 68H
Control field 08H+ACD+
5
DFC
9 Cause of transmission (COT) 20/21 Customized by GR-TIEMS
Customized by GR-TIEMS.
12 Information number (INF) 0-255 Answer back of receiving
command INF
Double point information (DPI) Answer back of receiving
13 1/2
command DCO
14 Millisecond (low)
0-59999
15 Millisecond (high)
Supplementary information (SIN) Answer back of receiving
18 0-255
command RII
19 Checksum
20 End 16H
Any comment with maximum 16 characters can be entered. This setting does not affect
the function in the IEC 60870-5-103 communication.
Description
function in the IEC 60870-5-103 communication.
Type ID
Type ID=20 (General command) is fixed.
INF
standard frame is provided†, the INF according to the standard is recommended. If the
frame out of standard is provided, the INF should be set referring Table 11.4-12 and the
appendix†.
Table 11.4-12 INF category of Monitor direction
INF Category
0 to 15 system functions
16 to 31 status
32 to 239 not used
240 to 255 generic functions

- 738 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
FUN
Function type (FUN) applied to a command response frame is set referring to Table 11.4-13.
The FUN can be set to 0 to 255. When clicking the “Change all FUNs” on the Common
setting screen, all FUNs are changed to the setting values at Common setting.
DCO/Sig Off Name, Signal Off Desc., DCO Signal On Name, Signal On Desc.,
Inverse
“Sig off” and “Sig On” are used to set the Data ID of control object in General command.
(Hereafter, these are described as “command output signal”.) “Inverse” is used to reverse
the logic when controlling the command output signal.
When the command output signal is treated as two signals (Sig Off  Sig On), the
control scheme is shown as the following table by the combination of the receiving command
DCO and Inverse setting.
For example, when the DCO=Off command is received under “Inverse” no-checked,
the command output signal of “Sig Off” is controlled to “1”. “Sig On” is not controlled.
Table 11.4-13 Control Scheme of Command Output Signal (Sig Off  Sig On)
“Inverse” checked Checked No-checked
Control object
Signal specified Signal specified Signal specified Signal specified to
Receiving
to Sig.off to Sig.on to Sig.off Sig.on
command DCO
Off Controlled to “1” Not controlled Controlled to “0” Not controlled
On Not controlled Controlled to “1” Not controlled Controlled to “0”
When the command output signal is treated as one signal (Sig Off  Sig On), the
control scheme is shown in Table 11.4-14. For example, when the DCO=On command is
received under “Inverse” checked, the command output signals of “Sig On” and “Sig Off” are
controlled to “0”. “Sig On” is not controlled.
Table 11.4-14 Control Scheme of Command Output Signal (Sig Off = Sig On)
“Inverse” checked Checked No-checked
Control object
Signal specified Signal specified Signal specified Signal specified
Receiving
to Sig.off to Sig.on to Sig.off to Sig.on
command DCO
Off Controlled to “0” Controlled to ”1”
On Controlled to ”1” Controlled to “0”
When setting the “Sig Off”, “Sig On” and “Inverse”, check the specifications of the
command output signals of communication and others, and then set them.
Valid time

- 739 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Valid time is used to set the time (ms) to control the command output signal. The command
output signal is controlled based on the control scheme described in section 11.4.5(iv)-5 for
the setting time after receiving General command, and is reset by communication side after
the set time. However, if the time is set to “0”, the control is not reset and is continued. Set
the time with a margin for interface of other applications.
ACK/NACK / Ext
This setting is used to enable the extension setting of Command ACK/NACK response
scheme or not. If “Ext” is not specified (Ext check box is not checked.), Command NACK (in
cases of (1)–(3) of the section 11.4.5(iii) and Command ACK (in case of others) respond
according to the default response. If “Ext” is specified, the setting of Command ACK/NACK
described later is enabled and the response scheme can be customized. When required the
stricter handshake by using Command ACK/NACK, it is better to specify the “Ext”. This
setting is not influenced by the control scheme of the command output signal.
Signal ACK Name/Signal ACK Desc./Signal NACK Name/Signal NACK

Desc./Inverse
“ACK Sig” and “NACK Sig” are used to set the Data ID for judgment of command response.
(Hereafter, these are described as “command response signal”.) “Inverse” is used to reverse
the logic of the command response signal, and “Timeout” is used to set the timeout time for
judgment of command response. Under specified “Ext” (Ext check box is checked.),
Command ACK or Command NACK responds based on the logic of command response
signal against General command.
When the command response signal is treated as two signals (ACK Sig  NACK Sig),
the judgment scheme is shown as the following table by the combination of the receiving
command DCO and Inverse setting. The judgment timing is when (1), (2), (3) or (4) in Table
11.4-15 is established. If the neither (1), (2), (3) nor (4) is established (that is ACK sig =
NACK Sig = 1 or ACK sig = NACK Sig = 0) for the period from the command receiving to
the timeout setting time, Command NACK responds at that time.
For example, when the DCO=On command is received under “Inverse” no-checked,
Command ACK responds in case of “ACK Sig = 0” and NACK Sig = 1”.
Table 11.4-15 Judgment Scheme of Command Response (ACK Sig  NACK Sig)
“Inverse” checked No-checked Checked
Command response signal

(1)NACK Sig=1 (2)NACK Sig=0 (3)NACK Sig=1 (4) NACK Sig=0
Receiving
ACK Sig=0 ACK Sig=1 ACK Sig=0 ACK Sig=1
command DCO
Command NACK Command ACK Command ACK Command NACK

Off
responds. responds. responds. responds.

On
When the command response signal is treated as one signal (ACK Sig = NACK Sig),
the judgment scheme is shown as the following table by the combination of the receiving
command DCO and Inverse setting. The judgment timing is after the timeout setting time

- 740 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
from the command receiving.
For example, when the DCO=On command is received under “Inverse” checked,
Command ACK responds in case of “ACK Sig = NACK Sig = 1” after the timeout setting
time.
Table 11.4-16 Judgment Scheme of Command Response (ACK Sig = NACK Sig)
“Inverse” checked No-checked Checked
Command response signal

(1)NACK Sig= (2)NACK Sig = (3) NACK Sig = (4) NACK Sig =
Receiving
ACK Sig = 0 ACK Sig = 1 ACK Sig = 0 ACK Sig = 1
command DCO
Command ACK Command NACK Command NACK Command ACK

Off

On

- 741 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(v) Setting of Measurands

In Measurand frame of the IEC 60870-5-103 standard, numerical information such as power
system quantities are responded for Class 2 cyclic request from upper system (station). The
GR200-series relay can provide numerical information, which is converted the numerical
information in metering table according to user setting weight.
When the “Measurands” item is selected on the start screen of the GR-TIEMS, the
setting screen is displayed.
Figure 11.4-9 “Measurands” setting screen
Figure 11.4-10 “Measurand1” setting screen
In one frame of Measurand, the Type ID, INF, FUN settings, and its position setting
(Measurement Name/Measurement Description/Lower Limit/Upper Limit/Coefficient)
must be set. “No.” shows the position of power system quantity. (For details, describe later.)
The maximum 16 items of Measurands and the maximum 32 power system quantities per
one frame can be set.


- 742 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
In the transmission format of Measurand I (Type ID=3) and Measurand II (Type ID=9),
customized items are shown in Table 11.4-17.
Table 11.4-17 Measurand I／Measurand II (Type ID=3／9)

1 Start 68H
2 Length 8+2N
3 Length 8+2N
4 Start 68H
08H+ACD+
5 Control field
DFC
7 Type identification(Type ID) 3/9 Customized by GR-TIEMS
9 Cause of transmission(COT) 2/7
11 Function type(FUN) 0-255 Customized by GR-TIEMS
12 Information number(INF) 0-255 Customized by GR-TIEMS
Measurand with quality
13+2(N-1) Customized by GR-TIEMS
descriptor(MEA) + IV + OV
15+2(N-1) Checksum
16+2(N-1) End 16H
Description
function of the IEC 60870-5-103 communication.
Type ID
Type ID=3 (Measurands I) or Type ID=9 (Measurands II) can be selected to set the frame
type of Measurand frame. In general, the maximum MEA number of Type ID=3 uses 1 or 2
or 4 and that of Type ID=9 uses 9. (However, the maximum MEA number of both types can
extend up to 32 in the GR-TIEMS. In this case, there are no difference between the
transmission format of Type ID=3 and that of Type ID=9.)
INF
Information number (INF) of the Measurand frame is set. The INF can be set to 0 to 255.
When the standard frame† is provided, the INF according to the standard is recommended.
If the fame out of standard is provided, the INF should be set referring Table 11.4-3
and the appendix†.
FUN
Function type (FUN) of the Measurand frame is set referring to the Table 11.4-4. The FUN
can be set to 0 to 255. If click the “Change all FUNs” on the Common setting screen, all
FUNs are changed to the setting values at Common setting.

- 743 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Name
Any comment with maximum eight characters can be entered. This setting does not affect
the function in the IEC 60870-5-103 communication.
Measurement Name/Measurement Description

The Data ID corresponding to a measurand is required to select.
Lower Limit/Upper Limit

The established condition of IV flag is set per MEA. IV flag is established when MEA value
exceeds a Lower limit or an Upper limit. If Lower limit = Upper limit =0 is set, The IV flag
is always established and it becomes MEA=0.
Table 11.4-18 MEA Bit Arrangement
High Octet Low Octet
Sign B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 RES IV OV
If MEA value exceeds the full scale (if the value expressed as B1 to B12 is less than
4096 or more than 4095), the MEA is clamped at 4096 or 4095 and OV flag is established.
However, if IV flag is established, OV flag is not established.
Coefficient
Set the conversion coefficient, multiplied the power system quantities by, using floating-
point number. The MEA is a value which the power system quantity specified as above is
multiplied by this setting value.

- 744 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
11.4.6 Protocol selection

As shown in the setting menu for the Communication (Figure 11.4-11), the user should set
IEC103 for the [Slave Protocol] so that the communication in the IEC60870-5-103 standard is
carried out in the IED. Note that the restarting the IED (i.e., resetting the IED power) is
required after the user turns to the IEC60870-5-103 protocol.
SLAVE PROTOCOL
10:48 1/1
Slave protocol +
IEC103
Figure 11.4-11 Slave protection for the IEC103 protocol (on IED setting menu)
Note: The menu is just screened when a couple of communication protocols are
embedded in the IED.
- 745 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
11.4.7 Tips for settings

During the GR-TIEMS operation, we recommend the user to choose an appropriate file-name
for the setting-file. That is, for example, when the user creates the setting file for an IED at
the first time, the user is required to make it with the name “IED#1-model_01.map”. Likewise,
the user can create the other setting file with the name “IED#2-model_01.map” for the other
IED. If the user is required to modify the “IED#1-model_01.map”, the user should replace the
name by new name “IED#1-model_02.map”. Consequently, the user can easily discriminate the
setting files in the IED model2 (i.e., IED#1-model or IED#2-model) and the revision number
(i.e., 01 or 02).
Figure 11.4-12 shows the editing screen of the GR-TIEMS; the screen has a remark field
concerning to the IEC 60870-5-103 communication. Note the available length of the remark
field is up to 12 in the one-byte character. The remark field is utilized for the control of the
setting data.
Figure 11.4-12 Common setting screen in the GR-TIEMS

Note: We recommend to make the backup file of the setting data.
- 746 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
11.4.8 Setting
Setting of 103_SLAVE (Function ID: 304001)
s value
103ADDR 0 to 254 Slave address 2

103TST Off/On – IEC 60780-5-103 test mode Off
103BLK Off/On – IEC 60780-5-103 slave block Off
- 747 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

 Monitoring point
103_SLAVE (Function ID: 304001)
3100011001 103SLV STAT 103SLV STATUS
8020011001 AG1STAT Active Group 1 status
3120001001 AGNUM Active Group Number
8030001001 GPCMD00STAT General Purpose Command 0 status
8A300A1001 GPCMD10STAT General Purpose Command 10 status
8B300B1001 GPCMD11STAT General Purpose Command 11 status
8C300C1001 GPCMD12STAT General Purpose Command 12 status
8D300D1001 GPCMD13STAT General Purpose Command 13 status
8E300E1001 GPCMD14STAT General Purpose Command 14 status
8F300F1001 GPCMD15STAT General Purpose Command 15 status
8A301A1001 GPCMD26STAT General Purpose Command 26 status
8B301B1001 GPCMD27STAT General Purpose Command 27 status
8C301C1001 GPCMD28STAT General Purpose Command 28 status
8D301D1001 GPCMD29STAT General Purpose Command 29 status
8E301E1001 GPCMD30STAT General Purpose Command 30 status
8F301F1001 GPCMD31STAT General Purpose Command 31 status
3110001001 LEDRST_STAT LED Reset status
- 748 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
USB communication
The IED front panel has an USB receptacle in a B-type to connect with a local PC for
engineering. The user can select a transmission speed, which is shown below, by the operation
of the setting menu, as shown in Figure 11.5-1.
USBCOM
10:48 1/1
USBCOM_BRATE_SW +
921.6kbps
Figure 11.5-1 USB setting menu (on IED screen)
Setting of USB (Function ID: 231701)

s value
USBCOM_BRATE_SW 115.2 / 921.6 kbps Baud rate Switch for USB Com port 921.6
- 749 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
RS485 communication
When the IED has an RS485 module for the communication, the user can select and set its
transmission and error check parity codes. Figure 11.6-1 shows the setting screen when the
RS485 module (#1) operates.
RS485
10:48 1/2
RS485_1_BRATE_SW +
19.2kbps
RS485_1_BRATE_SW +
NONE
Figure 11.6-1 RS485 setting menu (on IED screen)
Setting of RS485 (Function ID: 232201)

s value
Module RS485_1_BRATE_SW 9.6 / 19.2 / 38.4 /57.6 / 115.2 kbps Transmission speed 19.2
#1 RS485_1_PAR_SW NONE / ODD /EVEN – Parity check code NONE
- 750 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
12 User interface
Outline 752 Time sub-menu 793
-Front panel 752 -Clock 793
-LCD screen 752 -Time zone 794
-LEDs 752 -Time synchronization 795
-Function Keys 753 -Display format 797
-Operation Keys 753 -Summer time(DST) 799
HMI operation 755 Test sub-menu 801
-General operation 755 -Test screen 801
-Main-menu and sub-menu 755 -Test mode screen 801
Record sub-menu 758 -Test flag enabling screen 805
-Fault record 758 -Mode change screen 806
-Event record 761 -Signal monitoring screen 806
-Disturbance record 763 Information sub-menu 807
Monitoring sub-menu 765 Security setting sub-menu 808
-Metering 765
-Binary I/O 765
-Communication 766
-Relay elements 768
-Statistics 769
-Goose monitoring 771
-Diagnostics 772
Setting sub-menu 773
-Setting method 773
-Confirmation dialog 777
-On/Off 780
- Group setting 780
-Function key 782
I/O setting 786
-AC analog input 786
-Binary input 787
-Binary output 789
-LED 791
- 751 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Outline
Users can perform maintenance on the IED from the front panel. Monitoring is also possible
locally by using a PC connected through the USB cable. This section discusses the
configuration of the front panel and the basic configuration of the screen-menu hierarchy of
the Human Machine Interface (HMI).
(i) Front Panel

The front panel is provided with a screen (LCD Screen), 26 light emitting diodes (LEDs), 11
operation keys, seven function keys (in the later section the function keys are referred to as F1
to F7.), monitoring jacks and a USB receptacle.
LEDs
LCD screen
Operation keys
Function keys
with LEDs
Monitoring jacks with USB

LEDs (A, B, and C)
Figure 12.1-1 Front Panel

(ii) LCD screen
The LCD screen provides the user with detailed internal information provided by the IED such
as records, monitoring and settings. Normally, the LCD screen appears blank unless an
operation key is pressed, by pressing any of the operation keys, the LCD screen will display
the top menu. If the top menu is shown on the LCD screen, the user can turn off the screen
backlight by pressing the operation key ◄. When operation is idle for some time, the screen
backlight turns off. By pressing any key except the CLEAR key, the backlight turns on, and
the previous menu will be displayed on the LCD screen.
(iii) LEDs
As shown in Table 12.1-1, 26 LEDs, each having signal labels and colors, are defined:
- 752 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Table 12.1-1 LED labels and their color

LED User configurable
Label Color Remarks
No. setting2
Lit up when the IED
1 IN SERVICE Green N/A
is in service.
Lit up when an error
2 ERROR Red N/A
is occurred.
31 N/A N/A ✔
41 TRIP Red ✔ Default

51 N/A N/A ✔
61 TEST Yellow ✔ Default

71 N/A N/A ✔
. N/A N/A ✔ .
. . . . .
. . . . .
. . . . .
261 N/A N/A ✔
1Note: LEDs are user-configurable. Users can use them with or without latch function.
2Note: For setting LEDs, see section 12.6(iv).
(iv) Function keys

Seven function keys (F1 to F7) have the following two features.
 Skip to a specific screen directly, set by the user.
Used for skipping to a set page by pressing the function keys. Press again to return to the
previous page. Set by pressing the function key for 2 seconds on the selected page. (See
section 12.5(v)-1)
 Test signal generator.
A convenient method that can be used for operating binary signals. Set by assigning the
signal in the settings menu. (See section 12.5(v)-2)
Table 12.1-2 Features of Function keys (F1 to F7)
Labels on Keys Feature and Remark
LED† Skip to a specific screen directly.

Control for the operation of pre-assigned
F1 to F7 binary signals.
†Note: The user can program to light the LEDs by itself. Setting are similar to the ones
of the Table 12.1-1 (For setting, see section 12.6(iv)). Note the manufacture
programs to light the respective LEDs in default prior to shipping.
(v) Operation keys

By using the operation keys, the user can display records, relay status etc. Input of setting
- 753 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
values is performed using these keys. The operation keys are tabulated in Table 12.1-3.
Table 12.1-3 Features of operation keys
Label Functions and Remarks
Move the cursor up / Scroll up / Count up1
Move the cursor down / Scroll down / Count down1
Previous page / Move to the left digit.
Next page / Move to the right digit
ENTER Enter edit mode, if item is active / Executive operation / Accept alarm
message.
CANCEL Exit edit mode / Cancel operation.
CLEAR Clear all latched LEDs (Except [In service] and [Error] LEDs).
HELP Display the help message, for cases where the active item has a help
function.
L
R
Switch between Local mode and Remote mode.
I Control key. (Close)
O Control key. (Open)
MENU Switch for using MIMIC2 mode or for returning back to the menu screen.
MIMIC
This key is not provided for standard LCD screen2.
1Note: To scroll up or scroll down quickly, press keys ▲ or ▼ respectively along with key
►.
2Note: The MIMIC key is only available when Large LCD screen is mounted on the front
panel. The pixel resolution (dot) is 240(W) × 320(H). Note that this mode is only
provided when the user has programmed MIMIC feature using GR-TIEMS. See
chapter Engineering tool: MIMIC configuration tool.
- 754 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
HMI operation
By using the LCD screen, the operation keys and the function keys, the user can access
functions such as recording, monitoring, relay setting and testing.
Note: The operation of the LCD screen is more or less common in all IED models.
However, the contents of the LCD screen depend upon the IED model.
(i) Screen and LEDs during normal HMI operation

When the IED is operating normally, the green "IN SERVICE" LED is lit. Press any key except
the key CLEAR; and then the backlight of the LCD screen is turned on1. If the IED detects a
fault, the fault message will appear in a pop-up screen. At the same time, the “TRIP”2 LED is
lit.
1Note: If another fault occurs during the period of time for which the previous fault pop-
up screen, is displayed, the previous fault information will be overwritten by the
new fault on the pop-up screen. Press the key CANCEL to remove the pop-up
screen for “Latest Fault” to return to the previous screen.
2Note: Press the key CLEAR to turn off the LED.
(ii) Main-menu and Sub-menu

 Main-menu
If LCD screen is turned off, press any key, except the key CLEAR. “Main-Menu" will
appear on the LCD screen (see the left of Figure 12.2-1). To go to the next level of
hierarchy, press the key ►.
 Sub-menu
An example of setting the sub-menu screen is shown in the right of Figure 12.2-1. By
using the key ▼ and the key ▲, the user can move the cursor downward or upward
to view all of the items. By using the keys ◄ ►, the user can return to a previous
level of hierarchy or go to the next level of hierarchy.
 Screen structure
The screen is composed of a title area and a data area. The title area is fixed on the
top two lines. The first line displays the screen title. The second line on the left-hand
side displays local time, whereas the right-hand side displays either the current line
number, cursor position number and the maximum page number, or the item number.
For example, the display “2/4” means the current cursor position, which is at the
second item of a maximum of four items.
- 755 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Main Menu OC
10:48 1/8 10:48 2/4
_Record > OC1EN +>
Monitoring > On
Setting > _OC2EN +>
I/O Setting > On
Time > OC3EN +
Test > Off
a. Main Menu b. Sub Menu
Figure 12.2-1 LCD screen for Main-Menu and Sub-menu
Figure 12.2-2 shows the menu hierarchy. The menu consists of a Main-Menu and several Sub-
menus. Table 12.2-1 shows the configuration of Main-Menu.
Main Menu Sub-menu Sub-menu Sub-menu Main Menu Sub-menu Sub-menu Sub-menu
Main Menu Record Record List Main Menu
Fault Record Clear Records
Event Record1 Record List Statistics Counter (GCNT01~
Clear Records Setting
Event Record2 Record List Function Key F1 Key ~ F7 Key
Clear Records
Event Record3 Record List Diagnostics Detail (CHK_ACC1, etc.)
Clear Records
Disturbance Record Record List
Clear Records
Clear All Records
Monitoring Metering IO Setting AC Analog Input AI#1 (CH1~)
KCT Slot#n Binary Input Slot (#1~)
Binary I/O LAN Binary Output Slot (#1~)

IEC61850
Communication LED LED (3~26)
DIF FEQ F1 Key ~ F7 Key
REF VPH
Relay Element OC ICD
EF VTF
EFIn
OCN
THM
BCD Time Clock ActiveSyncSrc
CBF
OV Time Zone
OVG SNTP
OVS Time Sync
BI SYNC
UVS
Display Format IRIG SYNC
Statistics Power Value Summer Time

Demand
Peak Demand
Counter Test Test Mode Test Option
GOOSE Monitoring Accumulated Time Function Test
Binary Input (Slot#n)
Diagnostics Binary Output (Slot#n)
Setting Record Fault Record Mode Change

Event Record
Metering Disturbance Record Signal Monitoring
Communication LAN
USBCOM
RS485
IEC61850 Information
IEC103 SLV
Protection Security Setting Change Password

Common PLC-TIMER
Active Group
Copy Group(A->B)
Security
Group1
Group2
Group3 Login / Logout
Group4
Group5
Group6
Group7
Group8
Control Control Common

Reset Control
Figure 12.2-2 Menu hierarchy
- 756 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Table 12.2-1 Outline of Main-menu and their purposes

Sub-menu Purpose and functions
The "Record" sub-menu provides fault record, event record and disturbance
record. The user can erase each record individually or can clear all records at
Record
the same time. The user can assign event records to three distributed “Event
Record” sub-menus as required.
The "Monitoring" sub-menu displays all of the status values for the IED, such
Monitoring as Metering, Binary I/O, Communication, Relay Element, Statistics,
Interlock, GOOSE Monitoring, and Diagnostics.
The "Setting" sub-menu is used to view or change the settings: Record,
Setting
Metering, Communication and Protection.
The "I/O Setting" sub-menu is used to view or change the settings for inputs,
I/O Setting configurable binary inputs, configurable binary outputs, and configurable
LEDs.
The "Time" sub-menu provides settings for calendar clock, time zone, the
Time
source of time synchronization and the display format of the calendar clock.
The "Test" sub-menu is used to set and to test the following: a trip circuit,
Test forcible operation of binary outputs from the IED, time measurement of
variable timers, and observation of the binary signals in logic circuits.
The "Information" sub-menu displays information about the IED such as
Information
hardware, software, communication, etc.
The "Security Setting" sub-menu is used to change the password and access
Security
level, providing high levels of security by assigning users different levels of
Setting
access.
When the "Security Setting” sub-menu is ON, the “Login/Logout” sub-menu
Login/Logout
is displayed.
- 757 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Record sub-menu
The Record sub-menu is composed of several sub-menus: fault record, event record,
disturbance record, and clearance of all records. In each sub-menu, the user can clear records
separately.
Record
10:48 1/6
_Fault Record >
Event Record1 >
Event Record2 >
Event Record3 >
Disturbance Record >
Clear All Records +
Figure 12.3-1 Display of Record

Table 12.3-1 Operation and display in Record sub-menu
Display Operation key Remark
[>] ► Press the key ► to go to the sub-menu
[+] ENTER Press the key ENTER for executing “Clear all records”.
Confirmation dialog screen will be displayed.
(i) Fault Record
The “Fault Record” sub-menu displays the date and time of fault occurrence, fault phase,
tripping mode, and the power system quantities, as shown in Figure 12.3-2.
Fault Record Fault Record#1

10:48 1/6 10:48 1/222
#1 2012-07-25 > 2012-07-25
10:48:21.223 10:48:21.223
#2 2012-07-21 > Phase AB
01:15:55.018 Trip 1,2,3,4,5,6
#3 2012/07/21 > OC1
13:11:29.621 2012-07-25
Fault Record List Details of Fault Record
Figure 12.3-2 Display of Fault Record
- 758 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Display fault record

Figure 12.3-3 shows how to see the screen of fault record list and the details.
Record
1). Move cursor to the Fault Record menu and press ►.
10:48 1/6
_Fault Record >
Event Record 1 >
Event Record 2 >
Event Record 3 >
Clear all Records +
Fault Record
2). Fault Record screen is displayed. Press ► at the Record List sub
10:48 1/2 menu.
_Record List >
Clear Records +
Fault Record
3). Fault record list in the Fault Record screen is displayed. Move
10:48 1/6 cursor to a desired item by ▲ or ▼ and press ►.
#1 2012-07-25 >
10:48:21.223
#2 2012-07-21 >
01:15:55.018
#3 2012/07/20 >
13:11:29.621
Fault Record#2
4). Press ▲ or ▼ to move display items.
10:48 1/222
2012-07-21
01:15:55.018
DIFZA
Figure 12.3-3 Fault Record
- 759 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Clear fault record

Figure 12.3-4 shows the steps to clear the fault record list.
Record
1). Move cursor to the Fault Record menu and press ►.
10:48 1/6
_Fault Record >
Event Record 1 >
Event Record 2 >
Event Record 3 >
Clear all Records +
Fault Record
2). Move cursor to Clear Records and press ENTER.
10:48 1/2
Record List >
_Clear Records +
Fault Record
3). Clear records if ENTER is pressed. Back to display of “Fault Record”
directly if CANCEL is pressed.
Clear records?
ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
Figure 12.3-4 Clear Record
Clear all information in Fault Record

Figure 12.3-5 shows the steps to clear all the records.
Record
1). Move cursor to the Clear all Records sub menu and press ENTER.
10:48 1/6
Fault Record >
Event Record 1 >
Event Record 2 >
Event Record 3 >
_Clear all Records +
Clear Records
2). Clear all records if ENTER is pressed. Back to display of “Record”
directly if CANCEL is pressed.
Clear All records?
ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
Figure 12.3-5 All clear
- 760 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(ii) Event Record

The “Event Record” sub-menu provides three parts namely, “Event Record1”, “Event Record2”
and “Event Record3”. In each Event Record sub-menu, the data and time, device name, and
the operation of the device are displayed as shown in the example below.
Event record1
10:48 1/3
#1 2012-07-25
10:48:21.223
Set.Group change
2
#2 2012-07-25
10:20:21.021
Figure 12.3-6 Display of Event Record
Display of Event Record

Figure 12.3-7 shows the steps to display and erase event records. To clear all records, refer to
section (i)-3.
Record
1). Move cursor to Event Record 1, 2, or 3 sub menu and press ►.
10:48 2/6
Fault Record >
_Event Record 1 >
Event Record 2 >
Event Record 3 >
Clear all Records +
Event Record1
2). Event Record screen is displayed. Press ► at the Record List sub
10:48 1/2 menu.
_Record List >
Clear Records +
Event Record1
10:48 1/3
#1 2012-07-25
10:48:21.223
Set. Group change
2
#2 2012-07-25
10:20:11.021
Figure 12.3-7 Display events
- 761 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Clear of Event Records

section (i)-3.
Record
1). Move cursor to Event Record 1, 2, or 3 sub menu and press ►.
10:48 2/6
Fault Record >
_Event Record 1 >
Event Record 2 >
Event Record 3 >
Clear all Records +
Event Record1
2). Event Record screen is displayed. Press ENTER at the Clear
10:48 1/2 Records sub menu.
Record List >
_Clear Records +
Event Record1
3). Clear all Event records if ENTER is pressed. Back to display of
Event Record directly if CANCEL is pressed.
Clear records?
ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
Figure 12.3-8 Clear Event
- 762 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(iii) Disturbance Record

Disturbance Records can be displayed graphically on the PC screen by using GR-TIEMS. The
IED screen displays only the recorded date and times, which are stored in the IED as the entire
disturbance data, as shown in the following example:
Disturbance record
10:48 1/6
#1 2012-07-25
10:48:04.223
#2 2012-07-21
01:15:55.018
#3 2012-07-20
13:11:29.621
Figure 12.3-9 Display of Disturbance Record

The following shows the steps to display and erase disturbance records.
Display of disturbance Record

section (i)-3.
Record
1). Move cursor to Disturbance Record sub menu and press ►.
10:48 2/6
Fault Record >
Event Record 1 >
Event Record 2 >
Event Record 3 >
_Disturbance Record >
Clear all Records +
Disturbance Record
2). Disturbance Record screen is displayed. Press ► at the Record List
10:48 1/2 sub menu.
_Record List >
Clear Records +
Disturbance Record
10:48 1/6
#1 2012-07-25
10:48:21.223
#2 2012-07-21
01:15:55.018
#3 2012-07-20
13:11:29.621
Figure 12.3-10 Disturbance
- 763 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Clear of Disturbance Records

Figure 12.3-11 shows the steps to display and erase disturbance records. To clear all records,
refer to section (i)-3.
Record
1). Move cursor to Disturbance Record sub menu and press ►.
10:48 2/6
Fault Record >
Event Record 1 >
Event Record 2 >
Event Record 3 >
_Disturbance Record >
Clear all Records +
Disturbance Record
2). Disturbance Record screen is displayed. Press ENTER at the
10:48 1/2 Clear Records sub menu.
Record List >
_Clear Records +
Disturbance Record
3). Clear all Disturbance records if ENTER is pressed. Back to
display of “Disturbance Record” directly if CANCEL is pressed.
Clear records?
ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
Figure 12.3-11 Clear records
- 764 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Monitoring sub-menu
“Monitoring” sub-menu is used to display the current status of the IED. The data is updated
every second on the LCD screen. The user can view the following functions from the Monitoring
sub-menu:
i. Metering sub-menu
ii. Binary I/O sub-menu
iii. Communication sub-menu
iv. Relay Elements sub-menu
v. Statistics sub-menu
vi. GOOSE Monitoring sub-menu
vii. Diagnostics sub-menu
(i) Metering
The value and direction of current, voltage etc. can be displayed. The user can change the units
as required by using the appropriate setting. Figure 12.4-1 shows an example of the Metering
sub-menu.
Metering
10:48 1/25
Va
23.231kV 121.34deg
Vb
23.200kV 120.14deg
Vc
22.713kV 121.50deg
Figure 12.4-1 Display for Metering
(ii) Binary I/O

“Binary I/O” sub-menu can be used to display the respective status of the binary IO module
circuits. The LCD displays the binary input or output signal number, the signal name1
assigned to the circuits of the binary IO modules and their status in a line. The status for the
binary output circuit is shown by a logic level (“1” or “0”). Figure 12.4-2 provides an example
for binary IO module at IO#1 (Slot#1).
Slot#1
10:48 1/12
BI1 0 CB1 contact
BI2 0 DC power sup.
BI3 0 Trans-T Comm1
BI3 0 Trans-T Comm2
BI4 0 ARC-Block1
BI5 0 Indi. Reset
Figure 12.4-2 Display of Binary I/O status

1Note: The user can set the names of binary signals with GR-TIEMS.
- 765 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Figure 12.4-3 shows the steps required to display the status of the binary inputs and outputs.
Main Menu Monitoring Binary I/O

10:48 2/9 10:48 2/14 10:48 1/4
Record > ► Statistics > ► _Slot#1 >
_Monitoring > Metering > Slot#2 >
Setting > _Binary I/O >
IO setting >
◄ ◄ Slot#3 >
Operation Time > Slot#4 >
Time > Relay Element >
Test > Communication >
► ◄
Slot#1 Slot#1
10:48 2/12 10:48 1/12
BI1 0 CB1 contact ▲ BI1 0 CB1 contact
BI2 0 DC power sup. BI2 0 DC power sup.
BI3 0 Trans-T Comm1 BI3 0 Trans-T Comm1
▼
BI3 0 Trans-T Comm2 BI3 0 Trans-T Comm2
BI4 0 ARC-Block1 BI4 0 ARC-Block1
BI5 0 Indi. Reset BI5 0 Indi. Reset
Figure 12.4-3 Steps to display Binary I/O status
(iii) Communication
The “Communication” sub-menu provides several sub-menus as shown in Figure 12.4-4.
Sub-menu sub-menu sub-menu

Monitoring Communication LAN
61580STAT
Figure 12.4-4 Menu hierarchy for Communication sub-menu

The display structure for each sub-menu is explained in the following sections:
LAN sub-menu: the communication port name and status are shown in a line.
When the IED has single communication module, or when the IED has
communication modules but a communication module is allowed to operate in
the IED, an operation status of the communication ports is shown, as shown
in Figure 12.4-5.
“LAN” sub-menu can display “PortStatus” and “NetMonitor status”. If

“NetMonitor” is running (active), the LCD screen will display a “>”mark.
- 766 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
LAN
10:48 1/2
PortStatus >
NetMonitor Inactive
Figure 12.4-5 Display for LAN

If the status of a port is “UP”, it means that the communication link is working;
if the status of a port is “DOWN, it means that the LAN cable is not connected to
the port.
The following two sub-menus are displayed to show the communication status
when the IED has dual LAN communication modules.
PortStatus PortStatus
10:48 1/2 10:48 1/2
*Port1_Link UP *Port1_Link UP
Port2_Link DOWN Port2_Link UP
Port 1(Port A) is connected. Port 1&2 (Port A&B) are connected.

Port 2(Port B) is not connected.
Figure 12.4-6 Communication status
IEC61850 sub-menu: IP addresses of the devices connecting in IEC61850 are

shown in a straight line. Configurations of those IP addresses are available
with GR-TIEMS.
- 767 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
61850STAT
10:48 1/6
255.255.255.255:0
0/ 0
255.255.255.255:0
0/ 0
255.255.255.255:0
0/ 0
255.255.255.255:0
0/ 0
255.255.255.255:0
0/ 0
255.255.255.255:0
0/ 0
Figure 12.4-7 Display of IEC61850

(iv) Relay Elements
The names of relay elements and statuses of the operation are shown in respective columns.
To view all of the relay elements, the user has to press keys ▲ and ▼.
OC
10:48 1/25
OC1-A 0
OC1-B 0
OC1-C 0
OC2-A 0
OC2-B 0
OC2-C 0
Figure 12.4-8 Displaying Relay Elements

Figure 12.4-9 shows the steps necessary to display the status of the measuring elements.
Main Menu Main Menu Relay Element

10:48 2/9 10:48 2/9 10:48 1/4
Record > ► Metering > ► CBF >
_Monitoring > Binary I/O > EFP >
Setting > Communication > _OC >
IO setting >
◄ _Relay Element > ◄ EF >
Time > Statistics >
Test > GOOSE Monitoring >
► ◄
OC
10:48 1/25
OC1-A 0
OC1-B 0
OC1-C 0
OC2-A 0
OC2-B 0
OC2-C 0
Figure 12.4-9 Steps to display the status of measuring elements

- 768 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(v) Statistics
“Statistics” sub-menu has several sub-menus.
Sub-menu Sub-menu Sub-menu

Monitoring Statistics Power value
Counter
Accumulated Time
Operation Time
Operation Counter
Total Time
Figure 12.4-10 Menu hierarchy for Statistics

For each statistical item, with the exception of displaying their status, the data can be
reset or revised.
Power Value sub-menu: With regard to statistics item, the name and its value
are shown below. The user can also change the unit of each value by the
setting1. It is allowed to reset or revise the statistics value2.
Power Value
10:48 1/4
Wh+ +
0.0MWh
Wh- +
0.0MWh
varh+ +
0.0Mvarh
Figure 12.4-11 Display of Power Value

Table 12.4-1 Operation means for data reset or data revise
Step Display Operation key Remark
1 [>] ► Press ► key to go to the sub-menu
Press ENTER key to execute reset or revise. After
2 [+] ENTER
executing, a confirmation dialog screen displays.
1Note: In order to secure the reliability, the reset and revision items are controlled by the
vendor.
2Note: The number of digits for the power value can be reduced based on the units kW,
MW and kvar+. For instance, when the power is measured as "123,456kW" then it
is displayed as "123MW". If this value has to be changed then the user can key in a
new compensated value. For example, if "78MW" should be displayed on the IED
screen even though the measured value is "123,456kW" then the user should key in
the new value of "78MW". Note that the compensated value "78MW" is "78,000kW",
- 769 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
and it is not "78,456kW" or "123,456kW". Note that the compensated value will be
affected when there is a change in CT ratio setting. That is, when the user key in a
value of "78MW" for the CT ratio of "2000:1" and later when the CT ratio is changed
from "2000:1" to "4000:1", then the value is displayed as "156MW" on the IED screen.
Therefore when the CT ratio setting is changed, the user should key in the value of
"78MW" again to display the compensated value.
Counter sub-menu: the name and number of statistical items are shown in
two lines. When an item is revised, a [+] mark is shown at the end of the first
line.
Counter
10:48 1/32
0
0
0
Figure 12.4-12 Display for Counter sub-menu

To change the counter number, follow the steps as shown in Figure 12.4-13.
- 770 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Main Menu Monitoring Statistics

10:48 2/10 10:48 1/8 10:48 1/3
Record > ► Metering > ► Power value >
_Monitoring > Binary I/O > _Counter >
Setting > Communication > Accumulated Time >
◄ ◄
IO Setting > Relay Element >
Time > _Statistics >
Test > GOOSE Monitoring >
► ◄
Counter Counter Counter

10:48 1/32 10:48 1/32
Change? ENTER Count1(No Assign) + ENTER Count1(No Assign) +
ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No 0 0
Count2 (No Assign) + Count2(No Assign) +
1 0
Count3 (No Assign) + Count3(No Assign) +
0 0
Revise the data
CANCEL Counter
ENTER 10:48 1/32
Count1(No Assign) +
0
The data has been revised. 1
0
Figure 12.4-13 Steps for changing the counter number
Accumulated Time sub-menu: Total time for which the IED has been running
is shown in “d (date) h (hour) m (minute)” format. The user can clear the total
time value by clear operation (reset), which is shown in Figure 12.4-14.
Accumulated Time Accumulated Time

10:48 1/1
_ACT_TIME + Reset?
CANCEL
234d 23h 39m ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
ENTER
Figure 12.4-14 Display for Accumulated Time
(vi) GOOSE monitoring

The status of the GOOSE subscription information is shown for each record-unit, as shown in
Figure 11.3-30. Each IED name (for example, “GRx200-11-603”) has been defined in the
- 771 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
GOOSE subscription information.
GOOSE Monitoring
10:48 1/3
GRx200-11-603 OK
GRx200-21-603 OK
GRx200-31-603 NG
Figure 12.4-15 Display for GOOSE Monitoring
(vii) Diagnostics
Error message will be published in Automatic supervision. If there are no errors, an error
message is not displayed.
Diagnostics
10:48 1/2
PLC data error
>
Data(commslv) error >
Figure 12.4-16 Display of Supervision items
- 772 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Setting sub-menu
"Setting" sub-menu is used to view and change settings for the following functions: Recording,
Metering, Communication interface, Relay application, and Monitoring. In this section, we
show the “Setting method for elements, switches, and list selection”, “Protection setting”, and
others. Furthermore, this section describes the confirmation of setting, and the “On/Off”
function that is used to hide some unnecessary settings.
Note: The meaning of settings and their setting process are beyond the scope of this
section. The figures in this chapter are examples only. The user should confirm
setting values after their values are changed.
(i) Setting method

In “Setting” sub-menu, four setting modes are provided as follows:
1. Element Setting Mode
2. Switch Setting Mode
3. List Selection Mode (items selection)
4. Signal Selection Mode (signal selection)
Element Setting Mode: The “Element Setting Mode” is used for setting
numerical values. For each setting, the setting name, setting value and the
unit are displayed in two lines. Figure 12.5-1 provides an example of the
element setting mode.
OC1 OC1
10:48 2/8 10:48 2/8
_OC1-b + *OC1-b +
123.00000 124.00000
OC1-c + OC1-c +
1.00000 1.00000
OC1-angle + OC1-angle +
45 deg 45 deg
Before Changing Setting After Changing

Setting
Figure 12.5-1 Example of Element Setting Mode
To begin the setting process, press the key ENTER. Once the setting has been
changed, the [*] mark will appear alongside the name of the setting. Once the
change is canceled or confirmed, the [*] mark will disappear automatically. For
the setting of a value, follow the steps as shown in Figure 12.5-21:

- 773 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
OC1 OC1 OC1

10:48 2/8 10:48 2/8 10:48 2/8
_OC1-b + [ENTER] OC1-b + [◄] x 5 OC1-b +
123.00000 123.00000 123.00000
OC1-c + OC1-c + OC1-c +
[CANCEL] [►] x 5
1.00000 1.00000 1.00000
OC1-angle + OC1-angle + OC1-angle +
45 deg 45 deg 45 deg
[▲] [▼]
[CANCEL] [CANCEL]
OC1 OC1
OC1
10:48 2/8 10:48 2/8
10:48 2/8
*OC1-b + [▼] *OC1-b + [ENTER] *OC1-b +
124.00000 124.00000
124.00000
_OC1-c + [▲] OC1-c +
OC1-c +
1.00000 1.00000 [ENTER] 1.00000
OC1-angle + OC1-angle +
OC1-angle +
45 deg 45 deg
45 deg
Figure 12.5-2 Steps for setting the value

1Note: The meaning of settings and their setting process are beyond the scope of this
section. The figure above is provided by way of example. The user should confirm
the setting values after making any changes to their values. For verification, refer
to “Confirmation of Setting” discussed later.
2Note: The operation keys have several features enabling the user to key values for
setting items. Table 12.5-1 shows values that have been changed before and after
the user presses the operation keys.
Table 12.5-1 Operation example when the operation keys are pressed.
Before Key After
1 2 6 7 9
1 2 6 8 0
[▲]
9 1 7 1 0 1 7
9 1 7 [▼] 1 0 9 1 7
9 . 1 1 0 9 . 1
6 7 5 6 7 5
[◄]
1 . 7 5 1 . 7 5
2 1 : 2 3 [►] 2 1 : 2 3
Switch Setting Mode: The “Switch Setting Mode” is a setting used for the
selection of two modes. Figure 12.5-3 provides an example of the switch
setting mode. For each setting, the setting name and the selected item are

- 774 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
displayed on two lines.
OC1 OC1
10:48 24/56 10:48 24/56
_OC1-VTFBlk + *OC1-VTFBlk +
Non Block
OC1-UseFor + OC1-UseFor +
Trip Trip
OC1-OPMD + OC1-OPMD +
3POR 3POR
Before Changing Setting After Changing
Figure 12.5-3 Display Example of Switch Setting Mode
To begin the setting process, press the key ENTER. Once the setting is changed,
the [*] mark will appear alongside the name of the setting. When the change is
canceled or confirmed, the [*] mark will disappear automatically. Figure 12.5-4
shows the operation of the switch setting mode.
OC1 OC1 OC1

10:48 24/56 10:48 24/56 [►] / [▼] / 10:48 24/56
_OC1-VTFBlk + [ENTER] OC1-VTFBlk + [▲] / [◄] *OC1-VTFBlk +
Non Non Block
OC1-UseFor + OC1-UseFor + OC1-UseFor +
[CANCEL]
Trip Trip [►] / [▼] / Trip
OC1-OPMD + OC1-OPMD + [▲] / [◄] OC1-OPMD +
3POR 3POR 3POR
[CANCEL]
[ENTER] [ENTER]
OC1 OC1
10:48 24/56 10:48 24/56
*OC1-2fBlk + *OC1-2fBlk +
[▼] Block
Block
_OC1-UseFor + OC1-UseFor +
Trip [▲] Trip
OC1-OPMD + OC1-OPMD +
3POR 3POR
Figure 12.5-4 Operation of Switch Setting Mode

Note: The meaning of settings and their setting process are beyond the scope of this
section. The above figure is provided by way of example. The user should confirm
setting values after making any changes to their values. For verification, refer to
“Confirmation of Setting” discussed later.
List Selection Mode: The “List Selection Mode” is composed of main-setting-

screens and selection-list-screens as shown in Figure 12.5-5. In the main-
- 775 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
setting-screen, the setting name and the selected item are displayed. Press
the key ENTER to begin the setting process; the screen for selection list will
appear. Once a setting has been changed, the [*] mark will appear alongside
the name of the setting. When the change is canceled or confirmed, the [*]
mark will disappear automatically.
OC1 OC1-2fBlk OC1-2fBlk

10:48 23/56 10:48 1/3 10:48 2/3
_OC1-2fBlk + [ENTER] _Non [▼] Non
Non Block-3P _Block-3P
OC1-VTFBlk + Block-PerP Block-PerP
[CANCEL]
Non [▲]
OC1-UseFor +
Trip
[CANCEL] [ENTER]
OC1 OC1
10:48 23/56 10:48 23/56
*OC1-2fBlk + [▼] *OC1-2fBlk +
Block-3P Block-3P
_OC1-VTFBlk + OC1-VTFBlk +
Non [▲] Non
OC1-UseFor + OC1-UseFor +
Trip Trip
Figure 12.5-5 Operation of List Selection Mode
Signal Selection Mode: Figure 12.5-6 shows the steps to select a signal.
F1 Key Select Function Select Element

10:48 1/2 10:48 2/128 10:48 2/128
_Signal + [ENTER] No assign [►] No assign
Assign Signal _423100 > _AF00001001
Logic + 423101 > AF00002001
[CANCEL]
Toggle 423102 > [◄] AF00003001
423103 > AF00004001
423104 > AF00005001
[CANCEL] [ENTER]
F1 Key
10:48 1/2
*Signal +
423100 AF00001001
Logic +
Toggle
Figure 12.5-6 Operation of signal selection

- 776 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(ii) Confirmation dialog in each sub-menu

In “Setting” menu, a confirmation dialog #1 and #2 appears in the sub-menu and lower-level
menu, as shown in Figure 12.5-7
Sub-menu Sub -menu Sub -menu

Case2
Setting Record
Metering
Communication
Protection Active Group
： Copy gr.(A->B).
Confirmation
Group 1 Dialog #1
Group 2
Confirmation ：
Case1
Group 8
Dialog #2
Trip
Figure 12.5-7 Confirmation dialog setting
 Case1: Confirmation dialog #1

Suppose the setting of each group is changed; the confirmation dialog will
appear when returning to the screen of the “Protection” sub-menu, as shown
in Figure 12.5-8.
 Case2: Confirmation dialog #2
Suppose a setting is changed; the confirmation dialog will appear when
returning to the “Upper Menu”, as shown in Figure 12.5-9.

- 777 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Setting Protection Group 1

10:48 4/7 10:48 3/10 10:48 2/3
Record > [►] Active group > Telecommunication >
[►]
Metering > Copy gr.(A->B) > *Trip >
Communication > _Group 1 > Autoreclose >
_Protection > [◄] Group 2 > [◄]
Counter > Group 3 >
Function key > Group 4 >
[►] [◄]
OC OC Trip
10:48 1/4 10:48 1/4 10:48 1/12
*OC1EN +> [ENTER] *OC1EN + [►] *OC >
On On UV >
OC2EN + OC2EN + ZS >
Off [CANCEL] Off [◄] ZG >
OC3EN + OC3EN + EF >
Off Off DIFF >
[►] / [▼] / [►] / [▼] /

[▲] / [◄] [▲] / [◄]
OC [CANCEL] OC Group1
10:48 1/4 10:48 1/4 10:48 2/3
*OC1EN +> *OC1EN +> [◄] x 2 Telecommunication >
Off Off *Trip >
OC2EN + [ENTER] OC2EN + Autoreclose >
Off Off
[►] x 2
OC3EN + OC3EN +
Off Off
[◄]
Protection Protection
[ENTER]
10:48 3/10 The changed Setting
Active group > Change setting?
is confirmed. ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
Copy gr.(A->B) >
_Group 1 >
Group 2 > The changed Setting
Group 3 > [CANCEL]
Group 4 >
is canceled.
Figure 12.5-8 Setting example in case #1

- 778 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Main Menu Setting Communication

10:48 3/9 10:48 3/7 10:48 2/5
Record > [►] Record > [►] LAN >
Monitoring > Metering > _IEC61850 >
_Setting > _Communication > IEC103 >
[◄] [◄]
IO Setting > Protection > Modbus >
Time > Counter > DNP >
Test > Function key >
[►] [◄]
IEC61850 IEC61850 IEC61850

10:48 1/6 [►] / [▼] / 10:48 1/6 10:48 1/6
*850BLK + [▲] / [◄] 850BLK +
[ENTER] _850BLK +
Block Normal Normal
GSECHK + GSECHK + GSECHK +
ON [CANCEL] ON [CANCEL] ON
SI1-1 + SI1-1 + SI1-1 +
254 254 254
[ENTER] [CANCEL]
IEC61850 Setting
Communication
10:48 1/6 10:48 2/5
*850BLK + [◄] [◄] Change setting?
LAN >
Block ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
*IEC61850 >
GSECHK + IEC103 >
ON Modbus >
[►]
SI1-1 + DNP >
254
Setting [ENTER]
The changed setting is
10:48 3/7
Record > confirmed.
Metering >
_Communication >
Protection > The changed setting is
[CANCEL]
Counter > canceled.
Function key >
Figure 12.5-9 Setting example in case #2

- 779 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(iii) On/Off function

When the “Setting->Protection->Group (1 to 8)” sub-menu is displayed, the “On/OFF function”
is used to hide some unnecessary settings.
“On” indicates that the setting is enabled; the mark [>] will appear. More detail of the
settings provided within the hierarchy are described later.
“Off” indicates that the setting is disabled; the detailed settings are hidden, the mark [>]
is not indicated. The following figure shows the usage of On/Off function.
OC OC OC
10:48 1/4 10:48 1/4
[►] / [◄] /
10:48 1/4
*OC1EN +> [ENTER] *OC1EN +>
[▲] / [▼]
*OC1EN +
On On Off
OC2EN + OC2EN + OC2EN +
Off [CANCEL] Off [►] / [◄] / Off
OC3EN + OC3EN + [▲] / [▼] OC3EN +
Off Off Off
[ENTER]
Protection OC
10:48 1/4
[ENTER] Change setting? *OC1EN +
The changed ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No Off
setting is confirmed. [◄] x 3
OC2EN +
Off
OC3EN +
Off
Protection OC
10:48 3/10 10:48 1/4
Active group > *OC1EN +
Copy gr.(A->B) >
Return to the “OC” Off
_Group 1 > setting screen. OC2EN +
Group 2 > Off
Group 3 > OC3EN +
Group 4 > Off
Figure 12.5-10 Operation of On/Off function
Table 12.5-2 Explanation of [+>] mark in On/Off function

Display Operation Remark
[+>] ► Go to the sub-menu
ENTER Change setting.
(iv) Protection group setting

The IED provides eight setting groups for the protection of the power system; the user can
choose an alternative setting group from one of the eight groups in response to a change in the
- 780 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
operation of the power system. In the “Protection” sub-menu, the user can change the active
group and can copy the group settings. Jump to the “Element Setting Menu” if a relay setting
is required.
Change active group: An example for changing the active group is shown in
the following figure.
Protection Protection Protection

10:48 5/11 10:48 5/11 10:48 5/11
Common [▲] x 4 Common [►] Common
Active Group + Active Group + Active Group +
3
3 [◄] 3
Copy Group (A->B) > [▼] x 4 Copy Group (A->B) > Copy Group (A->B) >
Group 1 >
Group 1 > Group 1 >
Group 2 > Group 2 > Group 2 >
Refer to “Note: 1)”
[▲] x 2 [▼] x 2
Protection
Protection
10:48 5/11
Common
Change Setting? [ENTER]
ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No Active Group +
1
Copy Group (A->B) >
Group 1 >
Group 2 >
[ENTER]
Protection
10:48 1/10
Common
The changed [►]
Active Group >
setting is confirmed. Copy Group(A->B) >
Group 1 >
Group 2 >
Group 3 >
†Note: When the screen moves to the “Protection” sub-

menu from the “Setting” sub-menu, the cursor will
appear alongside the current active group.
Figure 12.5-11 Operation of changing active group
Copy group setting: The user can copy an active setting from one group to
another group. As an example, in the following figure “Group3” will be copied
to “Group2”, as shown in Figure 12.5-12.
Note: In the “Copy Group (A->B)” screen, the number displayed at A is the current active
group number.
- 781 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Protection Copy Group(A->B) Copy Group (A->B)

10:48 1/11 10:48 1/2 10:48 1/2
Common [►] _A (1 – 8): + [▼] A (1 – 8): +
3 3
Active Group +
B (1 - 8): +
1 [◄] [▲] _B (1 - 8): +
1 1
*Copy Group(A->B) >
Group 1 >
Group 2 >
[ENTER]
Copy Group(A->B) Copy Group(A->B) Copy Group(A->B)

10:48 1/2
[ENTER]
10:48 1/2 [▲] 10:48 1/2
A (1 – 8): + A (1 – 8): + A (1 – 8): +
3 3 3
*B (1 - 8): + *B (1 - 8): + [► B (1 - 8): +
2 2 ] 1
[◄]
Protection
Copy Group? [ENTER]

ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No The changed
setting is confirmed.
Protection
10:48 1/11
Common
Active Group >
1
Copy Group(A->B) >
Group 1 >
Group 2 >
Figure 12.5-12 Copy group setting
Change group settings: Upon shipment from the factory, the default settings
are set. Therefore, in each group, the user can change the settings of the
protection functions and other features. To change the settings in each group,
refer to the setting method discussed in section 12.5(i).
(v) Configuration of Function keys

Function keys (F1 to F7) on the IED front panel provide a feature to navigate to a specific
screen, which is configurable by the user. These keys have their own LED, which can be
- 782 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
programmed using settings. Six screens are configured for six of the function keys (F1 to F6),
respectively, as the default settings shown in Table 5.6-3.
Table 12.5-3 Function keys which are configured to navigate a menu

Function Key configured Menus
F1 Metering
F2 Fault Record
F3 Event Record1
F4 Event Record2
F5 Event Record3
F6 Diagnostics
Screen jump function: To configure the screen jump function, follow the steps
as shown in the figure below.
Function Key F1 Key F1 Key Function
10:48 1/7 10:48 1/3 10:48 3/3
F1 Key > [►] *Function + [ENTER] Screen Jump
F2 Key > No Assign Assign Signal
F3 Key > Signal + _No Assign
[◄] [CANCEL]
F4 Key > No Assign
F5 Key > Logic
F6 Key > Instant +
[ ]x2 [▼] x 2
Setting F1 Key F1 Key Function

10:48 1/3 [ENTER] 10:48 1/3
[◄] x 2
Change Setting? *Function + *Screen Jump
ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No Screen Jump Assign Signal
Signal + No Assign
No Assign
Logic
Instant +
[ENTER]
[An Example]
OC F1 Key
The “Screen Jump”
10:48 1/4 Push [F1]
setting is _OC1EN +> for 3s. Register this screen
On to F1 Key?
confirmed. Do the
OC2EN +> ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
next step to select On
OC3EN +
a screen.
Off
[ENTER]
The selected screen is assigned to [F1].
Figure 12.5-13 Operation of screen jump setting

- 783 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
On any screen, press the screen-jump function key to display a screen, refer to the
following figure:
Main Menu OC
10:48 2/8 10:48 1/4
Record > [F1] _OC1EN +>
_Monitoring > On
Setting > OC2EN +>
IO setting >
[F1] On
Time > OC3EN +
Test > Off
Figure 12.5-14 Operation of screen jump function
To cancel the screen-jump function, follow the procedure provided in Figure 12.5-15.
Note: 1) Once a screen is configured to a function key, it will not be deleted until a new
screen is configured for the same function key.
2) If a configured screen is disabled by “On/Off Function” setting (refer to section
12.5(iii)), the screen jump function is also disabled for the function key.

10:48 1/7 10:48 1/3 10:48 1/3
F1 Key > [►] Function + [ENTER] *Screen Jump
F2 Key > Screen Jump Assign Signal
F3 Key > Signal + No Assign
[◄] [CANCEL]
F4 Key > No Assign
F5 Key > Logic
F6 Key > Instant +
[▼] x 2 [▲] x 2
Setting F1 Key F1 Key Function

10:48 1/3 10:48 3/3
[◄] x 2 [ENTER]
Change Setting? *Function + Screen Jump
ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No No Assign Assign Signal
Signal + _No Assign
No Assign
Logic
Instant +
[ENTER]
The “Screen Jump” function is
canceled on F1 key.
Figure 12.5-15 Cancelling screen jump function

- 784 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Signal control function: To assign a test signal to a function key, follow the
steps as shown in Figure 12.5-16.

10:48 1/7 10:48 1/3 10:48 3/3
F1 Key > [►] *Function + [ENTER] Screen Jump
F2 Key > No Assign Assign Signal
F3 Key > Signal +
[◄] [CANCEL] _No Assign
F4 Key > No Assign
F5 Key > Logic
F6 Key > Instant +
[▲] [▼]
F1 Key F1 Key F1 Key Function

10:48 1/2 10:48 1/2 10:48 2/3
[ENTER]
*Function + [▼] *Function +> Screen Jump
No Assign Assign Signal *Assign Signal
*Signal + [▲] LED > [ENTER] No Assign
123101AF00001001
Logic +
Instant
[ENTER]
Select Function Select Element Select Element

10:48 1/25 10:48 1/128 10:48 3/128
_123100 >
[►] _AF00001001 [▼] x 2 AF00001001
123101 > AF00002001 AF00002001
123102 > AF00003001 _AF00003001
123103 > [◄] AF00004001 [▲] x 2 AF00004001
123106 > AF00005001 AF00005001
123107 > AF00006001 AF00006001
[ENTER]
Setting F1 Key
[ENTER] [◄] x 2 10:48 1/3
The changed Change Setting? *Signal +
ENTER=Yes CANCEL=No
setting is confirmed. 123101AF00003001
Logic +
Instant
Figure 12.5-16 Assigning a signal to the function key

- 785 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
I/O setting sub-menu

The “I/O Setting” sub-menu is used to set or change settings of the following items:
(i) AC Analog Input
(ii) Binary Input
(iii) Binary Output
(iv) LED
This section explains the details of setting method.
(i) AC analog input

For the AC analog inputs in the VCT module, the user can configure a ratio for each AC analog
channel. With regard to the ratio, the user can key the value of the ratio from the sub-menu.
Selection of ratio: For example, Figure 12.6-1 shows how the channel
selection is made for the AC analog input on a VCT module (AI#1 = VCT#1).
Move the cursor by pressing keys ▲ and ▼. Then, press key ►to go to the
next level in the hierarchy.
AC Analog Input AI#1

10:48 1/2 10:48 1/12
AI#1 > [►] CH1 >
AI#2 > CH2 >
CH3 >
CH4 >
CH5 >
CH6 >
[►]
AI#1
10:48 1/2
AI1_Ch1_Ratio +
2000
AI1_Ch1_Rating +
DEP
Figure 12.6-1 AC analog input screens

Note: This screen is a sample. The AI numbers displayed are dependent upon the
configuration of VCT modules in each IED.
Set of rating: Figure 12.6-2 is an example of rating in channel#1. From this

screen, the user can select a rating for each channel.
- 786 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
CH1 AI1_Ch1_Rating
10:48 1/2 10:48 1/3
AI1_Ch1_Ratio + DEP
2000.000 1A
AI1_Ch1_Rating + 5A
DEPAI#1
[►]
10:48 1/10
[►]
CH1 >
CH2 >
CH3 >
CH4 >
CH5 >
CH6 >
Figure 12.6-2 Selection of rating

Note: Term “DEP” means that a rating value follows the default setting at the
manufacture when it is carried out customer’s ordering. For more information of
ordering, see Appendix: Ordering.
(ii) Binary input

All binary input circuits provided in the IED are user-configurable; the user can set common
programmable logic (CPL) for each binary input circuit. (For more information of CPL, see
Chapter Technical description: Binary IO module: Binary input circuit)
The user can activate or turn off the above timers and switches using the setting function.
To configure the binary input circuits, the user should follow the procedure in steps ((ii)-1 and
(ii)-2)
Selection of binary input circuit: For example, Figure 12.6-3 illustrates the
selection of a binary input circuit on a binary IO module. Move the cursor by
pressing keys ▲ and ▼. Then, press key ►to go to the next hierarchy.
Binary Input Slot#6

10:48 1/2 10:48 1/9
Slot#4 > [►] _Common >
_Slot#6 > BI1 >
BI2 >
BI3 >
BI4 >
BI5 >
BI6 >
Figure 12.6-3 Selection of slot and binary input circuit
Note: This screen is a sample. The slot numbers displayed depend upon the
- 787 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
configuration of the binary IO module in each IED.
CPL setting: Figure 12.6-4 is an example of a “Common” setting. From this

screen, the user can set a threshold level and the number of comparisons
feature for contact chatter for all binary input circuits.
Common
10:48 1/2
THRES_Lvl +
Low
CMP_NUM +
4
Figure 12.6-4 Common screen
For example, Figure 12.6-5 shows the CPL setting for binary input circuit (BI1).
The timer and the inverse switch can be activated when On or Off is set for setting
[BI1_CPL]. Press key ENTER to commence the setting of a switch or parameter.
BI1
10:48 1/1
BI1_CPL +
Off
Figure 12.6-5 CPL setting

Note: Setting items “On Delay timer and others” are displayed when the user sets
[BI*_CPL] On.
- 788 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(iii) Binary output

All binary output circuits provided in the IED are also user-configurable; the user can configure
timers and switches using CPL settings. (For more information of CPL, see Chapter: Binary
IO module: Binary output circuit)
Selection of binary output circuit: For example, Figure 12.6-6 illustrates the
selection of a binary output circuit on a binary IO module. Move the cursor by
pressing keys ▲ and ▼. Press key ► to go to the next level in the hierarchy.
Binary Output Slot#6
10:48 1/2 10:48 1/8
Slot#5 > [►] _BO1 >
_Slot#6 > BO2 >
BO3 >
BO4 >
BO5 >
BO6 >
BO7 >
Figure 12.6-6 Selection of slot and binary output circuit

Note: Those screens are samples. The slot numbers screend are depend on the
configuration of binary IO module in each IED case.
CPL Setting: For example, Figure 12.6-7 illustrates the setting of a binary
output circuit (BO1). Using setting [BI1_CPL] On, the CPL logic in BO1 is
available. Similarly, assigned signals, timers and switches can be set in this
menu. Note that detailed setting items are shown when On is keyed into
setting [BI*_CPL].
- 789 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
BO1
10:48 1/17
BO1_CPL +
Off
Input signal1 +
No Assign
Input Signal2 +
No Assign
Input Signal3 +
No Assign
Signal8 +
No Assign
LOGIC-SW
AND
On Delay Timer +
0.000 s
Off Delay Timer +
0.000 s
INVERSE-SW +
Normal
TIMER-SW +
Off
Logic Timer +
0.000 s
FF-SW +
Off
Reset Signal +
No Assign
Figure 12.6-7 Binary output setting
- 790 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Figure 12.6-8 shows how to assign a signal:
BO1 Select Function Select Function

10:48 2/17 10:48 1/127 10:48 2/127
BO1_CPL + [ENTER] _No Assign [▼] No Assign
On ARC 4A6001> _ARC 4A6001>
_Signal1 + BCD 452001> BCD 452001>
[CANCEL]
No Assign BIO_Slot1 200B01> BIO_Slot1 200B01>
Signal2 + BIO_Slot2 200B02> BIO_Slot2 200B02>
No Assign BIO_Slot3 200B03> BIO_Slot3 200B03>
[►] [CANCEL]
Select Element
10:48 2/155
No Assign
_CO-OC-A 8000001B60
CO-OC-B 8100001B61
CO-OC-C 8200001B62
CO-EF 8300001B63
EXT.ARC_S 8300001B64
Figure 12.6-8 Assigning a signal

Note: “No Assign” is always displayed on the first line, even when the page is changed.
(iv) Selection and setting of LED

As shown in Figure 12.1-1, the IED provides 26 LEDs and 7 function-keys. The user can
configure LEDs (“LED#3” to “LED#26”) and the function key LEDs (F1 to F7; each has a LED).
Each LED is driven via a logic gate which can be programed to be an AND gate, OR gate or
XOR gate operation. Furthermore, each LED has a programmable reset characteristic, settable
for instantaneous drop-off, or for latching operation. One or up to eight signals can be assigned
to a single LED with selectable LED color.
Selection of LED: Figure 12.6-9 shows the LED selection screen; the user can
select a setting item by pressing keys ▲ and ▼. Press key ► to go to the next
level in the hierarchy
- 791 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
LED
10:48 1/31
_LED3 >
LED4 >
LED5 >
LED6 >
LED7 >
LED8 >
LED26 >
F1 Key >
F2 Key >
:
Figure 12.6-9 LED selecting screen
LED Setting: As shown in Figure 12.6-10, the user can set the logical gate,
timer, color of LED and assign signals in this screen.
LED3
10:48 1/16
Color >
RED
Input signal1 +
No assign
Input signal 2 +
No assign
Input signal 8 +
No assign
Reset signal +
No assign
LOGIC-SW +
AND
INVERSE-SW +
Normal
TIMER-SW +
Off
On Delay Timer +
0.00 s
Off Delay Timer +
0.00 s
Logic Timer +
0.00 s
Color +
Figure 12.6-10 LED setting screen
- 792 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Time sub-menu
In Time sub-menu, the user can change settings of Clock function, such as time zone, time
synchronizing source, format of time displaying and so on. Figure below shows the Time sub-
menu. (For more information, see Chapter Technical description: Clock function)
Time
10:48 1/5
Clock >
Time Zone >
Time Sync >
Display Format >
Summer Time >
Figure 12.7-1 Time function screen

(i) Clock
The clock can run locally or synchronize with the external time source shown in
[ActiveSyncSrc] menu. Figure 12.7-2 shows the Clock screen:
Clock
10:00 1/2
[Time] +
2012-11-21 10:00:05
[Format]
YYYY-MM-DD HH:mm:ss
[ActiveSyncSrc] >
SNTP
Figure 12.7-2 Clock screen

The Clock sub-menu is composed of the [Time] menu, [Format] menu and [ActiveSyncSrc]
menu. Time for the IED can be set in the screen. When the active synchronizing source is SNTP,
the user can go to another sub-menu to check the current active SNTP server.
Figure 12.7-3 shows how to handle this screen.
Time menu
(1) Move cursor to the Time menu and press ENTER.
Clock
10:00 1/2
_[Time] +
2012-11-21 10:00:05
[Format]
YYYY-MM-DD HH:mm:ss
[ActiveSyncSrc] >
SNTP
(2) Current time can be changed to press ▲ or ▼.

Clock
10:00 1/2
[Time] +
2012-11-21 10:05:00
[Format]
YYYY-MM-DD HH:mm:ss
[ActiveSyncSrc] >
SNTP
Figure 12.7-3 Clock format
- 793 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
ActiveSyncSrc menu
ActiveSyncSrc can be shown by the following procedure.
(1) Move cursor to the [ActiveSyncSrc] menu and press ►.
Clock
10:00 1/2 *Note: When the active synchronizing source is not SNTP, the > is
[Time] +
2012-11-21 10:00:05 not shown in the screen.
[Format]
YYYY-MM-DD HH:mm:ss
_[ActiveSyncSrc] >
SNTP
(2) The ActiveSyncSrc screen shows the active IP address of active

ActiveSyncSrc
10:48 SNTP server.
192. 168. 0. 100
192. 168. 0. 101
*192. 168. 0. 102
192. 168. 0. 103
Figure 12.7-4 ActiveSync
(ii) Time zone

The user can input time zone designated by UTC in Time zone screen. Time zone according as
local area for the IED should be set. Figure 12.7-5 shows the Time Zone screen:
Time Zone
10:48 1/1
Time zone +
0.00hour
Figure 12.7-5 Time zone setting screen
(1) Move cursor to the Time zone menu and press ENTER.
Time Zone
10:48 1/1 Time zone can be set by 0.25 hour. The user has to fill the Time zone
_Time zone +
0.00hour in accordance with UTC (Coordinate Universal Time).
Figure 12.7-6 TimeZone
- 794 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(iii) Time synchronization

Time synchronization source can be selected in Time synchronization screen. The
synchronization function can be activated by configuration of the On/Off switch in this menu.
Figure 12.7-7 shows the configuration screen for the time synchronization function:
Time Sync
10:48 1/4
TimeSyncSrc +
SNTP
SNTP +>
On
BI SYNC +>
On
Figure 12.7-7 Time synchronization setting

The following shows how to operate in this screen.
TimeSyncSrc menu
Time SyncSrc (Time Synchronization Source) can be changed by the following procedure.
(1) Move cursor to the TimeSyncSrc menu and press ENTER.
Time Sync
10:48 1/4
_TimeSyncSrc +
SNTP
SNTP +>
On
BI SYNC +>
On
(2) The TimeSyncSrc menu is composed of “---”, SNTP, BI, MODBUS

TimeSyncSrc
10:48 1/5 and IRIG-B.
---
_SNTP Note: When “---” is selected, it means that time synchronization
BI
MODBUS
is not operated.
IRIG-B
Figure 12.7-8 TimeSyncSrc
By using time synchronization via Ethernet with a SNTP server, the user can connect up
to a maximum of four SNTP servers. If more than one SNTP is used, the priority of the servers
can be decided in ascending order of synchronized stratum value (in order of higher-accuracy)
and select the server with the smallest value.
- 795 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
SNTP menu
IP address of SNTP server can be set by the following procedure.
(1) To confirm that the SNTP synchronization function has been set
Time Sync
10:48 1/4 for On. Subsequently move cursor to the SNTP menu and press ►.
TimeSyncSrc +
SNTP
_SNTP +>
On
BI SYNC +>
On
SNTP (2) Move cursor to desired server number and press ENTER.
10:48 1/4
_Server1 +
0. 0. 0. 0
Server2 +
0. 0. 0. 0
Server3 +
0. 0. 0. 0
SNTP (3) The user can set IP address using ▲ or ▼ by each digit.
10:48 1/4 When the user has finished setting IP address of the server, press
Server1 +
0. 0. 0.176 ENTER.
Server2 +
0. 0. 0. 0
Server3 +
0. 0. 0. 0
Figure 12.7-9 SNTP
BI SYNC menu
When the “BI SYNC” is set to On in Time Sync menu, the user can choose a binary input circuit
(BI) as a synchronization standard. Adjustment setting ‘SYNC_ADJ’ is provided.
Binary synchronization function can be set by the following procedure.
BI SYNC (1) Enter the Data ID of the BI output

10:48 1/2 (2) Set adjustment time for [SYNC ADJ]
BI_ID +
No Assign
SYNC_ADJ +
0.000 s
Figure 12.7-10 BISYNC
- 796 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
IRIG SYNC menu

When the “IRIG SYNC” is set to On in Time Sync menu, the user can choose IRIG signal for
the synchronization.
IRIG SYNC (1) Set On if IRIG-B data is generated in IEEE C37.118/IRIG-B000

10:48 1/2 format. On the other hand, set On if the IRIG-B is generated with
USE_BCDYEAR +
Off absence the C37.118.
USE_LOCALTIME +
Off
Figure 12.7-11 IRIGSYNC
(iv) Display format

Display format of time in the IED can be selected in Display format screen. All time formats
will be displayed according to Date_fmt setting. The IED provides different formats to display
the date. Figure 12.7-12 shows display format menu:
Display Format
10:48 1/4
Date_fmt +
YYYYMMDD
Date_delimiter +
-
Time_delimiter +
:
Figure 12.7-12 Display format menu

Display Format sub-menu is composed of Date_fmt menu, Date_delimiter setting
Time_delimiter setting and Sec_delimiter setting.
Date format menu

(1) Move cursor to “Date_fmt”; and press ENTER.
Display Format
10:48 1/4
_Date_fmt +
YYYYMMDD
Date_delimiter +
-
Time_delimiter +
:
(2) Select desired format by moving cursor.

Date_fmt
10:48 1/3
_YYYYMMDD
MMDDYYYY
DDMMYYYY
Figure 12.7-13 Date Format
- 797 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Date delimiter menu

r
Display Format
10:48 1/4 (1) Move cursor to the [Date_delimiter] menu and press ENTER.
Date_fmt +
YYYYMMDD
_Date_delimiter +
-
Time_delimiter +
:
Date_delimiter
10:48 1/3 (2) Date delimiter can be selected by moving cursor to the desired
_-
/ format type.
.
Figure 12.7-14 Date delimite

Time delimiter menu
r
Display Format
10:48 3/4 (1) Move cursor to the [Time_delimiter] menu and press ENTER.
Date_fmt +
YYYYMMDD
Date_delimiter +
-
_Time_delimiter +
:
Display Format
10:48 3/4 (2) The time delimiter mark is switched.
Date_fmt +
YYYYMMDD
Date_delimiter +
-
_Time_delimiter +
.
Figure 12.7-15 Time delimite
- 798 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Second delimiter menu

Second delimiter can be switched by the following procedure.
(1) Move cursor to the [Sec_delimiter] menu and press ENTER.
Display Format
10:48 4/4
Date_delimiter +
-
Time_delimiter +
:
_Sec_delimiter +
.
(2) The second delimiter mark is switched.

Display Format
10:48 4/4
Date_delimiter +
-
Time_delimiter +
:
_Sec_delimiter +
,
Figure 12.7-16 Second
(v) DST (Summer time)

When DST is On, the user is needed to set details:
Summer Time
10:48 1/13
Summer time +
Off
Figure 12.7-17 DST (Summer time) menu

Notice that summertime can be set by the following procedure If summertime is started or
ended in the last week of the month, Start_Week and End_Week must be filled “5”. The IED
controls starting or ending summer time day to set last week of the month on Start_Week or
End_Week automatically.
- 799 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Summer Time (1) Move cursor to the [Summer time] menu and press ENTER.
10:48 1/13 Summer time mode can be switched On/Off by pressing ► or ◄.
_Summer time +
Off After Summer time mode is set to On, the user can set summer time
in detail.
Summer Time (2) In this screen, details of summer time setting can be set.
10:48 1/9
IS_UTC_base +
On
Start_Month +
3
Start_Week +
5
Figure 12.7-18 DST setting
The user can set the starting date and ending of summer time. The following procedure is a
case of starting weekday setting.
Summer Time (1) Move cursor to the [Start_Wday] menu and press ►.
10:48 4/9
Start_Month +
3
Start_Week +
5
_Start_Wday +
Sun
Start_SM(Wday)
(2) Move cursor to the desired weekday and press ENTER.
10:48
1/8
---
_Sun
Mon
Tue
Wed
Summer Time (3) Starting weekday is set.

10:48 4/9
Start_Month +
3
Start_Week +
5
_Start_Wday +
Sun
Figure 12.7-19 DST setting
- 800 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Test sub-menu
Test functions can be operated from the test screen available on the front panel of the IED.
(i) Test screen
The Test screen has functions such as Test Mode, Test Flag, Mode Change and Signal
Monitoring. The user can select any of these test functions using the following test screen.
Test
10:48 1/4
Test Mode +
Off
TestFlag-EN +
On
Mode Change >
Single Monitoring >
Figure 12.8-1 Test screen

(ii) Test mode screen
The Test Mode screen is shown in Figure 12.8-2. The Test Mode screen has four functions, Test
Option, Function Test, Binary Input and Binary Output.
Test Mode
10:48 1/4
Test Option >
Function Test >
Binary Input >
Binary Output >
Figure 12.8-2 Test Mode screen

Test option screen: The Test Option screen, shown in Figure 12.8-3, is used
to select the following functions and perform a Test flag forced reset.
Test Option
10:48 1/65
S-TestFlagCancel +
Off
GOSNDBLK +
Off
GOSUBBLK +
Off
Figure 12.8-3 Test Option screen

 Test flag cancel (S-TestFlagCancel)
This function is used to forcibly reset the Test flag in the communication
packet. The Test flag is set to OFF by default. The Test flag is used in
combination with another device in the Test mode. When this option is
selected, the Test flag in the communication packet is reset temporarily to
- 801 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
reproduce a pseudo-operation condition.
 GOOSE sending block (GOSNDBLK)

This function is used for selecting or disabling the GOOSE sending
information in Test mode. This function is used when there is a conflict in
communication with another active IED while sending a GOOSE signal.
 GOOSE receiving block (GOSUBBLK)

This function is used for receiving or rejecting GOOSE subscription
information from another IED in Test mode. This function is used for testing
in case of bad reception (For example, Validation of Interlock determination).
The user can simulate a bad reception condition passively by using two
GOOSE Sending Blocks.
Note: The user may perform bad reception tests from a remote terminal using the
GOSNDBLK function. However, carrying out the GOSNDBLK function at a
remote terminal may influence the overall operation of other IEDs, because
communication packets will not be received from the remote terminal. In order to
avoid that the user can simulate bad reception tests for a particular IED using the
GOSUBBLK function. As a result, testing will only affect the particular IED
under test i.e. all other terminals will not be influenced by the tests.
Function test screen: Function test screen is provided for testing; the use can
program test operations, which can be implemented in protection and control
functions. Figure 12.8-4 exemplifies the Test screen. Automatic supervision
will stop when the user sets Off for A.M.F (for more information about the
automatic supervision, see Chapter Automatic supervision).
Function Test
10:48 1/65
A.M.F. +
On
BU1_Exclusion +
Off
BU2_Exclusion +
Off
Figure 12.8-4 Function test menu (an example)
Binary input test screen: The user can have a virtual signal to a binary input
circuit using the binary input test screen. Figure 12.8-5 shows an example;
the user can select IO#1 or IO#3. (Actually, the content displayed will differ
depending upon the binary IO module inserted. Refer to Chapter Technical
- 802 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
description: Binary IO Module)
Binary Input
10:48 1/2
Slot#1 >
Slot#3 >
Figure 12.8-5 Binary input menu

Figure 12.8-6 is a case when IO#3 (Slot#03) is selected.
Slot#3
10:48 1/19
BIF OP +
Slot3-BIO1-SET +
Normal
Slot3-BIO2-SET +
Normal
Slot3-BI03-SET +
Figure 12.8-6 Setting menu for Slot #3 module

For example, if the user wishes to simulate binary input circuit #1 (BI1) on the
BIO1A module at IO#3 slot, the user can select SLOT3-BI01-SET screen, as shown
in Figure 12.8-6).
Slot3-BIO1-SET
10:48 1/3
Normal
Off
On
Figure 12.8-7 Setting menu after selecting “Slot #3-BIO1-SET”
The user can then make the following selections on the screen and configure the
items required for simulation.
 ON: BI1 output is set forcibly to ON(Logic level=high(1)) regardless of
the actual input signal.
 OFF: BI1 output is set forcibly to OFF(Logic level=low(0)) regardless of
the actual input signal.
 Normal: Actual inputs are applied.
Use the screen shown in Figure 12.8-7 only to configure the BI signals for the
- 803 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
simulation test. This does not start the simulation.
The setting menu is shown in the manner of the screen illustrated in Figure 12.8-7,
if the user needs to configure an Input Circuit other than BI01 (BI02 to BI18 in the
screen shown in Figure 12.8-6); the user can configure each BI signal in a manner
similar to that described for BI01.
After selecting OP in Figure 12.8-6, use the following screen to start the simulation
test.
Slot#3
10:48
Press and hold ENTER
to operate
Press <- to return
To previous page
Figure 12.8-8 Execution menu of BI test

If key ENTER is pressed in Figure 12.8-8, the status will change to test status. The
following screen will be displayed after pressing the key ENTER. Figure 12.8-9
shows that the IED is in simulation test mode.
Slot#3
10:48
Press and hold ENTER
to operate
Operating..
Press <- to return

To previous page
Figure 12.8-9 Running test menu

Note: The user has to continue to depress the key ENTER on the IED front panel during
the simulation test period. The simulation status will be released if key ENTER is
not pressed.
Binary output test screen: The user is able to test a binary output circuit.
Figure 12.8-10 is an example of how to select a binary output from the Test
Mode screen.
- 804 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Binary Output
10:48 1/2
Slot#2 >
Slot#3 >
Figure 12.8-10 Binary output menu

Figure 12.8-11 shows selection of IO#2 (Slot #2).
Slot#2
10:48 1/19
BO2F OP +
SLOT2-BO01-SET +
Normal
SLOT2-BO02-SET +
Normal
SLOT2-BO02-SET +
Figure 12.8-11 Setting menu for Slot #2 module
Figure 12.8-12 shows the Output Circuit configuration of BO01 at IO#2 (Slot#2).
The procedure for operation is similar to the operation of the binary input circuit.
(Refer to Figure 12.8-7 to Figure 12.8-9)
SLOT2-BO01-SET
10:48 1/3
Normal
Off
On
Figure 12.8-12 Setting menu after selecting “SLOT2-BO01-SET”
The user can configure the required settings for the simulation test of the binary
output circuit.
 ON: Output signal for simulation test is ON
 OFF: Output signal for simulation test is OFF
 Normal: Actual inputs are applied.
(iii) TestFlag-EN screen

This function can set all communication protocol Test flags to Test mode. The user should select
TestFlag-EN in Figure 12.8-1 and select On or Off.
- 805 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(iv) Mode change screen

When the user selects “Mode Change” from the Test sub-menu shown in Figure 12.8-1, the
following Mode change screen is displayed (Figure 12.8-13). This allows control from a remote
device (For example, SAS server) by configuring the MDCTRL-EN setting.
Mode Change
10:48 1/3
MDCTRL-EN +
Off
MDCTRL-SELRST +
30 s
MDCTRL-EXERST +
30 s
Figure 12.8-13 Mode Change sub-menu
(v) Signal monitoring screen

Figure 12.8-14 shows that the user can assign signal-monitoring points to the monitoring jacks
(A, B, and C) on the IED front panel. Incidentally, points have not been assigned for the
monitoring jacks in the menu below.
Signal Monitoring
10:48 1/3
Term A +
No Assign
Term B +
No Assign
Term C +
No Assign
Figure 12.8-14 Signal monitoring sub-menu
When the user wishes to use monitoring jack A to monitor a signal-monitoring point,
select “Term A” in the signal monitoring sub-menu (Figure 12.8-15). The user can then assign
the signal monitoring point for Term A.
10:48 1/3
Input signal +
No Assign
Figure 12.8-15 Selection menu
- 806 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Information sub-menu
In the information sub-menu, the user can see the information about the IED. Those of the
information are set in a factory. Figure 12.9-1 shows the Information sub-menu. Table 12.9-1
shows detail of information that is displayed in this screen.
Information
10:48 1/9
[IED TYPE]
GRT200 __-00-111-22-33-
44-555
__-6666-777-88
[Serial No.]
Figure 12.9-1 Information screen
Table 12.9-1 Information details

Display item Remark
[IED TYPE]
GRT200 Product information
-**-***-**-**-**-*** Ordering number in Hardware selection†
-****-***-** Ordering number in Software selection†
[Serial No.]
********** Product serial number
[Plant Name]
Preferred name The user can key preferred IED name using the GR-TIEMS
[Description]
Preferred contents The user can key preferred information using the GR-TIEMS
[CP1M Software]
GS2RLIM1**** Name and version number about the CPU Software
[IEC61850 eng]
G2M8500** Name and version number of IEC61850 engine
[IEC61850 Support]
Ed1/Ed1op/Ed2 Numbers of supporting 61850 edition in IED
[IEC61850 Date Model]
W2GRT00**** Name and version number of IEC61850 Data Model
[IEC61850 SCL Ver.]
Edition ***(****) Version information at IED
[IEC61850 Mapping]
X2GRT200**** Name and version number of IEC61850 Mapping
[GOOSE Subscribe]
**** GOOSE Subscript information
[IEC103 Slave Data]
IGR*200**** IEC 103 Mapping†
[PLC Data]
P2GRT200**** PLC Data name and version number
†The item is only displayed when the IED has the Protocol ‘IEC 60870-5-103’. See Appendix
Ordering for more detailed information.

- 807 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Security setting sub-menu

The Access control function is accessed using the Security Setting sub-menu. Passwords, active
or inactive and several allowed operations can be set for each user ID.
Table 12.10-1 Access control function settings
Display Order 1 2 3 4 5
User ID Guest Setting Test Operation Full Access
Password (Default) N.A 0000 0000 0000 0000
View ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Setting N.A ✔ N.A N.A ✔
Security Setting N.A ✔ N.A N.A ✔
Test N.A N.A ✔ ✔ ✔
Clear record N.A ✔ ✔ N.A ✔

Functions
Monitoring
(function N.A ✔ ✔ N.A ✔
(Reset/Revise)
keys) F1 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
allowed F2 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
to operate
F3 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
F4 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
F5 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
F6 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
F7 ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Note: Sign “✔” shows that the user can operate the function. Sign “N.A” shows that the user
cannot operate the function. Password can be changed in Change-Password sub-menu in
the Security setting.
Table 12.10-2 Meaning of allowed operation

Functions Meaning
View All users can see all screens/menus
In the “Setting” and “IO setting” menu the authorized user can change
Setting each setting item. Operation of the “Time” menu is also allowed.
(Incidentally, all users can set the time.)
Security setting Authorized users can change security settings
Test A tester and an operator can access the “Test” menu.

An authorized person, except for a guest and an operator can remove
Clear record
record information.
An authorized person, except for a guest and an operator can clear and
Monitoring
change statistical data.
F1 to F7 Users can operate a function/an application with a function key.
- 808 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
13 Installation and setting

Caution for storage 810
Handling precautions 810 Unpacking 811
─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────
 For rack mounting, cable and electrical wiring, see a separate service manual entitled
Installation handbook for rack mounting, cable work, etc. (Document No. 6F2S1954).
 See a service manual entitled Guide for replacement of inner modules depending on the
situation. (Document No. 6F2S1955 or 6F2S1956).

- 809 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Caution for storage

You have to pack an IED in the original box after the IED is inspected, if the IED is not required
to be installed now; and you have to store it in dry and clean condition.
Recommended storage condition:
- Temperature: 0 degree Celsius to +40 degree Celsius
- No condensation
Handling precautions
Modules of the IED should be handled in the electro static charge free environment. That is,
the user shall use an anti-electrostatic-wrist-band; and it is grounded.
CAUTION
 Before removing a module, ensure that you are at the same electrostatic potential as
the equipment by touching the case.
 Handle the module by its front plate, frame or edges of the printed circuit board. Avoid
touching the electronic components, printed circuit board or connectors.
 Place the module on an anti-static surface, or on a conducting surface connected to
the earth.
You have to check carefully the electronic circuitry for your handling area, which is defined in
the IEC 60747 standard.
- 810 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Unpack and inspection of hardware and software

The user should unpack and check the IED before use. Be in touch with Toshiba at email
(www.toshiba-relays.com) for any issues.
(i) Opening and inspecting relay (IED) package

Open a relay package and inspect physical damage if any. Ensure that the following items are
included in the package. If there is any noticeable physical damage, or any of the above items
are missing, contact your agent.
- Relay (IED) unit
- Test record: One report sheet
- Installation guide: One guide sheet
- Instruction manuals: Provided within a CD-ROM
- Flange covers: Left and right covers
- Function keys label: One label sheet
- LEDs Label: One label sheet
- White-plastic-sheets: Two sheets†
†Note: The white ones are provided to lock the flange screws. They are not bundled
when the unit case is in 1/1 size; they are also not bundled for flush-mounting type
case.
(ii) Manufacture settings (In, Vn, fn, Vdc)

Find the hardware nameplate. The user can know the IED has been produced correctly in
terms of rated current (In), voltage (Vn), frequency (fn), and DC rating (Vdc). The user can
the same on Factory settings (Figure 13.3-2).
Ordering positions
7 8 9 A B C D E F G H J K L
- 3 1 - 3 4 H - 0 0 - 6 6 - 3 0 - 2 6 A
Transformer protection IED

GRT200 -31-34H-00-66-30-26A
1A / 5A 50 / 60 Month, Year
100-120 110-250
****** ** ***
DC rating (Vdc)
Rated frequency (fn)
Rated voltage (Vn)
Rated current (In)
Figure 13.3-1 Hardware nameplate example on the rear
- 811 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Ordering positions
- 3 1 - 3 4 H - 0 0 - 6 6 - 3 0 - 2 6 A
VCT type (VCT49B)
System frequency (fn) = 60Hz
AC rating values (In):
Ia,b,c-1CT = 1A
Ia,b,c-2CT = 1A
Ia,b,c-3CT = 5A
In-1CT = 1A, In-2CT = 5A
Figure 13.3-2 Factory setting example

Note: The user can change a rated value (In); see Chapter Technical description:
Transformer module for AC analog input to change it.
(iii) Combination of VCT and BIOs

The transformer module (VCT) is located at the far right slot (e.g., at ‘VC1’ in Figure 13.3-3).
Identify the code at Position ‘7’ to know the VCT type (e.g., VCT49B is mounted when Figure
13.3-2 is ture.).
The user can check the layout of the binary input and output modules (BI, BO, or BIO)
using the ordering codes. For example, the user can find BI3A and BO1A modules in IED
depending the ordering cords “4H” at Positions A&B. The user can also read the configuration
with IO configuration label. Additionally, the user can check terminal block types by seeing a
code at Positon ‘H’.
- 812 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Ordering positions
- 3 1 - 3 4 H - 0 0 - 6 6 - 3 0 - 26 A
H Terminal block for BIO and PWS
0 Compression plug type terminal
1 Ring type terminal
Ring type terminal
Compression plug type

terminal
Figure 13.3-3 IO configuration label example (viewing from the back in 3/4 size case)
Note: See Section IED case and module slot in Chapter Technical description to find the
structure of IED cases and terminals. For more information about the BI, BO, and
BIO circuits, see Section Binary IO module in the same chapter.
(iv) Communication modules (LAN and others)

Figure 13.3-3 shows communication modules are implemented at C11 to C15. The layouts of
the communication modules are matched with Ordering codes at Positions ‘E and F’.
Ordering positions
- 3 1 - 3 4 H - 0 0 - 6 6 - 3 0 - 26 A
Selected LAN and IRIG
Figure 13.3-4 Example for module selected
- 813 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(v) Relay and control software

Verifying relay software is possible to check the codes at Positons ‘S, G, and T’ on Software
nameplate. For example of Figure 13.3-5, the IED has ‘03D’ software†. This IED can operate
in the IEC61850 protocol‡.
Positions
7 S G T E F U 9 V
- 3 0 3 D - 6 6 2 - 3 E
GRT200- --
Selected language
Selected protocol
Selected software
Figure 13.3-5 Software nameplate example on the rear

†Note:For more information about relay functions, see Chapter Relay application.
‡Note:For more information about the communication, see Chapter Communication
protocol.
(vi) Flange covers and labels

Two flange covers (blue ones in Figure 13.3-6) are included in the package. The user can attach
them on the IED when mounting into the rack (see succeeding section Rack mounting).
LEDs label
Pockets for labels
Function keys label
Flange covers
Figure 13.3-6 Flange covers and labels attached on IED
- 814 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(vii) White-plastic-sheets for IED case sides

When the user wishes to mount an IED case in the 19-inch rack, the user should have
arrangements and preparations of the IED in advance. There are two types with regard to the
structures of IED cases.
Rack mounting type: flanges have to be screwed and fixed on the case, and countersunk screws
are provided for them. When wishing to place the IED case in a 19-inch rack, put white-
plastics-sheets on the countersunk screws to cover up (see Figure 13.3-7); they are bundled in
its package. Detach the flange from the case if combining cases is required with a mounting
kit. Remind that the user needs to put the white-plastic-sheet over the countersunk screws on
each side.
Left silver-flange Right silver-flange
White White
plastic Countersunk plastic
sheet Relay case sheet
screws
Figure 13.3-7 Covering the screw holes with white plastic sheets
Note: When the case is ordered in 1/1 size one; the flange is integrated so that the
countersunk screws and white-plastic-sheets are not provided.
Note: For more information about how to mount a case in a rack, see Installation
handbook for rack mounting, cable work, etc. (6F2S1954). The user can get a
mounting kit by ordering (see Appendix: Ordering).
Flush-mounting type: flanges are integrated at the both sides of the case. Thus, the white-
plastics-sheets are not bundled.
- 815 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
PWS alarm threshold setting

The IED has power supply module (PWS) at the far left slot. The user can confirm DC rated
voltage on the hardware nameplate by checking the cord at Positions ‘8’, but the user should
select either alarm thresholds for dropping DC voltage by inserting a jumper on the PWS
(Figure 13.4-1). See Section Power supply module in Chapter Technical description.
Ordering positions
- x 1 - x x x - x x - x x - x x - x x x
DC rated voltage, e.g., 1=’110 to 250Vdc’, selected by the ordering
Figure 13.4-1 Alarm threshold set on PWS module
CAUTION
Note: A short-wire is connected between terminal screws No. 35–37; and that is done by
the manufacturer. The user shall remove that when the user undertakes the
dielectric voltage test for the IED; and the user shall connect again the terminals
with that after the test (See Appendix: Notes for the dielectric voltage test).
29 27 28
30
29 30
31
32 31 32
33 33 34
Short wire 34 Short wire
35 36
35
36 38
37 FG
38
39
40
FG
FG
Figure 13.4-2 PWS terminal labels
- 816 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
14 Commissioning and maintenance

Required test 818 Test operations –
Cautions 819 -Binary output circuit test (BO) 822
Preparations 819 -Binary input circuit test (BI) 822
-Canceling supervision function (AMF) 822
-GOOSE test (61850) 821
-LED light test 823
-Mode test (MDCTRL) 822
-Over excitation test (VPH) 822
-Logic single monitor 823
-Thermal overload test (THM) 822
- 817 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Scope of required test

Commissioning tests should be a minimum; it may be required hardware and conjunctive tests.
Tests regarding relay and control function may be carried out at the user’s discretion. During
the tests, the user can access IED functions through the front panel or using the GR-TIEMS
engineering tool. The user is generally required to be familiar with the functions regarding the
testing practices; the user shall understand the safety precautions to avoid personal injuries
or equipment damage.
Hardware tests
Hardware tests should be carried out to ensure that there is no hardware defect in the IED.
Defects of hardware circuits can be detected in automatic supervision function when the DC
power is supplied.
Function tests
Function tests are software-based testing. Dynamic test set can be required in several
protection tests.
Conjunctive tests
After the hardware and function test in the IED, conjunctive tests can be carried out with
primary equipment, telecommunication and other external equipment. On-load test, Signal
test, and tripping CB test may be required.
- 818 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Cautions
(i) Safety Precautions
CAUTION
 The IED rack is provided with a grounding terminal.
Before starting the work, always make sure the IED rack is grounded.
 When connecting the cable to the back of the IED, firmly fix it to the terminal block
and attach the cover provided on top of it.
 Before checking the interior of the IED, be sure to turn off the power.
 Class 1 laser.
Failure to observe any of the precautions above may cause electric shock or malfunction.
(ii) Cautions on Tests

CAUTION
 While the power is on, do not connect/disconnect the flat cable on the front of the
printed circuit board (PCB).
 While the power is on, do not mount/dismount the PCB.
 Before the power is on, check the following:
- Make sure the polarity and voltage of the power supply are correct.
- Make sure the CT circuit is not open.
- Make sure the VT circuit is not short-circuited.
 Transformer module is damaged due to an overcurrent or overvoltage.
 Clear test settings after the test; then, set original settings again.
Failure to observe any of the precautions above may cause damage or malfunction of the relay.
Before mounting/dismounting the PCB, take antistatic measures such as wearing an earthed
wristband.
Preparations
Test equipment
The following test equipment is required for the commissioning tests.
1 Three-phase voltage source
2 Single-phase current sources
1 Dynamic three-phase test set (for protection scheme test)
1 DC power supply
3 DC voltmeters
3 AC voltmeters
3 Phase angle meters
2 AC ammeters
- 819 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
1 Time counter, precision timer

1 PC (not essential)
Relay settings
Before starting the tests, it must be specified whether the tests will use the user’s settings or
the default settings.
Visual inspection
After unpacking the product, check for any damage to the IED case. If there is any damage,
the internal module might also have been affected. Contact the vendor.
Relay ratings
Check that the items described on the nameplate on the front of the IED conform to the user’s
specification. The items are: relay type and model, AC voltage, current and frequency ratings,
and auxiliary DC supply voltage rating.
Local PC
To examine the IED with a PC locally, connect the PC with the IED using a USB cable. The
GR-TIEMS software is required to install in the PC.
During commissioning and maintenance, check wire connection and observe relay output
signals. The user can see the signals whether the relay operations are appropriate or not.
- 820 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Test operations
The user can change IED to for Test mode by the operations on the IED front panel with
Main/Sub menus, as shown in Figure 14.4-1.
Main Menu Sub-menu Sub-menu Sub-menu Sub-menu
Main Menu Record
Monitoring
Setting
IO Setting
Control
Time
Test Test Mode Test Option S-TestFlagCancel

GOSNDBLK
GOSBUBLK
Function Test A.M.F.

CLP-Test
THM-Test
THM-IP
UV-Test
UVS-Test
TestFlag-EN VPH-Test
Binary Input (Slot#n) BI*F OP

SLOT*-BI01-SET
SLOT*-BI02-SET
SLOT*-BI03-SET
…..
Binary Output (Slot#n) BO*F OP

SLOT*-BO01-SET
SLOT*-BO02-SET
Simultaneous Fault SLOT*-BO03-SET
…..
Mode Change MDCTRL-EN

MDCTRL-SELRST
MDCTRL-EXERST
Signal Monitoring Term A

Term B
Term C
Information
Security Setting
Login/Logout
Figure 14.4-1 Structure of test menu
Note: The structure and the contents about sub-menus depend on the software.
14.4.1 Test for communication

(i) GOOSE sending block (GOSNDBLK)
This is used for selecting or disabling the GOOSE sending information where there is a conflict
in communication with another active IED while sending a GOOSE signal.
- 821 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(ii) GOOSE receiving block (GOSUBBLK)

This is used for receiving or rejecting GOOSE subscription information from another IED for
testing bad reception. See Chapter Communication protocol: IEC 61850 communication.
(iii) Test flag cancel (S-TestFlagCancel)

Test flag in the communication packet will be removed unconditionally, when On is set for
setting [Test flag].
(iv) Test for all communication (TestFlag-EN)

Setting [TestFlag-EN]=On allows to set test flags at all communication protocol (see Chapter
User interface: Test-submenu).
14.4.2 Test for relay application

(i) Auto monitoring function (A.M.F)
Issuing alarms will be blocked when Off is set for [A.M.F]. For the content about the monitoring
function, see Chapter Automatic supervision function.
(ii) Thermal overload function test (THM-Test, THM-IP)

Setting [THM-Test]=On allows to have a test value for the pre-load current (Ip). The Ip value
is discussed in Chapter Relay application: Thermal overload function.
(iii) Over-excitation test (VPH-Test)

Setting [VPH-Test]=On allows users to have the integral state being initialized. See Chapter
Relay application: Over-excitation protection for more detail.
14.4.3 Test for BI and BO circuits

(i) Binary input circuit test (SLOT*BIxx-SET)
Setting [SLOT*-BIxx-SET] allows to have a virtual input at a binary input circuit.
(ii) Binary output circuit test (SLOT*BOxx-SET)

Setting [SLOT*-BIxx-SET] allows to have a virtual output at a binary input circuit.
Note: For the BI and BO test operation, see Chapter User interface: Test sub-menu,
separately.
14.4.4 Test for mode change (MDCTRL)

The function is provided to detect a test mode. For more information, see Chapter General
control function: Mode control function, separately.
- 822 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
14.4.5 Signal monitor

The function is provided in order that the user can observe IED internal signals. For more
information, see Chapter Technical description: Human machine interface: Monitoring jacks,
separately.
14.4.6 LED light test

The user can perform LED lighting test by pressing the keys ◄ and ►. Press the both keys on
the front panel for a few seconds. If there is no problem, all LEDs will be lit.
- 823 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Setting
Setting for communication test
U
n
Default setting
Setting item Range i Contents Notes
value
t
s
TestFlag-EN Off / On - Change test flag on Protocol On
GOSNDBLK Off / On - GOOSE publishing block Off
GOSUBBLK Off / On - GOOSE subscription block Off
Test flag of slave communication protocol is
S-TestFlagCancel Off / On Off
canceled
Setting for function option

U Default setting
Range
n value
Setting item i Contents Notes
1A 5A 1A 5A
t
rating rating rating rating
s
A.M.F. Off / On Supervisor function use or not On
THM-Test Off / On To utilize the setting[THM-IP] Off
THM-IP 0.00 - 1.00 0.00 - 5.00 Previous load current for thermal testing 0.00
To initilize an integral state of the inverse
VPH-Test Off / On Off
time
- 824 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Signal
TEST (Function ID: 201301)
3100051197 SIM FAULT OUTPUT for Sim.Fault Display
3100001190 TEST MODE Mode of test

BIO_FORCE (Function ID: 240101)
3110001198 BI1F OP BI1 forced operate start
311A001198 BI11F OP BI11 forced operate start
311B001198 BI12F OP BI12 forced operate start
311C001198 BI13F OP BI13 forced operate start
311D001198 BI14F OP BI14 forced operate start
311E001198 BI15F OP BI15 forced operate start
311F001198 BI16F OP BI16 forced operate start
3110201198 BO1F OP BO1 forced operate start
311A201198 BO11F OP BO11 forced operate start
311B201198 BO12F OP BO12 forced operate start
311C201198 BO13F OP BO13 forced operate start
311D201198 BO14F OP BO14 forced operate start
311E201198 BO15F OP BO15 forced operate start
311F201198 BO16F OP BO16 forced operate start
- 825 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Appendix 1 Signal list for common function
- 826 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

CONST_VALUE (Function ID: 100001)
C0_BIT 8000001220 Constant value 0 expressed with binary in BIT type
C1_BIT 8000011220 Constant value 1 expressed with binary in BIT type
C0_N8 2000001128 Constant value 0 expressed with unsigned integer in 8 bit
C0_N32 220000112A Constant value 0 expressed with unsigned integer in 32 bit
C1_N32 220001112A Constant value 1 expressed with unsigned integer in 32 bit
C0_N64 230000112B Constant value 0 expressed with unsigned integer in 64 bit
C1_N64 230001112B Constant value 1 expressed with unsigned integer in 64 bit
C0_S8 2000001120 Constant value 0 expressed with signed integer in 8 bit
C10_S8 20000A1120 Constant value 10 expressed with signed integer in 8 bit
C11_S8 20000B1120 Constant value 11 expressed with signed integer in 8 bit
C12_S8 20000C1120 Constant value 12 expressed with signed integer in 8 bit
C13_S8 20000D1120 Constant value 13 expressed with signed integer in 8 bit
C14_S8 20000E1120 Constant value 14 expressed with signed integer in 8 bit
C15_S8 20000F1120 Constant value 15 expressed with signed integer in 8 bit
- 827 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

- 828 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)


- 829 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

C0_U8 3000001124 Constant value 0 expressed with unsigned integer in 8 bit
C10_U8 30000A1124 Constant value 10 expressed with unsigned integer in 8 bit
C11_U8 30000B1124 Constant value 11 expressed with unsigned integer in 8 bit
C12_U8 30000C1124 Constant value 12 expressed with unsigned integer in 8 bit
C13_U8 30000D1124 Constant value 13 expressed with unsigned integer in 8 bit
C14_U8 30000E1124 Constant value 14 expressed with unsigned integer in 8 bit
C15_U8 30000F1124 Constant value 15 expressed with unsigned integer in 8 bit
- 830 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

- 831 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)


BI1F OP 3110001198 BI1 forced operate start
- 832 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

BI11F OP 311A001198 BI11 forced operate start
BI12F OP 311B001198 BI12 forced operate start
BI13F OP 311C001198 BI13 forced operate start
BI14F OP 311D001198 BI14 forced operate start
BI15F OP 311E001198 BI15 forced operate start
BI16F OP 311F001198 BI16 forced operate start
BO1F OP 3110201198 BO1 forced operate start
BO11F OP 311A201198 BO11 forced operate start
BO12F OP 311B201198 BO12 forced operate start
BO13F OP 311C201198 BO13 forced operate start
BO14F OP 311D201198 BO14 forced operate start
BO15F OP 311E201198 BO15 forced operate start
BO16F OP 311F201198 BO16 forced operate start
BI11F OP 311A001198 BI11 forced operate start
BI12F OP 311B001198 BI12 forced operate start
BI13F OP 311C001198 BI13 forced operate start
BI14F OP 311D001198 BI14 forced operate start
- 833 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Appendix 2 Case outline

Types Case figures Figures (pages)
1 / 1 case size Figure 2-1.1 (835)
Type using compression 1 / 1 with 2 VCTs Figure 2-1.2 (836)
terminals 3 / 4 size case Figure 2-1.3 (837)
1 / 2 size case Figure 2-1.4 (838)
1 / 1 with 2 VCTs Figure 2-2.2 (839)
Type using ring terminals
Panel cutout† 3 / 4 size case Figure 2-3.2 (843)
†Note:Panel cutout figures are common for both types.
- 834 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Type using compression terminals
† The (38) means the

height of the VCT terminal.
Unit: mm
/1
s1/1 size case & Type using compression terminals

1/1 size case with a VCT & Type using compression terminals
Figure 2-1.1 Trihedral figure (1/1 size with single VCT ) & Type using compression
- 835 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

Unit: mm
1/1 size case & Type using compression terminals

Figure 2-1.2 Trihedral figure (1/1 size with dual VCTs ) & Type using compression terminals
- 836 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
compression plug and ring lug types

Unit: mm
3/4 size case &Type using compression terminals

Figure 2-1.3 Trihedral figure (3/4 size case) & Type using compression ter mnals
- 837 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)

Unit: mm
1/2 size case & Type using compression terminals

Figure 2-1.4 Trihedral figure (1/2 size case) & Type using compression terminals
- 838 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Type using ring terminals

441.5
437
256.3
229.3
190.5
265.9
260.7
260.7
465 229.3 (64.4)
478 256.3
† The (64.4) means the height of
the tallest ring type terminal.
Unit: mm
1/1 size case & Ring terminals

Figure 2-2.1 Trihedral figure (1/1 size case with a VCT) & Type using ring terminals
- 839 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
441.5
437
256.3
229.3
190.5
265.9
260.7
260.7
465 229.3 (64.4)
478 256.3
† The (64.4) means the
Unit: mm
Figure Trihedral figure (1/1 case size) with Ring lug type terminal
Figure 2-2.2 Trihedral figure (1/1 size case with dual VCTs) & Type using ring terminals
- 840 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
325
320
256.3
229.3
265.9
260.7
190.5
260.7
348 229.3 (64.4)
361 256.3
Unit: mm
3/4 size case & ring terminals

Figure 2-2.3 Trihedral figure (3/4 size case) & Type using ring terminals
- 841 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
218
214
256.3
229.3
265.9
260.7
190.5
260.7
242 229.3 (64.4)
255 256.3
Unit: mm
1/2 size case & ring terminals

Figure 2-2.4 Trihedral figure (1/2 size case) & Type using ring terminals
- 842 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Panel cutout
Unit: mm
Panel cut out for 1/1 case size
Figure 2.2-1 Panel cutout (1/1 size case)
Unit: mm
Figure 2.2-2 Panel cutout (3/4 size case)
- 843 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Unit: mm
Figure 2.2-3 Panel cutout figure (1/2 size case)
- 844 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Appendix 3 Typical external connection

Case and terminal
Model Examples of hardware codes Figures (pages)
types
Model 3 GRT200-31-234-00-6L-30-111 Figure 3-1 (846)
Type using
compression terminals
Type using ring
terminals
Typical external
connection diagram
- 845 -
1／1 size case (GRT200-31-234-00-6L-30-111)
[IO#8] [IO#7] [IO#6] [IO#5] [IO#4] [IO#3] [IO#2] [IO#1] [VCT#1]

T9 T8 T7 T6 T5 T4 T3 T2 T1 VC1
PWS1 A BIO3 A BO1 A BI1 A C11 VCT49B
100BASE-TX
(+) 1 1 (+) 1 1000BASE-T 1
2 BI1 BO1(*2) BI1 Va-1VT
(-) 2 2 (-) 2 2
4
(+) 3 3 (+) 3 3
3
FAIL1 BI2 BO2(*2) BI2 Vb-1VT
(-) 4 4 (-) 4 4
1
(+) 5 5 (+) 5 5
BI3 BO3(*2) BI3 Vc-1VT
(-) 6 6 (-) 6 6
8
10 (+) 7 (+) 7 7
7 C12
BI4 BO4(*2) BI4 100BASE-TX 8
Ia-1CT
9 (-) 8 8 (-) 8
FAIL2 1000BASE-T
7 (+) 9 (+) 9 9
9
BI5 BO5(*2) BI5 10
Ib-1CT
(-) 10 10 (-) 10
(+) 11 11 (+) 11 11
BI6 BO6(*2) BI6 12

Ic-1CT
(-) 12 12 (-) 12
(+) 13 13 (+) 13 13
BI7 BO7(*4) BI7 14

Ia-2CT
(-) 14 14 (-) 14
(+) 15
C13 15
(+) 15 15
BI8 BO8(*4) BI8 16
Ib-2CT
(-) 16 16 (-) 16
17 (+) 17 17
BO9(*4) BI9
18 (-) 18 18
Ic-2CT
21 21 (+) 21 19
BO1(F) BO10(*4) BI10
22 22 (-) 22 20
Ia-3CT
2¥¥
23 23 (+) 23 21
BO2(F) BO11(*4) BI11 C14
24 24 (-) 24 22
Ib-3CT
25 25 (+) 25 23
BO3(F) BO12(*4) BI12
26 26 (-) 26 24
Ic-3CT
27 27 (+) 27 25
BO4(F) BO13(*4) BI13
28 28 (-) 28 26
In-1NCT
(+) 29 (+) 29
29 29 27
30
DC/DC BO5(F) BO14(*4) BI14
30 30 (-) 30 28
In-2NCT
(-) 31 31 (+) 31
31 C15
32 BO6(F) BO15(*4) BI15 IRIG-B000
32 32 (-) 32 30
A1
35
33 (+) 33 B1
33 SIG
36 BI16
BO7 BO16(*4) (-) 34 A2
34 34 DISUSE
37 B2
(+) 35 DISUSE
38 35 35
A3
37 BO17(*4) BI17
(-) 36 B3
36
GND
36 (+) 37
BO8 37
38 BI18
BO18(*4) (-) 38
38
GRT#6 (0.0)
●FG ●FGE ● FGD ●FGC ●FGB ●FGA ●FG1 ●E
Figure 3-1 GRT200 (Model3, BIO3A+BO1A+BI1A, 100Base-TX/1000Base-T, IRIG) in 1/1 size case & Type using compression terminals
6F2S1924 (0.26)

- 846 -
1／1 size case (GRT200-31-234-00-6L-31-111)
[IO#7] [IO#6] [IO#5] [IO#4] [IO#3] [IO#2] [IO#1] [VCT#1]

T8 T7 T6 T5 T4 T3 T2 T1 VC1
100BASE-TX
(+) 1 1 (+) 1 1000BASE-T 1
2 BI1 BO1(*2) BI1 Va-1VT
(-) 2 2 (-) 2 2
4
(+) 3 3 (+) 3 3
3
(-) 4 4 (-) 4 4
1
(+) 5 5 (+) 5 5
BI3 BO3(*2) BI3 Vc-1VT
(-) 6 6 (-) 6 6
8
10 (+) 7 (+) 7 7
7 C12
BI4 BO4(*2) BI4 100BASE-TX 8
Ia-1CT
9 (-) 8 8 (-) 8
FAIL2 1000BASE-T
7 (+) 9 (+) 9 9
9
BI5 BO5(*2) BI5 10
Ib-1CT
(-) 10 10 (-) 10
(+) 11 11 (+) 11 11
BI6 BO6(*2) BI6 12

Ic-1CT
(-) 12 12 (-) 12
(+) 13 13 (+) 13 13
BI7 BO7(*4) BI7 14

Ia-2CT
(-) 14 14 (-) 14
(+) 15
C13 15
(+) 15 15
BI8 BO8(*4) BI8 16
Ib-2CT
(-) 16 16 (-) 16
17 (+) 17 17
BO9(*4) BI9
18 (-) 18 18
Ic-2CT
21 21 (+) 21 19
BO1(F) BO10(*4) BI10
22 22 (-) 22 20
Ia-3CT
2¥¥
23 23 (+) 23 21
BO2(F) BO11(*4) BI11 C14
24 24 (-) 24 22
Ib-3CT
25 25 (+) 25 23
BO3(F) BO12(*4) BI12
26 26 (-) 26 24
Ic-3CT
27 27 (+) 27 25
BO4(F) BO13(*4) BI13
28 28 (-) 28 26
In-1NCT
(+) 29 (+) 29
29 29 27
30
DC/DC BO5(F) BO14(*4) BI14
30 30 (-) 30 28
In-2NCT
(-) 31 31 (+) 31
31 C15
32 BO6(F) BO15(*4) BI15 IRIG-B000
32 32 (-) 32 30
A1
35
33 (+) 33 B1
33 SIG
36 BI16
BO7 BO16(*4) (-) 34 A2
34 34 DISUSE
37 B2
(+) 35 DISUSE
38 35 35
A3
37 BO17(*4) BI17
(-) 36 B3
36
GND
36 (+) 37
BO8 37
38 BI18
BO18(*4) (-) 38
38
GRT#6 (0.0)
●FG ●FGD ●FGC ●FGB ●FGA ●FG1 ●E
Figure 3-2 GRT200 (Model3, BIO3A+BO1A+BI1A, 100Base-TX/1000Base-T, IRIG) in 1/1 size case & Type using ring terminals
6F2S1924 (0.26)

- 847 -
1／1 size case (GRT200-41-234-00-6L-30-111)
[IO#8] [IO#7] [IO#6] [IO#5] [IO#4] [IO#3] [IO#2] [IO#1] [VCT#1]

T9 T8 T7 T6 T5 T4 T3 T2 T1 VC1
100BASE-TX
(+) 1 1 (+) 1 1000BASE-T 1
2 BI1 BO1(*2) BI1 (Not used)
(-) 2 2 (-) 2 2
4
(+) 3 3 (+) 3
3
FAIL1 BI2 BO2(*2) BI2
(-) 4 4 (-) 4
1
(+) 5 5 (+) 5 5
BI3 BO3(*2) BI3 Ia-1CT
(-) 6 6 (-) 6 6
8
10 (+) 7 7 (+) 7 C12 7
BI4 BO4(*2) BI4 100BASE-TX Ib-1CT
9 (-) 8 8 (-) 8 8
FAIL2 1000BASE-T
7 (+) 9 9 (+) 9 9
BI5 BO5(*2) BI5 Ic-1CT
(-) 10 10 (-) 10 10
(+) 11 11 (+) 11 11
BI6 BO6(*2) BI6 Ia-2CT

(-) 12 12 (-) 12 12
(+) 13 13 (+) 13 13
BI7 BO7(*4) BI7 Ib-2CT

(-) 14 14 (-) 14 14
(+) 15
C13 15
(+) 15 15
(-) 16 16 (-) 16 16
17 (+) 17 17
BO9(*4) BI9 Ia-3CT

18 (-) 18 18
21 21 (+) 21 19
BO1(F) BO10(*4) BI10 Ib-3CT

22 22 (-) 22 20
2¥¥
23 23 (+) 23 21
BO2(F) BO11(*4) BI11 C14 Ic-3CT

24 24 (-) 24 22
25 25 (+) 25 23
BO3(F) BO12(*4) BI12 In-1NCT

26 26 (-) 26 24
27 27 (+) 27 25
BO4(F) BO13(*4) BI13 In-2NCT

28 28 (-) 28 26
(+) 29 (+) 29 27
29 29
30
DC/DC BO5(F) BO14(*4) BI14 In-3NCT
30 30 (-) 30 28
(-) 31 31 (+) 31
31 C15
32 BO6(F) BO15(*4) BI15 IRIG-B000
32 (-) 32 30
32
A1
35
33 (+) 33 B1
33 SIG
36 BI16
BO7 BO16(*4) (-) 34 A2
34 34 DISUSE
37 B2
(+) 35 DISUSE
38 35 35
A3
37 BO17(*4) BI17
(-) 36 B3
36
GND
36 (+) 37
BO8 37
38 BI18
BO18(*4) (-) 38
38
GRT#3&5 (1.0)
●FG ●FGE ● FGD ●FGC ●FGB ●FGA ●FG1 ●E
6F2S1924 (0.26)

- 848 -
1／1 size case (GRT200-41-234-00-6L-31-111)
[IO#7] [IO#6] [IO#5] [IO#4] [IO#3] [IO#2] [IO#1] [VCT#1]

T8 T7 T6 T5 T4 T3 T2 T1 VC1
100BASE-TX
(+) 1 1 (+) 1 1000BASE-T 1
2 BI1 BO1(*2) BI1 Va
(-) 2 2 (-) 2 2
4
(+) 3 3 (+) 3 3
3
FAIL1 BI2 BO2(*2) BI2 Vb
(-) 4 4 (-) 4 4
1
(+) 5 5 (+) 5 5
BI3 BO3(*2) BI3 Vc

(-) 6 6 (-) 6 6
8
10 (+) 7 7 (+) 7 C12 7
BI4 BO4(*2) BI4 100BASE-TX Vs/Ve
9 (-) 8 8 (-) 8 8
FAIL2 1000BASE-T
7 (+) 9 9 (+) 9 9
BI5 BO5(*2) BI5 Vs2/Ve

(-) 10 10 (-) 10 10
(+) 11 11 (+) 11 11
BI6 BO6(*2) BI6 Ia

(-) 12 12 (-) 12 12
(+) 13 13 (+) 13 13
BI7 BO7(*4) BI7 Ib

(-) 14 14 (-) 14 14
(+) 15
C13 15
(+) 15 15
BI8 BO8(*4) BI8 Ic
(-) 16 16 (-) 16 16
17 (+) 17 17
BO9(*4) BI9 Ie
18 (-) 18 18
21 21 (+) 21
BO1(F) BO10(*4) BI10

22 22 (-) 22
2¥¥
23 23 (+) 23
BO2(F) BO11(*4) BI11 C14

24 24 (-) 24
25 25 (+) 25
BO3(F) BO12(*4) BI12

26 26 (-) 26
27 27 (+) 27
BO4(F) BO13(*4) BI13

28 28 (-) 28
(+) 29 (+) 29 27
29 29
30
DC/DC BO5(F) BO14(*4) BI14 Iem
30 30 (-) 30 28
(-) 31 31 (+) 31
31 C15
32 BO6(F) BO15(*4) BI15 IRIG-B000
32 (-) 32 30
32
A1
35
33 (+) 33 B1
33 SIG
36 BI16
BO7 BO16(*4) (-) 34 A2
34 34 DISUSE
37 B2
(+) 35 DISUSE
38 35 35
A3
37 BO17(*4) BI17
(-) 36 B3
36
GND
36 (+) 37
BO8 37
38 BI18
BO18(*4) (-) 38
38
GRZ/GRL (1.0)
●FG ●FGD ●FGC ●FGB ●FGA ●FG1 ●E
Figure 3-4 GRT200 (Model4, BIO3A+BO1A+BI1A, 100Base-TX/1000Base-T, IRIG) in 1/1 size case & Type using ring terminals
6F2S1924 (0.26)

- 849 -
1／1 size case (GRT200-51-434-00-6L-30-111)
[IO#8] [IO#7] [IO#6] [IO#5] [IO#4] [IO#3] [IO#2] [IO#1] [VCT#1] [VCT#2]
T9 T8 T7 T6 T5 T4 T3 T2 T1 VC1 VC2
BIO3 A BO1 A BI1 A C11 VCT44B VCT48B
PWS1 A
100BASE-TX
(+) 1 1 (+) 1 1000BASE-T 1 1
2 BI1 BO1(SF) BI1 (Not used)

(-) 2 2 (-) 2 2 2
Va-1VT
4
(+) 3 3 (+) 3 3
3
FAIL1 BI2 BO2(SF) BI2 Vb-1VT
(-) 4 4 (-) 4 4
1
(+) 5 5 (+) 5 5 5
BI3 BO3(SF) BI3 Ia-1CT Vc-1VT
(-) 6 6 (-) 6 6 6
8
10 (+) 7 7 (+) 7 C12 7
BI4 BO4(SF) BI4 100BASE-TX Ib-1CT
9 (-) 8 8 (-) 8 8
FAIL2 1000BASE-T
7 (+) 9 9 (+) 9 9 9
BI5 BO5(SF) BI5 Ic-1CT Va-2VT
(-) 10 10 (-) 10 10 10
(+) 11 11 (+) 11 11 11
BI6 BO6(SF) BI6 Ia-2CT Vb-2VT
(-) 12 12 (-) 12 12 12
(+) 13 13 (+) 13 13 13
BI7 BO7 BI7 Ib-2CT Vc-2VT

(-) 14 14 (-) 14 14 14
(+) 15
C13 15
(+) 15 15
BI8 BO8 BI8 Ic-2CT
(-) 16 16 (-) 16 16
17 (+) 17 17 17
BO9 BI9 Ia-3CT Ia-4CT
18 (-) 18 18 18
21 21 (+) 21 19 19
BO1(F) BO10 BI10 Ib-3CT Ib-4CT

22 22 (-) 22 20 20
2¥¥
23 23 (+) 23 21 21
BO2(F) BO11 BI11 C14 Ic-3CT Ic-4CT

24 24 (-) 24 22 22
25 25 (+) 25 23 23
BO3(F) BO12 BI12 In-1NCT Ia-5CT

26 26 (-) 26 24 24
27 27 (+) 27 25 25
BO4(F) BO13 BI13 In-2NCT Ib-5CT

28 28 (-) 28 26 26
(+) 29 (+) 29 27 27
29 29
30
DC/DC BO5(F) BO14 BI14 In-3NCT Ic-5CT
30 30 (-) 30 28 28
(-) 31 31 (+) 31
31 C15
32 BO6(F) BO15 BI15 IRIG-B000
32 32 (-) 32 30 30
A1
35 (+) 33
33 33 B1
SIG
36 BI16
BO7 BO16 (-) 34 A2
34 34 DISUSE
37 B2
(+) 35 DISUSE
38 35 35
A3
37 BO17 BI17
(-) 36 B3
36
GND
36 (+) 37
BO8 37
38 BO18 BI18
(-) 38
38
GRT#3&5 (1.0) GRT#5 (1.0)
●FG ●FGE ●FGD ●FGC ●FGB ●FG1 ●FGA ●FG2 ●E
6F2S1924 (0.26)

- 850 -
1／1 size case (GRT200-51-434-00-6L-31-111)
[IO#5] [IO#4] [IO#3] [IO#2] [IO#1] [VCT#1] [VCT#2]

PWS1 A BIO3 A BO1 A BI1 A C11 VCT44B VCT48B
100BASE-TX
(+) 1 1 (+) 1 1000BASE-T 1 1
2 BI1 BO1(*2) BI1 (Not used) Va-1VT
(-) 2 2 (-) 2 2 2
4
(+) 3 3 (+) 3 3
3
(-) 4 4 (-) 4 4
1
(+) 5 5 (+) 5 5 5
BI3 BO3(*2) BI3 Ia-1CT Vc-1VT
(-) 6 6 (-) 6 6 6
8
10 (+) 7 7 (+) 7 C12 7
BI4 BO4(*2) BI4 100BASE-TX Ib-1CT
9 (-) 8 8 (-) 8 8
FAIL2 1000BASE-T
7 (+) 9 9 (+) 9 9 9
BI5 BO5(*2) BI5 Ic-1CT Va-2VT
(-) 10 10 (-) 10 10 10
(+) 11 11 (+) 11 11 11
BI6 BO6(*2) BI6 Ia-2CT Vb-2VT
(-) 12 12 (-) 12 12 12
(+) 13 13 (+) 13 13 13
BI7 BO7(*4) BI7 Ib-2CT Vc-2VT

(-) 14 14 (-) 14 14 14
(+) 15
C13 15
(+) 15 15
(-) 16 16 (-) 16 16
17 (+) 17 17 17
BO9(*4) BI9 Ia-3CT Ia-4CT

18 (-) 18 18 18
21 21 (+) 21 19 19
BO1(F) BO10(*4) BI10 Ib-3CT Ib-4CT

22 22 (-) 22 20 20
2¥¥
23 23 (+) 23 21 21
BO2(F) BO11(*4) BI11 C14 Ic-3CT Ic-4CT

24 24 (-) 24 22 22
25 25 (+) 25 23 23
BO3(F) BO12(*4) BI12 In-1NCT Ia-5CT

26 26 (-) 26 24 24
27 27 (+) 27 25 25
BO4(F) BO13(*4) BI13 In-2NCT Ib-5CT

28 28 (-) 28 26 26
(+) 29 (+) 29 27
29 29 27
30
DC/DC BO5(F) BO14(*4) BI14 In-3NCT Ic-5CT
30 30 (-) 30 28 28
(-) 31 31 (+) 31
31 C15
32 BO6(F) BO15(*4) BI15 IRIG-B000
32 (-) 32 30 30
32
A1
35
33 (+) 33 B1
33 SIG
36 BI16
BO7 BO16(*4) (-) 34 A2
34 34 DISUSE
37 B2
(+) 35 DISUSE
38 35 35
A3
37 BO17(*4) BI17
(-) 36 B3
36
GND
36 (+) 37
BO8 37
38 BI18
BO18(*4) (-) 38
38
GRT#3&5 (1.0) GRT#5 (1.0)
●FG ●FGB ●FGA ●FG1 ●FG2 ●E
Figure 3-6 GRT200 (Model5, BIO3A+BO1A+BI1A, 100Base-TX/1000Base-T, IRIG) in 1/1 size case & Type using ring .terminals
6F2S1924 (0.26)

- 851 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Example (GRT200-41-234-00-6L-30-111): VCT44B, IO: BI1A, BO1A and BIO3A in Model4
TB1-5
6
7
8
9
CT 10
23
24
11
12
13
14
15
16
25
26
1
17 BI1
2
18
19 3
20 1 BI2 4
21 BO1 Semi-fast BO
2 5
22
3 BI3 6
BO2 4 Semi-fast BO
7
27
5 BI4
28 8
BO3 6 Semi-fast BO
9
1 7
BI5 10
2 BO4 Semi-fast BO
8
11
9
CT BI6 12
BO5 Semi-fast BO
10
13
11
BI7 14
20 BO6 12 Semi-fast BO
(FG) 15
13
BO7 BI8 16
1 14
2 BI1 15
21
BO8 16
3 BO1 Fast BO
BIO3A 22
4 BI2 17
23
BO9 18
5 BO2 Fast BO
BO1A 24
6 BI3 21
BO10 25
7 22 BO3 Fast BO
26
BI4 23
8 27
BO11 24
9 BO4 Fast BO
28
25
10 BI5 29
BO12 26
11 BO5 Fast BO
30
27
12 BI6 31
BO13 28 BO6 Fast BO
13 32
29
14 BI7 33
BO14 30
15 BO7 34
31
16 BI8 BO15 35
32
17 36
33
Programmable BI 18 BI9 BO16 37
34 BO8
21 BI1A
35
22 BI10 BO17 38
36
23
37
24 BI11 BO18 38
25
26 BI12
COM-A A1
27 B1
COM-B A2
28 BI13 B2 RS485 I/F
29 COM-0V A3 (option)
B3
30 BI14 RJ45
31 Ethernet LAN I/F (option)
BI15 COM
32 Optic I/F (option)
33
34 BI16 SIG A1
B1
35 DISUSE A2
B2
36 BI17 A3 IRIG-B (option)
GND B3
37
38 BI18
PWS
1A
RELAY 2
1
FAIL.DD FAIL. 4
DC (+) 29
30 +5Vdc 3
SUPPLY FAIL
31 RELAY FAILURE 1
(-) 32 DC-DC 1
0V
8
35
36 10
37
9
38 FAIL RELAY FAILURE 2
FG 7
E
Figure 3-8 External connection diagram for Model4: VCT44B, IO: BI1A, BO1A and BIO3A
- 852 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
BI1A BI2A BI3A BO1A BO2A

1 1 1
(+)
BI1
(+) (+) BI1 1 1
2 2 BI1 2 (+)
(−) (−) (+) BI2 BO1(SF) 2 BO1(H) 2
3 3 (−)
(+)
BI2 (+) BI3 3 3
4 4 (+)
(−) (+) BI4 BO2(SF) 4 BO2(H) 4
5 5 5 (−)
(+)
BI3
(+) (+) BI5 5 5
6 6 BI2 6 (+)
(−) (−) (+) BI6 BO3(SF) 6 BO3(H) 6
7 7 7 (−)
(+)
BI4
(+) (+) BI7 7 7
8 8 BI3 8 (+)
(−) (−) (+) BI8 BO4(SF) 8 BO4(H) 8
9 9 (−)
(+)
BI5 (+) BI9 9 9
10 10 (+)
(−) (+) BI10 BO5(SF) 10 BO5(H) 10
11 11 11 (−)
(+)
BI6
(+) (+) BI11 11 11
12 12 BI4 12 (+)
(−) (−) (+) BI12 BO6(SF) 12 BO6(H) 12
13 13 13 (−)
(+)
BI7
(+) (+) BI13 13 13
14 14 BI5 14 (+)
(−) (−) (+) BI14 BO7 14 BO7(H) 14
15 15 (−)
(+)
BI8
(+) BI15 15 15
16 16 (+)
(−) (+) BI16 BO8 16 BO8(H) 16
17 17 17 (−)
(+)
BI9
(+) (+) BI17 17 17
18 18 BI6 18 (+)
(−) (−) (+) BI18 BO9 18 BO9(H) 18
(−)
21 21
(+)
BI10 (+) 21 (+) BI19 21 21 (+)
22 BI7 22
(−) (−) 22 (+) BI20 BO10 22 BO10(H) 22 (−)
(+) 23 23
BI11
(+) BI21 23 23 (+)
(−) 24 24 BO11 BO11(H)
(+) BI22 24 24 (−)
(+) 25 25 25
BI12 (+) (+) BI23 25 25
(−) 26 26 BI8 26 BO12 BO12(H)
(+)
(−) (+) BI24 26 26 (−)
(+) 27 27 27
BI13 (+) (+) BI25 27 27 (+)
(−) 28 28 BI9 28 BO13 BO13(H)
(−) (+) BI26 28 28 (−)
(+) 29 29
BI14
(+) BI27 29 29 (+)
(−) 30 30 BO14 BO14(H)
(+) BI28 30 30 (−)
(+) 31 31 31
BI15 (+) (+) BI29 31 31
(−) 32 32 BI10 32 BO15 BO15(H)
(+)
(−) (+) BI30 32 32 (−)
(+) 33 33 33
BI16 (+) (+) BI31 33 33 (+)
(−) 34 34 BI11 34 BO16 BO16(H)
(−) (+) BI32 34 34 (−)
(+) 35 35
BI17
(−) 35
(−) 36 36 BO17
(−) 36
37 37
(+)
BI18 (+) 37 BI12
(−) 37
38 38
(−) (−) 38 (−) BO18 38
40 FG†
Figure 3-9 In/Output arrangements for BI1A, BI2A, BI3A, BO1A and BO2A
BIO1A BIO2A BIO3A
(+) 1 1 (+) 1
BI1 (+) BI1 BI1
(−) 2 2 (−) 2
(−)
(+) 3 3 (+) 3
BI2 (+) BI2 BI2
(−) 4 4 (−) 4
(−)
(+) 5 5 (+) 5
BI3 (+) BI3 BI3
(−) 6 6 (−) 6
(−)
(+) 7 7 (+) 7
BI4 (+) BI4 BI4
(−) 8 8 (−) 8
(−)
(+) 9 9 (+) 9
BI5 (+) BI5 BI5
(−) 10 10 (−) 10
(−)
(+) 11 11 (+) 11
BI6 (+) BI6 BI6
(−) 12 12 (−) 12
(−)
(+) 13 13 (+) 13
BI7 (+) BI7 BI7
(−) 14 14 (−) 14
(−)
15 15 15
BO1(SF) (+) (+)
16 16 BI8 16 BI8
(−) (−)
17 17
BO2(SF) (+) BI9
18 18
(−)
21 21 21
BO3(SF) 22 (+) 22 BI10 BO1(F) 22
23 (−) 23 23
BO4(SF) 24 (+) 24 BI11 BO2(F) 24
25 (−) 25 25
BO5(SF) 26 (+) 26 BI12 BO3(F) 26
27 (−) 27 27
BO6(SF) 28 BO1(SF) 28 BO4(F) 28
29 29 29
BO7 30 BO2(SF) 30 BO5(F) 30
31 31 31
BO8 32 BO3(SF) 32 BO6(F) 32
33 33 33
BO9 34 BO4 34 BO7 34
35 35 35
37 37 37
BO10 36 BO5 36 BO8 36
38 38 38
Figure 3-10 In/Output arrangements for BIO1A, BIO2A, and BIO3A

†Note:The BI2A is earthed to the case’s frame ground screw. See Chapter Technical
description: Binary IO module (Page 423).
- 853 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Appendix 4 IEC61850 MICS, PICS, PIXIT, and TICS

# Document names Pages Provisions
MICS Model implementation conformance statement 855 Edition 1
PICS Protocol implementation conformance statement 880 Edition 1 & 2
PIXIT Protocol implementation extra information for testing 887 Edition 1 & 2
TICS Tissues conformance statement 904 Edition 1 & 2
- 854 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(MICS Edition 1)
IEC61850 Edition 1 Model Implementation

Conformance Statement (MICS)
GRT200 (Transformer protection IED)
(Original document#: 6F2S1895 Ver. 0.0)
- 855 - GRT200 (Soft 03D, 03E, and 03F)

6F2S1924 (0.26)
(MICS Ed.1)
The GRT200 relay supports IEC 61850 logical nodes and common data classes as indicated in the following tables.
Logical nodes in IEC 61850-7-4
Logical Nodes GRT200 Nodes GRT200
L: System Logical Nodes GSAL ---
LPHD Yes I: Logical Nodes for Interfacing and archiving
Common Logical Node Yes IARC ---
LLN0 Yes IHMI ---
P: Logical Nodes for Protection functions ITCI ---
PDIF Yes ITMI ---
PDIR --- A: Logical Nodes for Automatic control
PDIS --- ANCR ---
PDOP --- ARCO ---
PDUP --- ATCC ---
PFRC Yes AVCO ---
PHAR Yes M: Logical Nodes for Metering and measurement
PHIZ --- MDIF ---
PIOC --- MHAI ---
PMRI --- MHAN ---
PMSS --- MMTR ---
POPE --- MMXN ---
PPAM --- MMXU Yes
PSCH --- MSQI Yes
PSDE --- MSTA ---
PTEF --- S: Logical Nodes for Sensors and monitoring
PTOC Yes SARC ---
PTOF Yes SIMG ---
PTOV Yes SIML ---
PTRC Yes SPDC ---
PTTR Yes X: Logical Nodes for Switchgear
PTUC --- XCBR Yes
PTUV Yes XSWI ---
PUPF --- T: Logical Nodes for Instrument transformers
PTUF Yes TCTR ---
PVOC --- TVTR ---
PVPH Yes Y: Logical Nodes for Power transformers
PZSU --- YEFN ---
R: Logical Nodes for protection related functions YLTC ---
RDRE Yes YPSH ---
RADR --- YPTR ---
RBDR --- Z: Logical Nodes for Further power system equipment
RDRS --- ZAXN ---
RBRF --- ZBAT ---
RDIR --- ZCAB ---
RFLO --- ZCAP ---
RPSB --- ZCON ---
RREC --- ZGEN ---
RSYN --- ZGIL ---
C: Logical Nodes for Control ZLIN ---
CALH Yes ZMOT ---
CCGR --- ZREA ---
CILO Yes ZRRC ---
CPOW --- ZSAR ---
CSWI --- ZTCF ---
G: Logical Nodes for Generic references ZTCR ---
GAPC Yes
GGIO Yes
(MICS Ed.1)
- 856 - GRT200 (Soft 03D, 03E, and 03F)

6F2S1924 (0.26)
Common data classes in IEC61850-7-3

Common data classes GRT200
Status information
SPS Yes
DPS ---
INS Yes
ACT Yes
ACD Yes
SEC ---
BCR ---
Measured information
MV Yes
CMV ---
SAV ---
WYE Yes
DEL ---
SEQ Yes
HMV ---
HWYE ---
HDEL ---
Controllable status information
SPC Yes
DPC ---
INC Yes
BSC ---
ISC ---
Controllable analogue information
APC ---
Status settings
SPG ---
ING ---
Analogue settings
ASG ---
CURVE ---
Description information
DPL ---
LPL ---
CSD ---
- 857 - GRT200 (Soft 03D, 03E, and 03F)

6F2S1924 (0.26)
(MICS Ed.1)
LPHD class
Attribute Name Attr. Type Explanation T M/O GRT200
LNName Shall be inherited from Logical-Node Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Data
PhyName DPL Physical device name plate M Y
PhyHealth INS Physical device health M Y
OutOv SPS Output communications buffer overflow O N
Proxy SPS Indicates if this LN is a proxy M Y
InOv SPS Input communications buffer overflow O N
NumPwrUp INS Number of Power ups O N
WrmStr INS Number of Warm Starts O N
WacTrg INS Number of watchdog device resets detected O N
PwrUp SPS Power Up detected O N
PwrDn SPS Power Down detected O N
PwrSupAlm SPS External power supply alarm O N
RsStat SPC Reset device statistics T O N
Common Logical Node class

Data
Mandatory Logical Node Information (Shall be inherited by ALL LN but LPHD)
Mod INC Mode M Y
Beh INS Behaviour M Y
Health INS Health M Y
NamPlt LPL Name plate M Y
Optional Logical Node Information
Loc SPS Local operation O N
EEHealth INS External equipment health O N
EEName DPL External equipment name plate O N
OpCntRs INC Operation counter resetable O N
OpCnt INS Operation counter O N
OpTmh INS Operation time O N
Data Sets (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Inherited and specialized from Logical Node class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Control Blocks (see IEC 61850-7-2)
Services (see IEC 61850-7-2)
LLNO class
Data
Common Logical Node Information
LN shall inherit all Mandatory Data from Common Logical Node Class M
Loc SPS Local operation for complete logical device O N
OpTmh INS Operation time O N
Controls
Diag SPC Run Diagnostics O Y
LEDRs SPC LED reset T O Y
- 858 - GRT200 (Soft 03D, 03E, and 03F)

6F2S1924 (0.26)
(MICS Ed.1)
PDIF class
Data
OpCntRs INC Resetable operation counter O N
Status Information
Str1 ACD Start O Y
Str2 ACD Start O Y
Op1 ACT Operate T M Y
TmAst CSD Active curve charactristic O N
Measured Values
DifAClc WYE Differential Current O Y
RstA WYE Restraint Current O Y
Settings
LinCapac ASG Line capacitance (for load currents) O N
LoSet ING Low operate value, percentage of the nominal current O N
HiSet ING High operate value, percentage of the nominal current O N
MinOpTmms ING Minimum Operate Time O N
MaxOpTmms ING Maximum Operate Time O N
RstMod ING Restraint Mode O N
RsDlTmms ING Reset Delay Time O N
TmACrv CURVE Operating Curve Type O N
PFRC class
Data
Status Information
Str1 ACD Start M Y
Str2 ACD Start M Y
Str3 ACD Start M Y
Str4 ACD Start M Y
Str5 ACD Start M Y
Str6 ACD Start M Y
BlkV SPS Blocked because of voltage O N
Settings
StrVal ASG Start Value df/dt O N
BlkVal ASG Voltage Block Value O N
OpDlTmms ING Operate Delay Time O N
RsDlTmms ING Reset Delay Time Time O N
- 859 - GRT200 (Soft 03D, 03E, and 03F)

6F2S1924 (0.26)
(MICS Ed.1)
PHAR class
Data
Status Information
Str1 ACD Start M Y
Str2 ACD Start M Y
Str3 ACD Start M Y
Settings
HarRst ING Number of harmonic restrained O N
PhStr ASG Start Value O N
PhStop ASG Stop Value O N
PTOC class
Data
Status Information
Str1 ACD Start M Y
Str2 ACD Start M Y
Str3 ACD Start M Y
Str4 ACD Start M Y
Str5 ACD Start M Y
Str6 ACD Start M Y
Str7 ACD Start M Y
Str8 ACD Start M Y
TmASt CSD Active curve characteristic O N
Settings
TmACrv CURVE Operating Curve Type O N
StrVal ASG Start Value O N
TmMult ASG Time Dial Multiplier O N
OpDITmms ING Operate Delay Time O N
TypRsCrv ING Type of Reset Curve O N
RsDITmms ING Reset Delay Time O N
DirMod ING Directional Mode O N
- 860 - GRT200 (Soft 03D, 03E, and 03F)

6F2S1924 (0.26)
(MICS Ed.1)
PTOF class
Data
Status Information
Str1 ACD Start M Y
Str2 ACD Start M Y
Str3 ACD Start M Y
Str4 ACD Start M Y
Str5 ACD Start M Y
Str6 ACD Start M Y
Settings
StrVal ASG Start Value (frequency) O N
OpDITmms ING Operate Delay Time O N
RsDITmms ING Reset Delay Time O N
PTOV class
Data
Status Information
Str1 ACD Start M Y
Str2 ACD Start M Y
Str3 ACD Start M Y
Str4 ACD Start M Y
Op1 ACT Operate T O Y
TmVSt CSD Active curve characteristic O N
Settings
TmVCrv CURVE Operating Curve Type O N
- 861 - GRT200 (Soft 03D, 03E, and 03F)

6F2S1924 (0.26)
(MICS Ed.1)
PTRC class
Data
Status Information
Tr1 ACT Trip C Y
Tr2 ACT Trip C Y
Tr3 ACT Trip C Y
Tr4 ACT Trip C Y
Tr5 ACT Trip C Y
Tr6 ACT Trip C Y
Op ACT Operate (combination of subscribed Op from protection functions) C N
Str ACD Sum of all starts of all connected Logical Nodes O N
Settings
TrMod ING Trip Mode O N
TrPlsTmms ING Trip Pulse Time O N
Condition C: At least one of the two status information (Tr, Op) shall be used.
PTTR class
Data
Measured Values
Amp MV Current for thermal load model O N
Tmp MV Temperature for thermal load O N
TmpRl MV Relation between temperature and max. temperature O N
LodRsvAlm MV Load reserve to alarm O N
LodRsvTr MV Load reserve to trip O N
AgeRat MV Ageing rate O N
Status Information
Str ACD Start O Y
Op ACT Operate T M Y
AlmThm ACT Thermal Alarm O Y
TmTmpSt CSD Active curve characteristic O N
TmASt CSD Active curve characteristic O N
Settings
TmTmpCrv CURVE Characteristic Curve for temperature measurement O N
TmACrv CURVE Characteristic Curve for current measurement /Thermal model O N
TmpMax ASG Maximum allowed temperature O N
ConsTms ING Time constant of the thermal model O N
AlmVal ASG Alarm Value O N
- 862 - GRT200 (Soft 03D, 03E, and 03F)

6F2S1924 (0.26)
(MICS Ed.1)
PTUV class
Data
Status Information
Str1 ACD Start M Y
Str2 ACD Start M Y
Str3 ACD Start M Y
Str4 ACD Start M Y
Settings
PTUF class
Data
Status Information
Str1 ACD Start M Y
Str2 ACD Start M Y
Str3 ACD Start M Y
Str4 ACD Start M Y
Str5 ACD Start M Y
Str6 ACD Start M Y
Settings
- 863 - GRT200 (Soft 03D, 03E, and 03F)

6F2S1924 (0.26)
(MICS Ed.1)
PVPH class
Data
Status Information
Str1 ACD Start M Y
Str2 ACD Start M Y
Str3 ACD Start M Y
VHzSt CSD Active curve characteristic O N
Settings
VHzCrv CURVE Operating Curve Type O N
StrVal ASG Volts per herts Start Value O N
TypRsCrv ING Type of Reset Curve O N
- 864 - GRT200 (Soft 03D, 03E, and 03F)

6F2S1924 (0.26)
(MICS Ed.1)
CILO class
Data
Status Information
EnaOpn SPS Enable Open M Y
EnaCls SPS Enable Close M Y
CSWI class
Data
Loc SPS Local operation O Y
Controls
Pos DPC Switch, general M Y
PosA DPC Switch L1 O N
PosB DPC Switch L2 O N
PosC DPC Switch L3 O N
OpOpn ACT Operation “Open Switch” T O N
OpCls ACT Operation “Close Switch” T O N
- 865 - GRT200 (Soft 03D, 03E, and 03F)

6F2S1924 (0.26)
(MICS Ed.1)
GAPC class
Data
Controls
SPCSO SPC Single point controllable status output O N
DPCSO DPC Double point controllable status output O N
ISCSO INC Integer status controllable status output O N
Status Information
Auto SPS Automatic operation O N
Str1 ACD Start M Y
Str2 ACD Start M Y
Str3 ACD Start M Y
Str4 ACD Start M Y
Str5 ACD Start M Y
Str6 ACD Start M Y
Str7 ACD Start M Y
Str8 ACD Start M Y
Setting
- 866 - GRT200 (Soft 03D, 03E, and 03F)

6F2S1924 (0.26)
(MICS Ed.1)
GGIO class
Data
EEHealth INS External equipment health (external sensor) O N
Measured values
AnIn MV Analogue input O N
Controls
SPCSO SPC Single point controllable status output O N
DPCSO DPC Double point controllable status output O N
ISCSO INC Integer status controllable status output O N
Status Information
IntIn INS Integer status input O N
Alm SPS General single alarm O N
Ind01 SPS General indication (binary input) O Y
:
:
:
- 867 - GRT200 (Soft 03D, 03E, and 03F)

6F2S1924 (0.26)
(MICS Ed.1)
MMXU class
Data
Measured values
TotW MV Total Active Power (Total P) O N
TotVAr MV Total Reactive Power (Total Q) O N
TotVA MV Total Apparent Power (Total S) O N
TotPF MV Average Power factor (Total PF) O N
Hz MV Frequency O Y
PPV DEL Phase to phase voltages (VL1VL2, …) O N
PhV1 WYE Phase to ground voltages (VL1ER, …) O Y
A1 WYE Phase currents (IL1, IL2, IL3) O Y
W WYE Phase active power (P) O N
VAr WYE Phase reactive power (Q) O N
VA WYE Phase apparent power (S) O N
PF WYE Phase power factor O N
Z WYE Phase Impedance O N
- 868 - GRT200 (Soft 03D, 03E, and 03F)

6F2S1924 (0.26)
(MICS Ed.1)
MSQI class
Data
Measured values
SeqA1 SEQ Positive, Negative and Zero Sequence Current C Y
SeqV1 SEQ Positive, Negative and Zero Sequence Voltage C Y
SeqV2 SEQ Positive, Negative and Zero Sequence Voltage C Y
DQ0Seq SEQ DQ0 Sequence O N
ImbA WYE Imbalance current O N
ImbNgA MV Imbalance negative sequence current O N
ImbNgV MV Imbalance negative sequence voltage O N
ImbPPV DEL Imbalance phase-phase voltage O N
ImbV WYE Imbalance voltage O N
ImbZroA MV Imbalance zero sequence current O N
ImbZroV MV Imbalance zero sequence voltage O N
MaxImbA MV Maximum imbalance current O N
MaxImbPPV MV Maximum imbalance phase-phase voltage O N
MaxImbV MV Maximum imbalance voltage O N
Condition C: At least one of either data shall be used.
- 869 - GRT200 (Soft 03D, 03E, and 03F)

6F2S1924 (0.26)
(MICS Ed.1)
XCBR class
Data
OpCnt INS Operation counter M Y
Controls
Pos DPC Switch position M Y
BlkOpn SPC Block opening M Y
BlkCls SPC Block closing M Y
ChaMotEna SPC Charger motor enabled O N
Metered Values
SumSwARs BCR Sum of Switched Amperes, resetable O N
Status Information
CBOpCap INS Circuit breaker operating capability M Y
POWCap INS Point On Wave switching capability O N
MaxOpCap INS Circuit breaker operating capability when fully charged O N
- 870 - GRT200 (Soft 03D, 03E, and 03F)

6F2S1924 (0.26)
(MICS Ed.1)
SPS class
Attribute Attribute Type FC TrgOp Value/Value Range M/O/C GRT200
Name
DataName Inherited from Data Class (see IEC 61850-7-2)
DataAttribute
status
stVal BOOLEAN ST dchg TRUE | FALSE M Y
q Quality ST qchg M Y
t TimeStamp ST M Y
substitution
subEna BOOLEAN SV PICS_SUBST N
subVal BOOLEAN SV TRUE | FALSE PICS_SUBST N
subQ Quality SV PICS_SUBST N
subID VISIBLE STRING64 SV PICS_SUBST N
configuration, description and extension
d VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N
dU UNICODE STRING255 DC O N
cdcNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
cdcName VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLNDA_M N
dataNs VISIBLE STRING255 EX AC_DLN_M N
Services
As defined in Table 13
INS class
Name
DataAttribute
status
stVal INT32 ST dchg M Y(*1)
t TimeStamp ST M Y
Substitution
subVal INT32 SV PICS_SUBST N
Services
(*1): “ENUM” type is also used.
- 871 - GRT200 (Soft 03D, 03E, and 03F)

6F2S1924 (0.26)
(MICS Ed.1)
ACT class
Name
DataAttribute
status
general BOOLEAN ST dchg M Y
phsA BOOLEAN ST dchg O Y
phsB BOOLEAN ST dchg O Y
phsC BOOLEAN ST dchg O Y
neut BOOLEAN ST dchg O Y
t TimeStamp ST M Y
operTm TimeStamp CF O N
Services
- 872 - GRT200 (Soft 03D, 03E, and 03F)

6F2S1924 (0.26)
(MICS Ed.1)
ACD class
Name
DataAttribute
status
general BOOLEAN ST dchg M Y
dirGeneral ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward | backward | both M Y
phsA BOOLEAN ST dchg GC_2 (1) Y
dirPhsA ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward | backward GC_2 (1) Y
phsB BOOLEAN ST dchg GC_2 (2) Y
dirPhsB ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward | backward GC_2 (2) Y
phsC BOOLEAN ST dchg GC_2 (3) Y
dirPhsC ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward | backward GC_2 (3) Y
neut BOOLEAN ST dchg GC_2 (4) N
dirNeut ENUMERATED ST dchg unknown | forward | backward GC_2 (4) N
t TimeStamp ST M Y
Services
- 873 - GRT200 (Soft 03D, 03E, and 03F)

6F2S1924 (0.26)
(MICS Ed.1)
MV class
Name
DataAttribute
measured values
instMag AnalogueValue MX O N
mag AnalogueValue MX dchg M Y
range ENUMERATED MX dchg normal | high | low | high-high | low-low |… O N
q Quality MX qchg M Y
t TimeStamp MX M Y
substitution
subVal AnalogueValue SV PICS_SUBST N
units Unit CF see Annex A O Y
db INT32U CF 0 … 100 000 O N
zeroDb INT32U CF 0 … 100 000 O N
sVC ScaledValueConfig CF AC_SCAV N
rangeC RangeConfig CF GC_CON N
smpRate INT32U CF O N
Services
- 874 - GRT200 (Soft 03D, 03E, and 03F)

6F2S1924 (0.26)
(MICS Ed.1)
WYE class
Name
Data
phsA CMV GC_1 Y
phsB CMV GC_1 Y
phsC CMV GC_1 Y
neut CMV GC_1 Y
net CMV GC_1 N
res CMV GC_1 N
DataAttribute
angRef ENUMERATED CF Va | Vb | Vc | Aa | Ab | Ac | Vab | Vbc | Vca | O N
Vother | Aother
Services
- 875 - GRT200 (Soft 03D, 03E, and 03F)

6F2S1924 (0.26)
(MICS Ed.1)
SEQ class
Name
Data
c1 CMV M Y
c2 CMV M Y
c3 CMV M Y
DataAttribute
measured attributes
seqT ENUMERATED MX pos-neg-zero | dir-quad-zero M Y
phsRef ENUMERATED CF A|B|C|… O N
Services
- 876 - GRT200 (Soft 03D, 03E, and 03F)

6F2S1924 (0.26)
(MICS Ed.1)
SPC class
Name
DataAttribute
control and status
ctlVal BOOLEAN CO off (FALSE) | on (TRUE) AC_CO_M N
operTm TimeStamp CO AC_CO_O N
origin Originator_RO CO, ST AC_CO_O Y
ctlNum INT8U_RO CO, ST 0..255 AC_CO_O N
SBO VISIBLE STRING65 CO AC_CO_SBO_N_M N
SBOw SBOW CO AC_CO_SBOW_E_M N
Oper Oper CO AC_CO _M Y
Cancel Cancel CO AC_CO_SBO_N_M N
and
AC_CO_SBOW_E_M
and
AC_CO_TA_E_M
stVal BOOLEAN ST dchg FALSE | TRUE AC_ST Y
q Quality ST qchg AC_ST Y
t TimeStamp ST AC_ST Y
stSeld BOOLEAN ST dchg AC_CO_O N
substitution
subVal BOOLEAN SV FALSE | TRUE PICS_SUBST N
pulseConfig PulseConfig CF AC_CO_O N
CtlModel CtlModels CF M Y
sboTimeout INT32U CF AC_CO_O N
sboClass SboClasses CF AC_CO_O N
Services
- 877 - GRT200 (Soft 03D, 03E, and 03F)

6F2S1924 (0.26)
(MICS Ed.1)
INC class
Name
DataAttribute
control and status
ctlVal INT32 CO AC_CO_M N
operTm TimeStamp CO AC_CO_O N
origin Originator CO, ST AC_CO_O N
ctlNum INT8U CO, ST 0..255 AC_CO_O N
SBO VISIBLE STRING65 CO AC_CO_SBO_N_M N
SBOw SBOW CO AC_CO_SBOW_E_M N
Oper Oper CO AC_CO _M N
Cancel Cancel CO AC_CO_SBO_N_M N
and
AC_CO_SBOW_E_M
and
AC_CO_TA_E_M
stVal INT32 ST dchg M Y
Q Quality ST qchg M Y
T TimeStamp ST M Y
stSeld BOOLEAN ST dchg AC_CO_O N
substitution
subVal INT32 SV FALSE | TRUE PICS_SUBST N
CtlModel CtlModels CF M Y
sboTimeout INT32U CF AC_CO_O N
sboClass SboClasses CF AC_CO_O N
minVal INT32 CF O N
maxVal INT32 CF O N
stepSize INT32U CF 1 … (maxVal – minVal) O N
D VISIBLE STRING255 DC Text O N
Services
- 878 - GRT200 (Soft 03D, 03E, and 03F)

6F2S1924 (0.26)
(This page is intentionally blank)
- 879 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(PICS Editon1 and 2)
IEC61850 ACSI Conformance Statement

for GR200 series IED
- 880 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(PICS Ed.1&Ed.2)
Introduction
The template of this document is “Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement for the
IEC 61850 interface in <device>” version 1.6 published by UCA International Users Group in
Nov 19, 2015.
This document specifies the Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement (PICS) of the
IEC 61850 interface in G2 series IED with communication firmware G2M850-01 series version
equal to or upper than F (G2M850-01-F). Each tables of this document is specified in IEC 61850-
7-2 Annex A.3 “ACSI models conformance statement”.
— ASCI basic conformance statement,
— ACSI models conformance statement,
— ACSI service conformance statement
Together with the MICS and the PIXIT, the PICS forms the basis for a conformance test
according to IEC 61850-10.
Note: Term “Ed” is mentioning the edition number of IEC 61850. Editon2 (Ed2) provides
backward compatibility for legacy Edition 1 (Ed1).
- 881 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(PICS Ed.1&Ed.2)
ASCI basic conformance statement
The basic conformance statement is defined in Table A.1.
Table A.1 – Basic conformance statement
Client/ Server/ Value/
Subscriber Publisher Comments
Client-Server roles
Server side (of TWO-PARTY-APPLICATION-
B11  Y
ASSOCIATION)
Client side of (TWO-PARTY-APPLICATION-
B12 N 
ASSOCIATION)
SCSMs supported
Client/Subscrib
er side is only
B21 SCSM: IEC 61850-8-1 used Y Y
GOOSE and
SNTP.
Deprecated
B22 SCSM: IEC 61850-9-1 used
Ed2
B23 SCSM: IEC 61850-9-2 used
B24 SCSM: other
Generic substation event model (GSE)

B31 Publisher side  Y
B32 Subscriber side Y 
Transmission of sampled value model (SVC)

B41 Publisher side  N
B42 Subscriber side N 
- = not applicable
Y = supported
N or empty = not supported
- 882 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(PICS Ed.1&Ed.2)
ACSI models conformance statement
The ACSI models conformance statement is defined in Table A.2.
Table A.2 – ACSI models conformance statement
Client/ Server/ Value/
Subscriber Publisher Comments
If Server or Client side (B11/12) supported
M1 Logical device N Y
M2 Logical node N Y
M3 Data N Y
M4 Data set N Y
M5 Substitution N N
M6 Setting group control N Y
Reporting
M7 Buffered report control N Y
M7-1 sequence-number N Y
M7-2 report-time-stamp N Y
M7-3 reason-for-inclusion N Y
M7-4 data-set-name N Y
M7-5 data-reference N Y
M7-6 buffer-overflow N Y
M7-7 entryID N Y
M7-8 BufTm N Y
M7-9 IntgPd N Y
M7-10 GI N Y
M7-11 conf-revision N Y
M8 Unbuffered report control N Y
M8-1 sequence-number N Y
M8-2 report-time-stamp N Y
M8-3 reason-for-inclusion N Y
M8-4 data-set-name N Y
M8-5 data-reference N Y
M8-6 BufTm N Y
M8-7 IntgPd N Y
M8-8 GI N Y
M8-8 conf-revision N Y
Logging N N
M9 Log control N N
M9-1 IntgPd N N
M10 Log N N
M11 Control N Y
M17 File Transfer N Y
M18 Application Association N Y
M19 GOOSE Control Block N Y
M20 Sampled Value Control Block N N
If GSE (B31/32) is supported
M12 GOOSE Y Y
M13 GSSE N N Deprecated Ed2
If SVC (41/42) is supported
M14 Multicast SVC N N
M15 Unicast SVC N N
For all IEDs
SNTP client functions
M16 Time Y N
are supported.
Y = service is supported
N or empty = service is not supported
- 883 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(PICS Ed.1&Ed.2)
ACSI service conformance statement
The ACSI service conformance statement is defined in Table A.3 (depending on the statements
in Table A.1).
Table A.3 – ACSI service Conformance statement(1/3)
Ed Services AA: Client Server Comments
TP/MC (C) (S)
Server
S1 1 GetServerDirectory (LOGICAL-DEVICE) TP N Y
Application association
S2 1 Associate TP N Y
S3 1 Abort TP N Y
S4 1 Release TP N Y
Logical device
S5 1 GetLogicalDeviceDirectory TP N Y
Logical node
S6 1 GetLogicalNodeDirectory TP N Y
S7 1 GetAllDataValues TP N Y
Data
S8 1 GetDataValues TP N Y
S9 1 SetDataValues TP N Y
S10 1 GetDataDirectory TP N Y
S11 1 GetDataDefinition TP N Y
Data set
S12 1 GetDataSetValues TP N Y
S13 1 SetDataSetValues TP N N
S14 1 CreateDataSet TP N N
S15 1 DeleteDataSet TP N N
S16 1 GetDataSetDirectory TP N Y
Substitution
S17 1 SetDataValues TP N N
Setting group control

S18 1 SelectActiveSG TP N Y
S19 1 SelectEditSG TP N N
S20 1 SetSGValues TP N N
S21 1 ConfirmEditSGValues TP N N
S22 1 GetSGValues TP N N
S23 1 GetSGCBValues TP N Y
- 884 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(PICS Ed.1&Ed.2)

Reporting
Buffered report control block (BRCB)
S24 1 Report TP N Y
S24-1 1 data-change (dchg) N Y
S24-2 1 quality-change (qchg) N Y
S24- 1 data-update (dupd) N N
3
S25 1 GetBRCBValues TP N Y
S26 1 SetBRCBValues TP N Y
Unbuffered report control block (URCB)
S27 1 Report TP N Y
S27-1 1 data-change (dchg) N Y
S27-2 1 quality-change (qchg) N Y
S27- 1 data-update (dupd) N N
3
S28 1 GetURCBValues TP N Y
S29 1 SetURCBValues TP N Y
Logging
Log control block
S30 1 GetLCBValues TP N N
S31 1 SetLCBValues TP N N
Log
S32 1 QueryLogByTime TP N N
S33 1 QueryLogAfter TP N N
S34 1 GetLogStatusValues TP N N
Generic substation event model (GSE)

GOOSE
S35 1 SendGOOSEMessage MC Y Y
GOOSE-CONTROL-BLOCK
S36 1 GetGoReference TP N N
S37 1 GetGOOSEElementNumber TP N N
S38 1 GetGoCBValues TP N Y
S39 1 SetGoCBValues TP N Y
GSSE
S40 1 SendGSSEMessage MC N N Deprecated in Ed2
GSSE-CONTROL-BLOCK
S41 1 GetReference TP N N Deprecated in Ed2
S42 1 GetGSSEElementNumber TP N N Deprecated in Ed2
S43 1 GetGsCBValues TP N N Deprecated in Ed2
S44 1 SetGsCBValues TP N N Deprecated in Ed2
- 885 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(PICS Ed.1&Ed.2)

Transmission of sampled value model (SVC)
Multicast SV
S45 1 SendMSVMessage MC N N
Multicast Sampled Value Control Block
S46 1 GetMSVCBValues TP N N
S47 1 SetMSVCBValues TP N N
Unicast SV
S48 1 SendUSVMessage TP N N
Unicast Sampled Value Control Block
S49 1 GetUSVCBValues TP N N
S50 1 SetUSVCBValues TP N N
Control
S51 1 Select N Y
S52 1 SelectWithValue TP N Y
S53 1 Cancel TP N Y
S54 1 Operate TP N Y
S55 1 CommandTermination TP N Y
S56 1 TimeActivatedOperate TP N N
File transfer
S57 1 GetFile TP N Y
S58 1 SetFile TP N N
S59 1 DeleteFile TP N N
S60 1 GetFileAttributeValues TP N Y
S61 1 GetServerDirectory (FILE-SYSTEM) TP N Y
Time
T1 1 Time resolution of internal clock 10 nearest negative power of 2 in
(1ms) seconds
T2 1 Time accuracy of internal clock T1 T0 (10ms)
T1 (1ms)
T2 (100µs)
T3 (25µs)
T4 (4µs)
T5 (1µs)
T3 1 Supported TimeStamp resolution 10 nearest negative power of 2 in
(1ms) seconds
- 886 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(PIXIT Edition1&2)
Protocol implementation extra information

for testing (PIXIT) of the IEC 61850
communication interface in GR200 series IED
Note: The template of this document is “PIXIT template extracted from server test
procedures version 1.0 and updated according to TPCL version 1.2.6” published by
UCA International Using Group.
- 887 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(PIXIT Ed.1&Ed.2)
1. Introduction
This document specifies the protocol implementation extra information for testing (PIXIT) of
the IEC 61850 interface in G2 Series IED with communication firmware G2M850-02 series
version equal & upper than A(G2M850-02-A).
Together with the PICS and the MICS the PIXIT forms the basis for a conformance test
according to IEC 61850-10. The PIXIT entries contain information which is not available in the
PICS, MICS, TICS documents or SCL file.
Each table specifies the PIXIT for applicable ACSI service model as structured in IEC 61850-
10.
Note: Term “Ed” mentions the edition number of the IEC 61850. The editon2 (Ed2)
provides backward compatibility for legacy the Edition 1 (Ed1).
2. CONTENTS OF THIS DOCUMENT

Each chapter specifies the PIXIT for each applicable ACSI service model as structured in IEC
61850-10.
3. PIXIT FOR DOCUMENTATION

ID Ed Description Value / Clarification
How to expose required firmware versions not
Do1 2 NA
present in the data model
- 888 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(PIXIT Ed.1&Ed.2)
4. PIXIT FOR ASSOCIATION MODEL
Maximum number of clients that can set-up an
As1 1 6
association simultaneously
TCP_KEEPALIVE value. Configurable from 1 to 20 seconds

As2 1,2
The recommended range is 1..20s (default is 20 seconds)
From 10 to 30 seconds
As3 1,2 Lost connection detection time
(TCP_KEEPALIVE + 10sec.)
As4 - Authentication is not supported yet N
Transport selector N
Session selector N
What association parameters are necessary for
As5 1,2 Presentation selector N
successful association
AP Title N
AE Qualifier N
If association parameters are necessary for

As6 1,2 N.A.
association, describe the correct values e.g.
Max MMS PDU size 16384

What is the maximum and minimum MMS PDU Min MMS PDU size Not
As7 1,2
size limited. It depends
on a request.
Typically about 130 seconds
Please check LCD

Monitoring -> Communication
What is the maximum start up time after a
As8 1,2 -> 61850STAT as “Active”
power supply interrupt
(Note) The startup time depends
on the type of IED and
Its configuration/setting.
Does this device function only as test equipment?

(test equipment need not have a non-volatile
As9 1,2 N
configuration; but it cannot be part of the
substation automation system)
- 889 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(PIXIT Ed.1&Ed.2)
5. PIXIT FOR SERVER MODEL
Validity:
Y Good,
Y Invalid,
N Reserved,
Y Questionable
Y* Overflow
Y* OutofRange
N BadReference
N Oscillatory
Which analogue value (MX) quality bits are
Sr1 1,2 Y* Failure
supported (can be set by server)
N OldData
Y* Inconsistent
N Inaccurate (OnlyHz)
Source:
Y Process
* Supports only for GBU DCAI

Model
Validity:
Y Good,
Y Invalid,
N Reserved,
Y Questionable
N BadReference
Y Oscillatory
Which status value (ST) quality bits are
Y Failure
Sr2 1,2 supported
Y OldData
(can be set by server)
Y Inconsistent
N Inaccurate
Source:
N Substituted
Y Test
N OperatorBlocked
What is the maximum number of data object

Sr3 - Deprecated
references in one GetDataValues request
What is the maximum number of data object

Sr4 - Deprecated
references in one SetDataValues request
On Y
Blocked N
Sr5 1 Which Mode values are supported Test Y
Test/Blocked N
Off N
<additional items>
Front-to-back order. This might
The order of interpretation of write requests influence on write request
involving a list of variables. involving RptEna and other
variables in the same RCB.
- 890 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(PIXIT Ed.1&Ed.2)
6. PIXIT for Data set model
Not limited by an internal
configuration parameter.
This IED does not have

What is the maximum number of data elements
Ds1 1 CreateDataSet service. But any
in one data set (compare ICD setting)
DataSet can be defined by using
engineering tool. The maximum
number depends on the memory
size of IED.
How many persistent data sets can be created by
Ds2 1 one or more clients N.A.
(this number includes predefined datasets)
How many non-persistent data sets can be
Ds3 1 N.A.
created by one or more clients
7. PIXIT FOR SUBSTITUTION MODEL

Not applicable
8. PIXIT FOR SETTING GROUP CONTROL MODEL

What is the number of supported setting groups 8
Sg1 1
for each logical device
Just SelectActiveSG service will be
supported according to PICS.
When an IED receives correct

SelectActiveSG request, the IED
returns Response+ within 10
seconds. And the ActSG and
LActTm variable are updated
What is the effect of when and how the non- within 10 seconds after the
Sg2 1,2 volatile storage is updated Response+. (These times are
(compare IEC 61850-8-1 $16.2.4) typical values, and they depend on
IED types and its
configurations/settings.)
After changing setting group

number with LED panel, you can
see new setting group with
GetSGCBValue service.
Sg3 1 Can multiple clients edit the same setting group N.A.
What happens if the association is lost while
Sg4 1 N.A.
editing a setting group
Sg5 1 Is EditSG value 0 allowed N.A.
When ResvTms is not present how long is an edit
Sg6 2 N.A.
setting group locked
(PIXIT Ed.1&Ed.2)
- 891 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
9. PIXIT for Reporting model

The supported trigger conditions are integrity Y
(compare PICS) data change Y
Rp1 1
quality change Y
data update Y
The supported optional fields are sequence-numberY
general interrogation Y
report-time-stamp Y
reason-for-inclusion Y data-
set-name Y data-
Rp2 1 reference Y
buffer-overflow Y
entryID Y conf-
rev Y
segmentation Y
Can the server send segmented reports
(when not supported it is allowed to refuse an
Rp3 1,2 association with a smaller than minimum PDU Y
size)
Mechanism on second internal data change

notification of the same analogue data value Send report immediately
Rp4 1,2 within buffer period (Compare IEC 61850-7-2
$14.2.2.9)
Multi client URCB approach

Rp5 1 (compare IEC 61850-7-2:2003 $14.2.1) Each URCB is visible to all clients
Rp6 - What is the format of EntryID Deprecated
- 892 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(PIXIT Ed.1&Ed.2)
9. PIXIT for Reporting model (continued)
What is the buffer size for each BRCB or how For example, LLN0$ST$Health
many reports can be buffered can be stored 408 events.
Rp7 1,2
Pre-configured RCB attributes that are

Rp8 - dynamic, compare SCL report settings Deprecated
May the reported data set contain:

- structured data objects Y
Rp9 1 - data attributes Y
What is the scan cycle for binary events More than 1.6 milliseconds
Rp10 1,2
Is this fixed, configurable Configurable
Does the device support to pre-assign a RCB to a
Rp11 1 specific client in the SCL N
After restart of the server is the value of ConfRev Restored from original
restored from the original configuration or configuration
Rp12 2 retained prior to restart
Does the server accepts any client to

configure/enable a BRCB with ResvTms=‐1? N
Rp13 1,2 What fields are used to do the identification? AP‐Title N
AE‐Qualifier N
<other field> N
When BRCB.ResvTms is exposed, what is
default value for BRCB.ResvTms if client does N/A
not write (must be > 0)
Rp14 2 Or
When BRCB.ResvTms is not exposed, what is

the internal reservation time (must be >= 0) 60 seconds
<additional items>
Is it supported to change LLN0.Mod online? N
10. PIXIT FOR LOGGING MODEL
Not applicable
- 893 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(PIXIT Ed.1&Ed.2)
11. PIXIT FOR GOOSE PUBLISH MODEL
Can the test (Ed1) / simulation (Ed2) flag in the
Gp1 1,2 N
published GOOSE be set
What is the behaviour when the GOOSE publish If the configuration is incorrect,
Gp2 1
configuration is incorrect the GOOSE isn’t published.
Published FCD supported common data classes All CDC/data types can be
Gp3 1,2
are published.
What is the slow retransmission time 60 seconds with TAL = 120sec.

Gp4 1,2
Is it fixed or configurable Fixed
What is the fastest retransmission time 10 milli-sec. with TAL=30 milli-sec.

Gp5 1,2
Is it fixed or configurable Fixed
Can the GOOSE publish be turned on / off by Deprecated

Gp6 -
using SetGoCBValues(GoEna) See PICS - SetGoCBValues
The device starts sending

Gp7 1,2 What is the initial GOOSE sqNum after restart GOOSE from stNum=1 and
sqNum=1.
May the GOOSE data set contain:

Gp8 1 - structured data objects (FCD) Y
- timestamp data attributes Y
Y
Does Server or ICT refuse GOOSE payload
Gp9 1,2 Server Refuses the
dataset length greater than SCSM supports?
Configuration.
<additional items>
1,2 Is the DUT a test equipment N
- 894 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(PIXIT Ed.1&Ed.2)
12. PIXIT FOR GOOSE SUBSCRIBE MODEL
What elements of a subscribed GOOSE Y destination MAC address
message are checked to decide the message is = as configured
valid and the allData values are accepted? If Y APPID
yes, describe the conditions. Y gocbRef
N timeAllowedtoLive
Notes: N datSet
the VLAN tag may be removed by a Y goID
ethernet switch and shall not be =as configured
Gs1 1,2 checked N t
the simulation flag shall always be N stNum
checked (Ed2) Y sqNum
Y simulation / test
N confRev
Y ndsCom
N numDatSetEntries
N out-of-order dataset
members
When is a subscribed GOOSE marked as lost [message does not arrive prior to
(TAL = time allowed to live value from the last TAL]
received GOOSE message) GOOSE subscribe quality
information will become
QUESTIONABLE (=1100 0000
0000 0).
GOOSE status change is

accepted . The behavior can be
Gs2 1,2 changed by modifying PLC
logic.
N Substituted
Y Test
N OperatorBlocked
* Supports only for GBU DCAI

Model
What is the behaviour when one or more [stNum is out-of-order, or missed]
subscribed GOOSE messages isn’t received or No fail will be detected.
syntactically incorrect (missing GOOSE)
[sqNum is out-of-order, or missed]
GOOSE subscribe quality
information will become
QUESTIONABLE |
INCONSISTENT (=1100 0000
1000 0). After receiving message
with correct sqNum order, the
Gs3 1,2 quality information is set to
GOOD (=0000 0000 0000 0).
You can assign the information to

any data attribute using our
configuration tool.
GOOSE status change is ignored

The behavior can be changed by
modifying PLC logic.
- 895 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(PIXIT Ed.1&Ed.2)
12. PIXIT FOR GOOSE SUBSCRIBE MODEL (continued)
What is the behavior when a subscribed Refer to Gs3
Gs4 1,2 GOOSE message is out-of-order
What is the behavior when a subscribed GOOSE subscribe quality

GOOSE message is duplicated information will become
QUESTIONABLE |
INCONSISTENT (=1100 0000
Gs5 1,2 1000 0).
GOOSE status change is accepted.

Does the device subscribe to GOOSE messages Y, with the VLAN tag
Gs6 1 with/without the VLAN tag Y, without the VLAN tag
May the GOOSE data set contain:
Gs7 1 - structured data objects (FCD) Y
- timestamp data attributes N
Subscribed FCD supported common data [Supported CDC]
classes are All, excepts measurand CDC (MV,
CMV, SAV, WYE, DEL, SEQ, HMV,
HWYE and HDEL)
[Supported data type]

Boolean
BitString
Integer
Unsigned Integer
Gs8 1,2
Other types
(TimeStamp, OctetString, etc) will
be ignored by IED.
(NOTE)
But each data size shall be less
than 32 bits.
Dataset including measurand
CDC listed above cannot be
subscribed.
Are subscribed GOOSE with test=T (Ed1) / GOOSE subscribe quality

simulation=T (Ed2) accepted in test/simulation information will become
mode QUESTIONABLE | TEST (=1100
0000 0001 0).
Gs9 1,2
GOOSE status change is ignored.
- 896 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(PIXIT Ed.1&Ed.2)
12. PIXIT FOR GOOSE SUBSCRIBE MODEL (continued)
Gs10 1,2 Max number of dataset members 64
<additional items>
Are subscribed GOOSE with ndsCom=T GOOSE subscribe quality
Accepted. information will become
QUESTIONABLE |
INACCURATE (=1100 0000 0100 0).
1,2
GOOSE status change is ignored.
13. PIXIT for GOOSE performance

Performance class P1(Ed.2) for
Gf1 1,2 System/LLN0$GO$goST
P3(Ed.2) for all other GOOSE
GOOSE ping-pong processing method Scan cycle based
Gf2 1,2
Application logic scan cycle (ms) Max. …. 200ms

Gf3 1,2
Min. 1.38ms in 60Hz
Maximum number of data attributes in The dataset for
GOOSE dataset (value and quality has to be System/LLN0$GO$goST is fixed,
counted as separate attributes) and it contains 32 data attributes.
All other dataset for GOOSE can be

configurable, and there is no
Gf4 1 particular limitation about the
maximum number of data
attributes. However, the dataset
definition shares the same dynamic
memory area as other data model
definitions such as LN, RCB, etc., so
it is affected by them.
- 897 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(PIXIT Ed.1&Ed.2)
14. PIXIT FOR CONTROL MODEL
What control models are supported DOns: Y
(compare ICD file enums for Ed2) SBOns: Y
Ct1 - DOes: Y
SBOes: Y
Is the control model fixed, configurable and/or Fixed
Ct2 1,2 dynamic
Is TimeActivatedOperate supported (compare Deprecated
Ct3 - PICS or SCL)
Is “operate-many” supported (compare Deprecated
Ct4 - sboClass)
Will the DUT activate the control output when Y
the test attribute is set in the SelectWithValue
Ct5 1 and/or Operate request (when N test procedure
Ctl2 is applicable)
What are the conditions for the time (T) Deprecated

attribute in the SelectWithValue and/or
Ct6 - Operate request
Is pulse configuration supported (compare Deprecated

Ct7 - pulseConfig)
What is the behaviour of the DUT when the Y synchrocheck

check conditions are set Y interlock-check
Both bits are checked.
(NOTE) The result of Opening

operation (ctval = F) is
Ct8 1 not Influenced by
SynchroCheck bit.
Is this behavior fixed, configurable, online This behavior is fixed.

changeable
- 898 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(PIXIT Ed.1&Ed.2)
14. PIXIT FOR CONTROL MODEL(Continued)
Which additional cause diagnosis are Y Unknown
supported Y Not-supported
Y Blocked-by-switching-hierarchy
Y Select-failed
Y Invalid-position
Y Position-reached
N Step-limit
Y Blocked-by-Mode
N Blocked-by-process
Y Blocked-by-interlocking
Y Blocked-by-synchrocheck
Y Command-already-in-execution
Y Blocked-by-health
Y 1-of-n-control
Y Abortion-by-cancel
Y Time-limit-over
Y Abortion-by-trip (only for BCPU)
Y Object-not-selected
Ct9 1,2
Edition 1 specific values:
Y Parameter-change-in-execution
Edition 2 specific values:

Y Object-already-selected
N No-access-authority
N Ended-with-overshoot
N Abortion-due-to-deviation
N Abortion-by-communication-loss
N Blocked-by-command
N None
Y Inconsistent-parameters
Y Locked-by-other-client
N Parameter-change-in-execution*
How to force a “test-not-ok” respond with Set orCat with unsupported value.
SelectWithValue request See below “Which origin categories
Ct10 1,2
are supported?”
How to force a “test-not-ok” respond with Send SELECT request to the control
Ct11 1,2 Select request object which is not mapped to
control application.
- 899 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(PIXIT Ed.1&Ed.2)
How to force a “test-not-ok” respond with DOns, SBOns, DOes:
Operate request [Example1]
Set orCat as unsupported value
-> Cause AddCause as “Not-
supported(1)”
[Example2]
Set ctlCat same as stVal
-> Cause AddCause as “Position-
reached(5)”
Ct12 1,2
SBOes: (Only Ed1)
Same as above. Or,
[Example3]
Set Oper parameters as different
parameter from the parameter of
SelectWithVal
-> Cause AddCause as “Parameter-
change-in-execution (6)”
Which origin categories are supported / N bay-control

accepted Y station-control
Y remote-control
N automatic-bay
Y automatic-station
Ct13 1,2 Y automatic-remote
N maintenance
N process
maintenance (7): N
process (8): N
What happens if the orCat value is not DOns, SBOns, DOes, SBOes:
Ct14 1,2 supported or invalid “test-not-ok” IED respond
Does the IED accept a SelectWithValue / DOns, SBOns, DOes, SBOes: N

Operate with the same control value as the
current status value
Ct15 1,2
Is this behavior configurable Fixed

Does the IED accept a select/operate on the DOns: N
same control object from 2 different clients at SBOns: N
the same time DOes: N
SBOes: N
Ct16 1,2
Note:
Commands are refused until
the new position is not reached
or a timeout does not occur.
- 900 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(PIXIT Ed.1&Ed.2)
Does the IED accept a Select/SelectWithValue SBOns: N
from the same client when the control object is SBOes: N
Ct17 1 already selected (Tissue #334)
Is for SBOes the internal validation performed Yes for both SelectWithValue and
Ct18 1,2 during the SelectWithValue and/or Operate Operate
step
Can a control operation be blocked by Mod=Off Deprecated

Ct19 - or [On-]Blocked (Compare PIXIT-Sr5)
Does the IED support local / remote operation

Ct20 1,2 Y
Does the IED send an InformationReport with SBOns: N
Ct21 1,2 LastApplError as part of the Operate response- DOns: N
for control with normal security
How to force a “parameter-change-in-
Ct22 2 execution” N.A.
How many SBOns/SBOes control objects can be SBOns: n=1

Ct23 1,2 selected at the same time? SBOes: n=1
Can a controllable object be forced to keep its Y

old state e.g. Internal Controllable Objects may Need PLC Logic customization.
Ct24 1,2 not be accessible to force this, whereas a switch
like Circuit Breaker outside the DUT can?
When CDC=DPC is supported, is it possible to

have DPC (Controllable Double Point) go to the
Ct25 1,2 Y
intermediate state? (00)
Name a DOes point (if any) with a finite The timeout time is setting.
operate timeout and specify the timeout One example,
Ct26 1,2 (in milliseconds) DPSY01-RST
Default value is 300[ms]
(10[ms]-1000[ms])
Does the IED support control objects with DOns: N
external signals? SBOns: N
Ct27 2 DOes: N
SBOes: N
- 901 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(PIXIT Ed.1&Ed.2)
15. PIXIT FOR TIME AND TIME SYNCHONISATION MODEL
What time quality bits are supported (may be Y LeapSecondsKnown
set by the IED) N ClockFailure
Tm1 1 Y ClockNotSynchronized
Describe the behavior when the time server(s) On one time server: IED tries to
ceases to respond synchronize with another time
server.
On all time servers:

Tm2 1,2 The quality attribute
“ClockNotSynchronized” will be set
to TRUE.
What is the time server lost detection time The lost detection time depends on
the network condition.
How long does it take to take over the new time 10 seconds
Tm3 1,2 from time server
Tm4 1,2 When is the time quality bit “ClockFailure” set RTC is out-of-order
When is the time quality bit “Clock not It depends on the condition of
Tm5 1,2 Synchronized” set synchronization. Typically from 1 to
10 minutes.
Is the timestamp of a binary event adjusted to Deprecated
Tm6 - the configured scan cycle
Does the device support time zone and daylight Yes for both.
Tm7 1
saving
Which attributes of the SNTP response packet Y Leap indicator not equal
are validated to 3?
N Mode is equal to SERVER
N OriginateTimestamp is
equal to value sent by the
SNTP client as Transmit
Tm8 1,2 Timestamp
Y RX/TX timestamp fields
are checked for
reasonableness
Y SNTP version 3 and/or 4
N other (describe)
Do the COMTRADE files have local time or UTC
Tm9 1,2 UTC time and is this configurable Not Configurable
- 902 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(PIXIT Ed.1&Ed.2)
16. PIXIT FOR FILE TRANSFER MODEL

What is structure of files and directories Support tree structure
Where are the COMTRADE files stored “/COMTRADE/” directory
(NOTE)
Ft1 1 At root directory in IED, the
directory “/COMTRADE/” is
Hidden. Therefore a client
shall directly access this
directory.
Are comtrade files zipped and what files are Not zipped
included in each zip file
Directory names are separated from the file
Ft2 1,2 name by “/”
The maximum file name size including path
Ft3 1 (recommended 64 chars) 64 chars
Ft4 1,2 Are directory/file name case sensitive N

Maximum file size for SetFile
Ft5 1,2 N.A
Is the requested file path included in the MMS N

Ft6 1 fileDirectory respond file name (Ed2: always complete path)
Is the wild char supported MMS fileDirectory

Ft7 1 request No
Is it allowed that 2 clients get a file at the same

Ft8 1,2 time Y
Ft9 1,2 Which files can be deleted N.A.
17. PIXIT FOR SERVICE TRACKING MODEL

Which ACSI services are tracked by
Tr1 2 LTRK.GenTrk N.A
- 903 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(TICS Edition2)
Tissues conformance statement (TICS)

of the IEC 61850 Ed.2 communication interface
in GR200 series IED
Note: The template of this document is “Test Procedures Change List (TPCL) version
1.2.6 for IEC 61850 Edition 2 server test procedures revision 1.0” published by
UCA International Users Group Testing Sub Committee in April 3, 2018.
- 904 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(TICS Ed.2)
1. Introduction
This document provides a template for the Tissues conformance statement. According to the
UCA IUG QAP the Tissue conformance statement is required to perform a conformance test
and is referenced on the certificate.
This document is applicable for G2 series IED with communication firmware G2M850-02 series
version equal & upper than A (G2M850-02-A).
Note: Term “Ed” is mentioning the edition number of IEC 61850. Editon2 (Ed2) provides
backward compatibility for legacy Edition 1 (Ed1).
- 905 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(TICS Ed.2)
2. Mandatory Edition2 Tissues
Below tables give an overview of the applicable mandatory Tissues.
Part 6 Implemented
Description
Tissue Y/na
658 Tracking related features na
FCDA element cannot be a "functionally constrained
663 Y
logical node"
668 Autotransformer modeling na
687 SGCB ResvTms na
719 ConfDataSet - maxAttributes definition is confusing na
721 Log element name na
768 bType VisString65 is missing Y
779 object references na
788 SICS S56 from optional to mandatory na
789 ConfLdName as services applies to both server and client na
804 valKind and IED versus System configuration na
806 Max length of log name inconsistent between -6 and -7-2 na
807 Need a way to indicate if "Owner" present in RCB na
823 ValKind for structured data attributes na

824 Short addresses on structured data attributes na
825 Floating point value Y
845 SGCB ResvTms na
853 SBO and ProtNs na
855 Recursive SubFunction na
856 VoltageLevel frequency and phases na
857 Function/SubFunction for ConductingEquipment na
886 Missing 8-1 P-types na
901 tServices as AP or as IED element Y
936 SupSubscription parameter usage is difficult na
- 906 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(TICS Ed.2)
2. Mandatory Edition2 Tissues (continued)
Part 7-1 Implemented
Description
Tissue Y/na
828 Data model namespace revision IEC 61850-7-4:2007[A] na
simulated GOOSE disappears after 1st appearance when
1151 na
LPHD.Sim = TRUE
1468 Re-use DO from other LN na

Description
Tissue Y/na
778 AddCause values – add value not-supported Y
780 What are unsupported trigger option at a control block? Y
783 TimOper Resp- ; add Authorization check na
786 AddCause values 26 and 27 are switched Y
820 Mandatory ACSI services (use for PICS template) Y
858 typo in enumeration ServiceType na
861 dchg of ConfRev attribute Y
876 GenLogiclNodeClass and SGCB, GoCB, MsvCB, UsvCB na
1038 Loss of Info Detection After Resynch Y
1050 GTS Phycomaddr definition in SCL Y
1062 Entrytime not used in CDC na
1071 Length of DO name Y

The sentence "The initial value of EditSG shall be 0", has to
1091 na
be stated in part 7.2 not in 8.1
1127 Missing owner attribute in BTS and UTS Y
1202 GI not optional na

Description
Tissue Y/na
697 persistent command / PulseConfig Y
698 Wrong case is BAC.dB attribute na

722 Units for 'h' and 'min' not in UnitKind enumeration. na
919 Presence Condition for sVC na
925 Presence of i or f attribute - Problem with writing na
926 Presence Conditions within RangeConfig na
- 907 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(TICS Ed.2)
Description
Tissue Y/na
671 mistake in definition of Mod & Beh Y
674 CDC of ZRRC.LocSta is wrong na
676 Same data object name used with different CDC na
677 MotStr is used with different CDC in PMMS and SOPM LN classes na
679 Remove CycTrMod Enum na
680 SI unit for MHYD.Cndct na
681 Enum PIDAlg na
682 ANCR.ParColMod na
683 Enum QVVR.IntrDetMth na
685 Enum ParTraMod na
686 New annex H - enums types in XML na
694 Data object CmdBlk na
696 LSVS.St (Status of subscription) na
712 interpretation of quality operatorBlocked na
713 DO Naming of time constants in FFIL na
724 ANCR.Auto na
725 Loc in LN A-group na
734 LLN0.OpTmh vs. LPHD.OpTmh na
736 PFSign na
742 GAPC.Str, GAPC.Op and GAPC.StrVal na
743 CCGR.PmpCtl and CCGR.FanCtl na
744 LN STMP, EEHealth and EEName na
773 Loc, LocKey and LocSta YPSH and YLTC na
774 ITCI.LocKey na
800 Misspelling in CSYN na
802 CCGR and Harmonized control authority na
808 Presence condition of ZMoT.DExt and new DOs na
831 Setting of ConfRevNum in LGOS na
838 Testing in Beh=Blocked na
844 MFLK.PhPiMax, MFLK.PhPiLoFil, MFLK.PhPiRoot DEL->WYE na
Presence conditions re-assessing in case of derived
849 statistical calculation na
877 QVUB -settings should be optional na
909 Remove ANCR.ColOpR and ColOpL na
920 Resetable Counter is NOT resetable na
932 Rename AVCO.SptVol to AVCO.VolSpt na
939 Change CDC for ANCR.FixCol na
991 LGOS: GoCBRef (as well as LSVS.SvCBRef) should be mandatory Y
1007 PTRC as fault indicator - Update of description required na
1044 TapChg in AVCO na
1077 Rename DOnames within LTIM na
Note: Tissues 675, 735, 772, 775, 776, 878 are not relevant for conformance testing
- 908 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
(TICS Ed.2)
Description
Tissue Y/na
784 Tracking of control (CTS) na
817 Fixed-length GOOSE float encoding Y
834 File dir name length 64 Y
951 Encoding of Owner attribute Y
1040 More associate error codes Y
1178 Select Response+ is non-null value Y
- 909 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Appendix 5 Ordering
- 910 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
1. Ordering information for Model 3†1 (1/4)

Positions
[Hardware selection in Model3] 7 8 - 9 A B - C D - E F - G H - J K L
Configuration G R T 2 0 0 - 3 - - 0 0 - - 3 -
Application of power system

3×three-phase CTs + 2×zero-sequence CTs
3
1×three-phase VTs (VCT49B)
DC rated voltage
110-250 Vdc (or 100-220 Vac †2) 1
24-60 Vdc 3
System Frequency
50Hz 1
60Hz 2
Rated current for three-phase
Choice from Rated phase currents (see p. 914)
Rated current for neutral-phase

Choice from Rated neutral current (see p. 914)
Serial, Ethernet communication, and/or Time Sync ports

Communication port tables (see pp. 922—923)
(to be continued on the next page)
1† Model 3 is limited when ‘D’ is placed at positon ‘7’. To select the 3D, see p. 925.
Positions
[Software selection] 7 S G T E F U 9 V
Configurations G R T 2 0 0 - 3 0 3 - -
Relay function D
2† The operation of BI modules is intended to use while DC power source is being supplied to the
IED, and the operation of power supply module (PWS) of the IED is only guaranteed for DC
power source. Thus, the user should disable the PWS supervision function when AC power is
supplied to the IED so that the IED does not issue spurious alarms (see p. 433).
- 911 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Model 3 (2/4)
Positions
Configuration G R T 2 0 0 - 3 - - 0 0 - - 3
(…continued from the previous page)
Outlines
Standard LCD, 1/2×19” rack for flush mounting 2
Large LCD, 1/2×19” rack for flush mounting 6
Standard LCD, 1/2×19” rack for rack mounting †3 F
Large LCD, 1/2×19” rack for rack mounting †3 J
Terminal blocks for BIOs and PWS

Compression plug type 0
BI/BO modules
Choice from BI/BO tables 1×BIO module 1
(see pp. 926-928) 2×BIO modules 2
3×BIO modules 3

Ring type terminal 1
BI/BO modules
Outlines
Standard LCD, 3/4×19” rack for rack mounting †3 G
Large LCD, 3/4×19” rack for rack mounting †3 K

BI/BO modules
3×BIO modules 3
4×BIO modules 4
5×BIO modules 5
6×BIO modules 6

BI/BO modules
3×BIO modules 3
4×BIO modules 4
3† Mounting kits are provided if EP-201–206 optional accessories are ordered (see p. 934).
- 912 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Model 3 (3/4)
Positions
Outlines

BI/BO modules
3×BIO modules 3
4×BIO modules 4
5×BIO modules 5
6×BIO modules 6
7×BIO modules 7
8×BIO modules 8

BI/BO modules
3×BIO modules 3
4×BIO modules 4
5×BIO modules 5
6×BIO modules 6
7×BIO modules 7
Tips:
The user can find out the ordering number from the information menu on the LCD (see Chapter
User interface: Information sub-menu).
- 913 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Model 3 (4/4)
[CT configuration in Model3]
Positions
Configurations G R T 2 0 0 - 3 - - 0 0 - - -
Rated phase currents

3×CT in three-phase (1CT, 2CT, and 3CT) (for Model3)
Rated currents in 1CT Rated currents in 2CT Rated currents in 3CT Ordering No.
(Ia-1CT, Ib-1CT, Ic-1CT) (Ia-2CT, Ib-2CT, Ic-2CT) (Ia-3CT, Ib-3CT, Ic-3CT) (Position “K”)
1A 1A 1A 1
5A 5A 5A 2
1A 1A 5A 6
1A 5A 1A A
1A 5A 5A E
5A 1A 1A J
5A 1A 5A N
5A 5A 1A S
Rated neutral currents

2×Neutral CT (1NCT and 2NCT) (for Model3)
1NCT 2NCT Ordering No.

(In-1NCT) (In-2NCT) (Position “L”)
1A 1A 1
5A 5A 2
1A 5A A
5A 1A J
Tips:
The user can find the layouts of entering currents in the VCT49B in Chapter Technical description:
- 914 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
2. Ordering information for Model 4†1(1/4)

Positions
Configuration G R T 2 0 0 - 4 - - 0 0 - - 3 - 0

4×three-phase CTs + 1×one-phase VT
4
(VCT49B)
DC rated voltage
110-250 Vdc (or 100-220 Vac †2) 1
24-60 Vdc 3
System Frequency
50Hz 1
60Hz 2

Not available 0

1† Model 4 is limited when ‘E’ is placed at positon ‘7’. To select the 3E, see p. 925.
Positions
Configurations G R T 2 0 0 - 4 0 3 - -
Relay function D
- 915 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Model 4 (2/4)
Positions
Configuration G R T 2 0 0 - 4 - - 0 0 - - 3 - 0
Outlines
Standard LCD, 1/2×19” rack for rack mounting †3 F
Large LCD, 1/2×19” rack for rack mounting †3 J

BI/BO modules
3×BIO modules 3

BI/BO modules
Outlines
Standard LCD, 3/4×19” rack for rack mounting †3 G
Large LCD, 3/4×19” rack for rack mounting †3 K

BI/BO modules
3×BIO modules 3
4×BIO modules 4
5×BIO modules 5
6×BIO modules 6

BI/BO modules
3×BIO modules 3
4×BIO modules 4
2† Mounting kits are provided if EP-201–206 optional accessories are ordered (see p. 934).
- 916 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Model 4 (3/4)
Positions
Outlines

BI/BO modules
3×BIO modules 3
4×BIO modules 4
5×BIO modules 5
6×BIO modules 6
7×BIO modules 7
8×BIO modules 8

BI/BO modules
3×BIO modules 3
4×BIO modules 4
5×BIO modules 5
6×BIO modules 6
7×BIO modules 7
Tips:
The user can find out the ordering number from the information menu on the LCD (see Chapter
User interface: Information sub-menu).
- 917 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Model 4 (4/4)
Positions
Configurations G R T 2 0 0 - 4 - - 0 0 - - - 0

4×CT in three-phase (1CT, 2CT, 3CT, and 4CT) (for Model4)
Rated currents in 1CT Rated currents in 2CT Rated currents in 3CT Rated currents in 4CT Ordering No.
(Ia-1CT, Ib-1CT, Ic-1CT) (Ia-2CT, Ib-2CT, Ic-2CT) (Ia-3CT, Ib-3CT, Ic-3CT) (Ia-4CT, Ib-4CT, Ic-4CT) (Position “K”)
1A 1A 1A 1A 1
5A 5A 5A 5A 2
1A 1A 1A 5A 4
1A 1A 5A 1A 6
1A 1A 5A 5A 8
1A 5A 1A 1A A
1A 5A 1A 5A C
1A 5A 5A 1A E
1A 5A 5A 5A G
5A 1A 1A 1A J
5A 1A 1A 5A L
5A 1A 5A 1A N
5A 1A 5A 5A Q
5A 5A 1A 1A S
5A 5A 1A 5A U
5A 5A 5A 1A W
Tips:
The user can find the layouts of entering currents in VCT49B in Chapter Technical description:
The user can find the layouts of entering currents in the VCT49B in Chapter Technical description:
- 918 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
3. Ordering information for Model 5†1(1/3)

Positions

5×three-phase CTs + 3×zero-sequence CTs
5
2×three-phase VT (VCT44B&48B)
DC rated voltage
110-250 Vdc (or 100-220 Vac †2) 1
24-60 Vdc 3
System Frequency
50Hz 1
60Hz 2
Choice from Rated neutral current (see p. 921)

1† Model 5 is limited when ‘F’ is placed at positon ‘7’. To select the 3F, see p. 925.
Positions
Configurations G R T 2 0 0 - 3 0 3 F - -
Relay function F
- 919 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Model 5 (2/3)
Positions
Outlines

BI/BO modules
3×BIO modules 3
4×BIO modules 4
5×BIO modules 5
6×BIO modules 6
7×BIO modules 7
8×BIO modules 8

BI/BO modules
3×BIO modules 3
4×BIO modules 4
5×BIO modules 5
6×BIO modules 6
7×BIO modules 7
- 920 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Model 5 (3/3)
Positions
Configurations G R T 2 0 0 - 5 - - 0 0 - - -  

5×CT in three-phase (1CT, 2CT, 3CT, 4CT, and 5CH) (for Model5)
1CT group 2CT group 3CT group 4CT group 5CT group Ordering No.
(1Ia, 1Ib, 1Ic) (2Ia, 2Ib, 2Ic) (3Ia, 3Ib, 3Ic) (4Ia, 4Ib, 4Ic) (5Ia, 5Ib, 5Ic) (Position “K”)
1A 1A 1A 1A 1A 1
5A 5A 5A 5A 5A 2
1A 1A 1A 1A 5A 3
1A 1A 1A 5A 1A 4
1A 1A 1A 5A 5A 5
1A 1A 5A 1A 1A 6
1A 1A 5A 1A 5A 7
1A 1A 5A 5A 1A 8
1A 1A 5A 5A 5A 9
1A 5A 1A 1A 1A A
1A 5A 1A 1A 5A B
1A 5A 1A 5A 1A C
1A 5A 1A 5A 5A D
1A 5A 5A 1A 1A E
1A 5A 5A 1A 5A F
1A 5A 5A 5A 1A G
1A 5A 5A 5A 5A H
5A 1A 1A 1A 1A J
5A 1A 1A 1A 5A K
5A 1A 1A 5A 1A L
5A 1A 1A 5A 5A M
5A 1A 5A 1A 1A N
5A 1A 5A 1A 5A P
5A 1A 5A 5A 1A Q
5A 1A 5A 5A 5A R
5A 5A 1A 1A 1A S
5A 5A 1A 1A 5A T
5A 5A 1A 5A 1A U
5A 5A 1A 5A 5A V
5A 5A 5A 1A 1A W
5A 5A 5A 1A 5A X
5A 5A 5A 5A 1A Y
Rated neutral currents
3×Neutral CT (1NCT,2NCT, and 3NCT) (for Model5)
(When position “7“ =5) Ordering No.
1NCT 2NCT 3NCT (Position “L”)
1A 1A 1A 1
5A 5A 5A 2
1A 1A 5A 6
1A 5A 1A A
1A 5A 5A E
5A 1A 1A J
5A 1A 5A N
5A 5A 1A S
Tips:
The user can find the layouts of entering currents in VCT44&48B in Chapter Technical description:
The user can find the layouts of entering currents in the VCT44&48B in Chapter Technical
description: Transformer module for AC analog input.
- 921 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
4. Ordering information for Communication modules

Positions
[Hardware selection] 7 8 - 9 A B - C D - E F - G H - J K L
Configurations G R T 2 0 0 -
Pos. Number (and Location) of communication modules

Fiber 100Base- 100Base-TX 1000base-
EF RS485 optic /1000Base-T IRIG-B Remark
FX LX
14 1(C11)
1J 1(C11)
1K 1(C11)
34 1(C11) 1(C15)
3J 1(C11) 1(C15)
3K 1(C11) 1(C15)
46 2(C11,C12) Hot-standby†
4C 1(C13) 1(C11)
4G 1(C13) 1(C11)
4L 2(C11,C12) Hot-standby†
4M 2(C11,C12) Hot-standby†
4N 1(C13) 1(C11)
4Q 1(C13) 1(C11)
4S 1(C13) 1(C11)
4U 1(C13) 1(C11)
66 2(C11,C12) 1(C15) Hot-standby†
6C 1(C13) 1(C11) 1(C15)
6G 1(C13) 1(C11) 1(C15)
6L 2(C11,C12) 1(C15) Hot-standby†
6M 2(C11,C12) 1(C15) Hot-standby†
6N 1(C13) 1(C11) 1(C15)
6Q 1(C13) 1(C11) 1(C15)
6S 1(C13) 1(C11) 1(C15)
6U 1(C13) 1(C11) 1(C15)
7D 1(C13) 2(C11,C12) Hot-standby†
7H 1(C13) 2(C11,C12) Hot-standby†
7P 1(C13) 2(C11,C12) Hot-standby†
7R 1(C13) 2(C11,C12) Hot-standby†
7T 1(C13) 2(C11,C12) Hot-standby†
7V 1(C13) 2(C11,C12) Hot-standby†
9D 1(C13) 2(C11,C12) 1(C15) Hot-standby†
9H 1(C13) 2(C11,C12) 1(C15) Hot-standby†
9P 1(C13) 2(C11,C12) 1(C15) Hot-standby†
9R 1(C13) 2(C11,C12) 1(C15) Hot-standby†
9T 1(C13) 2(C11,C12) 1(C15) Hot-standby†
9V 1(C13) 2(C11,C12) 1(C15) Hot-standby†
L6 2(C11,C12) PRP/HSR/RSTP†
LD 1(C13) 2(C11,C12) PRP/HSR/RSTP†
LH 1(C13) 2(C11,C12) PRP/HSR/RSTP†
LL 2(C11,C12) PRP/HSR/RSTP†
LM 2(C11,C12) PRP/HSR/RSTP†
LP 1(C13) 2(C11,C12) PRP/HSR/RSTP†
LR 1(C13) 2(C11,C12) PRP/HSR/RSTP†
LT 1(C13) 2(C11,C12) PRP/HSR/RSTP†
LV 1(C13) 2(C11,C12) PRP/HSR/RSTP†
N6 2(C11,C12) 1(C15) PRP/HSR/RSTP†
ND 1(C13) 2(C11,C12) 1(C15) PRP/HSR/RSTP†
NH 1(C13) 2(C11,C12) 1(C15) PRP/HSR/RSTP†
NL 2(C11,C12) 1(C15) PRP/HSR/RSTP†
- 922 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Pos. Number (and Location) of communication modules

Fiber 100Base- 100Base-TX 1000base-
EF RS485 optic /1000Base-T IRIG-B Remark
FX LX
NM 2(C11,C12) 1(C15) PRP/HSR/RSTP†
NP 1(C13) 2(C11,C12) 1(C15) PRP/HSR/RSTP†
NR 1(C13) 2(C11,C12) 1(C15) PRP/HSR/RSTP†
NT 1(C13) 2(C11,C12) 1(C15) PRP/HSR/RSTP†
NV 1(C13) 2(C11,C12) 1(C15) PRP/HSR/RSTP†
†Communication redundancy, PRP/HSP/RSTP or Hot-standby, is applicable when a dedicated LAN

module is ordered. Module locations can be found out using a positon code of brackets. For example,
single 100Base-TX/1000Base-T module is mounted at C11 when “14” code is chosen at Positon E&F. To
find out the locations C11—C15, see 398.
- 923 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
5. Ordering information for Software models

Positions
Configurations G R T 2 0 0 - 0 3 - -

Assignment at ‘7’ (see p. 911, 915 or 919)
Function block
See Function table (see p.925)
Network / Time Sync. module
Assignment at ‘E’ position (see p. 922 or 923)
Assignment at ‘F’ position (see p. 922 or 923)
Protocol†1
IEC60870-5-103†2+IEC 61850 1
IEC 61850 2
Outline
Assignment at ‘9’ position
(see pp. 911-913, 915-917, or 919)
Language
English E
1†For PRP/HSR/RSTP protocol with the IEC 61850, choose “L” or “N” code at position E. For
hot/standby configuration or single port configuration with the IEC 61850, choose other codes at
position E (see p. 922 or 923).
2† Either RS485 or Fiber optic module is required for the operation of the IEC60870-103. It can
be selected an ordering code with the inclusion of RS485 or Fiber optic from the tables (see p.
922 or 923).
- 924 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Ordering information
[Function Table for respective models]
Function Description Ordering No. (Position 'G & T')
Block 3D 3E 3F
2 x 3ph-CT ● ● ●
DIF 3 x 3ph-CT ● ● ●
(87) 4 x 3ph-CT - ● ●
5 x 3ph-CT - - ●
REF Low-impedance restricted earth fault 2 Stage ● - ●
(87N) protection 3 Stage - - ●
Non-directional definite / inverse time
OC ●
(50/51/67) 8 stages ● ●
Directional definite / inverse time
-
EF earth fault protection ●
(50G/51G/ (using phase currents)
8 stages ● ●
67G) Directional definite / inverse time
overcurrent protection -
(using phase currents)
EFIn
earth fault protection 4 stages ● - ●
(50N/51N)
(using neutral current)
Non-directional negative-
● ● ●
OCN sequence overcurrent protection
4 stages
(46) Directional negative- sequence
-
BCD
Broken conductor protection — ● ● ●
(46BC)
THM THM trip
Thermal overload protection ● ● ●
(49) THM alarm
ICD
Inrush current detector function — ● ● ●
CBF CBF re-trip
Circuit breaker failure protection ● ● ●
(50BF) CBF trip
Under-frequency /
FRQ/DFRQ
Over-frequency / Rate of change of 6 stages ●(*1) ●(*1) ●(*1)
(81U/81O)
frequency protection
VPH V/f trip
Over-excitation protection ●(*2) ●(*2) ●(*2)
(24) V/f alarm
MECH. Trip and/or Indication of external
32 stages ● ● ●
TRIP devices
(*1) Available for phase-to-phase or

3 x three-phase CT +
2 x zero-phase CT +
3 x zero-phase CT +
1 x three-phase VT
2 x three-phase VT
phase-to-ground voltage inputs

1 x one-phase VT
(*2) Available for phase-to-phase or

3phase-to-ground voltage inputs
Ordering No. Ordering No. Ordering No.

(Position '7'=3) (Position '7'=4) (Position '7'=5)
Model3 Model4 Model5
- 925 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
6. Ordering information for Binary IO modules

[Number of BI/BO]
Selction of 1xBIO module, a slot is assigned in the IED case.
Number of circuits on a module
Binary input circuits (BI) Binary output circuits (BO)
Independent type & variable thresholds
Auxiliary (normal) or Form C type

Semi-fast operating type
Independent circuit type
Common circuit type
Fast operating type
Ordering
Hybrid type
No.†1 Selections of a BIO module
7 - - - 6 4 - 11 1xBIO1A
12 - - - 3 2 - 12 1xBIO2A
8 - - 6 - 2 - 13 1xBIO3A
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
18 - - - - - - 15 1xBI1A
- 12 - - - - - 16 1xBI2A
- - 32 - - - - 17 1xBI3A
- - - - 6 12 - 18 1xBO1A
Note
†1 The code selected is set for A & B positions of ‘Hardware selection’.
- 926 - GRT200 (Soft 03D, 03E, and 03F)

6F2S1924 (0.26)
Selction of 2xBIO modules, two slots are assigned in the IED case.

Common circuit type
Fast operating type

Ordering
Hybrid type
No.†1 Selections of BIO module combination
- - 32 - 6 12 - 21 1xBI3A+1xBO1A
7 - 32 - 6 4 - 22 1xBI3A+1xBIO1A
12 - 32 - 3 2 - 23 1xBI3A+1xBIO2A
18 - - - 6 12 - 24 1xBI1A+1xBO1A
25 - - - 6 4 - 25 1xBI1A+1xBIO1A
30 - - - 3 2 - 26 1xBI1A+1xBIO2A
8 - - 6 6 14 - 27 1xBO1A+1xBIO3A
15 - - 6 6 6 - 28 1xBIO1A+1xBIO3A
7 - - - 12 16 - 29 1xBO1A+1xBIO1A
16 - - 12 - 4 - 2A 2xBIO3A
- - 32 - - - 16 2B 1xBI3A+1xBO2A
- 12 - - 6 12 - 2C 1xBI2A+1xBO1A
- - - - - - - (N/A)
20 - - 6 3 4 - 2E 1xBIO2A+1xBIO3A
12 - - - 9 14 - 2F 1xBO1A+1xBIO2A
8 12 - 6 - 2 - 2G 1xBI2A+1xBIO3A
Note
†1 The code selected is set for A & B positions of ‘Hardware selection’.

- 927 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Selction of 3xBIO modules; three slots are assigned in the IED case.

Common circuit type
Fast operating type

Ordering
Hybrid type
No. Selections of BIO module combination
15 - - 6 12 18 - 31 1xBO1A+1xBIO1A+1xBIO3A
20 - - 6 9 16 - 32 1xBO1A+1xBIO2A+1xBIO3A
23 - - 12 6 8 - 33 1xBIO1A+2xBIO3A
26 - - 6 6 14 - 34 ‡1 1xBI1A+1xBO1A+1xBIO3A
8 - 32 6 6 14 - 35 1xBI3A+1xBO1A+1xBIO3A
24 - - 18 - 6 - 36 3xBIO3A
25 - - - 12 16 - 37 1xBI1A+1xBO1A+1xBIO1A
36 - - - 6 12 - 39 2xBI1A+1xBO1A
- 24 - - 6 12 - 3A 2xBI2A+1xBO1A
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
7 - 32 - 6 4 16 3C 1xBI3A+1xBIO1A+1xBO2A
7 - 32 - 12 16 - 3D 1xBI3A+1xBO1A+1xBIO1A
- - 32 - 6 12 16 3E 1xBI3A+1xBO1A+1xBO2A
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
16 - - 12 6 16 - 3G 1xBO1A+2xBIO3A
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
26 - - 6 6 14 - 3J ‡1 1xBO1A+1xBIO3A+1xBI1A
- - 64 - 6 12 - 3K 2xBI3A+1xBO1A
14 - 32 - 12 8 - 3L 1xBI3A+2xBIO1A
- - 96 - - - - 3M 3xBI3A
8 12 - 6 6 14 - 3N 1xBI2A+1xBO1A+1xBIO3A
- - 32 - 12 24 - 3P 1xBI3A + 2xBO1A
36 - - - - - 16 3Q 2xBI1A+ 1xBO2A
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
16 12 - 12 - 4 - 3S 1xBI2A+2xBIO3A
18 12 - - 6 12 - 3T 1xBI1A+1xBI2A+1xBO1A
12 - 32 - 9 14 - 3U 1xBI3A+1xBO1A+1xBIO2A
Note
‡1 The difference between ‘34’ and ‘3J’ is the mount positons about BIO modules.

- 928 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Selction of 4xBIO modules; four slots are assigned in the IED case.

Common circuit type
Fast operating type

Ordering
Hybrid type
26 - - 6 12 26 - 41 ‡1 1xBI1A+2xBO1A+1xBIO3A
32 - - 24 - 8 - 42 4xBIO3A
8 - 32 6 12 26 - 43 1xBI3A+2xBO1A+1xBIO3A
- - 64 - 12 24 - 44 2xBI3A+2xBO1A
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
54 - - - 6 12 - 46 3xBI1A+1xBO1A
20 - 32 6 9 16 - 47 1xBI3A+1xBO1A+1xBIO2A+1xBIO3A
26 - - 6 12 26 - 48 ‡1 1xBO1A+1xBI1A+1xBO1A+1xBIO3A
20 - - 6 15 28 - 49 2xBO1A+1xBIO2A+1xBIO3A
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
34 - - 12 6 16 - 4B 1xBI1A+1xBO1A+2xBIO3A
- - 64 - - - 32 4C 2xBI3A+2xBO2A
21 - 32 - 18 12 - 4D 1xBI3A+3xBIO1A
- - 128 - - - - 4E 4xBI3A
7 - 96 - 6 4 - 4F 3xBI3A+1xBIO1A
8 24 - 6 6 14 - 4G 2xBI2A +1xBO1A +1xBIO3A
- - 32 - 18 36 - 4H 1xBI3A + 3xBO1A
26 12 - 6 6 14 - 4J 1xBI1A + 1xBI2A + 1xBO1A+ 1xBIO3A
24 - 32 - 12 16 - 4K 1xBI3A+1xBO1A+2xBIO2A
15 - - 6 18 30 - 4L 2xBO1A+1xBIO1A+1xBIO3A
7 - - - 24 40 - 4M 3xBO1A+1xBIO1A
36 - - - 12 24 - 4N 2xBI1A+2xBO1A
8 - 64 6 6 14 - 4P 2xBI3A+1xBO1A+1xBIO3A
36 - - - 6 12 16 4Q 2xBI1A+1xBO1A+1xBO2A
44 - - 6 6 14 - 4R 2xBI1A+1xBO1A+1xBIO3A
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
Note
‡1 The difference between ‘41’ and ‘48’ is the mount positions about BIO modules.

- 929 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Selction of 5xBIO modules; five slots are assigned in the IED case.

Common circuit type
Fast operating type

Ordering
Hybrid type
33 - - 6 6 6 32 51 1xBI1A+1xBIO1A+1xBIO3A+2xBO2A
44 - - 6 12 26 - 52 2xBI1A+2xBO1A+1xBIO3A
25 - 96 - 6 4 - 53 1xBI1A+3xBI3A+1xBIO1A
8 - 96 6 6 14 - 54 3xBI3A+1xBO1A+1xBIO3A
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
62 - - 6 6 14 - 56 3xBI1A+1xBO1A+1xBIO3A
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
- - 96 - 12 24 - 5B 3xBI3A+2xBO1A
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
- - 128 - 6 12 - 5E 4xBI3A+1xBO1A
- - 160 - 6 12 - 5F 5xBI3A
44 12 - 6 6 14 - 5G 2xBI1A + 1xBI2A + 1xBO1A + 1xBIO3A
15 - - 6 24 42 - 5H 3xBO1A+1xBIO1A+1xBIO3A
- - 64 - 18 36 - 5J 2xBI3A+3xBO1A
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
- - - - 30 60 - 5L 5xBO1A
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
42 - - 18 6 18 - 5P 1xBI1A+1xBO1A+3xBIO3A
41 - - 12 12 20 - 5Q 1xBI1+1xBO1+1xBIO1+2xBIO3
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
8 12 64 6 - 2 16 5S 1xBI2A+2xBI3A+1xBIO3A+1xBO2A
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
36 24 - - 6 12 - 5U 2xBI1A+2xBI2A+1xBO1A

- 930 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Selction of 6xBIO modules; six slots are assigned in the IED case.

Common circuit type
Fast operating type

Ordering
Hybrid type
51 - - 6 18 30 - 61 2xBI1A+2xBO1A+1xBIO1A+1xBIO3A
8 - 96 6 12 26 - 62 3xBI3A+2xBO1A+1xBIO3A
- - 128 - 12 24 - 63 4xBI3A+2xBO1A
8 - 128 6 6 14 - 64 4xBI3A+1xBO1A+1xBIO3A
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
52 - - 12 - 4 32 69 2xBI1A+2xBIO3A+2xBO2A
52 - - 12 12 28 - 6A 2xBI1A+2xBO1A+2xBIO3A
36 - - - 24 48 - 6B 2xBI1A+4xBO1A
36 - 64 - 12 24 - 6C 2xBI1A+2xBI3A+2xBO1A
44 - - 6 18 38 - 6D 2xBI1A+3xBO1A+1xBIO3A
- - 160 - 6 12 - 6E 5xBI3A+1xBO1A
7 - 160 - 6 4 - 6F 5xBI3A+1xBIO1A
8 - 64 6 - 2 48 6G 2xBI3A+1xBIO3A+3xBO2A
26 - 64 6 - 2 32 6H 1xBI1A+2xBI3A+1xBIO3A+2xBO2A
8 12 64 6 6 14 16 6J 1xBI2A+2xBI3A+1xBO1A+1xBIO3A+1xBO2A
- - - - - - - (N/A) -

- 931 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Selction of 7xBIO modules; seven slots are assigned in the IED case.

Common circuit type
Fast operating type

Ordering
Hybrid type
80 - - 6 12 26 - 71 4xBI1A+2xBO1A+1xBIO3A
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
8 - 96 6 18 38 - 73 3xBI3A+3xBO1A+1xBIO3A
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
- 60 - - 6 12 16 78 5xBI2A+1xBO1A+1xBO2A
- - 160 - 12 24 - 79 5xBI3A+2xBO1A
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
54 - 64 - 12 24 - 7B 3xBI1A+2xBI3A+2xBO1A
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
- - 128 - 18 36 - 7D 4xBI3A+3xBO1A
7 - 160 - 12 16 - 7E 5xBI3A+1xBO1A+1xBIO1A
- - 192 - 6 12 - 7F 6xBI3A+1xBO1A
7 - 192 - 6 4 - 7G 6xBI3A+1xBIO1A
- - 224 - - - - 7H 7xBI3A
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
8 - 96 6 - 2 48 7L 3xBI3A+1xBIO3A+3xBO2A
- - - - - - - (N/A) -

- 932 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Selction of 8xBIO modules; eight slots are assigned in the IED case.

Common circuit type
Fast operating type

Ordering
Hybrid type
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
- - 160 - 18 36 - 83 5xBI3A+3xBO1A
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
- 60 - - 6 12 32 87 5xBI2A+1xBO1A+2xBO2A
8 - 128 6 18 38 - 88 4xBI3A+3xBO1A+1xBIO3A
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
- - 256 - - - - 8C 8xBI3A
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
7 - 224 - 6 4 - 8G 7xBI3A+1xBIO1A
- - 192 - 12 24 - 8H 6xBI3A+2xBO1A
7 - 192 - 12 16 - 8J 6xBI3A+1xBO1A+1xBIO1A
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
7 - 96 - 30 52 - 8M 3xBI3A+4xBO1A+1xBIO1A
- - 128 - 24 48 - 8N 4xBI3A+4xBO1A
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
- - - - - - - (N/A) -
- - - - - - - (N/A) -

- 933 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
7. Ordering information for Optional accessories
[Optional accessories]
[Label sheet]
Accessory names Quantity per order Codes
Pocket sheet label for LEDs(White) 10 EP-211-00
Pocket sheet label for function keys(White) 10 EP-212-00
[Rating jumpers]
Jumpers to change rated current 20 EP-221
[Monitoring plugs]
Plugs for monitoring jacks on the front 4 EP-222
[Rear terminal remover]

Hook tool for detaching rear terminal 1 EP-235
[Engineering tools]
GR-TIEMS 1 license EP-251
PLC-EDITOR 1 license EP-261
[Mounting kits for 19” size rack]

Joint kits for single 1/2 case 1 set EP-204
Joint kits for two 1/2 case 1 set EP-205
Joint kits for single 3/4 case 1 set EP-206

6F2S1924 (0.26)
Appendix 6 Technical data
- 935 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Technical data
Analog Inputs
Rated current In Either 1A or 5A (selectable by settings)
Rated voltage Vn 100V to 120V
Rated Frequency Either 50Hz or 60Hz (fixed when the ordering is performed)
Overload Rating
Current inputs 4 times rated current continuous
5 times rated current for 3 minutes
6 times rated current for 2 minutes
30 times rated current for 10 seconds
100 times rated current for 1 second
250 times rated current for one power cycle (20 or 16.6ms)
Voltage inputs 2 times rated voltage continuous
2.5 times rated voltage for 1 second
Burden
Phase current inputs  0.1VA at In = 1A,  0.2VA at In = 5A
Earth current inputs  0.3VA at In = 1A,  0.4VA at In = 5A
Sensitive earth fault inputs  0.3VA at In = 1A,  0.4VA at In = 5A
Voltage inputs  0.1VA at Vn
Power Supply
Rated auxiliary voltage 24/48/60Vdc (Operative range: 19.2 – 72.0Vdc)
48/125Vdc (Operative range: 38.4 – 150.0Vdc)
110/250Vdc (Operative range: 88.0 – 300.0Vdc)
Superimposed AC ripple on DC supply  15%
Power Supply Interruption Withstand Period 110/250Vdc rating : 50ms
(IEC60255-11)
Power consumption  15W (quiescent)
 25W (maximum)
- 936 - GRT200 (Soft 03D, 03E, and 03F)

6F2S1924 (0.26)
Binary Inputs
Input circuit DC voltage 24/48/60Vdc (Operating range: 19.2 – 72Vdc),
110/125/220/250Vdc (Operating range: 88 – 300Vdc)
Note: Pick-up setting is available in BI2 (range: 18V – 222V)
Capacitive discharge immunity 10μF charged to maximum supply voltage and discharged
into the input terminals, according to ENA TS 48-4 with an
external resistor
Maximum permitted voltage 72Vdc for 24/48/60Vdc rating,
300Vdc for 110/250Vdc rating
Power consumption  0.5W per input at 220Vdc
Binary Outputs
Fast operating contacts
Make and carry 5A continuously
30A, 290Vdc for 0.2s (L/R=5ms)
Break 0.15A, 290Vdc (L/R=40ms)
Operating time Typically 3 ms
Semi-fast operating contacts
30A, 240Vdc for 1s (L/R=5ms)
Break 0.1A at 250Vdc (L/R=40ms)
0.2A at 125Vdc (L/R=40ms)
Auxiliary contacts
30A, 240Vdc for 1s (L/R=5ms)
Break 0.1A at 250Vdc (L/R=40ms)
0.2A at 125Vdc (L/R=40ms)
Hybrid contacts (10 A breaking)
10A, 220Vdc for 0.5s (L/R=5ms)
Break 10A, 220Vdc (L/R=20ms)
10A, 110Vdc (L/R=40ms)
Operating time 1 ms
Durability ≥ 10,000 operations (loaded contact)
≥ 100,000 operations (unloaded contact)
Measuring input capability

Full scale
Standard current input ≥ 60A (1A rating) or 300A (5A rating)
Sensitive current input ≥ 3A (1A rating) or 15 A (5A rating)
Voltage input ≥ 200V
Sampling rate 48 samples / cycle
Frequency response < 5% deviation over range 16.7Hz to 600Hz
- 937 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Mechanical Design
Installation Flush mounting
Weight Approx. 10kg (1/3 size), 12kg (1/2 size), 15kg (3/4 size), 25kg
(1/1 size)
Case color 2.5Y7.5/1 (approximation to Munsell value)
LED
Number 26 (Fixed for “In service” and “ERROR”)
Color Red / Yellow / Green (configurable) except In service (green)
and Error (red)
Function keys
Number 7
Local PC Interface (front port)
USB Type B
Maximum cable length 2 meters (less than)
Terminal block structure
VCT Ring type terminal
Wire thickness: 2.5mm2 through 5.5 mm2
Termination: M3.5 ring tongue insulated
BI / BO / PWS Compression plug type terminal

Wire thickness: 1.5mm2 through 2.5 mm2 or AWG14
Termination: Stripping length = 10 mm (typical)
Ring type terminal
Wire thickness: 1.5mm2 through 2.5 mm2 or AWG14
Termination: M3.5 ring tongue insulated
VCT BI / BO / PWS
VC* T* T*
1
2
3
4 1 2
5
6 3 4
7 5 6
8
9 7 8
10
11 9 10
12
11 12
13
14 13 14
15
16 15 16
17
18 17 18
19
20 21 22
23 24
25 26
21
22 27 28
23
24 29 30
25 31 32
26
27 33 34
28
29 35 36
30
37 38
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
Ring type Compression plug type Ring type

terminal terminal terminal
- 938 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Communication for Network (rear port)

100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T For IEC 61850-8-1 and GR-TIEMS over TCP/IP
Connector type RJ-45
Cable type CAT5e STP cable
-enhanced category 5 with Shielded Twisted Pair cable
100BASE-FX For IEC 61850-8-1 over TCP/IP
Cable type Multimode fiber, 50/125 or 62.5/125μm
Connector type SC duplex connector
Wave length 1300nm
1000BASE-LX For IEC 61850-8-1 over TCP/IP
Cable type Single-mode fiber
Connector type LC duplex connector
Wave length 1310nm
Serial communication (rear port)

RS485 For IEC 60870-5-103
Cable type Shielded twisted pair cable
Connector type Push-in spring terminal (PCB connector)
Fiber optic For IEC 60870-5-103

Cable type Multimode fiber, 50/120μm or 62.5/125μm
Connector type ST connector
Wave length 820nm
- 939 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Operation accuracies
Protection functions Accuracies

Pick-ups 5% of setting value
Reset 5% of setting value
Operating time
Operating time of biased current typical 25ms + BO operating time (*1)
differential protection
Operating time of high-set current typical 20ms + BO operating time (*1)
differential protection
Restricted Earth Fault element
Pick-ups 5% of setting value (at I ≥ 0.5pu)
Operating time typical 30ms + BO operating time (*1)
Overcurrent protection
Pick-ups 3% of setting value (at I ≥ 0.5pu)
Operating time with definite timer typical 35ms + BO operating time (*1)
Operating time with inverse timer IEC curve：5% of theoretical value
for 2  Multiple of threshold value  10 and TMS=1
IEEE curve: 10% of theoretical value
for 2  multiple of threshold value  10 and TMS=1s
Earth fault protection
Pick-ups  3% of setting value (at I ≥ 0.5pu)
Operating time with definite timer typical 35ms + BO operating time (*1)
Operating time with inverse timer IEC curve：5% of theoretical value
for 2  Multiple of threshold value  10 and TMS=1
IEEE curve: 10% of theoretical value
for 2  multiple of threshold value  10 and TMS=1s
Thermal overload protection
Pick-ups 5% of setting value
Operating time 10% of setting value
Over/Under frequency protection
Pick-ups 0.03Hz (at f0±1Hz)
Start time Typical 150ms (at 60Hz,4H/s)
Typical 180ms(50Hz,4Hz/s)
Overexcitation protection
Pick-ups 2% of pick-up voltage at f0 2%
Start time Typical 150ms
(*1)Typically 3—6ms
- 940 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Environmental performance
Atmospheric Environment
Temperature IEC 60068-2-1/2 Operating range:–25C to +55C.
IEC 60068-2-14 Storage / Transit:–25C to +70C.
Cyclic temperature test as per IEC 60068-2-
14
Humidity IEC 60068-2-30 56 days at 40C and 93% relative humidity.
IEC 60068-2-78 Cyclic temperature with humidity test as per
IEC 60068-2-30
Enclosure Protection IEC 60529 IP52 - Dust and Dripping Water Proof
IP20 for rear panel
Mechanical Environment
Vibration IEC 60255-21-1 Response - Class 1
Endurance - Class 1
Shock and Bump IEC 60255-21-2 Shock Response Class 1
Shock Withstand Class 1
Bump Class 1
Seismic IEC 60255-21-3 Class 1
Electrical Environment
Dielectric Withstand IEC 60255-27 2kVrms for 1 minute between all terminals
and earth.
2kVrms for 1 minute between independent
circuits.
1kVrms for 1 minute across normally open
contacts.
High Voltage Impulse IEC 60255-27 Three positive and three negative impulses of
IEEE C37.90 5kV(peak), 1.2/50s, 0.5J between all
terminals and between all terminals and
earth.
Voltage Dips, IEC 60255-11, 1. Voltage dips:
Interruptions, IEC 61000-4-29, 0 % residual voltage for 20 ms
Variations and Ripple IEC 61000-4-17 40 % residual voltage for 200 ms
on DC supply IEC 60255-26 Ed 3 70 % residual voltage for 500 ms
2. Voltage interruptions:
0 % residual voltage for 5 s
3. Ripple:
15 % of rated d.c. value, 100 / 120 Hz
4. Gradual shut-down / start-up:
60 s shut-down ramp, 5 min power off, 60s
start-up ramp
5. Reversal of d.c. power supply polarity:
1 min
Capacitive Discharge ENA TS 48-4 10μF charged to maximum supply voltage
and discharged into the input terminals with
an external resistance
- 941 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Environmental performance
Electromagnetic Environment
High Frequency IEC 60255-22-1 Class 3, 1 MHz burst in common / differential modes
Disturbance / IEC 61000-4-18 Auxiliary supply and I/O ports: 2.5 kV / 1 kV
Damped Oscillatory IEC 60255-26 Ed 3 Communications ports: 1 kV / 0 kV
Wave
Electrostatic IEC 60255-22-2 Class 4, Contact: 2, 4, 6, 8kV
Discharge IEC 61000-4-2 Air: 2, 4, 8, 15kV
IEEE C37.90.3-2001
IEC 60255-26 Ed 3
Radiated RF IEC 60255-22-3, Sweep test ranges: 80 MHz to 1 GHz and 1.4
Electromagnetic GHz to 2.7 GHz.
Disturbance IEC 61000-4-3 Level 3 Spot tests at 80, 160, 380, 450, 900, 1850 and
IEC 60255-26 Ed 3 2150 MHz.
Field strength: 10 V/m
IEEE C37.90.2-1995 Field strength 35V/m for frequency sweep of
25MHz to 1GHz.
Fast Transient IEC 60255-22-4 5 kHz, 5/50ns disturbance
Disturbance IEC 61000-4-4 Auxiliary supply and input / output ports: 4 kV
IEC 60255-26 Ed 3 Communications ports: 2 kV
Surge Immunity IEC 60255-22-5 1.2/50µms surge in common/differential
IEC 61000-4-5 modes:
IEC 60255-26 Ed 3 Auxiliary supply and input / output ports: 4, 2,
1, 0.5 kV / 1, 0.5 kV
Communications ports: up to 1, 0.5 kV / 0 kV
Surge Withstand IEEE C37.90.1-2002 3kV, 1MHZ damped oscillatory wave
4kV, 5/50ns fast transient
Conducted RF IEC 60255-22-6 Sweep test range: 150 kHz to 80MHz
Electromagnetic IEC 61000-4-6 Spot tests at 27 and 68 MHz.
Disturbance IEC 60255-26 Ed 3 Voltage level: 10 V r.m.s
Power Frequency IEC 60255-22-7 50/60 Hz disturbance for 10 s in common /
Disturbance IEC 61000-4-16 differential modes†
IEC 60255-26 Ed 3 Binary input ports: 300 V / 150 V
Power Frequency IEC 61000-4-8 Class 4 Field applied at 50/60Hz with strengths of:
Magnetic Field IEC 60255-26 Ed 3 30A/m continuously,
300A/m for 1 second.
Conducted and IEC 60255-25 Conducted emissions:
Radiated Emissions EN 55022 Class A, 0.15 to 0.50MHz: <79dB (peak) or <66dB
EN 61000-6-4 (mean)
IEC 60255-26 Ed 3 0.50 to 30MHz: <73dB (peak) or <60dB (mean)
Radiated emissions
30 to 230 MHz: < 40 dB(uV/m)
230 to 1000 MHz: < 47 dB(uV/m)
Measured at a distance of 10 m
†For differential mode, ‘CMP_NUM’ setting utilized.
- 942 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
European Commission Directives
European Commission Directives

2014/30/EU Compliance with the European Commission
Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive is
demonstrated according to EN 60255-26:2013
2014/35/EU Compliance with the European Commission
Low Voltage Directive for electrical safety is
demonstrated according EN 60255-27:2014.
- 943 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Functional data
Current differential protection (DIF)

Stage 1: Biased current differential element
Minimum operating value (DIF-S1-I1) 0.10 to 1.00pu in 0.01pu steps
Small current region slope (DIF-S1-Slope1) 10 to 100% in 1% steps
Large current region slope (DIF-S1-Slope2) 10 to 200% in 1% steps
Knee point (DIF-S1-I2) 1.00 to 20.00pu in 0.01pu steps
2nd harmonic sensitivity for Inrush currents
(DIF-2f) 10 to 50% in 1% steps
5th harmonic sensitivity for Overexcitation
(DIF-5f) 10 to 100% in 1% steps
Operate time Typical 25ms
Stage 2: High-set unrestrained differential

element
Overcurrent (DIF-S2-I) 2.00 to 20.00pu in 0.01pu steps
Operate time Typical 20ms
Restricted earth fault element (REF)
[Low-impedance scheme]
Minimum operating value (REF--I1) 0.05 to 0.50pu in 0.01pu steps
Small current region slope (REF--Slope1) 10 %
Large current region slope (REF--Slope2) 50 to 100% in 1% steps
Knee Point (REF--I2) 0.50 to 2.00pu in 0.01pu steps
: P, S, T
Overcurrent protection (OC) (Non-directional or directional; phase to ground)
Definite time overcurrent threshold 0.02 to 50.00A in 0.01A steps (1A rating)
0.10 to 250.00A in 0.01A steps (5A rating)
Inverse time overcurrent threshold 0.02 to 5.00A in 0.01A steps (1A rating)
Direction characteristic Non Directional / Forward / Backward
Polarizing voltage 1.0 V(fixed)
Characteristic angle 0 – 180 degs in 1 deg steps
Delay type DT / IEC-NI / IEC-VI / IEC-EI / UK-LTI / IEEE-MI / IEEE-VI
/ IEEE-EI / US-CO2 / US-CO8 / Original
Drop-out/pick-up ratio 10 to 100% in 1% steps
DTL delay 0.00 to 300.00s in 0.01s steps
IDMTL Time Multiplier Setting TMS 0.010 to 50.000 in 0.001 steps
Reset type Definite Time or Dependent Time
Reset definite delay 0.00 to 300.00s in 0.01s steps
Reset Time Multiplier Setting RTMS 0.010 to 50.000 in 0.001 steps
- 944 - GRT200 (Soft 03D, 03E, and 03F)

6F2S1924 (0.26)
Earth fault protection (EF) (Non-directional or Directional)

Definite time earth fault threshold 0.02 to 50.00A in 0.01A steps (1A rating)
Inverse time earth fault threshold 0.02 to 5.00A in 0.01A steps (1A rating)
Characteristic angle 0 to 180° in 1° steps (3I0 lags for −3V0)
Polarising voltage (3V0) 0.5 to 100.0V in 0.1V steps
Earth fault protection with neutral current (EFIn) (Non-directional)
Definite time earth fault threshold 0.02 to 50.00A in 0.01A steps (1A rating)
Inverse time earth fault threshold 0.02 to 5.00A in 0.01A steps (1A rating)
Negative sequence overcurrent protection (OCN)
Definite time NOC threshold 0.02 to 50.00A in 0.01A steps (1A rating)
Inverse time NOC threshold 0.02 to 5.00A in 0.01A steps (1A rating)
Characteristic angle 0 to 180° in 1° steps (3I0 lags for −3V0)
Polarising voltage 0.5 to 25.0V in 0.1V steps
- 945 - GRT200 (Soft 03D, 03E, and 03F)

6F2S1924 (0.26)
Thermal overload protection (THM)

Thermal setting (THM = k.IFLC) 0.40 – 2.00A in 0.01A steps (1A rating)
2.00 – 10.00A in 0.01A steps (5A rating)
Time constant (τ) 0.5 – 500.0mins in 0.1min steps
Thermal alarm OFF, 50% to 100% in 1% steps
Pre-load current setting 0.00 – 1.00A in 0.01A steps (1A rating)
0.00 – 5.00A in 0.01A steps (5A rating)
Broken conductor protection (BCD)
Broken conductor threshold 0.10 to 1.00 in 0.01 steps
Inrush current detection function (ICD)
Second harmonic detection 10 to 50% in 1% steps
Inrush current threshold 0.10 to 5.00A in 0.01A steps (1A rating)
Circuit breaker failure protection (CBF)
Overcurrent element 0.1 to 2.0A in 0.1A steps (1A rating)
BF timer for retry-trip of failed breaker 50 to 500ms in 1ms steps
BF timer for related breaker trip 50 to 500ms in 1ms steps
Undervoltage protection for phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground (UV,UVS)
Undervoltage threshold 5.0 to 130.0V in 0.1V steps
Delay type DTL, IDMT, Original
Reset delay 0.0 to 300.0s in 0.1s steps
Undervoltage block threshold 5.0 to 20.0V in 0.1V steps
Undervoltage block delay 0.00 to 300.00s in 0.01s steps
Overvoltage protection for phase-to-phase and phase-to-natural (OV,OVS)
Overvoltage threshold 1.0 to 220.0V in 0.1V steps
Earth fault overvoltage protection (OVG)
1.0 – 220.0V in 0.1V steps
Over-excitation protection (VPH)
Pickup voltage 100.0 to 120.0V in 0.1V steps
Alarm level (A) 1.03 to 1.30pu in 0.01pu steps
High level (H) 1.10 to 1.40pu in 0.01pu steps
Low level (L) 1.05 to 1.30pu in 0.01pu steps
LT (Definite time) 1 to 600s in 1s steps
HT (Definite time) 1 to 600s in 1s steps
TVFH (Definite time) 1 to 600s in 1s steps
TVFA (Definite time) 1 to 600s in 1s steps
Start time less than 130ms
RT (Definite time) 60 to 3600s in 1s steps
- 946 - GRT200 (Soft 03D, 03E, and 03F)

6F2S1924 (0.26)
Frequency protection (FRQ/DFRQ)

Under/overfrequency threshold (Fnom  10.00Hz) – (Fnom  10.00Hz) in 0.01Hz steps
Fnom: nominal frequency
DTL delay: 0.00 – 300.00s in 0.01s steps
Frequency UV Block 40.0 – 100.0V in 0.1V steps
Rate-of-change frequency threshold 0.1-15.0Hz/s in 0.1Hz/s steps
Metering Function
AC current Accuracy  0.5% (at rating)
AC voltage Accuracy  0.5% (at rating)
Energy (Wh, varh) Accuracy  1.0% (at rating)
Power (P, Q, S) Accuracy  1.0% (at rating when power quantities being fed)
Power factor (PF) Accuracy  0.5% (at rating)
Frequency Accuracy  0.03%
Time Synchronisation
Protocol SNTP
- 947 - GRT200 (Soft 03D, 03E, and 03F)

6F2S1924 (0.26)
Cabling
The table below shows the recommended cables in the cross-section and rated-voltage for the
connection with the transformer module (VCT), the binary IO module (BI, BO, and BIO), and
the power supply module (PWS). Rated-voltage required for the cable is 600Vac.
Table Cables for the connection with module
Connecting for Wire termination Wire thickness
Compression plug type terminal

Stripping length = 10 mm (typical) 1.5mm2 through 2.5 mm2
BI / BO / PWS
Ring type terminal or AWG14
M3.5 ring tongue insulated
2.5 mm2 through 5.5
VCT M3.5 ring tongue insulated
mm2
Protective earth (FG) M5 ring tongue insulated 5.5 mm2 or larger
Fuses
The table below shows the required fuse in the PWS. DO NOT change the fuse by the user.
The fuse is complies with IEC60127-2 Sheet 5.
Table Fuse specification in PWS
Specification Description
Rated current 3.15A
Rated voltage 500Vac & 400Vdc
Cutoff velocity Type “T”
Manufacture Littelfuse, Inc.
Type 04773.15XP
Safety and environment

The table below shows the safety category of the insulation resistance and the environment.
Table Safety and environment requirement
Safety requirement Definition in IEC Specification
Insulation resistance IEC 60255-27 More than 100 M-ohm at 500V d.c.
Protection bonding continuity test IEC 60255-27 Test current: 10 A a.c.
Resistance: less than 0.1 ohm
Protective bonding resistance test IEC 60255-27 Resistance: less than 0.2 ohm
Creepage distance and clearance IEC 60255-27 Pollution degree 2
Overvoltage category III
Protective class IEC 60255-27 Class I
- 948 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Appendix 7 CT requirement
- 949 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
For the operation of the GRT200 series, the user does not need to consider dedicated CTs nor
CTs with an identical ratio. It is allowed to share CTs with other protections for the operation;
the different ratios can be adjusted using settings.
(i) General CT requirement

The general CT requirements are set for the through-fault stability that comes up when any
CTs saturate under very large through-fault currents. To ensure the operation correctly for
such through-fault currents, Ks factor in each CT is required in order that the following
conditions are satisfied:
K s ≥1 when Tc ≤ 150ms (1–1)
or,
K s ≥5 when Tc ≤ 200ms (1–2)
where,
Ks: Ratio of CT knee point voltage to CT secondary probable voltage under the
maximum through-fault current:
Vk
Ks= (1–3)
IFmax
(R CT +R L +R B +R O )×
CT ratio
Tc: D.C. time constant of primary circuit
Vk: Knee point voltage of CT
RCT: Resistance of CT secondary winding
RL: Loop resistance of cable between CT and relay
RB: Ohmic load in the relay
(i.e. 0.1 ohm for 1A rating and 0.012ohm for 5A rating)
RO: Ohmic load of other series-connected relays (if any)
IFmax: Maximum through-fault current
(ii) Example for CT requirement

The Ks factor can be calculated when we have the following parameters:
Vk = 800 V, CTratio = 1200:1, RCT = 5.0 ohm, RL = 3.0 ohm, RB = 0.1 ohm,
RO = 0 ohm (i.e. no series-connected relays), and IFmax = 40kA (40,000A)
800 800
Ks= = = 3.0 (1–4)
40000 270
(5.0 + 3.0 + 0.1 + 0)×
1200
Equation (1-4) shows that we have the operation correctly for all the faults under the condition
that the D.C. time constant of the primary circuit is less than 200ms.
- 950 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Appendix 8 Notes for the dielectric voltage test
- 951 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
Dielectric voltage testing shall be carried out after reading the below notices carefully.
Cable connections
1. Type using compression terminal
Figure-8.A illustrates external connection around the power supply module (PWS). During dielectric
voltage testing, two short-wires attached on the PSW shall be carefully handled; follow the below
instructions (1) and (2).
(1) The short-wire between terminal screw No.35 and No.37

 Remove the short-wire for undertaking the dielectric voltage test. If the short-wire is not
removed, the IED will be damaged.
 After the test, reconnect the short-wire to the original positons.
(2) The short-wire between terminal screw No.38 and FG

 Never remove the short-wire. If the short-wire is removed, the IED will be damaged.
[IO#*] [IO#*] [VCT#*]

T* T* T* TC*
PWS BIO BIO
2
4
3
FAIL1
1
8
10
9
FAIL2
7
(1) (+) 29
30
DC/DC
(-) 31
32
35
36
37
y
38
(2)
FG
Figure-8.A Short-wires, around the PWS, for type using compression terminals
- 952 -
6F2S1924 (0.26)
2. Type using ring terminal

Figure-8.B illustrates external connection around the power supply module (PWS). During dielectric
voltage testing, a short-wire and a short-bar attached on the PSW shall be carefully handled; follow
the below instructions (1) and (2).
(1) The short-wire between terminal screw No.35 and No.37

 Remove the short-wire for undertaking the dielectric voltage test. If the short-wire is not
removed, the IED will be damaged.
 After the test, reconnect the short-wire to the original positons.
(2) The Short-bar between terminal screw No.37 and FG

 Never remove the short-bar. If the short-bar is removed, the IED will be damaged.
[IO#*] [IO#*] [VCT#*]

T* T* T* TC*
PWS BIO BIO
2
4
3
FAIL1
1
8
10
9
FAIL2
7
(1)
(+) 29
30
DC/DC
(-) 31
32
35
36
37
y
38
(2)
FG
Figure-8.B A short-wire and a short-bar, around the PWS, for type using ring terminals
- 953 -
Revision-up Records
Rev. and Section Approved Prepared
Change place and contents Checked by
Date (page) by by
0.00 First issue F. Kawano G. Suzuki T. Kaneko
July 30 2016 July 30 July 30 July 29
Chap. 4.3 Added the notice that the local mode will be G. Suzuki G. Suzuki T. Kaneko
canceled when key operations are not carried out. Aug. 8 Aug. 8 Aug 8
0.01 Chap. 5.5 Added the contents of threshold setting for G. Suzuki M. Ueda T. Kaneko
Aug. 8, 2016 dropping DC voltage generated in the PWS Aug. 8 Aug 8 Aug 8
Chap. 10.2.25 Revised the contents for the occurrence of Power G. Suzuki G. Suzuki T. Kaneko
errors; added the info. about PWS threshold set Aug. 8 Aug. 8 Aug 8
Chap. 1.4 Corrected the description about PLC connection G. Suzuki G. Suzuki T. Kaneko
point with regard for this instruction manual Aug. 18 Aug. 18 Aug 18
Chap. 11.2.3 Added the contents of PRP protocol G. Suzuki M. Okai T. Kaneko
Sep.30 Sep. 6 Sep 5
Chap.10.2.35 Added the contents of LRE error in PRP protocol G. Suzuki M. Okai T. Kaneko
0.02 Sep.30 Sep. 6 Sep 5
Sep. 30, 2016 Chap.10.2.37 Added the DataID table in the CHK_FPGA G. Suzuki G. Suzuki T. Kaneko
function Aug 18 Aug 18 Aug 18
Appendix 6 Revised the range (–10° to +55°C) of the operating T.Sugamoto T.Sugamoto T. Kaneko
temperature for the new one (–25° to +55°C). Sep. 1 Sep. 1 Sep. 1
Appendix 7 Revised the contents of the CE to comply with 2014 G. Suzuki T.Sugamoto T. Kaneko
rules Sep.30 Sep. 30 Sep. 6
Chap5 Revised the name ‘CPU2’ module to ‘CPU’ module T.Sugamoto T.Sugamoto T. Kaneko
Oct.11 Oct.11 Oct. 11
Chap5.2.1etc. Unifying several type names of VCTs to one name Y. Sonobe Y. Sonobe T. Kaneko
Appendix 5 (e.g., VCT type xxB→VCTxxB) Oct.11 Oct.11 Oct. 11
Chap. 5.2.5 Changed a short-wire to a short bar to the VCT be T.Sugamoto T.Sugamoto T. Kaneko
frame-granding Oct.11 Oct.11 Oct. 11
Chap. 5.3.2 Revised the connection wirings on the GIO cable in T.Sugamoto T.Sugamoto T. Kaneko
Fig 5.3-4 Oct.11 Oct.11 Oct. 11
Chap. 5.5 Revised the expression about the threshold levels T.Sugamoto T.Sugamoto T. Kaneko
in Figure 5.5-2 Oct.11 Oct.11 Oct. 11
Chap. 7.1 Added the notice to purchase a license before using F. Kawano M. Ueda T. Kaneko
the PLC editor Oct. 11 Oct.11 Oct. 11
0.03 Chap. 10.2.8 Added the contents of RUN error T. Kawasaki T.Kawasaki T. Kaneko
Oct. 15, 2016 Oct. 11 Oct. 11 Oct. 11
Chap. 10.2.32 Added the contents of LAN error T. Kawasaki T.Kawasaki T. Kaneko
Oct. 11 Oct. 11 Oct. 11
Chap. 10.2.33 Integrating the descriptions about ping1 and ping2 T. Kawasaki T.Kawasaki T. Kaneko
errors at Lan1 and Lan2 modules Oct. 11 Oct. 11 Oct. 11
Chap. 13.1 Added the address for Toshiba sales agent M. Ueda M. Ueda T. Kaneko
Oct.11 Oct.11 Oct. 11
Appendix 5 Revised the expressions to select a rated current in G. Suzuki G. Suzuki T. Kaneko
the ordering Oct.11 Oct.11 Oct. 11
Appendix 5 Added the ordering codes about GR-TIEMS and M. Ueda M. Ueda T. Kaneko
PLC editor in the ordering Oct.11 Oct.11 Oct. 11
Appendix 5 Corrected the ordering code for the communication M. Ueda M. Ueda T. Kaneko
module at Position F (i.e., U→V) Oct.11 Oct.11 Oct. 11
Chap. 10.1 Corrected the PSW contact outputs in Serious G. Suzuki G. Suzuki T. Kaneko
0.04 error Nov. 1 Nov. 1 Nov 1
Nov. 1, 2016 Chap. 10.2 Revised the list orders in Table 10.2-1; G. Suzuki G. Suzuki T. Kaneko
rearranged the order of error contents Oct. 30 Oct. 30 Oct 14
Chap. 5.4 Corrected BIO circuits w.r.t inversion signals in G. Suzuki X. Tung T. Kaneko
0.05 Fig. 5.4-1 and 5.4-5 Nov.15 Nov. 11 Nov. 11
Nov. 15 2016 Chap. 5.6 Corrected LED circuits w.r.t inversion signals in G. Suzuki G. Suzuki T. Kaneko
Fig. 5.6-2 Nov.15 Nov.15 Nov. 14
Date (page) by by
Chap. 3.2 Revised the range of REF setting (i.e., REF- G. Suzuki G. Suzuki T. Kaneko
Slope=10, fixed) Dec. 13 Dec. 13 Dec. 12
Chap. Revised the usage note of the DPI qualifications S. Katayama S. Katayama T. Kaneko
11.4.4(ii) regarding in FUN and INF Dec. 7 Dec. 7 Dec. 6
0.06 Chap. 12.1 Added the information about screen resolution of K.Kobayashi K. Oohashi T. Kaneko
Jan. 12 2017 MIMIC Dec. 28 Dec. 28 Dec. 26
Chap. 13 Revised all contents in Chapter Installation and M. Ueda M. Ueda T. Kaneko
replacement Jan. 6 Jan. 6 Dec. 26
Appendix 5 Added new BIO codes K.Kobayashi M. Ueda T. Kaneko
Dec. 28 Dec. 28 Dec. 26
Chap. 8.2 Added the notice about displaying the event K. Oohashi K. Oohashi T. Kaneko
information on GR-TIEMS Jan.30 Jan.30 Jan. 26
0.07 Chap. 10 Added time information (i.e., current time) in the T. Kawasaki T. Kawasaki T. Kaneko
Apr. 7 2017 error screen in Fig. 10.1-1 Jan. 18 Jan. 18 Jan. 18
Chap. 12.5 Added new pillars and beams for minor changed K. Oohashi F. Yamazaki T. Kaneko
IED cases Apr.7 Apr.7 Apr. 3
Cover sheet Revised the notice how to recognize the software K.Kobayashi K.Kobayashi T. Kaneko
codes on the nameplate Apr.26 Apr.26 Apr. 26
0.08 Chap. 12.3 Revised the check method about the software code K.Kobayashi K.Kobayashi T. Kaneko
Apr. 27 2017 using ordering codes Apr.26 Apr.26 Apr. 26
Chap. 12.5 Revised the contents for removal and attachment; K. Oohashi K. Oohashi T. Kaneko
Removed the contents for conventional IED cases Apr.26 Apr.26 Apr. 26
Chap. 10.2 Corrected Function ID number of CHK_PLC_DAT K.Kobayashi K.Kobayashi T. Kaneko
June.6 June.6 June 6
Chap 12 Inserted missing cover sheet (Index) “User K.Kobayashi K.Kobayashi T. Kaneko
0.09 interface” May 24 May 24 May 16
June 7, 2017 Chap. 11.3 Corrected the definitions of quality bits in K.Kobayashi K.Kobayashi T. Kaneko
IEC61850 June.6 June.6 June 6
Appendix 4 Corrected the “Sr1” and “Sr2” validity values “ in K. Oohashi K. Oohashi T. Kaneko
the PIXIT table June.16 June.16 June 14
0.10 Appendix 9 Added the notes for Dielectric voltage test K.Kobayashi T.Sugamoto T. Kaneko
Aug 9, 2017 Aug. 3 Aug. 3 Aug. 2
Chap. 10.2 Modified the LRE error message K.Kobayashi M. Okai T. Kaneko
Sep. 20 Sep. 20 Sep. 7
Chap. 11.2 Added HSR and RSTP protocol K.Kobayashi M. Okai T. Kaneko
Sep. 20 Sep. 20 Sep. 7
Chap. 13.1 Added an explanation of white-plastic-sheets for K. Oohashi M. Ueda T. Kaneko
0.11 covering the screw holes on the case sides Sep. 28 Sep. 28 Sep. 27
Oct. 2, 2017 Appendix 5 Added RPR/HSR, RSTP ordering ‘4’ at position ‘U’ K.Kobayashi M. Okai T. Kaneko
in Software selection; Remove selection of ‘3’ code Sep. 20 Sep. 20 Sep. 7
Appendix 7 Revised the contents of rack mounting kits; K. Oohashi M. Ueda T. Kaneko
modified the contents about rack mounting Sep. 28 Sep. 28 Sep. 27
-- Republished under the spin-off company K. Oohashi K. Oohashi T. Kaneko
Sep. 28 Sep. 28 Sep. 28
Chap. 1 Allowed G2 relay function to operate in Model5 K. Oohashi K.Kobayashi T. Kaneko
Nov. 20 Nov.18 Nov. 15
Chap. 2.1 Revised 3F software operates in Model5 in K. Oohashi K.Kobayashi T. Kaneko
Comparative table 2.1-1 Nov. 20 Nov.18 Nov. 15
Chap. 3 Revised 3F software operates in Model5 in K. Oohashi K.Kobayashi T. Kaneko
0.12
Comparative tables in Table 3.1-1 and others Nov. 20 Nov.18 Nov. 15
Nov. 20,2017
Comparative tables in Table 4.1-1 and others Nov. 20 Nov.18 Nov. 15
Chap. 5 Deleted the contents about GIO module K. Oohashi K.Kobayashi T. Kaneko
Nov. 20 Nov.18 Nov. 15
Date (page) by by
Comparative tables in Table 10.2-2 and 10.3-2 Nov. 20 Nov.18 Nov. 15
Chap. 10.1 Corrected the notice about 61850 quality value in K. Oohashi K. Oohashi T. Kaneko
Table 10.1-1 Oct. 12 Oct. 12 Oct. 12
Chap. 11.2 Added IP addresses setting examples for Hot K. Oohashi K. Oohashi T. Kaneko
stand-by, PRP, and HSR operations Nov. 20 Nov. 20 Nov. 20
Appendix 5 Applicable to select 3F software in Ordering; K. Oohashi K.Kobayashi T. Kaneko
Added new BIO codes Nov. 20 Nov.18 Nov. 15
Chap. 5.4 Revised the FG cables on BI2A module in Fig 5.4- K. Oohashi K. Kobayashi T. Kaneko
8 Jan. 15 Jan. 12 Dec. 26
0.13 Chap.10.2.27 Refined the contents about PLC data error K. Oohashi K. Kobayashi T. Kaneko
Feb. 15,2018 Dec. 18 Dec. 18 Dec. 15
Appendix 5 Corrected the table about COM modules K. Oohashi M. Ueda T. Kaneko
Dec. 21 Dec. 21 Dec. 21
Chap. 3.2 Corrected the setting point of REF characteristic K. Oohashi M. Kobayashi T. Kaneko
in Fig. 3.2-6; Corrected the text in Eq, (3.2-4) Mar. 15 Mar. 15 Mar. 14
Chap. 3.21 Deleted unsupported PROT_COM contents in K. Oohashi M. Kobayashi T. Kaneko
Chapter 3 Mar. 7 Mar. 7 Mar. 6
Chap. 9.2 Corrected typos in Figure 9.2-1 K. Oohashi H. Amoh T. Kaneko
Mar. 30 Mar. 30 Mar. 30
Chap. 9.2.17 Corrected the direction of inequality symbol in Eq. K. Oohashi K. Kobayashi T. Kaneko
(9.2-3) Mar. 7 Mar. 7 Feb. 7
Chap. 10.2 Deleted CB and DS supervision tasks not to be K. Oohashi M. Kobayashi T. Kaneko
0.14 implemented in the IED Mar. 7 Mar. 7 Mar. 6
Mar. 30, 2018 Chap. 10.2 Corrected the direction of inequality symbol in Eq. K. Oohashi K. Kobayashi T. Kaneko
(10.2-2) and (10.2-3) Mar. 7 Mar. 7 Feb. 7
Chap. 11 Revised the corresponding table for K. Oohashi K. Kobayashi T. Kaneko
PRP/HSR/RSTP protocol Mar. 26 Mar. 26 Mar. 23
Chap. 11.3 Corrected 61850 attributes ‘Good & Questionable’ K. Oohashi K. Oohashi T. Kaneko
regarding ‘Alarm and Warning’ in Table 11.3-5 Feb. 20 Feb. 20 Feb. 20
Chap. 12.2 Deleted unsupported PROT_COM screen in HMI K. Oohashi M. Kobayashi T. Kaneko
menu tree Mar. 7 Mar. 7 Mar. 6
Appendix 5 Revised the selection for PRP/HSR/RSTP protocol K. Oohashi K. Kobayashi T. Kaneko
in Ordering sheet Mar. 26 Mar. 26 Mar. 23
Chap. 5.2.2 Corrected incorrect CH numbers in VCT49V in K. Oohashi K. Kobayashi T. Kaneko
Figure 5.2-3 June 20 June 20 June. 20
Chap. 5.3 Deleted unrequired contents about CPU K. Oohashi K. Kobayashi T. Kaneko
configuration switch in GRT200 Apr. 16 Apr. 16 Apr. 16
Chap. 11.2 Revised the IP addresses settings and their setting K. Oohashi M. Okai T. Kaneko
examples for Hot stand-by, PRP,etc Apr. 16 Apr. 16 Apr. 16
0.15 Chap. 11.2.4 Corrected typos regarding IEEE number applied K. Oohashi M. Okai T. Kaneko
July 7, 2018 in RSTP protocol (IEEE802.1D) June 20 June 20 June. 20
Chap. 14.3 Added the contents about LED testing using arrow K. Oohashi K. Kobayashi T. Kaneko
keys on the front panel May 21 May 21 May 18
Appendix 5 Deleted unused P and R code in the tables about K. Oohashi K. Kobayashi T. Kaneko
BIO modules Apr. 16 Apr. 16 Apr. 16
Appendix 5 Added new BIO code (8N) K. Oohashi M. Ueda T. Kaneko
Apr. 16 Apr. 16 Apr. 16
Chap. 3.17 Added the test operation content in VPH K. Oohashi K. Kobayashi T. Kaneko
Aug. 6 Aug. 6 Aug. 4
Chap. 6 Remove the contents about MIMIC configuration K. Oohashi K. Kobayashi T. Kaneko
0.16 Aug. 6 Aug. 6 Aug. 4
Aug.24, 2018 Chap. 11.3 Added the contents about the setting of edition K. Oohashi M. Okai T. Kaneko
selection in IEC61850 Aug. 24 Aug. 23 Aug. 23
Chap. 14.3 Added the operation contents about test settings K. Oohashi K. Kobayashi T. Kaneko
Aug. 6 Aug. 6 Aug. 4
Date (page) by by
Chap.5.4.4(vi) Added the notice about Latch output during power K. Oohashi H. Amoh T. Kaneko
0.17 turn on/off Sep. 3 Sep. 3 Sep. 1
Sep.21,2018 Chap. 8.4 Added signals for transferring fault record K. Oohashi K.Kobayashi T. Kaneko
information in IEC61850
Sep. 19 Sep.18 Sep. 18
0.18 Chap. 3.1.1(i) Added PLC connection points used for Zero K. Oohashi G.Suzuki T. Kaneko
Ampere control function in DIF
Oct. 1,2018 Oct. 1 Sep.28 Sep. 28
Chap. 3.3 Revised the contents of reset time of IDMT and K. Oohashi K. Kobayashi T. Kaneko
reset illustration of Fig. 3.3-8 in OC function Oct. 31 Oct. 31 Oct. 30
reset illustration of Fig. 3.4-6 in EF function Oct. 31 Oct. 31 Oct. 30
reset illustration of Fig. 3.5-4 in EFIn function Oct. 31 Oct. 31 Oct. 30
reset illustration of Fig. 3.6-7 in OCN function Oct. 31 Oct. 31 Oct. 30
Chap. 3.11 Corrected the number of decimal places about K. Oohashi K. Kobayashi T. Kaneko
curve coefficient in Table 3.11-2 in OV function Nov. 9 Nov. 9 Nov. 8
curve coefficient in Table 3.12-2 in OVS function Nov. 9 Nov. 9 Nov. 8
curve coefficient in Table 3.13-2 in OVG function Nov. 9 Nov. 9 Nov. 8
0.19 curve coefficient in Table 3.14-2 in UV function Nov. 9 Nov. 9 Nov. 8
Dec. 14, 2018 Chap. 3.15 Corrected the number of decimal places about K. Oohashi K. Kobayashi T. Kaneko
curve coefficient in Table 3.15-2 in UVS function Nov. 9 Nov. 9 Nov. 8
Chap. 3.16 Removed the contents about the trip decision K. Oohashi K. Kobayashi T. Kaneko
timing in FRQ function Nov. 9 Nov. 9 Nov. 8
Chap.5.6.3 Corrected F7 setting names of Table 5.6-6 in HMI K. Oohashi K. Kobayashi T. Kaneko
contents Oct. 25 Oct. 25 Oct. 24
Chap. 13.3 Modified the inquiry address at Toshiba Energy K. Oohashi K. Kobayashi T. Kaneko
Systems & Solutions Corporation Oct. 1 Oct. 1 Oct. 1
Chap. 13.8 Corrected required wire thickens in Table 13.8-1 K. Oohashi M. Ueda T. Kaneko
Nov. 22 Nov. 22 Nov. 22
Appendix 5 Added new BIO codes(2F ,4R, 5P, 5Q). Added K. Oohashi M. Ueda T. Kaneko
missing BIO code (74) Dec. 11 Dec. 10 Dec. 10
Appendix 5 Revised the notice regrading DC rated voltage K. Oohashi K. Kobayashi T. Kaneko
when AC power source is applied Oct. 31 Oct. 31 Oct. 31
Appendix 6 Corrected the technical information about Power K. Oohashi K. Kobayashi T. Kaneko
supply data in Technical data Dec. 7 Dec. 7 Dec. 5
Safety Corrected warning message at Fiber optic K. Oohashi M. Ueda T. Kaneko
precautions (Invisible laser radiation → Class 1 laser product) Feb. 19 Feb. 18 Feb. 18
Chap. 3.1 Corrected DIF scheme logics in Fig. 3.1-16 and 17 K. Oohashi G. Suzuki T. Kaneko
Jan. 28 Jan. 26 Jan. 21
Chap. 3.10 Added PLC connection points in Fig. 3.10-3 (CBF) K. Oohashi G. Suzuki T. Kaneko
Feb.6 Feb. 6 Feb.5
Chap. 3.19 Revised the contents about TRC function; added K. Oohashi G. Suzuki T. Kaneko
alarm signal generation logics in Fig. 3.19-4 Jan. 28 Jan. 26 Jan. 21
0.20
Chap. 8.4 Revised the contents of FLTM signal mapping K. Oohashi M. Okai T. Kaneko
Feb. 28, 2019
regarding Ed.1_Op and Ed.2 in Recording fun. Feb. 20 Feb. 19 Feb. 4
Chap. 11.3 Revised the operation steps to selection of 61850 K. Oohashi M. Okai T. Kaneko
editions in Fig. 11.3-7 & -23; Added Ed2 contents Feb. 20 Feb. 19 Feb. 4
Chap. 13.7 Revised the content about optical cable handlings K. Oohashi M. Ueda T. Kaneko
and Fig. 13.7-6 Feb. 19 Feb. 18 Feb. 18
Appendix 4 Revised and added the information about 61850 K. Oohashi M. Okai T. Kaneko
Ed.2 Feb. 20 Feb. 19 Feb. 4
Date (page) by by
0.21 Chap. 4.1 Added the content about setting [QBLK] in H. Amoh K. Kobayashi T. Kaneko
June14, 2019 Common controls June 4 June 3 June 3
Chap. 1, 2, 3, Type “Model1” is neglected in the GRT200 series H. Amoh G. Suzuki T. Kaneko
and 4 Sep. 5 Sep 3 Aug. 2
Chap. 5.1 Added case types of ring terminals at outline H. Amoh G. Suzuki T. Kaneko
sections in Chapter Technical description Sep. 5 Sep 3 Aug. 2
Chap. 5.2 Deleted the information of VCT35B due for the H. Amoh G. Suzuki T. Kaneko
Model1 is neglected. Sep. 5 Sep 3 Aug. 2
Chap. 5.3 Deleted the implementation rules of COMs, added H. Amoh K. Kobayashi T. Kaneko
Appendix 6 slot address in BIO codes of Appendix Ordering Oct. 1 Sep 30 Sep. 30
Chap. 5.4 Deleted the information of BIO4 module H. Amoh K. Kobayashi T. Kaneko
Sep. 5 Sep 3 Aug. 2
Chap. 5.5 Added the information of ring terminals of PWS in H. Amoh G. Suzuki T. Kaneko
Chapter Technical description Sep. 5 Sep 3 Aug. 2
Chap. 6.2 Revised the contents how to connect a PC with the H. Amoh G. Suzuki T. Kaneko
IED in Chapter Engineering tool Sep. 5 Sep 3 Aug. 2
Chap. 13 Modified the name of Chapter 13 from ‘Installation H. Amoh G. Suzuki T. Kaneko
and replacement’ to ‘Installation and setting’ Sep. 5 Sep 3 Aug. 2
Chap. 13.5 Revised the contents of ring terminals w.r.t. PWS H. Amoh G. Suzuki T. Kaneko
thresholds etc. in Chapter Installation and setting Sep. 5 Sep 3 Aug. 2
0.22 (Chap. 13.6&7) Removed how to replace the IED modules; H. Amoh G. Suzuki T. Kaneko
Oct. 31, 2019 transferred them for maintenance manuals Sep. 5 Sep 3 Aug. 2
Appendix 2 Deleted the figure of one-thirds case in Appendix H. Amoh G. Suzuki T. Kaneko
case outline Oct. 25 Oct. 15 Oct 15
Appendix 2 Added trihedral figures for cases using ring H. Amoh G. Suzuki T. Kaneko
terminals in Appendix of Case outline Sep. 5 Sep 3 Aug. 2
Appendix 3 Added schematic diagrams for cases using ring H. Amoh G. Suzuki T. Kaneko
terminals in Appendix of external connection Sep. 5 Sep 3 Aug. 2
Appendix 4 Revised the contents of PIXIT based on 6F2S1875 H. Amoh M. Okai T. Kaneko
rev 0.11 Oct. 25 Jul. 12 Jul. 11
Appendix 5 Deleted ordering codes including BIO4A,whilst H. Amoh M. Ueda T. Kaneko
added new codes:18,2G,3T,3S,5G,5S,6G,7L,7M Oct. 25 Sep. 5 Sep. 5
Appendix 5 Added ordering codes for ring terminals H. Amoh G. Suzuki T. Kaneko
Sep. 5 Sep 3 Aug. 2
Appendix 6 Added cable information for ring terminals in H. Amoh G. Suzuki T. Kaneko
Appendix Technical data Sep. 5 Sep 3 Aug. 2
(Appendix 7) Removed rack mount information; transferred H. Amoh G. Suzuki T. Kaneko
them for maintenance manuals Sep. 5 Sep 3 Aug. 2
Appendix 8 Added dielectric voltage test when the IED case H. Amoh G. Suzuki T. Kaneko
has ring terminals Sep. 5 Sep 3 Aug. 2
Chap. 2.1 Corrected incorrected setting names (Replica) in H. Amoh Y. Sonobe T. Kaneko
section 2.1.7 Feb. 19 Feb. 19 Feb. 16
Chap. 3.12 Corrected incorrected phase names (UVS) in Fig Y. Sonobe K.Kobayashi T. Kaneko
3.12-5 Dec. 9 Dec. 9 Dec. 9
Chap. 3.14 Corrected incorrected phase names (OVS) in Fig Y. Sonobe K.Kobayashi T. Kaneko
3.14-5 Dec. 9 Dec. 9 Dec. 9
Chap. 4.3 Corrected the information at signal monitoring H. Amoh T. Utsumi T. Kaneko
0.23
point of LRSW01_LR_ST_RMT in Table 4.3-5 Jan. 31 Nov. 25 Nov. 25
Mar. 2, 2020
Chap. 5.1 Added case layouts for Dual VCTs in Fig. 5.1-3 and H. Amoh T. Sugamoto T. Kaneko
Fig. Fig. 5.1-7 Feb. 19 Feb. 19 Jan. 30
Chap. 7.4 Added delay timer settings [UTM] in PLC function H. Amoh K.Kobayashi T. Kaneko
Feb. 18 Feb. 17 Jan. 30
Chap. 10.1 Added new information about [ErrorLED_cond] to H. Amoh K. Oohashi T. Kaneko
turn off In-service for the occurrence of minor error Feb. 14 Feb. 13 Sep. 27
Chap. 10.2 Revised the contents about Commslv error H. Amoh M. Okai T. Kaneko
Date (page) by by
information in Automatic supervision function Dec. 13 Dec. 11 Dec. 11
Chap. 12.2 Revised the setting menu hierarchy to include PLC H. Amoh K.Kobayashi T. Kaneko
timer settings in Figure 12.2-2 Feb. 18 Feb. 17 Jan. 30
Appendix 5 Revised ordering sheets H. Amoh Y. Takubo T. Kaneko
Feb. 26 Feb. 25 Feb. 25
Appendix 7 Added the table of operation accuracies for the H. Amoh K.Kobayashi T. Kaneko
protection function Feb. 12 Feb. 12 Feb. 11
Chap. 7.3 Revised information about U16_00 and U16_01 H. Amoh K. Oohashi T. Kaneko
0.24 information Mar. 27 Mar. 19 Mar. 17
Mar.27, 2020 Chap. 11.3 Revised information about quality signals in H. Amoh K. Oohashi T. Kaneko
IEC61850. Mar. 27 Mar. 19 Mar. 17
0.25 Appendix 5 Added new BIO code (3U). H. Amoh M. Ueda T. Kaneko
June 15,2020 May. 7 May. 7 Apr. 14
Chap. 11.3 Revised the information about Quality_Validity in H. Amoh K. Kobayashi T. Kaneko
Figure 11.3-29 July. 8 June. 25 June. 25
0.26 Appendix 5 Added new BIO codes (5U, 6H, 6J). H. Amoh M. Ueda T. Kaneko
Jul 17,2020 July. 8 June. 18 June. 18
Appendix 6 Corrected and revised about the 100Base-FX and H. Amoh X. Tang T. Kaneko
other comm. data in Appendix Technical data June 18 June 18 June 16
Archive: G2 manuals' word files (all) 20200714rev0

GRT200 Manual 6F2S1924-G2A-0.26

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

GRT200 Manual 6F2S1924-G2A-0.26

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

6F2S1924 (Rev. 0.

Transformer Protection IED

GR200 series (GRT200)

Notice: GRT200 manual is issued for ‘03D’, ‘03E’,

DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which will result in

Equipment installation and operation

Protective conductor terminal

Caution, risk of electric shock

Liability, copyright and others

3.7.6 Signal (Data ID) ................................................................................................................ 166

3.13.4 Miscellaneous functions .................................................................................................... 223

3.19.2 Recording identifiers ......................................................................................................... 284

Counter function for the general (GCNT)................................................................................ 343

5.6.5 Operation keys ................................................................................................................... 449

8.3.2 Relays within disturbance recorder .................................................................................. 507

10 Automatic supervision ................................................................................................................. 588

Trip circuit supervision task .................................................................................................... 641

Outline ...................................................................................................................................... 752

GRT200 (Soft 03D, 03E, and 03F)

Model 1 2×CTs in three-phase (2CT) The Model1 is

3×CTs in three-phase (3CT)

Model 2 1×VT in single-phase(1×1VT) The Model2 is

3×CTs in three-phase (3CT)

GRT200-3X- 1×VT in three-phase (1×3VT)

5×CTs in three-phase (5CT)

3×CTs in zero-sequence phase

GRT200 (Soft 03D, 03E, and 03F)

Table 1.1-1 Relay Functions in GRT200 series

Model1† Model2† Model3 Model4 Model5

Current differential protection

DIF-2f/5f: Harmonic frequency

REF-1 Restricted earth fault

GRT200 (Soft 03D, 03E, and 03F)

GRT200 series IED

Model1† Model2† Model3 Model4 Model5

GRT200 (Soft 03D, 03E, and 03F)

GRT200 series IED

Model1† Model2† Model3 Model4 Model5

Operate time (t)

DIF-S1 with 2f-block

0 Differential current (Id)

Figure 1.1-1 Time characteristics in DIF-S1, S2, and REF elements

GRT200 (Soft 03D, 03E, and 03F)

Monitoring and metering functions

Fault record function:

Event record function:

Disturbance record function:

GRT200 (Soft 03D, 03E, and 03F)

Module circuits and others:

GRT200 (Soft 03D, 03E, and 03F)

Symbols used in logical diagrams

(i) Relay element, signal-monitoring point, PLC connection point, and

2. Marked with : Signal-monitoring point designated by Element ID number

Note that the symbol can be connected with what follows:

An alternative point (discussed in Chapter PLC function) is provided in place of the

GRT200 (Soft 03D, 03E, and 03F)

(ii) Timer symbol

XXX - YYY Output

GRT200 (Soft 03D, 03E, and 03F)

(iii) Logic symbol

GRT200 (Soft 03D, 03E, and 03F)

(iv) Flip-flop symbol

(v) Scheme switch